ARTEC #31215 v1 84 - 078481

Manual de funcionamiento
Instalaciones de trituracin semi-mviles

Banda IV M
BECHTEL - DAVY Joint Venture Proyecto COLLAHUASI
Ao de fabricacin 1997 84/078 481 aaaaaaaa
Krupp Frdertechnik GmbH (Krupp tcnica de elevacin y transporte S.L.) P.O. Box 10 22 51 D - 45022 Essen Altendorfer Str. 120 D - 45143 Essen Telfono: (02 01) 828-04 Telex:857 817 Fax: (02 01) 25 66
Hoja en blanco
COLLAHUASI
16.02.98
ndice
0 1
1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4
Gua del usuario ........................ Banda I Descripcin de la instalacin de trituracin semimvil

Condiciones de operacin y visin general Construccin y forma de funcionamiento Datos tcnicos Indicaciones de seguridad
2
2.1 2.2
Operacin de la instalacin de trituracin semimvil .................................. Banda I

Notas generales sobre la operacin Equipo elctrico para la operacin
3
3.1 3.2 3.3
Mantenimiento .......................... Banda I

Mantenimiento e inspeccin Reparacin Cambio de lugar de la instalacin
4
4.1 4.1.1 4.1.2 4.1.3
16.02.98
Documentos de entrega ............ Banda II

Martillo hidrulico Instalacin Operacin Localizando fallas Mantenimiento Hidrulica Equipo elctrico Manual del martillo perforador
4.1.4 4.1.5 4.1.6 4.1.7
COLLAHUASI
4.2
4.2.1 4.2.2 4.2.3 4.2.4 4.2.5 4.2.6 4.2.7 4.2.8 4.2.9 4.2.10
Gra hidrulica de mantenimiento ......... Banda II

Caractersticas tcnicas Normas de seguridad Descripcin Servicio Mantenimiento Equipo elctrico Sistema hidrulico Montaje y desmontaje Listas de repuestos Documentacin -piezas suministradas por terceros
4.3
4.3.1 4.3.1.1 4.3.1.2 4.3.1.3 4.3.2 4.3.2.1 4.3.2.2 4.3.3 4.3.4 4.3.5 4.3.6
Transportadores de descarga................ Banda III

Arrastres de transportador Esquema 521588A y 521589A Montaje - caja de timbre Motores elctricos Cajas de cambio y componentes Arrastre de lanzadera Motor elctrico Caja de cambio y componentes Bloques de rueda para lanzadera Poleas y guirnaldas Cilindros Correa de caucho
4.4
4.4.1 4.4.1.1 4.4.1.2 4.4.1.3 4.4.1.4 4.4.1.5
Equipo complementario y auxiliar ......... Banda III

Tracciones mediante cadenas de mano Datos tcnicos Instrucciones de instalacin Manual de funcionamiento Lista de piezas de repuesto para elevador con engranaje de dientes rectos 2000 kg.
16.02.98
Lista de piezas de repuesto para elevador con engranaje de dientes rectos 5000 kg
4.5
4.5.1
Sistema Aglomerador para Control de Polvos

Introduccin al sistema aglomerador para supresin de polvos
COLLAHUASI
4.5.2 4.5.3 4.5.4 4.5.5
Instrucciones para instalacin Procedimientos de operacin lista de partes Instrucciones de los fabricantes
4.6
4.6.1 4.6.2 4.6.3 4.6.4 4.6.5 4.6.6 4.6.7 4.6.8 4.6.9 4.6.10 4.6.11 4.6.12 4.6.13
Aire acondicionado............................... Banda IV

Unidad de manipulacin del aire THERMO AIR Ventilador eliminador de arena SCHRTER Acondicionador de aire KUTHE Acondicionador de aire ROCA Vlvula multihoja TROX Vlvula cortafuego TROX Rejilla resistente a la intemperie con vlvula de seguridad TROX Rejas TROX Manmetro de contacto AIRFLOW Interruptor de presin diferencial para aire DUNGS Calefactor DEVITEMP / sala de control Lista de cables y esquema de conexiones elctricas para la caja de mecanismos del interruptor del acondicionador de aire Kuthe lista de piezas para el esquema no. 2504 925
4.7 4.8
Ascensor............................................... Banda IV Plataforma de trabajo de gra .............. Banda IV
16.02.98
COLLAHUASI
Hoja en blanco
COLLAHUASI
16.02.98
4.5

4.5.1 4.5.2 4.5.3 4.5.4 4.5.5 Introduccin al sistema aglomerador para supresin de polvos Instrucciones para instalacin Procedimientos de operacin lista de partes Instrucciones de los fabricantes
23.01.98
COLLAHUASI
Hoja en blanco
COLLAHUASI
23.01.98
Sistema Aglomerador para Control de POIVOS
MANUA1
dE
@ERACiON
y MANTENCiON
Krupp Fordertechnils/ Compania Minera Dona De Collahuasi Job No.: TRC 294C
Elaborado per:
The Raring Corporation

12117 NE gdh street, suite 1900 Vancouver WA 98682 Tel: (360) 8921659, Fax: (360) 8927624
Seccion
INFORMAC1ON INTRODUCTION
1:
........................................................................................................................... 1 AGLOMERADOR PARA SUPRES1ON DE POLVOS ....................... 3
GENERAL
AL SISTEMA
LISTA DE COMPONENTS:
.......................................................................................................................... 7
Toberas FP: .............................................................................................................................................. 9 Toberas hlH: ............................................................................................................................................. 9 GABINETE DECONTROL MULTIF~CIONAL: ................................................................................................... 1I Conzponentes yDescripci6n de Fzlncionamiento : .................................................................................. 11 CONJUNTO MODULARCAJAREGULADOR DEPRES1ON............ . ....... ............... ......... . . . . ...... ........ . . . .. 13 Cc~mponentes yDescripci6n de Fz[ncionatniento: .................................................................................. 13 CONJUNTO MODULARCAJACOMBINACION: COMBO .................................................................................. 15 Componentes& Descripcibn de Flincionamiento: ................................................................................. 15 CONJUNTOCAJA COMBINATIONHIDR.4ULICA................................................................................................ 17 Componen[es& Descripcibn de Fztncionamiento : ................................................................................. 17 CONJUNrO MODULARCAJ.ADE DISTRIBUCION ............ . . .......... . . ...... . . . ...... ..... . . .................. . ........... 19 Ct~mponentes yDescripci6n de Fl!ncionanlienlo: .................................................................................. 19 GABINErE DE FILTROSDE AIRE& AGUA........................................................................................................ 21 Conzponentes >lDescripcibn de Fl[ncionamiento: ..................................................................................2l CONJUNTOMODULAR PARAFILTRATIONPRIMARIADELAIw/AGuA .............................................................22 Componentes yDescripci6n de Ftincionamiento : ..................................................................................22 MODULODE SOPORTEDE LATOBERA............................................................................................................. 25 Soporte Articuladodela Tobera:... ....................................................................................................... 25 Montajede Toberwen Tol\asd eDescargad eCamiones . .................................................................... 26 Mon[aje Soldado De Tobera .............. .................................................................................................... 27 GABINETE DLCONTROLESELECTRICOS( SIN PROTECTIONCONTR.4CONGELAMIENTO)............................... 29 . Componentes yDescripcibn de FuncioncImiento: . 29 GABINETE DE CONTROLESELECTRICOS( CON PROTECTIONANTI. CONGELAkIIENTO).................................. 31 . Componenfes yDescripcibn de Funcionatnien[o: . 31
Seccion
lNSTRUCCIONES 1. 2. 3. 4, 5. 6. 7. 8.
11:
PARA lNSTALACION: ....o ............................................................................................ 33
MONTAJEDE LAS TOBERAS...................................................................................................................... 34 GABINETES MODULARESPARAREGULADORESDE PRESIONYCOhiBINACIONES. ..................................... 35 CABLE DE CONEXIONDE LASTOBERAS. ................................................................................................... 37 GABINETESMULTIFUKIONW: ................................................................................................................ 38 TuBERi,4swiwLos GABINETESMULTI.FUNCIOYYLOSGABWETES PRV . .......................................... 39 GAB[NETESDECONTROLS ELECTNCOS. ................................................................................................ 40 CONJWTO MODULAR FILTROPRIMAWO AIRE/AGUA: .............................................................................4l GABINETEDE FILTROSAIRE/AGUA:..........................................................................................................42
Seccion
PROCEDIMIENTOS
Ill:
DE OPERAC1ON ....................................................................................................... 43
... .. .. .. .. .. .. . ... .. ... .. .... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ... . .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. ... .. . .. . ... ...43 .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ... . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ...43 ARMNQUE MULT1:
PROCEDIMIENTOSPRELIMINARESAL
PLIESTA F: NIARCH..\ N
DE LOS GABiNE"rES
Arranqu edelGabinet eMULT1-1& Muiti-2: ................ .. .................... . ........... . . 43 Arranqued elGabine teMULT1- .5& MULTI-6 .................... . ,, .................45 PROCEDIMIENTO DE PUESTA EN MARCHA: (TIPKO PARATODOSLOSPUNTOSDE APLICAC16N),, . .... .. .. .. .. . . .. .. . 48 PROCEDIkIIENTODIARIODE CALIBRATION/INSPECCION.,.,...,.,...,,.,.,.,...,.,.,...,.,.............,,,.,.,..,.................,....48 MANTENCION 1, 7. / PARAMETROS DE OPERACION ................................................................................. 49
INTRODUcclON: ............................................................ .........................................................................49 TOBERAS..................................................................................................................................................49 llescwmcdo delc~ Tobera .................................................................................................... ....................5 I Limpiezadela Tobera . ......................................................................................................... ................sI Re-armadocklu Tobera. ....................................................... .............................................................5l
4. SOPORTES DE LAS TOBERAS .. .. .. .. ... .. . ... . .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. ... .... ... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ...53 Desmontaje delsoporte delu!oberaparaacceso ala Tobera. ............................................................53 Desmontc~e delsoporte dela Tobera- parainspeccibn internay senicio . ...........................................55 5. REARkI,ADODEL SOPORTEDE LATOBEu.., ................................................................................................ 55 6, TUBERiAS DE CONEXIONDE LAS TOBERAS .. .. .. .. ... .. .. ... . .. .. .. .... ... .. .. ... . ... . .. .. .. .... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . . .. ... .. ..... .. .. . .. .. .. ....57 Co)le.yiones . .............................................................................................................................................57 7, REGULADORES DE PRESION . .. .. . ... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .... .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .... ... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . . .. .. .. .... ... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ....59 Comohfantener los Regl[ladores . ...........................................................................................................59 Cuando Reemplazar los Reguladores. ..,,,., .............................................................................................59 P4rc!idas (Fligas) . ....................................................................................................................................59 8. VALVULAS SOLENOIDES . .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. ... .. ... ... .. .. .. .. .. ... . ... .. .. .. .. ... . .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. ... . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..... .. .. . . .. ......63
9. 10. FILTROS DE AIREYAGUA, INSTRUIMENTOS . .. .. .. .. ... . ... .. . .. .. ... .. .. .. .... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. . ... .. .... ... .. .. . ... ... . .. ....6j . . .. .. ... .. . .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .... ... ... . .. .. .. .. ....65 INDICADOREs TANQUES DE
AIRE.........................................................................................................65 12. PROCEDIMIENTOSDIARIOSDE INSPECTION ... ... .. .... . . .. . . .. .... .. ... .. .. . ... . ... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. . .. .. ... .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. . .....65
11. COhIPRESORESY
lNVESTIGACION
DE FALLAS
.................................................................................................................... 67
Seccion
LISTA LISTAS
IV:
DE PARTES ......................................................................................................................c..................7l DE PARTES DE REPUESTO .................................................................................................<m< 75 ...... Y ESPEC[FICAC1ONES ....................................................................................................... 77
DIAGRAMAS
Seccion
INSTRUCCIONES
V:
DE LOS FABRICANTES ..............................................................................................79
MANUA1 DE @ERACi6N
Cliente: Minera Escondida Ltd.
!VIANTENCiON TRC No.: 296
lNfORMACiON
GENERA1
Este manual proporciona instrucciones para la instalacion, operation y mantencion del sistema ADS de control de polvos. Un sistema integrado de controles y equipo, disetiados para producir un manto de neblina de agua en un area generadora de polvos. Las diminutas gotas de agua en la neblina se aglomeran con las particular de polvo, haciendolas mas pesadas, y por ende forzandolas a caer de regreso a la fuente de origen. Su Sistema de Control de Polvos ADS es suministrado con gabinetes de control electrico, gabinete(s) con filtros de agua, valvulas solenoids, caja(s) de regulation, y toberas serie FP, con la cabeza equipada con protecciones blindadas y articuladas. Este sistema ADS es suministrado como se indica en el esquema de Tuberias e Instrumentation (P&l D), en la seccion dibujos, de este manual.
NOTA: Recomendamos revisar y estudiar completamente este manual, asi como todos Ios dibujos e ilustraciones del sistema, antes de la instalacion y operation de estos equipos, de modo tal que IOS operadores esten completamente familiarizados con el sistema y sus parametros de operation. Para mayor information sobre la operation, servicio, sirvase Hamar a : mantencion y partes de repuestos, o para Ilamadas de

Vancouver, Telefono Washington (360)892-1659
Fax (360) 892-1 624
Su Sistema ADS ha sido fabricado de Control de Polvos.
con la mas
reciente
y moderns
tecnologia
en el campo
4.5.1
Introduccin al sistema aglomerador para supresin de polvos
23.01.98
COLLAHUASI
Hoja en blanco
COLLAHUASI
23.01.98
$istema Aglomerador para Control de POIVOS
MANUA1 DE opErtAcioN
Y MANTENCiON
TRC No.: 296
lm?oduccioN
Principio
Al SisTEMA Aq[oMERAdoR PARA SupREsioN DE Polvos
de Operation
Los sistemas de supresion basados en la aglomeracion dos factores muy importances: A. Espacios cerrados que aislan la fuente generadora ambientales, B. La production de polvos, fundamentan su performance en
de POIVOS,de Ios factores y condiciones
de gotas de agua de tamario similar al tamafio de Ias particular
de polvo.
En su esencia, un sistema ADS de supresion por aglomeracion de polvos, es un Iimpiador humedo de polvos, de alta eficiencia. A diferencia, sin embargo de Ios Iimpiadores humedos de polvos, el sistema ADS utiliza muy poca agua, y practicamente ninguna presion diferencial para Iograr la coleccion de Ios polvos; haciendo uso para del efecto el factor tiempo y la densidad de la neblina de agua creada. DUST PARTICLE FOLLOWS LINE STREAM 1
(La pmticula de Polvo siwe la corrienie de Aire)
A ire)
LARGE DROPLET (GotaGrande)
/ DUST PARTICLE
(Purticulu de Poho)
SfvWL ROPLET D
(Gota Pequ?na)
DUST PARTICLE
OUST PARTICLE
(Particula de POIVO)
(Corrien!e de A ire)
MICROS I
Para Iograr la aglomeracion de Ias pequefiisimas particular de polvo, es necesario proporcionar gotas de agua de tamatio semejante, Si dichas gotas de agua son m~s grandes que 10 necesario, Ias particular de polvo simplemente viajaran alrededor de ellas, siguiendo el flujo de la corriente de aire desplazada, como se ilustra en la figura de mas arriba.
Toberas
Debido a la alta especializacidn de esta tarea, las toberas de rociado no son fabricadas por la mayor parte de Ios fabricates de toberas. Ellas deben generar gotas de tamarlo que varian entre 10 y 30 micrones, deben ser contrcdables, no deben requerir excesivo mantenimiento; y no deben war i;l:, Lwccidrl F.$gina 3 294csMAN
MANUA1 DE OpERAcioN Y MANTENCiON

Cliente: Minera Escondida demasiada Ltd. Dependiendo del Iugar o punto de aplicacion, para complemental TRC No.: 296 se requieren toberas con distintos
energia
u alojamientos,
deben ser diseriadas
Ias toberas seleccionadas.
La serie FP de toberas, opera con un flujo de 0,1 a 15 GPH por tobera y con un consumo de aire entre 2.2 a 15 SCFM.
Cercos
y Cubie?tas
Los cercos y cubiertas necesarios para contener la neblina y el polvo, no forman parte del equipo suministrado por el sistema ADS, pero son sefialados en Ios pianos del cliente, aquellos ya revisados y aprobados por TRC, Es necesario proporcionar mantencion a todas Ias cubiertas y protecciones, para asi asegurar que esten en su lugar y debidamente apretadas; y tambien instalar Ias toberas en [OSdistintos puntos de aplicacion, de modo tal que Ias condiciones externas ambientales no afecten et interior de Ios elementos de contention. ~ RECORDAR QUE EL SISTEMA NO OPERARA S1 LAS GOTAS DE A GUA EN LA NEBLINA GENERADA NO SON LO SUFICIENTEMENTE PEQUEtiAS O S1 EL VIENTO AMBIENTAL PERTUR5A EL PROCESO DE AGLOMERAC/6N.
Todos Ios otros components del sistema ADS estdn disetiados y suministrados para optimizar la operation de Ias toberas, a fin de obtener el grado de aglomeracion necesario, y asi Iograr que el sistema funcione de acuerdo a sus especificaciones.
Seco o F/tifnecfo
Un Sistema ADS de supresion de polvos debidamente diseriado e instalado, es capaz de operar en modo seco, situation en la cual el producto siendo manipulado, no es Iwmedecido en forma significance. Para Iograr esto, sin embargo, Ios espacios contenidos deberan ser mas grandes y mas sellados que 10 normalmente requerido, y el control de la presion del aire y del agua, deberan tambien ser mas precisos. En este modo de operation, no existe practicamente efecto de traslape desde un punto de tratamiento al proximo, Un modo de operation Humeda puede tambien ser Ilevado a cabo, con un minimo de humedad agregada al producto, a fin de asegurar un nivel adecuado del nivel de traslape, Esto puede ser titil en aquellos cases en que existan algunos puntos de transferencia remotos, al final del proceso de operaciones o manejo del material, en Ios cuales un nivel de humedad puede ser tolerado sin mayores problemas. Para Ilevar a cabo este modo humedo, generalmente se increments el ntimero de toberas, aumentando tambien el flujo de agua, pero sin sacrificer et tamario de Ias gotas. En condiciones de muy baja temperature ambiental, Ios sistemas de modo humedodeben ser controlados a fin de evitar acumulacion de hielo en Ios cercos o espacios contenidos
Control
El control del flujo de agua y aire es Ilevado a cabo generalmente, por medio de reguladores de presion. Debido a que cada punto de aplicacion presenta caracteristicas unicas de operation, se requieren controles independientes en cada punto, o grupos relacionados, con iguales caracteristicas de operation. Si dos puntos ubicados en diferente elevation, o con diferentes configuraciones; son controlados por un mismo set de regulacidn; results altamente probable que un punto operara humedo, generando barro o problemas de congelamiento; y et otro punto operara muy seco, reduciendo de este modo la eficiencia de coleccion. Puesto que Ias toberas rociadoras no son generalmente visibles durante la operation, indicadores de presitm son utilizados a fin de indicar el estado de su operacitm. Es necesario monitorear Ias Introciuccion Pdgina 4 294csMAN
MANUA1 DE OpERAcioN Y MANTENcioN

Cliente: Minera Escondida Ltd. TRC No.: 296 de hielo, y/o baja eficiencia
relaciones de presiones sire/agua, con el fin de evitar barros, formation de coleccion.
No se deberia operar el sistema Aglomerativo si el equipo de proceso o manejo de materials no esta en operation. Si asi se hiciera, solo se Iograra humedecer Ias correas transportadoras y Ios respectivos sistemas de contention. Para evitar este problems, la operation del sistema de rociado esta generalmente enclavada con el equipo de operaciones y/o carga, mediante valvulas solenoide. Grupos de aplicacion que siempre operan simultaneamente, pueden ser controlados por un solo grupo de valvulas.
Tiefnpo
Ho
Durante tiempo frio, puede ser necesario proteger Ias instalaciones exteriors contra congelamiento. Las tuberias de agua y 10modulos de rociado son protegidos mediante resistencias electrical monofilares, m~s aislacion protectors. Los filtros y Ias valvulas estan contenidos en gabinetes calefaccionados y aislados. El control de Ios elementos calefactores es controlado aptomaticamente mediante un switch de temperature (termostato). Si Ios sistemas no van a ser usados en operation continua, un drenado automatic de Ias tuberias es Ilevado a cabo por un sistema secuencial de tiempo, que desvia el flujo normal del aire, cuando el equipo es detenido. En la position invierno, la valvula solenoide del agua se cierra y Ios solenoids de purga se abren, una vez que el equipo se detiene, por la duration de tiempo seleccionado en el relay de tiempo. En la position verano, es necesario apagar el relay de tiempo, caso contrario el sistema continuara en operation cada vez que se desenergiza, manual o automaticamente, por el intervalo de tiempo seleccionado en el relay de tiempo.
-. la,:oduccion Wgina 5 294csMAN
,..,.
MANUA1 DE OpERAci6N Y MANTENcioN

Cliente: Minera Escondida Ltd. TRC No.: 296
LisTA dE COmpOnentS:
.
q
Conjunto Modular Toberas Gabinete de Control Multifunctional Conjunto Modular Caja Regulador de Presitm Conjunto Modular Caja Combination Conjunto Modular Caja Combination Conjunto Modular Caja de Distribution Gabinete Secundario de Filtros de Aire & Agua Hidraulica
Conjunto Modular Primario de Filtros de Aire & Agua Conjunto Modular de Tobera Gabinete de Controles Electricos
MANUA1 DE OpERACi6N Y MANTENCiON

Conjunto
Toberas
@# *O() Pp? +8
(Pd~
~a Q Q
NOZADPT2
Lkta Ds Components
t%gina 8
294csMAN
$istema Aglomerador para Control de POIVOS MANUA1

DE
OpERACiON Y MANTENCiON
TRC No,: 296 I
Conjunto
Toberas
Las toberas atomizadoras son ofrecidas en una variedad de estilos y capacidades de flujo como para acomodar Ios requerimientos necesarios, y asi cubrir un amplio margen de aplicaciones en el campo de la supresion de POIVOS. La serie FP, sin embargo, es la usada mas a menudo, debido a su capacidad superior de atomization.
Toberas
FP:
Todas Ias toberas de la serie FP Iistadas a continuation son intercambiables en el equipo standard de montaje. Comparten el mismo adaptador, la misma cabeza, vastago y empaquetaduras anulares. FP-2S3V Diser7adas para ser usadas en aquellos cases en que el volumen de contention es relativamente pequerio; y/o la velocidad de la corriente de aire ambiental es baja. Aplicaciones tipicas incluyen puntos de transferencia entre correas transportadoras, harneros y alimentadores vibratorios. La capacidad de agua puede ser ajustada entre 0.5 y 4.0 GPH, El consumo nominal de aire es de 3 SCFM a 75 PSIG. Disetiadas para ser usadas en espacios de contention amplios o cuando la velocidad del aire a traves de! volumen contenido es moderada.. Aplicaciones tipicas incluyen puntos de transferencia sobre harneros horizontales, en harneros tolva de gran tamario; akededor de molinos, y en tolvas de descarga de camiones y carros de ferrocarril bien protegidas. La capacidad de agua se puede ajustar entre 1 a 10 GPH. El consumo nominal de aire es de 7 SCFM a 75 PSIG. Son usadas en aplicaciones de alta velocidad, o cuando se desea un nivel mas alto de humedad en et producto. Aplicaciones tipicas incluyen molinos de impacto y macrotolvas de descarga de camiones, con poca protection. La capacidad de agua se puede ajustar entre 2 y 10 GPH. El consumo nominal de aire es de 10 SCFM a 75 PSIG.
FP-4
FP-5
Toberas
MH:
Estas son toberas hidraulicamente seleccionadas de acuerdo a su aplicacion. Son utilizadas en aplicaciones humectantes tales como e! rodillo cabezal de una correa transportadora eyectora, cuando se desea un morro de material con escasas perdidas de polvo, a causa del viento ambiental. No son intercambiables con Ias toberas serie FP, y requieren ademas equipo de control especial. Todas Ias toberas hidr~ulicas estan disetiadas para producir un molde piano de dispersion. La tobera consiste de cuerpo, boquilla y seguro de retenci6n de la misma. Todos Ios components standard estan fabricados de bronce. Se puede suministrar acero inoxidable a pedido. MH60 MH120 MH300 MH600 Flujo reducido de 1.0 GPM a 45 PSIG, angulo de rociado 95 grades Flujo mediano de 2.0 GPM a 45 P.SIG; angulo de rociado, 95 grades Flujo alto de 5,0 GPM a 60 PSIG; angulo de rociado, 95 grades. Flujo alto, hasta 8.0 GPM a 110 PSIG; angulo de dispersion, 65 grades.
Sistema Aglomerador para Control de Polvos MANUA1

Cliente: Minera Escondida
Lkj.
DE
OpERAcioN Y MANTENcioN
TRC No.: 296
Gabinete
De Control
Multifunctional
CONEX1ON EL EcTRIu
NZ3.
ml I
%0 u+
EN TR4DA DE A IRE
y ~
[
A /RE/AGUA
w.....
d,
Rx-[ ENTRAOA DEAGUA ~
M-TRUCKB
. Li.sfa De Components
P@ha
10
294csMAN
$istema Aglomerador para Control de Polvos MANUA1

DE
OpERAcioN
Y MANTENcioN
TRC No.: 296
Gabinete
de Control
Multifunctional:
El Gabinete de reguladoras de Nema 3R o !2. calefaccionado
Control Multifunctional consiste en una combination de filtros, valvulas solenoids, y valvulas presion. Todos Ios components se encuentran incorporados en un gabinete con protection Cuando ademas se incorpora la protection contra congelamiento, el gabinete es aislado y mediante un resistencia calefactora ekctrica de 200W, auto-regulada.
El tamafio standard del Gabinete Multifunctional es de 42x36x12, Nema 3R 012. Se ofrecen tambien como opciones otras alternatives Nema. Este Conjunto Modular controls hasta 16 toberas, y entre 304 Reguladores de Presion PRV.
Components
Sigue a continuation 1.
y Description
una description
de Funcionamiento:
de la funcion del equipo y su modo normal de operation:
Filtro de Aire (con drenaje automatic): Ubicado en la Iinea de aire de entrada. El elemento filtrante dimensionado (40-50 micrones) para remover Iiquidos y particular solidas contenidas aire comprimido de suministro.
en el
2.
Filtro de Agua: Filtro dual, en paralelo o en serie, ubicado en la tuberia de agua de entrada. Cartucho filtrante dimensionado (5-50 micrones) para filtrar particular y suciedades contenidas en el agua de suministro. El filtro dual paralelo permite una operation individual o paralela, de Ias unidades. Con el filtro duplex, una unidad filtrante puede ser desconectada y sometida a mantencion, mientras la otra unidad filtrante permanece en servicio, El filtro en serie contiene un cartucho de 50 micrones, en la primers unidad, y uno de 10 micrones, en la segunda unidad filtrante. Valvulas solenoids de bloqueo para Aire/Agua: (SV 1-1, SV 1-2) Normalmente cerrada. Inicia la operation del sistema. Se energiza cuando existe la presion de aire adecuada en la tuberia de suministro, y la seiial remota de comando, en Ias instalaciones del cliente establece contacto. Valvula Solenoide de Purga: (SV 1-3) (Con Option Anti-congelante). Normalmente abietta. Se cierra cuando Ias valvulas solenoids de aire y agua se abren. Abierta cuando la seflal remota de control no permite contacto. El aire fluye por la tuberia de agua a traves del solenoide de purga, para expulsar el agua durante un periodo controlado de tiempo. Ala expiration de dicho periodo, la valvula solenoide de bloqueo de aire (SV l-l) desconecta el suministro de aire e interrumpe la operation de purga. Switch de Presion de Aire: (PS 1-1) Usado como contacto permisivo Iogico en el sistema de control y tambien para indicar baja presion de aire de suministro. Valvulas Reguladoras de Presion de Aire: (PRV 1-1, 1-2, 1-3, 14, 1-5) Estas valvulas deben ser ajustadas manualmente para mantener una presion de 65 a 70 PSIG en Ias toberas. Valvulas Reguladoras de Presion de Agua: (PRV 1-6, 1-7, 1-8, 1-9, 1-10). Estas v~lvulas deben ser ajustadas manualmente para mantener una presion de 3 a 15 PSIG en Ias toberas. Indicadores de Presi6n de Aire y Agua: Auto definido. y Ias valvulas
3.
4.
5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
Valvula de Aislacion: Son utilizadas para aislar Ios filtros, Ias valvulas solenoids, reguladoras, para efectos de mantencidn. Para proteccitm anti-congelamiento. Nema 4. Proporciona internos. conexiones electrical
10, Malefactor:
11. Caja de Distribuci6n Electrica: de potencia y Ios components
entre la fuente externa
.... f k!:: he Compor?entes
F%gina 11
294csMAN
Sistema Aglomerador para Control de POIVOS MANUA1

Cliente: Minera Escondida Ltd,
DE
OpERAcioN
Y MANTmwcioN
TRC No.: 296
Conjunto
Modular
Caja Regulador
de Precion
r-l P
-@
AIRMANIFOLD 2NDSET
cA8E24L DE AIRE .% GRuPO
---(3
AIR MANIFOLD 1ST SET
C.44EmL DE AIRE 7ER GRuPO
-@
-a
WATER MANIFOLE 2NDSET
C.48E24L DE A IRE 20 GRUPO
WATER MANIFOLD lSTSET

C.48E24L OEAGIIA 7ER GRuOO
ENT17ADA DE A!RE fL?-EXT DE .4GLfA 318. EXT
@ V
,
o
l/2ODAIR 3/80D WATER INLET R8E
PcP
k @@@
,
-c-a +-a
AIR E (AIRE) +-a
b
L
V-ISOF
9 4
@.*
%*
/--
EL=
WATE (AGUA)
PRV-PIDF
Lids De Conponentes
P4gina 12
294cshl.4V

I Cliente:
DE
TRC No.: 296
Minera Escondida
Ltd.
Conjunto
Modular
Caja Regulador
de Presion
El conjunto Modular Caja Regulador de Presion PRV8F utilizado en el sistema ADS de la Raring Corporation, consiste de un gabinete conteniendo valvulas reguladoras de presiones de agua y sire. Dichas valvulas reguladoras controlan Ias presiones de agua y aire aplicadas a Ias toberas nebulizadoras serie FP. Para protegerla contra congelamiento, resistencia calefactora de 30 watts. el gabinete ha sido termicamente aislado y provisto ademas de una
Los modulos standards de PRV estan alojados en un gabinete de 20x16x6 NEMA 3R, a fin de proteger sus components. Este conjunto modular controls hasta (8) circuitos de toberas.
Components
1. Gabinete: 2.
y Description
20x16x6 Nema 3R.
de Funcionamiento:
Filtro de Aire/Valvula Reguladora: (PRV) Item #2. Combina Ias funciones de un filtro y una ~alvula reguladora de presion, en una unidad compacta con option adicional de drenaje automatic. La valvula debera ser ajustada manualmente para mantener una presion de 65-70 PSIG en Ias toberas. El elemento filtrante esta dimensionado (40 micrones) para remover Iiquidos y particular solidas contenidas en el aire comprimido. Valvulas Reguladoras de Presion de Agua: (PRV) Item #3. Manualmente ajustadas para mantener una presion de 3-15 PSIG en Ias toberas. Las valvulas duales reguladoras de agua permiten control de dos grupos de toberas ubicadas en distintas elevaciones. Indicadores de Presion de Agua & Aire: Item #4 & #5. Auto explicative.
3.
4. 5,
Valvulas de Aislacion: Item #6, #7, #8. Son utilizadas para aislar Ias valvulas reguladoras, para efectos de mantencion. Las valvulas individuals en cada tobera permiten desconectar cualquier circuito individual separadamente. Resistencia Caja union conductors toberas. Calefactora: item #13. Para protection contra congelamiento.
6. 7.
del Malefactor: Item #14. Nema 4. Proporciona medios para Ias conexiones de Ios de la resistencia calefactora unifilar contenidas en Ios cables de conexion de Ias Cabezal de 8 toberas, con v~lvula individual de aislacion o
8. 9.
Cabezales de Aire & Agua: desconexion. Conectores respective. (3/4):
Item #9. Son utilizados para conectar el cable de la to bera a la montura
(1 ): Item #l O. Son utilizados para conectar el suministro de agua entre el gabinete 10. Conectores MULTI y la caja COMBO. 11. Conectores Rapidos: Item#11 & 12. Conectores conectar Ias tuberias de aire y agua. 12. Valvula Check de Agua (1/8): aire a la tuberia de agua. Item#18, rapidos de desconexion. Lftilizados para
Valvula check en-lines,
para prevenir flujo reverso del
/ : ;Is De Con]ponentes Pdgina 73
... . 294csMAN
,.

DE
opEi_?ACiON Y MANTENciON
TRC
No.:
296
Conjunto
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIO.
Modular
(C ONEX:ON ELEC TR/CAJ
Caja
Combination
12
Www -)1
D
@l
IINSIDE)
/43
Esr
I@
II .
7T
\
~
,7.1 1A)
II IIJ,
P m .-@
1
r
&
COMEO-8E
-@ --(3 -@
II
do
WATER INLE-T lW NPT (EN Tt24DA DE AGUA 1,2 NP T,
~lR
INLET 1/2 NPT ENTRAOA DE AIRE 1/2- NP T)
I
am
/ t?>
I L____
COM-P/&
. I
41tl.
Lists De Components
P~gina 14
XMcsfdAIV

DE
OpERAcioN
Y MANTENCiON
TRC No,: 296
Conjunto
Modular
Caja Combination:
COMBO
El Conjunto Modular Caja Combination es una combination de valvulas solenoids y valvulas reguladoras de presion. Todos Ios components estan alojados en un gabinete Nema 3R o !2 para su debida protection. En la modalidad anti-congelamiento, dicho gabinete es termicamente aislado y calefaccionado por un malefactor electrico de 200 Watts, con regulation automatic. La caja COMBO standard mide 20x20x8 Nema 3R. Otras variaciones modular controls hasta 8 toberas. Nema son opcionales. Este conjunto
Components
Sigue a continuation 1, 2. Gabinete:
& Description
una description 20x20x8.
de Funcionamiento:
del equipo y su funcion normal de operation:
Nema 3R.
Filtro de Aire/Valvula Reguladora: (PRV) Item #2. Combina la funcion de un fiitro y un regulador de presion en una sola unidad compacta, con option para drenaje automatic. La valvula debera ser ajustada manualmente para mantener una presion de 65-70 PSIG en Ias toberas. El elemento filtrante esta dimensionado (40 micrones) para remover Iiquidos y particular solidas contenidas en el aire comprimido de suministro, Valvulas Reguladoras de Presion del Agua: (PRV) Item #3. Manualmente ajustadas para mantener una presion de 3-15 PSIG en Ias toberas. Las valvulas duales de regulation permiten el control de dos grupos de toberas ubicadas en diferentes elevaciones, Valvulas Solenoids de Bloqueo Aire/Agua: (SV 1-1, SV 1-2) Item ##4& #5. Normalmente cerradas. Se energizan cuando existe la presion de aire en la tuberia de suministro y la serial remota de comando, en Ias instalaciones del cliente, establece contacto. Valvula Solenoide de Purga: (SV 1-3) Item #13. Normalmente abierta. Se cierra cuando Ias valvulas solenoids de sire-y aqua se energizan. Abierta, cuando el permisivo remoto esta abierto. El aire va a fluir a traves de _ia~alvula sole~oide de agua, para purgar el agua de Ias Iineas de agua, por el periodo de tiempo estipulado, Ala expiration de dicho tiempo, la valvula solenoide de bloqueo del aire (SV l-l) interrumpira el suministro de aire, para asi concluir la operation de purga. Indicadores de Presion del Agua & Aire: Item #6 & #7. Auto explicative.
3.
4.
5.
6. 7.
Valvulas de Aislacion: Las valvulas individuals salida. Malefactor:
Son usadas para aislar Ias valvulas reguladoras, con fines de mantencion. de aislacidn en cada tobera, permiten desconectar cualquier circuito de contra congelamiento. medios de conexion electrica entre
8. 9.
Item 14. Para protection
Caja de Conexion Electrica: Item #11. Nema 4. Proporciona la fuente externa de suministro y Ios components internos. de Aire & Agua: (3/4):
10, Cabezales 11. Conectores montura.
Cabezal de 8 toberas con valvula individual de aislacion.
Item #1 O. Se usan para conectar el cable de la tobera con su respective Son usados para conectar la lines de agua de suministro entre la caja MULTI y para desconexion rapida de la tuberia. Se usa
(l): 12. Conectores la caja COMBO.
rapidos: Item #8 & #9. Conectores 13. Conectores para conectar Ias tuberias de aire y agua. 14, Valvula Check para el Agua (4/8): del aire en Ias tuberias de agua.
Item #14. V41vula check en-lines,
para prevenir flujo reverso
/ %ta De Con7ponentes
Pdgina 15
294cstbfAN
Sistema Aglomerador para Control de Polvos MANUAl

DE
TRC No.: 296
Conjunto
Caja Combination
Hidr6uIica
ELECTRICAL CONNECTION
1 ~
MHCOMBOF
...<....
PI
u
WATER INLET tl M-
- ~
(ENTRADA DE AGUA) d s
AIR PURGE . ~
,. +:
(ENTRADA A/RE : DE PURGA)
L_.
MHCF-PID
A
....,+
Lkta De Cornponentes
PAgina 16
294csMAN

DE
OpERAcioN
Y MANTENCiON
TRC
No.:
296
Conjunto
Caja Combinac~on
Hidraulica
El Conjunto Caja Combination Hidraulica es una combination de valvulas solenoids y valvulas reguladoras de presion. Todos Ios component se encuentran alojados en caja Nema 3R 012, para su debida protection. En la modalidad de protection contra congelamiento, dicha caja es termicamente aislada y calefaccionada mediante un malefactor electrico de 30 Watts, autoregulado. El tamafio standard de la caja MHCOMBO es de 24x20x8, Nema 3R. Otras opciones Nema pueden ser suministradas a petition. Este conjunto modular controls hasta 5 toberas hidraulicas.
Components
Sigue a continuation 1. 2, Gabinete:
& Description
una description 20x20x8.
de Funcionamiento:
del equipo y su funcion normal de operation:
Nema 3R.
Valvulas Solenoids de Bloqueo Agua: (SV 1-1) Item #2. Normalmente cerrada. Se energiza cuando la presion de aire en la tuberia de suministro alcanza su valor adecuado y la serial remota de comando, en Ias instalaciones del cliente, establece contacto. Valvula Solenoide de Purga: (SV 1-2) Item #3. Normalmente cerrada. Permanece cerrada cuando las valvulas solenoids de agua se energizan. Abierta, cuando e] permisivo remoto esta abierto. El aire va a fluir a traves de la valvula solenoide de agua, para purgar el agua de Ias Iineas de agua, por el periodo de tiempo estipulado. A la expiration de dicho tiempo, la valvula solenoide de bloqueo del aire interrumpira el suministro de aire, para asi concluir la operation de purga. Valvulas Reguladoras de Presion del Agua: (PRV) Item #6. Manualmente ajustadas para mantener una presion de 3-15 PSIG en Ias toberas. Las valvulas duales de regulation permiten el control de dos grupos de toberas ubicadas en diferentes elevaciones. Indicadores de Presion del Agua & Aire: Item #5. Auto explicative.
3.
4,
5. 6.
Valvulas de Aislacion: Las valvulas individuals salida.
Son usadas para aislar Ias valvulas reguladoras, con fines de mantencion. de aislacidn en cada tobera, permiten desconectar cualquier circuito de medios de conexion electrica entre
7. 8. 9.
Caja de Conexion Electrica: Item #7. Nema 4, Proporciona la fuente externa de suministro y Ios components internos. Malefactor: Item 8. Para protection contra congelamiento. para desconexion
Conectores Rapidos: Item #9. Conectores Ias conexiones de agua,
rapida de Ias tuberias,
Usados en
.. .Lis?a De CornpoI;:J;ks
.. . . ... . Piglw
.. ....= j7
294csMA/V

DE
@ERACiON
Y MANTENCiON
TRC
No,:
296
Conjunto
Modular
Caja De Distribution
/.-- // \\ , ),, \ \, 1$ \ \, / / / ! ,, \, \ ,, / , L
[M
[c+)
AI FUWATER (E)w7,4DA AIRE/AGUA) INLET
Lists De Ccvnponentes
Pdgina 18
294csMA!d

DE
OpEr?Aci6N
MANTENcioN
TRC No.: 296
Conjunto
Modular
Caja De Distribution
de aire y
Sirve como caja de distribution para un grupo de toberas en un area particular. Los suministros agua son conectados a reguladores en el interior del gabinete de control multifunctional MULTI.
Todos Ios components estan alojados en un gabinete Nema 3R 012, para su proteccitm. En su modalidad con protection contra congelamiento, dicho gabinete es aislado termicamente y calefaccionado mediante un malefactor electrico de 30 Watts, autoregulado. El tamatio standard del Gabinete MHCOMBO es de 20x16x16, Nema 3R. Otras opciones Nema pueden ser suministrados a pedido. Este conjunto modular controls hasta 10 toberas.
Components
1. 2, 3. Gabinete:
y Description
20x16x6, Nema 3R.
de Funcionamiento:
Valvulas de Aislacion: Item #3, M, #5. Valvulas desconectar cualquier circuito individualmente.
individuals
en cada tobera, permiten
Caja union del Malefactor: Nema 4, Proporciona medios de conexion para Ios conductors provenientes de Ias resistencias unifilares, trazadoras de calor, contenidas en Ios cables de conexion de Ias toberas. Malefactor: Item #11. Para protection contra congelamiento. rapidos de desconexion. Utilizados para
4, 5. 6.
Conectores Rapidos: Item #7 & #8. Conectores conectar Ias tuberias de agua. Valvula Check de Agua (1/8): aire a la tuberia del agua. Item #il.
Valvula check en-lines,
para prevenir flujo reverso del

DE OpERAcioN
Y MANTENcioN
TRC No.: 296
Gabinete
De Filtros
24.
De Aire & Agua

r
m 1, r
(S4L,DA DE AIRE 34- NP T, AIR OUTLET 314. NPT 0 5
(5AL10A DE AGUA U4. DA, WATER OUTLET 3!C DIA
1-
,1 +
;.. I
AIR INLET i (ENTRDA DE ~ A IRE)
1 I
WATER INLET (ENTRADA DEAGUA) + ~ ~
LJ
f+41R OUTLET ~ (SALIDA DE , AIRE) ( 1 , , ) WATER OUTLET ~ (SALIDA DE ~ AGUA)
-..
2FIL-PID
Lkta De Components
PAgina 20
294csMAIV

DE
OpERAcioN
Y MANTENcioN
TRC No.: 296
Gabhete
de Htros
de Ake & Agua
El Gabinete de filtros de Aire y Agua contiene filtros duplex de agua, de acero inoxidable; y un filtro de sire. Los filtros de agua contienen elementos filtrates de varies grades de filtration, dependiendo de Ias condiciones de terreno. Los filtros de agua pueden ser conectados en paralelo o en serie. El gabinete standard para este modulo es de 24x24x1 1, Nema 3R. El gabinete viene calefaccionado se selecciona la option anti-congelamiento. cuando
Components
y Description
de Funcionamiento:
es como sigue:
La funcion del equipo y su modo normal de operation, 1. 2. Gabinete: 24x24x1 l, Nema 3R
Filtro de Aire (con drenado automatic): Item #2. El elemento filtrante viene dimensionado micrones) para remover Iiquidos y particular solidas contenidas en el aire comprimido de suministro.
(40-50
3.
Filtro de Agua: Item #3. Duplex en paralelo o en serie, en la Iinea de entrada de agua. El filtro paralelo duplex permite operation individual independiente u operation en paralelo. Con este filtro duplex, uno de ellos puede ser cerrado para mantencion, mientras el otro contintia en servicio. El filtro serie contiene un elemento filtrante de 50 micrones, en el primer filtro; y un elemento de 10 micrones, en el segundo. Indicadores de Presion del Agua & Aire: Item #6. Auto-explicative.
4. 5.
Valvulas de Aislacion: fines de mantenimiento. individual. Malefactor:
Item #4& #5. Son utilizadas para aislar Ias valvulas reguladoras, con Las valvulas individuals de aislacion permiten aislar cualquier circuito contra congelamiento.
6,
Item #7. Con fines de protection
- ... . IZsta De Components P@i]a 21
..
.
294csM.~ ;
., ..

DE OpERAcioN
Y MANTENci6N
TRC No,: 296
Conjunto
Modular
para Filtration
Primaria
del Aire/Agua
El Conjunto Modular para Filtration
primaria del sire/agua, contiene filtros duplex, en serie o en paralelo, tipo bolsa; y un filtro de aire de alta capacidad.
cuerpo de acero inoxidable y elementos filtrates
Components
y Description
de Funcionamiento:
1. Carcaza del Filtro de Bolsa:
La carcaza o cuerpo del filtro, fabricada en acero inoxidable T-316, para una presion m~xima de 300 PSIG. Dicha carcaza utiliza un filtro tipo bolsa #5. El flujo toma Iugar desde el interior de la bolsa, hacia e] exterior. El canasto de soporte y la bolsa filtrante estan firmemente aseguradas en et horde indentado del aro de rebalse, proporcionando de esta manera un sello de compression. La bolsa filtrante esta dimensionada (10 a 50 micrones) para atrapar suciedades contenidas en el agua. Filtro de Aire: El elemento filtrante esta dimensionado contenidas en el aire comprimido, Valvula Automatic de Drenaje: atrapados en el filtro, para remover Iiquidos y particular contaminants, solidas
2. 3.
Utilizada para drenar Iiquidos y particular
AK>-
J,
:$iip!q/EE:E
;_ *X-.< INLYCADOR OE PREStON
II
, ,..,= ,
~,
\ //
AUTOMATIC SOLENOID tw.A,NvALvE Box

VAL VUU SOL ENOJDE AUTOMA TIG4 DE ORENADO
2FlL-sKl
Conjunto
de Filtros
Duplex
Para Aqua
Y Aire
Lists De Compomwtes
P4gina 22
294cWAN

DE 0pERAci6N Y MANTENCi6N
TRC No.: 296
FIL TRO DE A IRE
/- VAL
BALL VALVE
VUL4 DE
DRENAJE
WATER FILTE
FIL TRO DE AGUA
Y-l /
\
Filtro
Duplex
en serie
para AgualFiItro
de Aire

Chente Mmera Escondlda Ltd
DE
OpERAci6N
Y MANTENcioN
TRC No 296
Conjunto
Modular
Tobera
1
2 3 4 5 6
7
Modulo
Tobera
10
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
Conectorpara Flexible
Conducto electrico Flexible Tuberia de aire Tuberia de Agua Perilla Manual Soporte-U Perno de 5/8 Tuerca de 5/8, B-line Canaleta, B-1ine
Cuerpo Adaptador Conector para el Aire Conector para el Agua Tubo de Protection Tornillo de Fijacion Adaptador reductor Tornillo de Fijacidn Tubo Guia
8 9
Lkta De Cumponentes
PAgina 24
... 254~5~~,4/\j
..

DE
0pERAci6N
Y MANTENcioN
TRC No.: 296
Modulo
de Sopotie
de la Tobera
Se ofrecen variados modos de soporte de Ias toberas, para acomodar Ios requerimientos especificos de la faena a cumplir. La funcion especifica de dichos soportes es proteger Ias toberas contra datios causados por Ias condiciones ambientales atmosfericas, o por el equipo de operaciones, objeto de esta aplicacion.
Soporte
Articulado
de la Tobera:
Esta constituido por una tobera con un cuerpo tinico, que facilita su instalacion, ajuste directional y su mantencion. Fabricado con acero galvanizado, es especialmente robusto. Un cuerpo adaptador es incluido con cada soporte, para acomodar toberas tipo FP o MH, cualquiera sea el case. H tipo de soporte facilita la protection contra congelamiento o ambientes mas calurosos.
NZM2ASSY
Soporte
Articulado
de la Tobera
. . . i f.-d !2.2 Con fpommtes
. . .,... .
-.-,
,.. . 294CSII
+&J~~~ ?5
. . ...
Sistetna Aglomerador para Control de Polvos MANUA1

DE
OpERAcioN
Y MANTENcioN
TRC No.: 296
Montaje
de Toberas
en Tolvas
de Descarga
de Camiones
Este tipo de montaje esta diseflado para ser usado en una tolva de descarga de camiones; o sobre parrillas alimentadoras, donde no se necesita ajuste de la direccion del rociado.
/75
Montaje
de Toberas en Tolvas de Descarga de Camiones
L2A Lk Cfmpxwntes
. .. Ptigina 26 294cWAN --

DE opmAcioN
Y MmwmcioN
TRC No.: 296
Montaje
Soldado
De Tobera
NZM3ASSY
,/
- -/-
2 1/2- PIPE CUT AT SPECIFIED ANGLE, AND WELDED ON THE COVER PLATE WITH AN OPENING HOLE
TUBER[A DE 2 1/2.. CORTAR AL ANGOLO ESPECIFICADO Y SOLDAR ALA CU8ERTA, DEJANOO UNA PERFORATION.
Montaje Soldado De Tobera

DE
OpErwcioN
Y MANTENcioN
TRC No.: 296
Gabinete
De Controles
Electricos
(Sin Protection
contra
Congelamiento)
F
II
(r+
I HOA-4
POWER ON
1
1
I-=---7
## @ *
,BI ,@l
# o w
ENERGIZADO .
ON
((j?)
OFF
, ENERGIA DE CONTROLO
EQUIP. NO. 130-DS017
Pzzr!zl
OFF HAND AUTO
i @ ~
[d
HOABOXS
L @
Lkta De Cornponentes
Pdgina 28
294csMAW

DE
opErmci6N
Y MANmNcioN
TRC
No.:
296
Gabinete
de Controles
Electricos
(Sin
Protection
contra
Congelamiento)
El gabinete de controles electricos contiene una cantidad de Switches selectors Manual / Off/ Auto, Los components se encuentran alojados en un gabinete Nema 4 de tamafio standard de 12x12x6. Las dimensioned de [OSgabinetes varian segun sea el numero de circuitos de control y/o potencia. Otras variedades Nema pueden ser proporcionadas a pedido. El numero de circuitos de control requerido en un determinado sistema ADS, depende primordialmente del numero de sub-grupos de equipos que van a funcionar simultaneamente. Dicho numero de circuitos depende tambien de la cantidad de juegos de valvulas solenoids existences en e] sistema, siendo a veces, menor.
Components
y Description
de Funcionamiento:
de su funcionamiento, es como sigue:
La funcion del equipo y una description
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
Gabinete:
Nema 4.
Lutes piloto: Auto-explicative. Switches Selectors: Breakers: Son utilizados para energizar o desconectar contra fallas electrical a tierra. el sistema.
Para protection
Relay de Control. Relay de tiempo.

DE
OPE!_?ACiON
Y MANTENciON
TRC
No.:
296
Gabinete
@
de Controles
Electricos
( Con Protection
Anti-Congelamiento)
I HOA-4
I POWER ON ?$ o ,6,
ENERG12AD0 .
I
I
:)
ON
OFF
.pREslON
cm AGUA 13AJA0 PLL.2226
,( @
,iiii,
, ENERGIA DE CONTROL .
OFF
HAND AUTO
OFF HAND AUTO
OFF HAND AUTO
HOABOX2S
Lish Oe Components
PAgina 39
294 CSMAN
Sistema Aglomerador para Conirol de POIVOS MANUA1

DE OpEr?AcioN Y MANTENcioN
TRC No.: 296
Gabinete
de Controles
Electricos
( Con Protection
Anti-Conge/amiento)
El gabinete de controles electricos contiene una cantidad de Switches selectors Manual/ Off/ Auto. Los components se encuentran alojados en un gabinete Nema 4 de tamatio standard de 12x12x8. Las dimensioned de Ios gabinetes varian segun sea el numero de circuitos de control y/o potencia. Otras variedades Nema pueden ser proporcionadas a pedido. El numero de circuitos de control requerido en un determinado sistema ADS, depende primordialmente del numero de sub-grupos de equipos que van a funcionar simultaneamente. Dicho ntimero de circuitos depende tambien de la cantidad de juegos de valvulas solenoids existences en el sistema, siendo a veces, menor.
Components
y Description
de Funcionamiento:
de su funcionamiento, es como sigue:
La funcion del equipo y una description 1. Gabinete: 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8, Nema 4.
Lutes piloto:
Auto-explicative. Son utilizados para energizar o desconectar contra fallas electrical a tierra. el sistema
Switches Selectors: Breakers:
Para protection
Relay de Control. Relay de Control para Ios circuitos de calefacion. Relay de Tiempo: Es utilizado para controlar el tiempo de purga.
Switch de Temperature.
4.5.2
Instrucciones para instalacin
23.01.98
COLLAHUASI
Hoja en blanco
COLLAHUASI
23.01.98
$istema Aglomerador para Control de Polvos MANUA[ DE OpmAcioN

Y MAffTENcioN
TRC No.: 296
lNSTRUCCiONES PARA INSTAIACiON:

La figura ilustra Ias posibles ubicaciones tipica. de Ias toberas individuals, en una tolva de transferencia
(l
c
(TRA
Seguir Ios pasos siguientes para instalar Ias toberas:

q
Las toberas deben ser apuntadas hacia el area generadora de polvos, como se recomienda; y deben estar montadas en forma tal que la forma de la dispersion no interfiera con otras supefilcies. Las toberas deben ser montadas en forma tat como para evitar que la velocidad no tree otras fuentes generadoras de polvos. La tobera debe ser montada con miras a evitar datios potenciales provenientes que esta siendo transportado, triturado, harneado y/o descargado. de rociado del material
La tobera debe ser montada en forma tal como para minimizar su exposition directs a Ias corrientes de aire cargadas de polvo, que pudiesen erosionar Ios miembros resonances, Las toberas deben ser montadas en forma tal como para optimizar Ios voltimenes protegidos, proporcionados. SEGUROS Y EXPEDITOS
P ES ALTAMENTE RECOMMENDABLE PROPORCIONAR ACCESOS A CADA TOBERA, DURANTE LA OPERACION DE LA P.LANTA.
Instucciones
Fafa lnstalacion
. P~gina 33 294CSMAN

DE
OpERAcioN
Y MANTENcioN
TRC No.: 296
7.
Montaje
De Las Toberas
Favor de referirse a Ios pianos del sistema para Ias ubicaciones exactas de Ias toberas. Un representante de TRC, determinara la ubicacion precisa de Ias toberas en el terreno, una vez que todo el equipo haya sido instalado (excepto en aquellos cases en que la information esta en Ios pianos). Muy a menudo no results posible o noes aconsejable determiner Ias ubicaciones desde la oficina, debido a que obstrucciones en el terreno, tolerancias, u otros factores que afecten la mantencion o la performance, no resultan evidentes en Ios pianos de equipos de la planta.
r%
,111/1
, /Y/
a
SWIVEL
MONTAJEARTICUL4D0
%
MOUNT
MATERIAL FLO#/ FLUJO DEL AU TE6.L k
(
I 1 I 1 A 1
J
1 I I
,)
1
L I
\
,1
I
,
NOZLOC
WELD
MONTAJE
SLIP MOUNT
EN TUBO SOLDADO
Notese el unistrut (o canal B-Line) utilizado para asegurar el montaje articulado. Aun cuando existen otros metados, el uso de! unistrut proporciona flexibilidad y evita soldaduras en terreno.
Ins fucciof]es Para lnstakfci6n
P&gina 34
2!34csMA/V

DE
opERACiON
Y MANTENCiON
TRC No.: 296
2. Gabinetes
Modulares
para Reguladores
de Presion
y Combinaciones.
/ -..
@..@
PRV-ISOF
Y?..*
Los modulos reguladores de presion (PRV) deben ser instalados en una estructura solids y cerca de Ias toberas que controlan. Dicho soporte podria ser una columns, una baranda, o una muralla, Results mejor montar Ios gabinetes sobre soportes unistrut soldados a la superficie de montaje. Se proporcionan 20 pies de cable de conexion por cada tobera suministrada, Por 10tanto, el gabinete de control no puede estar ubicado a m~s de 20 pies de cada tobera. > ES NECESARIO PROPORCIONAR FAC/L ACCESO AL GABINETE PRESl~N DURANTE EL FUNCIONAMIENTO DE LA PLANTA REGULADOR DE
hw:ticciones
. ...l- Para hsta/aci6n PAgina 35 :gdcsf:?,i[:
$istema Aglomerador para Control de Polvos MANUA1 DE OpERAcioN Y MANTENcioN

Wu,
/ / / / ,16.0 .,. 7,, . , _ FOml.,ur,.m (AWA.TE m FOAM, .- . , .- TRACE ( TW.m 0.,.,.,, r ,52,. / / ,2 S.40 MNF N8PPL5 .r(!,, mm*. FIELD c, HOLE m ,,, . \
.,.,
./ // / /
>-
i.g ii
..
-..
/ , Nyo=-------.---ir 1, a ~: w,,.,, / ,, P mu., ----, ~ ~, m..=?+
. %473* SEALIIGHT Comnm ,Tua. Cww, SIu n.. r, ! $4.00 WATER TuBE W50 .CA.LU,
,! ,, t,,, ,. Al. CO+WECTION ,CO.EXJW w,,,. ,..
, !m ,>PE
ll~MP~fi~l~oD m .!..,
COFWEC710 OE AGUA)
I, WMPT. ,,..0. (co.ExfON
AIR MANIFOLD 2ND SET

CABEZ.4L LIE A!RE 20 GRUPO
i AIR MANIFOLD ) J:LmE:,RE

1
iER GRUPO I j [ ),
WATER MANIFOLD 2ND SET

CA BE2AL DE A IRE 20 GRuPO
WATER MANIFOLD 1ST SET

CABE2AL DEAGUA fER GRUPO
Lwtucciones
P.wa hstalacidn
Pdgina 36
294csMAN

DE
OPERACiON
Y MANTENciON
TRC No.: 296
3. Cable de Conexion
de /as Toberas.
La conexion entre Ias toberas individuals y Ios gabinetes respectivos de PRV, COMBO, y DIST, es Ilevada a efecto mediante el cable de conexion proporcionado por TRC, en cantidades al por mayor de Ios varies components:
q
Conducto
flexible y conectores
de % Diametro Interno.
Tubo plastico para el agua X Diametro Externo. Tubo plastico para el aire, 5/16 Diametro Externo. pasos deben ser seguidos para medir e instalar Ios cables de conexion de Ias
Los siguientes toberas:
1. Montar Ios gabinetes PRV, COMBO, o DIST conforme se indica en Ios pianos de montaje, o segun determinado por Ios ingenieros de TRC (Ver la seccion anterior para instrucciones de instalacion). 2. 3. Montar Ios mddulos individuals, ingenieros de TRC. segun pianos de montaje, o por instrucciones de Ios
Utilizando una huincha de medir de acero, medir la distancia desde el gabinete de control hasta la parte posterior de la tobera. Considerar en la medicion material suficiente para curvas y extras que permitan seguir un camino adecuado y convenience que no interfiera con el acceso a otros equipos. Cortar el Iargo medido de tuberia flexible sealtight de %, del rollo de 100 pies, y cortar Iimpiamente con sierra o herramienta adecuada. Unir Ios extremes de Ios tubes de Y. OD, 5/16 OD, y Ios conductors del alambre malefactor, enhuincharlos con cinta aisladora; y proceder a insertarlos dentro del conducto flexible, ya sea en forma manual o pescandolos con un alambre o Iaucha, Para permitir un deslizamiento suave de Ios tubes, usar Iubricante para cables tipo GB VJre-Aide #79-006 o equivalence; y mantener el tubo flexible, derecho. Dejar 6 adicionales en el Iado de la tobera, y 18 adicionales gabinete de control. para terminaciones en el
4. 5.
6. 7.
Conectar Ios extremes apropiados en el gabinete y en la tobera. Dentro del gabinete, cuando se usen Ios 8 circuitos de toberas, parear en 4 pares de tubes agua/sire y conectar a Ios cabezales de salida respectivos (en la parte superior de la caja) en el mismo Iado del gabinete. Evitar que Ios tubes se crucen dentro de la caja. Conectar Ios conductors del alambre malefactor a Ios terminals caja de empalme, ubicada encima del gabinete. de conexion dentro de la
8. 9.
En el Iado de la toberas, terminar Ios conductors del alambre calefactory aislar con cinta aisladora o cinta termica. Verificar que el adaptador de sujecion no este mas alla de 1/8 del tubo de protection. (ver la figura).
-. ,... l,~b[i;:{.iWl!3S Para /Ls!alaci6n %g.ha 37 234<sMA!J
.>.=

DE OpERAci6N Y MANTENci6N
TRC No.: 296
4.
Gabinetes
Multi funciones:
Los gabinetes multifunction deben ser instalados en una estructura estable, en una ubicacion central con respecto a Ios reguladores de presion en servicio, o por consideraciones de montaje de Ias tuberias. Dicho soporte puede ser una columns, un pasamanos, o un muro. Resulta mejor instalar Ios gabinetes en canales unistrut o canales B-Line soldados o apernados a la superficie de montaje. Las tuberias deben ser montadas en forma tal como para impedir esfuerzos mecanicos en el equipo
Q!
a
PRV BOX
(CAJA PRV)
>
ES NECESAR/O PROPORCIONAR ACCESO EXPEDITO DURANTE LA OPERACION DE LA PLANTA.
AL GABltdETE MULTIFUNCTION
Instucciones
Para Instalacion
Pdgina 38
294csMAN

DE
opERACiON
Y MANTENCiON
TRC No.: 296
5.
Tuberias
entre
Ios Gabinetes
Multi-Funcih
y los Gabinetes
PRV.
Las tuberias de aire entre Ios gabinetes Multi-funcion y Ios gabinetes conteniendo Ios reguladores de presion, son generalmente de fierro negro. Las tuberias de agua debieran ser de PVC, Bronce o Acero Inoxidable. En algunas aplicaciones donde la capacidad de agua y aire no es critics, se usa tuberia de nylon de Y. OD y 3/8 OD, contenidos en flexible sealtite de 1, 10que facilita la instalacion y la mantencion. La tuberia de agua debe ser aislada termicamente en zonas de congelamiento. El tamario de Ias tuberias aparece indicado en Ios diagramas de Tuberias e Instrumentation, en la seccion dibujos, de este manual. > CUANDO SE USE FIERRO NEGRO PARA LAS TUBER/AS DE AGUA O A IRE, DEBE EJERCERSE EXTREMO CUIDADO PARA IMPEDIR WE PAR TICULAS METALICAS O SUCIEDAD, ENTREN EN EL SISTEMA. S1ASI OCURRIERA, DEBEN ESPERARSE AL GUNOS PROBLEMAS DURANTE LA PUESTA EN MA RCHA.
hstccciones
Pwa Instaiac;on
Pqfila
39
294c~MAN

DE
OPERACiON
MANTENCiON TRC No.: 296
6.
Gabinetes
de Contro/es
Electricos.
Los gabinetes de controles electricos (HOA) deben ser montados 10mas cerca posible de! equipo que controlan, a fin de poder proporcionar un control local para efectos de arrancar/apagar el servicio. El arranque automatic del equipo es iniciado mediante contactos remotos (per otros) conectados a estos conjuntos modulares, Los gabinetes deben ser montados en una superficie solids y estable, con acceso expedito para servicio y operation.
Sisterna Aglotnerador para Control de Polvos MANUA1

DE
OpErwcioN
Y MANTENcioN
TRC No.: 296
7. Conjunto
1,
2. 3,
Modular
Filtro
Primario
AirelAgua:
usando para tal efecto, Ias perforaciones
Asegurar el marco de la base a la cimentacion, para Ios pernos de anclaje suministrados.
Conectar Ias tuberias de aire y agua en Ias entradas correspondientes. Las tuberias deben instalarse en forma tal como para impedir transmission de esfuerzos mecanicos a Ios equipos de este modulo. Con el objeto de minimizar perdidas de presion en Ias tuberias, debe usarse un diametro de tuberia apropiado para la instalacion, y usar el menor posible numero de codos o curvas. Conectar Ios circuitos electricos al gabinete de Ios solenoids. Referirse a Ios diagramas electricos para este modulo filtrante en la seccion pianos, para mas detalles. (F$T
FILTER TRO DE AIRE
4.
/ =?!%/
v
SHUT OFF VALVE VAL VU-A DE CIERRE PRESSURE INL?ICADOR .
GAUGE DE PRESION
/J!ll
lb& (
k
\.
/:A?%& DRENAJE
J -2
I Ii
lea
J
.b
1
Pdgina 41 .. 294<.sh4AlJ .
- ,In.stucciones Fara Instalacion
SistemaAglomerador paraControlde Polvos MANUA1 DE OpEr?AcioN Y MANTENCiON

8. Gabinete
de Filtros
Aire/Agua:
en una estructura estable y central en su que alimenta; o en una ubicacion de cafierias. El soporte podria ser una Ios gabinetes en unistrut o canales B-Line,
El gabinete con Ios filtros sire/agua debe ser montado ubicacion, con respecto a Ios gabinetes Multi y Combo determinada por consideraciones references al tendido columns, pasamanos, o muralla. Es preferable instalar soldados o apernados a la superficie de montaje
/fl~tu-c:wes
Para /nsfa/scion
Pdgina 42
.=.- 294cs!i4AN
4.5.3
Procedimientos de operacin
23.01.98
COLLAHUASI
Hoja en blanco
COLLAHUASI
23.01.98

Cliente: Compania
DE
OpERAcioN
Y MANwNcioN
TRC No.: 294C
Minera Dona De Collahuasi
PROCEdiMiENTOS
~roced~m~entos
DE OPERACiON
a/ Arranque.
e Instrumentation en la seccion IV de este manual de
Pre/hnhwes
Referirse a Ios diagramas de Tuberias instrucciones, para mayor information.

q
Valvulas de Drenaje de Ias tuberias de agua (si existen) Compresor Valvulas de bloqueo del suministro de agua Valvula solenoide de suministro de agua Valvula de bloqueo de suministro de aire Valvula solenoide de suministro de aire Switch selector HOA Todas Ias valvulas de aislacion de Ias toberas * En la puesta en marcha initial solamente
Abrir Desconectado Cerradas Cerrada Cerrada Cerrada
off*
Cerradas
ASEGURARSE TODA VIA
QUE LAS TOBERAS NO HA YAN SIDO INS TALADAS EN SUS MONTURAS
ASEGURARSE DE QUE LAS VALVULAS DEL REGULADOR DE PRESl~N DE AGUA UBICADO DENTRO DE LAS CAJAS PRV EST~N COMPLETAMENTE CERRADAS E INDIQUEN UNA PRES16N DE O PSIG (O KPA). 1. 2. 3, 4. Cerrar todas Ias Wdvulas de drenaje del agua, si existiesen, Abrir Ias valvulas de bloqueo del agua y del aire en el modulo filtrante primario. Arrancar et compresor. Verificar Ias condiciones de operation del compresor.
Puesta
en rnarcha
Arranque
de /os Gabhetes
MULTI:
del Gabinete
MULTI-I & Multi-2:
MULTI-I : 1. En el gabinete de control HOA-1, verificar que el contacto permisivo remoto (110 VAC) se encuentre conectado a Ios terminals 3 & 4 (ver diagrama esquem~tico electrico 294 C-20 AI, en la seccion dibujos), Energizar todos Ios interruptores, Cerrar el gabinete. Abrir todas Ias valvulas de aislacion de sire/agua dentro del tablero MULTI-1. En todas Ias cajas MULTI-1, cerrar todas Ias valvulas de suministro, reguladoras, anteriores a Ias valvulas
2. 3,
ASEGURARSE DE QUE LAS VALVULAS DEL REGULADOR DE PRESl~N DE AGUA UBICADO DENTRO DE LAS CAJA MULTI ESTEN COMPLETAMENTE CERRADAS INDIQUEN UNA PRESl~N DE O PSIG (O KPA). PI ocxxiimientos De Operaci6n P&gina 43 294csIWAN
Sisterna Aglomerador para Control de Polvos MANUA1 DE OpEmcioN

Cliente: Compania Minera Dona De Collahuasi
Y MANTENcioN
TRC No.: 294C
AIR INLET:, EN TRADA DE AIRE
AIR/WATER OUTLET SALIDA AIRE/AGUA
WATER
INLET
ENTRADA DE AGUA
4.
En el gabinete electrico, colocar el switch de potencia HS-100 en position ON, La Iuz piloto debiera encenderse. Caso contrario, revisar Ios interruptores, Girar el switch selector HS-I 01 a la position HAND. Las valvulas solenoids FV 1-1, FV 1-2, y FV 1-3, dentro del gabinete MULTI-1 debieran estar energizadas. Inspeccionar todo el sistema por fugas de aire o agua. PI 1-1, y asegurarse que la presion este
5. 6,
Verificar el indicador de presion de aire de suministro sobre 80 PSIG (550 Kpa).
7.
Verificar el indicador de presion de agua PI 1-2 & PI 1-3, para asegurarse sobre 40 PSIG (300 Kpa).
que la presion este
8.
Calibrar el interlock del switch de presion de aire PS 1-1 a 60 PSIG (420 Kpa). Normalmente, dicho switch viene pre-calibrado por TRC. Abrir Ias valvulas de aislacion del aire y agua de entrada. Ajustar Ias valvulas reguladoras sire/agua PCV 1-1, y PCV 1-4 para maxima presitm. Agua: 25 psig (172 Kpa), ai~e: 70 psig (480 Kpa) (Puesta en marcha initial solamente). Abrir Ientamente Ias valvulas del regulador de agua. No exceder el rango de presion del instrument indicador de presidn. Abrir todas Ias v~lvulas de cierre de Ias toberas. Permitir flujos de aire y agua por espacio de 5 minutes.
9.
F mc.wiimkntos
De Operacidn
Pdgina 44
294csMAN

Cliente: Compania
DE OpERAcioN Y MANTENcioN
TRC No.: 294C OFF.
10. En el gabinete electrico, colocar el switch selector HS-101 a la position 11. En Ios conjuntos de toberas, instalar Ias toberas en sus respectivos 12. En el gabinete electrico, girar el switch selectorHS-101 a la position
soportes. HAND.
13. Ajustar el regulador de presion de aire PCV 1-1 a 70 PSIG (480 Kpa), Ajustar el regulador de presion de agua PCV 1-4 entre 5-15 PSIG (35-100 Kpa). 14, En el gabinete DIST-1, revisar todas Ias toberas para verificar que esten rociando adecuadamente. Ajustar Ios reguladores de presion de aire y agua a valores determinados por la inspection visual del sistema. En general, la presion del agua estara dentro de un rango de 1 a 10 PSIG (10-70 Kpa); y la presion del aire, entre 60-70 PSIG (400-480 Kpa), 15. Repetir Ios pasos 9 al 14, para Ias valvulas reguladoras DIST-2. sire/agua PRV 1-2 & PRV 1-5, y la caja
16. Despues de haber ubicado todas Ias toberas en su sitio, girar el switch selectorHS-101 a la position OFF. Abrir el gabinete de control para calibar el relay de tiempo de purga KDI, como se indica: a. b. c. Colocar el relay de tiempo KD1 en modalidad D, para 5 a 8 minutes, Girar el switch selectorHS-101 a la position AUTO,
Cerrar el contacto permisivo remoto. Confirms que el sistema ADS arranca y que Ias toberas empiezan a nebulizar antes que e] material Ilegue a cada punto. Si existiese retardo en el nebulizado, adjustar el proceso de operation remoto, a fin de permitir tiempo suficiente para iniciar el atomizado antes de empezar la alimentacion del material. Girar el switch selector HS-101 a la position OFF. Medir y tomar nota del tiempo que se necesita para purgar el agua de Ias toberas y de Ias car7erias, y ajustar el relay de tiempo KDI en forma correspondiente. Anotarlo en la cubierta plastica del relay. esta Iisto para funcionar. CON TODOS EL GAB/NETE MULTI-2, -3, Y -4
d,
El gabinete MULTI-I P REPETIR
EL A41SM0 PROCED/MIENTO
Arranque
1.
del Gabinete
MULTI-5&
MULTI-6
En el gabinete de control HOA-3, verificar que el contacto permisivo remoto (110 VAC) se encuentre conectado a Ios terminals 3 & 4 (ver diagrama esquematico e16ctrico 294 C-20C, en la seccion dibujos). Energizar todos Ios interruptores, Cerrar el gabinete. Abrir todas Ias valvulas de aislacion de sire/agua dentro del tablero MULTI-5 En todas Ias cajas MULTI-5, cerrar todas Ias valvulas de suministro, reguladoras. anteriores a Ias valvulas
2. 3.
> ASEGURARSE DE QUE LAS VA LVULAS DEL REGULADOR DE PRESl~N DE AGUA UBICADO DENTRO DE LAS CAJA MULTI ES TEN COMPLETAMENTE CERRADAS E INDIQUEN UNA PRESl~N DE O PSIG (O KPA).
l%w~dimientos
De Operacidn
Pdgina 45
294CSMAN
Sistema Aglomerador para Control de Polvos MANUA1 DE OpERAcioN

Y MANTENCiON
TRC No.: 294C
ELECTRICAL ~\CONNECTOR
] PSL 5-1
:,
AIRhVATER OUTLE1 1. OIA CONDUIT (SEE NOTE NO 5)
II
:, 4.
PI 5-2
L l!l
En el gabinete electrico, colocar el switch de potencia HS-300 en position ON. La Iuz piloto debiera encenderse. Caso contrario, revisar Ios interruptores. Girar e! switch selector HS-501 a la posici6n HAND. Las valvulas solenoids FV 5-1, FV 5-2, y FV 5-3, dentro del gabinete MULTI-5 debieran estar energizadas. Inspeccionar todo el sistema por fugas de aire o agua. PI 5-1, y asegurarse que la presion este
5. 6,
Verificar el indicador de presion de aire de suministro sobre 80 PSIG (550 Kpa),
7.
Verificar el indicador de presion de agua PI 5-3 & PI 5-4, para asegurarse sobre 40 PSIG (300 Kpa).
que la presion este
8.
Calibrar el interlock del switch de presion de aire PSL 5-1 a 60 PSIG (420 Kpa). Normalmente, dicho switch viene pre-calibrado por TRC, En el gabinetePRV-1, abrir Ias v~lvulas de aislacidn del aire y agua de entrada. Ajustar Ias valvulas reguladoras sire/agua PCV 2-1, PCV 2-2, y PCV 2-3 para maxima presion. Agua: 25 psig (172 Kpa), aire: 70 psig (480 Kpa) (Puesta en marcha initial solamente). Abrir Ientamente Ias valvulas del regulador de agua. No exceder el rango de presion del instrument indicador de presion. Abrir todas Ias valvulas de cierre de Ias toberas. Permitir flujos de aire y agua por espacio de 5 minutes. OFF.
9.
10. En el gabinete electrico, colocar el switch selector HS-501 a la position 11. En Ios conjuntos de toberas, instalar Ias toberas en sus respectivos
soportes.
12. En e! gabinete electrico, girar el switch selector HS-501 a la posicidn HAND. ~-[o.wdimiefrtos De Operacidn P4gina 46 294csMAN
Sistema Aglomerador para Control de Pohos MANUA1 DE

I Cliente: Compania Minera Dona De Collahuasi f=~~-=--=-=
I
OpEr?AcioN
Y MANmNcioN
TRC No.: 294C
~-~
NOZZLE ISOLATION VALVE [AIR)
NOZZLE ISOLATION VALVE (WATER)
13. Ajustar el regulador de presion de aire PCV 2-1 a 70 PSIG (480 Kpa). Ajustar el regulador de presion de agua PCV 2-2 y PCV 2-3 entre 5-15 PSIG (35-100 Kpa). 14, Revisar todas Ias toberas para verificar que esten rociando adecuadamente. Ajustar Ios reguladores de presion de aire y agua a valores determinados por la inspection visual del sistema. En general, la presion del agua estara dentro de un rango de 1 a 10 PSIG (10-70 Kpa); y la presion del aire, entre 60-70 PSIG (400-480 Kpa). 15. Despues de haber ubicado todas Ias toberas en su sitio, girar el switch selector HS-501 a la position OFF. Abrir el gabinete de control para calibar el relay de tiempo de purga KD1, como se indica: a. b. d. Colocar el relay de tiempo KD1 en modalidad D, para 5 a 8 minutes Girar el switch selector HS-501 ala position AUTO.
Cerrar el contacto permisivo remoto. Confirms que el sistema ADS arranca y que Ias toberas empiezan a nebulizar antes que el material Ilegue a cada punto. Si existiese retardo en e! nebulizado, adjustar el proceso de operacibn remoto, a fin de permitir tiempo suficiente para iniciar el atomizado antes de empezar la alimentacion del material. Girar el switch selector HS-501 a la position OFF. Medir y tomar nota del tiempo que se necesita para purgar e! agua de Ias toberas y de Ias cafierias, y ajustar el relay de tiempo KD1 en forma correspondiente. Anotarlo en la cubierta pl~stica del relay.
d.
El gabinete MULTI-5 esta Iisto para funcionar. > ~ mwdimi.entos REPET!R EL MISMO PROCEDIMIENTO CON TODOS EL GABINETE MULTI-6. ~94csMA\V
De 0peraci6n
P4gina 47
Sistema Aglomerador para Control de Polvos MANUA1 DE OpEr?AcioN

Y MANTENcioN
TRC No.: 294C
Procedimiento de Puesta aplicacion).

Asegurarse 1. 2. 3.
en Martha:
(Tipico
para todos
Ios puntos
de
que todas Ias toberas esten instaladas, antes de proceder. dentro delos gabinetes AUTO. MULTI y PRV.
Abrir todas Ias valvulas de bloqueo de entrada/salida
En el tablero de control electrico, girar el selector HOA a la position El sistema ADS estaria Iisto para trabajar.
Procedimiento
1,
Diario
de Calibration/
lnspeccion.
Inspeccionar una vez al dia cada tobera en operation para verificar su espectro apropiado de rocio. Si alguna de ellas no estuviese operando correctamente, removerla y reemplazarla con, una tobera de repuesto, Un observation visual de la eficiencia del control de Ios polvos debiera Ilevarse a efecto varias veces al dia. Si se observasen emisiones excesivas, se deberia anotar de inmediato en la bitacora, con su posible causa, Si Ios delantales de protection estan gastados, debieran ser reemplazados 10mas pronto posible. Si existiesen puertas a medio cerrar o no totalmente apernadas, debieran ser cerradas y aseguradas de inmediato. Si aparecieran agujeros ocasionados por desgaste, debieran ser reparados en la proxima parada por mantencion. Si nada de 10anterior muestra problemas, se deberia proceder a recalibrar Ios reguladores de presion a fin de aumentar o disminuir la relation agua/sire. Si esto aun no solucionase et problems, inspeccionar cada tobera para asegurarse de que esten funcionando apropiadamente. Si ninguna falla obvia es Iocalizada, Ilamar a The Raring Corporation. Revisar el nivel de aceite de Ios compresores, presion diferencial en el filtro, la temperature presion del aire de descarga, y la presion diferencial en el separador de aceite. y la
2,
3.
.. t%cecfinkwtos De 0peraci6n Ptigina 48 294csMAN

Cliente: Compania
DE OpErzAcioN Y MANwNcioN
TRC No.: 294C
MANTENCiON / PARLMETROS DE OPERACiON 1.

hltroduccion:
El factor contribuyente mas importance en Ias fallas del sistema ADS, 10constitute la falta de mantencidn. La operation del sistema ADS va a desarrollar su propio programa y frecuencia de mantencion. Este programa es generalmernte determinado por la calidad del agua y del sire; y tambien por la composition de Ios materials que estan siendo manejados. Si la calidad del aire y del agua es pobre, fallas en Ias toberas y en Ias valvulas seran comunes. Para asegurar una operation continua y adecuada de sistema ADS, se requiere de una mantencion rutinaria establecida. Ademas de Ias cubiertas y delantales de protection, Ios components que pueden requerir reparation o reemplazo, son:
q
Toberas Soportes de Ias toberas Tuberias de conexion de Ias toberas de Presion
Reguladores
s
q
Valvulas Solenoids Filtros de Aire y Agua Instruments Compresores indicadores y Tanques Acumuladores de Aire Siguen a
Deberia mantenerse un stock de repuesto para todos y cada uno de estos components. continuation Ios procedimientos de mantencion:
2.
Toberas
Si una tobera no estuviese rociando perfectamente, debiera ser puesta fuera de servicio en forma inmediata, cerrando Ias valvulas de desconexion ubicadas dentro de Ios gabinetes PRV. Idealmente, debieran mantenerse a la mane, en todo memento, toberas nuevas o reparadas, de modo que se pueda proceder al cambio inmediato de la tobera defectuosa. Las toberas defectuosas debieran ser Ilevadas a un lugar Iimpio y proceder a su reparation cuando sea mas convenience. Existen cuatro components que requieren de reemplazo ocasional debido a desgaste o abuso del mismo. Ellos son el resonador, el orificio, y Ias dos empaquetaduras anulares O. La carcaza, el vastago, y el adaptador no debieran requerir reemplazo (salvo perdida o maltrato) pero deberian ser Iimpiados antes de proceder a re-armar.
-!.
!Wmkmcion / Parametms
De O,oeracion
Pdgina 49
294csI!:~~iW
Sistema Aglomerador para Control de Polvos MANUA1 DE

OpEr?AcioN Y MANTENCiON
TRC
No.:
294C
~$ $$ @ p? @) Po +9 (Pd~ , 9
NOZ4DPT2
tWZAE
Mantencion / Farametros
De Operation
Pdgina 50
294csA4.4N

Cliente: Compania
DE
OpErwcioN
Y MANTENcioN
TRC No.: 294C
Desarmado
de la Tobera
Desatornillar et sub-conjunto tobera del adaptador. Usar una Ilave de dado de 12 puntos, 5/8, para evitar daiiar el resonador. Cualquier posterior desarme debiera hacerse en area Iimpia de trabajo Para remover el resonador reemplazable, deslizar la punta de una navaja Ias piernas y aflojarlo cuidadosamente. No trate de sacar la pierna de su de la navaja Ilegue a la seccion inferior curva del alambre. En ese punto, de su alojamiento, Repetir este procedimiento con la segunda pierna, Si pierna se rompe en la carcaza, esta debe ser reemplazada. pequeria debajo de una de ranura, antes que la hoja tirar la pierna y removerla la seccion curva de la
Para remover el orificio fuera del alojamiento, colocar la carcaza en un tornillo prensa. No apretar el tornillo. Con una Ilave ajustable o una Ilave de punta de 1/4, desatornillar el vastago fuera de la carcaza. Golpear suavemente sobre el banco de trabajo, cabeza abajo, para aflojar y desalojar el orificio. Si este procedimiento no trabajase, usar un mandril piano y un martillo Iiviano.
Limpieza
de la Tobera.
Cualquier mugre o particula que haya encontrado su camino hasta la tobera, resultara obvia, excepto aquellas alojadas en Ios pasajes de Iiquido del orificio, Para Iimpiar estos, usar un alambre de diametro pequetio y baquetear dichos pasajes, Una herramienta para limpiar boquillas de soldadora, serviran igualmente para este proposito. Lavar todos Ios components y secar con un patio Iimpio.
Re-armado
de la Tobera.
El rearmado consiste en una repetition del proceso de desarme, pero a la inversa. Existen sin embargo dos sutiles diferencias. Es importance que Ias piernas del resonador esten orientadas con su centro entre el mayor espacio entre pasajes de agua en el orificio, Al gunos orificios tienen una marca grabada en su cara frontal para indicar el alineamiento apropiado, pero otras no, El mejor procedimiento que hemos encontrado, consiste en insertar el orificio en la carcaza y rotarlo a su position corrects ya sea usando un clip para papeles, o la punta de un instrument afilado, y Iuego aplicar suficiente fuetza con un tornillo prensa, para forzarlo en position, Atornillar et vastago y apretarlo suavemente, procurando no apretar demasiado, Verificar nuevamente la orientation. La instalacion de Ios nuevos resonadores tambien tiene ranuras y perforaciones en la carcaza esten totalmente ranuras, cogiendolo por la parte aguda de modo que se Ias respectivas perforaciones. Ambas piernas deberian tiempo. Normalmente van a resortear en su Iugar, pero cada Iado, para plenamente insertarse en posicidn. sus mafias, Primero, asegurarse que Ias Iimpias. Deslizar un nuevo resonador en Ias vaya abriendo a medida que se aproxima a alcanzar Ias perforaraciones al mismo pueden necesitar de un pequetio golpe a
Cada vez que una tobera sea Iimpiada y provista de sus respectivos empaquetaduras anulares lO deben ser reempladas.
repuestos, ambas
kkntencion
/ Pararnekos
De Operation
Pdgina 51
,. .. 2$f~,5A,l.A:.\
.. .

Cliente: Compania
DE
OpERAcioN
Y MANTENcioN
TRC No.: 294C
/ NZM2ASSY
Cojunto
Soporte
Articulado
NZM3ASSY
TIJL7ERIA DE 2 1/2-. CORTAR AL ANGOLO ESPECIF/CADO Y SOLDAR A LA CUBER TA, DEJANDO UNA PERFOR430N.
Soporte
Modular
Soldada
Man[encion /Parametros
De Operation
F%gina 52
294CSMAN

Cliente: Compania
DE
OPERACiON
Y MANTENCiON
TRC
No.:
294C
4. Soportes
de Ias Toberas
Ios tipos de soportes para toberas que se usan en la Planta de molinos
Se indican a continuation
Desmontaje
del soporte
de la tobera-
para acceso
a la Tobera.
Los soportes de montaje de Ias toberas han sido disefiados para permitir facil acceso a la tobera, con fines de servicio, generalmente, con la planta en operation. Aflojando el tornillo de fijacion (8), et conjunto tubular puede ser removido tirandolo fuera del tubo guia (9) y girado a una position convenience para inspection y servicio. Las valvulas de aislacion de la tobera, ubicadas en la caja PRV debieran ser cerradas, 12 puntas, 5/8 puede ser usado para remover la tobera, si fuese necesario Un dado de
1
2 3 4 5
6
Conjunto Tobera Tubo Adaptador Conector Tuberia del Aire Conector Tuberia del Agua Tubo Protector
I Tornillo de retention
a 9 10
Tornillo de Fijacion Tubo Guia Conector de tubo Flexible Tubo Flexible Sealtite Tuberia del Aire
I Tuberia
11
12
13
del Agua
Copla reductora
Wmkncion
/ Paramefros
De Operacioti
-a
53
29,4z~MAN

Cliente: Compania
DE
OpERAcioN
Y MANTENcioN
TRC No.: 294C
1
2
3 4 5
Conjunto Tobera Tubo Adaptador

Conector Conector Tuberia Tuberia del Aire del Agua
10 11
12 13
Conector Tubo Flexible Tubo Flexible Sealtite

Tuberia Tuberia del Aire del Agua
Tubo de Proteccibn
Tornillo de sujecion
Copla Tornillo Tubo Reductora de Sujecion guia
14 15
16 17
6
7 8 9
Escuadra de montaje Pemo de Montaje de 5/8

Tuerca Canaleta
B-Line
B-Line
A4ahnc+cw I Parametros
De Operation
P4gina 54
294csM4N

Cliente: Compania
DE
OpErzAcioN
Y MANTENcioN
TRC No.: 294C
Desmontaje
del soporte
de la Tobera - para inspection
interna y servicio.
Ocasionalmente existe la necesidad de ganar acceso al interior del soporte de la tobera, ya sea para reparar o reemplazar Ias tuberias, o el adaptador. En dicho case, remover el conjunto, segun se indica en 2,1. Remover la tobera (1), Remover el tornillo de sujecion (6) en el tubo de protection (5) (tuberia de 2), Golpear suavemente el extremo del tubo de protection en una superficie dura con el objeto de forzar el adaptador (2) fuera del tube. Desatornillar el tubo de protection (5) de la copla reductora (7). Remover Ias tuberias de aire y agua (12&13) de sus respectivos conectores (3&4) mediante la aplicacion de presion en Ias ferulas de Ios conectores (3&4), al mismo tiempo que se tira et tube.
5. Rearrnado
del Soporte
de la tobera.
partes,
Una vez que se haya procedido a corregir cualquier problems existente y/o reemplazado proceder a rearmar el conjunto tobera, segun se indica a continuation:
1. Asegurarse de dejar 9 adicionales expuestas del alambre malefactor, y de que no existen tortes en la aislacion, y que el extremo terminal sea debidamente aisldo, Doblar el alarmbre malefactor y reinsertar el extremo aislado dentro de la misma tuberia electrica de alimentacion. Usar huincha de encogimiento termico o cinta aisladora, para aislar el extremo del alambre malefactor. 2. Usar meterial termico aislante para catierias tipo Armaflex, para aislar la tuberia flexible electrica. La aislacion viene en tramos de 6 pies de Iargo. El Iargo total de la aislacion debe ser igual al Iargo del conducto electrico. Usar pegamento Armaflex para unir todas Ias junturas de la aislacion. Asegurarse que por 10 menos 3 de la tuberia negra del aire (12) se proyecten mas alla de la copla reductora (11), cuando se empujen dichas tuberias en el conducto flexible (15). Proceder en forma similar con la tuberia del agua (13). Insertar Ias tuberias dentro de sus repectivos conectores (3&4). Algunas veces se requiere presion extra para conseguir un asiento adecuado de Ias tuberias en sus respectivos conectores, Abrir el aire y el agua para asegurarse de que no haya fugas. Atornillar el tubo protector de 2 (5) a la copla reductora herramientas. (11) firmemente, pero sin usar
3.
4.
5.
Deslizar el tubo adaptador dentro de la tuberia protectors (5), Aplicar presion para fomar Ias tuberias de aire y agua de regreso dentro del conducto flexible (15) hasta que el adaptador quede insertado 1/8 del horde del tubo protector (5). Apretar el tornillo de sujecion (6) a fin de retener el adaptador en su position. Reinstalar la tobera y verificar la calidad del rociado, espectro y direccion.
6.
Matt[enuon
/ Parametros
De Operation
PAgina 55
294csfi~4N

Cliente: Compania
DE
OpEr?AcioN
Y MANTENci6N
TRC No,: 294C
,----
\.
\.
.-.
Mantencicm / Parametros
De Operation
PAgina 56
W4CE,I{A!J

Cliente: Compania
DE
OpErwcioN
Y MANTENci6N
TRC No,: 294C
6. Tuberhs de Conex~on de /as Toberas.

Conexiones.
Las conexiones neumaticas e hidraulicas entre Ias cajas reguladoras de presion y Ios conjuntos de toberas son Ilevadas a cabo mediante un conjunto flexible consistence de tuberia plastica de 1/4 OD para la conexion del agua, y una tuberia de plastico de 5/16 OD para la conexion del aire, alojadas dentro de un conducto flexible electrico tipo sealtite. Dichas interconexiones estan disefiadas para facilmente remover [as tuberias de la caja reguladora de presion, simplemente desconectando Ios conectores rapidos respectivos en Ios cabezales de distribution de aire y agua, y desatornillando el conector del conducto flexible en el costado de la caja de regulation. Asegurarse que Ias valvulas respectivas de aire y agua esten cerradas, antes de proceder a desconectar Ias tuberias. En el supuesto que el conjunto de tuberias este dafiado, la forma mas facil de reparation consiste en el reemplazo total de dicho conjunto. No se recomienda tratar de parchar Ias tuberias contenidas dentro del conducto flexible. Se recomienda asimismo mantener inventario de repuesto en bodega, a fin de poder fabricar nuevos tramos de dichos conjuntos flexibles

Cliente: Compania
DE OpmAcioN
Y MANTENCiON
TRC No.: 294C
PANEL NUT
(TUERCA DE RETENCION)
(0)
--
PLASTIC
BONNET
(BONETE PLASTICO)
-.. @
ION)
REGULATING SPRING
(RECORTE DE REGULATION)
O -
----
SLIP RING
(ARANDEM)
~ p -.. @
&5-
DIAPHRAM
(DIAF.%lGMA)
(DIAFRAGMA)
DIAPHGRAM
VALVE SEAT ASSEMBLY
(AS:EN TO DE LA VAL VULA)
(CUERPO)
SEAL
(SELLO)
BODY
(VALVLJ4
9-
VALVE
VALVE SPRING
(RESORTE)
*.
o
i @
---
O-RING
(EMPAQUE TADURA -O)
PORTED REGULATOR*
(APERTURA REGULADORA)
R43-/SO
Valvula
Ma f:tencbn
Reguladora
de Agua R06
Viilvula
Pt4gina 58
Reguladora
de Agua R43
294csMAN
/ Parametros
De Operation
$istema Aglomerador para Control de Polvos MANUA1 DE OpEr?AcioN Y MANTENcioN

TRC No.: 294C
Cliente: ComDania Minera Dona De Collahuasi
7. Regu/acfores
de Presion.
Los reguladores de presion del agua y del aire deben ser mantenidos en buenas condiciones de operation para permitir el grado de control requerido y asi evitar humectacion del producto, y tambien mantener la calidad de atomization requerida para controlar Ias emisiones de polvos. Las setiales que indican que un regulador requiere servicio, son:
q
El regulador no permite regresar a su punto de cero presion El regulador no abre 10suficiente para alcanzar un valor de presion alto. Existe aire soplando por la ventila de soplado, en la parte superior del regulador. reguladores de presion de aire solamente). (en Ios
Como
Mantener
Ios Reguladores.
Cerrrar la valvula de aislacion del regulador a ser mantenido. Remover la tapa inferior del regulador (la que debiera estar apretada con presion manual solamente). Retirar el v~stago de la valvula y Iimpiar el asiento. Volver a colocar ambos, en su lugar. Remover el bonete superior del regulador que permite acceso al diafragma. Remover e inspeccionar el diafragma para asegurarse de que no tenga agujeros. Devolver el diafragma a su Iugar, cuidando de que selle apropiadamente cuando se coloque de regreso el bonete. Abrir Ias valvulas de bloqueo del aire y del agua, y proceder a recalibrar Ios reguladores,
Cuando
Reemplazar
Ios Reguladores.
cuando la simple solution sugerida mas arribal no resuelva
Proceder a reemplazar Ios reguladores Ios problemas de operation,
Perdidas
(Fugas).
El regulador de agua puede gotear si la empaquetadura anular O, en la tapa inferior del cuerpo, esta dafiada. Debiera mantenerse un stock adecuado de dichas empaquetaduras, y proceder a cambiarlas cuando quiera sea necesario. > PARA MAS DE TALLESJ REFERIRSE AL MANUAL DE OPERA Clones, EN SU SECCl~N 5.

Cliente: Compania
DE OpERAcioN
Y MANTENcioN
TRC No.: 294C
i
ADJUSTMENT PERILLA KNOB DE AJLLS TE)
/./ .
BONNET O DE SCREW (TORN/LL BONETE) DEFLECTOR (OEFLECTOR)
~ &.
BONNET BONNET (70RNILL0 BONETE)
(BONE,,) SCREW DEL
a a * WASHER (A~NDELA)
~ +i
~%i;;H~TE)
.
1 . . . . . REGULATING (RESORTE SPRING
CENTER POST (POSTE CENTRAL)
.--DE REGuLATION)
FILTER
FIL TRANTE)
-& e. ! o
@i
e, ,/ @
(EL EMENTO
8
0 REGULATING SPRING (RESOR TE REGUblCION) + I BAFFLE OEFLECTOR
-:~~f$)
l!!ile B m e R084S0 e.:
+ ,4
@
.
OIAPHRAM (0/AFRAGMf
() REPAIR KIT
&-. Iiii!l ~~~~ . ---
(KITS DE REPARATION)
,.- 0
VALVE O-RING VALVE SPRING O.RING
(VAL VULA)
e
. hd t. .
0 9
NJTO.IJWIN ASSEMBLY
(MODULO DE AUTO-ORENATE)
(RESORTE)
0
o~~~lofl
FL @ ON ol~ @ Jo) ,f& fL (0 #
VALVE BOD (CUERPO)
METAL BOWL (RECIPIENCE METAL ICO)
(EMPAQUE
TADURA -0)
BOTTOM (TAPON
PLUG
INFERIOR) A
(VAL VULA) VALVE VALVE SPRING NUT (TUERCA)
O-RING (EMPAROUE TADURA -O)
&
\,//
(RESORTE~/ ./ ~~~~RK,T (KITS OE REPARATION)
Valvula
Reguladora Aire R08
de
Valvula
ReguIadora/Filtro
de Aire
B08
Mantencion / Parametros
De Operation
Ptlgina 60
294csMAN

Cliente: Compania
DE OpEr?AcioN Y MANIENcioN
TRC No.: 294C
Man!encinn
/ Parametros
De Operation
F%gina 61
2?4csMA. N

(_!Iiente Comoania Minera
DE
TRC No.: 294C
Dona De Collahuasi
Q------- CAP ~
-TOP
(GORRO)
PLATE
(GORRO)
TAPA SUPERIOR)
TOP PLATE
TAPA SUPERIOR)
8 &SPRING WASHER
(ARANDELA PRESION) DE
D 8-
23
0
COIL
(BOBINA)
COIL
(BOBINA)
SPRING WASHER
(ARANDELA PRESION) DE
BONNET SCREW
TORNILL O DEL BONETE)
SOLENOID BASE
(BASE DEL
SOL ENOIDE)
DIAPHRAM SPRING
@- . ft.
(RESORTE DEL DIAFRAGMA)
CORE ASSEMBLY
(NUCLED)
0.
DIAPHRAM
(DIAFRAGMA)
.. . !!!!/
TORNILLO DEL BONETE)
BONNET SCREW
SOLENOID BASE
(BASE DEL SOL ENOIDE)
DIAPHRAM SPRING
DEL
(RESORTE
DIAFRAGMA)
CORE ASSEMBLY
(NUCLED)
o
(EMPAQUE TADURA)
0.
DIAPHRAM
(DIAFRAGMA)
GASKET
,~
VALVE BODY
(CUERPO DE LA VAL VULA)
1
./
GASKET - (EMPAQUE
TADURA)
/v
VALVE BODY
(CUERPO VAL VULA) 1s0 DE LA
Valvula
Solenoide
de Aire
& Agua
Valvula
Solenoide
de Purga
Wmtencion
/ Parametros
De Operation
P4gina 62
294csMAIV

Cliente: Compania
DE
OpERAcioN
Y MANTENcioN
TRC No.: 294C I
8. Valvulas
So/enoides.
En el supuesto que una valvula solenoide falle, sea porque su bobina se quemo o por dafios en el vastago, la solucidn mas simple y adecuada consiste en reemplazarla con una nueva, Generalmente, dicha operation puede ser Ilevada a cabo sin tener que remover el cuerpo de la valvula de la tuberia. Simplemente remover Ios cuatro tornillos de sujecion que conectan la parte superior de la valvula, al cuerpo principal, e instalar una mitad superior nueva, El costo de Ios kits de repuesto no justifica el reemplazo de partes individuals. > PARA MA YORES DETALLES, OPERA Clones. REFERIRSE A LA SECC16N 5 DEL MANUAL DE

Cliente: Compania
DE
OpErtAcioN Y kh-wENci6N
TRC No.: 294C
SEAL RING
f!?
@
FILTER NUT
DE
fluERC4
RETENC/ONJf@ @@
#f fjti @ @ b
./05
.% 0 @
FILTER CANISTER HEAD

(C4BE2AL DEL FIL TRO)
Z!jj) \/-_
FILTER CARTRIDGE _ FILTER CARTRIDGE
iELEMENTO fIL TRANTEJ
TADURA -O)
v
a
POST
(POSTE CENTRAL)
II
FILTER
ELEMENT
\ m
! I
L--J
o
(EL EMNETO FIL TRANTE)
Q
FILTER CANISTER
(CUEI?PO DEL FIL TROJ
BAFFLE
(DEFLECTOR)
.-AU TO-DRAIN ASSEMBLY
(MODULO DE AUTO-DRENAJE)
METAL BOWL
WF/L ./S0
(RECIPIENCE METALICO)
DRAIN VALVE @ALVUL.4 DE DRENAJE)
F74-ISO ~) REPAIR KITS (KITS DE REPARATION)
NUT
(TUERCA)
Conjunto
Filtro
de Agua
Conjunto
Filtro
de Aire
Mantencion / Parametros
De Operation
Pdgina 64
294CSMAN

Cliente: Compania
DE
OpERAcioN
Y MANTENcioN
TRC No.: 294C
9. Filtros
de Aire y Agua.
Los conjuntos modulares de filtros de agua necesitan de mantencion periodica en una base regular. El cartucho filtrante deberia ser reemplazado mensualmente, por 10 menos, para impedir una perdida de eficiencia en el sistema de control de POIVOS. El reemplazo del cartucho se Ileva a efecto, mediante la remocion de Ios tornillos que aseguran la parte superior del conjunto, previo cierre de Ias valvulas de aislacion correspondientes, procediendo a remover el elemento filtrante, procurando un minimo de derrame de agua. Colocar un nuevo cartucho y proceder a rearmar el conjunto. Atin cuando e! filtro de aire viene suministrado con una option de drenado, el elemento aire necesita ser cambiado, una vez que se sature con contaminants. filtrante de
10. Instruments
Indicadores.
Los instruments indicadores suministrados con el sistema de supresion de POIVOS,vienen todos Ilenos con glicerina y con ranges apropiados a su aplicacion. Cada vez que alguno resulte dariado, debiera ser reemplazado por uno de igual rango, del stock de repuestos. No se recomienda el uso de instruments sin Iiquido interno, o instruments de calidad inferior, como reemplazos.
71. Compresores
y Tanques
de Aire.
Los manuales de mantencion y operation de Ios compresores, se encuentran en la seccion equipos, de este manual. Referirse a dichos manuales, para Ias correspondientes instrucciones de operacidn y mantencion.
12. Procedimientos
1.
diaries
de Inspection.
Una vez cada dia, cada tobera debe ser visualmente inspeccionada, para verificar el espectro apropiado de rociado. Si la tobera no estuviera funcionando correctamente, debiera ser removida y reemplazada con una de repuesto. Una observation visual de la eficiencia del sistema de control de polvos, debiera ser Ilevada a cabo varias veces al dia. Si se observasen demasiadas emisiones, su causa debiera ser inmediatamente determinada y registrada en el bitacora. Si Ios delantales estan gastados, deberian ser reemplazados tan pronto fuese posible. Si se encuentran puertas o escotillas, a medio cerrar o desapernadas, proceder a cerrarlas y asegurarlas de inmediato. Si se notasen agujeros de desgaste, ellos deberia ser reparados en el proximo paro de la planta. Si nada de 10anterior constitute una causa obvia de falla, proceder a reajustar Ios reguladores de presion de aire y agua, aumentando o disminuyendo sus respectivos flujos. Si esto no solucionase e! problems, inspeccionar nuevamente, cada tobera del area para asegurarse una vez mas que esten operando correctamente. Si no se pudiese encontrar la causa aparente, Ilamar a The Raring Corporation. Revisar Ios compresores de aire, vigilando su nivel de aceite, presion diferencial en el filtro, temperature y presion del aire de descarga, y presion diferencial en el separador de aceite. S1 LA CONDICION DEL AGUA ES MUY MALA, CAMBIAR LOS ELEMENTOS TAN A MENUDO COMO SEA POSIBIE. FILTRATES
2.
3,
>
,-. .. hfs.~!encion / Pararnetros De Clpe:xion
.. .....- . Pdgin3 65
294csMAN

I Cliente: Compania
DE
OPERACiON
Y MANTENciON
TRC No.: 294C I
!NVESTi~ACiON dE FA1lAS
iintomas
a tobera no esta rociando
Verificar
q
por Causa Probable
Electrica: Verificar que el sistema este energizado, que el switch selector este en Manual o en Auto; que Ias valvulas solenoids esten energizadas Que haya presion de aire y agua. Que Ias valvulas de cierre esten abiertas. Que Ias Valvulas Reguladoras regulando, Resonador esten abiertas y
c
q
.a Tobera no estd rociando orrectamente
de la tobera, gastado o daiiado.
El orificio esta tapado. Valvulas solenoids Los reguladores reemplazo, dariadas.
de Aire o Agua necesitan Iimpieza o
Los elementos filtrates en Ios filtros de Agua o Aire estan saturados. (Reemplazar Ios cartuchos). Empaquetadura datiada. El adaptador reemplazo. anular O en el Vastago esta
de la tobera necesita Iimpieza o
Las tuberias de agua o aire estan obstruidas.. Electrico: Verificar que haya energia electrica, que Ios interruptores esten cerrados, que Ios switches selectors esten en position Manual o en Auto, que Ias valvulas solenoids esten energizadas, El aire comprimido en el sistema no tiene la presion sufciente para activar el switch detector de presion. (60 P.SIG, por 10menos). El switch de presidn de aire esta dafiado o no esta calibrado adecuadamente. Asegurarse que el conductor rojo (contacto normalmente abierto) este conectado en el terminal apropiado. El contacto permisivo remoto esta dafiado o no esta funcionando adecuadamente, Relays de control o switches selectors daiiados,
3 Sistema no Opera
Existe la suficiente presion de aire en el sistema, pero @ste no funciona
Electrico: Verificar que haya energia electrica, que Ios interruptores esten cerrados,. que Ios switches selectors est~n en posicidn Manual o Auto, que Ias v~lvulas solenoids est~n energizadas
~westg~cion
De Fallas
P@ina 67
2WCSM.4N

Cliente: Comr)ania
DE
OpEr?Aciofv Y MANTENCiON
TRC No.: 294C
,intomas
Verificar
q
por Causa Probable

que
Revisar el alambrado electrico para asegurarse esta conectado a Ios terminals asignados.
El filtro de aire en la caja MULTI (o COMBO) esta tapado, No hay presion suficiente para activar el switch de presion. El switch de presion esta defectuoso calibrado correctamente. El permisivo funcionando Valvulas remoto esta dafiado correctamente. o sus bobinas, o no ha sido
o no esta datiadas.
I sistemu nose apagu .

q
solenoids
Relay de control, defectuoso. La Valvula solenoide de aire no sells completamente, debido a suciedad en la valvula o diafragma dariado. El tiempo de purga en el relay de tiempo, ubicado en el gabinete HOA ha sido modificado, o esta en una calibration incorrect. Electrico: Asegurarse de que haya energia electrica, y que el interruptor este cerrado. La temperature 400 F. exterior ambiente no esta bajo Ios esta dafiado o
Uperiodo de purga no se desconecta
2 sis(ema de calefacci6n
no funciona 9
El switch de temperature erroneamente ajustado.
El relay del malefactor en el gabinete HOA esta dafiado o funcionando incorrectamente. Contaminantes reparar. en el cuerpo de la valvula. Reparar o reemplazar. Limpiar y
~o
Las Vcilvulas regliladoras de Agua o Aire estcin operando correctamente.
Regulador dafiado.
El instrument a cero.
indicador
de presibn no baJa
Aire o agua entremezcl~ndose en Ias tuberias, debido a orificios tapados en Ias toberas. Instrument indicador datiado.
Existe airefiltrbndose
en la Ihea de agua.
.
q
Orificios tapados en Ias toberas. Empaquetadura anular O dafiada.
Valvula check dariada en et adaptador de la tobera. Demasiadas toberas para el volumen a controlar. o dariado.
s Humedad excesiva transportadoras. en Ias corre as . .

q
Resonador de la tobera desgastado Insuficiente presion de aire. Excesiva presion de agua.
El sistema es activado antes que el material empiece P~gina 68 294csM.4N
Investgacidn
De Fallas
Sistema Aglomerador para Control de POIVOS MANUA1 DE OpEr?AcioN

Y MANwvciofv
TRC No.: 294C
Sintomas
Verificar
por Causa Probable
a ser procesado,
q
Tipo de tobera inadecuado, Delantales y sellos en Ias correas y cubiertas de contention no estan siendo mantenidos en forma apropiada. Los voltimenes de contention 10suficientemente grandes, Insuficiente de Ias correas no son
. El Sistema ADS no eski abatiendo el po[vo en forma efectiva.

q
numero de toberas.
4.5.4
lista de partes
23.01.98
COLLAHUASI
Hoja en blanco
COLLAHUASI
23.01.98

Cliente: Compania
DE OPEt7ACiON
Y MANTENCiON
TRC No.: 294C
LisTA
dE PARTES
Conjunto
100002 101005 101501.2 102003 102011 104010 104011
Modular
de Toberas ADS:
FP2S3V
FP-2S3V, Conjunto de Toberas, con Vastago de Bronce FP-1 Resonador, Acero Inoxidable FP-2S3V, Orificio, Acero Inoxidable
Cabeza, Tobera, Bronce Vastago, Tobera, Bronce Empaque O, Sello del Vastago Empaque O, para alineacion
Conjunto
100005.2 101003 101503.2 102003 102011 104010 104011
Modular
de Toberas ADS:
FP5
FP-5, Conjunto de Toberas, con Vastago de Bronce FP-5 Resonador, Acero Inoxidable FP-5, Orificio, Acero Inoxidable Cabeza, Tobera, Bronce Vastago, Tobera, Bronce Empaque O, Sello del Vastago Empaque O, para alineacion
Conjunto
210034 300063 550001 303005 303003 303003 303013 401001.2 200002 200003 210029 301203 Lists De Parks
Gabinete
Multi-Funcion:
42x42x12.
Del MULTI-I, -2,-3, y -4
Gabinete,
Filtro de Aire, 1 1/2 NPT, Filtro de Agua, 1/2 NPT, Valvula Solenoide para Aire, 1 1/2 NPT, N. C., 110 VAC, 50 Hz Valvula Solenoide para Aire, 1/2 NPT, N. C,, 110 VAC, 50 Hz. Valvula Solenoide para Agua, 1/2 NPT, N.C., 110 VAC, 50 Hz Valvula Solenoide, Switch de Presion Indicador de Presion, O-100 PSIG Indicador de Presidn, 0-160 PSIG Caja de Empalmes E16ctricos. Valvula de Bela, 1/2 NPT. ..=. FMgina 71 294csIMWJ 1/2 NPT, N. O., 110 VAC, 50 Hz

Cliente: Compania 300110 300003 301213 301210.2 600003 600014 600017 210029 420002 450004.3
DE @) ERACiON Y MANTENCiON
TRC No,: 294C
Minera Dona De Collahuasi Regulador de Aire, 1/2 NPT. Regulador de Agua, 1/2 NPT. Valvula de Bela, 1/2, Mazzer Valvula de Buje, 1/8 NPT Conector Macho, 1/2 MPTxl/2 Codo Macho, 1/2 MPTxl/2
OD, Conector tipo Rapido
OD, Conector tipo Rapido
Codo Macho, 1/2 MPTx3/8 OD, Conector tipo R~pido Caja de Empalmes Electricos
Malefactor, 200W, 220VAC/50Hz Conector, Tuberia flexible tipo Sealtite, 3/4 NPT
Conjunto
210007 300107 550001 303003 303013 401001,2 200002 200003 210029 301203 300110 300003 301213 301210.2 600003 600014 600017 210029 420002 450004.3
Gabinete
Multi-Funcion:
36x30x I 2.
Del MULTI-5 y 6
Gabinete,
Filtro de Aire, 1/2 NPT. Filtro de Agua, 1/2 NPT. Valvula Solenoide para Agua, 1/2 NPT, N, C., 110 VAC, 50 Hz Valvula Solenoide, Switch de Presion Indicador de Presion, 0-100 PSIG Indicador de Presion, 0-160 PSIG Caja de Empalmes Electricos. 1/2 NPT, N.O., 110 VAC, 50 Hz
Valvula de Bela, 1/2 NPT. Regulador de Aire, 1/2 NPT. Regulador de Agua, 1/2 NPT. Valvula de Bela, 1/2, Mazzer Valvula de Buje, 1/8 NPT Conector Macho, 1/2 MPTxl/2 Codo Macho, 1/2 MPTxl/2 OD, Conector tipo R6pido
OD, Conector tipo Rdpido
Codo Macho, 1/2 MPTx3/8 OD, Conector tipo RApido Caja de Empalmes E16ctricos Malefactor, 200W, 220VAC/50Hz Conector, Tuberia flexible tipo Sealtite, 3/4 NPT
Conjunto
210025 300107 / kfa De Parks
Gabinete
PRV:
Nema 3R. 3/8 NPT. PAgina 72 294csMAN
Gabinete, 20x16x8,
Filtro de Aire/Regulador,
Sistema Aglomerador para Control de Polvos MANUA1 DE OpERACiON Y MANTENCiON

Cliente: Compania 200011 200012 210023 301210,2 300412 300105 600003 600022 600017 600018 600022,2 600019 600004 600011 420001 450043 450004.1 Minera Dona De Collahuasi Indicador de Presibn, 0-30 P.SIG. Indicador de Presion, 0-100 PSIG. Caja de Empalmes Electricos TRC No.: 294C
V~lvula de Buje, 1/8 NPT. Valvula Check, 1/4 OD, en-lines. Regulador de Agua, 1/4 NPT. Conector Macho, 1/2 MPTxl/2 Conector Macho, 1/4 MPTxl/4 OD, Conector tipo Rapido. OD, Conector tipo Rapido.
Codo Macho, 3/8 MPTx3/8 OD, Conector tipo Rapido. Codo Macho, 3/8 MPTxl/2 Codo Macho, 1/4 MPTxl/4 Codo Macho, 1/4 MPTxl/2 OD, Conector tipo Rapido. OD, Conector tipo R5pido. OD, Conector tipo Rapido.
Codo Macho, 1/8 MPTx5/16 OD, Conector tipo Rapido. Codo Macho, 1/8 MPTxl/4 OD, Conector tipo R~pido,
Malefactor, 30W, 220VAC/50Hz Conector para tubo flexible tipo Sealtite, 1 MPT. Conector para tubo flexible tipo Sealtite, 3/4 MPT.
Conjunto
Gabinete
HOA:
Nema 4.
Gabinete, 460100 460100.5 460002
Switch Selector de 3 Posiciones. Switch Selector de 2 Posiciones. Relay, DPDT, 220 VAC.

Cliente: Com~ania
DE
OpERAcioN Y MANTENCiON
TRC
No
294C
LisTAs
DE PARTES DE
REpUESTO
PARA PUESTA EN MARCHA
Parte No
I
Descripci6n
I
Cantidad
en uso
I
Repuesto
I
Costo Unitario
$115.00
100002,5 101503
I Conjunto Tobera, FP5, Acero Inoxidable Oritlcio, FP5, Acero Inoxidable
I 120
120 120 32 32 32 o o !152 152 152 I 152 12 318 4 2 11
I 12 12
24
$26.50
$22.75 $115.00 $26.50 $22.75 $9.75 S9.75
I $35.00
101003
100005.3
Resonador, FP5, Acero Inox, (Para tobera FP2S3V)

Conjunto Tobera, FP2S3V, Acero Inoxidable Orificio, FP2S3V, Acero Inoxidable Resonador, FP1, Acero Inox. (Para tobera FP2S3V)
6 6 8 0 0
10 0
101501.2 101005 100358.3 100357.1

102004
Tobera, MH60 (tip) Tobera, MH300 (tip)

I Tobera,
Cabeza, Acero Inoxidable
102012
104010
Tobera, Vastago, Acero Inoxidable Empaque O, Sello del Vastago Empaque O, para Alineamiento Cartucho Filtro, Agua, 10 Micrones Elemento Elemento I Elemento Filtrante para Filtro de Aire/Regulador, Filtrante para Filtro de Aire, 1/2, F74 Filtrante para Filtro de Aire, 1 1/2, FI 8
$19.80 $0.24 $0.36 $7.38 $4.45 $11.25

$35.00
25 I 25 24 1 1 11
104011
550103
300107.2 300060,2 300057.2

Cliente: Compania
DE
OpEr?AcioN Y MANTENCiON
TRC No.: 294C
PARA UN ANO DE OPERACION
Parte No
Descripci6n
Cantidad en uso
Repuesto
Costo Unitario
Repuestos
1 100005.2
1 101501.2
para Mantencion
32 32 32 120 120 120 152 o o 152 152 152 12 12 2 4 318 4 16 32 96
120
Conjunto Tobera, FP2S3V, Acero Inoxidable Orificio, FP2S3V, Acero Inoxidable Resonador, FPI, Acero Inox. (Para tobera FP2S3V)
$115.00 $26.50 $22.75 $115.00 $28.50
1 101005
1 100002.5
101503.2 1
Conjunto Tobera, FP5, Acero Inox.
orificio, FP5, Acero Inoxidable

Resonador, FP5, Acero Inoxidable
120
360
1 101003 101002
100357.1 100358.1 102012 104010 104011
$22.75
$35.00 $9.97 $9,75 $19.80 $0.24 $0.36 $7.38 $5.75 $10.83 $45.00 S4.45
Tobera, Cabeza, Acero Inox 303

Tobera Hidraulica, Tobera Hidraulica, MH60, 1GPM (tip) MH300, 5GPM (tip)
30 0 0 30 200 200 300 48 1 1 1
Tobera, Vastago, Acero Inoxidable Empaque O, Sello del Vastago Empaque O, para Alineamiento Cartucho Filtro, Agua, 10 Micrones Filter Gasket, water Elemento Elemento Elemento Filtrante para Filtro de Aire, 1/2 Filtrante para Filtro de Aire, 1 1/2, F18 Filtrante para Filtro de AirelRegulador,
1 550103 , 550102
300060.2 300063.2 300107.2
Partes de Reemplazo
102020.2
Tobera, Adaptador,
Delrin, Para tipo Neblina
152 12 8 8 4 18 112 1/2 8 4 4 4 4 12
20 2 2 2 1 3 1 1 1 1 1 ]1
$28.80 $101.20 $26.58 $26.63 $26.63 $36.40 $64.00 $85.00 $15.60 $2,25 $4.25 ---W. f 3
401001.2 300105 200011 200012 200003 303020 303022 300107.1 300107.3 300063.3 300060.4
Switch de Presion, dentro del Gabinete MULTI Regulador de Agua, 1/4 NPT, R06 Indicador de Presion, 0-30 PSIG Indicador de Presion, 0-100 PSIG Indicador de Presion, 0-160 PSIG Kits de Reparation NPT, N.C. Kits de Reparation NPT, N.O. Kits de Reparation B08, 3/8 NPT para Valvulas Solenoids, para Valvulas Solenoids,
para Filtro de Ake/Regulador,
Empaque O para el Filtro de Aire B08, 3/8 Empaque O para el Filtro de Aire F18, 1 % I Empaque O para Filtro de Aire F74, 1/2
Lists De Partes De Repuesto
P&Jina 76
294csMAbJ
Sistema Aglomerador para Control de POIVOS MANUA\

Cliente: Compania
DE OpERAcioN Y
MANTENcioN
TRC No.: 294C
DiAQRAMAS y ESPECihCACiONES
294 C-1 OA 294 C-1 OB 294 C-1 OC 294 C-IOD 294 C-20A1 294 C-20A2 294 C-20B1 294 C-20C 294C-20D 294 C-30A 294 C-30B 294 C-30C 294 C-30D 294 C-30E 294 C-30F 294C-40 294C-41 294C-50 294C-51 294C-60 294C-61 Diagrama De Tuberias Diagrama De Tuberias & Instrumentation & Instrumentation
Diagrama De Tuberias & Instrumentation Diagrama De Tuberias Diagrama Esquematico Diagrama Esquematico Diagrama Esquematico Diagrama Esquem~tico Diagrama Esquematico & Instrumentation Electrico Electrico Electrico Electrico Electrico MULTI-1 MU LTI-2 MU LTI-3 MU LTI-4
Conjunto Gabinete Multi-Funcion, Conjunto Gabinete Multi-Funcion, Conjunto Gabinete Multi-Funcidn, Conjunto Gabinete Multi-Funcion,
Conjunto Gabinete Multi-Funcir5n, , MULTI-5 Conjunto Gabinete Multi-Funcion, MULTI-6
Conjunto Modular para Filtraci6n Primaria del Agua Conjunto Modular para Filtration Distribution Box Assembly Primaria del Agua
Conjunto Gabinete Regulador Presibn Connjunto Soporte Modular Soldado de la Tobera
Connjunto Soporte Modular Soldado de la Tobera
BK53970-01 O V9A9P701 VI A9P701 V9A9P703 V9A9P702 V8A9P701 307 EAU815 204 EAU546 . Diagtamas y Especfkaciones . .. .. . p@;,% ?? 294(wWW ...
II
(--.-FJ$=%1
,&x,+&i\j
I1lll1lI1 11111111111 a
-w-
I
I
v
I
)111
II
1(
A
I II II II
WZ2?7T--T-55H-55% ++---?
+-?-XN-X
--
I 1 I I I
Y
,7
Y
I
1
I 1 Y
\,-~
-,I I
I 1 1 I
I ,,
I
I I I I I I 1 I I I I I I L
I I
g____ __ JH-i-ELGg
~,-i -+--+
----4-------J
_________!
E 0
.
c-i
.9.7
__
i 1-7r---!=+~y~J
I I I I I
I I I
1
~.-r ---
I
%
1/
1
ti
w t--
z
LL
LX
L&
o
z J
6
lx w z
I
I
L----
a-
__~ /
WI 0
s \
GENERAL HOA-4
120 VAC/50 nZ. CONTROL CIRCUIT 2z0 VAC/50 Hz. - HEAT CIRCUIT
NOTES:
ALL PIPING ANO FITTINGS FROM FILTER SKID TO MULTl BOX AsSEMBLY BY OTHERS.
BE
PRV-3
BOX
T
TEMP. SWITCH (RfMOTE MOUNTED)
I PAL ,@ 0. ;_ I I I MS .---_-J ~ _ I -a . .._ ~REMOTE PERMISSIVE I
AIR/WAER OUTLET FROM PRV BOX(ES) 0.0 ASSEMBLY TO NOZZLE MOUNT TO BE 5/16 NYLON AIR TUBING 1/40.0. NYLON wATER TuBING, & 3 WATTS/FT, HEAT TRAcE ~RE RUN INSIOE 3/4DIA. SEALTICHT CONOUIT, & INSULATEO W/ PIPE lNSuLAnoN (PROVIOEO BY TRC)
FP2 NOZZLES
4. CONOUIT SUPPORT, B-LINE CHANNEL, ANO B-LINE PIPE CLAMP (OETAILS 1 & 11) SUPPLIED BY TRC.
f=-xl-
7%..,J-Lx-
I----II
Tfi? (8) PLCS (sEE OWG 294 C-61)
---; I
\Jl I ! 1 +;
, I I I I 1 h-l I I I I r U -1 rJ
I
1/1 +x ROM DWG. :94C-1OA A i
l-__ J
PRESSURE REGULATOR BOX ASSEMBLY (SEE DWG. 294 C-51)
6~1
CRUSHER
\ JUNCTION TYPICAL) [ sEE DWG. BOX 294 C52)
4 (BY OTHERS)
B 220v/50Hz 200W
./ PAL
02 ,.
@
I
I
294C-1OB I/210 (BY OTHERS) X 5LG HOSE 1/2
I I
\/
I 1
-F4-
I I
._
--
I
I
PRV-4 BOX r--1
I
COARSE ORE CONVEYOR
#;-&&?::.
(sIE DWG. 296-30f)
FP2 NOZZLES
TW. (8) PLCS (SEE DWC. 294C-61)
l-_J
PRESSURE REGULATOR BOX ASSEMBLY (SEE DWG. 294 C-51) KRUPP FOROERTECHNIK cOLLAHUASl PROJECT PuRcHASE ORDER NO.: EQUIPMENT NO.: TAG NO.: 300667 fJ7/OIB
OIA. SEALTICHT
pENLATON\
n----n
,/%1:E
3/4.
DIA. SEALTIGHT ~
II pENsuLAnON\
In
CONOUIT
CONOUIT
TR(
3 WATTS/FT, ~EAT TRhCE WRE D,,A,L,,,,, 294C-61 B 294C-52 mB_~~~ -~~AILm:i:NEc HNNEL s WATTS/FT. HFAT TRACE MRE WATER TuBE 1
The Raring J Corporation
E==---l
E&If!=.
624
( I
I I I I I I I I
I I
I I I I 1
I I I I I I I I
I
I I I
I I
I I
,
I I I *_-~ I I I
L.J______
I I I I I I
I I \ I I
I I I I
)
I
I I I I I I I
I I I I I
,r______
I I I I II
II
2-.YL ~ __
I I I
1
-J
I II
I 1
I
I
1-
II
L_J
(3
mm ml--l
@ h
) I /1 1
g, Qp: > El
al
- r,!--l
1 u 1 > <: 1 > I
r-1~.
:: <-->
gl
<-
:1
I
l>, ~-
1}--;
1 I I 1
1-. ..1
.-.
o.r. r.
n,=
<.
Jy
120
VAC/
50
HZ
-----~
I
CR*1
MU~~-4
2-14 ___ _L&, FV 4-2 dWATER VALVf SOLENOID N.C.
019
b [:
001
, OF -1
HS-200 UL-200 . . R ,. POWER ON 020
-L3 Fi
A 4-3
PuRGE vALVE
SOLENOIO NO.
MU~TJ- 3
002 ___y3,~jf~:-
HS-301 KD2 SYSTEM ACIW SULFIOE TRUCK DUMP SOUTH WALL 021 ~ ~CR4-1 2-15 ---@!!!!!!AIR SOLENOIO VALVE. N.C
003 I I 004
I
3POT RELAY
022
I I
I
I I
L__ .- 2-5
PAL 302
.,
A /.
T
LOW AIR ALARM
023
LAY OFF AER
005
2POT
RELAY
024
pAL
301 LOW WATER ALARM 02!
006
r--l p+~iy -- ----r

_
REMOTE TO OCS OR PLC _l_a-----CR1-3 2-17 _+_______ REMOTE
CR2-1
TS 2-1
MP. SW!TCH ATER CONTROL
RELAY
HEATER
ON
2POT 007
RELAY
02(
L--@---
SYSTEM ACTIVE 5ULFIOE TRUCK OUMp SOUTH WALL OR PLC 2-20 LOW AIR PRESSURE MULn-3
~-_T MULTI3
CR-1 2-7
TO OCS
2-19 __+-----------
008
__
L(x-~ lm
FV -3
N) J
02 WATER VALVE SOLENOIO N.C.
~,_--.
l-I
REMOTE
CR3-1
TO DCS
OR PLC _____
009
LJ
KC) 1 ~----Lw!! CR1-2 --~
2-21
010
!
t
02 SOLENOIO N.O. 02
.__+
2-.22 .
LOW WATER MULn-3
PRESSURE
PuRGE VALVE.
REMOTE CR4-3 ~,----------------2-23
TO OCS
OR PLC
2-24 SYSTEM ACnVf SLUIOE TRUCK NORTH WALL OUMP
AIR SOLENOIO VALVE. NC.
REMOTE .-__+
TO OCS
OR PLC _______
2-26
LOW AIR PRESSURE MULTI4
011
REMOTE
TO OCS
OR PLC
---*
012 OELAY ITMER OFF
2-20 -~
_______
LOW WATER MULn-4
PRESSURE
GENERAL
ACTIVE TRUCK WALL 1. ALL DUMP 2. WIRING
NOTES:
14 AWG. MIN. IN510E INSIOE ) _) FIELO HEAT MULTI-FUNCICN OIST-*, WTRINC. TRACE BYTRc .%vO INSTALLEO 0. INSIDE iAULm BOXES FROM BY OTHERS. PRV-. BOX. ANO PFIL-* BOXES.
o
013 SYSTEM SULFIOE NORTH
n n .
,. \ .
6) TERMINAL (.) E TERMINAL - _
014 I I 015
I I PAL
3PDT
RELAY 3. ( (-
3 402 A . . LOW AIR ALARM 4. 5. I I

L
-u .-i
.2-1? T
./
ALL CONTROL
ELEMENTs
TO BE SQU>RE HEATER
I
I
I
I
I I
(4-7)
i
2POT RELAY
FIELD RUN WIRING HEATER CIRCUITS.
TO POWER
CR5
016
017
-;
(4-6) Z,-------------
2-13 v
PAL 401 ./ A /. LOW WATER ALARM
KRUPP FOROERTECHNIK COLLAHUASI PROJECT PuRCHASE OROER NO.: EQUIPMENT NO.: TAG NO.:
30 CE5787/018
01 e
CR6
2POT
RELAY
-4
~m
I
Th,s h+ drawing
IKL
.4,r R.udm r. (360) 892 ,,5,,
is iha in fcrmdim,
The Raring CorpOra\iOn Codrnl

,.s (B,) 89, Wa ),24
I
R.r,nq C,m Or3! !r. m svccKcoIIm d:::
m my my .c -
P, OPeCt Y O! dm.hg,,
CUSTOMER
COMPANIA MINERA DONA OE COLLAHUASI
d,tol,, w
d.mmted
b
m m c294 C20E2
mq
.0!
em.kd
be rewc.d wed
1
294 C-30B 294 C-1OB REF. DWG ASIY NCL ------ -. .- -
5.
ker,.m R.a,,g Corps{., k.n. TITLE z
.It. o.t .r;tten
..m WiZOtbn 01 1.:
DRAWN : Kuch CHSCK ~KU(W

~:., DWG NO :
>
0
ELECTRCIAL SCHEMATIC OIACRAM FOR DUST SUPPRESYON SYSTEM FOR SULFIDE TRUCK DUMP POCKET
294 C20B1
I SHEKS
I OF
]
!
sCALE
: NONE
.. . I
m.
.. ,
.,.
..
.,
~
1
220 /50
HEATfR
---~
L.?
CIRCUIT
L1
CB2 50 A- )
MULm3 200W HEATER AA
J )
...
(N1) NI HEATER CIRCUIT #l FOR MULn-3 BOX PFIL-2 DIST-8. BOXES BOX, OIST-7, AND OIST-9
CB3 =2
m J.,
Ml
~H1>AAA
~\l\l\l\l\r Vvvvv
(H!) --IY
T II I L
PFIL2 BOX 200WHfA1E; ~H>AAA AA ~\l\l\l\l\~ v
1
~
(N)
(N1)
TII
I
l--
s--.--
HEATER mACC ---- ---1
7---{1
<Nl)
II
I
II
----HfATER ---- lRACL -d -I
L--
-i
(t+,)
(HI)
<M>
L!
~H>AA r -7~.J\l\l\l\ll
DISTB
BOX
A~
30W HEAIE; AA
~~1-II
I --l 1
1,
Vvvvv
L--
------
HEAT2R lRAC[ ------
.-7*
BOX DIST9 .JOW HEATE~ ~H)4AAAA -Jll\lll\l\r*

Vvvvv
1] (N)
,1 II
GENERAL
(N1)
NOTES:
14 AWG. MIN INSIOE INSIOE ) c) FIELO HEAT MULn-FUNCmON DIST--, WIRING. TRACE BY TRC ANO INSTALLEO 0, INSIOE MULn BOXES FROM BY OTHERS. PRv . BOX ANO PFIL-* BOXES
--1. ALL WRING

(m)
11
HCAXR
------
lRACE ------
I -J
2.
u TERMINAL
(.) LS TERMINAL 3. ( _ _ _
MULTI-4
(_
4. ALL CONTROL 5
ELEMfNTS
TO BE SQUARE HEATER
FIELD RUN WRING HEATER CIRCUITS.
TO POWER
D n n .
. .
508x406x203 2Dx16xBBox NEMA4 KRUPP FOROERTECHNIK COLLAHUASI PRO.ICT PURCHASE OROER NO: EQUIPMENT NO.: TAG NO,:
u .
3C066787/018
(H2J
n 3 -u u Gn M 0
L-
k-----
HEATER lRACE ----d _-l
I
l--l
r
II 1
BOX DIST12 30W HEAIEF ~H>.4AA AA

Il\r+ Vvvvv liEAiER TRACE -----d
1 (N)
II I
--y+~\l\l\l
[N2)
!-------L--
---1
n n
a
294 C20B1 . 294 C-30B
b +J-
thermostat
5W HEATER
1
KL
,,2
Raring Corporation C.nld

so. (>80)
., !65 59,
.4>7 FwIdm
i, the
,.
(,,,)
@92 W>. ., . m.
.
7,,9
d,,.
.q
.,...,,,, ,....
Ror,.
C,, pw,,,
cn
cUSTOMER COMPANIA UINERA DONA DE COLLAHUAY CONTRACT NO
D.s,q.
1,
inlwmaticm, dm.inqs. det. ~s, .0! be reprdu,xd w duplicate, .,, rnof my m< ,-..:,. her, fr. m .,!.,., .,, t,en OUmo,,zol, on of 1..
~ 0<:
I:r::cmoration-
DRAWN , S KU(%
3-6-97
.. I -., I
. =..,,..-.
C-r.
,..,
,.
A-.
1=, .
r
I
I
HS-300 bfF
120
VAC/
50
HZ N
t
I CBIO_____-___
W-300 ./ R ,. HS-501 UL-501 ./ R 3-2 , >& 1 , /. 20A ?
220 VAC/50Hz
A,
. - -
~)
12 3C5
)
_. MULTI5
(N)
OWER
ON
001
I
CR2
+~
I
HI CH>AhAAA
~\l\l\\\l\ Vvvvv lc.3w N)
3/4 19
___
+
10
1/2
MULTI-5
~--a
;YSTCM
ACTIVE
002
-\~~_-_-_
17
r-
{]
PSL
51
,~
HEATER INSJDE UUL1-EOX
II II
REMOTE ,Lc I I L. ~%=
003
AIR PR[SS, SMTCF N.O. S[1 0415 kPo
J=+3--PAL-501
jPOT
R[LAY L
L----HCAIIR _
_J_-_J
7RACS
I
I
1 1
(Nl)
HOA3
I
.OW
AIR ALARM
HI] (H) h
PRv-1
004
[
I I
~r
-II
TII
1.
J\,A\lA\/A\;\F~-Vvvvb
1+ II
II
I 005
2POT
RCLAY
30W HEATSR INYDE PRV EOX
PSL
52
(5-73 +
PAL-SO>
------
---HEATER mAEl _ -1
J
* > .
KS-6)
LOW WATER
ALARM
1-
006
1-~1 I.!&lWw
PRV-2
AA
(N) Ir N!)
007
MU~~5
CRI-7 3-7 _______~mq-
1
I I
1
2POT RELAY
~H,4AA
----~
r
11 II
\l\l\l\l vvvvk~--30W H2AISR lNYDf
1
II II
PRV BOX
008
~1
FV 5-3
WATER SOLENOIO VALVE. N.C.

1-
L -----
---HEATER mAm
J J
009
u
KO1
3-8 - -(5*
FV 5-2
PuRGE SOLENOID VALVE. N.O.
010
AIR SOLENOID VALVE. NC.
k~
II THERMOSTAT 10W HEATER 406x305x152 16x112x6 NEMA4 Box b
011
012
013
iTr-- r--7
_
TS 3-1 I @:@[y = REMOTE ml-3
3-10
_---+ ---_-_
TS-3-1
sz----TO DCS OR PLC

S!
DELAY TIMER
OFF
TEMP. SWITCH HEATER CONTRCL
RELAY
014
HEATER ON KRUPP FOROERTECHNIK COLLAHUASI PRO&CT PURCHASE OROER NO.: EOUIPMENT NO.: TAG NO.:
30066787/018
015
SYSTEM OXIOE
ACTIVE FEEO OISCHARGE
REMOTE TO OCS OR PLC 01( ~_D-----CR2-1 3-12 _+_______2:~ LOW AIR PRESSURE MULn-5 REMOTE CR-I 01 ~l_~_______ 3-14 +--_ --:; ~;~ TO DCS OR PLC LOW WATER MULn-5 PRESSURE
GENERAL
1. ALL 2. WIRING
NOTES:
14 GA. MIN. MULTI-FUNCTION OIST-. ~RINC. TRACE BY TRC AND INSTALLED O. MuLn BOX FROM BY OTHERS. W-d
be r.>r.duced o, a. Pl!c. tcd .,, r. y my .wk >. ?x:cu ted ner, fr, m , {out .,1! !.< mlhw, zotion of T: R.,,ng Corporal, On.
~) TERMINAL (=) @ TERMINAL -- ) -) CONTROL
INSIOE INSIOE FIELO HEAT
BOX. ANO PFIL- BOXES. I
PRV*,
3. ( (-
TR(
I
A,, Mu( m COd IQi

I
4. 5.
ALL
ELEMENTS
TO BE SQUARE HEATER
CWLAHUAY DRAWN ;KW+ CHECK : KUGH
PROJECT 3/7/97 7-II-97 CONTRACT S0
FIELO RUN W4RINC TO POKR HEATER CIRCUIT.
INSIDE
Tm.E
TRC
294.2
u. /ti
294C-30E 294 C-1OC RSF.
ELECTRCIAL FOR OUST .AXSV NR, -.. . --.. - -- .. ----. - -
SCHEMATIC SUPPRESSION FEEOER
OIAGRAM SYSTEM
DWG NO :
294 C20C
I sHE?T
1 OF
Is
I
AT
OxlOE
DISCHARGE
sCAII
: NONE
DWC
120 VAC/ L
50
Hz -
r-
jCB2
6A
Cu \ WF HS-400
~ovcoz
CB16 20A ____________ ____-__ ...
-1
12 305 3/4 19 -
4-1 UL-400 \ ,, 001
T POWIR ON
,-.
MULTI-6
002
(6-I) ;~~l HS3601 UL-601 (6-2) \\t,/A _&
~.
10 1/2 -3/8-0 9.5
CR2
HI
PSL 6{6-3)
SYSTEM
ACTIVE
I 003
I
I
AIR PRESS. SWITEN N.O. SET @415 kPa
3POT
RELAY
L-
L--___
H[ATER
-----J
TRACE -1
I 004
L_
1 1
(N) N1) --
I HOA4
L
I
J
PAL -601
LOW AIR ALARM
I I 005
-------F ml
I
I PSL I (6-6> 006 -r~ 6-2 (6-7)

2PDT
RELAY
I
HI) --q-~
PRV-3
~H)AAA \vl\v, \;,,
AA \ry vu
S4JLflDC KfKR DISOIARC4
1+
II II
II
II
30W HEATER INSC6 PRv BOX
L ----
----HCA7ER IRACE
J -J
@
[~/
!,0-0s44,
PAL-602
L
LOW WATER ALARM
PEzl
e
II II
007
~_-T MULTI6
OOB
2PLIT
RELAY II
30W HEATER lNSIOS PRv BOX II
__
J_6-Q
FV
009
D
6-3 FV 6-2
(6-5) [N) X*
L ----WATER VALE. SOLINOIO NC,

HfAIER
----TRACE
J J
PURGE VALX. I i
SOLENOIO N.0,
1 1
@-@
KO1
4-0
010
AIR SOLENOID VALVE. MC.
>~
THERMOSTAT
P5EEl
406,305,152 16 MI12x6. NEMA4 Box
P==yl
1[
10W
HEATER
011
012
v
CR1-2 KD1
o
c1
c -%
TS ~7 4-1
013
OELAY TIMER
OFF
-_}T_l
I
l-
TS 4-1 I
&Q;:w)J 014
m 3
CR1-3 015 ~~.
4-1o _.__
REMOTE --+-
TO DCS
OR PLC
E
____y
TEMP. SWITCH HEATER CONTROL
RELAY
HEATER
ON KRUPP FOROERTECHNIK COLLAHUASI PROJfCT

PuRCHASE EOUIPMENT OROER NO.: NO.: 30066787/018
______$
SYSTEM SULFIOE
ACTIVE FEEO OISCHARGE
TAG
NO.:
GENERAL
NOTES:
BOX ANO PFIL-* BOXES.
REMOTE
CR2-1 4-12 _._. __+---
TO DCS
OR PLC LOW AIR PRESSURE MULTI-6 1. ALL YARING 14 GA, MIN. (n) 2. 0 TERMINAL INSIOE MULT1-FUNCnON m TERMINAL
---
016
--++--.---
REMOTE
CR3- I 4-14
TO DCS +--------
OR PLC INSIDE OIST-0,

WYRINC. TRACE By TRC ANO INSTALLEO BY OTHERS.
PRv-*,
017 -~-------
LOW WATER MULn-6
PRESSURE
3. (
(-
jFIELO
-) HEAT
,TRC
A,, fblltiwn
The
Roring Corporation
Co?)f,ol (,,0, of ,,> b. ,,,. Ro,,nq E,,Do,o,, c. I
-b
m
4. ALL
CONTROL RUN
ELEMENTS
TO BE SWARE HEATER
D. INSIDE MULTI BOX FROM
1. (,,0] 8,,
Th<s dr,.,nq ;,
,65,, ,h.
,.,
m r
P,.aperty
5. FIELD
HEATER
WIRING
TO POWFR
CIRCUIT.
~,!, Ws,q :f.r,n.i,m .j,awkq,, d.to~,, o, SO, C>I>CO!>C. may not E. ,.produced w ..,1,.. !:4 m nloy my .C.-. of T,, 0. ,,,. {,5 c, cfrmn ,t,. ut .ri Ll, o,thof)mtb. am. q CwPoro,;on TITLE :
CUSTOMER BECI+TEL CCiLAHUASJ DP.AWN :KUCH CHECK :KUCti DAVY PROJECT
... ____
ELECTRCIAL FCR DUST AT SULFloE
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM SUPPRESSJON SYSTEM FEEDER OISCHARGE
DWG NO SCALE , NONE SHEET I OF 1
-T-
1? ._.~._
;VOH NIISNI S7VN11!E13L WO&
-. I I
.9
t-
L
n
n
/
I
i
El a
t
@KbE E 3 .
.-
:FIJ 866J ~./ :OJ
Zi
Uer UOW 6MP eOE-W6Z\L
,L6EL /\:0
GENERAL
1, ALL HEAT PIPING, TRACE BY FROM ASSEMBLY
NOTES:
FITTINGS, OTHERS. INSULATION, & SOURCE TO MULTI-1
3. APPROX. 4. ASSEMBLY
MIGHT
(250
LBS) SHOP ASSEMBLED.
TO BE COMPLETELY
2. FIELD PIPING TRAN5MlSWt4 EOUIPMENT.
TO BE ARRANGED TO PREvENT OF ANY STRAIN TO THIS
5. AIR/WATER OUTLET FROM MULTI-1 ASS[MBLY TO DIST-BOX ASSEMBLIES TO BE 1 /2 O D. NYLON AIR TUBING, 3/80.12 NYLON WATER TUBING, & 3 WA TTS/FT HEAT TRACE WIRE RUN INSIDE 1 DIA SEALTIGHT CONDUIT, & INSULATED W/ PIPE INSULATION. (PROVIOEO BY TRC)
T:RM
(N)
a. 703mm TERM. l-i5 1-14 -. ---
---
7 1/4 184rnm 2 51mm
TERM
TEfik! TEr?w TERM, TERM
1-15 ll 1-12 19 1-1
.... . . .. .. . -------------------
CONNECnON ~ 7
1
-P
TERM
1
I
F I
P
T
_ &
,.-..--+ [N)
(N)
$ =
SCLINCID
VALVE
(N)
(N)
=_~2E - ),> E?
A,E ?Q7GE W4ZF
SOLENOID
VALVE
VALVE (NC)
(Nj
(N)
SOLENOIO
(2-5)
SCLENOIO
VALVE
(2-4)
SOLENOID
VALVE VALVE SWITCH
(ho) (NC) (NC)

(COMMON)
(2-4)
SOLENOIO
(2-7) (2-6)
w3TER
PRESSURE
w4TER
PRESSURE
SWITCH (NC) (NO)
(2-3)
AIR
PRE5SURE
SWITCH
(2-2)
A,?
PR!SSURE
SWITCH SWt TCH
(2-1)
4,?
PRESSURE
(COMtiON) /
GETAIL
r-
E
TAG : MULTI2
AIR ~B; UNION
,,
SHIPPEO
~.
LOOSE)
Kmlw lmmmtlw CV.M+UAS WCT PIMXm mR no<
xodk7
.57/ma
mwmr
lAC !0,
w.
r-l BY OTHERS
WATER INLET 1/2- NPT
I
~
14 13 12 303013 420002 210029 450043 200012 200011 200003 300D03 300110 303003 303006 300062 550001 210025 PART NO BRA ALUM BRA BRA ALUM s/s 1 1 1 4 3 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 2 I MATL QTY SOLENOID VALVE, HEATER 200 JUNCTION SEALTIGHT AIR WATT, 120 VAC. NO., 1/2 NPT HOFFMAN NEMA 4 1 DIA.
BOX
12x6x4
11
CC%40UIT GAUGE,
CONNECTOR, 0100 030 0160
10 9 8 7 6 5 4
PRESSURE
PSIG PSIG PSIG
WATER PRESSURE INLET PRESSURE WATER PRESSURE AIR PRESSURE
GAUGE, GAUGE,
REGULATOR 1/2NC., N. C., NPT 1/2 1 1/2. NPT NPT
REGULATOR, 120 120 VAC, VAC,
SOLENOIO VALVE, SOLENOIO VALE, AIR FILTER, 1 1/2 1/2.
T
n
o
SPRING NUT KIT (sHIppEO LOOSE)
3 2 1 ITEM
NPT NPT NEMA 3R
WATER FILTER, ENCLOSURE
42x36x12-
DESCRWTION
,,,
I
Ih, s dr>. inq is
-1
A,, MIId,m 1. (MO, egg ,65,,

the
C.nlmi 1 F.. (,60] 8,2 !,2. ~JSTOMSR COMPANIA UINCRA 00NA DE COLLAHUAS!
A
m m r
==3
..- .
of m. Raring CmO0.3! #an !3es8.v kforrno!im. drowinq~, dem;ls, or me.tf,cot, cn d,!, rnoy no, be ,cP, oduc,d w d.;licot, d o, rn,y ,ny q o,, O.thwizoti.n of 1.. ,, ,Xe. uled h,r,f, om .1(.. ! .r;it.
pmper?y R.ar!nq TTrEE COrPOrdlm. :
CHECK
.KUCW
MULTI-FUNCTION BOX ASSEMBLY OXIDE TRuCK DUMP POCKET MUL-R-2
FOR
DWG NO : SCALE : 3/0
~:
294 C30B
ISHEST I OF
I ,
1
GENERAL
NOTES:
3. APPROX. WIICHT (250 LBS) 4 ASSEMBLY TO BE COMPLETELY SHOP ASSEMBLED.
1. ALL PIPING, FIITINCS, INSULATION. & HEAT TRACE FROM SOURCE TO MULTI- I ASSEMBLY BY OTHERS. 2 FIELO PIPING TO BE ARRANGEO TO PREvENT TRANSMISSION OF ANY STRAIN TO THIS EOUIPMENT
5. AIR/WATER OUTIET FROM MULm-1 ASSEMBLY TO DIST-BOX ASSEMBLIES TO BE 1/2- 0,0. NYT.ON AIR TUBING, 3/8 0.0, NM-ON WATER TuBING & 3 WA TTS/FT HEAT TRAcE WIRE RUN INSIOE lL DIA SEALnGHT CONOUIT, & INSULATEO W/ PIPE INSULATION, (PROVTOEO BY TRC).
T,u ,~:,
4 ,,.
L,
-qyy (G) (N)
) I 2 H
c ~-
2)~~~~..,2 ,,_4 i ,
II EAT T. ALE ,.,, ~,,,,,Mi LT1-2 A k i -IX SOLENGIC VALVE {;) [:) 5CLEN!3C 50 LENC12 VJ.~E
TERM
~,~-:-
VA, VE (L;
82G5mm
TER~A
(N) (N) (N) _
A =
SOLENCIC
VALVE
(N) (N)
CJ2GE
SOLENOID
V4LV[
7 1/4 184rnm
TERM. 1-15
TERM 1-14
..-
(2-5) (2-4) (2-4)
l~~E? SOLENOID VALVE (N) AR SCLENOIO VALVE (NC)

?U%CE WA_ER N) TE? WATER AIR A,? SOLENOIO SOLCNOIO PRESSURE PRESSURE VALVE VALVE SWITCH SWITCH (No) (NC) (NC) (COMMON)
---------
1
t
2 51mm
TERM TERu TERM. TERM
1-15 11 1-12 1-9 1-1 . . . . . . . . ... . . . ... . ..- -
(2-7) (2-6) (2-3) (2-2) (2-1) k
PRESSURE pRESSJRE P! ESSuRE
Swl TCt+ (NC) SWITCH swTcH (NO) (coMuoN) 1
ELECTRICAL CONNECnON ~
TERM
A<
DETAIL
T
I
.r-~
TAG :
?l;/%PT (BALL VALW & u UNION SHIPPEO LOOSE)

~.L KmJFQ Kmmmm4. CCILAHWS FWICT Pumm mR no. CWFUM1 m. lAC m
MULTI2
rrT++..
,,
--..
----x\
xcd67a7/ma
co
r--l BY OTHERS
WATER INLET 1/2- NPT

m 3
I
O
M I\\l
v/ rl1=
14 13 12 11 10 303013 420002 210029 450043 200012 200011 200003 300003 300110
303003 303006
I 1 1 4 3 3 3 BRA ALUM
BRA BRA
SOLENOIO VALVE, HEATER 200 JUNCTION SEALTIGHT WATT.
120
VAC.
NO.,
1/2
NPT
HOFFMAN NEMA 4 1 OIA.
BOX
12x6x4
C0f4DUl T CONNECTOR, GAUGE, 0100 030 0-160
(a
u
AIR PRESSURE
PSG PSIC PSIG
9 B
WATER PRESSURE INLET PRESSURE WATER PRESSURE

AIR PRESSURE vALVE, VALVE,
GAUGE, GAUGE,
8 L
Lrl-J
IJ-lJ
7 6
5
3 3
1 1
REGULATOR
1/2 NC., NC NPT 1/2 1 1/2 NPT
SOLENOIO SOLENOIO
n m
!!
SPRING NUT KIT (SHIPPEO LOOSE)
NPT
3 2 1
,!
300062 550001 210025

,,,
ALUM s/s
1 2 I
AIR FILTER.
1 1/2 1 /2
NPT NPT NEMA 3R
42x36x12-
ITEM
PART NO
MATL
QTY
DESCRIPTION
TRr
..-.
RIIuIwn cm ;s the
I
$s59.
The Roring Corporation

Cmid F.. (ma) of a,> 7?. 1 3$,. CUSTOMER
I
,.
A,, [1s0)
1
294C-20B 294 C-1OE
Ro,,nq Cor,c+.tic. Des;qn hf.,,notim. d,o.inqs, d,ioil,, 0, Spcc; l,..l, c. d,t, r,y 0! b, rep,. du.,d w d.rl;.at. d ,., mar any hock ,: CX:. ulcd hefef, nm .1!.,., .,;, !.. ..,,.,,2 .!;.. of 1,,
This oraw>nq Droper!y R.amg TITLE COWm.atiM
COLIPAN!A
UINERA
DONA DE COLL4HUA51
CELSCK
KUCh
:
SIF
DWG
AS5Y Nil
_ ._
________
. ___
..
MULTI-FUNCTION BOX ASSEMBLY OXIOE TRUCK DuMP POCKET MULTI-2
FOR
DWG
NO
SCALE , 3/9
SHEET
OF
WVWIVIO 211VW3HJS 3313 HCJ z130nt.6z T IFIOZW6Z ma m
\
v
-L
mm
ti
0
[
,!-.
!dt
.,n
GENERAL
NOTES:
3. APPROX. WEIGHT : (250
LBS)
1. ALL PIPING, FITTINGS, INSULATION, & HEAT TRACE FROM SOURCE TO MULTI- I ASSEMBLY BY OTHERS. 2. FIELD PIPING TO BE ARRANGED TO PREVENT TRANSMISSION OF ANY STRAIN TO THIS EOUIPMENT.
4. ASSEMBLY TO BE COMPLETELY SHOP ASSEMBLED 5. AIR/WATER OUTLET FROM MULTI-1 ASSEMBLY TO DIST-BOX ASSEMBLIES TO BE 1/2- 0.0. NYLON AIR TUBING, 3/8 O.D. NWON WATER TUBING. & 1- DIA. 3 WATTS/fT HEAT TRACE WTRE RUN INSID[ SEALnGHT CONOUIT, & INSULATEO W/ PIPE lNSULAnON. (PROVTDEO BY TRc).
1==1
8 203mm 7 1/4
184mm z., 51mm
7 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIOND Q
P
1 { I m-m-+
P
P
~A:g;E~R TYP. (3) PLCS
IT
I.--__k
r
ri
TAG : MULTI3
11%
AIR INLET 1 1/2 NPT u (13 ALLvALw & uNION SHIPPEO ~. LOOSE)
w
r-l
0
(13111(-31-
F
r 1A
I d7nnn7
al o-l m
( [
cc
.+
C-L
.1
BY oTHERS WATER INLET 1/2- NPT
.
I I 1 ~ HEATER 200 WATT. HOFFMAN
.G, !.
...
,/-
j,,
NFMA
4 1 OIA.
u
II
I
,----10 !7 200012
.20001 I
INECTOR, AIR PRESSURE GAUGE, [ )loo 030 0160 Pslc
4 3 BRA 4
WATER PRESSURE INLET PRESSURE WATER PRESSURE
GAUGE, GAUGE.
PSIG PSIC
R .i
----. . mnnn . .
. .T
REGULATOR oR, 1/2

NC..
NPT 1/2 NPT
~,
~ &
AC
1
II
2 1
I 550001 1210025
PART NO n
1s/s
III
I 2 I WATER FIL I
ITEM
M .ATL QTY
DESCRIPTION
_t_n
The
I
[ ,. -ii
m m ,
Ik(,%%%tion ,,, -.
.4,r (!44)
,,2
I
C.timl (,60) 5,2
.JwIt
ilo.
,0.
,65,.
1
,62.
Tht, dr..inq ,, !M Dr. c,r!y ,f h, R.r,nq CO,, OrOt,,n, drowhgs, LMQ3S. or wcc,flcni,m d=i, O<,qn in fc+mati.n. nmy not b. r.wcd.c.d w duclk.ttd mm fn.y ..! wcrk .I Th? be ,X,ct=d h-,frow w;tlou, ..:!!. Ra,,nq Cc. ParOtic.n
cUSTOMER COUPANIA
: UINERA DONA OE CCLLAHUASI
o.thcazotlon
CHECK :KUC21
I
294 C-20C 294C-1OC
TLTLE
MULm FUNCTION BOX ASSEMBLY SULFIDE TRUCK DUMP MuLm-3
FOR
DWG NO , SCALE : 3/8 sHEFI 1 OF 1
REV
DWG
ASXY Nll
GENERAL
I
NOTES:
APPROX. MIGHT
: (250
LBS)
ALL PIPING, FITTINGS, INSULATION, & HEAT TRACE FROM SOURCE TO MULn-1 ASSEMBLY BY OTHERS.
4. ASSEMBLY TO BE COMPLETELY SHOP ASSEMBLEO 5 AIR/WATER OUTLET FROM MULn-1 ASSEMBLY TO DIST~EOX ASSEMBLIES TO BE 1/2 0.0. NYLON A!R TuBING, 3/8 0.0. NYLON WATER TUBING. & 3 WATTS/FT HEAT TRACE wIRE RUN INSIOE 1- OIA SEALTIC~T CONDUIT, & INSULATED W/ PIPE INSULATION. (PROVIOEO BY TRC)
2. FIELD PIPING TO BE ARRANGED TO pREwNT TRANSMISSION OF ANY STRAIN TO THIS EQUIPMENT.
TERM 8 203mm
(h)
.j+~
F
(4-5)
AR
SLLENOID
VALVF
(N) (N;
Fu2SE
SCLENOIO
VA~W
A.
15crnrr
.
TERM ,~z~ 2:5 ~-,~ . . . . . . . . ..(.-4) (A-,) (4.7; (4-6) < (.-3) {4-2) E
[4.. )
w> T:= 50 LENIJC iALK (N; AR SaLENO!C VALVE (NC) PuRGE WATEa WATEQ w*.TE< SCLENC31D vALV[
joLENCID VALVE
(NO)
(kc)
T[F?M TERM
2-13 2I
----
~~
FR[SSURC PRESSURE
SWITCH
(NC)
SWITCH (CWd!dCN)
TERM. 2-12 TERM 29 \ ELECTFVCAL rfie 12 TERM 2-1
A:h FR[SSURE
SWITCH (NC)
A S :? ESSURE SWTCH (NO) AT FRESSURE SWITCH (CCMMON) /
I
I
P
1
0
1I
L
P
C)A%RER T7fI. (3) PLCS
DETAIL
r- [
AIR
1-
/Bi UNION SHIPPEO LOOSE) ~.
1 1 1 .
?-1 BY OTHERS
WATER INLET 1/2. NPT
1
@
TAG : MULTI4
14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 SPRING NUT KIT (sHIppEO LoosE) 3 2 1 ITEM
420002 303013 210029 450043 200012 200011 200003 300003 300110 303003 303006 300062 550001 210025
PART NO MATL
1 BRA 1 I 4 4 4 3 BRA ALUM BRA BRA ALUM s/s 4 4 3 1
HEATER 200
WATT,
HOFFMAN 120 VAC, N. O., 4 1- OIA. 1/2 NPT
SOLENOIO VALVE. JUNCTION SEALTIGHT BOX
12x6x4
NEMA
CONDUIT
CONNECTOR, 0-100 0-30 0160
AIR PRESSURE
GAUGE,
PSIG PSIG PSJG
WATER PRESSURE INLET PRESSURE WATER PRESSURE AIR PRESSURE
GAUGE, GAUGE,
REGULATOR 1/2 N. C.. N. C., NPT 1/21 1/2 NPT NPT
SOLENOIO VALVE. SOLENOIO VALVE. AIR FILTER, 1 1/2 1/2
1
2 1 QTY
NPT NPT NEMA DEscRIpmON 3R
42x36x12
J $
n u ,
TRr
The
Roring J CorDOrOtiOn
n D
n
wvH3klu ,-~ ?IIVW314>S 2313 u(3> 30 Z-2+6C 2M0 33S
h. L
2
Ld n
i -VOH
,,,\,>c(Jr
301SNl 51VNIWU31 NOW
,,ZL
1
I
0
.0
C-1 bm1b62\L68Ur-V\UW3\1 ,BVN OV2 9.0
r.
--
GENERAL
1. APPROX. 2. WEIGHT
NOTES:
: (150 LBS) 5. AIR/WATER TO PRV-BOX NYLON TUBING, INSIDE w/ pIpE AIR & OUTLET TUBING, FROM 3/8 MULTI-BOX TO BE O.D. HEAT 1/2 NYLON TRAC[ & By FOR ASSEMBLY O.D. WATER WIRE, RuN INSULATED mc) CLARITY ASSEMBLY 3 WATTS/FT SEALTIGHT
ALL PIPING, FITTINGS, HEAT TRACE, & INSULATION FROM SOURCE TO MULTI-BOX BY OTHERS.
1 DIA.
CONDUIT,
IFt5ULAn0N WTRING
(PROVTDED NOT SHOWN
3.
FIELD PIPING TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
TO BE ARRANGED OF ANY STRAIN
TO PREVENT TO THIS EQUIPMENT. SHOP ASSEMBLED
6.
ELECTRICAL
4.
TO BE COMPLETELY
8203mm
TE7M (h)
(N) (N) (N)
A,= S!lLEhOID VALE ?LRCE *ATER ( A!? 53 L:NOI0
(N)
~.,
152mm TERM 4-8 --=
VALVE (N) (N)
SOLENOID VfiLVI
7 1 /4
(6-5)
SOLENOID AL< S9LENOID 50 LEN010 PRESSURE PRESSURE PRESSURE
[ NC) (NC) [Nc)
184mm
ERM
47
---- ----
(6-1)
[6-+) (6-7) (6-6) (6-3) (5-2) [6-1)
PuRGE WAE3 WAXR *AIIR WATER AIR A!R
VALE VALE
2 51mm
TEF?M, 4-6
S!+l TCH (NC) SWITCH (COMMON) SW~CH (NC)
TERU rEfvJ TERM TE*U
4: 45 4-2 41
P
ELECTRICAL ~ CWNICTOR
PRCSWRC
SMTCH
\
@ m
-s
PRE58u RE WTCH
(COMUON) )
DETPIL
t
1/2 NPT
u
1~ BY OTNERS J WATER lNLrT
I
SHIP LOOSE
TAG :
SHIP LOOSE
7~
BY OTHERS ~
12 11 401001.2 BRA 1
MULTI-6
>
WATER PRESSURE 200 SWITCH, NC., 1/8 NPT
12 305mm
I 2s Im .
42 CH303.2i 303013 210093.1 BRA
I 1 I HEATER, 1 1
WATTS/50 VALVE, 8X6X4-
HZ,
HOFFMAN 120 4 1 DIA. NPT PSIG 120 VAC, I /2 1/2 NPT NPT VAC, 1/2 NPT
10 9
PURGE SOLENOID JUNCmON BOX.
N. O,, NEMA
8 7
450043 401001.2 200003 303003 303003 550001 300060 210003
I BRA
2 I SEALTIGHT 1 3
CONOUIT
CONNECTOR, N. O., 0-160 N. C., 1/8
AIR PRESSURE
SVJTCH, GAUGE, VALVE,
&
12 1/2
INLET PRESSURE WATER SOLENOID AIR SOLENOID WATER FILTER, AIR FILTER. ENCLOSURE, 1/2
5 4 3 2 1 ITEM
BRA BRA s/s ALUM
1 1 2 1 1
SHIP LOOSE
VALVE, 1/2
N. C., NPT
1 ZD VAC,
NPT 2 NEMA DESCRIPTION 3R
30x30x1
PART NO
T_mn
MATL
cm
The
,,,
I
r. Th,,s drming ,4ir (MO) w i,
-.
R.UIIIIO.
! 659. ,.1 C.rAt.I (,,0) m,
J
!52.
the Pr.ac. rtf of The R,rInq Cm,m, !!c. 3.s skan mform.all, n. dr.awin,,. . det. als. m SO FICO! CC, IO CCt, -.. .. .?., may .0! be rm, tiu.,d 0, dub. ... ..-. . . ., . . .
Rorq Cc. fp. mbm.
cUSTOMSR COMPANIA MINERA 00NA LX COLLAHUA3 CONTRACT NO
,.. .. ...-- , .
FOR
[ DRAWN : K, WSS [ CHECK : KUC#
6-24-9 7-II-97
TITIE.
TRC 294C
-..
..--.-
-.. - . ... .. .
MULil-FUNCTION SULFIDE FEEDER M(II nf,
BOX ASSEMBLY DISCHARGE
DWG NO ,
-r,l F T/n
294 C30F
1 SHHFl 1 OF
I ,
1
REV
\\
(019) dAL Gzl) +

u
.~z s
r 1 @
(ssr)*
---se\
--. .-
-.
-. .
%?
--tL
ti
w t--
0
z -1 <
IY
w
z
w
------m~
1
1
(-3
Z9L .-
-1< %
\cl _-
..
.---*.._--.-_ \
--_--_--
/4- _
1-
\ , , / \
!,
, ,
\i
~
-..- .. -. .. . -- r.. --,
HddV 211
>
Ob 9fi2\96?\W1\>J
3UWN ~RO OV1
DKCT
I n>
nT
>T
IIPP
llflW
fiMfl(lb-3bKi\6.
/ Gcll
i\
:(1
0
30 762 I /2 TYP, 15A I
1.25
[1-~
351
A J F-4 1/4.
~TYP.
GENERAL
I
FIELD PIPING PREvENT
NOTES:
TO EE ARRANGED TO
TRANSMISSION
OF ANY STRAIN
CONTACT
SURFACE
LAYOUT
/,/--,
\
, / .
TO ~ls
EQuIPMENT LBS)
2. APPROX. WEIGHT : (300
C4X5.4 CHANNEL / (TW). HINGEO
DOOR ACCESS
--
\
e --\.- \.- / \.- \.. .- .. .---..-----1
[
HINGED ACCESS DOOR INLET FROM AIR FILTG? D 4
120 VAC (-) )
k=420vAc~i )20AC I-J

\GROUND
4:
Pm
2
DETAIL
u o
DRAIN TO GROUNO
41R OUTLET 2. NPT O*
l
%
a
L-
AIR INLET 2 NPT
n n m
WATER INLET 1- NPT
--i---l
ml
KRUPP FOROERTECHNIK COLLAHUASI PRO$CT PuRCHASE OROER NO: 30065787/018 EQUIPMENT NO.: TAG NO,:
SOL,NOIO
,.,--
220V/50Hz 200W
L
HEATER
L
* .
11[
I
--4,
Tn7ni7
!RRA
-,.
1 I AIR
PIIRCF
-----
Sol
---
FNOID
.. .-.
N C
.
1/4
.,
NPT
P17RT. .-,
6 5 4 3 2
301215,0 300064 301203 301205 200003 550007
BRA ALUM BRA BRA
. 1 2
I u .,, n.. I
$,., \.?= ,L. L, 2
1 1 />. I .,NpT 1/2,8
MDT .
.,
Fill .
. I.
AIR FILTER. BALL VALVE, I m., , u fiLL I ,,. ,,r vfiLv L,
(SEE DETAIL-I.)
NPT .,0. ,Vr ,, m!, , r..

u
..
5
lnor rr. 8 0-160 PSIG
PRESSURE GAUGE,
1
RARING,
WATER OUTLET 1- NPT
1
ITEM
s/s
7 i WATFR FN TER .---
NS-151. . 1 NPT
4
i
PART NO I MATL IQTY ~n A

The
DESCRIPTION
294-30D 294-30C 294 C-30S 294 C-30A 294 C-1OB 294 C-1OA REF. DWC
L L.
WI
(IL
3.
75
24
ASSY
610
--l
_.. .. -.
-r
bmcnZZ2
JIJIJJ
Inmu)u)lnul
Oonnoo
!-+0 .,-
-<
--.
m
-+
L
I
I +
II
UL II 9
n>
N \
t t
k
+ @
D
3
,,
n
L._.
B
o
GI I
g
0 n
. . .._------
--
2\3*6Z\bW
-v\WM1\
3WW WJ
UV2
.-mm1111 >>>> EIXCCK Qnnn
-i
I
I
Q
In
al
c1
3
z
ISn
I
L
+ @
RI+
Illf
I
__
----
- .
_.
-----
--l
-_IM
.
vy~k=x=~~==x~ *
~\\\\~~
+ \ \ \ \ \
~X
+ + + \ \ \ \
<
1
1 I
\\\\
\\\\
\\\\
34,.9A0 am
--m
Wlfit
In:t?:nt f?t
Uer
Uow
6MPZC-~bfiZ\:.
!f69(Jl
-Y\:c
i z
N
0
z i 0 v
cl 3
l?
n c . r+ -i ti
aA
5
; KT
$
w
1-
L
J-
,
I ) UJUILZ1 .,s
IL
6
A :
/-J
,9.95 z\%z\nwi\J
Wn
9.0 0.2
21
DESCR::T!Oh
OAT,
3,
L. ...
144 117 1/4
-J
I
L13_
ROYE. HP+JSCN J? MFG
NOIES
SHELL .190
M. A.W. F. 125 PSI (C 6GOF 20F @ 125 PSI GALLONS 1C20 WEIGHT 1637# INSIOE UNPAINTEO OUTSIDE PRIMED & PAINTED
NPT
GATE
VALVE
UNJCN AIR 3 OUTLET NPT 0-160 PRESSURE ~}jlTH SHUT PSI GAUGE OFF VALVE @
1
/
1/4 HOLE IN HEEL.
*
RELIEF 1 1/4
VALVE GATE VALVE
N3T /
WITH PLUG A 4 x 1 1/4 REDUCER 3 G 3
Ii
co
4/
n
u
II 1!
II
AIR HOLE (TYP) 1 BALL VALVE ~y;,i
o i= m Z v
v)
w w
rn
>_
E
1=10
0
m
iii @
o z
c)
v w oin w
5 <
II
Oi
r
1111111
(3!
1 1-
I
II o
1-
w u
i? 3 w)
0
CK
k-
0
-1 (-)
15
1-
2 14
c-)
xl
c1
.
I
. ,,.
-u-i Lb<
aicio:c-++t
i--?
---
--
iti
. .. . . . .
PL2
OFF ~1_8 (8) 1
PL1 2
PB2
STOP 2 ,1-l!~c) I I
I I
PBI
START
(12) T1-12 o
JQ.!41 I
%~cs
T114
(13)
T,_,3
NOTE ALL CONTROL WIRING TO BE #18AifJ M, (JF .ESS OTHERWISE NOTED.

rlTLE: REVISION: SCALE:
I
TOSHIBA
TOSHIBA
lNTERM~AL
~ATEXAS U. S-AM40E IN HOUSTON, AL
I
I
WIRING DIAGRAM L.V. DOOR (REAR VIEW) MEDIUM VOLTAGE FVNR STARTER
CUSTOMER:
JOB
o
FIXED
DR4WING NUMBER:
l. O=l.O
TYPE JK CONTROLLER
10/02/97
IIATE
FIRST
ISSUE DESCRIPTION
AL
RL
)/
BY
CHK
APPR
TtilS MATERIAL IS THE EXCLUSIVE PROPER~ OF TOSHIBA INTERNATIONAL CORPORATION ANO SHALL NOT BE REPRODUCE. USED, OR OISCLOSEO TO OTHERS UNLESS PRIOR WRITfEN AUTHORIZATION IS OBTAJNEO.
NUMBER:
GARDNER DENVER
BK53988-O1O
V9A9P701 .
. .._ .. . .
I
I
F
LOW v FI R
300 ~r
O G
LE CONNEC TIONS ITCH
OUWM
Ju.
T1
T2
T3
--xl
1
9
ISOLATION SWITCH VIEWING WINDOW
1---1
FRONT VIEW
o 0 RIGHT
SIDE SECTION
coo 0.0
(3)0
xrq
z
)
0.00 0.00
CABLE
TERMINATION
DEVICE LEGEND CONTROL CABLES c c No I 1 2 3 4 5 AMMETER PILOT LIGHT, RED RUN GREEN OFF BIACK STAR7 RED STOP PILOT LIGHT, PUSHBUTTON, PUSHBUTTON, Description
<A
0
ENTRY
TOP BOTTOM 9.00
INCOMING
CABLE I I
LOAD
CABLE A A
10.50 I 15.50 20.50 l-l I -1
10.50 A 15.50 I 20.50
NOTES
0.75 DIA. 4 PLCS. [ 31.00
lYPE 12 1. ENCLOSURE: 2. FINISH: ANSI 61 TEXTURED GRAY PAINT 3. APPROX. WEIGHT: 9001bs. 4. OPERATION SITE: 15,000 FT ABOVE SEA
LEW
[101
REFERENCE DRAWINGS
J
V8A9P701 V9A9P701 V9A9P702 V9A9P703 REV. REV. REV. REV. O O O O SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM WIRING DIAGRAM WIRING DIAGRAM WIRING DIAGRAM
TOP VIFW
Ilfil
1
.0
--w-I ------------------n v 1
=.
i 1 I
I I
l-l
I I I I I I
I
1 I I I I I
y
I ,,
--
I I I I I I
I_______
I I
I I I I
U
I
I I
EH!i!i---
lg+r~ -----------
Y=-*-;------+
F=J-+J+J---------.., \
f:~:==Lw@(
-1-
y
z n v
-Ta- Ii 5
2-11 1-11
(N!N1)
3=+-IW
o v LUAIIS N33W vu WE
~d
cl=
0103
IYLL
,d
Snfl
aN!)~
.
L
-,,
, ,. ~.
=. -.
q : ,,-. ,
------,..-. . . . .
(14s1s)
o z
T1
I?ECP-H
RECP-N 3 ---.--(4) 4 M-12 (l 4s1s (PI) (P2) y (PI) (m FU1-2 CPT-X2
U-N.O.
{
--------
------(8) (2) (lo) (1) -y .7 y
5 6 7
(5) (6) - (7) (8) (2)
M-22 M-15 u-25 M-24 UR-A2 M-21 M-14 PB2-2

!
hl-N.C. {
_ -PL2-1 PL1 -2 PL1-1 PB2-1
(NSS3)
o
1 Ful i
*
13 23
JuMPER
33 MR
43
Al
/++
(lo)
11 IZ t () 12 13
--&-
REMOTE SART/STOP
r-+..b---I * *--- l+ .-0 +
-EIQ
13 14 14 MR-14 PB1 -3 OL-95 PB1-4 (NFT2)
I
*-
NQIE
ALL CONTROL WIRING TO BE ~ 1 ~WM, REMOVE JUMPER ~ER uNLESS OTHERWISE NOTEO.
INSTALLING REMOTE DEWCE.
I.. -. -
INCOMINC ~~ollv, rBO ~,
UNCS 50HZ \
~_____
I I I I I / .
CLF
4a [
I
I I Ml.
HH
cO ~ . --Isw I I (1) t
u , (!)>
0.0
R~cp 1,-. f
[o
:}
-.1
.-
L-
,1
PLUG
I&l
LOCATEO BEHIND HIGH VOLTACE COMPARTMENT DOOR. ACCCSSIELE ONLY WHEN RACKING HANOLE IS IN OF~ POSITION,
I
I I I
I
I L---i
F]
[~ ,gA
I I I
u 1
I
I
sEr ~c1)T2-1 w IL1
:2.BA
T1-11 ~
PB2 STOP (12)
1112 I I L_~&__ * RE#pTE +-133-+ ;
.
CT1 75/! :T2
I 1 I 1 I I s
1 1 I I J
START
(C3)T2-3 w
I L~
l-9
1
co
l-r!-bb
111
M 21
PL1 RUN (10) m T1-10
SET CONTACTOR TO 100-11 I

!
OV I 2
2-74LRA
1
w . [ (34) 3 KJ AC
(-)
DLJ (+) AC
L5G.ENQ
c? CPI 1 CPT CT1,2,3 F;.! Isw MM.1. MR : *REMOVE JuMPER #FfER INSTALLING REMOTE OEWCE CURRENT LIMITING FUSE CONTROL POWER INTERLOCK. CONTACT HELD CLOSED (AS SHOWN) WHEN RACKING HANOLE IS IN Or POSITION. CONTROL POWER TRANSFORMER CURRENT TRANSFORMER DRIVE UNIT
(5)
TI-5
,.
15: 125
(7)
T1 -7
SPARE CONTACTS FOR CUSTOMER USE (MAX. 7A. 120VAC CONTINUOUS RATING)
PBl!!i PL1.2 11,2
4 1
2 I a lml m mm *X ~
I
I Alm m Iw a -
Su&
_T~SHIBA
m.?rau.~ == --e- --= mmm W
&HEMATlC D~GRAM
MEDIUM VOLTAGE FVNR
~o
STARTER
Ja~ BK53988-O 10 ~~
1.1391.C
fl~Eo lyPE JK CONTROL1

w3A9P701
GARDNER OENVER
-<.
..
-,.1
-3*.,
-,.
,, ,,
,x
.-
-,
.!.->
,-
- . ..-., --, -*....-----,-.-, ., ,))-> -, -., -., . -..,. s.. -,
--, l-= ~!-. .-,
~,
,..
,.,.
i/
v I \ ! ~,,,q 7-. -f---r .> ,.7 .
J===--l
u
u ----------------mob
I 1
au
In
U hmf
4
-t
Illlv
r 1
i\n
1
10
lV1$
\
CllH UIIMJ
UIIHJ
Ivlw
nolcm J
/
w
m
/ \
UtohdF,m *O
* LIE!?l
!1 \
L.
,~188sm, o
Wlrw?s
ml Mum!!
I
u
\
boa
mlvtidm no m nmnm UJJ arnm m -f
]lVIS
2,!
Is.
.~
..
(3
--
=:--
) .. pjuLli!l!
d$l 0S2-----30OflV] WI 01 Slllddl lN171n0 SIUt
lMOM
9NIu O11OJ
31V0
AE a]l~lJ#]3
$ION, llI
kumd
I
I
W1C41 MOsswnm
I
NOIJ
Alk
Ii10
IMt
1N3111H>VR
uIAH30
UlhOMV9
Ulv
II
1a,,-,
W,,,,,,
MOJ JINO
ltYv N IJIHolsfl)
OIIJI: HI) lNIMd 51H1
..
_..
w
I,, ---
-s.
U.-@.)
.-..
.. -____
. . -.
.....
._ .
4.5.5
Instrucciones de los fabricantes
23.01.98
COLLAHUASI
Hoja en blanco
COLLAHUASI
23.01.98
$istema Aglomerador para Control de Polvos

MANUA1 DE
opEt?AcioN Y MANwvcioN
TRC No 296
lNsTRuccioNEs
ASCO ASCO GARDNER Intersection NORGREN NORGREN NORGREN NORGREN UE
DE Los
Fabricates
Valvula Solenoide Switch De Presion DENVER D.C. Conectores Rapidos Reguladora De Agua De Aire
Filtro Aire/Valvula Valvula Reguladora Valvula Reguladora Switch De Presion
. ,ZIzffim;io,o es De Ifis ,Fati:?cantes FV@na 79 294csa44AIW:? ;
- ...- -.
PNEUMATIC/ELECTRIC
INTERFACE
Characteristics
Swltchlng Pressure Hysteresis SwltcPllngCapaoillty Arnblent Temperature Pneumatic Connechon Eleclricai ConnectIons Maximum Wire Size
Function
Tmsf!erface w!l changs a pneumatc signal Into an electr,ca!
S}gna!
K -.,.XY7S 1
Electrical contocls SPDT 5Afllov
jb--
Electrico! output - commlo~ . norms; closed contoct normal open con!act Adjustment knob prt?jjur~ 15 tO 115 PSI Turn clockwise to decrease pressdre seRing Counter clockwise to increase pressure setiing Manual o~errlde
~-,
Connections
-7,
Visual indcafion pneurna:lc inlet Marklrlg tag
of
4%
Pressure Inlet
Els
!.!
,,
:,-,I
..
, .-. .,.
, .. ... ,,
(>.
. .,.
Reference
Description Pneumallc El~cklc lnt~rfoce u.,lto h+fanugt Ojerrlde Model Numbers 30400009 33400042 33400033 33400036 See page 150 for ordering Information
50 Blonk Llarhng Ta~s DIn RGII (Pkg 5) 3 Lengths . D,a CIIPS (Pkg 10)
Pneumatic/Electric
interface
P
0
1,
l?_
1A.
X
71
d
c
4
125 318
SERIES
302/304
MODUIAR INTERFACES ELECTRO/PNEUMATIC
Modular Construction and Rapid Installation

r, ;mlmr/ ~,bdlJl(3rt/ pr,wmol,c at 2 IWAS
of furl~tlons as sho//n on opposl!~ ~~g~ elect(oInlerface ccm?nslng of 3 components which can be f,rred cn CIcommcn subbase sulfable for both 3/2 normally closed CI-Id 4~2 v~[jloris Tn{sbase bu!lds in the electrical cmd pn?umatlc connectfom h!XJ!3rlh/ of assembly the subbases of the interfaces connect tog.?tr.er t~ build UP a compact cssembly with a widtn of each ~CJJ+ standardized at 69, certain cwmectlons are built in and the cIs;ercbly can be f!tied on to s$(mmetr~calrail. See page 150 for ordering informahon on clip and roil.
DIN L/ltg rail ,=.
i,
I d+ 165rrr- .69)
Simplified Connections
Flectrlcal connectlms 1 wre to connect for each interfoce 1 common suppl< bull! in 1 ground connection Pneumatic conrlectlons Pi] the ports are frted wltn plug-in connections cnly 1 tube ro connect each 3/2 module 2 tuces to conriect fo( each 4/2 module 1 common pressure port and 1 common exhaust port built in Whch can be piped tc efther the left or to the righl.hand side P!ug the pressure pod wh,ch is not to be used
Common ex?,ausl Common buill.in pressure
educed Maintenance and Simple Fault Finding

SUQI dlcaton of the electrical input by LED(opt Ion) and visual m )d ca!lonof Ihepneumatlc output, a[ow}ng simple fault diagnoses S3no can be forced by manual override on the solenoid pilot and m ti;:~ Dneumatlc.e!ectric interface Fur,ctlanal sylmbols I,denllflca::on of the electrical terminaj Ident,flcatlon of the pneumahc portt S:mp;e Iabelllng Due to the f~ct tnct the subbase has no moving components, the VCU2 modu!es can be removed from an assembly without cfsct~mg the wrmg or piping :,
LED-
---
Manual override Labell)ng Pressure mdicatar 3
.,1. .$- = ~ Function symbol
dther Possibilities
Electrical connections: Tne Integral electrical common supply can be removed by removing the tag so that a different supply voltage can be used on eoch module Fneumatlc connecl~ons DlffSrent supply pressurescan be used by building in a separate slJpp]v base into the assembly. Separ~:2 supply base
_.
Separate Supply Base

Use. fthe separate SUPPIY @ base a!lows blocking into the manifold for use of two or mole pr~ssures.The supply base isblocked on one side, Fof three pressures.two separate supply bases are required, For eight or more VQIVeS iSnecessary 10increase volume by having it two inputs. PI
Interfaces supplied at pr~ssure PI
or P3
Interfaces supplied at pressure P2
ASWWWMC
JouCOMATIC DIVISION
53
Installation
OPEN-FRAME,
& Maintenance
~Red-Hatf
PURPOSE,
Instructions
SERIES
I
SOLENOIDS
Form
ial>r 165 where ignilion temperature of hazardous
8016G
No. V6583R4
GENERAL
WATERTIGHTiEXPLOSIONPROOF
Fox [I,x-x E,( , ().( rttT,II,.s Y O,\,, 7 ~\n
A C,\LTIOS: reventor~IPio.ion, otnstall T() p fire cjn i n s,,lerr,,id

atmosphere i> less
xnd th.i,)
,,,
C. On }filkes then
used for steam semice or when a CIJSS }1 si)len(, id i~ i.
used. do not install

Itsj
in hararduus atmnsph~re where igniti, )n temperature 180 C. See namrplate/retainer for stnwice.
DESCRIPTION
caI:Ilog numbers W16G 1 find 8016G? nrc eIwxy errcap,ul~kd pull-IyF s~~ltnoids.TIC green solLnoiJ wi!h lead wires and 112 conduit connection is designed [(~mcel Enclosure Type l- Gerrer~l Purpose. l~Iw 2- Dripprmf, IJPLJ ~ a[id .*>- Kwrllghl and lypcs -1 and 4~-Walerllghl. l%c blfick
NOTE: Ilcse solenoids have an intern:ll non-reschhlc !hcrmat fuw I(I Ilrr:jt solenoid tcmperoture in the event Ihn[ extraordinary conditions mxur which could ci]uw excessive !empera!ures, These corrdiiion; include high inpu[ vull Jgc, a jammed core, cxccxitc amhicnt tempcr~lurc or a sh~~rlrd SO! CnL>iI_f, C[C. Thi S Uni~UC fC3[(lrC ij a $[iinlhrd ftatur~ t)fll) in SOkn(>id>!4i[tl
hl~ck explosiorrproof ~dust-ignllionprcof nclowres (lypw 7 & 9). c . . .._

1>11OXr,\\T:
or filter, suitable or operator See ASCO To protect the soltn,oid vol}e or opcrmtor, insta]l a straintr for the service in>olved in the inlet side as close co thevalvr setwice conditions.
so[crroid on CfltJlog numhc!s pr~hXd ~~ i$ d~Sigfl~Ll 0nl~~l ~flCkISUre 1 Tyws 6 mrd rypc$ 3 and 3S-R.lin[ighl, Ijpv 4 and 4X-M!ller[igh[.
61- Suhmcrsihlc, TYpc 7 (A B, C. & D) F.xplosi~onprcof CIJM 1, Groups A. [1, C. .& D and ry~ 9 (E, F. & G)- Dus[-Igniticmprrmf Cl~ss II, Groups E, 1-, & G. Ilre Class 11, Groups F & G Du$t l~a[ions designation is not appllcahlt fur wicno ids or solenoid v~]lvcs umf f!~r slcarrl semicc or when a class llsolcrroid is usccf. See Ternpcrawre Lirnifufiwu scc[ion for solenoid idcn!ifi Laliorl ~lnd Il:lnlc pt:lle!rclaillcr for scwicc. Whcn insl.allcd jusl as a
as possible. Clean periodically depwsdingr)n Serirs 8600, 8601. and 8602 for strainem.
Temperisture
Limitations
solcnoiJ find n(>[ al[achcd to ~rr ~\SCO vfilve, ~hecore has ~ 0.250-28 [JXF-211 IJPP-J hold. 11.3F minimum full thrcmf.
Series 8016G solenoids are awiluble . Open -Fr.ime Conslru:lion

Ilc
in:
!empcra[urcs, refer [o chwt. The Icrnpera[urc Iin]itations Iis[cd, only indica{e matimum application tempcra!ures for fiel(l wiring rated a! 9u C. Check ca!filog numhcr prefix and W;III rating on nanlcpl:lte to de[ermilw maximum ambient tcm~raturc, See \aI\c ill>[all:llicm and mainlcn:lncc ins[ruc[ions for moximum fluid Icnlperature. NOTE: For sleam service, refer 10 Birin,g scclion, Junc[ion Bo,r for Icmp--rarure ra[ing c)f supply wires. Temperature
Valves
For nmximurn valve amhiertf
green mlcrroid may be supplied with 1/4 spaJc. screw, or DIN It, rminals (Refer 10 Figore 4). lanel hlounted Construction Ihcsc solenoids are specifically dcsigrrccl to bc panel mounted by the cusmmcr through a panel having n .062 to .093 maximum wall Ihickrress. (Refrr 10 l:igurc 3 and section on lf[s~~ll(~(ion o{ PurrtJ ,%lwnled So[cnoid).
Limitations
Rated
For Series 8016G at 6.1, 8.1, 9.1, 10.6,
Solenoids
for use on
or 11.1 Watts Maximum

Ambient F
Watt
Rating
Catalog
Number
Prefix Coil
Class of
Insulation
Temp.
Optional Features For Type 1- General Purpose Construction Only . Junction Ilox
This junc[ion box con=,truction meets Enclosure Types 2,3.3S,4. and 4X. Only solmtoids wilh 1/4 spade or screw tcrmirrals may have a junction box. The junction box provicfes a 1/2 conduit connection, grounding and spxfc orscrcw [crmirml conncctionswithin !hejunction box (See Figure 5). DIN Plug Cnnnwtor Kit No. K236-034 Use this kit only for solcrroids wi!h DIN terminals. The DIN plug connector kit provides a two pole with grounding contact DIN T@ 43650 construction (See Figure 6).
61,8.1, 91, &11.1
None, FE. KF, KP SF, SP, SC, & SD
F H
F H
125 140
104 104 F (-40 C).
6.1, 8.1,
s.l, &ll.1
106 10,6
HE!,HT, KB. KH, SS. ST,SU, & ST

None. KF, SF, &SC HT KH, SU. & ST Thlinimum ambient iemperaturc
-40
Positioning _flissolenoid isdcsigncd
OPERATION
When the solenoid is energized, the core is drawn into the solenoid base sub-assembly. lkIPORTA.XT When the solenoid is de-energized, the initial
to ~rform IIowever. for op!imum life and mrwnled vertically and upright to accumulating in Ihe solenoid base
properly when mounted in anyposi{ion. performance, the solenoid should be reduce the possibility of foreign mailer sub-assembly area,
\\iring
\Ylrirrg mus[ conlply with ]ocal codes and Ihe National Electrical Crxfe. .411 solenoids supplied with Ieod wires are provided with a grounding wire which is green or green wilh yellow stripes and a 1/2 conduit connec!iorr, TO facilitate wiring. the solenoid may be rotated 360. For the watertight and explosion proof solenoid, electrical fillings must be approved for use in lhe approved hrmrdous locations.
force for the core, whether developed by spring, pressure, or weigh~ must exert a mhrimum force to o~ercome residual magnetism created by the
return solenoid. hlinimum return force for AC construction is 11 ounces, and 4 ounces for DC construction.
INSTALLATION
Check nameplalc for correct cakrlog number, sewice, and waltngc. Check
front of solenoid for volmge and frequency.
Additional
q
Wring
Instructions
with
For Optional
Features:
Opco-Frame
solenoid
1/4 spade ttrminals
A WARNING: TO prevent the possibility of electrical shock from the accessibility of live parts, install the open-frame solenoid in an Enclosure.
o AuImtwhi Smttch (h
MCMXC1 All Rights Reserved
For solenoids supplied with screw termirr.al connections use #12-18 AWG slrarrdccf cop~rwire rated at 90 Corgrealcr. Torque ;erminal bloekscrc~s IO 10 ~ 2 in-lbs [1,0 t 1,2 Nm]. A lopped hole is provided in the solenoid for grounding, use a # 10-32 machine screw. Torque grounding screw to 15 -20 in-lbs [ 1,7 -2.3 Nm]. On solenoids with xrew terminals, the socket
Page 1 of 4
head screw holding the tcrm!n~! hlc~k to thcscrlenoicf IS~hc grounding screw, Torque the screw to 15- 20 in-lhs [1,7 - 2,3 Nm]. with a 5/32 hex key
wrench . Junctinn IIw juncliorl Box hox is used with sPadc or screw terminal
Cleaning Al! solenoid operators
solenoids only and is ~rov]dcd V.l{h a grourrd!ng screw and a 1/2 conduit connection, Connect # 12-13 AWII stan~l~rd cop~r wir~ only to the ~rew terminids Within the iurrcticon h~x MC field w!re lhal is ral~d 90 Cor grcalcr for connections. For ~!cam service use l~5C rated wire Up to SO psi or use 125 C rated wire at>,~ve 50 ps!. After clcctri~al h~x~kup, rcpla~~ cover gaskel, cover, and screw5, Tighten screws evenly in a cri.sicros$ manner.
and valves should he clcancd prwxlic:!lly 1 he lime hetwecn clc<lrring will vary dc[wn(iing on mcdunl 3111! wr>lct, ~)n,ltll,)ns In general, If ihc voltage to the solcrroid I, c,lrrcct. \lugxI,lI volt, ~,pr:!ll[~n, excessive noise or leakage will indlca[c lha: clc, !n:ng ii ICLIIIIr I1. flean C strainer or fill~~rwhen clcarring [he vJl\t
Preventive
.
.
.
Alaintenance Kctp the mmt!unl flowing through thu
DIS Plug Connector kit SO. K236-034 o~n-frame solenoid is proiicfcd wi[h DIN terminals IO 1. ~C accommwlate the DIN plug connector kit. -) Remove cenlcr screw from plug connector. Using a small ~rewdri~er, -. ply terminal block from connec[or cover. 3. Use #12-18 AWG s~randed cop~r wire rated at 90C or greater for connections. Strip wire leads back approximately l/4 for installation in socket mrminals. The II= of wire-end skevcs is tslso recommended for [hdsc s[xkcl terminals. h[aximum length of wire-end sleeves to be ~PProximotcly 1/4. Trnning of the ends of Ihe lead wires is no! recommended. 4 Thrc:id V.irc lhrough gland nut. gland gasket. washer. and connector cuvcr. NOTE: Connector cover may be rotated in 90 increments from position shown for al!ernale positioning of cable entry. 5, Check DIN connector terminal block for electrical markings. Then make clcctricfil hookup 10lcrminal bl~kaccording tomarkingson it. Snap termimrl block lnlLJ conneclor cover and install center screw. 6. Position connec!or gaskel on solenoid and install plug connector. Torque center screw to 5 * 1 in-lbs [0,6 ~ 1,1 Nm]. INOTE: Altcrnaling current (AC) rrncfdirect current (DC) solenoids are huilr differently. To converl from one IO \hc other, it may be necessary to change the complete solenoid including [he core sub-zssrrnl)ly, not jusl the solenoid. Consult ASCO. and solenoid base
MJkil, NL] ()~tir,:{l, {d \Jlve as flee from dirl and foreign rrmlcrial a> (.Js<III.,. Whjlc in scmice, tile .solcnoid olxrdh,r ~,r val.ti ~lItIuld I)c 01<131CIJ rri l..,~l ,JIICL m~,nth l,> insure pr(~lwr o~-nln~ a,l(l LlII\lll: a DcrznAn~ on [hc nledlun] and ser. ice corrd~tmll>, ~i W,J!Cillsi~c~i{m O( i:l~crrlal VJIVC parts for damage or excessilc wear is rcconlmcndcd. Thoroughly clean all parts. Replace any w,xn or r.l:]magccl parls
Causes of Improper Operutioo . l.r111 cnntrnl Circuit: Check the clcc(:wal sys:em by tincrgl~ing the IY
solenoid A mc!allic L./(ck signifies !h.+t lhc s~lcrroid is (:lwra[ing. Ahwnce of the click indicates loss of V>wer supply. Check f,)r Imxc or hl,)wn fuses. Opn-circuilcd or gruundcct solcn,>i,i, hr~,kc.n !C;ILI ires w or spl Icc ctlnnccl inns, llurned-Out Solenoid: Check for open-circuited s[>lcn(,id. Replace if nec<=~ry Check supply voltage; if mus! hc the same as specified on namcpla!e/retainer and mfirked 011 Ihe solcrroicf. Check ambient temperature and cbcck that Ihc core IS nol jammed. Low Volmge: Check vollage across the sol<rroid Iemh. Vollage must be at k!ast 85% of ra;ed volmge.
Solenoid Replticement
with lead wires disconnect conduit, coil leads, and grounding wire. NOTE: Any optional parts attached 10 the old solenoid must be reins! ~lled on Ihe new solenoid, 2. Disassemble solenoids wi!h optional features as follows: .
Spade or St-mw TL)rlT1irliI]S
1. On solenoids
Rcmcwc tcrmlnal conncclions, {crminal blc~k (wrcw krminal
grounding screw. grounding type only).
wire, and
installation
of Solenoid
NOTE: Ior screw tcrlllinals, Ihe scxket head screw holding Ihe Icrminal blwk serves as a ground irlg screw. . Junction Hox Remove conduit find socket head screw (use 5/32 hex key wrench) from center of junc!ion box. Disconnect junclion box from solenoid, 1)1S Plug Connector Rtrnove cenlcr screw fronl DIN plug connector. Disconnect DIN plug connector from adapter. Remove sinker hcadscrcw(use 5/32 hex key wrench), DIN tci-minal adapter, and goske[ from solenoid.
Solenoids may be assembled as a complete unit. Tlghterring is accomplished by means of a hex flange at the base of fhe solenoid. The 3/4 bonnet ccmtruc!ion (Figure 1) must be dls=sembled for inslallnlion and installed wi(h a special wuench adapter.
Installation
of Panel Mounted
Solenoid (See Figure 3)

under .So/ermid Replucenwrf iherr
Disa>scmblc solenoid following instruction pr~x-ccd 3;4 Val+e Ilonnet Construction
Install reloincr(convcx side to solenoid) in 1.312 diameter mounting hole in cuslomcr panel. 2. lhcn position spring washer over plugnutlcore tube sub-w.sembly, 3. Install plugrrut/core tube sub-assembly through reiainer in customer panel. _fllen replace solenoid, nameplate/retainer and red cap. I.
3. Srrap off red cap from top of solcrroid base sub-assembly, 4. Push down on solenoid. Then using a sui(ahle screwdriver, insert blade in slot provided beween solenoid and namepla!e/retainer, Pry upsligh(ly and push 10 remove. Then remove solenoid from solenoid base sub-assembly. 5, Rcn=mble using exploded views for parts idcrr:ifrcation and placement
Disassembly and Reassembly of Solenoids 1, Remove solenoid, see Soleno;d R@cenr#nr.

2. Remove finger spring washer or spring washer (3/4 bonnet solenoid base sub-assembly. 3, Unscrew solenoid base sub-assembly. size) from
15/ 16 valve Bonnet Construction
1. Install solenoid base Sub-a=embly through 0.69 diameter mounting hole

in customer panel. 2. Position spring washer on opposite side of porrel over solenoid base subnssernhly then replace
Solenoid Temperature
Standard
solenoid
arc designed for continuous duty service. When the for a long period, the solenoid becomes hot and can bc touched by hand only for an instant. This is a~~fe operating tem~rature.
is energized
solenoids
NOTE. Some solenoid constructions have a plugnut~core tube sub-assembly, bonnet gaske~ and bonnet in place of the solenoid base sub-assembly. To remove bonnet use special wrench adapter supplied in ASCO Rebuild Kit. For wrench adapter only, order ASCO Wrench Kit No. K218-948. 4. The core is now accessible for cleaning or replacement. 5. If the solenoid is part of a valve, refer 10 basic valve installation and maintenance instructions for further disassembly. 6. Reassemble using exploded views for identification and placement of parts. ORI)EKISG IXFORMATIOA FOR ASCO SOLENOIDS
hlAINTENANCE
A WARNING: To prevent the possibility of personal injury or property damage, turn off electrical power, repressurize solenoid operator and/or valve, and vent fluid to a safe area before servicing.
When Ordering Solenoids for ASCO Solenoid Operators or Valves, order the number smmped on the solenoid. Also specify voltage and frequency.
Page 2 of 4
Form No. V6583R4
ASCO
Valves
Ammirutk S~:ch CiJ.
50-60
Hanover
Road,
Florham
Park, Now Jersey07932
Torque
Part Name solenoid base sub-assembly valve bcmnet (3/4 bonnet construction) bonnet screw (3/8 or 1/2 NPT pipe size) bonnet screw (3/4 NPT pipe
size)
Chart
175 ? 25 90 f 10 25 40 _---L__
.-.-... ..
Torq(Je Value in Newton-Meters
19,8 k 2,8 10,2 f 2,8 . .. . ..-25 1,1
Torque Value in Inch-Pounds
~ ,.
Remove red .;:;2, push solenoidcap and down, ,

A 4,4<+
red cap nameplate/ retainer solenoid with 1/2 conduit connection and green grounding wire finger washer solenoid base sub-assembly 0.9375t;;-Za{NS fi -2A
Then pry here to lIff nameplate/retainer
-. Y
-J
Remove red cap and push solenoid down. Then pry here to lift nameplate/retainer and push to remove.
adapter order kit No. K218-948. 5EE 0.750;;-2a~N-2A bonnet ~ gasket plugnut/core tube sub-assembly
I
3/4 Bonnet
Construction
15/16
Bonnet
Construction solenoids . .=. , ~ .5 +., ,4.< ~ . 4~<.
Alternate Construction
Figure 1. Series 8016G
See torque chart for bonnet screws
//29 ,,,
.. . ~ <%>
~- cap red
:7. ,,
e~
red w nameplate/retainer
I Remove red cap and push solenoid down. Then pry here to lift nameplate/retainer and Dush to remove.
nameplate/ retainer spacer
C
/ 1-
solenoid
~@ ~.
solenoid with 1/2 T conduit connection and green grounding 1 wire 1.312 diameter %< > (. U-mounting hole --%.b,
~-l ~f~+ #& -~ t~-+ A&
$
!
finger washer 0.69 diameter mounting hole
5; -
finger washer valve bonnet
;,= ;~..fl
:;:::r\ washer x
-2 ~w,
h 4 062 to .093 maximum<:
&!&
core tube
Bolted Bonnet Construction Figure 2. Series 8016G solenoid Form N0,V6583R4
E
$%1-
plugnut/core tube sub-assembly core 15/16 Bonnet Construction
3/411 Bonnet Construction
Figure 3. Series 8016G panel mounted solenoids Page 3 of 4 -----sm((% CU. SO-GOano,.r ~.~~, ~
Flcrham Park, New Jersey .,,:.32
ASCO
Valves
Torque
Part Name terminal block screws socket head screw
L
Chart
Torque Value in Newton-Meters 1,1 * (),2 1,7 -2,3 n~+nl ,, ,
Torque Value [n Inch-Pounds 10*2 15-20

1
center screw
5fl
Open-Frame
with 1/4 Spade
Solenoid
Terminals
Open-Frame Solenoid with Screw Terminals.

Socket
used
Open-Frame Solenoid with DIN Terminals,
head screw for grounding.
is
\ terminal tapped hole for #10-32 grounding (not included]
screw (5/32 hex key wrench] [5/32 hex key wrench)
Figure 4. Open-frame
Junction Box Solenoid with 1/4 Spade Terminals
or Screw Terminals
solenoids
cover screw
screw terminal block (see note)

.~
cover El
e-
~/1 ./
junction Note: ~F Junction box with screw terminals shown. With screw terminal block removed, remaining parts comprise the junction box for spade terminal construction.
box
gasket
. &l
..~
= I* L ... / \/ % ,_ .,, ~ .>
See torque chart above
cover asket
grounding screw and cup washer
junction box with 1/2 conduit connection and grounding terminal
socket head screw (5/32 hex key wrench)
Figure 5. Junction box (optional feature)

Open-Frame Solenoid with DIN Terminal Plug Connector
DIN terminal
Indicates that these parts are Included

in DIN plug connector W No.
K236-024
socket Notes: 1, Connector cover may be rotated In 90 increments from position shown for alternate position of cable entry. Refer to markings on DIN connector for proper electrical connections. (5/32
head hex
screw key wrench)
DIN (see
connector block note 2)
* center connector (see note cover 1) screw *
terminal
2.
Figure 6. DIN plug connector kit No. K236-034 (optional feature) Page 4 of 4 Form No. V6583R4
ASCQ
Valves
An-c
Srrmh cu.
50-60 Hanover Road.
Florham
Park.
New
Jersey 07S32
GARDNER
DENVER
139/l(w547 Ist Edition January, 1997
AUTO
SENTRY-ES+
CONTROLS
AUTO SENTRY@ES
CONTROLS
OPERATING AND SERVICE MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Index
.. .. ..... ....... .. ..................................... ........ . . ............ .... .
. . ii
List oflllustrations
..... .. .... .....
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..,.,,
. ......
.. ....... ..
.....
..iv
Introduction
............. .........
. . . . . . . . ,., . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.. .. .... .... v
Section l, Auto Sentry-ES+ Auto Sentry@-ES+
Controller
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ,.
0,.
. . . . . . . .,..
Operation
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .,..,.. Controller
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ,<< . . . . . . . 1
Trouble Shooting AutoSentry@-ES+
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Section 2, Auto Sentry-ES Auto Sentry -ES
Controller
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..25
Operation
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...25 Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Trouble Shooting Auto Sent~@.ES
Section 3, RemoteMounted
Main Motor Starters
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Section 4, Remote Cooling Module Starters
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...43
Section 5, Service and Field Modification
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..44
13-9!10647
Pagei
INDEX Accessories Adjustments Alarm Relay for Auto Sentty-ES+ . . . . . . . . . . . ...44 Connection Emergency Failure Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...4 , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...4 . . . . . . . . . . ...4 . . . . . . . . ...4 ................ 3
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4,28 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13,35 . . . . . . . . . . . . 9,31
External Device High Pressure
Auto Restati After Power Failure
AUTOSENTRY@ES+ CONTROLLER, SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...1 Connection to External Controls . . . . . . . . . ...13
High Temperature......,.. Low Oil Pressure,.......,,.. Motor Protective Other Shutdowns Devices
Alarm Relay RemoteOn/Off
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . ...13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...13
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...4
Power Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...4 Separator Troubleshooting Controls Differential Pressure . . . . . . . . ...4
Serial Communications
Control Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...3 General Description Introduction Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...18
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...19
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...1 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...2
Display Modes
Setvice Advisories Shutdowns Wiring Diagrams
Automatic
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...13
Constant Run Mode
Low Demand Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...2 Sequence Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...9 . . . . . . ...9 AUTOSENTRY-ES CONTROLLER, SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...25 Connection to External Controls . . . . . . . . . ...34
Other Control Features
Auto Restart After Power Failure Current Limiting
Alarm Relay RemoteOn/Off
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . ...35 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...34 . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...35
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...9 . . . . . . . . . . . . ...9
Modulating-Load/Unload Programming
Serial Communications
and Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...4 Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . ...8
Control Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...26 General Description Introduction Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...25
Configuration Flowchart
............................. 5 Menu.... . . . . . . . . . . ...6 . . . . . . . . . . . . ...7
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...25 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...26 . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...26
Main Adjustments Maintenance
Adjustments
Automatic
Operation Adjustments Sequence Adjustments Unit Setup Adjustments Sequencing Automatic Checkout
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...7 .,..... . ., . . . . ...8
Constant Run Mode
Low Demand Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...26 Sequence Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...31 . . . . . ...31
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...10 Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...12
Other Control Features
Auto Restart After Power Failure Programming and Setup..,.,.. Steps
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...12 System.......,.. the initial Sequence . . . . . . ...10 . . . . . . . . 11
. . . . . . . . . ...28
Compressor Establishing General
Programming Sequencing Automatic Compressor Controlling Establishing Operation
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...28
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...31 Sequence Change System . . . . . . . . ...34
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11,12 Features . . . . . . . . . ...12
Installation Operation
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...32 . ..33
Pressure while Sequencing the initial Sequence
Other Sequencing Service Advisories Shutdowns
. . . . . ...33
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3,19
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..3 , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...4
Other Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Service Advisories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Amp Sensor Failure
13-9/10-S6?
Pageii
Shutdowns
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...27 Failure Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...28 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...28
installation Starter
and Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...42
Connection Emergency
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...42 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13,34 Compressors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10,31
RemoteOn/Off Sequencing
High Pressure
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...28 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...28 ., . . . . . . . . . . . ...28 Sequencing Compressors with Auto Sentry-ES, Compressor System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...32 Serial Communications Service Advisories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13,35
High Temperature High Vibration
(optional)
Low Oil Pressure Motor Protective Other Shutdowns
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...28 Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . ...27
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3. 19.27.37
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...28
Power Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...28 Separator Troubleshooting Controls Differential Pressure . . . . . . . . ..28
SERVICE AND FIELD MODIFICATION, SECTION 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...44 Accessories Controller Controller Shutdowns for Auto Sentry@-ES+ Replacement Upgrades . . . . . . ...44
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...37
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...44 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...44
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...37 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...37
Display Modes
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...3
Service Advisories Shutdowns Wiring Diagrams Communications, Connection
Amp Sensor Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...4 Connection Emergency Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4,28 Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4,28 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4,28 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4,28 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...28
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...38 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...35
External Device Serial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13,35 ..43 High Pressure of Remote Cooling Module Starters
High Temperature
Connection of RemoteMounted Main Motor Starters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...42 INTRODUCTION Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
High Vibration (optional) Low Oil Pressure
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4,28 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3,27
Motor Protective Devices Other Shutdowns
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...28
and Setup Controller Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...28 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...4
Power Failure Separator
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4,28 Pressure . . . . . . . . . . 4,28 . . . . . . . . . . . ...43 . . . . . . ...42
Auto Sentry-ES Auto Sentry-ES+
Differential
Starters, Remote Cooling Module Starters, Remote-Mounted
Main Motor
REMOTE COOLING MODULE STARTERS, SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...43 Controls Checkout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...43 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...43
Trouble Shooting Controls
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18,37
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23,40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18,37 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19,37
Controls Connections installation Starter
Display Modes
and Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...43
Service Advisories Shutdowns Wiring Diagrams
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...43
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20,38
REMOTEMOUNTED MAIN MOTOR STARTERS, SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...42 Controls Checkout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...42 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...42
Auto Sentry -ES+ControlIer AutoSent~ -ES
. . . . . . . . . . . ...13 . . . ...35
Controls Connections
Controller.......,..
LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS
Auto Sentry-ES+ Auto Sentry-ES
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..v Display ..,.,. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..v
Figure 11 Figure 12 Figure 13 Figure 1-4 Figure 15 Figure 1-6
Auto Sentry-ES+
Display...,,,.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ., . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...1 Auto Sentry ES+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...5
Flow Chart for Set-Up
Programming,
Wiring Diagram, ES+ Controller Wiring Diagram, ES+ Controller Wiring Diagram, ES+ Controller Wiring Diagram, ES+ Controller
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ., . .,, .,, , . ., .,, . . ...17
Figure 21 Figure 22,
Auto Sentry-ES
Display .,....
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...36
Wiring Diagram, ES Controller
..
139/10-647
Pageiv
INTRODUCTION
This manual descirbes the operation and maintenance
connection tems, Section 1 describes software into local or plantwide data collection sys-
of electonic controllers used on oilflooded rotary screw compressor packages The controller is the key component of the ES control system described in the Operating and Se~ice Manual for the compressor package. Either of two controllers may be installed on the compressor package, functions. The controllers and are: both perform similar
version 210 (which cov-
ers the ES+ controller), AUTO SENTRY; -ES
AUTO
SENTRY3ES+ all of the control functions of the controller
This offers
below plus additional features and performance. A graphic display and keypad provides service lights and rapid access to compressor data. The controller features enhanced continuous modulation, or may be run systems. The adjustments are in fullload/no-load
This offers complete electronic control of all compressor functions, including motor starting and modulation. It monitors pressures and temperatures within the package, and presents them on a large alphanumeric display, All user input is from a simple keypad, allowing selection of operating mode at any time and adjustment of the compressor to meet needs of the application. This controller may also be easily connected to other AUTO SENTRY5ES controllers to operate multiple units as a single compressed air system. Section 2 describes software version 1.60 (which covers the ES controller). Sections 3 through 5 cover special control topics common to either controller.
grouped to provide fast access to common adjustments. The AUTO SENTRY8ES+ multi-compressor sequencing retains the simple installation and operation with improved performance for reduced operating cost. A dedicated RS232 data port is provided for
AUTO
SENTRY
3-ES+
DISPLAY
AUTO
SENTRY3-ES
DISPLAY
13-9/ 10-647
Page v
SECTION 1 AUTO SENTRY5 ES+ CONTROLLER

GENERAL DESCRIPTION The Gardner Denver rotary screw compressor is prewired with all controls, motor, and starter for the voltage and horsepower at the time of ordering. It is necessary only to connect the compressor unit to the correct power supply and to the shop air line (and to the appropriate water supply if water cooled). A standard compressor unit consists of the compressor, oil reservoir, oil cooling system and filter, motor type as specified, NEMA 12 starter/ control box, and control components as described in the package instruction manual. This compressor unit features the AUTO SENTRYz ES+ controller, which integrates all the control functions under microprocessor control. Its functions include safety and shutdown, compressor regulation, operator control, and advisory / maintenance indicators. The keypad and display provide the operator with a logical and easily operated control of the compressor and indication of its cond; tlol AUTO SENTRY ~ES+ OPERATION Operation of the AUTO SENTRY ES+ is dependent on selection of an operating mode (described below) from the controller keypad, Prior to starting, the [STOP/RESET] key must be pressed to place the controller into its READY state (as indicated on the display), Compressor operation may then be started by pressing an operating mode key, Once operating, the mode may be changed at any time by pressing a key, and the selected mode will be displayed in the lower right corner of the message v~indow. Press the [STOP/ RESET] key at any time to stop the compressor under normal conditions. If the compressor has been running, the reservoir will first be relieved of pressure before stopping the motor. The display will count down to zero during the normal stop.
FIGURE
11
AUTO
SENTRY@
ES+ DISPLAY
139/1 0-647
Page 1
~WAFMWNG
Automatic restarting or electrical shock can cause injury or death. Open, tag and lockout main disconnect and any other circuits before servicing the unit.
On compressor units without turn valve, the controller operates valves IVO and IVC to position the inlet valve, This continuously adjusts delivery to match demand. If the controller is programmed for load-unload operation, the controller will dellver full capacity until the system pressure reaches the set pressure. It will then unload (but not blow down) and will not deliver any air
to the system. way between Sentry 5-ES+ sor. When When the system pressure falls to halfthe set and reset pressure, the Auto controller again fully loads thecompres-
If any alternate display is on, press the operating mode key to return to the normal display, While operating and running, the unit may be manually unloaded by pressing and holding the operating mode key. This unloads a running compressor after several seconds, and will prevent loading while the key is held down. When the key is released, the control will resume its normal operation as required. An optional control maybe wired into the Auto Sentry ES+ controller to interrupt and restart the unit based on controls by others. When stopped by these controls, the display indicates REMOTE HALT. In any mode, the compressor will start only if reservoir pressure is below 5 psig. The display will indicate if the control is waiting for a reservoir blowdown, along with the remaining pressure. The controls also delay initial loading of the compressor until a startup delay has been completed.
first starting, the controller will keep the compressorfully unloaded and blown down until the system pressure drops below the reset pressure. Once loaded, the resetvoir will remain fully charged, regardless of demand. Responses to demand are thus immediate, as soon as system pressure drops below the setpoint.
Low Demand Mode Operation The low demand mode reduces power consumption by relieving pressure in the reservoir during unloaded operation. This mode is best used where there is moderate air storage and there are unloaded periods during the day, but frequent motor starting and stopping is undesirable, During periods of moderate to high demands, this mode is identical to the constantrun mode described above. During low demand periods, the controller will open the blowdown valve and fully close the inlet valve to minimize the motor load. A timer is reset when this occurs. While in this state, control air pressure is supplied from the plant air system (as are any plant loads). When the system air pressure drops to the reset pressure due to increased demand, the blowdown valve recloses and the controls resume their normal modulation to maintain the system pressure near the set pressure. Subsequent blowdown periods are not allowed until the timer has completed its cycle. This cycle eliminates frequent blowdowns during moderate loads, and the energy required to repressurize the reservoir. It also eliminates the problems of oil foaming and carryover that can occur if the oil reservoir of an oilflooded compressor is blown down too often. The timer is adjustable from 5 to 20 minutes. Automatic Mode Operation This mode provides automatic start and timed stop, and is best used in applications with long unloaded periods (e.g. idle shifts or weekends) and adequate storage to allow the compressorto be stopped for periods of light demands. Operation during periods of moderate to heavy demands are identical to the low demand mode. The automatic time delay is adjustable from 5 to 20 minutes. If the controller operates unloaded for this period with no demand, the compressor drive motor is halted to eliminate its power consumption. The con-
Constant Run Mode Operation This mode is best used in applications where there are no long periods of unloaded operation, or for minimum response time to sudden demands. The compressor unit will start and run continuously, using its modulation controls to match delivery to demand. As demand falls below the compressor capacity, the pressure will rise to the setpoint of the control. When the pressure reaches the setpoint, the Auto Sentry@ ES+ controller operates the solenoid valves TVO (turn valve open), TVC (turn valve close), IVO (inlet valve open) and IVC (inlet valve close) to control the CFM of the compressor to match the CFM demand of the air system. As the demand changes, the controller will continue adjustment for the best compressor operation. At moderate to heavy demand, the inlet will be held open, and the turn valve will control delivery. At lighter demands, the turn valve will be fully open, and the inlet valve will control capacity. At very light demand, the compressor will unload, but will not blow down the reservoir. It will reload just below the set pressure. The controller will thus maintain the pressure within a few psi of the set pressure.
trols will remain in this state until demand is again indicated by a drop in pressure. This is the most common selected mode of operation, as it automatically will operate the compressor unit in the most efficient manner for the demand of the air system. Sequence Mode Operation This mode provides for communication between controllers, operating only as many as are required for economical operation. This is best used on applications with large storage capacity and diverse loads. The lead unit will operate identically to the automatic mode; operation will be automatically staged for each lag unit (up to 8 total). For more information, refer to Sequencing Compressors With The Auto Sentry ES+, page 10,. Communication between controllers is achieved by interconnection of a communications cable to circuit board connectors. A unit number must be assigned to each unit in this mode, but thedisplaywill indicate the units actual operating ranking. AUTO SENTRY@ES+ CONTROL DISPLAY
3,
4,
Hours till next recommended

List of any active advisory
oil filter change messages
If no keys are pressed for 5 seconds, the display will revert to its normal mode.
The display is also used as a setvice reminder for normal maintenance items, If service is recommended, the yellow advisory light will be on, and a message will alternate with the normal lower line display. Yellow lights on the diagram also Indicate the area needing service. These messages are intended to advise of conditions which may lead to a shutdown. If a protective shutdown occurs, the red shutdown light will be on and the top line of the display will indicate SHUTDOWN. The lower line will indicate the cause of the shutdown. A red indicator on the diagram indicates the area needing sewice, SERVICE ADVISORIES The AUTO SENTRY@ ES+ controller turns on an advisory when it detects operation which needs service attention, but does not warrant shutting down the compressor. Some of these are normal maintenance procedures, and are intended to serve as a reminder to perform routine service. Others are conditions which can reduce the maximum compressor performance. It will remain in effect until reset. Check the display during routine inspections, and perform maintenance as suggested. Refer to the troubleshooting section for detailed information about each advisory. Temperature advisories may be cleared while the unit is running by simply pressing the [ENTER] key. To reset the service advisories, press the [STOP/RESET] key to stop operation of the compressor. After it has stopped, disconnect power and service as required. After servicing, restore power and reset the board as indicated in Maintenance Adjustment, page 7. PROTECTIVE SHUTDOWNS
The display above the keypad is used to provide operating information to the user. If a shutdown has occurred, the display will indicate the cause. During normal operation, the display will show the system (plant) pressure, compressor discharge temperature, total running hours, and operation mode. Alternate displays are available by pressing the keys on the diagram or the [<][>] keypad keys, and will be identified on the display. These include: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
Air/oil reservoir
pressure pressure temperature
Separator differential
Air/oil reservoir & separator System discharge pressure
Air end discharge temperature Remaining blowdown time Remaining auto time Total running hourmeter Loaded operation hourmeter
Remaining blowdown and auto times are only available in Low De-mand, Automatic, and Sequence modes, as appropriate. Service information may also be displayed while the compressor is running. Press the [+][] keys to display the following: 1. 2. Main motor current (optional) Est. hours till next recommended oil change
The AUTO SENTRY@ ES+ will shut down the unit following any fault detected in the following devices. Longterm problems will have a brief blowdown period before fully shutting down. Following a shutdown, a message will be displayed, with the top line indicating SHUTDOWN and the lower line indicating the cause. The shutdown light will be steadily lit if the cause still exists, or will flash if the cause has been cleared. Refer to the troubleshooting section for detailed information about each shutdown. To resume operation, the cause of the shutdown must be corrected and the controller reset by pressing the [STOP/RESET] key. Motor Protective Devices Overload heaters are furnished for the starter in the voltage range specified. There are three (3) overloads in the starter of proper size for the starter and its enclosure. Note that motor nameplate current must be multiplied by 0.577 forwye=
13-9/10-647
Page 3
delta starters. The display will indicate that an overload relay has tripped. The overload relay is reset by pressing the button on the relay itself, then the controller may be reset. Motor current (amps) and voltage must be measured in the affected motor wiring to locate the cause for high current. Overload relays provided in standard units are sensitive to both overload and phase for improved motor protection. Proper startimbalance
Low Oil Pressure The AUTO SENTRY5 ES+ will shutdown the unit if inadequate oil pressure is detected after loading the compressor. If this occurs, check the wiring and piping to the solenoid valves. Emergency Stop Press the emergency stop button to shut down the unit and the controller. To restart, pull the button out to its normal position and reset the controller. This should be used for emergency purposes only use the keypad [STOP/RESET] for normal controlled stopping. Power Failure Following power interruptions, the controller will remain in a shutdown state (unless programmed for auto restant). External Device This input is provided for user or dealer installed devices needed by specific applications. Other shutdown field selectable messages include: high vibration, phase relay, low voltage relay, water press, and motor overtemp. Amp Sensor Failure The optional used with the ES+ controller is used for ing and advisory purposes only. The functions are those when the controller er operation. These may be disabled installed. Connection connectors plugged. current sensor operational tunonly shutdown senses impropif no sensor is
er coil and contact action is also monitored and errors in operation will cause a shutdown with the cause displayed as a starter or starter contact error. The compressor is protected High Temperature from high discharge temperature by a thermistor probe located in the compressor discharge elbow. The AUTO SENTRY@ ES+ will shut the compressor down if temperature exceeds 225 F (or lower per user adjustment) or if rapid temperature rise is detected. Reservoir / separator temperature is also monitored, and will provide high temp shutdowns. The location of the temperature fault will be displayed. Thermistor probes are also checked for open or shorted circuits, and the display will indicate the location of the defective probe.
~CAUT10F4
Machine damage will occur if compressor is repeatedly restarted after high temperature stops operation. Find and correct the malfunction before resuming operation.
FailureThe ES+ controller checks input and will shutdown if they become un-
Other Shutdowns The controller runs continuous diagnostic checks of its own operation and the sensors to which it is connected. Refer to the service section for a complete listing of shutdowns and remedial actions.
Separator Differential Pressure The pressure drop across the separator is continually monitored by AUTO SENTRY3ES+. The unit will be shut down at a differential pressure of approximately 15 psid. The pressure drop can be monitored at pressing the separator key on the diagram should be checked while the compressor at full capacity. A service advisory comes mend maintenance prior to this shutdown. any time by twice. This is delivering on to recom-
PROGRAMMING FOR THE AUTO
AND SETUP INSTRUCTIONS SENTRY3 ES+ CONTROLLER
The AUTO SENTRY@ ES+ will High Pressure first attempt to unload and blow down the unit if excessive pressures are detected in the reservoir or the plant system. If unsuccessful, a shutdown will occur. Shut down will also occur if a defective transducer is detected, or improper zero adjustments are detected. The display will indicate the location of the high sensed pressure or transducer (xducer) error. Check that all adjustments have been properly made, and all connections are secure.
Programming and setup is accomplished with the PROGRAM keys. See FIGURE 11, page 1. In all steps, the [ENTER] key enters the displayed value into memory and advances to the next programming function, The plus [+] and minus [-] keys will increase and decrease displayed numeric values, or step through menu selections. During numeric adjustments, the left [<] and right [>] arrow keys, move the cursor (flashing digit) to the position desired. Use the [+] and [] keys to change the number at the cursor. At any point in the programming and setup routine, the [STOP/RESE~ key can be pressed to exit the adjustment mode without altering the adjustment. In all steps of the programming routine, the top line of the display will give a description of the parameter to be programmed, while the bottom line shows the variable that may be altered or stored.
13-9/HO-647
Page 4
7
1
RES PRES DIF PRES RES TMP SYS PRES DIS TMP BD TMR
ALTERNATE DISPLAYS .+--*+7 -+___&-l I I ~=a ~---__A I
r
1
12
1
WITH I
THESEADJUSTMENTS NOT ACCESSIBLE ARE
L
I
I
I
SETUP SWITCH IN RIGHT POSITION. ALL ADJUSTMENTS ARE AVAILABLE WITH THE SWITCH POSITIONED TOWARDS THE CENTER OF THE CONTROLLER.
I
I
ADJUSTMENT
MENU I
I
~CONFIGURATION-+ 4
~SEOUENCE~
~MAINTENANCE~
~OPERATION~
NUMOF
SEO UNITS
I I AEIVISORYMESSAGES I
LANGUAGE I
HI
SYS
PRES i
LIM
I
, i I
EE=l
E&d
Ei&inl
t I
REMOVE SYS PRESS i
FILTER
CHNG
INT
I
I I
START
TIMER
REMOVE RES PRESS
OVER TEMP LIMIT i FAN TYPE i SYSTEM i VOLUME
SET PRESSURE
I
I I
AIR END TYPE i MOTOR SFA i
r
I
4
RESET PRESSUR[
F=+=--l
1
AIJTORESTART
I
302 EAU1255 (Ref. Drawing)
I
AUTO TIME
CONTROL
MODE
AUX SO MESSAGE
kAmo----I
I +
FIGURE1-2 - FLOWCHARTFORSET-UP PROGRAMMING -AUTOSENTRY-ES+
The following is a step by step guide to programming the AUTO SENTRY@ ES+. Remember, between each step, it is necessary to press the [ENTER] key to store the new value and advance to the next step. Main Adjustments 1. Menu
controls the operation of packagemounted wye delta starters, if so equipped. Set this adjustment for the amount of time needed for the motor to
reach its highest speed while starting. This is typically 3 seconds for fullvoltage starters, 79 seconds for wyedelta starters. If a remotemounted, reduced voltage starter is used, set this adjustment 12 seconds longer than the starters internal timer. 4. In the top line, SET PRESSURE is displayed. The bottom line will indicate a pressure value. It is to be set at the nameplate rating of the compresUnder NO circumsor for normal operation. stances, is this adjustment to be set in excess of the compressor nameplate pressure. It may be set lower, if desired, to reduce pressure and power consumption. In the top line, RESET PRESSURE is displayed. The bottom line will indicate a pressure value. This setting determines the point at which machine startup occurs in AUTO and SEQUENCE modes and when the compressor will load up from the blown down condition. Note that RESET PRESSURE can be set up to 5 PSI below SET PRESSURE. Set this lower to reduce compressor cycling. All sequenced machines must have the same SET and RESET PRESSURE setpoints. In the top line, BLOWDOWN TIME is displayed. The bottom line will indicate a time between 5 and 20 minutes, It is factory set at 10 minutes, This is the minimum time interval between blowdowns. A longer blowdown time minimizes wasteful dumping of compressed air when loading is likely to occur in a short time. In the top line, AUTO TIME is displayed. The bottom line will indicate a time between 5 and 20 minutes. It too, is factory set at 10 minutes. Its function is to prevent too frequent motor starting, and to allow the motor a cooldown period before stopping. IV CONTROL MODE is displayed on the top line. Select MODULATING for standard operation, LOAD-UNLOAD may be selected for systems with large storage and wide pressure differential. Inthetop line, REMOTE HALT is displayed. The bottom line indicates either TIMED or lMMEDlATE. Refer to the description of Remote On / Off later in this section for additional details. Select the desired response to the remote input and press [ENTER] to proceed. The
The compressor must be stopped prior to making any adjustments. If the unit is running, press the [STOP/RESET] key to place the control in the READY state. Adjustments can also be performed from the SHUTDOWN state. After adjustments are completed, the AUTO SENTRY@ ES+ controller returns to the this state until the cause is repaired and the controller is manually reset.
2.
Press the [ENTER] key to begin programming. This enters the adjustments menu. The adjustments are broken into five groups as shown in FIGURE 1-2, page5. Toselectagroup, press [+] or [] until the desired group is shown on the bottom line of the display. Press [ENTER] to proceed to the group adjustments detailed below.
5.
Note: Configuration adjustments are normally required only at the time of assembly or after parts have been replaced. Unit setup adjustments are normally required only at the time of unit installation. To prevent accidental access, these will not be available if the SET switch is in the position closest to the corner. The SET switch is located on the bottom of the controller chassis, on the side behind the program keypad area, If the switch is towards the center of the controller, all five adjustment sections are accessible. Operation 1. Adjustments
6.
In the top line, LANGUAGE is indicated. The bottom line will indicate ENGLISH or an alternate language for display messages. Select the desired display Iangauge and press [ENTER] to proceed. Refer to the appropriate manual for further instructions in the selected language. If a controller is set for another language, press the [STOP/RESET] key, press [ENTER] twice, and press the [+] or [] key to select ENGLISH at this step. Then press [ENTER] to select the language.
7.
8.
2.
In the top line, DISPLAY UNITS is indicated. The bottom line will indicate ENGLISH (PSIG, Fahrenheit) or METRIC (Bars, Celsius) units of measurement. Select the desired display units and press [ENTER] to proceed. In the top line, START TIMER is displayed. The bottom line will indicate a time between 3 and 10 seconds. This is the time that the controller spends in the unloaded start mode. This also
9.
3.
10 This completes the operational adjustments.
139!1 0-$ V
Page 6
controller menu. Maintenance 1.
will
return
to
the
main
adjustments
Adjustments
are in effect (yellow ADIf any service advisories VISORY indicator is on), they will be displayed on the top line. The bottom line indicates LEAVE ADVISORY (do not reset) or CLEAR ADVISORY (turn it off). Select the desired action and press [ENTER] to proceed. Note that both the CHANGE OIL and CHANGE OIL FILTER advisories are based on operating time. These timers are not automatically reset on the AUTO SENTRY@ ES+ when the advisory is turned off, and the adviso~ will come back on shortly after the unit starts running. If the oil or filter has been changed, clear the advisory as noted above, then proceed to the following steps to reset the appropriate timer back to its full value.
currently installed on this air system that also have AUTO SENTRY3-ES+ controllers, It should be noted that ~ AUTO SE NTRYGES+ compressors on the system must have the same number programmed here to operate correctly in SEQUENCE mode. Adjust as required, and press [ENTER] to proceed
NOTICE
Setting the value in step 1 to one indicates that no sequencing is to take place. Consequently, steps 2,3, and 4, which relate to sequencing, are skipped by the AUTO SENTRY@ ES+; the adjustments will continue with step 5.
2.
The top line displays NEXT OIL CHANGE and the estimated hours remaining are displayed on the bottom line. The actual time will be affected by operating conditions which affect oil life. Press the [+] or [-] keys to switch to the oil change interval (see UNIT SETUP) if service was performed early. Press again to change back to remaining time, When the desired value is shown, press [ENTER] to save and proceed to the next step. If the advisory message is on, it must be cleared as noted in step 1.
2.
In the top line, UNIT NUMBER is displayed, The bottom line will again indicate a number of one through eight and be factory set at l. Enter adifferent number for each AUTO SENTRY@ ES+ in a sequenced system. The sequence mode will not function properly if two or more compressors have the same UNIT NUMBER. Example: 1, 2, and 3 for a three compressor installation. This is the only setting which must be different for each member of a sequenced system, All other settings should normally be the same for all members.
3.
The top line displays NEXT OIL FILTER and the hours remaining are displayed on the bottom line. Press the [+] or [] keys to switch to the oil filter interval (see UNIT SETUP) if service was performed early. Press again to change back to remaining time. When the desired value is shown, press [ENTER] to save and proceed. If the adviso~ message is on, it must be cleared as noted in step 1.
3.
In the top line, TRANSFER INTERVAL is displayed, The bottom line will indicate a number of hours in the range of 1 to 5000, It is factory set at 24. This is the number of hours that this machine will stay in the role of lead compressor. Normally it is desirable to set this to the same value on all sequenced units to equalize running hours. Different values may be programmed, if desired, to help equalize hours.
4.
This completes the maintenance adjustments. The controller will return to the main adjustments menu. Adjustments
4.
Sequence
See Sequencing Compressors With The Auto Sentrya ES+, page 10, for more details on setting up and optimizing a sequenced compressor installation, 1, In the top line, NUM OF SEQ UNITS is displayed. The bottom line will indicate a number in the range of one through eight. This will be factory set at 1. This should be set to a number corresponding to the number of compressors that are
In the top line, LAG START DELAY is displayed. The bottom line will indicate a number in the range of 1 to 600 seconds, It is factory set at 30. This is the length of time this machine will wait before starting when the pressure drops below the reset point. This delay period begins when a previous member of the system is loaded. This should be set to the same value for all sequenced units. Its setting will depend on the amount of air storage volume in the system. Too small a number will result in more compressors being started than is necessary to satisfy demand.
139/1 0-647
Page 7
5.
The controller displays BAUD RATE on the top line, and a selection between1 200 or 9600 on the Iowerline. The controller can operate at either speed. All units in the system must be set the same. Select the desired value, and press [ENTER]. This completes the sequence adjustments. The controller will return to the main adjustments menu. Adjustments
6.
should normally be set for either the motor nameplate service factor amps (SFA, if given) or for the motor nameplate full load amps (FLA) times the motor nameplate set-wee factor (SF), It may be set lower, if desired. Refer to other features, later in this section, for additional details. If current monitoring is not installed, set this to zero (0) to disable current monitoring, 6. This completes the configuration adjustments. The controller will return to the main adjustments menu,
Configuration 1.
In the top line, HI SYS PRES LIM is displayed. The bottom line will indicate a value that is factory set 20 25 PSI above name plate. This is the pressure that will cause a shutdown if exceeded due to a malfunction such as a stuck inlet valve or broken control line. This should be set at or slightly below the rating of the pressure relief valve. The controller will attempt a number of actions as it approaches to prevent the pressure from reaching this limit.
Unit Setup Adjustments 1. In the top line, OIL CHANGE INTERVAL is displayed. The bottom line will indicate a time interval of 1000 to 8000 hours. After the machine has run for the programmed setting, an advisory will be displayed, requesting an oil change. Adjust as desired and press [ENTER] to proceed. In the top line, FILTER CHNG INTERVAL is displayed. The bottom line will indicate a time interval of 500 to 1000 hours. After the machine has run for the programmed setting, an advisory will be displayed, requesting an oil filter change. Adjust as desired and press [ENTER] to proceed. In the top line, OVER TEMP LIMIT is displayed. The bottom line will indicate 225 F. This is the maximum (and proper) setting for compressor operation. It maybe temporarily Ioweredtoverifythe function of the temperature shutdown system. FAN TYPE is displayed next on the top line. Select AIR COOLED for units with packagemounted air coolers only, This will delay fan startup until the oil has warmed up in the package. Select WATER COOLED for water cooled units or any unit with a remote cooler. This will run the fan whenever the compressor motor runs. In the top line, SYSTEM VOLUME is displayed. The bottom line may be selected as (SMALL, MEDIUM, or LARGE. This tunes the response of the modulation control loops to optimize loop stability, It is factory set to MEDIUM. Set as follows: SMALL if estimated volume is less than ,25 gallon per CFM. MEDIUM if estimated volume is between .25 and 1.0 gallon per CFM. LARGE if estimated gallon per CFM. volume is greater than 1.0
2.
NOTICE
The controller will automatically just the set and reset pressures quired if this limit is lowered. adas re-
3.
2.
In the top line, REMOVE SYS PRESS is displayed. The bottom line displays the current pressure being sensed at the package discharge, At this point steps must be taken to ensure that system pressure is, in fact, zero psig. Remove the pressure line to the system pressure transducer. Pressing ~ENTER] will now cause the AUTO SENTRY& ES+ to calibrate the transducer output to zero P.SIG, Obviously, pressure measurement errors will be encountered if zeroing is done with pressure at the transducer. 1!large errors are detected, the controller will demand that the transducer be checked. In the top line, REMOVE RES PRESS is displayed. The bottom line displays the current pressure being sensed in the reservoir. The reservoir pressure transducer may now be zeroed by following the steps outlined in 2 above. In the top line, AIR END TYPE is displayed. The bottom line displays the current selection. Set as appropriate for the compressor. MOTOR SFA is displayed on the top line. This
4.
5.
3.
4.
5.
13- !3!1 0-647
Page 8
OTHER CONTROL
FEATURES
NOTICE
The setting of this parameter is When set to the most critical. the controller propriate value, maintain the discharge pressure minimized modulation changes. not apwill with
Modulating Load/Unload TheAUTO SENTRY5 ES+ controller offers two control modes, to suit the needs of different applications with different storage capacity. When set for MODULATING, the controller will start and load whenever the pressure drops below the reset pressure, Continuous modulation by the turnvalve (if so equipped) and the inlet valve will maintain the discharge pressure near the set pressure for any CFM demand from full capacity to very light demand. The inlet and turn valves are coordinated to always use the most efficient and appropriate control, At very light or zero demand, the cornpressorwill completely unload, blowdown, and stop as appropriate for the selected operating mode, This is the normal control mode for the compressor, and is preferred for almost all applications. When set for LOAD-UNLOAD, the controller will start and load whenever the pressure drops below the reset pressure. When the pressure rises to the set pressure, it completely unloads. If the blowdown timer has not timed out, the compressor will reload when the system pressure drops below the midpoint between set and reset pressure. If the blowdown timer has timed out, the reservoir will blow down, and reload will not occur until the pressure drops below the reset pressure, Use a large receiver volume or wide difference between set and reset pressure to prevent rapid cycling. Current Limiting Current limiting is available when an AUTO SENTRYS ES+ controllers used on acompressor unit with turn valve control and has current monitoring installed, This is based on the motor service factor amps programmed above. On units with turn valves, the controller will unload as required to prevent operation above the programmed service factor amps, This continues operation of the compressor at reduced delivery, but within the programmed limit. This limiting will occur in either the modulating or the loadunload mode of operation. This feature takes control only if operating conditions are outside of the compressor units design range. Low operating voltage, in particular, can cause high amp draw. This will heat the motor beyond its design, and will normally trip the overload relay to prevent motor failure. The AUTO SENTRY3 ES+, however, will automatically reduce the delivery to continue operation within design limits. if severe conditions persist, the controller will display HIGH MOTOR AMPS. This feature is also coordinated with the AUTO SENTRY@ ES+ sequencing controls. During low voltage conditions, lead units will operate only up to their limits. If necessary, another compressor will start to meet the air demand. Auto Restart After Power Failure The AUTO SENTRY@ ES+ controller normally displays SHUT-
6.
In the top line, AUTO RESTART is displayed, The bottom line will indicate either OFF or ON, The factory setting is OFF, and the controller will display a power failure shutdown after power has been restored. Set this feature to ON when it is necessary to have the compressor automatically restart after a power interruption. There will be a brief delay, then the control resumes the mode it was in prior to the interruption, This feature shall only be enabled when the owner determines that it is safe to do so, It is recommended that compressor access be limited to only trained service personnel when this feature is used.
7.
This step is only encountered if the AUTO RESTART function was set to ON in the previous step. In the top line, RESTART TIME is displayed. The bottom line will indicate a time between 5 and 60 seconds. It is factory set at 10 seconds. This is the amount of delay introduced before restarting after power has been restored. Set it as desired to allow time for power to stabilize before starting compressors, The display now reads JOG MOTOR? and indicates the amount of time to energize the starter. Adjust with the [+] or [] key to the smallest value needed to bump the motor and check rotation, 0.1 to 0.2 seconds is normally adequate for factory furnished fullvoltage starters; wyedelta or remote starters may require a little more time. Set back to zero to proceed to the next step. In the top line, AUX SD MESSAGE is displayed. The bottom line will display the message which will appear if power is removed from terminal 7. Select the most appropriate message for userfurnished shutdown devices, and press [ENTER] to proceed.
8.
9.
The 10. This completes the unit setup adjustments. controller will return to the main adjustments menu.
13-9/1 0-647
Page 9
DOWN POWER FAILURE after power has been interrupted and restored. Press the [STOP/ RESETl key and select an operating mode to restart the compressor. If programmed for automatic restart, the AUTO SENTRY6 ES+ controller pauses and begins counting down when power is restored This time is adjustable in the programming steps noted above. This must be at least several seconds, but may be set longer to allow other plant loads to start up first. After the countdown is complete, the AUTO SENTRY3 ES+ controller resumes the mode of operation prior to the power interruption. If this is enabled in a sequenced system, set all of the timers to the same value. All AUTO SENTRY@ ES+ controllers will the resume the same sequence numbers which they had prior to the interruption. The sequence controls will start the lead unit after the starl timer countdown, and add units individually as required, based on the lag start delay.
pressers. This kit contains 500 feet 01 cable, eight modular connectors, and a crimping tool to install the connectors.
NOTICE
Though similar in operation and in stallation, this sequencing system is designed to take advantage of all of the internal features of the AUTO SENTRY@ES+ controller. Communications cables should not be connected to compressor units with I AUTO SENTRY3ES+ controllers part number 201 EAPI173 or 202 EAP1173. Multiple compressors with each type controller may be operated as independent groups piped to the same plant demand.
SEQUENCING COMPRESSORS SENTRY5 ES+
WITH THE AUTO
General - The sequencing mode is used to operate multiple compressors in a common plant air system. The individual units operate similarly to operation in the automatic mode, except that the setpoints are under control of the sequencing system. This system is actually distributed among the individual AUTO SENTRY@ ES+ controllers and compressor units, with communications between them to keep the system coordinated. Sequencing is intended to start, run, unload, blowdown, and stop compressors in response to changes in demand during the day or week. The AUTO SENTRY5ES+ controller is designed for systems of two through eight compressors piped into a common air receiver for distribution to the plant. In any such system, the receiver is an important part of the application; it supplies air to the plant and allows compressor units to be unloaded and stopped. This stored reserve eliminates the need to operate spinning resewe of unloaded compressors. This storage may bean air receiver, or maybe the volume of air in a large distribution system. In either case, the compressors must be piped to this volume with a minimum of restriction. The control system will operate only as many compressors as are needed to supply the CFM demand of the plant, and to maintain the compressor system pressure between the SET and RESET pressures programmed into the controllers. The AUTO SENTRY@ ES+ controllers are completely set up to operate this system. The only required additional part is the cable which runs from controller to controller. A kit, 200 EAP752, is available which contains all material needed to sequence up to five com-
In spite of the fact that it is a standard feature and its inherent installation simplicity, the sequencing function of a multi-compressor AUTO SENTRY3ES+ system is the most fullyfeatured, functionally-complete available today. Compressor System A proper sequencing installation requires two or more Gardner Denver rotary air compressors complete with AUTO SENTRY@ ES+ controllers, piped into a common air system, interconnected as described above. For best performance, connect the units directly to a common header and receiver, without any intervening dryers, filters, or other restrictions, If any equipment must be installed on individual compressors, select equipment with minimum pressure drop. If filters are installed, establish a maintenance procedure to prevent clogging filters from upsetting the system. There should be no check valves or other devices which isolate a member from the air system. During operation, besurethat anyunitistaken out of the sequence mode before closing its service valve. The receiver should also be sized to prevent excessive drops or rapid rises in pressures during the operation as described below. Note that receiveF really applies to the entire storage volume of a physical receiver and the volume of the air distribution throughout the plant. Modulating systems work best when the receiver is at least one gallon for the rated CFM of a member compressor in the system (the largest if they differ). If the system is operated loadunload, larger volume or wider differential may be needed to prevent unnecessary starts or rapid compressor cycles. Note that when demand exceeds the capacity of the running unit(s), there
Page 10
will be a delay additional
until
the next unit starts
and delivers
air. The stored air serves the plant during this period. With a properly sized receiver, pressure changes on a receiver gauge should be very slow and gradual. All standard practices common to sound air compressor installations such as proper sizing of piping, proper electrical supply and conductor sizing, and grounding are to be observed. Run the compressors in the system in Automatic mode for at least one week to evaluate system performance, Sequencing Installation - Once the compressor system is set up, sequencing compressors with the AUTO SENTRY@ ES+ controller is as simple as plugging in a telephone to a wall jack. The only item required to make the system functional is a cable similar to a phone cable. The cable and connectors used in kit 200 EAP752 have been specially selected to meet the needs of an industrial application. One less cable than the number of compressors to be sequenced is required. For example, to sequence four compressors, three cables are required, The serial communications interface meets RS-485 standards, the most widely used interface in harsh, industrial environments today. However, the communicationscables should be routed through metallic conduit to provide them with both mechanical protection and electromagnetic shielding. Do not run the communications cable in a conduit with other wiring. Each controller has two modular jacks which accept RJ12 telephone plugs, located on the top of the controller case. One jack is vacant, the other has a short pigtail plugged into it. To interconnect two compressors, plug the cable into the vacant jack on each controller, For installations of more than two units, the pigtail plug must be disconnected on all controllers except the two at each end of the communications line. The order of interconnection has no effect on the system operation. The following conditions are necessary and sufficient for proper operation: 1. Every compressor must have a cable connecting it to another compressor. One less cable than the number of units sequenced must be used. Each board that has only one cable connected to it must have its pigtail plugged into the unused jack. All installations will have two such units.
Operation - Press the [SEQUENCE] key on each of the compressors to start operation of the sequenced
system. Once this is done, the member controllers will operate the compressor units as required to maintain the plant pressure between the programmed Set and Reset Pressures, for demands from O CFM up to the capacity of the system. While operating, each controller will display a se-
quence number. As demand requires, the units will start and load in order, starting with sequence number
1 (lead unit). As demand falls, the higher sequence number units (lag units) will modulate, unload, and
stop,
If any member of the system is taken out of sequence mode for any reason, other units with higher sequence numbers will automatically promote as required. Sequence numbers will start with 1, and will be assigned on other units up to the number of compressors in the system. This feature makes the system completely tolerant of any manual or protective stopping of any member. ESTABLISHING THE INITIAL SEQUENCE
The first member compressor placed into sequence mode will become the lead unit. However, since any controller first placed into sequence has no way of knowing whether or not other members already exist, it will first assume the highest rotation number available. For example if the number of units to be sequenced is programmed at four, any compressor will start out in position four when placed in sequence
mode, It will then listen for other units on the communications line.
If there is no member with the next lower sequence number, the controller will automatically promote itself. This movement is fairly rapid with the AUTO SENTRYSES+ controller, and the number will advance to the lowest vacant position in several seconds. To establish a desired order of units, press [STOP/RESET] or select any mode other than SEQUENCE (if already in sequence, put into auto mode if you wish to continue operation while doing this selection). Then put the desired lead unit back into sequence. Wait until it promotes one step (or longer), then put the desired #2 unit into sequence mode and wait until it promotes one step, and so forth until all units are back into thesequence mode. During this procedure, the system is not deprived of air, This is due to one of the outstanding features of the AUTO SENTRY@ES+ sequencing system: control is always executed locally by each member controller. So while controllers count down towards the final order, they are also capable operating their compressor and will deliver air. Once the sequence order is finally established, setpoints will continue to be adjusted in each member to provide operation in the preferred order.
2,
Program all members of the system, as described in the programming procedure on previous pages. All adjustments should be identical for each member, except for unit number. The sequencing system will make any necessary adjustments to the setpoints to properly run the compressed air system.
13-9/1 fl -647
Page 11
This may take several minutes after a manual change of sequence numbers, iALfTo sENTRf3-ES+ SEQUENCE SYSTEM
OPERATION
Each member compressor in the system operates simmode of operation. It will start, ilarly to the Automatic
In a properly operating system, thlsvalue will be within 12 psi of the top line value. and will change slowly as demand and delivery are changing. Rapid and large changes in local pressure Indicate system problems. Ensure that all compressor units are piped to a common system pressure with adequate storage to handle the plant demands. Selec; other operating modes if rapid response to large demand changes is needed. The system is redundant, and will tolerate any breakdown in communications. If any umt is taken out of the Sequence mode, other members will fill the gap to keep the system operating. If a break should occur in the communications cable, the compressors will continue to function as two systems, one on each side of the break. Each will have its own lead unit (Seq 1) and may have lag units (depending on how many AUTO SENTRY3-ES+ controllers are on that side of the break). Look fora cable break if there are multiple units with the same Sequence number displayed. Each AUTO SENTRYSES+ controller also monitors the communications data for errors. If these occur, the yellow advisory will come on, and the controller displays a message to check the communications port. If this message comes on, and one member changes to AUTO operation, then it has been mistakenly programmed with the same Unit Numberas another member. Refer to programming instructions above for instructions on programming. Automatic Rotation - A controller will be the lead compressor for the time programmed as TRANSFER INTERVAL. Then it assigns itself the highest available rotation number. The lag compressors detect the loss of the lead unit and decrement their rotation numbers. Number 2 becomes number 1, the new lead unit, number3 becomes number 2, etc. The former lead unit will become the last lag unit. The transfer interval timer operates whenever a memberis the lead (Seq 1) unit of the system. It will continue to time out regardless of other units in the system. The remaining time is retained during power interruptions. It is reset back to full value if the controller is in any mode other than Seq 1. Other Sequencing Features - Any air system will exhibit pressure differences from one point to the next. Even a well designed multi-compressor installation will show minor pressure variations between one compressors discharge point and another compressors discharge, These points will also vary from the actual system storage (normally the air storage receiver). The AUTO SENTRY@ ES+ sequencing system is desianed to tolerate minor variations. The AUTO SEN~RY3ES+ sequencing system will automaticalIy adjust the system setpoint to maintain the average system pressure. Overpressures within any member compressor are prevented locally, and other members will load !Jp to meet the demand. When a turn valve
load, modulate, unload, blowdown, and automatically stop as necessary to meet system demand for air. There are several differences, however, when running in the Sequence mode. The pressure shown on the top line of the display is the average system pressure of all the members. Each member communicates its local pressure through the communications cable, for use by others in the system for display and control. The system responds to this average. This number will be the same for all units in the system. To obtain the local package discharge pressure, select the DIS PRESS alternate display on the lower line. Pressure setpoints are continuously adjusted, depending on the operation of the members. The last lag unit which is loaded will control its modulation to keep the system pressure near the programmed Set Pressure, and serves as the trim machine. Any running lead unit will be adjusted for slightly higher pressures, and will run at or near capacity. The first unloaded lag unit will have its reset pressure adjusted so it will come on line if the system pressure drops to the programmed Reset The system is continuously adjusted to Pressure. maintain the system pressure between the programmed Set and Reset Pressures. If any lag unit is loaded, any preceding lead unit will be loaded. Its blowdown timer will reset and hold at full value. This ensures that the last lag unit will always be the first to unload and blow down, and lead units will be prepared to handle the demand. When demand exceeds the capacity of the loaded lead compressor(s), the pressure will drop. If a lag unit is stopped, its restart will be delayed. This delay is the adjustable Lag Start Delay. This allows time for lead units and stored air to setve intermittent demands, without starting another compressor. The next available member accumulates any time spent below Reset Pressure, and will start whether there are repeated brief demands or a sustained demand. The Lag Start Delay timer does not begin timing until the preceding member of the system is loaded. SEQUENCED SYSTEM CHECKOUT
One of the best indicators of the stability of the system is to compare the local system pressure of a running unit with the system average pressure. To do this, simply press the [c] or [>] cursor keys until the lower line of the display shows DIS PRES and the local pressure.
compressor is provided with current monitoring, the controller will also shed some load on any overloaded unit, andlag units will Ioadasrequired toservicethedemand, The dynamic setpoint control is completely automatic and is continuously adjusted. If airflow is restricted between the compressor units and the common storage, the minor variations described above become more significant. The pressure in the receiver will always be lower than that sensed by the compressor system. The AUTO SENTRY5ES+ system will tolerate this, and will still maintain the averThese restrictions age pressure within limits. spread modulation over several units, rather will than
was runmng in any mode when the If the compressor contact was opened, and the remote response is programmed for IMMEDIATE, the compressor will immediately unload, and will run only until the reservoir is blown down. Then the motors stop, and the unit will be in the REMOTE HALT mode as indicated above.
If the compressor was runrvng in any mode when the contact was opened, and the remote response is programmed for TIMED UNLOAD, the compressor will immediately unload and blowdown. It will then continue to run unloaded for whatever period has been programmed maining for AUTO TIME (or will complete the reauto time if already blown down). The control-
showing the strong preference to unload the last loaded lag unit. The Lag Start Delay timer of any member does not begin timing until the preceding member of the system is loaded. This is particularly useful when starting up the system, as compressors will be started one at a time. This sequenced starting also happens if the members are controlled by their remote inputs. If programmed for automatic restart after power failure, the lead unit will be delayed by the automatic restart delay, then each additional unit will be delayed by the lag start delay. CONNECTION TO EXTERNAL CONTROLS
ler displays REMOTE UNLOAD during this period. After completion, the motors will stop, and the unit will be in the REMOTE HALT mode as indicated above. When the remote is turned back on, the unit will start immediately in the CONSTANT or LOW DEMAND modes, Loading in these modes, or starting in AUTO or SEQUENCE modes will occur when the pressure drops below the reset pressure. Alarm Relay The AUTO SE NTRY@ES+ controller is provided with an alarm relay which may be connected to a remote mounted indicator light, horn, or into a PLC input of a plantwide control system, The contact is commercial rated 2 amps at 120 volts. The relay is turned on whenever there is a SHUTDOWN condition
requiring sewice at the compressor, and remains off during normal operation, stopping, or power off condi-
The AUTO SENTRY@ ES+ controller offers interconnection points for external controls and indicators. This allows simple connection to remote controls and indicators, or integration into any plantwide controls system. Remote On/ Off Remote on-off control of the system requires only a simple two-wire control, with an
isolated contact suitable for 120 volts, 1 amp. This may be a switch, a timer contact, a relay contact, or a PLC output, To connect, simply run the two wires to the con-
tions. The external connections from the controller are from an isolated form C (singlepole, doublethrow) contact. This allows control of either a compressor okay or a compressor shutdown remote indicator. To use this relay, connect the supply wire for the remote circuit to terminal 21 (relay common) on the terminal strip, Connect a wire to the indicator from either terminal 19 (normally open) or from terminal 20 (normally closed). Connect the other side of the indicator to its neutral. Serial Communications The RS232 port is available for serial communications of compressor data to external monitoring systems at any time. If units are NOT connected in sequence, the RS-485 port maybe used for multi-drop communications of compressor data to external monitoring systems. Data available include all pressures and temperatures, and a report of internal service data. This is accessible with a PC or PLC with an appropriate communications port. For protocol information, request drawing: 201 EAU1255 301 EAU1255 for ES+, version 2.00, 2.01 for ES+, version 2.10, 2.11
trol enclosure, remove the jumper between terminal 6 and terminal 9 on the terminal strip, and connect the two wires to terminal 6 and terminal 9. The air compressor will operate normally in its selected
mode whenever this contact is closed (turned on). Note that the keypad is always the master control; the operating mode must be selected at the keypad, and the remote is not capable of starting a unit after the [STOP/RESETl key has been pressed to place the controller in the READY state. When the contact is opened (turned off), operation depends on how the controller has been programmed and what it is doing prior to opening the contact. If the compressor was already stopped in automatic or sequence modes, it will remain stopped and will not re-
start until the contact is closed. The display will flash the message REMOTE HALT to indicate that it is waiting for the remote signal.
Wiring Diagrams The following wiring diagrams show connections in typical units. Refer to the wiring diagram shipped with the compressor unit for actual connections.
13-9/1 (!-547
Page 13
WIU1lA
iic! L 1 9 4, ,3, 1 JIB UC ~0# W 01 OV1l OhU iOllUiOCA1lOH$ CABLt. NO!l 5 FM .OIOR !S ,01 UILD 0. WA1lRCOOLCD LMI1l mllll CM C101UR[ 1!s .,101 r.[ o COWCC!IOM !0 111, tlz L 111 MO1[ . WHIM A AOll IC .471S AIVC 11 U%[D. COMMIC1 10 1[WIMAL3 11 L !0 VALVL COIL IS IZO VOLTS. MOT 10 [IC[[D *O. ,oIC
1D11OUINU$
our
At
10 COIIIRO1 1. CO.[CIIOM 10AED
0.
o.
FM,, ,,,,,
,,RM!,U ,ASUK,*
,,0,SS TIRINU
ICC.
Wal =
,0,.0
.,,
lVC -
m !Vc !Vo 10 .
Ill, 7HB ,0, IDO
1-1-
& m
cl c: -
w
1,
El
w
I
17 + t7 ,**
1,,
AIll ,.
.
l~AMWUCCn A W,ll Olscuio[l
.
mmuxfn 4.1S[WO191
rm.tsfon
Illllinvolm
TMm.IsIon
ICOIIPH15%0.,
216EAP546 (Ref. Drawing)
FIGURE1-3-
WIRINGDIAGRAM- ES+ CONTROLLER
$-d
-h
iJLL.J
Y.
. .: . *
I
. . .
,,!
13-9I1O-647
Page15
I
I
II
n=.! K
a
u
J
d
0
cc 1Z 0
: .
Ill
11
-(
E&El
13-9/10-547
Page SS
0 10
1
0 *
E
w 1 ~ 13 12 1
!4
10
Ecl
10 FM Uo?on 5
L1O talvc MOIOR
301 EAQ546 (Ref. Drawing)
FIGURE1-6 - WIRINGDIAGRAM- ES+CONTROLLER
TROUBLE DISPLAY MODES
SHOOTING
AUTO SENTRY3
ES+ CONTROLLER
The normal display indicates the package service pressure, the airend discharge, the total running hours, and one of the following operating modes. The green light will be on for any operating mode, whether the compressor is running or not. READY CON LDM AUTO SEQ n The following alternate The compressor The compressor The compressor The compressor The compressor has been stopped by pressing the [STOP/RESET] is operating in the Constant Run mode. is operating in the Low Demand mode. is operating in the Automatic mode. key.
is operating in the Sequence mode.
displays may be called by pressing a cursor [<] or [>] key The pressure in the oil reservoir The pressure drop across the separator The temperature at the separator
RES PRES DIF PRES RES TMP DIS PRES DIS TMP BD TMR AUTO TMR TOT HRS LOAD HRS
The pressure at the service connection The temperature at the airend discharge
The time remaining before a blowdown will be allowed The time remaining of unloaded motor operation The total hours of compressor The hours of compressor running
delivery
The following alternate displays may be called by pressing the [+] or [] key MOTOR CURRENT NEXT OIL CHANGE NEXT OIL FILTER The compressor schematic The main motor current in amps The estimated remaining time until the next recommended change
The remaining time until the next recommended
filter change
area keys may be used to select alternate displays. First press shows the total run hourmeter. Second press shows the loaded hourmeter. Third press shows the remaining blowdown time. Fourth press shows the remaining auto time. Shows temperature at the compressor discharge.
CLOCK KEY CLOCK KEY CLOCK KEY CLOCK KEY DISCH THERM KEY SEPARATOR SEPARATOR KEY KEY KEY
First press shows the pressure in the reservoir. Second press shows the separator pressure drop. Shows temperature Shows estimated at the reservoir/ separator. oil change.
SEPAR THERM OIL CAN KEY OIL FILTER KEY
remaining time until next recommended
Shows remaining time until next recommended
oil filter change.
The compressor
schematic AIR FILTER
area has red shutdown and yellow service advisory indicator lights. yellow indicates that the filter needs to be changed yellow indicates high temperature operation
DISCH THERM
13-9/1 W547
Page 18
DISCH THERM SEPARATOR SEPARATOR SEPAR THERM SEPAR THERM OIL CAN SYMBOL FAN MOTOR OIL FILTER DRIVE MOTOR DRIVE MOTOR
red indicates a high temperature yellow indicates the separator
shutdown
needs to be changed shutdown operation shutdown
red indicates a change separator yellow indicates high temperature red indicates a high temperature
yellow indicates that the oil needs to be changed red indicates a fan motor overload or starter shutdown yellow indicates that the filter needs to be changed yellow indicates operation with high motor amps red indicates a main motor overload or starter shutdown
ADVISORY
TROUBLESHOOTING
GUIDE
All advisories are indicated on the keypad by a yellow indicator in the Status area, and one of the following messages alternating with the normal lower line display. Perform service or maintenance as indicated, then clear the advisory as instructed in Maintenance Adjustment, page 7. Message CHECK COMM PORT Action Needed
The controller has detected a communications problem while running in Sequence mode. Check for proper cable installation. If the controller switches from Sequence to Auto mode, reprogram a different unit number. Excessive vacuum has been detected after the air filter, indicating it has become full, Change the air filter to ensure maximum air delivery. The differential pressure across the separator has risen to over 8 psid. Change the separator to ensure peak compressor performance. The unit has been operated for the programmed number of hours since the last filter replacement. Change the filter to ensure an adequate flow of lubricant. The unit has been operated for the programmed number of hours since the last oil change. Change the oil to ensure lubricant quality. The temperature was greater than 210 degrees F (99 degrees C) at the airend discharge. Ensure that the compressor receives adequate cooling air or water, and that the coolers are not plugged. The unit has been operated with motor current in excess of the programmed service factor amps. Turn valve units will unload during moderate overcurrent to prevent sustained operation. The temperature was greater than 210 degrees F (99 degrees C) at the separator. Ensure that the compressor receives adequate cooling air or water, and that the coolers are not plugged. The temperature was less than 40 degrees F (4 degrees C) at: (A) the airend discharge, (B) the separator. Ensure that the compressor is located in a room kept above freezing.
CHNG AIR FILTER CHNG SEPARATOR CHNG OIL FILTER CHANGE OIL HIGH DISCH TEMP
HIGH MOTOR AMPS
HIGH RESRVR TEMP
LOW AMB TEMP
13-9/1 O-847
Page 19
SHUTDOWN
TROUBLESHOOTING
GUIDE
All shutdowns are indicated on the keypad by the word SHUTDOWN on the top line of the display, and one of the following messages on the lower line of the display. The red indicator in the Status area will be steadily lit while the has been corrected. Perform service as indicated. Press the conditions exist, and will flash after the condition [STOP/RESETl key to clear the shutdown.
Message CHANGE SEPARATOR CHECK CN7
Action
Needed
The differential pressure across the air/ oil separator has risen to over 15 psid, Change the separator to ensure maximum compressor performance, All inputs at connector 7 of the controller are off. The most common cause for this is that the connector plug has been pulled out, Plug the connector back in firmly. 120 volts has been removed from ALL inputs to connector 8 of the controller. The most common cause for this is that the connector plug has been pulled out. Plug the connector back in firmly.
CHECK CN8
CONTROLLER
ERROR
The Auto Sentry ES+ controller performs several internal diagnostic checks of its own operation. Follow instructions on lower line, or replace if the controller indicates REPAIR REQUIRED. The Emergency Stop button has been pressed. Pull it back out to its normal position. If the button has not been pressed, check that the contact block is firmly mounted in the right or left (not center) position of the operator, Check for loose connections which would remove 120 volts from connector 88 of the controller. 120 volts has been removed from terminal 7 of the terminal strip. This is normally shipped jumpered directly to terminal 9, but the jumper may be removed to add a field installed shutdown switch. Reset the external switch. The motor overload relay for the fan motor, located within the electrical control box, has tripped. This indicates high motor shaft load, low voltage, or excessive imbalance in the incoming power (such as a blown fuse), Disconnect and lock out po,ver, open the box, and press the reset button it will click when reset. Measure motor amps, and take corrective actions to get all currents within the motor nameplate rating. If the overload relay has not tripped, check for the cause that 120 volts was removed from connector 81 of the controller. The controller has attempted to start the fan, but did not receive a return signal from the starters auxiliary contact. If the starter does not pickup when attempting to start, check that connector 9 of the controller is plugged in firmly, and check the starter coil. If the starter does pick up, but this message appears, check that the auxiliary contact block is properly installed on the starter and wired to connector 8, terminal 3. The controller has attempted to turn off the fan, but is still receiving a return signal from the starters auxiliary contact. Check that the starter operates freely and that the contact block is properly installed on the starter. Pressure in excess of the programmed high pressure limit has been detected. The most likely cause is other, higher pressure compressors on the same air system; separate these from this compressor unit. Other possible causes are loose connections to the transducer, electrical noise and transients, or improper setting of the high pressure limit. The comroller is sensing current to the main motor when it is turned off. Check that the main starter is operating properly. Check for proper installation of the current transformer and current transducer.
EMERGENCY
STOP
EXTERNAL
DEVICE
FAN OVERLOAD
FAN STARTER
FAN STRT CONTACT
HI SYSTEM PRESS
HIGH AMP SENSOR
I3-9110-647
Page 20
SHUTDOWN
TROUBLESHOOTING
GUIDE (Continued)
Message HIGH DISCH TEMP
Action
Needed
in excess of the proThe most common
This indicates that the controller has detected temperature grammed high temperature limit at the airend discharge.
cause for this is inadequate package cooling. Ensure proper air flow for aircooled units, or adequate cooling water for water cooled units, Check for proper oil level, and fill as required, Monitor the temperature carefully during restarts after servicing. HIGH DISCH TEMR This indicates that the controller has detected a rapid temperature rise in the airend discharge. This normally would indicate a loss of coolant injection into the airend, Check oil level, and fill if required. Completely check all oil piping, the filter, and flow controls for blockage or freezing. This may also be caused by a loose connection at connector 7 of the controller. Monitor the temperature carefully during restarts after servicing. Pressure in excess of the programmed high pressure limit has been detected. This shutdown will occur if a loss of pneumatic controls occurs. Check the inlet valve, all control piping, solenoid valves, and all other control devices to find the cause for the inlet valve not closing. Other possible causes are loose connections to the transducer, electrical noise and transients, or improper setting of the high pressure limit. This indicates that the controller has detected temperature in excess of the programmed high temperature limit at the air/ oil separator, The most common cause for this is inadequate package cooling, Ensure proper air flow for aircooled units, or adequate cooling water for water cooled units. Check separator element, replace nonstandard separators with recommended separator. Monitor the temperature carefully during restarts after servicing. This indicates that the controller has detected a rapid temperature rise in the air / oil separator. Use only recommended separators; replace nonstandard separators. This may also be caused by a loose connection at connector 7 of the controller. Monitor the temperature carefully during restarts after servicing, 120 volts has been removed from terminal 7 of the terminal strip. This is normally shipped jumpered directly to terminal 9, but the jumper may be removed to add a field installed shutdown switch. Reset the external switch. The controller has attempted to start and load the compressor, but pressure is not building up in the oil reservoir, This may indicate either afailure of the motor to turn the compressor, or a failure of the inlet valve to open. If the latter, check also the wiring and piping to solenoid valves IVO and IVC; these are both turned on to load up the compressor. 120 volts has been removed from terminal 7 of the terminal strip. This is normally shipped jumpered directly to terminal 9, but the jumper may be removed to add a field installed shutdown switch. Reset the external switch. The overload relay for the main compressor drive motor, located within the electrical control box, has tripped. This indicates high motor shaft load, low voltage, or excessive imbalance in the incoming power (such as a blown fuse). Disconnect and lock out power, open the box, and press the reset button it will click when reset. Measure motor amps, and take corrective actions to get all currents within the motor nameplate rating, Check that the programmed Set Pressure is at or below the compressor nameplate rating. If the overload relay has not tripped, check for the cause that 120 volts was removed from connector 8-2 of the controller.
HIGH RESVR PRESS
HIGH RESRVR TEMP
HIGH RESRVR TEMR
HIGH VIBRATION
LOW OIL PRESSURE
LV RELAY
MAIN OVERLOAD
13-9/1 O-647
Page 21
SHUTDOWN
TROUBLESHOOTING
GUIDE (Continued)
Message MAIN STARTER
Action
Needed
The controller has attempted to start the compressor,

turn signal from the starters auxiliary contact.
but did not receive a redoes not pick up when attempting to start, check that connector 9 of the controller is plugged in firmly, and check the starter coil. If the starter does pick up, but this message appears, check that the auxiliary contact block is properly installed on the starter and wired to connector 8, terminal 4.
If the starter
MAIN STRT CONTCT
The controller has attempted to turn off the compressor, but is still receiving a return signal from the starters auxiliary contact, Check that the starter operates freely and that the contact block is properly installed on the starter. 120 volts has been removed from terminal 7 of the terminal strip. This is normally shipped jumpered directly to terminal 9, but the jumper may be removed to add a field installed shutdown switch. Reset the external switch. The controller is not sensing current to the main motor when it is turned on. Check that the main starter is operating properly. Check for a loose or broken connection at connector 4. Check wiring and proper installation of the current transformer and current transducer. The controller has detected an open connection to thermistor: (A) airend discharge or (B) separator, This normally indicates a loose or broken connection at the controller connector 7; check and correct the connection. This could also be indicating a broken wire or thermistor probe, or exposure to excessively low temperatures. Signal voltage has fallen too low at transducer: (A) Final discharge or (B) Reservoir. This probably indicates a loose connection of the red or green wire to the transduceroran unplugged transducer. It connections are good, this is indicating a defective transducer. Check connections, or replace transducer if necessary. 120 volts has been removed from terminal 7 of the terminal strip. This is normally shipped jumpered directly to terminal 9, but the jumper may be removed to add a field installed shutdown switch. Reset the external switch. The power to the compressor unit has been turned off and back on. [STOP/RESET] and select an operating mode. Press
MOTOR OVERTEMP
OPEN AMP SENSOR
OPEN THERM
OPEN XDUCER
PHASE RELAY
POWER FAILURE SHORTED THERM
The controller has detected a shorted connection to thermistor: (A) airend discharge or (B) separator. This normally indicates a faulty connection (e.g. wire strands touching) at the controller connector 7; check and correct the connection. This could also be indicating a damaged wire or thermistor probe. Signal voltage has exceeded approximately 4.6 volts at transducer: (A) Final discharge or (B) Reseivoir. This may indicate a loose connection of the black wire to the transducer or a defective transducer. Check connections, or replace transducer if necessary. 120 volts has been removed from terminal 7 of the terminal strip. This is normally shipped jumpered directly to terminal 9, but the jumper may be removed to add a field installed shutdown switch. Reset the external switch. Signal voltage has fallen too low at transducer: (A) Final discharge or (B) Reservoir. This error is usually the result of the transducers being improperly zeroed. Disconnect the air lines to the transducers and follow the procedure indicated in the adjustment instructions. This shutdown for transducer B ma> also be the result of reverse compressor rotation. Check connections, or re place transducer if necessary.
SHORTED
XDUCER
WATER PRESS
ZERO XDUCER
13-9/1 0-647
Page 22
CONTROLS
TROUBLESHOOTING
GUIDE
The following are recommended service actions. Observe all instructions noted elsewhere in this manual. All electrical service is to be performed only by a qualified electrician.
Symptom
Recommended
Action
No display, compressor
stopped
Check incoming power to the compressor unit, Ensure that the disconnect is on and that fuses have not blown (or circuit beaker tripped). If power is being properly supplied to the control box, check the fuses located at the fan starter, the control transformer fuses, and the wiring to connector CN6.
To operate, the controller
Compressor not start.
will
must be placed into an operating mode (e.g. AUTO); press the [STOP/RESET] key to put the control into the READY state, then select a mode with the operating mode keys. In AUTOMATIC and SEQUENCE modes, compressors will not start until the pressure drops below the reset pressures.
Display indicates NOT BLOWN DOWN
The controller prevents attempts to start the main motor if the reservoir pres sure is over 5 psig. Pressure continues to be relieved from the reservoir while this message is on, and the compressor will start automatically after the pressure has dropped. If this message remains with NO pressure in the reservoir, follow the transducer zeroing procedure found in the controls adjustment section, The controller is provided with an input for userfurnished remote controls. This display indicates that 120 volt is removed from terminal 6 of the terminal strip. Check all connections of the factory installed jumper, or the customerprovided controls, if applicable. If the display indicates SHUTDOWN, refer to the shutdown troubleshooting section for assistance. In addition to the messages shown, there are several internal and system diagnostics performed by the controller. Consult the factory for additional assistance. In the CONSTANT RUN and LOW DEMAND modes, load until the pressure drops below reset pressure. instructions for further information. If pressure is sure, check that the inlet valve operates freely, Check and IVC valves are wired and operating properly. the compressor will not Refer to the operating below the reset presthat the TVO, TVC, IVO
Display indicates REMOTE HALT
Display indicates SHUTDOWN
Compressor runs, but does not load
Compressor runs, unloads at low pressure Compressor does not modulate
If the inlet valve closes at low pressure, check the wiring to the blowdown valve and the piping and check valves in its discharge line. On units with turn valve control, the turn valve will control delivery for moderate to heavy demands to maintain the system near the programmed set pressure, with the inlet valve held open, At light demands, the inlet valve controls the compressor delivery to maintain pressure approximately 3 psi above the programmed set pressure, with the turn valve held open. If the pressure continues to rise above these pressures, check that the turn valve and inlet valve operate freely, and check wiring and piping to control valves TVO, TVC, IVO and IVC. If normal modulation does occur, the inlet valve will be closed during a blowdown as pressure approaches the high pressure limit. The external air receiver should be sized appropriately to prevent rapid rapidly cycles. The rapid response time in the CONSTANT RUN mode will operate with small receivers, but any plant air system will operate more efficiently with adequately sized storage. Refer to the operating instructions for further information.
Compressor cycles between load and unload
13-9/1 O-647
Page 23
CONTROLS
TROUBLESHOOTING
GUIDE (Continued)
Symptom Low reservoir pressure in CONSTANT mode or

other modes blowdown before
Recommended
Action
The Auto Sentry ES+ controller will maintain a minimum pressure in the oil reservoir while in CONSTANT or in other modes while the blowdown valve is closed. This occurs only after initially loading the compressor unit. If reservoir pressure drops while the blowdown valve is closed, check for leaks between at the reservoir, separator, and connected piping. The sequencing system transmits lowlevel signal between units to commun icate pressures, Units must be properly grounded to a good ground system, the communications cable should use only appropriate quality cable, and the cable should be run in its own conduit. In the sequence mode, the operating system directly to receiver, such that all transducers valves or restrictions between compressors instability. Run units in AUTOMATIC mode requires all compressors be piped sense the same pressure. Check and the storage will cause system until the system is corrected.
Erratic pressures in SEQUENCE only
Compressor cycles rapidly in SEQUENCE
mode only Error in displayed pressure or CHECK XDUCER while zeroing
Pressure measurement errors are almost always the result of poor zero adjustment. This must be done after replacement of a controller or a transducer. The proper display with all pressure removed is O +/1 psig, The adjustment procedure will prevent large zeroing errors, and recommend that the transducers be checked.
13-9/l
0--647
Page 24
SECTION 2 AUTO SENTRY5 -ES CONTROLLER

GENERAL DESCRIPTION The Gardner Denver rotary screw compressor is prewired with all controls, motor, and starter for the voltage and horsepower at the time of ordering. It is necessa~ only to connect the compressor unit to the correct power supply, to the shop air line, and to the appropriate shop water line, if the compressor is water-cooled. A standard compressor unit consists of the compressor, oil reservoir, oil cooling system and filters, motor type as specified, NEMA 12 starter/control box, and control components as described in the package instruction manual. features the AUTO unit compressor This SENTRY3ES controller, which integrates all the control functions under microprocessor control. Its functions include safety and shutdown, compressor regulation, operator control, and advisory / maintenance indicators. The keypad and display provide the operatorwith a logical and easily operated control of thecompressor and indication of its condition. AUTO SENTRY~ES OPERATION
Operation of the AUTO SENTRY ES is dependent on selection of an operating mode (described below) from the controller keypad, Before starting, press the [STOP/RESET] key to place the controller into its READY state (as indicated on ihe display). Compressor operation may then be started by pressing an operating mode key. Once operating, the mode may be changed at any time by pressing a key, and the selected mode will be displayed in the lower right corner of the message window. Press the [STOP/RESET] key at any time to stop the compressor under normal conditions. An optional control may be wired into the AUTO SENTRY@ES controller to interrupt and restart the unit based on controls by others. When stopped by these controls, the display indicates REMOTE STOP.
FIGURE
2-1
AUTO
SENTRYO
-ES DISPLAY
139/1 O-647
Page 25
! A
WARNING
ods of moderate to high demands, this mode is identical to the constantrun mode described above. During low demand periods, the controller will open the blowdown valve and fully close the inlet valve to minimize the motor load. A timer is reset when this occurs, While in this state, the plant air system supplies control air pressure (as well as any plant loads). When the system air pressure drops to the reset pressure due to increased demand, the blowdown valve recloses and the controls resume their normal modulation to maintain the system pressure near the set pressure. Subsequent blowdown periods are not allowed until the timer has completed its cycle. This cycle eliminates frequent blowdowns during moderate loads, and the energy required to repressurize the resewoir. It also eliminates the problems of oil foaming and carryover that can occur if the oil resewoir of an oilflooded compressor is blown down too often, The timer is adjustable from 5 to 20 minutes. Automatic Mode Operation This mode provides automatic start and timed stop, and is best used in applications with long unloaded periods (e.g. idle shifts or weekends) and adequate storage to allow stopping the compressor for periods. Operation during periods of moderate to heavy demands is identical to the low demand mode. The automatic time delay is adjustable from 5 to 20 minutes. If the controller operates unloaded for this period with no demand, the compressor drive motor is halted to eliminate its power consumption. The controls will remain in this state until demand is again indicated by a drop in pressure, This is the most common selected mode of operation, as it automatically will operate the compressor unit in the most efficient manner for the demand of the airsystem. Sequence Mode Operation This mode provides for communication between controllers, operating only as many as are required for economical operation. Use this on applications with large storage capacity and diverse loads. The lead unit will operate identically to the automatic mode; operation will be automatically staged for each lag unit (up to 8 total). For more information, refer to the sequencing instructions later in this chapter. Communication between controllers is achieved by interconnection of a communication cable to circuit board connectors. A unit numbet must be assigned to each unit in this mode, but the display will indicate the units actual operating ranking, AUTOSENTRY@ES CONTROL DISPLAY
In any mode, the compressor will start only if reservoir pressure is below 5 psig. The display will indicate if the control is waiting for a reservoir blowdown, along with the remaining pressure. The controls also delay initial loading of the compressor until a startup delay has been completed. Constant Run Mode Operation This mode is best used in applications where there are no long periods of unloaded operation, or for minimum response time to sudden demands. The compressor unit will start and run continuously, using its modulation controls to match delivery to demand, As demand falls below the compressor capacity, the pressure will tise to the setpoint of the control, When the pressure reaches the setpoint, the AUTO SENTRY@ES controller operates the solenoid valves TVO (turn valve open), TVC (turn valve close), IVO (inlet valve open) and IVC (inlet valve close) to control the CFM of the compressor to match the CFM demand of the air system. As the demand changes, the controller will continue adjustment for the best compressor operation. At moderate to heavy demand, the inlet is open, and the turn valve controls delivery. At lighter demands, the turn valve will be open, and the inlet valve will control delivery, The controller maintains the pressure within a few psi of the set pressure, On compressor units without turn valve, the controller operates valves IVO and IVC to position the inlet valve. This continuously adjusts delivery to match demand. When first starting, the controller will keep the compressorfully unloaded and blown down until the system pressure drops below the reset pressure. Once loaded, the reservoir will remain fully charged, regardless of demand. Responses to demand are thus immediate, as soon as system pressure drops below the setpoint. Low Demand Mode Operation - The low demand mode reduces pwer consumption by relieving pressure in the reservoir during unloaded operation. Use this mode where there is moderate air storage and there are unloaded periods during the day, but frequent motor starting and stopping is undesirable. During peri-
The display above the keypad is used to provide operating information to the user. If a shutdown has occurred, the display will indicate the cause.
13-9/1 0-647
Page 26
During normal operation, the display will show the system (plant) pressure, compressor discharge temperaIf one ture, total running hours, and operation mode.
the compressor. 2, 3. 4. 5, 6. Relieve all air pressure. Disconnect, tag, and lock out power supply. and record it on
of the operating modes has been selected, the green RUN indicator will be lit.
Alternate displays are available by pressing the [c] [>] keypad keys, and will be identified on the display. These include: 1.
Perform necessary maintenance, maintenance log,
Following service, put the enable switch in the down, + position,

Restore power to the unit. The display will read: SHUTDOWN-POWER FAILURE (or READY if auto-restart is enabled).
Reservoir Separator Resewoir
pressure differential temperature pressure
2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
7. temperature time 9. 8.
System pressure Compressor Remaining Remaining discharge blowdown auto time
Press the [STOP/RESET] key, The display will indicate READY in the lower right hand corner. Press [ENTER]. The display will read:
ENTER TO SETUP - AUTO TO SERVICE Press [AUTO]. The display will read: OIL FILTER HOURS TILL CHANGE HOURS TILL NEXT OIL CHANGE
Remaining blowdown and auto times are only available in Low Demand, Automatic, and Sequence modes, as appropriate. If no keys are pressed for 5 seconds, the display will revert to its normal mode. The display is also used as a service reminder for normal maintenance items. When these conditions are sensed, the yellow ADVISORY light will come on, and the message will alternate with the normal lower line message. These messages are intended to advise of conditions that require service or may lead to a shutdown. If a protective shutdown has occurred, the display indicate SHUTDOWN and the cause and the shutdown indicator will be lit. The compressor may be operated until the conditions are corrected and controller is reset. SERVICE ADVISORIES The AUTO SENTRYES controller turns on an advisory when it detects operation which needs service attention, but does not warrant shutting down the compressor. Some of these are normal maintenance procedures, and are intended to serve as a reminder to perform routine service. Others are conditions which can reduce the maximum compressor performance. It will remain in effect until reset. Check the display during routine inspections, and perform maintenance as suggested. Refer to the troubleshooting section for detailed information about each advisory. Temperature advisories may be cleared while the unit is running by simply pressing the [ENTER] key. To reset the service advisories,
steps: 1.
10. Press [ENTER]. The display will read: 11. Press [ENTER]. If an advisory is present, it will be
displayed at this time. 12. Press [ENTER] to clear the adviso~. When all are cleared, the display will read: ENTER TO SETUP RESET TO EXIT Press [STOP/RESETl state. to return to the READY
13.
will red not the
To prevent unauthorized programming, disconnect, tag, and lockout power supply and return the ENABLE switch to the up, SET position. Restore power, press [STOP/RESET] to place the controller into the READY state, and select an operating mode to start compressor operation. PROTECTIVE SHUTDOWNS
The AUTO SENTRY@ES will shut down the unit following any fault detected in the following devices. Following a shutdown, a message will be displayed, with the top line indicating SHUTDOWN and the lower line indicating the cause, The shutdown light will be steadily lit if the cause still exists, or will flash if the cause has been cleared. Refer to the troubleshooting section for detailed information about each shutdown. To resume operation, the cause of the shutdown must be corrected and the controller reset by pressing the [STOP/RESET] key. Motor Protective Devices - Overload heaters are furnished for the starter in the voltage range specified. There are three (3) overloads in the starter of proper size for the starter and its enclosure. Note that motor nameplate current must be multiplied by 0.577 for wyedelta starters. The display will indicate which overload relay has tripped. The overload relay is reset by press-
perform the following
Press the [STOP/R ESETl key to stop operation of
139/1 0-647
Page 27
ing the button on the relay itself, then the controller may be reset. Measure motor current (amps) and voltage in the affected motor wiring to locate the cause for high
current. Overload relays provided in standard units are sensitive to both overload and phase imbalance for improved motor protection. Proper starter coil and contact action are also monitored
troller. This should be used for emergency purposes only use the keypad [STOP/RESET] for normal controlled stopping. Power Failure Follov~lng power interruphons, the controller will remain in a shutdown state (unless programmed for auto restart), High Vibration (optional) This optional feature will shut down the unit if abnormally high vibralion is detected. Connection Failure The AUTO SENTRYSES controller checks input connectors and will shutdown if they become unplugged. Other Shutdowns The controller runs continuous diagnostic checks of its own operation and the sensors to which it is connected. Refer to the sewice section for a complete listing of shutdowns and remedial actions. PROGRAMMING AND SETUP INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE AUTO SENTRY3-ES CONTROLLER All compressor control adjustments are made through the controller keypad. This provides a single location for all adjustments, coordinates all related controls, and eliminates the need for additional gauges and meters, The controller stores all adjustments digitally. These are permanent unless changed by further programming. General Programming and setup is accomplished with the PROGRAM keys, In all steps, the [ENTER] key will cause the controller to accept the displayed value into memory and advance to the next programming function, The plus [+] and minus [] keys will increase and decrease displayed numeric values, or step through menu selections, During numeric adjustments, the right [ < ] and left [ > ] arrow keys move the cursor (flashing digit) to the position desired. The number at the cursor will be the number that is changed by the [+] and [] keys. At any point in the programming and setup routine, press the [STOP/RESET] key to exit and return to the READY state without altering the adjustment. In all steps of the programming the display will give a description programmed, while the bottom that is capable of being altered routine, the top line of of the parameter to be line shows the variable by programming,
will cause a shutdown starl error
and errors in operation with the cause displayed as a
High Temperature The compressor is protected from high discharge temperature by a thermistor probe located in the c-ompressor discharge elbow. The AUTO SENTRYSES will shut the compressor down if temperature exceeds 225 F (or lower per user adjustment) or if rapid temperature rise is detected. Resetvoir / separator temperature is also monitored, and will provide high temp shutdowns. The location of the temperature fault will be displayed. Thermistor probes are also checked for open or shorted circuits, and the display will indicate the location of the defective probe.
~CAUTION
Machine damage will occur if compressor is repeatedly restarted after high temperature stops operation. Find and correct the malfunction before resuming operation.
Separator Differential Pressure The AUTO SENTRY9ES continually monitors the pressure drop across the oil separator. The unit shuts down at a differential pressure of approximately 15 psid. This becomes active only after the compressor has been running and pressures have had time to stabilize. High Pressure The AUTO SENTRYES will first attempt to unload and blow down the unit if excessive pressures are detected in the reservoir or the plant system. If unsuccessful, a shutdown will occur. Shut down will also occur if a defective transducer is detected. The display will indicate the location of the high sensed pressure or transducer (xducer) error. Check that all adjustments have been properly made, and all connections are secure. Low Oil Pressure The AUTO SENTRY5ES will shutdown the unit if inadequate oil reservoir pressure is detected after starting and loading. If this occurs, check the wiring and piping to the solenoid valves. Emergency Stop - Press the emergency stop button to shut down the unit and the controller. To restart, pull the button out to its normal position and reset the con-
The following is a step by step guide to programming the AUTO SENTRYES controller, Remember, between each step, it is necessary to press the [ENTER] key to store the new value and advance to the next step. Programming 1. Steps:
The compressor must be stopped prior to making any adjustments. If the unit is running, press the [STOP/RESET] key to place the control in the
13-9/1 3-617
Page 28
READY
state.
Adjustments can also be performed from the After adjustments are SHUTDOWN state. completed, the AUTO SE NTRY@ES controller returns to the this state until the cause is repaired and the controller is manually reset. 2. Press the [ENTER] key to begin programming, If the enable switch on the circuit board is in the set (up) position, the control proceeds to step 7 below. If the switch is in the + (down) position, the controller will display ENTER TO SETUP AUTO Press [ENTER] to go directly to TO SERVICE, step 7 below. Press [AUTO] to perform the following steps. The display shows OIL FILTER and the hours remaining until the next advisory are displayed on the bottom line. Press [ENTER] to go to step 4 without any change. Press [AUTO] only if the oil filter change has been performed early. This will reset this timer back to the oil filter interval (see step 19). 4. The display shows OIL CHANGE and the hours remaining until the next adviso~ are displayed on the bottom line. Press [ENTER] to go to step 5 without any change. Press [AUTO] only if the oil change has been performed early. This will reset this timer back to the oil change interval (see step 20). 5. If any semice advisories are in effect (yellow ADVISORY indicator is on), they will be displayed. Press [ENTER] to clear the advisory. The display will indicate ENTER TO SETUP This indicates that all the RESET TO EXIT. maintenance adjustments have been completed. Press [STOP/RESET] to go back to the READY state, or press [ENTER] to go on to step 7. The top line shows DISPLAY UNITS. The bottom line indicates ENGLISH (PSIG, Fahrenheit) or METRIC (Bars, Celsius) units of measurement. Select the desired display units and press [ENTER] to proceed. The top line displays NUM OF SEQ UNITS. The bottom line indicates a number in the range of one through eight. This will be factory set at l. Set this to a number corresponding to the number of compressors that are currently installed on this air system that also have AUTO SENTRYOES controllers, It should be noted that all AUTO SENTRY@3-ES compressors on the system must have the same number programmed here to operate correctly in SEQUENCE mode.
NOTICE
Setting the value in step 8 to one indicates that no sequencing is to take place. Consequently, steps 9, 10, and 11, which relate to sequencing, are skipped by the AUTO SENTRYz-
ES;
step
9.
Programming
12.
commences
at
3.
The top line displays UNIT NUMBER. The bottom line will again indicate a number of one through eight and be factory set at l. Each AUTO SENTRY@ES in a sequenced system must have a unique number here, The sequence mode will not function if two or more compressors have the same UNIT NUMBER. Use low numbers for the most efficient machineto-machine communications. Example: Use 1, 2, and 3 for a three compressor installation. This is the only setting which must be different for each member of a sequenced system. All other settings should normally be the same for all members.
10.
The top line displays TRANSFER The bottom line indicates a number 1 to5000, It is factory set at 24. This of hours that this machine will stay mastef or lead compressor.
INTERVAL. of hours from is the number in the role of
6.
Normally it is desirable to set this to the same value on all sequenced units to equalize running hours. Different values may be programmed, if desired, to help equalize hours.
11. The
7.
8.
top line displays LAG START DELAY. The bottom line indicates a number from 15 to 600 seconds. It is factory set at 30. This is the length of time this machine will wait before starting when the pressure drops below the reset point. Set this to the same value for all sequenced units. Its setting will depend on the amount of air storage volume in the system. Too small a number will result in more compressors being started than is necessary to satisfy demand. See Sequencing Compressors With The Auto Sentry ES, page 31, for more details on optimizing a sequenced installation. The top line displays BLOWDOWN TIME. The bottom line indicates a time between 5 and 20 minutes. It is factory set at 10 minutes. This is the minimum time interval between blowdowns. A longer blowdown time minimizes wasteful dumping of compressed air when loading is likely to occur in ashorltime. Longer periods also have been
12.
13-9/10-647
Page 29
shown to prevent oil foaming. 13, The top line displays AUTO
line indicates a time between
is to be set at the nameplate
rating of the compres-
TIME.
The bottom
5 and 20 minutes.
It too, is factory set at 10 minutes. Its function is to prevent frequent motor starting, and to allow the motor a cooldown period before stopping.
Under NO circumsor for normal operation. stances, is this adjustment to be set in excess of the compressor nameplate pressure. It may be set lower, if desired, to reduce pressure and power consumption. 17. is disIn the top line, RESET PRESSURE played. The bottom hne will indicate a pressure value. This setting determines the point at which machine startup occurs in AUTO and SEQUENCE modes and when the compressor will load up from the blown down condition. Note that RESET PRESSURE can beset up to 5 PSI below SET PRESSURE. Set this lower to reduce compressor cycling. All sequenced machines must have the same SET and RESET PRESSURE setpoints. The top line displays REMOTE STOP. The bottOm line indicates either TIMED or lMMEDlATE. Refer to the description of Remote On / Oft later in this section for additional details. Select the desired response to the remote input and press [ENTER] to proceed. The top line displays FILTER CHNG lNTERVAL. The bottom line indicates a time interval of 500 to 1000 hours. After the machine has run for the programmed setting, an advisory will be displayed, requesting an oil filter change. Adjust as desired and press [ENTER] to go on. The top line displays OIL CHANGE lNTERVAL. The bo~om line indicates a time interval of 1000 to 8000 hours, After the machine has run for the programmed setling, an adviso~ will be displayed, requesting an oil change, Adjust as desired and press [ENTER] to proceed. The top line displays OVERTEMP LIMIT. The bottom line indicates 225 F. This is the maximum (and proper) setting for compressor operation. It may be temporarily lowered to verify the function of the temperature shutdown system. FAN TYPE is displayed next on the top line. Select AIR COOLED for units with packagemounted air coolers only. This will delay fan stafiup until the oil has warmed up in the package. Select WATER COOLED for water cooled units or any unit with a remote cooler. This will run the fan whenever the compressor motor runs. In the top line, AUTO RESTART is displayed. The bottom line will indicate either OFF; or ON. The factory setting is OFF, and the controller will display a power failure shutdown after power has been restored. Set this feature to ON when it is necessary to have the compressor automatically restart after a power interruption. There will be a brief delay, then the
14.
In the top line, STARTTIMER is displayed. The bottom line will indicate a time between 3 and 10 seconds. This is the time that the controller spends in the unloaded start mode. This also controls the operation of packagemounted wyedelta starters, if so equipped. Set this adjustment for the amount of time needed for the motor to reach its highest speed while starting. This is typically 3 seconds for fullvoltage starters, 79 seconds for wyedelta starters. If a remotemounted, reduced voltage starter is used, set this adjustment 12 seconds longer than the starters internal timer. If the setup switch is in the up position, the controller returns to the READY state after this adjustment,
18.
19.
NOTICE
Unit setup adjustments are normally required only at the time of unit installation. To prevent accidental access, these will not be available if the SET The switch is in the up position. SET switch is located beneath the
power the transformer of the mounting main circuit plate on left edge board.
20.
21,
15.
If the switch is in the down position, HI SYS PRES LIM is displayed on the top line. The bottom line indicates a value that is factory set 20 25 PSI above name plate. This is the pressure that will cause a forced blowdown if approached due to a malfunction such as a stuck inlet valve or broken control line. The controller will shut down if this pressure is exceeded. The upper limits for the following two adjustments are based on the setting of the high system pressure limit. If necessary, the controller automatically reduces them following this step, and the display will briefly indicate ADJUSTING PSETAND PRES.
22.
23.
16.
In the top line, SET PRESSURE is displayed. The bottom line will indicate a pressure value. It
13-9/10-647
Page 30
control resumes the mode it was in prior to the interruption. This feature shall only be enabled
when the owner determines that it is safe to do so. It is recommended that compressor access be limited to only trained service personnel when this feature is used.
24.
brate the transducer output to viously, pressure measurement zeroing is done with pressure If large errors are detected, the
mand that the transducer
zero P.SIG. Oberrors will occur if at the transducer.

will de-
controller be checked.
28.
This step happens only if the AUTO RESTART function was set to ON in step 23. The top line displays RESTART TIME. The bottom line indicates a time between 5 and 60 seconds. It is factory set at 10seconds. This is the amount of delay introduced before restarting after power has been restored to ensure a stable supply and staggered stanting. Adjust to any value per user preference. The top line displays AIR END TYPE. The bottom line indicates either TURNVALVE or NON TURN VALVE. Set as appropriate for the compressor. In the top line, SYSTEM VOLUME is displayed. The bottom line may be selected as SMALL, MEDIUM, or LARGE. This tunes the response of the modulation control loops to optimize loop stability. It is factory set to MEDIUM. Set as follows: SMALL if estimated volume is less than .25 gallon per CFM. MEDIUM if estimated volume is between .25 and 1.0 gallon per CFM. LARGE if estimated gallon per CFM. volume is greater than 1.0
The top line shows REMOVE RES PRESS. The bottom line displays the current pressure being sensed in the reservoir. The reservoir pressure transducer may now be zeroed by following the steps outlined in 27 above. The display now reads PRESS CNST RUN TO JOG MOTOR. Press the [CONSTANT RUN] key to briefly energize the starters, and rotate the compressor 1/4 to 11/2 revolutions to allow a rotation check, This is limited to three tests. This completes the programming and setup procedures for the AUTO SENTRY@ES controller. Press the [STOP/RESET] key to return the compressor to the READY state. FEATURES
29.
25.
30
26.
OTHER CONTROL
Auto Restart After Power Failure The AUTO SENTRY@ES controller normally displays SHUTDOWN POWER FAILURE after power has been interrupted and restored. Press the [STOP / RESET] key and select an operating mode to restart the compressor. If programmed for automatic restart, The AUTO SENTRY@ES controller pauses and begins counting down when power is restored. This time is adjustable in the programming steps noted above. This must be at least several seconds, but maybe set Iongerto allow other plant loads to start up first. After the countdown is complete, the AUTO SENTRY@-ES controller resumes the mode of operation prior to the power interruption, SEQUENCING COMPRESSORS SENTRY@ES WITH THE AUTO
NOTICE
This setting is not critical. When set to its most appropriate value, the controller will maintain discharge at the closest possible value. If not set correctly, pressure will vary from the desired setpoint to a somewhat greater degree but the compressor and its components will not be adversely affected.
27.
The top line displays REMOVE SYS PRESS. The bottom line displays the current pressure being sensed at the package discharge. At this point steps must be taken to ensure that system pressure is really zero psig. Remove the line to the system pressure transducer. Pressing [ENTER] will now cause the AUTO SENTRY@ES to cali-
General The sequencing mode is used to operate multiple compressors in a common plant air system. The individual units operate similarly to operation in the automatic mode, except that the setpoints are under control of the sequencing system, One of the units assumes the role of a master, with the remainder of the control distributed among the individual AUTO SENTRY@ES controllers and compressor units. Communications between the controllers keep the system coordinated. Sequencing is intended to start, run, unload, blowdown, and stop compressors in response to changes in demand during the day or week. The AUTO SENTRYES controller is designed for systems of two through eight compressors piped into a common air receiver for distribution to the plant. In any such system, the receiver is an important part of the application; it supplies air to the plant and allows
13-9/1 0-647
Page 31
compressor units to be unloaded and stopped. This stored reserve eliminates the need tooperatespinning
reserve of unloaded compressors. This storage may bean air receiver, or maybe the volume of air in a large
distribution system. In either case, the compressors must be piped to this volume with a minimum of restricThe control system will operate only as many tion.
compressors
tem pressure programmed
as are needed to supply the CFM dethe compressor sysbetween the SET and RESET into the controllers. pressures
mand of the plant, and to maintain
The AUTO SENTRY@ES controllers are completely set up to operate this system. The only required additional part is the cable which runs from controller to controller. A kit, 200 EAP752, is available which contains all material needed to sequence up to five compressors, This kit contains 500 feet of cable, eight modular connectors, and a crimping tool to install the connectors.
The receiver should also be sized to prevent excessive drops or rapid rises in pressures during the operation really applies as described below, Note that receiver to the entire storage volume of a physical receiver and the volume of the air dlstrlbutlon throughout the plant, Modulating systems work best when the receiver is at least one gallon for the rated CFM of a member compressor in the system (the largest if they differ). Note that when demand exceeds the capacity of the running unit(s), there will bea delay until the next unit starts and delivers additional air. The stored air serves the plant during this period. With a properly sized receiver, pressure changes on a receiver gauge should be very slow and gradual. All standard practices common to sound air compressor installations such as proper sizing of piping, proper electrical supply and conductor sizing, and grounding are to be observed, Run the compressors in the system in Automatic mode for at least one week to evaluate system performance. Sequencing installation Once the compressor system is set up, sequencing compressors with the AUTO SENTRY@ES controller is as simple as plugging in a telephone to a wall jack. The only item required to make the system functional is a cable similar to a phone cable. The cable and connectors used in kit 200 EAP752 have been specially selected to meet the needs of an industrial application, One less cable than the number of compressors to be sequenced is required. For example. to sequence four compressors, three cables are required. The serial communications interface meets RS-485 standards, the most widely used interface in harsh, industrial environments today. However, the communications cables should be routed through metallic conduit to provide them with both mechanical protection and electromagnetic shielding. Do not run the communications cable in a conduit with other wiring. Each controller has two modular jacks which accept RJ12 telephone plugs, located on the side of the controller, One jack is vacant, the other has a short pigtail plugged into it, To interconnect two compressors, plug the cable into the vacant jack on each controller. For installations of more than two units, the pigtail plug must be disconnected on all controllers except the two at each end of the communications line. The order of interconnection has no effect on the system operation. The following conditions are necessary and sufficient for proper operation: 1. Every compressor must have a cable connecting it to another compressor. One less cable than the number of units sequenced must be used. Each board that has only one cable connected to it must have its pigtail plugged into the unused jack, All installations will have two such units.
NOTICE Though similar in operation and installation, this sequencing system is designed specifically for the
AUTO SENTRY@ES controller. Communications cables should not be connected to compressor units with AUTO SENTRY@ ES+ controllers part numbers 200 EAU1173, 300 EAU1173, or 301 EAU1173. Multiple compressors with each type controller may be operated as independent groups piped to the same plant demand.
In spite of the fact that it is a standard feature and its inherent installation simplicity, the sequencing function of a multicompressor AUTO SENTRY@ES system contains all necessary functions for operation. Compressor System A proper sequencing installation requires two or more GardnerDenver rotary air compressors complete with AUTO SENTRYES controllers, piped into a common air system, interconnected as described above. Connect the units directly to a common header and receiver, without any intervening dryers, filters, or other restrictions, There should be no check valves or other devices which isolate a member from the air system. During operation, be sure that any unit is taken out of the sequence mode before closing its service valve,
2.
13-9/1 0-6-$7
Page 32
Program all members of the system, as described in the programming procedure on previous pages. All adjustments should be identical for each member, except
done by the individual compressors. Instead, they will wait until the master assigns them a rotation number. Rotation numbers are displayed in the bottom display line, with the mode indication. For example, the mode indication for the current master is SEQ1 ; for the first lag compressor, SEQ2; second lag, SEQ3, 2. HOW THE AUTO SE NTRY=ES CONTROLS PRESSURE WHILE SEQUENCING
for unit number. The sequencing system will make any necessary adjustments to the setpoints to properly run the compressed air system. Operation 1. ESTABLISHING THE INITIAL SEQUENCE
Press the [SEQUENCE] key on each of the compressors to start operation of the sequenced system. Since the sequencing algorithm includes provisions for automatic replacement of a failed master or lead compressor, it is important for the operator to be aware of the hierarchy of events when starting the system. The first compressor placed into sequence mode will become the master. However, since any compressor first placed into sequence has no way of knowing whether a master exists, it will first assume the highest rotation number available. For example, if the number of units to be sequenced is programmed at four, any compressor will start out in position four when placed in sequence mode. It will then listen on the communications line for a call from the master. If no call is received, it will assume position three and again wait for a call from the master. After another lack of a master call, it assumes position two. Subsequently, it assumes position one, which makes it the master. As soon as a master is established, it immediately attempts to call all other units and assigns them successive rotation positions. The system is now active. Before a master is established, the system is not deprived of air. This is due to one of the outstanding features of the AUTO SENTRY8ES sequencing system: pressure control is always executed locally at each compressor. The effective setpoint for compressor control is the programmed setpoint minus 3 q (rotation number 1). So while a compressor is counting down towards establishing a master, it is also capable of delivering air at a pressure determined by the above formula. To ensure that two or more machines do not simultaneously decrement their rotation numbers and simultaneously become masters, place the desired master in sequence mode first and wait until the first decrement in rotation number is seen (about 7 seconds). Then place subsequent compressors in sequence mode. To dictate the complete initial sequence manually, wait until the previous machine decrements one position and then place the next desired compressor in sequence mode, To let the master determine the initial sequence, simply wait until the master has decremented its rotation number once, and then place all remaining compressors in sequence mode. Remember that once a master is established, no further selfdecrementing is
Each compressor operates exactly the same as if it were in AUTO mode with one exception: it has a dynamic setpoint. The initial setpoint is determined by the equation shown above. A compressor starts when the system pressure drops below its programmed reset point, after waiting for [ LAG START INTERVAL times (rotation number - 1)] seconds. This prevents all lag compressors from starting at once. Note that a compressors [LAG START INTERVAL times (rotation number 1)] timer is not reset to zero until that compressor is started or until another unit in the system stops. This means that the time for the next lag compressor to come on may be somewhat less than LAG START INTERVAL. EXAMPLE: In a three compressor sequence system, SET PRESSURE = 100 PSI; RESET PRESSURE =90 PSI; LAG START INTERVAL = 15 seconds. The lead compressor is running alone, maintaining 100 PSI by modulation when an air tool comes on line and causes the air demand to exceed the capacity of the lead compressor. When the pressure drops to 90 PSI, the #2 unit times out its 15 second timer and starts. It takes 5 additional seconds for the pressure to rise above 90 PSI. The #3 unit whose timer was initially set at 30 seconds (15x [3 l]), has counted down 20 seconds (the total time that system pressure was below 90 PSI). If air demand increases again, the pressure will have to fall below 90 PSI for only 10 seconds more to start unit #3, As was previously stated, a lag compressors modulation setpoint (PSET for short) is [SET PRESSURE 3(rotation number l)]. Thus in the above example, the first lag compressor (rotation #2) has a PSET of 97 PSI; the second lag, 94 PSI, and so on. But look what happens in an eight compressor installation: The eighth compressor will have an initial setpoint of [100 3(8 l)], or 79 PSI. Does this mean that an eight compressor installation must operate 21 PSI below the desired operating point when all compressors are running? NO! This is where the AUTO SENTRYES dynamic setpoint control takes over. This is how it works: Whenever the system pressure is below the programmed RESET PRESSURE, the PSET of each lag compressor is incremented 1 PSI every thirty seconds. Thus, after a short interval (about five minutes in this example), the PSET of the last sequenced compressor will climb until either it equals the RESET PRESSURE, or a decrease in demand causes the ac-
13-9/1 O-647
Page 33
tual system pressure to rise above the RESET PRESSURE. The AUTO SENTRY@ ES, with its dynamic
pressure
than is seen at each compressor,
With such
setpoint control, will maintain system pressure between the limits of RESET PRESSURE and SET PRESSURE. Remember, RESET and SET PRESSURE values are programmed by the operator so the operating range is completely programmable and predictable.
Dynamic setpoint control will also work in reverse of the operation described above. Obviously, incrementing setpoints will cause overlap of the compressors modulation ranges. While this enables us to maintain a higher pressure than competitors sequencers, overlap is undesirable as demand decreases, because a system could end up with several compressors running partially loaded instead of running the minimum number of fully loaded compressors. To overcome this, as pressure rises through the range between RESET and SET, the lag compressors PSETS are now decremented. This reverses the effect described above during periods of high demand. The AUTO SENTRYES keeps track of all functions so there is never any mixup of setpoints and the proper rotation sequence is always maintained.
systems, there is always a chance that the sequencer could cause a compressor to over pressure due to this
pressure drop. The alternative has been to set the central sequencer to a lower pressure to prevent this or allow local override of the sequencer by the local pressure control, neither of which is desirable in the scheme of maintaining plant pressure efficiently with sequencing, The AUTO SE NTRY:ES sequencing system will automatically adjust the system to prevent over pressures in any individuals, The AUTO SENTRY3ES sequencing system lets each compressor control itself independently about a setpoint (PSET) derived to cause staggered operation, or sequencing, The aforementioned pressure drops can also cause derogatory effects (mainly skewed, or out of sequence operation) to the sequencing algorithm used by the AUTO SENTRY8ES, Since these pressure variations are not constant (they will vary duetodemand changes, compressor load percentage changes, and number of compressors running), any scheme to compensate for the pressure variations must be dynamic. The exclusive dynamic setpoint control feature accomplishes this error correction scheme rather easily. Heres how it works: The master continually receives system pressure values from every machine in the sequence rotation. The values are averaged and this average is distributed to all lag compressors. All compressors, lead and lag, then compare their local pressure reading to the average and adjust their PSET by the amount of error. The effect is that all compressors are controlling to a single pressure reading, a reading that is not one that is picked up somewhere removed from the compressor, discharge pressures. but an average of actual
The Automatic
Sequence
Change
A controller will be the master (lead) compressor for the time programmed as TRANSFER INTERVAL. Then it assigns itself the highest available rotation number.
The lag compressors detect the loss of the master and becomes decrement their rotation numbers. Number2
number 1, the new master; number3 2, etc.
becomes number
Whenever the master detects a missing rotation number, such as when a compressor is turned off that was previously in the rotation, it will automatically close the
gap by decrementing the rotation numbers of all compressers whose rotation numbers were greater than the missing number. Likewise, if for whatever reason, the master compressor fails to carry out its role, all lag compressors begin decrementing their rotation number until a new master is established. Regardless of the scenario, the result will always be that the compressors that remain in rotation will always end up with the Iowest possible rotation numbers. Other Features Any air system will exhibit pressure differences from one point to the next. Even a welldesigned multi compressor installation will show minor pressure variations between one compressors discharge point and another compressors discharge. These points will also vary from the central system (normally the air storage receiver). The AUTO SENTRY@ES sequencing system is designed to tolerate minor variations. These pressure differences wreak havoc with conventional sequencers. Central sequencers sense a lower
The pressure displayed on the top line by all sequenced compressors is this average. CONNECTION TO EXTERNAL CONTROLS
The AUTO SENTRYSES controller offers interconnection points for external controls and indicators. This allows simple connection to remote controls and indicaters, or integration into any plantwide controls system. Remote On / Off Remote onoff control of the systern requires only a simple two-wire control, with an isolated contact suitable for 120 volts, 1 amp. This may be a switch, a timer contact, a relay contact, or a PLC output. To connect, simply run the two wires to the control enclosure, remove the jumper between terminal 6 and terminal 9 on the terminal strip, and connect the two wires to terminal 6 and terminal 9. The air compressor will operate normally in its selected mode whenever this contact is closed (turned on). Note that the keypad is always the master control; the
13-9/[ 0-647
Page 34
operating
mode must be selected at the keypad, and the remote is not capable of starting a unit after the [STOP/RESETl key has been pressed to place the controller in the READY state. When the contact is opened (turned off), operation depends on how the controller has been programmed and what it is doing prior to opening the contact. If the compressor was already stopped in automatic or sequence modes, it will remain stopped and will not restart until the contact is closed. The display will flash STOP to indicate that it is the message REMOTE waiting for the remote signal. If the compressor was running in any mode when the contact was opened, and the remote response is programmed for IMMEDIATE, the compressor will immediately unload, blowdown and stop the motors. The unit is then in the REMOTE STOP mode as indicated above. If the compressor was running in any mode when the contact was opened, and the remote response is programmed for TIMED UNLOAD, the compressor will immediately unload and blowdown. It will then continue to run unloaded for whatever period has been programmed for AUTO TIME (or will complete the remaining auto time if already blown down). After completion, the motors will stop, and the unit will be in the REMOTE STOP mode as indicated above. This is the preferred setting for automatic remote controls that may cycle in less than 1/2 hour, as the motor is always cooled evenly and rapid start cycles are prevented.
modes. Loading in these modes, or starting in AUTO or SEQUENCE modes will occur when the pressure drops below the set pressure. Alarm Relay - The AUTO SENTRYqES controller provides an alarm relay that maybe connected to a remote mounted indicator light, horn, or into a PLC input of a plantwide control system, The contact is commercial rated 2 ampsat 120volts. The relay turns on whenever there is a shutdown condition requiring service at the compressor, and remains off during normal operation, stopping, or power off conditions. The external connections from the controller are from an isolated form C (singlepole, doublethrow) contact. This allows control of either a compressor okay or a compressor shutdown remote indicator. To use this relay, connect the supply wire for the remote circuit to terminal 21 (relay common) on the terminal strip. Connect a wire to the indicator from either terminal 19 (normally open) or from terminal 20 (normally closed). Connect the other side of the indicator to its neutral. Serial Communications
in sequence,
- If units are NOT connected the serial port is available forcommunica-
tions of compressor data to external monitoring systems. Data available include all pressures and temperatures, and a report of internal service data. This is accessible with a PC or PLC with an RS-485 communications port. For protocol information, request draw-
ing 200 EAP1255. Wiring Diagrams The following wiring diagram shows connections in typical units. Refer to the wiring diagram shipped with the compressor unit for actual connections.
When the remote is turned back on, the unit will start immediately in the CONSTANT or LOW DEMAND
13-WIQ-64?
Page 35
,,.}...
IUIK WI(S
101
,MIK8C1 Slal
Q ,,
T I .01[ ,1,.[, F 4., MOI1 2, 10, $1 .,1 OPIIOU VI UA!IO. S.IICH ,tot WC, W,9![ ,M, !l, , , , co,(C, c. mm,,, ,.!,, C., ,,(1 ,, Hm,Uu, 1 & ,. llO1t 3 101 COMI, OL 11 MMO1[ COlll ACl, ,[MOV[ NW[i 1[1-[, l[RM!,U! , L , CO.*LCI CO, lAC1 10 11,,,, s , , , ,,1 * m,, , M,, M ,,, ,1 w 0,110. M CO. MW#CA1t O.S CAUC ,01, > -.(, A -.1[ ,Ol*M %0,(.080 WA,.[ 1, ,,[0 .,[ ,. ,f, .,, ,, i !0
,,,,0.
COl C oMnA1[$ 0.10 Com[sloa AI IOU
,, 10R
C OH
CO.l AC~ 10S !{
i,
O1[M $TDow
!!E3i:%
m,. mu,
tJ #J
~ E#x=i!O
m,, cm,
rimz
Kc.
I
[UL
l[O[B A,, ,, ,, ,,0
,,[ f,, l[e ,Acum WIC - SLOW,. $0, [.,,0 ,Jl,[ - ,, [1 AI, ( moi[ 10 L[O, B !*Y[ I.L(l .,., w,. !,!,,0,0 ,, L,,
L-.x_
Nv
Ill
11 +--W
rl,
,7
cl- 00 0- PU,,
0 C(M A*
!40,,,
,,IU
w%
? 0 In la
10
k.
.,- .,.,.
a
t ,
II
a
I I
,0/( ,
1
202 EAQ546-C (Ref. Drawing)
6UM mclulul
-1[
-U
MU[1OOU
1mMt8T01 aumvolm
lKWHIM 1CCUUS80U
FIGURE 2-2 -
WIRING
DIAGRAM
- ES CONTROLLER
TROUBLE DISPLAY MODES
SHOOTING
AUTO SENTRYS
ES CONTROLLER
The normal display indicates the package service pressure, the airend discharge, the total running hours, and one of the following operating modes. The green light will be on for any operating mode, whether the compressor is running or not. READY CON LDM AUTO SEQ n The compressor The compressor The compressor The compressor The compressor has been stopped by pressing the [STOP/RESET] is operating in the Constant Run mode. is operating in the Low Demand mode. is operating in the Automatic is operating in the Sequence mode. mode. key.
The following alternate displays may be called by pressing a cursor [c] or [>] key SYS PRES RES PRES DIF PRES TOT HRS DIS TMP RES TMP BD TMR The pressure at the service connection The pressure in the oil reservoir The pressure drop across the air/oil separator The total hour of compressor The temperature The temperature running
at the airend discharge in the reservoir/ separator
The time remaining before a blowdown will be allowed (Low Demand, Auto, Sequence Modes)
AUTO TMR
The time remaining of unloaded motor operation (Auto, Sequence Modes)
ADVISORY
TROUBLESHOOTING
GUIDE
All advisories are indicated on the keypad by a yellow indicator in the Status area, and one of the following messages alternating with the normal lower line display. Perform service or maintenance as indicated, then clear the advisory as instructed on page 27. Message CHNG AIR FILTER CHNG SEPARATOR CHNG OIL FILTER Action Needed
Excessive vacuum has been detected after the air filter, indicating it has become full, Change the air filter to ensure maximum air delivery. The differential pressure across the air/oil separator has risen to over 8 psid. Change the separator to ensure maximum performance. The unit has been operated for the programmed number of hours since the last filter replacement. Change the filter to ensure an adequate flow of lubricant. The unit has been operated for the programmed number of hours since the last oil change. If high operating temperatures are encountered, the AUTO SENTRYES controller will automatically adjust the time interval for the change oil advisory. Change the oil to ensure lubricant quality.
CHANGE OIL
13-9/1 0-647
Page 37
ADVISORY
TROUBLESHOOTING
GUIDE (Continued)
Message HIGH TEMP OPER
Action
Needed
The temperature was greater than 210 F (99 C) at the airend discharge or the separator. Ensure that the compressor receives adequate cooling air or water, and that the coolers are not plugged, The temperature
separator.
LOW AMB TEMP
was less than 40
F (4 C)
at the
Ensure
that the compressor
is located
airend discharge or the in a room kept above
freezing.
SHUTDOWN
TROUBLESHOOTING
GUIDE
All shutdowns are indicated on the keypad by the word SHUTDOWN on the top line of the display, and one of the following messages on the lower line of the display. The red indicator in the Status area will be steadily lit while the conditions exist, and will flash after the condition has been corrected. Perform service as indicated. Press the [STOP/RESETl key to clear the shutdown.
Message CHANGE SEPARATOR
Action
Needed
The differential pressure across the air / oil separator has risen to over 15 psid. Change the separator to ensure maximum compressor performance, All inputs at connector 7 of the controller are off. The most common cause for this is that the connector plug has been pulled out. Plug the connector back in firmly, 120 volts has been removed from ALL inputs to connector 8 of the controller. The most common cause for this is that the connector plug has been pulled out. Plug the connector back in firmly.
CHECK CN7
CHECK CN8
EMERGENCY
STOP
The Emergency Stop button has been pressed, Pull it back out to its normal position. If the button has not been pressed, check that the contact block is firmly mounted in the right or left (not center) position of the operator, Check for loose connections which would remove 120 volts from connector 88 of the controller. The motor overload relay for the fan motor, located within the electrical control box, has tripped. This indicates high motor shaft load, low voltage, or excessive imbalance in the incoming power (such as a blown fuse). Disconnect and lock out power, open the box, and press the reset button it will click when reset. Measure motor amps, and take corrective actions to get all currents within the motor nameplate rating. If overload relay has not tripped, check for the cause that 120 volts was removed from connector 81 of the controller. The controller has attempted to turn off the fan, but is still receiving a return signal from the starters auxiliary contact. Check that the starter operates freely and that the contact block is properly installed on the starter. The controller has attempted to start the fan, but did not receive a return signal from the starters auxiliary contact. If the starter does not pick up when attempting to start, check that connector 9 of the controller is plugged in firmly, and check the starter coil. If the starter does pick up, but this message appears, check that the auxiliafy contact block is properly installed on the starter and wired to connector 8, terminal 3.
FAN OVERLOAD
FAN START ERROR (while stopped)
FAN START ERROR (while running)
13-9/1 N47
Page 38
SHUTDOWN
TROUBLESHOOTING
GUIDE (Continued)
Message HIGH DISCH TEMP
Action
Needed
This indicates that the controller has detected temperature in excess of the programmed high temperature limit, ora high temperature rate of rise, at the airend discharge. The most common cause for this is inadequate package cooling. Ensure proper air flow for aircooled units, or adequate water for watercooled units. Monitor temperature carefully during restarts after servicing. Pressure in excess of the programmed high pressure limit has been detected. This shutdown will occur if a loss of pneumatic controls occurs. Check the inlet valve, all control piping, solenoid valves, and all other control devices to find the cause for the inlet valve not closing. Other possible causes are loose connections to the transducer, electrical noise and transients, or improper setting of the high pressure limit. This indicates that the controller has detected temperature in excess of the programmed high temperature limit, ora high temperature rate of rise, at the air/oil separator. The most common cause for this is inadequate package ventilation. Monitor the temperature carefully during restarts after servicing. Pressure in excess of the programmed high pressure limit has been detected. The most likely cause is other, higher pressure compressors on the same air system; separate these from this compressor unit. Other possible causes are loose connections to the transducer, electrical noise and transients, or improper setting of the high pressure limit.
120 volts has been removed from terminal 7 of the terminal strip. This is normally shipped jumpered directly to terminal 9, but the jumper may be removed to add a field installed shutdown switch. Reset the external switch.
HIGH RESVR PRESS
HIGH RESRVR TEMP
HIGH SYSTEM PRESS
HIGH VIBRATION
LOW OIL PRESS
The controller has attempted to start and load the compressor, but pressure is not building up in the oil reservoir. This may indicate either a failure of the motor to turn the compressor, or a failure of the inlet valve to open. If the latter, check also the wiring and piping to solenoid valves IVO and IVC; these are both turned on to load up the compressor. The motor overload relay for the main compressor drive motor, located within the electrical control box, has tripped, This indicates high motor shaft load, low voltage, or excessive imbalance in the incoming power (such as a blown fuse). Disconnect and lock out power, open the box, and press the reset button it will click when reset. Measure motor amps, and take corrective actions to get all currents within the motor nameplate rating. If overload relay has not tripped, check for the cause that 120 volts was removed from connector 82 of the controller. The controller has attempted to turn off the compressor, but is still receiv ing a return signal from the starters auxiliary contact. Check that the starter operates freely and that the contact block is properly installed on the starter. The controller has attempted to start the compressor, but did not receive a return signal from the starters auxiliary contact. If the starter does not pick up when attempting to start, check that connector 9 of the controller is plugged in firmly, and check the starter coil. If the starter does pick up, but the message appears, check that the auxiliary contact block is properly installed on the starter and wired to connector 8, terminal 4.
MAIN OVERLOAD
MAIN START ERROR (while stopped)
MAIN START ERROR (while running)
13-9110-647
Page 39
SHUTDOWN
TROUBLESHOOTING
GUIDE (Continued)
Message OPEN THERM
Action
Needed
The controller has detected an open connection to thermistor: (A) airend discharge, or (B) separator. This normally indicates a loose or broken connection at the controller connector 7; check and correct the connection, This could also be indicating a broken wire or thermistor probe, This may also occur from excessively low temperature, Signal voltage has fallen too low at transducer: (A) Final discharge, or (B) Reservoir. This error is frequently the result of the transducers being improperly zeroed. Disconnect the air lines to the transducers and follow the procedure indicated in the adjustment instructions. This may also indicate a loose connection of the red wire to the transducer or a defective transducer. Check connections, or replace transducer if necessary. The power to the compressor unit has been turned off and back on. Press [STOP/RESET] and select an operating mode. The controller has detected a shorted connection to thermistor: (A) airend discharge or (B) separator. This normally indicates a faulty connection (e.g. wire strands touching) at the controller connector 7; check and correct the connection, This could also be indicating a damaged wire or thermistor probe. Signal voltage has exceeded approximately 4,6 volts at transducer: (A) Final discharge or (B) Reservoir. This may indicate a loose connection of the black wire to the transducer or a defective transducer. Check connections, or replace transducer if necessary,
OPEN XDUCER
POWER FAILURE
SHORTED THERM
SHORTED XDUCER
CONTROLS
TROUBLESHOOTING
GUIDE noted elsewhere in this manual. All electri-
The following are recommended service actions. Observe all instructions cal service is to be petiormed only by a qualified electrician.
Symptom No display, compressor
Recommended
Action
stopped.
Check incoming power to the compressor unit. Ensure that the disconnect is on and that fuses have not blown (or circuit breaker tripped). If power is being properly supplied to the control box, check the fuses located at the fan starter, the control transformer fuses, and the fuse located on the Auto Sentry-ES controller chassis near connector CN-6, To operate, the controller must be placed into an operating mode (e.g. AUTO); press the [STOP/RESET] to put the control in the READY state, then select a mode with the operating mode keys. In AUTOMATIC and SEQUENCE modes, compressors will not start until the pressure drops below the reset pressures, The controller prevents attempts to start the main motor if the reservoir pressure is over 5 psig (.35 Bar). Pressure continues to be relieved from the reservoir while this message is on, and the compressor will start automatically after the pressure has dropped. If this message remains with NO pressure in the reservoir, follow the transducer zeroing procedure found in the controls adjustment section.
Compressor
will not start.
Display indicates NOT BLOWN DOWN
13-9/1 0-647
Page 40
CONTROLS
TROUBLESHOOTING
GUIDE
Symptom Display indicates (REMOTE STOP
Recommended
The controller
Action
is provided with an input for user-furnished
volt
remote
con-
trols. This display indicates that 120
is removed from terminal 6 of the terminal strip. Check all connections of the facto,~) installed jumper, or the customerprovided controls, if applicable. If the display indicates SHUTDOWN, refer to the shutdown troubleshooting section for assistance. In addition to the messages shown, there are several internal and system diagnostics periormed by the controller. Consult the factory for additional assistance.
In the CONSTANT RUN and LOW DEMAND modes, the compressor will not load until the pressure drops below reset pressure. Refer to the operating instructions for further information. If pressure is below the reset pressure, check that the inlet valve operates freely, Check that the IVO and IVC valves are wired and operating properly.
Display indicates SHUTDOWN
Compressor runs, but does not load
Compressor runs, unloads at low pressure Compressor modulate does not
If the inlet valve closes at low pressure, check the wiring to the blowdown valve and the piping and check valves in its discharge line. The Auto Sentry-ES controller operates the inlet valve to maintain pres sure near the set pressure, matching delivery to demand, If the pressure continues to rise above set pressure, check that the inlet valve operates freely, and that control air is supplied to the WC valve, If modulation does not close the valve, it will be closed during a blo~vdown as pressure approaches the high pressure limit. The external air receiver should be sized appropriately to prevent rapid cycles. The rapid response time in CONSTANT RUN mode will operate with small receivers, but any plant air system will operate more efficiently with adequately sized storage. Refer to the operating instructions for further information, Extra segments or ghosting of characters indicates damage probably from excessive high voltage, Replace the controller, and install protection to prevent further damage to electrical equipment, The sequencing system transmits lowlevel signal between units to com municate pressures. Units must be properly grounded to a good ground system, the communications cable should use only appropriate quality cable, and the cable should be run in its own conduit. In the sequence mode, the operating system requires all compressors be piped directly to receiver, such that all transducers sense the same pressure, Check valves or restrictions between compressors and the storage will cause system instability. Run units in AUTOMATIC mode until the system is corrected. If this shutdown occurs in the sequence mode only, it indicates instability due to rapid changes in pressure of the system. Remove restrictions between the compressor and receiver, increase receiver size if necessary to slow down the pressure swings. Accuracy of the pressure display and controls requires that the controller and transducers be calibrated together. This MUST be done with no pressure at the transducer, or errors will occur. This is easiest to check with all pressure removed. All pressure displays should indicate O psi (0,0 Bar) +/ 1 PSI. If the display indicates greater pressures, recalibrate the system as instructed in the configuration adjustments. Note: reservoir pressure may drop below zero psig when the compressor is stopped, but will return slowly to zero as the vacuum is relieved.
Compressor cycles rapidly between load and unload
Display is illegible
Erratic pressures in SEQUENCE only
Compressor cycles rapidly in SEQUENCE mode only
LOW OIL PRESSURE in SEQUENCE mode only
Pressure
display error
139/1 O-647
Page 41
SECTION 3 REMOTEMOUNTED
MAIN MOTOR STARTERS

MAIN SYSTEMS
Connect the control relay contact in the control box to the starter terminals for twowire control. The terminals are identified in the control box as 40 & 41 on standard packages. Refer to the starter instructions for identification of the control terminals for two-wire control. Use the pair of yellow vjires to indicate that this circuit is from a different source.
CONNECTION OF REMOTE-MOUNTED MOTOR STARTERS TO ES CONTROL
The majority of our rotary screw compressor packages feature starters completely wired and tested at the factory, Some special applications and large units, however, do not have the main motor starter mounted on the package. The following information describes special requirements for applications with a remotemounted main starter. Starter Regardless required:
q
of starter type or brand, the following are
Connect the starter auxiliay contact to the compressor control box. When connecting this contact, make sure that no other wires are connected to it in the starter it has to be an isolated contact. These two wire connect to terminals 4 & 9 on standard packages, Use the pair of red wires; this is powered from the compressor control panel control transformer. Controls Checkout
The starter must have its own fused control circuit (and control transformer, if required for the starter). The starter must have provision for connection to a twowire control circuit. The starter must have an isolated normally-open auxiliary contact. and Wiring (dry contact)
Installation
Lock the disconnect switch for the starter in the open position. Energize the compressor package control panel. If the display indicates SHUTDOWN - MAIN START ERROR, SHUTDOWN MOTOR CONTACT, or SHUTDOWN - MAIN STRT CONTCT, the starter auxiliary contact is disconnected. Remove all power and correctly wire as indicated above. Enter the adjustments menu and perform a jog to check for proper fan rotation. If it is incorrect, disconnect power and switch two of the three wires to the fan motor. Restore power to the control box when done. With the main motor power still disconnected, press the [CONSTANT RUN] key. After a brief delay, The control should stop and display SHUTDOWN MAIN START ERROR, SHUTDOWN - MOTOR STARTER ,or SHUTDOWN MAIN STARTER. This properly indicates that the starter did not function because it is turned off by the disconnect switch. Unlock and close the disconnect switch for the main motor. Enter the adjustments menu to jog the compressor and check rotation. If it is incorrect, disconnect and lockout all power, reverse two of the three power phases at the starter. Restore power when done. Press the [CONSTANT RUN] key. If the controller displays SHUTDOWN MAIN START ERROR , SHUTDOWN MOTOR STARTER ,or SHUTDOWN - MAIN STARTER and stops the unit, the starter auxiliary contact is disconnected. Remove all power and correctly wire as indicated above. Press the [STOP/RESE~ key to stop the compressor. The control should perform an orderly stop of the compressor unit and motor.
The starter should be mounted and wired in accordance with the National Electrical Code and the manufacturers instructions. Wiring from the load terminals of the starter to the motor should include flexible conduit to the motor junction box to allow for normal movement of the motor in the package. The compressor package control box must have If own disconnect and overcurrent protection. package has a fan, the wiring should be sized for fan horsepower and voltage. If the package does
include former. a fan, the only package
its the the not
load is the control trans-
Install a separate conduit from the starter to the package control box for control wiring. Label and pull four
control wires through this conduit. Since two separate supplies are involved, run one pair of red wires and one pair of yellow wires for identification. Controls Connections
Disconnect and remove any manual starter controls which may be mounted on the starter or elsewhere. The starter must be controlled by the compressor controls for proper operation. The following is general information; refer to the unit wiring diagram for detailed connection.
SECTION 4 REMOTE COOLING MODULE STARTERS

CONNECTION OF REMOTE STARTERS TO ES CONTROL COOLING SYSTEMS MODULE Connect the five control wires to terminals control box. 22, 23 in the compressor
9, 10, 18,
The majority of our rotary screw compressor packages feature starters completely wired and tested at the factory. Some applications and large units, however, will have the air cooled cooling module mounted remotely from the compressor package. Standard pratice is to
provide a combination starter (with fused disconnect) for the cooling module. The following information de-
At the cooling module starter, connect wire 10 to one terminal of the starter coil, wire 18 to the other coil terminal. Connect wire 9 to one terminal of the aux contact and to one terminal of the overload relay contact
terminal. Connect wire 23 to the other aux relay contact. Connect wire 22 to the other overload relay contact terminal.
scribes tions. Starter
connection
requirements
for these
applicaControls Checkout
After installation
Regardless required:
q
of starter type or brand, the following
are
The starter must have an isolated 120 volt coil. The starter must have an isolated (dry contact) normally closed overload relay contact. The starter must have an isolated normally-open auxiliary contact. (dry contact)
is complete, energize both the module and the compressor package. In the controller adjustments, select WATERCOOLED fan type. This operates the fan whenever the compressor operates, and must be used with remote-cooled units as well as watercooled units. This ensures that the oil piping does not accumulate a large quantity of hot oil before the fan starts. This setting also starts the enclosure vent fan (if so equipped) whenever the compressor runs to cool the main drive motor. Check rotation of both the compressor and the cooling fan during the jog motor test.
Standard starters are generally provided by the manufacturer with interconnecting wires between the coil, overload relay contact, and auxiliary contact. Remove all of these to isolate the three control components. Installation and Wiring
Start the compressor unit by pressing the [CONSTANT RUN] key. The compressor and cooling module should both start. Run forapproximately one minute. Stop the compressor by pressing [STOP/RESET]. The compressor and cooling module should both stop. If the controller shuts down before a start is attempted and displays FAN STRT CONTACT or FAN START ERROR, check and correct wiring to the auxiliary contact, If the cooling module fan does not start, and the controlIershuts down and displays FAN STARTER orFAN START ERROR, check and correct the wiring to the starter coil. If the cooling module fan does not start, check the fuses in the combination starter and ensure that the disconnect switch is closed. If the cooling module fan starts, but the controller then shuts down and displays FAN STARTER or FAN START ERROR, check and correct the wiring to the auxiliary contact. If the controller shuts down and displays FAN OVERLOAD, check both the cooling fan and the package fan (if applicable) motors for overload or disconnection,
The starter should be mounted and wired in accordance with the National Electrical Code and the manufacturers instructions. Wiring from the load terminals of the starter to the motor should include flexible conduit to the motor junction box to allow for normal movement of the motor in the package. Use tire% delay fuses in the disconnect, to allow for motor starting. Follow instructions in the starter for proper sizing and application of overload heaters. Install a separate conduit from the starter to the package control box for control wiring. Label five control wires: 9,10,18,22, this conduit. Controls Connections 23; pull through
Disconnect and remove any manual starter controls or other control wires which may be mounted on the starter or elsewhere. The starter must be controlled by the compressor controls for proper operation. The following is general information; refer to the unit wiring diagram for detailed connection.
13-9110.-547
Page 43
SECTION 5 SERVICE AND FIELD MODIFICATION

CONTROLLER REPLACEMENT
and nuts must be used when installing all Iockwashers the replacement controller.
The controller is mounted into the starter enclosure with fourteen nuts and Iockwashers. On most slope top enclosures (4O-1OOHP models), these are visible when an access panel on the back of the box is removed. ponents Drape cloths over the starters and other comin these boxes to prevent loose parts from fal-
CONTROLLER
UPGRADES
The AUTO SENTRY3ES and AUTO SENTRY@ES+ controllers share all mounting dimensions and are field interchangeable. To upgrade controller types, order Kit number
ling into the electrical devices, To maintain the environmental integrity of the enclosure,
This contains all parts and 204 EAU6003. instructions needed for retro fit of the AUTO SENTRYES+ into older units.
ACCESSORIES
FOR AUTO SENTRY@ES+ parts and instructions for field installation of accessory inputs for units with
The following kits contain all electrical AUTO SENTRY@ES+ controllers.
Kit number 203 EAU6003 Kit number 205EAQ4014 Kit number 207EAQ4014 Kit number 208EAQ4014 Kit number 209EAQ4014
provides a current monitor for units built without the monitor. provides a water pressure switch for installation provides a voltage/phase provides a voltage/phase provides a voltage/phase monitor for 200-208 on the water supply line. volt units.
monitor for 230240 volt units. monitor for 460480 monitor for 575-600 volt units. volt units.
Kit number 210EAQ401 4 provides a voltage/phase
13-9110-647
Page 44
GARDNER
DENVER@
1310-614 2nd Edition
March, 1997
ELECTRASAVER@ STATIONARY BASE-MOUNTED
COMPRESSOR
AUTO SENTRY@ES+ AUTO SENTRY@ES DOMESTIC CONTROLS CONTROLS
MODEL
EAU 200 300 HP G INTERNATIONAL MODEL
EAU 150-225KW H
OPERATING AND SERVICE MANUAL
Gardner
TaiiEi
MAINTAIN
COMPRESSOR RELIABILITY AND PERFORMANCE GENUINE GARDNER DENVER COMPRESSOR PARTS AND SUPPORT SERVICES Denver air compressor 1. 2.
WITH
Gardner
Denver Compressor genuine parts, engineered to original tolerances, are designed for optimum specifically for Gardner Denver corndependability pressor systems. Design and material innovations are the result of years of experience with hundreds of different compressor applications. Reliability in materials and quality assurance are incorporated in our genuine replacement parts.
with these services:
Trained parts specialists to assist you in selecting the correct replacement parts. Factory warranted new and remanufactured rotary screw air ends, Most popular model remanufactured air ends are maintained in stock at MDC for purchase on an exchange basic with liberal core credit available for the replacement unit. A full line of factory tested AEON m compressor lubricants specifically formulated for use in Gardner Denver compressors. Repair and maintenance kits designed with the necessary parts to simplify servicing your compressor.
Your authorized Gardner Denver Compressor distributor offers all the backup youll need. A worldwide network of authorized distributors provides the finest product support in the air compressor industry. Your local
3.
4.
authorized distributor maintains a large inventory of genuine parts and is backed up for emergency parts by direct access to the Gardner Denver Machine~ Inc. Master Distribution Center (MDC) in Memphis, Tennessee. Your authorized distributor can supponl your Gardner
Authorized distributor sewice technicians are factorytrained and skilled in compressor maintenance and repair. They are ready to respond and assist you by providing fast, expert maintenance and repair services. Denver Air Compressor distributor refer to the yellow
For the location of your local authorized Gardner pages of your phone directory or contact: Distribution Center: Gardner Denver Machine~ Master Distribution Center 5585 East Shelby Drive Memphis, TN 38141 Phone: (901 ) 542-6100 (800) 245-4946 Fax: (901 ) 542-6159 Inc.
Factory: Gardner Denver Machinery 1800 Gardner Expressway Quincy, IL 62301 Phone: (217) 222-5400 Fax: (21 7) 2247814
Inc.
REMANUFACTURED Whenever an air end requires replacement or repair, Gardner Denver offers an industry unique, factory remanufactured air end exchange program. From its modern Remanufacturing Center in Indianapolis, IN, Gardner Denver is committed to supplying you with the highest quality, factory remanufactured air ends that are guaranteed to save you time, aggravation and money. Immediately Available
AIR ENDS a new overhaul kit: bearings, gears, seals, sleeves and gaskets. Extensive Testing Gardner Denver performs testing that repair houses just dont do. Magnaflux and ultrasonic inspection spot cracked or stressed castings, monochromatic light analysis exposes oil leaks, and coordinate measurement machine inspects to +/- .0001, insuring that all remanufactured air ends meet factory performance specifications. Warranty Gardner Denver backs up every remanufactured air end with a new warranty. ..18 months from purchase, 12 months from service. Gardner Denver remanufactured air ends deliver qua/ity withou[ question . . . year in and year out. Call Gardner Denver for information on the air end exchange program and the name of your authorized distributor. Phone Number: 800245-4946 or FAX: 901542-61 !59
Repair downtime costs you money, which is why there are over 200 remanufactured units in inventory at all times, ready for immediate delivery. Skilled Craftsmen
Our Remanufacturing assembly technicians average over 20 years experience with air compression products. Precision Remanufacturing
All potentially usable parts are thoroughly cleaned, inspected and analyzed. Only those parts that can be brought back to original factory specifications are remanufactured. Every remanufactured air end receives
13-10-614
Page i
FOREWORD Gardner Denver Rotary Screw compressors are the result of advanced engineering and skilled manufacturing. To be assured of receiving maximum service from this machine the owner must exercise care in its operation and maintenance. This book is written to give the operator and maintenance department essential information for daytoday operation, maintenance and adjustment. Careful adherence to these instructions will result in economical operation and minimum downtime.
DANGER
Danger is used
injury, death,
to indicate
the
presence
of a hazard
or substantial
property
damage
which will cause severe if the warning is ignored.
personal
-A/
WARNING
of a hazard which can cause severe damage if the warning is ignored. person-
Warning al injury,
is used to indicate the presence death, or substantial property
~cNJTlOhi
Caution
personal
is used to indicate injury or property
the
presence
of a hazard
which
will
or can
cause
minor
damage
if the warning
is ignored.
NOTICE
Notice which is used to notify people of installation, is important but not hazardrelated.
operation
or maintenance
information
13-10-614
Page ii
This
book
covers
the following
models:
DOMESTIC
MODELS:
Controller HP PSIG Air Cooled Water Cooled Parts List Manual
200
250
100, 125, 150
EAUQPG
EAUSPG
1310-512
139/1 o-647
100, 125, 150
EAUQQG
EAUSQG
13-10-512
139/1 O647
300
100, 125, 150
EAUQRG
EAUSRG
13-10-512
139/1 o-647
INTERNATIONAL
MODELS:
HP (KW)
PSIG (Bar) Air Cooled Water Cooled Parts List
Controller Manual
200 (150) 250 (186) 300 (225)
100, 125, 150 (6.9, 8.6, 10.3)

100,
EAUQPH
EAUSPH
13-10-513X
13-9/1O-647
125, 150
EAUQQH
EAUSQH
13-10513x
13-9110-647
(6.9, 8.6, 10.3) 100, 125, 150 (6.9, 8.6, 10.3) EAUQRH EAUSRH 13-10-513X 13-9/1O-647
INSTRUCTIONS
FOR ORDERING
REPAIR PARTS
When ordering parts, specify Compressor MODEL, Method of Cooling, HORSEPOWER and SERIAL NUMBER (see nameplate on unit). The Serial Number is also stamped on top of the cylinder flange to the right of the inlet housing, All orders for Parts should be placed with the nearest authorized distributor, Where NOT specified, quantity of parts required per compressor or unit is one (l); where more than one is
required per unit, quantity is indicated in parenthesis. SPECIFY EXACTLY THE NUMBER OF PARTS REQUIRED. DO NOT ORDER BY SETS OR GROUPS. To determine the Right Hand and Left Hand side of a compressor, stand at the motor end and look toward the compressor. Right Hand and Left Hand are indicated in parenthesis following the part name, i.e. (RH) & (LH).
Page iii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Remanufactured
Air Ends.....
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..i
Foreword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..ii
instructions
for Ordering Repair Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..iii
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..v ... . Vlll
List of illustrations
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ,.
,,..
Section l, General information
. . . . . . .,.,
...... ............... .. .................... .. .... .. 1
Section 2,1nstallation
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ,. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .,..
Section 3, Starting&Operating
Procedures
................ ............. ............. .. ...
..
. . . 15
Section 4, Controls &instrumentation
.......................... ........... ..... .......
. . . . . . . . 17
Section 5, Lubrication,
Oil Cooler, Oil Filter&Separator
.......... ...... ..
. . . . . ..,,...
. . . . . . . . . . . 30
Section 6, Air Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Section 7, Coupling
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..OO . . . . . ...44
Section 8, Maintenance
Schedule
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...45
Section 9, Troubleshooting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...46
Warranty
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. Last Page
13-10-614
Pageiv
INDEX Coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...44 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...44 Cushion Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Actuator, Turn Valve
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...21 . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Addition of Oil Between Changes Aftercooler Piping
Alignment Individual Daily Check Decals
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...33 6........ . . . . . . . . ...42
AIR FILTER, SECTION
Air Filter Element Life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...42 Air Filter Vacuum Switch Air Flow in the Compressor Air Receiver, Auxiliav AirCooled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..2o System . . . . . . . . . . . 1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...6.7 Setvice Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...12
Discharge
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...10 .................. 8
Discharge Thermistor Drain, Oil Reservoir
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...20 . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...9 . . . . . . . . . . . 36 . . . . 14
Units, Location
Auto Sentry Operation Auxiliary Alr Receiver Blowdown Valve
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...10
Draining and Cleaning Oil System
Electric Motor Grease Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18,20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...12 . . . . . . . . . . . . ...34 Electric Motor Regreasinglnterval
. . . . . . . . . . . 14
Blowdown Valve Piping Change Procedure,
Electrical Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...13 Standard Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...13
Lubricant
Element Life, Ak Filter Emergency Enclosure Fan Stader
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...42 . . . . . . . . . . . ...20
Check, Daily . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...16 Cleaning and Draining Oil System Cold Ambient Operation Cold Weather Operation Cold Weather Operation, Compression Compressor Compressor Compressor Compressor Principle . . . . . . . . ...36
Stop PushButton
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...22 Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...37
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...34 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...10 installation for . . . . . . . 9
Filter, Compressor
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...1
Filter Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...42 Filter, Heavy Duty Air(Standard) Foreword Foundation . . . . . . . . . ...42
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...1 (GDEliminator) Capacity Control Oil Separator . ..40
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..ii . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ,, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18, 35 SECTION1 . . . ...1
. . . . . . . . . . . . ...20
Oil Cooler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...37 Gauge, Oil Level GENERAL
Compressor Oil Cooler -Water-Cooled Heat Exchanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...38 Compressor Compressor Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...37 Oil System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...30
INFORMATION,
Grease Recommendations, Grounding,
Electric Motor . . . . 14
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 (Oil) Piping Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...30
CompressorOil Control Devices Control Piping
System Check . . . . . . . . . . . ...41 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...21 Inlet Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...11 inlet Screen and Tube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...43 Heat Exchanger High Temperature
Control Transformer Controller
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...17 instruments, SECTION 4 .17 . . 17
CONTROLS&
Controls &instruments, Cooler, Compressor
General Description
Inlet Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...19 INSTALLATION, installation, installation SECTION2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...8
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...37 ............. 1 . . . . . . . . ...44
Cooling, Seaiing and Lubrication COUPLING, SECTION 7........
General
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...8 ....... 9
for Cold Weather Operation
13-10-614
Page v
INDEX Lifting Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . ...8 Line, Discharge Line, inlet Location Service ...,..... . . . . . . . . ...12
Compressor Oil Cooler Oil Cooler Oil Cooler
Oil lnletTemperature Oil Pressure Temperature Water Differential, Differential
,,,
. . . . . 41
. . . . . ..41 . . . . ...41 . . ...41
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ,.,,.8 Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...9 . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . ..3o . . . . . . . . . . . . ...34 . . . . . . . . . . . . ...14 ............. 1
Pressure
Differential
Air-Cooled
Oil inlet Pressure Operation
. . . . . . . . . . . . .,,
. . . . . ...41
WaterCooled Lubricant,
Units
Recommended
Cold Ambient.............,,,. High Temperature
. . . . . . ...34
Lubricant Change Procedure Lubrication, Lubrication, Motor .,, ..,....
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...30 . . . . . . . . . . ...20
Optional Switches.........,.. Parallel Piping Piping Aftercooler
Cooling and Sealing
LUBRICATION, OIL COOLER, OIL FILTER & SEPARATOR, SECTION 5....... . . . . ...30 Main Stafler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...22 SECTION 8 ..,45 . . . . . . . . . 18
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...13
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Blowdown Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...12 Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ., . . . ...11 Heat Exchanger Parallel Series (Oil) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...33
MAINTENANCESCHEDULE, Minimum Discharge
Pressure Valve
Moisture in the Oil System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...35 MoistureSeparator/Trap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...11 . . . . . . . . . . . 14
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..13
Motor Grease Recommendations Motor Lubrication Motor Regressing Oil Change Interval
Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...12 Pressure Differential Gauging . . . . . . . . . . . . ...40 Pressure Regulator Prestart-Up . . . . . . . . . . , . ., . . . . . . . ...19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...15 . . . . . . . . . . ...15
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Interval
. . . . . . . . . . . . .,...4 14
instructions
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Air Filter...............,,. Compressor Coupling Electrical Enclosure Grounding
Oil Cooler, Compressor Oil Filter, Compressor
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...15
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...15
Oil Level Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18, 35 Oil Resemoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..m 9
Oil Reservoir Drain Oil Separator Compressor Inspection
Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .,, ...,.16 (GD Eliminator) . . . . . . . . . . . ..4o Piping ..,........,....,..,.. . . . . . . . . ...15
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...0.041 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...40 or Replacement . ..41
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...15 System Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...16 ., . . . . . . . ...20
Oil Carryover
Removal for inspection Oil Specifications Oil System Compressor
Purge Air Valve..........,.,.. Recommended Regressing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...30 Lubricant . . . . . . .,, . . . . . . . ...30 . . . . . . . . . . 14 interval, Electric Motor
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...36
Regulator, Pressure Relief Valve
. ., . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...19
Draining and Cleaning Oil System Check
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
. . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . ...41 ... ,...41
Air and Oil Discharge Temperature
Remote Mounted Elevated Cooler Assembly Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...33
13-10-614
Pagevi
INDEX System Thermistor . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . ...20 . . . . . . . . . . ...22 Mixing) Valve 38
Repair Patis, Ordeting Reservoir, Reservoir
instructions
. . . . . . . . . . . iii
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...40 Pressure Transducer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Terminal Strip.............,.. Thermal Control (Thermostatic Thermistor Discharge System Transducer Reservoir Pressure
Safety Precautions Sealing, Lubrication Separator,
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...4.5 and Cleaning ............ 1 Oil . ..40
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..20 . . . . . . . . . ... 20
Compressor Moisture
(GD Eliminator)
Separatorflrap, Series Piping SERVICE
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...20
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...13 . .,,.,..45
System Pressure Transformer,
CHECK LIST, AIR FILTER
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...21 SECTION . . . . . . ...46 . .43
Service Checklist
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...45 . . . . . . . . . . ...45
. . . . . . . . . . . ...45
TROUBLESHOOTING,
Every 1000 Hours Operation

Every 125 Hours Operation
Tube, inlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Turn Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .-121 Turn Valve Actuator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...21 Valve Blowdown Inlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..,... . 18120 .19
Every 6000 Hours Operation Every 8 Hours Operation Every Year
. . . . . . . . . . ...45
. . . . . ., . . . . . . ...45
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 . . . . . . . . ...45
Motor Lubrication.........,.. Oil Separator St luttle Valve
. ., . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...45
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..<s Discharge Pressure
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..........zo . . . . . . . . . . . . ...19 . . . . . . . . . . ...21
Minimum
. . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Solenoid Valves lVCandlVO Solenoid ValvesTvCand Specifications, Starter WO.
Purge Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . ...20 Relief Shuttle Solenoid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..-.-.. lVCandlVO .. ....20
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...30
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...21 Mixing) . ...38
Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...
.. ...-.22
SolenoidTVCandTvO Thermal Turn
Main . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ....0.22 STARTING&OPERATING PROCEDURES, SECTION . . . . . . . . . . ... . 15
Control (Thermostatic
.......................
,. ...21
Water Flow Control Water Shutoff Warranty
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...39 .. .40
Starting the Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...16 Unit Cold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..... Unit Hot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... . ... . . . ... .16 ..16
. . . . . . . . . . . ....
. . . . . . . . . . . . ...)..<.
. . . . .. Last Page Exchanger. .... .--12 39
Water Flow Control ValveforHeat Water Piping . . . . . . . . . . ...<{...
Stopping the Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . ...16 st~p,Terminal, ...........................22 Switch, Air Filter Vacuum Switches, Optional ..,... . . . . . . . . . . ...20
Water Shutoff Valve Water-Cooled Heat Exchanger ............................40 Water-Cooled Units, Location ............... 9
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..2o . . . . . . . . . . . . ...20
System Pressure Transducer
Wiring, Electrical
, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...13
13-10-6!4
Pagevii
LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS
Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure 11 1-2 13 14 15
Compression
Cycle.....,.....,..
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. ~. . . . . . . . . . . . . . ., . . . . . . . ...1
Starter Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...2 Package Controller&Starters Package Drive Package Oil Check Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ., . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...2
Motor & Air Filter
Filter, Oil Level Gauge, Mixing Valve, Minimum Pressure Valve and . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...8
Figure 16 Figure 21 Figure 22 Figure 23 Figure 24 Figure 25 Figure 2-6 Figure 27 Figure 2-8 Figure 41 Figure 42 Figure 43 Figure 44 Figure 45 Figure 4-6 Figure 47 Figure 4-8 Figure 49 Figure 410 Figure 411 Figure 412 Figure 413 Figure 51 Figure 52 Figure 53 Figure 5+ Figure 55 Figure 5-6 Figure 57 Figure 58 Figure 59 Figure 61 Figure 71
PackageAir/OilFlowDiagram Typical Compressor A\r Flow Chari Room...
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...10
Cold Weather installation Inlet Line Lengths Heat Exchanger Aftercooler
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ., . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...11 (Oil Cooler) Approximate Water Flow Water Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Approximate
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .,, . . . . . . . . . . ...12
Series Piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...13 Parallel Piping...........,.. Schematic Tubing Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...18
Blowdown Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...18 Minimum Discharge Inlet Valve Pressure Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ., . ., . . . . . . . . ...19
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...19
Shuttle Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ., . ., . ., . . . . . . . . . ...20 Turn Valve Actuator ...,..... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...21 at Full Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...23 Fully Unloaded Low Fully Unloaded Low Demand Mode Switch Off . ...24 Demand Mode Switch On . . . . 25
Control Schematic-Compressor Control Schematic-Compressor Control Schematic-Compressor Wiring Diagram -202EAU546, Wiring Diagram 202EAU546,
(Wye Delta, ES+ Controller, Air Cooled) . . . . . . . . . . . ...26 (Wye Delta, ES+ Controller, AirCooled) (Wye Delta, ES+ Controller, Watercooled) (Wye Delta, ES+ Controller, Watercooled) . . . . . . . . . . . ...27 . . . . . . . . ...28 . . . . . . . . ...29
Wiring Diagram -205EAU546, Wiring Diagram -205EAU546, Flow Diagram
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .,, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...31 Mounted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...32
Oil Flow Diagram Remote Overhead Cooler Drain Detail, Oil Level Gauge
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...33
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ,, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...35 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...36
Oil Change Interval Approximate
Oil System Capacities
Water Control Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ,, ..,.,.........,..,38 Dew Point Temperature Oil Separator vs. Ambient Temperature, (l OOY~Relative Humidity) . . . . . . ...39
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ,, ..,.,.........,,,,40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... . ., . . . . . . . . . ...42 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...44
Heavy Duty Air Filter (Standard) installation of Coupling Cushions
13-10-614
Pageviii
SECTION 1 GENERAL INFORMATION
FIGURE
1-1
COMPRESSION
CYCLE
COMPRESSOR - The Gardner Denver Rotary Screw compressor is a single stage, positive displacement rotary machine using meshing helical rotors to effect compression. Both rotors are supported between high capacity roller bearings located outside the compression chamber. Single width cylindrical roller bearings are used at the inlet end of the rotors to carry part of the radial loads. Tapered roller bearings at the discharge end locate each rotor axially and carry all thrust loads and the remainder of the radial loads. COMPRESSION PRINCIPLE (FIGURE ll) Compression is accomplished by the main and secondary rotors synchronously meshing in a onepiece cylinder. The main rotor has four (4) helical lobes 90 apart. The secondary rotor has five (5) matching helical grooves 60 apart to allow meshing with main rotor lobes.
The air inlet poet is located on top of the compressor cylinder near the drive shaft end. The discharge port is
ervoir (C). Each rotor cavity follows the same fill-compress-discharge cycle in rapid succession to produce a discharge air flow that is continuous, smooth and shock free. AIR FLOW IN THE COMPRESSOR SYSTEM (FIGURE 5-1, page 31) - Air enters the air filter and passes through the inlet unloader valve to the compressor. After compression, the air/oil mixture passes into the oil reservoir where most of the entrained oil is removed by velocity change and impingement and drops back into the reservoir, The air and remaining oil passes into the separator and separator housing where the oil is separated and passes through tubing connecting the separator housing and compressor. The air passes through the minimum pressure valve, discharge check valve and cooler, then to the plant air lines. LUBRICATION, COOLING AND SEALING - Oil is forced by air pressure from the oil reservoir through the oil cooler, thermostatic mixing valve, and oil filter and discharges into the compressor main oil galle~. A portion of the oil is directed through internal passages to the bearings, gears and shaft oil seal. The balance of the oil is injected directly into the compression chamber to remove heat of compression, seal internal clearances and lubricate the rotors. TURN VALVE The turn valve is a rotay helical valve located on the discharge side of the cylinder toward the inlet end. The valve opens and closes ports in the cylinder which communicates with the inlet passage. This varies the compressor rotor volume to match the demand for air, thus reducing the part-load power requirement.
near the bottom at the opposite end of the compressor cylinder. Figure 7-1 k an inverted view to show in/et and discharge ports, The compression cycle begins as rotors unmesh at the inlet port and air is drawn into the cavity between the main rotor lobes and secondary rotor grooves (A). When the rotors pass the inlet port cutoff, air is trapped in the interlobe cavity and flows axially with the meshing rotors (B). As meshing continues, more of the main rotor lobe enters the secondary rotor grove, normal volume is reduced and pressure increases, Oil is injected into the cylinder to remove the heat of compression and seal internal clearances. Volume reduction and pressure increase continues until the air/oil mixture trapped in the interlobe cavity by the rotors passes the discharge port and is released to the oil res-
13-10-614
Page 1
CONTROL PANEL ~
r MERGENCY STOP
MOISTURE SCPARATOR
AND TRW
OIL FILL
FINAL DISCHARGE
[
OIL LEVEL GAUGE
OIL Cf?AIN~
MOTOR ROTATION
FIGURE
1-2
STARTER
BOX
FIGURE
1-3
PACKAGE
- CONTROLLER
& STARTERS
\ INLET VAI-VE
COUPLING GUARD FIGURE1-4 - PACKAGE- DRIVEMOTOR& AIR FILTER
13-1(3-614
Page 2
PRESSURERELIEF VALVE
7[
Ifl
OIL FILTER ELEMENT
.--, - ----
01111
Allu th LLl
&.;4$--y--------OIL RESERVOIR 4
1
\,
,/
~STATFILER
COOLING FAN
FIGURE
1-5
PACKAGE-
OIL FILTER, OIL LEVEL GAUGE,
MIXING VALVE,
MINIMUM PRESSURE VALVE & CHECK VALVE
AIR FILTERS ~
v
\\
DISCHARGE MANIFOLD >
AIR FLOW
MOTOR COMPRESSOR
. .
MINIMUM PRESSURE d
CHECKVALVE
AIR FLOW
1 -
FIGURE 1-6 - PACKAGE - AIR/OIL FLOW DIAGRAM
SAFETY
PRECAUTIONS
Safety is everybodys business and is based on your use of good common sense. All situations or circumstances cannot always be predicted and covered by established rules, Therefore, use your past experience, watch out for
safety Some hazards general and be cautious. safety precautions are given below:
A Failure to observe
. . Keep finqers these notices
DANGER
could awav from result from this in injury revolving to or death fan, drive of personnel. coupling, not suitable etc. for hu-
and clothinq
Do not use the air discharcie man consumption. or remove or break is shut
unit for breathing
Do not loosen ic mixing tem until valve
the oil filler down
plug,
drain
plugs,
covers, has been
the thermostatairoroil relieved. sys-
any connections,
etc., in the compressor
the unit shock
and the air pressure
. .
Electrical Compressor Code. must
can and may be fatal. be qrounded equal in accordance motor main with the National ground base to the unit through Code. on the control. bemay Electrical conductor base. the starter
unit must jumper
A ground be used motors
to the size of the equipment
to connect must remain
the compressor qrounded with
Fan
to the
base Electrical
mounting .
q
panel
in accordance switch,
the National
Open
main
disconnect
tag and lockout unit from its power
before
working
Disconnect fore start working
the compressor on the unit
source,
tag and lockout controlled and
this
machine
is automatically
at any time.
13-l Q-614
Page 4
! A
Failure to observe Stop the unit these notices
WARNING
could
result
in damage
to equipment. the compressor are
if any repairs
or adjustments
on or around
required. Disconnect
fore start working at any
the compressor
on the time. unit -
unit from
this machine
its power
source,
tag
and
lockout and
bemay
is automatically
controlled
An
Excess
Flow
Valve inside
should diameter. maximum
be on all compressed (OSHA pressure Regulation, values
air supply Section

shown
hoses
ex-
ceeding
1/2 inch
1926.302)
Do not exceed
Do not operate
the rated
unit
on the nameplate.
if safety
devices
devices.
are not operating
properly.
Check
peri-
odically.
Never
bypass
safety
13-? 0-514
Page 5
DECALS
DISCHARG[ AIR USED FOR P4EATHllf0 WILL CAUSE SEV[RE INWY OR OSATH CONMT flLTRATIOH SPECIALIST fOR ~lTION1l. flLTRATIOH ANO TREATMENT EOUIPU04T TO MEET HEALTH AND MF[TY REOUATICfl$. -
,IR ANO OIL UNDER PRESSUR[

IILL CAUSf S[VCRE PERSONAI NJURY OR DEATH. HUTDOWY4 COUPRCSSOR AND ELIEVE SYSTEM Or ALL RESSURE BEFORE REMOVING ALVES. CAPS, PLUGS. ITT INGS.BOLTS AND FILTERS
206 EAQ077
212EAQ077
HIGH VOLTAGE, ROTATING MACH IPKRY. AIR AND OIL UNDER PRESSURE. IMPROPER MODIFICATION OF EQUIPMENT WILL CAUSE SEVERE PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH.
DO UNIT
NOT MODIFY
WITHOUT PERMISSION MANUFACTURER.
WRITTEN FROM
218 EAQ077
ROTATING MACHINCRY CAN CAUX INJURY OR DEATH. KEEP ALL GUARDS AND SAFETY OEVICES IN PLACE. mm
LSSIT CAN AUTOMATICALLY FSSTJRT. CAN CAUSE PERSONA IIIJMY OR CSATH. IO(OW MOIX Of OPERATION GEFORE WO~lKO ON OR NENl MACHIK THf
211 EAQ077
207 EAQ077
I3-10-614
Page 6
DECALS
ELECTRICAL SHOCK FROM IMPROPER GROUNOING CAN CAUSE INJURY OR DEATH. GROUND UNIT AND RELATED
EQUIPMENT ACCOROING TO NATIONAL ELECTRIC COOE AND LOCAL REGULATIONS.
216 EAQ077
ELECTRICAL SHOCK CAN CAUSC INJJRY OR DEATH. DISCONNECT ALL CIRCUITS BEFORE WORKING ON THIS CONTROL. SEE WIRING DIAGRAM.
DEATH. INSPECT OIL RESERVOIR FOR CRACKSAT LEAST ANNUALLY.

OR
\ U
I
222 EAQ077
217 EAQ077
ELECTRICAL ARCING CAN CAUSE A FIRE WNEN UNIT IS MOUNTED ON A COM8UST18LE SURFACE RESULTING IN PERSONAL INJURY OR PROPERTY DAMAGE. U41T MUST B[ MOUNTED ON A FLOOR PLATE EXTENDINQ ON ALL SIOES. SEE INSTALLATION DRAWING FOR PROPIR DIMENSIONS.
MACHINE DAMAOE OR IMJJRY CAN OCCUR DUE TO IMPROPER LIFTING. DO NOT LIFT MACHINE WITH THE MOTOR EYEBOLT.
@ QI
-1
208 EAQ077
221 EAQ077
13-:0-614
Psl&?7
SECTION 2 INSTALLATION
GENERAL On receipt of the unit, check for any damage that may have been incurred during transit. Report any damage or missing parts as soon as possible. LOCATION The compressor should be installed, whenever possible, in a clean, welllighted, wellventiIated area with ample space all around for maintenance, Select a location that provides a cool, clean, dry source of air. In some cases it may be necessary to install the air filter at some distance from the compressor to obtain proper air supply,
Both the aircooled and watercooled units require cooling air as well as air to the compressor inlet, Proper ventilation MUST be provided; hot air must be exhausted from the compressor operating area. Ducting air in and/or out will be required when using the quiet
I
Do not electric weld sor or base. bearings
on the comprescan be damaged
L&-l
QCAUTION
Lift compressor not use other
compressor piping as lifting or
LIFTING UNIT Proper lifting and/or transporting methods must be used to prevent damage. Lifting slots are provided in the base for towmotor use. The unit may also be moved into location by rolling on bars.
enclosure. A typical inletoutlet is shown in FIGURE 21.
air flow arrangement
unit by base only. Do such as motor, places

discharge points. manifold
~ -.. DANGER The eyebolts

or lugs provided on the motor are for lifting the motor only and should not be used to lift any additional weight. All eyebolts must be securely tightened. When lifting the motor the lining angle must not exceed 15 degrees. Failure to observe this warning may result in damage to equipment or personal injury.
AirCooled Units A combination oil/aftercooler is supplied as standard equipment on all air-cooled units. The air-cooled unit with the standard enclosure requires sufficient flow, FIGURE 22, for the compressor oil/aftercooling system and for electric motor cooling. Air is drawn into the unit at the motor side of the enclosure and is exhausted at the oil cooler side. Do not block the air flow to and from the unit. Allow three and onehalf (31/2) feet (1, 1 M) to the nearest obstruction on the starter end and control box end of the unit. Allow three (3) feet (.9 M) to the nearest obstruction above and on other sides of unit, For continuous efficiency, oil cooler cores must be periodically cleaned with either vacuum or compressed air. If wet cleaning is required, shield motor and spray on a mild soap solution and flush with clean water.
LOUVERED WINDOW ,. .5, :., , .- ..>,
EXHAUST
FAN
LOUVERED wINOOW
.,.
II
DANGER
Compressor, airloil reservoir, separation chamber and all piping and tubduring ing may beat high temperature
and after operation.
A751 19
FIGURE 2-1 - TYPICAL COMPRESSOR ROOM
13-10--614
Page 8
c==
Minimum
Air Flow For Compression
And Cooling Cubic Feet/Minute
DOMESTIC
(CFM)
Water
OIL RESERVOIR DRAIN The oil drain is piped from the bottom of the reservoir to the side of the frame, This drain is approximately 4.50 inches (115 mm) above the floor level, If this is not sufficient to conveniently drain the oil some other methods of providing drain are: 1. Elevate the compressor unit on a suitable structure to obtain the desired drain height
Air Cooled
Air Cooled
HP 200 250 300
Package
Module
Cooled Package
-E_E-Ei
INTERNATIONAL (M3/MIN) Air Cooled Package 806 1,016 1,072 Air Cooled Module 580 736 736 Water Cooled Package 226 280 337 2.
AIR FLOW CHART FIGURE 2-2 -
HP 150 186 224
If the compressor unit base is raised above floor level, the space between the floor and the base bottom must be closed with solid material all around to prevent recirculation of hot air from the oil cooler end and over temperature operation.
80 F (27 C) Inlet Air
Construct an oil sump or trough below the floor level and pump or bail the drained oil, Pump oil from the reservoir filler opening or drain to a container.
3.
~WARNING
For aluminum oil coolers, do not use any cleaning solution that is not compatible with aluminum. Use of improper solution may result in damage to the cooler.
ENCLOSURE The compressor, electric motor, oil cooler and aftercooler are mounted inside the enclosure. Service doors are provided for maintenance access. Be sure to allow enough space around the unit for the doors to open completely.
~WARNING
Ducting will be required on air cooled quiet enclosure machines.
WaterCooled Units The water-cooled unit with the standard enclosure requires sufficient air flow, FIGURE 22, page 9, for electric motor cooling. Air is drawn into the unit at the top of the enclosure and is exhausted at the motor side, Do not block air flow to and from unit. Allow three and onehalf (3-1/2) feet (1.1 M) to the nearest obstruction on the starter end and control box side of the unit. Allow three (3) feet (.9 M) to the nearest obstruction above and on other sides of the unit, FOUNDATION The GD Rotary Screw compressor requires no special foundation, but should be mounted on a smooth, solid surface. Whenever possible install the unit near level. Temporary installation may be made at a maximum 10 angle lengthwise or 10 sidewise. Mounting bolts are not normally required. However, installation conditions such as piping rigidity, angle of tilt, or danger of shifting from outside vibration or moving vehicles may require the use of mounting bolts and shims to provide uniform support for the base.
Any of the enclosure doors may be removed by opening the door and lifting it up slightly to disengage the hinges.
DANGER
Do not operate the compressor with the fan and coupling guard removed. Exposed fan and belts may cause injury to personnel.
INSTALLATION FOR COLD TION (FIGURE 23, page 10) that the unit be installed inside heated to temperatures above
WEATHER OPERA It is recommended a shelter that will be freezing (32F, OC).
I3-10-6I4
Page 9
F2YmfkTpLyw0
8 FT. (2.4!4) PLYWOOD FENCE
VKLLMAN RADIANT 2-ELOW4T HfATCR (OR EOUAL) RH400 WITH Q) RH45J32 ELfMENTS - 2 REOD. 32m wATTs EAcH +.: L)
OsOl L
WKLLMW RMIANT 2-EL[MENT HEATER (OR E12UA.) RH7cC0 WITH Q) RH7S02 ELLMfNTS - Z REOD 6ZO0 WATTS EACH
u
I
/
OIL COOLER
\
\ AWAY FROM PREVAILING WINOS
RF-PI/
I 1 r I
ELEVATION VIEW
WEATHER INSTALLATION
FIGURE24
COLD
This will eliminate many of the problems associated units in cold climates where freezing with operating
Extreme
Cold Weather
Operation
(Down To 40
F,
-40c)
In addition to the above, the following should be provided: 1. It will be necessary to provide shutters or to block off part of the cooler in some manner since the cooler is greatly oversized for operation in these low temperatures. Since shutters are not provided as a factory option, blocklng off a portion of the cooler with plywood should be satisfactory. Auto operation should not be used in extreme environments. Some means of providing heat during shutdown should be provided. There are various methods to accomplish this, but since openings are not provided for sump heaters, the use of radiant heaters is recommended. The heaters should be sized to provide at leasta+10 F (1 2C) environment for coolers, motor and sump. FIGURE 23, shows how these might be located in a typical installation and sizes required.
rain, drifting snow, freezing condensate temperatures are encountered..
and bitter cold
Refer to Engineering Data Sheet 139-411 for the advantages of using the heat recovered from rotary compressors. This heat recovery could easily pay for an adequate shelter for the unit.
When an outside installation must be made, the precautions required will depend on the severity of the environment. The following are general guidelines for outside installations: Cold Weather
2. 3.
(Down To +1 OF, 12C)
1.
Be sure all drains, traps, and control lines, including pressure transducer lines are heated to avoid freezing of condensate. Heat tape with thermostat control is generally satisfactory for this purpose and can be obtained at various local plumbing or hardware outlets at nominal cost, If an air-cooled aftercooler is to be used, provisions to bypass the aftercooler must be made, Since cold air contains very little moisture, successful operation can be achieved without the af tercooler. Provide at least some simple shelter such asa plywood windbreak to protect against drifting snow. Use only Gardner Denver@ AEONW 9000 SP lubricant. Monitor the unit carefully during start-up and operation to be sure it is functioning normally. Specify NEMA 4 enclosure for electrical devices.
2.
3,
Remember unsheltered (outside) installations should be avoided where possible. Installation next to a heated building where enough heat can be used to keep the compressor room above freezing will save many complications in the operation and installation of the unit. Refer to Engineering Data Sheet 139+11, available from an authorized Gardner Denver distributor, for the advantages of using the heat recovered from rotary compressors. This heat recovery could easily pay for an adequate shelter for the unit, AUXILIARY AIR RECEIVER -An auxiliary air receiver is not required if the piping system is large and provides
4.
5.
6.
13-10-614
Page 10
Length of Inlet Line OtolOFeet 10t017Feet 17t038Feet (Oto3
Diameter of Pipe Size
Meters) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Same as Compressor Inlet Opening (3t05 Meters) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . One Size Larger Than Inlet Opening (5toll.5 Meters). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Two Sizes Larger Than Inlet Opening
FIGURE
2-4
INLET
LINE
LENGTHS
sufficient storage capacity to prevent rapid cycling. When used, an air receiver should be of adequate size, provided with a relief valve of proper setting, a pressure gauge and a means of draining condensate. MOISTURE SEPARATO~RAP Since the unit is equipped with a builtin aftercooler, a combination moisture separator and trap is furnished with the unit. A means of draining condensate will need to be provided for. CONTROL PIPING Control piping is not necessary since the ElectraScrew@ unit is factory wired and piped for the control system specified. INLET LINE Where an inlet line is used between the air filter and the compressor, it must be thoroughly
cleaned on the inside to prevent dirt or scale from entering the compressor. If welded construction is used, the line must be shot blasted and cleaned to remove welding scale. In either case, the inlet line must be coated internally by galvanizing or painting with a moisture and oilproof sealing lacquer. Up to ten (10) feet (3 meters) in length, the inlet line should be the full size of the inlet opening on the compressor, If an extralong line is necessary, the pipe size should be increased according to Inlet Line Length Chart FIGURE 2-4. Accessibility for inlet air filter servicing must be considered when relocating the filters from the unit to a remote location.
HEAT EXCHANGER
(DOMESTIC) Approx.
HP 200 HP
250
Model EAUSPG EAUSQG EAUSRG
h
18.8 23.9 29.1
Water Temperature
to Heat Exchanger
Maximum Water Flow
60 F.
70 F. 23,5 29.9 36.3
800 F. 31.3 39.8 48.5
90 F. 47.0 59.8 72.7
GPM
Water Pressure Drop @ 90 F Water Temp. Psl 1.1 1.6 2.1
110 110 110
HP
300 HP
HEAT EXCHANGER
(INTERNATIONAL) Approx. Water Press. Drop @ 32 C. Water Temp. Bar Less than .15 Bar for any flow rate shown in the table
Water Temperature to Heat Exchanger Liters/Second I , I Kw 150 KW 186KW 224 KW I Model EAUSPH EAUSQH EAUSRH
Maximum Water Flow 32 3.0 3.8 4.6 C.
16 C, 1.2 1.5 1.8
21
c.
27 2.0 2.5 3.1
C.
us
7.0 7.0 7.0
1.5 1.9 2.3
FIGURE
2-5-
HEAT
EXCHANGER
(OIL COOLER)
APPROXIMATE
WATER
FLOW
12-:0-61~
Ffage 11
AFTERCOOLER
(DOMESTIC)
Approx, Water Pressure Drop @ 90 F Water Temp.
Water
Temperature to Heat Exchanger Gallons/minute 70 F. 805 F. 90 F.
Maximum Water Flow
HP
Model
60 F.
GPM 110 110
Psl
Less than 1 PSI
200 HP 250 HP 300 HP
EAUSPG EAUSQG EAUSRG
3.0 3.8 4.6
3.7 4.8 5.8
5.0 6.4 7.7
7.5 9.5 11.6
for any flow rate shown in the table.
110
AFTERCOOLER
(INTERNATIONAL) Approx. Water Press. Drop @ 32 C. Water

Temp. Bar
Water Temperature to Heat Exchanger Liters/Second KW

150KW
Model
EAUSPH
16 C.
0.2
21
0.2
c.
27
0.3
C.
32 C. 0.5 0.6 0.7
Maximum Water Flow us 7.0 7.0 7.0
Less than .1 Bar

for any flow rate
186 KW
224 KW
EAUSQH EAUSRH
0.2 0.3
0.3 0.4
0.4 0.5
shown in the table.
FIGURE
2-6
A~ERCOOLER
APPROXIMATE
WATER
FLOW
DISCHARGE SERVICE L! NE The discharge seivice line connection on both water-cooled and air-cooled units is made at the right hand corner of the unit, viewed from the opposite end from control panel side. When manifolding two or more rotary screw units on the same line, each unit is isolated by the check valve in the unit discharge line. If a rotary screw unit is manifolded to another compressor, be sure the other compressor has a check valve in the line between the machine and the manifold. If a rotary screw and a reciprocating compressor are manifolded together, an air receiver must be located between the two units,
is fitted with a muffler for operation indoors. If the installation requires, the muffler may be removed and the blowdown valve piped to the outside with a pipe size the same as the blowdown valve outlet connection. WATER PIPING (Water-Cooled Heat Exchanger Models Only) On machines equipped with water cooled heat exchangers, the water inlet and outlet connections are located in the unit base flange.
~WARhUNG
It is mandatory that any water cooled unit be installed in a shelter heated to temperatures above freezing (32 F.,
~ DANGER
Discharge air used cause severe injury for breathing or death. will
0 c).
The water source should be capable of supplying up to the maximum flow shown in FIGURE 25, page 11, and FIGURE 2-6, above, at a minimum pressure of 40 psig (2.8 Bars); maximum allowable water pressure is 150 psig (10.3 Bars). The water flow rates shown are approximate and a guide to sizing piping, cooling tower and other water system equipment,
Consult filtration specialists for additional filtration and treatment equipment to meet health and safety standards.
BLOWDOWN
VALVE PIPING The blowdown
valve
13-~0-614
Page 12
011 I
CIL
OIL N i
CII. IYJT
C L ,)J
C76683
C76682
(OPTIONAL)
WATER CONTROL
VALVE AND WATER SHUTOFF VALVE MUST BE ORDERED
SEPARATELY.
FIGURE
2-7
SERIES
PIPING
FIGURE
2-6
PARALLEL
PIPING
The heat exchanger system is designed to operate with water inlet temperatures from 60= to 90 F (16 to 32 C) and a water outlet temperature not to exceed 11OF (43 C), If water cooler than 60 F is used, high water outlet temperatures (over 110 F, 43 C) will be experienced along with shortened heat exchanger life caused by tube fouling and corrosion. If waterwarmerthan 90 F (32 C) is used, higher compressor oil inlet temperatures and high water usage will result. Most water systems will require control of impurities: filtration, softening or other treatment. See Compressor Oil Cooler WaterCooled Heat Exchanged for more information on the water system. SERIES PIPING (FIGURE 27) Water flow must be through aftercooler first for effective cooling of discharge air and is so piped on the standard water cooled unit. PARALLEL PIPING (FIGURE 2-8) - A separate water control valve is required to control the discharge air temperature. If a remote (externally mounted) water cooled aftercooler is piped in parallel with the heat exchanger, provide a separate water control valve for the aftercooler and pipe separate inlet water lines to both the aftercooler and heat exchanger, The water control valve is to be adjusted to maintain oil out of the heat exchanger within the 140 to 150 F (60 to 66 C) range regardless of inlet water flow or temperature as long asa minimum flow foragiventemperature is met (FIGURE 2-5, page 11, and FIGURE 2-6, page 12. See Section 5, page 30, for adjustment instructions and maximum allowable lubricant temperature.
ELECTRICAL WIRING - Standard Units The Electra-Saver@ compressor is factory wired for all starter to motor and control connections for the voltage specified on the order. It is necessary only to connect the unit starter to the correct power supply. The standard unit
is supplied with an open dripproof motor, a NEMA 12 starter and control enclosure. See Location paragraph, page 8, for distance to the nearest obstruction on starter and control box sides of the unit. Lower operating voltages (200/208) require that the unit starter be remote mounted since the starter is too large to be mounted within the control enclosure. If not supplied with the compressor unit, the starter is to be a size 6 full voltage nonreversing type in NEMA (CEMA) enclosure suitable for the environment, with two (2) rejection type control circuit fuses (size according to motor starter manufacturers standard), a 200 (208) volt coil, and three (3) overload heaters for 200 (208) volt 100 HP (75 KW), 1,15 service factor motor. The overload heaters are to be selected according to starter manufacturers tables based on motor nameplate full load amperage.
WARNING
Electrical shock can cause injury or death. Open main disconnect switch, tag and lockout before working on starter/control box.
13-10-514
Page13
GROUNDING Equipment must be grounded in accordance with Table 25095 of the National Electrical Code.
2. 3. 4. 5.
Disconnect,
tag and lockout the unit from the pow-
er supply.
Remove grease. the relief plug and free hole of hardened
! A WARNING
Failure to properly ground the compressor package could result in controller malfunction.
Wipe lubrication fitting clean and add grease with a handoperated grease gun, Leave the relief plug temporarily off. Reconnect the unit and run for about 20 minutes to expell the excess grease, Stop the unit.
Restart Replace the relief plug.
6, 7.
the unit.
MOTOR LUBRICATION Long time satisfactory operation of an electric motor depends in large measure on proper lubrication of the bearings. The following charts show recommended grease qualities and regressing intervals for ball bearing motors. For additional information refer to the motor manufacturers instructions. The following procedure should be used in regressing: 1. Stop the unit.
~wARNiNG
Rotating machinery can cause injury or death. Open main disconnect, tag and lockout power supply to starter before working on the electric motor.
ELECTRIC
MOTOR GREASE
RECOMMENDATIONS
(-30
to 50 C)
MANUFACTURER CHEVRON SHELL EXXON EXXON
TRADE NAME SRI #2 DOLIUM R UNIREX #2 POl_YREX
ELECTRIC
MOTOR REGRESSING
INTERVAL
Type of Service
Typical
Examples
Rating 150 HP(112KW)
Relubrication Interval 18 Months 12 Months
Standard
One or Two-Shift
Operation Above 150 HP (112 KW) 150 HP(112KW) I I
9 Months 6 Months 4 Months 2 Months
Severe
Continuous
Operation Above 150 HP (112 KW) 150 HP(112KW)
I
I
Very Severe
Dirty Locations, High Ambient Temperature
Above 150 HP (112 KW)
13-10-614
Page 14
SECTION 3 STARTING & OPERATING
PROCEDURES
operating on load. DO NOT DRAIN OIL TO CORRECT on the next loaded cycle or start, oil will
again fill the system operating level. and the gauge will indlcatethe
PRESTARTUP INSTRUCTIONS A new unit as received from the factory has been tested and then prepared for shipping only. Do not attempt to operate the unit until checked and serviced as follows: 1. Compressor Oil Check the oil level in the reservoir, Add oil only if the oil level gauge reads in the red ADD OIL range. Do not mix different type oils. The unit is shipped filled with Gardner Denver AEON ~ 9000 SP Lubricating Coolant which is suitable for the first 8000 hours under normal operating conditions. REPLACE OIL FILTER EVERY 1000 HOURS. 2.
Air FilterInspect the air filter to be sure it is clean and tightly assembled. Refer to Section 6, Air Filter, page 42, for complete servicing instructions, Be sure the inlet line, if used, is tight and clean. Coupling tightness. Check all bolts and cap screws See Section 7, page 44. for
3. 4.
Initial fill, or filling after a complete draining of the system, may show the oil level in the yellow EXCESS OIL range. After start-up, the oil will fall into the green operating range as system components are filled. If necessary, add oil to bring the level to the top of the green range as read when the unit is operating at full load and normal pressure. See FIGUR<55, page 35.
Piping Refer to Section 2, installation, page 8, and make sure piping meets all recommendations. Electrical Check the wiring diagrams furnished with the unit to be sure it is properly wired. See FIGURE 410 thru FIGURE 413, pages 26 thru 29, for general wiring diagrams and Section 2, page 8 for installation instructions, Grounding Equipment must be properly grounded according ~o Table 25095 of the National Electrical Code,
5.
6.
NOTICE
Regular maintenance and replacement at required intervals of the oil filter, air filter and airoil separator is necessary to achieve maximum service and extended drain intervals of AEONT 9000 SP synthetic lubricant. Use only genuine Gardner Denver filters designed and specified for this compressor.
! A WARNING
Failure to properly ground the compressor package could result in controller malfunction.
7.
~ . DANGER
Before removing the oil filler plug, always stop the unit and release air pressure, tag and lockout the power
supply release connect personal to the injury the starter. or power may Failure properly result to disin pressure
Rotation Check for correct motor rotation using JOG MODE. Compressor drive shaft rotation must be clockwise standing facing the compressor coupling. Check the rotation on the fan motors. Vent fan motors should blow into the package. Air cooled cooling fan should blow through the cooler,
! A
WARNING
or death.
During unloaded operation and after shutdown, the system will partially drain back into the oil reservoir and the oil level may read higher than when
Operation with incorrect motor rotation can damage equipment and cause oil eruption from the compressor inlet. When checking motor rotation, induce minimum rotation (less than one revolution if possible). Never allow motor to reach full speed.
Fage 15
8.
System Pressure Set the controls to the desired load pressure. DO NOT EXCEED THE MAXIMUM OPERATING PRESSURE ON THE COMPRESSOR NAMEPLATE. See Controller Manual 139/10647 for procedure.
Check all screws and latches for tightness. sure doors are closed and latched. STARTING THE UNITObserve procedures. the following
Be
starting
Unit Cold If the unit is a water--cooled heat exchanger model, open any manual water inlet valves wide
~WARNING
Operation at excessive discharge air pressure can cause personal injury or damage to equipment. Do not adjust air pressure above the full discharge
the maximum stamped on the unit nameplate.
open. Star-t the unit by pushing either the CONSTANT RUN button or one of the AUTO buttons. Since the unit is equipped pressure maintain with a minimum (65 psig, 4,5 Bars) to discharge valve, no special procedure unit reservoir pressure is required. period is required. exchanger model,
open any manual water inlet valves wide open. Start the unit by pushing either the CONSTANT RUN button or one of the AUTO buttons, DAILY CHECK
Schedule,
Unit Hot No warmup is a watercooled heat
if the unit
- Refer page 45,
to Section
8, Maintenance
9.
Operating information Enclosure
Mode Refer to Section 4 for detailed

on the control system. Check for damaged panels or doors.
10.
butSTOPPING THE UNIT - Press STOP-RESET ton. The oil reservoir will automatically blow down as the motor stops. If the unit is a water-cooled heat exchanger type, close any manual water inlet valves.
13-10-614
P?_q3 1s
SECTION 4
CONTROLS & INSTRUMENTATION
justed for the compressor for specific applications. package, but allows tuning
GENERAL DESCRIPTION - The Gardner Denver rotary screw compressor is prewired with all controls, motor, and starter for the voltage and horsepower at the time of ordering. It is necessary only to connect the compressor unit to the correct power supply and to the shop air line (and to the appropriate water supply if water cooled). A standard compressor unit consists of the compressor, oil reservoir, oil cooling system and filter, motor type as specified, NEMA 12 stafler / control box, and control components as described below. AUTO SENTRYS OPERATION
Relief Valve A pressure relief valve(s) is (are) installed in the final discharge line and set to approximately 1201250/. of the units full load operating presPeriodic sure for protection against overpressure. checks should be made to ensure its (their) operation. The relief valve should be tested for proper operation at least once every year. To test the relief valve, raise the system operating pressure to 750/. of the relief valve set pressure and manually open the valve with the hand lever. Hold the valve open for a few seconds and allow it to snap shut.
Operation of the Auto Sentry is dependent on selection of an operating mode from the controller keypad. Prior to starting, the [STOP/RESET] key must be pressed to place the controller into its READY state (as indicated on the display). Compressor operation may then be started by pressing an operating mode key. AUTOMATIC is the most commonly selected mode of operation, as it will operate the compressor unit automatically in the most efficient manner for the demand of the air system. Once operating, the mode may be changed at any time by pressing a key, and the selected mode will be displayed in the lower right corner of the message window.
Press the [STOP/RESETl compressor under normal Detailed instructions key at any time to stop the conditions.
~WARNING
When the relief valve opens, a stream of high velocity air is released, resulting in a high noise level and possible
discharge er debris. protection charge of accumulated Always and stand wear clear dirt eye or othand ear dis-
of the
for the controller are found in the
valve
port when testing to prevent injury.
the
relief
manual 13-9/1 O-647.
~wARNING
~cAuTiON
Never paint, lubricate or alter a relief valve. Do not plug vent or restrict discharge.
CONTROL
DEVICES
~wARNING
Operation of unit with improper relief pervalve setting can result in severe
sonal Insure injury or machine damage.
Controller -This compressor unit features the AUTO SENTRY@ controller, which integrates all the control functions under microprocessor control. Its functions include safety and shutdown, compressor regulation, operator control, and advisory/maintenance indicators. The keypad and display provide the operator with a logical and easily operated control of the compressor and indication of its condition. The controller is factory ad-
stalled
set and maintained.

properly
valves
are
in-
13-10-614
Page 17
INLET /--
VALVE
r
\
BLOWDOWN
-CHECK
LINE VALVE
FICE BLOW DOWN VALVE
SOLENOID
VALVE SWITCH
VACUUM -
TRANSMJCER TRANSMJCER
L]
/
CHECK VALVE
/
/
[ 205 EAU797-A (Ref. Drawing) JOR
MINIMUM PRESSURE CHECK VALVE \
FIGURE
4-1
SCHEMATIC
TUBING
DIAGRAM
Blowdown Valve (FIGURE 42) This valve normally is used forcontro! functions, but also serves to relieve reservoir pressure following a shutdown. See description under Air control Components, page 20, for additional information. Oil Level Gauge (FIGURE 1-6, Section 1, page 3) This gauge is located on the oil reservoir and indicates the oil level. Discharge Pressure/Check Valve Minimum (FIGURE 4-3) - An internal spring-loaded minimum pressure valve is used in the final discharge line to provide a positive pressure on the coolant system of the compressor even if the air service valve is fully open to atmospheric pressure. This valve also functions as a check valve to prevent back flow of air from the shop air line when the unit stops, unloads, or is shut down. The valve incorporates an orifice which, when air is flowing through it, maintains pressure in the oil reservoir. A springloaded piston valve senses air pressure on the upstream (reservoir) side of the valve. When the system pressure rises, the spring is overridden and the valve opens to full porting. The valve does not require maintenance or adjustment. If the valve fails to function, check the valve stem O-
//
/
FIGURE 4-2BLOWDOWN VALVE
13-10-614
Page18
MAIN SPRING
The Inlet valve restricts the inlet to control delivery and closes to unload the compressor. At shutdown, the inlet valve closes to prevent the back flow of air. The inlet valve position is controlled by air pressure in its piston cylinder, which is controlled by the AUTO SENTRY% through solenoid valves IVC and IVO. As pressure to the piston is increased, the valve closes to restrict air flow and compressor delivery. Solenoid
position of
CV SPRING
Cv As
Valves IVC and

the inlet valve
IVO in
These to
valves signals
control from
response
FIGURE
4-3-
MINIMUM
DISCHARGE
PRESSURE/
CHECK
VALVE
the AUTO SENTRYS. With both valves deenergized, the normally open IVC valve allows control pressure to the inlet piston to close the valve. If IVC only is energized, the inlet valve is held in its current position. If both valves are energized, control pressure is relieved from the inlet piston to allow the valve to open. or valve Pressure Regulator The pressure regulator is used The
ring for sealing, valve orifices for restriction, and valve seat for burrs and dirt. Inlet Valve (FIGURE
to supply a constant and low control pressure to prevent damage to the inlet valve from slamming. regulator should be set for 25-30 psig,
1-4 page 2, and FIGURE 4-4)
r, TO
VACUUM SWITCH
BLOWDOWN LINE
FROM AIR
FILTERS
CHECK
VALVE
Anrkn
INLET
W,,TJe
/~
VALVE
II
II
II II
ORIFICE
P URGE
VALVE
RISERVOIR ~ TOWER
h --!l!i!l!i :
TO m
IrE
<
II
BLOW --
DOWN
VALVE
SOLENOID
VALVE
j RESERVOIR TOWER :,J:SSURJ CHECK VALVE ~
F
\
SOLENOID
VALVE
203 EAU797-A (Ref. Drawing)
LRE,ij>>;;F;i;;;LAToR TO TRANSDUCER
FIGURE 44-
INLET VALVE
13-?0-614
Page 19
to prevent loaded starts, monltoroil itor the condition of the separator.
pressure, and mon-
Air Filter Vacuum Switch - This switch is used to monitor air filter condition and alert the user if the filter requires sewice or replacement. Discharge Thermistor - This sensor is located directly in the compressor discharge. Its signal is used to monitor compressor temperature and shut down the compressor if a coolant problem is detected. Reservoir Thermistor This sensor is located in the reservoir / separator housing and is used to monitor temperature and shutdown the compressor if temperature problems occur at the separator. Optional Switches - The AUTO SENTRY@ controller has one additional input available for dealer or user installed optional shutdown switches. If the contact is opened, the compressor will be shutdown, and will display a message. Emergency Stop Pushbutton This is a maintained pushbutton, and removes power from the controller outputs regardless of controller status. It is located on the upper section of the panel, next to the keypad. This should be used for emergency purposes onlyuse the keypad [STOP/RESET] for normal controlled stopping.
FIGURE
4-5
SHUITLE
VALVE
Shuttle Valve (FIGURE 45) Also known as a double check valve, the shuttle valve is a device which will take two (2) supply signals and allow the one with the highest pressure to pass through. The shuttle valve is used to provide control air pressure from either the
reservoir or plant air system, ent operating conditions. as required during differ-
Purge Air Valve-The purge valve isanormallyclosed two-way air actuated valve that admits purge air from the final discharge manifold to the compressor to counteract the oil knock that occurs in oilflooded rotary screw compressors when they are completely unloaded with pressure in the oil reservoir. This valve is controlled by the same control pressure which controls the inlet valve. Blowdown Valve (FIGURE 41, page 18) The blowdown valve is a two-way solenoid valve which is piped into the air/oil reservoir outlet ahead of the minimum pressure valve. When the solenoid is de-energized, the valve opens and the coolant system is blown down. When the solenoid is energized, the valve closes to allow the coolant system to pressurize. A control air check valve is provided to ensure that the inlet valve is closed during blowdown. System Pressure Transducer This transducer is connected after the minimum pressure valve. It converts the pressure in the plant air system into an electrical signal for use by the AUTO SENTRY@ controller for modulation and control. Reservoir Pressure Transducer This transducer is connected to the coolant system. Its signal is used
I
nect and
~wARNING
Automatic restarting or electrical shock can cause injury or death. Open, tag and lockout main disconany other circuits before
servicing
the unit.
COMPRESSOR
CAPACITY
CONTROL
The capacity of the compressor is controlled by the action of the Turn Valve and the Compressor Inlet Valve. The turn valve controls compressor delive~ to match demands of 400/. to 100% of the compressors maximum capacity. The inlet valve throttles to control compressor delivery to match demands of O% to 407. of the compressors maximum capacity.
13-10-6I4
Page 20
Example with normal setting of 100 P.SIG:
Compressor Delivery Full Capacity 70% Capacity 4070 Capacity 30/0 Capacity 200/0 Capacity 070 Capacity
Inlet Valve Open Open Open Closing Closing Closed
Turn Valve Closed 50% Open Full Open Full Open Full Open Full Open
Jischarge Manifold Pressure 100 100 100 103 103 103
ders are adjusting screws which limit the travel of the actuator. When looking at the rear of the compressor, the adjusting screw on the right on the compressor adjusts the fully closed (full load) position of the valve. The full load position of the actuator may be checked by removing the adjusting screw at the unloaded end of the actuator (left side of the compressor) and using a rod to push the pistons to the full load position. The rod must be clean and free of burrs and scale. Take care not to scrape the cylinder walls when moving the pistons. Sofenoid Vafves TVC and TVO These valves control position of the turn valve in response to signals from the AUTO SENTRY3 controller. With both valves deenergized, equal pressure is supplied to both sides of the actuator to hold it in its current position. ff TVC only is energized, the right side of the turn valve actuator is exhausted to the compressor inlet cavity, causing the turn valve to move towards the full load position. If TVO only is energized, the left side of the turn vafve actuator is exhausted to the compressor inlet cavity, causing the turn valve to move towards the unload position. Control Transformer This changes the incoming power voltage to 110-120 volts for use by all unit control devices. Two ~rimaw fuses and one secondarv fuse are provided. Refer to adjacent labeling for re: placement information.
Turn Valve - The turn valve is a helical valve which, when rotated, opens and closes a series of ports cast into the compressor cylinder. When these ports are open, they direct some of the air which would otherwise be compressed back to the inlet, reducing both capacity and power consumption. Turn Valve Actuator (FIGURE 46) The turn valve actuator is a rotary rack and pinion device which positions the turn valve according to system demand. Filtered oil from the reservoir is directed to the outboard ends of the two actuating cylinders to move the rack and rotate the valve, Located on the end of the cylin-
SOLENOID VALVE TVO
SOLENOID VALVE TVC-
FIGLIFiE
4-6
TURN
VALVE
ACTUATOR
(SECTIONED)
13-!
O-+14
Page
21
Terminal Strip This provides connections for all 11O120 volt devices not contained within the enclosure. Fan Starter The starter is used to provide control and overload protection for the fan. Overload heaters should be selected and adjusted based on the motor nameplate amps and the instructions located inside the cover of the electrical enclosure. The starter must be present even for packages without a local fan.
Main Starter This starter is used to provide control and overload protection for the main drive motor. Full voltage starters employ a single contactor; overload heaters should be selected and adjusted based on the motor nameplate amps and the instructions located inside the cover of the enclosure. Wye-delta starters employ three contractors which are controlled sequentially to provide low current starting. For wyedelta starters, the motor nameplate amps must be first multiplied by 0,577 before using the heater table.
BLOWT)OWN LINE>
/-_ cHECKVALVE~
SOLENOIDALVEBDVV SOLENOIDALVE.IVO V SOLENOIDALVEVJCV CHECK VALVE PRESSURE REGULATOR SHUTTLE ALVE V
N
B B
ORIFICE B 1 D -RESERVOIR PRESSURE TRANSDUCER <AIR FILTER VACUUM SWITCH
A. B. c. D. D
FULL OIL PRESSURE fULL AIR PRESSURE ( CONTROL AIR PRESSURE 15-20 PSI) OR ATMOSPHERICPRESSURE EXHAUSTING
h SERVICE & VALVE
A v { MINIMUM PRESSURE CHECKVALVE [
VALVE SOLENOID .TVC -
uEA
A / ;;;;flOID VALVE TURN VALVE ACTUATOR (SECTIONED) A 4J STATFILTER
II
206EAL1797-11 (Ref. Drawing)
FIGURE4-7 - CONTROLSCHEMATIC-COMPRESSORATFULLLOAD
w
I
-J?%
u u ->
2$ :>
13-10-614
Page24
BLOWDOWN VALVE_
/_ cHECK VALVE/--
ORIFICE B ~ SYSTEM PRESSURE TRANSDUCER
I
SOLENOIDALVEBDV V D SOLENOIDALVEIVO. V
SOLENOIDVALVE lVC\ CHECKVALVE PRESSLFK REGWATOR SHUTTLE VALVE
-RESERVOIR PRESSURE TRANSDUCER /-AIR FILTER VACUUM SWITCH
c
A, FULL OIL PRESSURE
B. FULL AIR PRESSURE C, CONTROL AIR PRESSURE 15-20 PSI) ( D. ATMOSPHERICPRESSURE EXHAUSTING OR [ D
JI
SERVICE VALVE
&
,+. [
MINIMUM PRESSURE CHECK VALVE D
c El!b
AIR INLET
PURGE VALVE J
VALVE CLOSED-
(n
ta
LElf
D D
SOLENOIDVALVE TVC-
208EAU797A (Ref. Drawing)
A STATFILTER
FIGURE4-9
- CONTROLSCHEMATIC-COMPRESSOR
FULLY UNLOADED-
LOW DEMAND MODESWITCHON
Ilw
I I
J-P--w+lll
THe#
13-10-614 Page26
1
IISID[ vIcw (DOOR or OPfN) BOX
@:
m:
3:: m
::
LEAD LOW
cONNfclt VOLIAGC
ON
fon
lwfLiC+fAO HIGH COHNICI
uorons VOITAG[ IOHS
CONNICT!ON$
RCAR
VICW
OF
DOOR I
1-
--l
202 EAU546-A (Ref. Drawing)
FIGURE 4-11 -
WIRING DIAGRAM - 202EAU546 (WYE DELTA, ES+ CONTROLLER,
AIR COOLED)
HI
H4
1
Ll
t%i---i 51
[U[R . . . .
52
F
c1 ~, 51 52 51 OvmoAD AIR flLT1fi BLOWDOW?I RELAY cuRRn21 VACUUM SWITCH 30 L[HOID VALV[ TRANSFORMER Ivc lVO Tvc THA lHS XDA KM WV
Tr
H!
H4
iFL
r, ..,,,.
..
.,...
,, M, A1
SIR,
CH7
LCOCIW cri-s A[V BDV
R[D
B1 AC
...
TRAusbuc[R A lllHAL DISC HAQO[) 1RAF15DUCCR u lRIsIRv OIR) IHCRUISIOR 1H[5[MVO16I B
Tvo -
7HERMIs IoB ICOLIPHCS50H1
r
9 !0 7HA A
---1
CT4 Cn -
u
.0,,710,0 ,,RlAl
co,,,, ,,0,,
,O,m
~-,,,,
5 ADwl c0t4f ROLLt R ron bA7t RCOOLf D. MODL. 6, Im UO1OR 13 NOT US[D OH WA ICRCOOLID UHII1 Wtl HOU1 CMCL03UES. UNITS wI1OU1 FAN HAV[ MO COMIKCT IOH 10 Ill, 112 & ITJ MOTC 7, Wll[)l A UAGIII TIC WATCR VALVE IS US CD, COM fAH HOIC n[cl VOL1, 10 T[f1241MAL5 LOM MOT 10 !8 L to. vALvc [xCCCD 10VA tOIL IS 120
Molt
FIGURE 4-12 - WIRING DIAGRAM - 205 EAU546 (WYE DELTA, ES+ CONTROLLER,
WATER COOLED)
ISID[
VIIW
Or OPCN1
BOX
IDOOR
m:
MfnOIMcv S1OP
,.,} Ills lHA
-&b-I
A
[-&
B
BJ
n
TM 4 11 12
LfAD
CONNCC1t LOW VOLIAC[
OU
FOR
lWf
LVf-lf HIGH
AD
MO1ORS
VOLIACf
CONU[C110M5 1! 14 r2 15 11
CON NICTIOIIS lb
w i
!21
1!
iii 78 56
izcl
Y
CII
C13
ELI
w 1
Hz
JJ
%,
R[AR VIIW Of 000R
Moron
T 3 0L2
j
rAM 10 Uo!on Mwv (01 10PIIO
,*,
10 MAL1 At 1
205 EAU546A (Ref. Drawing)
FIGURE 4-13-
WIRING DIAGRAM
- 205 EAU546 (WYE DELTA, ES+ CONTROLLER,
WATER COOLED)
SECTION 5 LUBRICATION OIL COOLER, OIL FILTER & SEPARATOR
COMPRESSOR OIL SYSTEM (FIGURE 51, page 31) cools the compressor, lubricates moving parts and seals internal clearances in the compression chamber. The oil inlet line is connected at the bottom of the oil reservoir. Air pressure in the oil reservoir forces oil through the oil cooler, thermostatic mixing valve, oil filter and into the compressor main oil gallery The oil passes through internal passages for lubrication, cooling and sealing. The air-oil mixture is then discharged to the oil reservoir where a large part of the entrained oil drops out of the air stream; the air then passes through the final oil separator where most of the remaining oil is removed. The separated oil is returned to the compressor and the air passes to the final discharge line.
~CAUTl
ON
maintenance Improper equipment with use of synthetic lubricants will damage equipment. Oil filter and oil separator change intervals remain the same as for AEON w 4000 See Maintenance Schedule, page 45.
HIGH TEMPERATURE OPERATION - Gardner Denver AEON 9000 SP lubricating coolant will operate at a sustained discharge temperature up to210 F (99C) when unusually high ambient air temperature is encountered.
RECOMMENDED LUBRICANT Gardner Denver compressors are factory filled with AEON lubricants. These lubricants are formulated to the highest quality standards and are factory authorized, tested and approved for use in rotary screw compressors. AEON lubricants are available through your authorized Gardner Denver compressor distributor.
~ L DANGER Air/oil under pressure will cause severe personal injury or death. Shut down compressor, relieve system of all pressure, disconnect, tag and lockout power supply to the starter before removing valves, caps, plugs, fittings, bolts, and filters.
OIL SPECIFICATIONS: EAU (Domestic and international) The factory fill compressor lubricant is Gardner Denver AEON N 9000 SP lubricating coolant which can be used for yearround operation. AEON m 9000 SP is a synthetic, extended life lubricant which can extend hJbricant change intervals up to 4 times that of a petroleum based lubricant, A lubricant analysis program for a periodic check lubricant quality and remaining life of can maximize the change intewal.
~WARNING
~cAuTION
Use of improper lubricants will cause damage to equipment. Do not mix different types of lubricants or use inferior lubricants. High temperature operation can cause damage to equipment or personal injury. Do not repeatedly restart the unit after high temperature stops operation. Find and correct the malfunction before resuming operation.
13-10-614
Page 30
E!
E
i r
DD
4---t
K
A Y
)-n
1
41
4 WI
MR Q
GG
,, u
. .
AA
)BB
)Cc
f
11111
tG
t *-
---+
*--*--*--J
\ll ~
--D
Itm
oL
AIRIOIL---O
(a (3
J
w
B C D [ F G II J K L M N P O -
MOTOR COMPRESSOR AIR FILTER OIL RESERVOIR AI RIOIL SEPARATOR MINIMUM DISC HARG[ PRf SSURE CHECK VALVE AfTERCOOLER OIL COOLIR ST ATfl LTIR OIL FILTER ELEMENT SEPARATOR TO CYLINOER OIL RETURN LINE CHECK VALVE PRESSUR[ RELIEF VALV[ PURGE AIR VALVE PNEUMATIC BLOWDOWN VALVE
-l-f
u
T-
ATER-
uvwxYzAA LIB -
cc DD EE ff GG -
SHUTTLE VALV[ PRESSURE REGULATOR SOLENOID VALVE IVC SOL INOID VALVE IVO FAN ANO MOTOR WAT[17 FLOW CONTROI VALVE MAGNETIC WAT[R SHUTOFF VAIV[ AIR FILTER VACUUM SWITCH SYSTEM PRESSURE TRANSOUCIR DISCHARGE PRESSUR[ TRANSDUCER TURN VALVE ACTUATOR SOLENOID VALVE TV OSOL ENIOO VALVE TVCBLOWOOWNLINE
210 EAU797-A
(Ref. Drawing)
FIGURE 5-1
FLOW DIAGRAM
OIL
10 COOLER GAII
--h
VkVE -433 3
-3
fRou
CHECK VALV[
OIL
FROM COOLER
-OIL
~T:;
,*Lv[
r m PIPf S4J+IIED BY CUSTCACR
OAE Vuw
.,A, SUGGESTIO CUS1OMER SUPPLIED PIPIMG ARRAN6[MEMT / \ L #/ /
202 EAU797 (Ref. Drawing)
AMAIN MOTOR
---*R L-kl
OIL
0-
COMPRESSOR
cD[FGhJKLh4PR-
---
A12101L
GAT[
VALVE \
OIL FILL
INLIT FILTIR OIL RESERVOIR OIL SCPARATOR OIL COOLIR AFTCR COOLER MIXING VALVE BODY OIL FILTIR OIL STOP VALVE CHECK VALVE RfLIEf VALVE MIN PRESS HCCKVALVE /C PNEUMATIC3 WAY VALVE
L-
AIR FLOW
EL[VATED
COOLERS
FIGURE 5-2 - OIL FLOW DIAGRAM - REMOTE OVERHEAD
MOUNTED
13-10-614
Page 32
! A WARNING
All materials used in Gardner Denvera compressor units are compatible with AEON 9000 SP Lubricating Coolant. downUse caution when selecting stream components such as air line lubricating bowls, gaskets and valve trim. AEON-U 9000 SP Synthetic Lubricant is not compatible with low nitrile Buna N or acrylic paints. AEON- 9000 SP is compatible with most air system downstream components.
___________ ~_. 4
R(.339) DRi LL THRJ 1/8 NPT ONE HOLE WELD
Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) are available for all AEON lubricants from your authorized Gardner Denver distributor or by calling 21 72225400.
FIGURE 5-3 - COOLER DRAIN DETAIL
REMOTE MOUNTED ELEVATED COOLER ASSEMBLY PROCEDURE The Compressor package will be built and tested with the coolers mounted on the package. On enclosed units, the fan motor will be disconnected after test and the vent fan motor connected in its place. The vent fan will be mounted in the enclosure. A contactor (starter) will be shipped loose and remote mounted with the cooler by others upon start-up at the job site. The control box will be wired for remote elevated coolers at the factory.
NOTICE
All requirements should be followed. of local codes
AFTERCOOLER PIPING At shutdown of the system, all units should be drained completely of condensate if there is any possibility of freezing or corrosion damage. To help remove the condensate, the cooler may be tapped per FIGURE 53 and a drain cock installed, After opening the drain cock, blow air into the cooler from a connection on the opposite side of the cooler. At the same time the connection on the drain side of the cooler should be plugged. The drain cock should be left open until the machines are ready for start-up,
~WARNING
Failure to remove condensate from an idle cooler in freezing temperatures will cause permanent cooler damage. Drain condensate after system shutdown. It is the owner/operators responsibility to ensure that condensate has been drained and cooler dried out to prevent cooler damage.
When connecting pipe fittings to the cooler, support the threaded coupling with a pipe wrench when tightening the connection. Use silicone sealant on all steel to aluminum threaded connections. All piping should be firmly supported to avoid strain on the cooler manifold and connections. Flexible connections should be installed in all interconnecting piping, adjacent to the cooler, to avoid transmitting piping weight or vibrations to the cooler elements. Before beginning installations, check to be sure that no debris or foreign matter remains in the couplings or cooler bodies. Be certain interconnecting piping is clean to avoid clogging the cooler passages.
HEAT EXCHANGER (OIL) PIPING All remote elevated cooler applications must be sent through Engineering for approval and for recommending pipe size. When the cooling module is removed from the pack-
13-10--614
Page 33
age, the thermal mixing valve (H) remains on the package, Control group part number 202 EAU4002 will be mounted on package at the factory This group controls the oil stop valve as well as not allowing machine to run blowndown. See FIGURE 52, page~2.
ADDITION OF OIL BETWEEN CHANGES must be made when the oil level is in the red range on the gauge as read while the unit is on, To add oil, follow these steps: 1. 2, Be sure the unit is completely off and that no air pressure is in the oil reservoir. Disconnect, the starter. tag and lockout the power supply to
NOTICE
3.
Wipe away all dirt around the oil filler plug. Remove the oil filler plug and add oil as required to return the oil level to the center of the green range on the gauge. Install the oil filler plug, restore power, run and check for leaks.
Remote mounted elevated coolers have a maximum pipe length of 30 feet (9 M) (each way) and a maximum height of 20 feet (6 M) with a minimum of fittings. Engineering will review all remote elevated cooler applications pipe size on an indiand recommend vidual basis. Customer Service should include the engineering recommendation in the special order sent to Engineering.
4,
5.
DO NOT OVERFILL. The quantity required to raise the oil level from the red range center of the green range is shown in FIGURE 5-4, page 35. Repeated addition of oil between oil chanaes may indicate excessive oil carry-over and should-be investigated.
DANGER
Kit number 205EAU4013 includes the oil stoD valve,. check valve and flanges and must be installed on all remote elevated coolers per FIGURE 52, page 32, and the following instructions. 1 2, Mount the check valve (90J113) as shown. Mount the drain valves in the lowest section of the pipe on each side of the cooler connections, Mount the oil stop valve (90 AR243) in the line after the thermal mixing valve as shown.
Air/oil under pressure will cause severe personal injury or death. Shut down compressor, relieve system of all pressure, disconnect, tag and lockout power supply to the starter before removing valves, caps, plugs, fittings, bolts, and filters.
3,
DANGER
Modifications tothecontrol lines will be made at the factory per 263 EAU81 Oschematic. Air to the oil stop valve must come from the upper fitting in the separator housing, then pass through the 3-way pneumatic valve. Control air to the valve must be from the line between the tee and the orifice in the blowdown muffler line per FIGURE 52, page 32. When the machine blows down, it will activate the pneumatic valve and it will shut off the air and vent the line between the pneumatic control valve and the oil stop valve to atmosphere. This will shut the oil stop valve and prevent excessive oil from running into the reservoir. Failure to install these parts could result in high oil carryover and cause the machine to shutdown on high discharge temperature. COLD AMBlENT OPERATION See installation Cold Weather Operation, page 9. for
Compressor, air/oil reservoir, separation chamber and all piping and tubing may beat high temperature during and after operation.
~CAUTION
Excessive oil carry-over can damage equipment. Never fill oil reservoir above the FULL marker.
LUBRICANT CHANGE PROCEDURE - Upgrading to a longer life lubricant is essentially a very worthwhile practice. Following are the primary steps to be com-
13-10-614
Page 34
pleted when upgrading cant. 1. Thoroughly
or changing
the type of lubri-
drain system:
Drain oil from air end and cooler while hot. Break low point connections from pipe runs. and drain oil
Dump oil from the filter and reinstall used filter. 2. Fill the system with a 50 percent charge of the new lubricant: Start the machine and stay there to obsewe. Allow the machine to run about five minutes at temperature, or until temperature stabilizes, then shut down. 3. 4, 5. 6. Thoroughly drain the machine.
FIGURE S4 - OIL LEVEL GAUGE
Change to a new filter and separator. Fill the system with a full charge of the new lubricant, then reinstall drain plug. Machine should then be run normally, however, total time after the initial changeout should be run 50 percent of normal anticipated service life of the new lubricant. Drain all lubricant from the system, change the filter and separator, and replace with a full charge of the new lubricant.
center of the green range on the gauge as read when the compressor is on. MOISTUFIE IN THE OIL SYSTEM In normal humidity and with normal operating temperatures and pressures, the thermal mixing valve controls the oil temperature and prevents moisture contamination of the oil. Unusual cooling of the oil reservoir, short loaded cycle in high humidity or malfunctions of the thermal valve may result in moisture in the oil system which is detrimental to compressor lubrication and could cause oil carryover. If moisture is observed in the oil reservoir, drain the moisture and correct the condition causing See Compressor Oil System the accumulation. Check, page 41 and Thermal Control (Thermostatic Mixing) Valve, page 38. OIL CHANGE INTERVAL Recommended oil change intervals are based on oil temperature. FIGURE 55 shows how the change interval is affected by temperature.
7.
Subsequent lubricant changeouts should be at normal intetvals. (See Oil Change Interval and chart below.)
OIL LEVEL GAUGE (FIGURE 13, page 2, and FIGURE 5-4) indicates the amount of oil in the oil reservoir. Read oil level only when unit is on. In operation the oil level will fluctuate as the compressor loads and unloads. Add oil only when the oil is at the bottom of the red range on the gauge as read when the compressor is on. Drain oil only when the oil level is above the
Discharge Temperature Up
AEON 4000 Change Interval 4000 hrs. 3000 hrs. 2000 hrs. 1000 hrs.
AEON 9000 SP Change Interval 8000 hrs. 6000 hrs. 4000 hrs. 2000 hrs.
to180 F (82C)
180 to 190 F (82 to 88C) 190 to 200 F (88 to 93C) 200 F+ (93C)
FIGURE S-5 - OIL CHANGE INTERVAL
13-! 0-614
Pnge 35
When operating conditions are severe (very dusty, high humidity, etc.), it will be necessary to change the oil more frequently. Operating conditions and the appearance of the drained oil must be surveyed and the oil change intervals planned accordingly by the user. Gardner Denverm offers a free oil analysis program with the AEON w lubricants and we recommend a sample be sent in at 100 hours on a new unit, DRAINING AND CLEANING OIL SYSTEM
2.
If the unit is elevated so that the oil reservoir drain can be used, empty the oil reservoir through the drain valve to a suitable container or sump. If the drained oil andjor the oil filter element are contaminated with dirt, flush the entire system: reservoir, oil cooler, mixing valve and lines, inspect the oil separator elements for dirt accumulation; replace if necessary If a varnish deposit exists, contact the factory for recommendations for removal of the deposit and prevention of varnish. OIL RESERVOIR
3.
.~ Air/oil severe under personal
DANGER
FILLING
pressure will cause injury or death. Shut down compressor, relieve system of all pressure, disconnect, tag and lockout power supply to the starter before removing valves, caps, plugs, fittings, bolts, and filters.
DANGER
A DANGER Compressor, air/oil reservoir, tion chamber and all piping ing may beat high temperature and after operation. separaand tubduring
I
1. 2. 3.
Be sure the unit is completely off and that no air pressure is in the oil reservoir. Disconnect, the starter. tag and lockout the power supply to
Wipe away all dirt around the oil filler plug. Remove the oil filler plug and add oil as required to return the oil level to the center of the green range on the gauge. Install the oil filler plug and operate the unit for about a minute allowing oil to fill all areas of the system. Check for leaks. Shut down unit, allowing the oil to settle, and be certain all pressure is relieved. Add oil, if necessary, to bring level to the center of the green range on- the gau~e,
Always drain the complete system. Draining when the oil is hot will help to prevent varnish deposits and carry away impurities. To drain the system, use one of the following methods: 1. If the unit is not elevated high enough to use the oil reservoir drain line to drain oil, a small hand, electric or air operated pump should be used to drain reservoir through the oil filler opening or from the drain valve.
4,
5.
6. 7.
200, 250 & 300 HP (150, 186 & 224 KW) Refill Capacity For Normal Oil Change Redto Yellow Range ., . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . , . ...35.0 U.S. Gallons (132.5 Liters) U. S. GaOlons(l9.O Liters)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..5
FIGURE S-6 - APPROXIMATE
OIL SYSTEM CAPACITIES
13-10-614
Page 36
On unloaded operation and after shutdown some oil will drain back into the oil reservoir and the oil level gauge will read FULL. DO NOT DRAIN OIL TO CORRECT. On the next start, oil will again fill the system and the gauge will indicate operating at the proper level. DO NOT OVERFILL asoil carryover will result. The quantity of oil required to raise the oil level from ADD to FULL is shown in FIGURE 56, page 36, Repeated addition of oil between changes may indicate excessive oil carryover and should be investigated. Use only CLEAN containers and funnels so no dirt enters the reservoir. Provide for clean storage of oils. Changing the oil will be of little benefit if done in a careless manner.
&A
Improper
cause filter eration. oil filter
UT ION
maintenance 1000 hours will Replace of op-
damage element
to equipment. every
More frequent replacement could be required depending on operating conditions. A filter element left in service too long may damage equipment.
~cAuTloN
Excessive oil carry-over can damage Never fill oil reservoir equipment. above the FULL marker.
Use only complete oil filter for replacement. The part number is on the filter head and in the parts list,
NOTICE
The head and the filter body are bonded together and cannot be purchased separately.
COMPRESSOR OIL FILTER (FIGURE 5-1, page 31) This patented design screw on oil filter is a vital part in maintaining a troublefree compressor, since it removes dirt and abrasives from the circulated oil. The oil filter relief valves are located in the top manifold of the filterstat. To replace, unbolt the manifolds and remove valves. The relief valve opens in the event the element becomes dirty enough to block the flow of oil,
Use the following procedure to replace the filter. Do not disturb the piping.
,~ ?. Air/oil under
personal
DANGER pressure
injury relieve disconnect, will or death. system tag cause Shut of and
DANGER
severe down all lockout
compressor, pressure,
Air/oil under pressure will cause severe personal injury or death. Shut down compressor, relieve system of disconnect, tag and all pressure, lockout power supply to the starter before removing valves, caps, plugs, fittings, bolts, and filters.
before fittings,
power supply to the removing valves, caps, bolts, and filters.
starter plugs,
1. 2.
Stop unit and be sure no air pressure is in the oil reservoir. Unscrew oil filter from housing and remove, Screw new oil filter into housing. Run the unit and check for leaks.
DANGER
separaand tubduring
3. 4.
Compressor, air/oil reservoir, tion chamber and all piping ing may beat high temperature and after operation.
COMPRESSOR OIL COOLER - RADIATOR TYPE (FIGURE 1-5, page 3) - The oil cooler motor and fan is mounted on the oil cooler module; air is exhausted through the oil cooler and away from the unit. Do not obstruct air flow to and from the oil cooler. Allow a minimum of three (3) feet clearance around the cooler.
13-:0
614
Page 37
CAPILLARY r \
TUBE h
(FIGURE 5-1, page 31) are stuck open. Remove the mixing valve and clean all parts thoroughly when flushing the oil system.
A74099A
~
I=lJ
ADJUST SCREW
DANGER
.
SE TTIN SCALE
Air/oil under pressure will cause severe personal injury or death. Shut down compressor, relieve system of all pressure, disconnect, tag and lockout power supply to the starter before removing valves, caps, plugs,
fittings, bolts, and filters. ,
VALVE
/
~
HEAT SENSING
BUL8
DANGER separaand tubduring
FIGURE 5-7
- WATER CONTROL
VALVE
Compressor, air/oiI reservoir, tion chamber and all piping ing may be at high temperature
and after operation.
Keep both faces of cooler core clean for efficient cooling of compressor oil.
! A WARNING
It is mandatory that any water cooled unit be installed in a shelter heated to temperatures above freezing (32 F,
A!
WARNING
Ducting will be required on air cooled quiet enclosed machines.
0 c.
THERMAL CONTROL (THERMOSTATIC MIXING) VALVE is installed in system as shown in FIGURE 51, page 31. This valve is used to control temperature of the oil in both air-cooled radiator and water-cooled heat exchanger type oil cooler systems. On start-up with unit cold, element is open to bypass, allowing oil to pass directly from the reservoir to compressor during warmup. As oil warms, element gradually closes to the bypass allowing more of the oil from the cooler to mix with oil from the bypass. After the unit is warmed up, the mixing valve maintains oil injection temperature into the compressor at a minimum of 150 F (66 C). This system provides proper compressor warmup and helps prevent moisture contamination of oil. To check the element, heat in oil it should be fully extended at 150 F (66 C). If the unit shuts down due to high air discharge temperature, it may be that one or both thermostatic mixing valve elements
COMPRESSOR OIL COOLER - WATER-COOLED HEAT EXCHANGER (FIGURE 51, page 31) The heat exchanger oil cooler is a multiple pass type, with water in the tubes and oil in the shell. The oil temperature is controlled by the thermal (thermostatic mixing) valve. The optional water control valve may be used to conserve water. Oil cooler malfunction may be traced by checking pressure at oil inlet and outlet. At normal operating air service pressure (65 to 150 psig, 4.5 to 10.3 Bars) with the unit warm, a pressure drop of 3 to 15 psi (,2 to 1 Bar) can be expected between the oil inlet and the oil outlet. Water pressure drop from water inlet to outlet will vary with the inlet pressure and amount of water flowing. A normal pressure drop may range from 5 to 10 psi (.3 to .7 Bar). Any change in the pressure drop from that normally held may indicate tube leakage or fouling and should be investigated.
13-10-614
Page 38
24o 230 220 210 ~ 200 190 , 180 , 170 160 150 . 140 130 . I 21) 110 ,
[ I I I
I I I I /l
1 I I Y , /-+ 4_.- :
I i/-
I A
100
90 %
.--
F/ I a/
/l
I A I H L- ,wI
I
I
I
\ I
I
R , I -lo
m
10
AM31ENT TEMP .
30
BAR . 63 C BAR
50
40
20
40
N+21EMT u
60
7EMP .
89
.F
130
120
!03
150 Pslc
103 PSIG
FIGURE S-8 -
DEW POINT TEMPERATURE VS. AMBlENT (100% RELATIVE HUMIDITY)
TEMPERATURE
In many instances, the cooling water supply for the heat exchanger will contain impurities in solution andlor suspension. These substances can cause scale formation, corrosion and plugging of any water-cooled heat exchanger equipment. Disregarding the possibiiitythat one or more of these conditions exist may result in increased maintenance and operation expense, reduced equipment life and emergency shutdown. It is strongly recommended that a reputable, local water treatment concern be engaged to establish the corrosion, scale forming and fouling tendency of the cooling water and take steps necessary to remedy the situation if a problem does exist. The need for water treatment may involve only filtration (screening) to remove debris, sand andlor salt in the cooling water supply. However, chemical treatment methods may be necessa~ in certain instances to inhibit corrosion andjor remove dissolved solids, to alter the waters tendency to form scale deposits, or prevent the growth of microorganisms. The normal maintenance program for the unit should also include periodic cleaning of the tubes (water side) of the heat exchanger to remove deposits which enhance fouling and corrosion. Hex head zinc anodes are used in the return bonnet (opposite end to the water pipe connections) of heat exchangers to provide internal water system corrosion protection. These anodes should be inspected periodically and replaced when the zinc has been reduced to about 1/2 inch (13mm) in length. WATER FLOW CONTROL VALVE FOR HEAT EXCHANGER (Optional Equipment) (FIGURE 5-7) The water flow control valve is adjustable to compensate for varying water inlet temperatures and pressures and is to be mounted in the water outlet line after the oil cooler (FIGURE 51, page 31). Use the compressor discharge air temperature gauge on the instrument
panel in setting the flow control valve. The compressor discharge temperature must be maintained a minimum of 10 F (5 C) above the dew point temperature at the maximum anticipated ambient; refer to FIGURE 58, page 40, for the dew point temperature at the operating pressure and ambient temperature of the application. To decrease water flow (increase compressor discharge air temperature) turn the adjusting screw from left to right, increasing spring tension, To increase water flow (decrease compressor discharge air temperature) turn the adjusting screw in the opposite direction. The groove at the lower edge of the adjusting screw is an index line for use with the index scale Oto 8 in obtaining a desired setting. These valves must be handled with care and proper tools and techniques must be used when working on the valve. Care must be used when handling the capillary tube; a kink or break in the tubing or connections will make the valve inoperative. Never attempt to change capillary length. Excess capillary tube should be carefully coiled and placed so that damage will not occur in normal maintenance or traffic past the unit. If the leak develops through the packing, tighten the packing gland nut firmly with a wrench to reseat the packing around the valve stem, then back off the nut until loose, and finally retighten the nut finger tight. Tightening the packing nut too tight may cause erratic operation. An occasional drop of oil on the valve stem at the packing nut will prolong packing life. If valve malfunctions, check for bent or binding, paint or corrosion on valve stem, foreign material in valve, erosion, or thermal system (capillary) failure. If foreign material or scale is likely, the use of a strainer in the inlet water line is recomnlended.
13-104514
Page39
FINALAIR OISCHARGE
COMPRESSOR (GD ELIMINATOR) OIL SEPARATOR located in a separate housing, consists of a renewable cartridge-type separator element and provides the final removal of oil from the air stream (FIGURE 5-9), Oil impinging on the inside of the separator element drains directly back into the oil reservoir by gravity. Oil collected outside the element is returned through tubing to the compressor cylinder, Oil carryover through the ser~ice lines maybe caused by a faulty oil separator, faulty minimum pressure
valve, return
RETWN LINE
[D SEPARATOR
OIL RfXRVOIR TOVJIR
overfilling line
of the oil resewoir, or waler
oil that
foams, in the
oil oil.
malfunction
condensate
If oil carryover occurs, inspect the separator only after it is determined that the oil level is not too high, the oil is not foaming excessively, the oil return line from the separator housing to the compressor cylinder is not clogged or pinched off, the check valve in the oil return line is functioning properly, and there is not water or an oil/water emulsion in the oil. Oil carryover malfunctions of the oil separator are usually due to using elements too long, heavy dirt or varnish deposits caused by inadequate air filter service, use of improper oil or using oil too long for existing conditions, A ruptured or collapsed separator element is usually due to heavy dirt or varnish buildup in the filtering material. Excessive tilt angle of the unit will also hamper separation and cause oil carryover. Oil separator element life cannot be predicted; it will vary greatly depending on the conditions of operation, the quality uf the oil used and the maintenance of the oil and air filters. The condition of the separator can be determined by pressure differential gauging or by inspection. Pressure Differential Gauging The CHANGE SEPARATOR advisory will flash when the pressure differential across the oil separator reaches approximately 8 PSID (,55 Bar), Replace the oil separator element at this time. If ignored, the unit will shut down and the advisory will illuminate steadily when the pressure differential reaches 15 PSID (1 Bar).
FIGURE 5-9
- OIL SEPARATOR
WATER SHUTOFF VALVE - WATER-COOLED Equipment) HEAT EXCHANGER (Optional (FIGURE 5-1, page 31) - A magnetic solenoid-operated water shutoff valve rated at 150 psig (10.3 Bars) water pressure should be mounted in the water outlet line after the oil cooler. The valve should be wired into the compressor control circuit so that the valve opens to allow water to flow any time the compressor is running. When compressor stops under automatic control, orisshut off manually, thevalve should close, stopping water flow through the system. See Wiring Diagrams, pages 26 thru 29.
DANGER separaand tubduring
Compressor, air/oil reservoir, tion chamber and all piping ing may beat high temperature and after operation.
~cAuTlON
Using an oil separator element at excessive pressure differential can cause damage to equipment. Replace the separator when the Change Separator advisory appears.
OIL RESERVOIR The oil reservoir-separator combines multiple functions into one vessel. The lower half is the oil reservoir, providing oil storage capacity for the system and the top portion, a primary oil separation means. The reservoir also provides limited air storage for control and gauge actuation.
13-10-614
Page 40
screws,
I
A sudden
ential may or indicate
NOTICE
drop
sudden
I
differoil carryover element.
9,
Run the unit and check for leaks,
of zero pressure
heavy a ruptured
Inspection After removal of separator element, shine a light inside the element to reveal areas of heavy dirt or varnish deposits or breaks (ruptures) in the element media. Removal Of Oil Separator placement: For Inspection Or Re-
COMPRESSOR OIL SYSTEM CHECK The following readings are based on ambient temperature of 80 F (273 C) forair-+ooled oil cooler and 80- F inlet water on water-cooled oil cooler, with the system in good condition. Compressor should be at operating temperature at the time of checks, Onehalf hour of loaded operation is usually sufficient to reach levelout operating temperatures, Air and Oil Discharge Temperature 165 to 195 F (74 to 91 c C) Read at gauge on the instrument panel or check with a thermometer at the discharge housing. Compressor Oil Inlet Temperature -150 to 160 F (66 to710 C) - Install a tee at the oil filter outlet and check with a thermometer, Oil Inlet Pressure Check at the fitting in the line near the compressor oil inlet. With air receiver pressure at 100 psi (6.9 Bar), oil inlet pressure should be 55-60 psig(3.84.l Bar). Oil Cooler Oil Pressure Differential (Air-Cooled Radiator) Check differential across oil system by measuring oil inlet pressure as described above. Oil Cooler Oil Pressure Differential (Water-Cooled Heat Exchanger) 2 to 25 PSID (.1 to 1.7 Bar) (65 to 150 PSIG, 4.5 to 10.3 Bars Receiver Pressure) Check that oil inlet pressure is correct or measure the differential between drains on the oil cooler shell. Oil Cooler Temperature Differential (Air-Cooled Radiator) The oil temperature differential depends on the temperature of the air at the oil cooler fan and cleanliness of core faces. As ambient temperatures and core restrictions increase, the oil cooler outlet temperature will increase. The oil inlet temperature is approximately the same as air discharge temperature see the gauge on the instrument panel. The outlet oil temperature may be checked by installing a tee at the oil filter outlet. Oil Cooler Temperature Differential (WaterCooled Heat Exchanger) The oil temperature differential depends on the inlet water temperature and the water flow rate permitted by the water flow control valve setting. The oil inlet temperature is approximately the same as the air discharge temperature see the gauge on the instrument panel. The oil outlet temperature may be checked by installing a tee at the oil filter outlet. Oil Cooler Water Pressure Differential (Water Cooled Heat Exchanger) The water pressure differential through the heat exchanger will depend on the supply pressure, flow rate, cooler tube cleanliness and outlet pressure. The inlet and outlet water pressure may be checked at the pipe fittings supplied by the cus tomer.
DANGER
off and Be certain unit is completely pressure is in the oil reservoir.
that
no air
2!. 3.
Disconnect, starter.
tag and lockout power supply to the
Remove screws holding the top plate to the separator housing. Lift the top plate from the separator housing. Lift the separator from the separator housing.
4. 5.
Inspect and/or replace the separator as necessary. Be sure the oring is not damaged. Before installing (or reinstalling) any separator apply grease to the o-ring. Oil will be wiped off by the chamfer and the o-ring could be damaged. Remove any gasket material adhering to top plate or separator housing, and install new gasket, Lower the separator into the housing and center the separator on the chamfer. Press separator down into the housing. Do not use excessive force as separator damage can occur. Place the spacer on the indent in the separator, Seat the top plate to the separator, spacer and separator housing. Install and tighten all cap
6. 7.
8.
13-104314
Page 41
SECTION 6
AIR FILTER
3.
Al? IN TLET
t
4.
AIR OUTLET ~
Wash the element by soaking about 15 minutes in warm water with a mild nonsudsing detergent. Rinse the element thoroughly with clean water; a does not hose may be used if the water pressure exceed 40 psig (2,8 Bars), Inspect the element for ruptures or cracks in the pleated media; replace the element if any are found, Inspect the gasket on the bottom (outlet end) of the element; replace the entire element if the gasket is damaged, A spare element will keep down time to a minimum. Allow the element toairdry COMPLETELY. Do not expose the element to heat over 150 F (66 C). Install the element in the filter body and fasten securely with the wing nut.
AuTOMATICUN LOAOERw
5.
FIGURE 6-1
HEAW
DUTY AIR FILTER (STANDARD)
A! HEAVYDUTY AIR FILTER (FIGURE 61) furnished as standard equipment on units with an enclosure is a heavyduty washable element dry type air filter. The air filter must receive proper maintenance if maximum service is to be obtained from the unit. Establishing adequate and timely filter service is MOST IMPORTANT. An improperly maintained air filter can cause a loss of compressor air delive~. Filter Element Service the air filter element when the CHANGE AIR FILTER LED is illuminated, Clean every 50 to 150 operating hours depending on dust conditions.
WARNING
Do not oil this element. Do not wash in inflammable cleaning fluids. Do not use solvents other than water. improper cleaning may damage the element.
NOTICE
Never operate the unit without the element. Never use elements that are damaged, ruptured or wet. Never use
gaskets elements duce protected that and area downtime. wont seal. on Store free from Keep hand damage, elements spare to rein a gaskets
NOTICE
Use only genuine Gardner Denver air filter elements on Gardner Denver compressor units. Genuine parts are your authorized available through
Gardner Denver distributor.
and moisture. care.
Handle
all parts
dirt with
To service: 1. Remove the wingnut ment. and pull out the filter eleFilter Element Life The element should be replaced after six (6) cleanings or if: 1. Visual inspection indicates a rupture, crack or pin hole in the pleated media. Inspection should be done by placing a bright light inside the element.
2.
Visually inspect the element. If cleaning isnot necessary, reinstall the filter element. If the element requires cleaning, follow steps 3, 4 and 5.
13-10-014
Page 42
2.
Pressure drop through a filter with a freshly cleaned element is below three (3) inches (76 mm) of water with the compressor running at full Ioad - this would indicate a rupture or crack.
tube when required by ramming a clean dry cloth through the tube. Wipe the inside of the filter body to remove any dirt falling from the inlet tube before reinstalling the element. Causes of short element life include: severe dust conditions, infrequent servicing, improper cleaning, or contamination by oil or chemical fumes.
Inlet Tube Inspect the inlet screen and tube for dirt accumulation each time the filter is serviced. Clean the
13-10-6!4
Page43
SECTION 7 COUPLING
UP
TOWARD OF
OUTSIDE COUPLING
DIAMETER
RADIUS
EDGE
r
q q
23 FT-LBS (17 N-M)
CREW
~
v
DOWN TOWARD SHAFT **
A
l/16MlN l/8 MAX
SET SCREW 50 FT-LBS (37 N-M)
(1.6 mm to 3.2 mm)
.
FIGURE 7-1 INSTALLATION OF COUPLING CUSHIONS
3. ~ . . DANGER
Rotating machinery can cause personal injury or death. Turn the unit completely off, open the main disconnect, tag and lockout before servicing the coupling.
Working through the coupling guard opening, center the coupling over the gap between the shafts, maintaining the gap as shown in FIGURE 71 between the ends of the jaws on one coupling body and the flange on the opposite coupling body. Tighten set screws in each coupling body. Insert individual cushions as shown in FIGURE 71 and slide the collar over the cushions and secure with cap screws. Reinstall the cover plate.
4<
COUPLING The motor and compressor are direct connected by a resilient type flexible coupling with several individual cushions. The coupling does not require lubrication. If maintenance on mating parts is requires, reassemble coupling as follows: Individual 1. Cushion Design (FIGURE 7-1)
,~
DANGER
Rotating machinery can cause personal injury or death. Do not operate unit with either the coupling guard or the collar removed. All bolts and screws must be properly tightened.
Slide coupling halves over shaft extensions. Be sure the collar is installed on the shaft behind one coupling body, Assemble the motor to the compressor. Alignment - The coupling is permanently the flanges on the compressor and motor. aligned by
2.
13-10614
Page 44
SECTION 8
MAINTENANCE
SERVICE
SCHEDULE
CHECK LIST Every 125 Hours 1. Operation
Air Filter Operating conditions determine frequency of service. If the CHANGE AIR FILTER message is displayed, air filter requires servicing or changing. See Air Filter, Section 6, page 42. Oil Separator Operating conditions determine frequency of service. If the CHANGE SEPARATOR message is displayed, the oil separator element requires changing. See Compressor Oil Separator in Section 5, page 40, for further details. Motor Lubrication Refer to Section 2, page 14, and Maintenance Schedule Chart below. Every 8 Hours 1. Operation
Check for dirt accumulation on oil/aftercooler core faces and the cooling fan. If cleaning is required, clean the exterior fin surfaces of the cores by blowing compressed air carrying a nonflammable safety solvent in a direction opposite that of the cooling fan air flow. This cleaning operation will keep the exterior cooling suriaces clean and ensure effective heat dissipation.
Every 1000 Hours Operation 1. Change the oil filter element.
Every 8000 Hours Operation 1. Change the compressor lubricant. UNDER ADVERSE CONDITIONS, CHANGE MORE FREQUENTLY (refer to Oil Change Intewal, page 35). Flush system if required.
Check the reservoir oil level add oil if required. See Section 5, page 34. [f oil consumption is high, refer to Excessive Oil consumption, page 47. DO NOT MIX LUBRICANTS. Observe if the unit loads and unloads properly. Check discharge pressure and temperature.
2. 3. 4.
Every Year 1. Check the relief valve for proper operation. Section 4, page 17. See
Check Panel LEDs for advisories.
MAINTENANCE
Maintenance Action
SCHEDULE
As Indicated By AutoSentry
q q
(See detail
notes
above)
Every 8 Hours
Every 125 Hours
Every 1000 Hours
Every 8000 Hours
Every Year
Change Air Filter Change Oil Separator Check Reservoir Oil Level Check For Proper Load/Unload Check Discharge Pressure/Temp on Cooler
q q q q q q
Check Dirt Accumulation Change Oil Filter Element Change Compressor (AEON 9000 SP) Check Relief Valve
Lubricant
q q q
See Oil Change Interval Chart, FIGURE 55, page 35, for specific lubricant life.
13-10-6
i4
Page 45
SECTION 9 TROUBLE SHOOTING
SYMPTOM
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
REMEDY
Compressor
fails to start.
1. 2.
Wrong lead connections, Blown fuses in control box. Motor starter overload heaters tripped. Pressure in reservoir.
1. Change leads, 2. Replace fuse.
3.
3.
Reset and investigate cause of overload. Inspect blowdown valve. and muffler. Take appropriate action. See manual 13-9/1 O-647. Replace switch or jumper.
4.
4.
5.
Read error message on control panel. Remote Contact is open (terminals 6 & 9).
5.
6.
6.
Compressor starts but stops after a short time.
1. High discharge temperature.
1.
See High Discharge Air Temperature, this section, page 47. Replace switch.
2.
High discharge temperature switch malfunction. Blown fuse in starter/ control box.
2.
3.
3.
Replace fuse (investigate if fuses continue to blow). Reset and investigate cause of overload.
4.
Motor starter overload heaters trip.
4,
Compressor does not unload (or load).
1.
Improperly adjusted control. Air leak in control lines. Restricted control line, Blowdown valve malfunction.
1.
Refer to manual 139/1 O-647 and adjust control. Determine source of leak and correct. Clean control lines. Repair, clean or replace valve.
2.
2.
3. 4.
3. 4.
Compressor cycles from load to unload excessively.
1. Insufficient receiver capacity. 2 Restriction in control tubing,
1. 2.
Increase receiver size. Inspect and clean control tubing.
13-10-614
Page 46
SYMPTOM
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
REMEDY
Compressor is low on delivery and pressure.
1. 2. 3. 4.
Restricted
air filter.
1. Clean or replace filter. 2. 3. 4. Inspect and clean inlet valve, Adjust the unload pressure. See manual 139/1 O647, Disassemble valve, and clean
Sticking inlet valve. Unload pressure adjusted too low. Minimum pressure valve stuck closed.
High discharge temperature.
air
1. Thermostatic mixing valve stuck open. 2. 3. 4. 5. Dirty or clogged cooler face. Insufficient air flow. cooling
1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Repair or replace valve. Clean cooler. Provide unrestricted of cooling air. supply
Clogged oil filter or cooler (interior). Low compressor oil.
Replace filter or clean cooler. Add oil to proper level.
Excessive Oil Consumption
1.
Oil carryover
through lines.
1. 2.
See Oil Carryover,
below.
2.
Oil leaks at all fittings and gaskets.
Tighten or replace fittings or gasket.
Oil Carry-Over
1.
Overfilling
the reservoir.
1.
Drain excess oil from system.
~ DANGER
Air/oil
pressor,
under
pressure
system
will cause removing
severe valves,
relieve
of all pressure,
to the starter
before
injury or death. Shut down comdisconnect, tag and lockout power supply caps, plugs, fittings, bolts, and filters.
personal
2. 3. 4. 5.
Clogged, broken or loose oil return lines Ruptured oil separator element. Loose assembly. Foam caused by use of incorrect oil. Inoperative minimum pressure valve.
2, 3. 4. 5.
Tighten or replace faulty lines. Replace element. Tghten all fittings and gaskets. Use Gardner Denver AEON 9000 SP Lubricating Coolant. Clean out or replace valve.
6.
6.
13-10-614
FagP .47
SYMPTOM
POSSIBLE
CAUSE
REMEDY
Oil Carry-Over
(Continued)
7.
Operation at elevated discharge temperatures.
7,
Reduce temperature. See High Discharge Air Temperature, page 47, this section, Replace check valve. Check oil reservoir tempera ture and if low, change thermal mixing valve element to higher temperature.
8, 9.
Scavenge line check valve failure. Water condensate in oil.
8. 9.
NOTICE
Gardner Denver factory remanufactured replacement compressor air end units distributor, on an exchange basis, for all rotary are available from your authorized screw compressor units.
13-10-6I4
Page 48
GARDNER
DENVER@
13-10-5I3X 2nd Edition February, 1997
ELECTRASAVER STATIONARY BASE-MOUNTED
COMPRESSOR
AUTO SENTRY@ES+ CONTROLS (STANDARD) AUTO SENTFiY-ES CONTROLS MODELS EAU PH - 149KW (200HP) EAU QH - 187KW (250HP) EAU RH 224KW (300HP) (OPTIONAL)
PARTS
LIST
Gather
Denver
INSTRUCTIONS
FOR ORDERING REPAIR PARTS

MODEL, Method of Cooling, HORSEPOWER and SERIAL flange to
When
ordering
parts, specify
Compressor
NUMBER
(see nameplate
on unit).
The Serial Number
is also stamped
on top of the cylinder
the right of the inlet housing. All orders for Parts should be placed with the nearest authorized Where
distributor.
is required
NOT specified, quantity of parts required per compressor or unit is one (1); where more than one per unit, quantity is indicated in parenthesis. SPECIFY EXACTLY THE NUMBER OF PARTS
REQUIRED.
DO NOT ORDER BY SETS OR GROUPS.

To determine the Right Hand and Left Hand side of a compressor,
stand at the motor end and Iooktoward the compressor. Right Hand and Left Hand are indicated in parenthesis following the part name, i.e. (RH) & (LH), when appropriate.
For
Operating
and
Service
Instructions
see:
COMPRESSOR CONTROLLER
SERVICE SERVICE
MANUAL MANUAL
13-1M14 13-9/1 H7
TABLE OF CONTENTS Page No. instructions for Ordering Repair Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. Inside Front Cover
Maintain Compressor Reliability and Performance with Genuine Gardner Denver Compressor Parts and Support Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..2 Remanufactured Model/Matrix Relief Valves Oil Seal Detail Gear Groups ReliefVa]ves Bare Compressor Air Ends..... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .,, ,. . . ...2
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...4.5 .. ..................... .............. .. .. . .. .. ..... .... ..... .............. ..... ... .. . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .,.,6
Turn Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...7 Inlet Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...8 Air Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...9 Compressor Oil Resewoir Oil Separator Compressor Base Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...10.11 Group Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...12 .,,..... Piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ., . . . . . . . . . . . . ..I3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...15 Aftercooler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...16.17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...18.19 23 Aftercooler
Mixing Valve and Oil Filter... Discharge
Water Cooled Heat Exchanger With Air Cooled Cooler Group Control Piping
Water Cooled Heat Exchanger Without
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...20.21
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ., ..,...,.............,...22, Cooled Standard Standard Units orQuiet orQuiet
Turn Valve Actuator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...24 EnclosureCommonParts-Air/Water Enclosure AirCooled Enclosure Water Enclosure -Vent Panels Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...26 Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...27 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...28
Cooled Panels Standard Fan Assembly -(Water Quiet
Cooled Units Only)
Enclosure Hardware Enclosure Hardware Enclosure Quiet Enclosure Enclosure
All Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...29 Baffle Units Air Cooled Cooled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..,..30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...33 Delta-60HZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...34
Baffle -Air
Skirt -AirCooled-Quiet Skirt-Water Cooled -Quiet
Motor Group (Main Drive Motors) -Wye Overload Controller Relay Heater Conversion
Motor Group (Fan Motors) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...34 Listing . .,, , ., . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...35 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .,.......36,37 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...38.39 ,42 KW-Less Group Main Motor Starter Assembly - 149/187/224KW-WyeDeltaStarters and instruction
ControllerAssembly149/187/224 identification
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...40
Repair Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...41
13-1(1-513X
Pagel
MAINTAIN
COMPRESSOR RELIABILITY AND PERFORMANCE GENUINE GARDNER DENVER COMPRESSOR PARTS AND SUPPORT SERVICES Denver air compressor 1. 2.
WITH
Gardner Denver Compressor genuine parts, engineered to original tolerances, are designed for optimum dependability specifically for Gardner Denver cornpressor systems. Design and material innovations are the result of years of experience with hundreds of different compressor applications. Reliability in materials and quality assurance are incorporated in our genuine replacement parts. Your authorized Gardner Denver Compressor distributor offers all the backup youll need. A worldwide network of authorized distributors provides the finest product support in the air compressor industry, Your local authorized distributor maintains a large inventory of genuine parts and is backed up for emergency parts by direct access to the Gardner Denver Machinery Inc. Master Distribution Center (MDC) in Memphis, Tennessee. Your authorized distributor can support your Gardner For the location of your local authorized Gardner pages of your phone directory or contact: Distribution Center: Gardner Denver Machinery Master Distribution Center 5585 East Shelby Drive Memphis, TN 38141 Phone: (901 ) 5426100 (800) 245-4946 Fax: (901 ) 542-6159 Inc.
with these services:
Trained parts specialists to assist you in selecting the correct replacement parts. Factory warranted new and remanufactured rotary screw air ends, Most popular model remanufactured air ends are maintained in stock at MDC for purchase on an exchange basic with liberal core credit available for the replacement unit, A full line of factory tested AEON Wcompressor lubricants specifically formulated for use in Gardner Denver compressors, Repair and maintenance kits designed with the necessary parts to simplify sewicing your compressor.
3.
4.
Authorized distributor service technicians are factorytrained and skilled in compressor maintenance and repair. They are ready to respond and assist you by providing fast, exped maintenance and repair services. Denver Air Compressor distributor refer to the yellow
Factory: Gardner Denver Machinery Inc. 1800 Gardner Expressway Quincy, IL 62301 Phone: (21 7) 222-5400 Fax: (21 7) 224-7814
REMANUFACTURED Whenever an air end requires replacement or repair, Gardner Denver offers an industry unique, factory remanufactured air end exchange program. From its modern Remanufacturing Center in Indianapolis, IN, Gardner Denver is committed to supplying you with the highest quality, facto~ remanufactured air ends that are guaranteed to save you time, aggravation and money. Immediately Available
AIR ENDS a new overhaul kit: bearings, gears, seals, sleeves and gaskets. Extensive Testing Gardner Denver performs testing that repair houses just dont do. Magnaflux and ultrasonic inspection spot cracked or stressed castings, monochromatic light analysis exposes oil leaks, and coordinate measurement machine inspects to +/ .0001, insuring that all remanufactured air ends meet factory performance specifications. Warranty Gardner Denver backs up every remanufactured air end with a new warranty. ..18 months from purchase, 12 months from service. Gardner Denver remanufactured air ends deliver qua/ity without question. . . year in and year out. Call Gardner Denver for information on the air end exchange program and the name of your authorized distributor. Phone Number: 800-2454946 FAX: 901 542-61 59 or
Repair downtime costs you money, which is why there are over 200 remanufactured units in inventory at all times, ready for immediate delivery. Skilled Craftsmen
Our Remanufacturing assembly technicians average over 20 years experience with air compression products. Precision Remanufacturing All potentially usable parts are thoroughly cleaned, inspected and analyzed. Only those parts that can be brought back to original factory specifications are remanufactured. Every remanufactured air end receives
13-10-5!3X
Fage 2
ELECTRA-SAVER STATIONARY SCREW COMPRESSOR 149 KW (200 HP), 187 KW (250 HP), 224 KW (300 HP) THIRTEEN DIGIT MODEL DESIGNATIONS
NOTICE TO CUSTOMER To find the construction options for your cornpressorunit, FILL IN THE BALANCE OF LE~ERS OR NUMBERS FROM
EAU 7777
H ZK7T7
YOUR UNITNAMEPLATE. COLUMNNUMBER:

Follow the line down and over from each space thus fdled into find the appropriate construction option with which your machine is equipped. The number9 in any column space indicates NONAPPLICABLE. The number''8''inanycolumn space indicates SPECIALDESIGN-REFER TO FACTORY ORDER TICKET.
COLUMNS
1, 2 & 3-
COMPRESSOR
TYPE & SIZE
COLUMN 4- TYPE OF CONSTRUCTION Q. Air Cooled Base Mounted Water Cooled Base Mounted s. COLUMN 5 HORSEPOWER 149 KW (200 HP) P. 187 KW (250 HP) cl. R. 224 KW (300 HP) ENGINEERING SPECIFICATION
COLUMN 6-
COLUMN 7- OPERATING PRESSURE N, 100 PSIG (50 t+z) P, 125 PSIG (50 Hz) 150 PSIG (50 Hz) R. COLUMN 8- CONTROUSTARTER 149 KW (200HP) A. B. 149 KW (200 HP) 187 KW (250 HP) c. D. 187 KW (250 HP) COLUMN 9 CONTROIX3TARTER A. 380 volt 415 volt B. COLUMN 10A. B. BOX - Per H.P. and NEMA Class (Wye Delta) E. 224 KW (300 HP) - NEMA 12 NEMA 4 F. 224 KW (300 HP) NEMA 4 NEMA 12 G, Less Motor Starter Nema 12 NEMA 4 H. Less Motor Starter Nema 4
NEMA12
BOX - Per Voltage (Wye Delta)
c
D. COLUMN
ENCLOSURE Without Enclosure Air/Water Cooled With Enclosure - Air Cooled Only - Quiet With Enclosure - Water Cooled - Quiet 380 Volt With Enclosure - Water Cooled - Quiet 415 Volt COOLED E. F. G. H. - WITHrWITHOUT AFTERCOOLER WATER COOLED Fresh Water - Without Aftercooler Fresh Water Wth Aftercooler Fresh Water Wthout Aftercooler - With Water Temp Regulator Fresh Water With Aftercooler - With Water Temp Regulator
11- OIL COOLERS - AIR/WATER AIR COOLED A, 200 H.P. Standard 200 H.P. Seacoast B. c, 250/300 H.P. Standard D, 250/300 H.P. Seacoast 12A. B. OIL COOLER ELECTRICS AIR COOLED 380 Volt 415 volt COMPRESSOR - STD. 380 Volt 415 volt
COLUMN
T. u. WATER COOLED (Msg. Water Shutoff NEMA 1 NEMA 4 No Water Shutoff Valve Vlv-Fresh Water Only)
x.
COLUMN 13ODP A, B.
DRIVE MOTOR TEFC - STD. c. 380 Volt D. 415 volt
Y,
Less Motor - ODP~EFC
13-? O-513X
Page 3
13l CI-513X
Page4
Order by Part Number and Description.
Reference Numbers are for your convenience
only.
BARE COMPRESSOR Ref. No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 16 16 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 Name of Part BEARING-ROLLER ......... BEARINGROLLER ......... ROTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ROTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CYLINDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HOUSING-BEARING ........ PINDOWEL ............... SCREW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LOCKWASHER ............. GASKET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BEARINGROLLER ......... SHIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PLATE-BEARING RETAINER SCREW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BEARING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SHIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SHIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SHIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SHIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PLATEBEARING RETAINER SCREW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SPRINGWAVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . PLATEBEARING COVER . . . SCREW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SCREW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
q
Qty. 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 20 20 1 1 1 1 3 1 2 3 3 3 1 3 1 1 9 10
Part No. 12BA52 12W34 203 SSU01 O 204 SSUO1O 205 SSUO02 204 SSUO06 62M112 655 EF1OO 95B7 208 SSU715N 12BA79 77H55 202 SSU253 75 LM121N 12BA78 77 H50002 77 H50003 77 H50005 77 H50015 201 SSU253 655 EE06N 78W54 200SSU315 75P196 655 EF120
Ref. No. 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 41 42 43 44 49 51 52 *
q q
Name of Part LOCKWASHER ............. GASKET-ELIMINATOR ...... RING-RETAINING .......... RINGRETAINING ..... ... .. SPACERSHAFT ........... PLATE-BEARING RETAINER SCREW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HOUSING-GEAR ........... BEARINGROLLER ......... SPACERSHAFT ........... KEYSQUARE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SHAFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SCREW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LOCKWASHER ............. GASKET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PINDOWEL ............... PLUG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GUARD-COUPLING ........ SCREW-FLANGED ......... PLUG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PLUG, . . . . . . . . . . . . . PLUG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PLUG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...... ...... ...... ...... .. .. .. ..
Qty. 10 1 1 1 1 1 3 1 1 2 1 1 1 20 20 1 2 5 1 4 2 1 1 1
Part No. 95B7 25 BC256 65W14 65W61 200 SSU600 2012387 655 EE06N 35L16 201 SSU151 12C60 201 SSU600 35L3 200 SSU050 655 EF1OO 95B7 209SSU715N 62M112 64AA5 200 SSU339 75LM51 64AA6 64AA7 64AA3 64AA9
Not shown. RELIEF VALVES KW (HP) 149 (200) 187/224 (250/300) BAR (PSI) 6.9 (100) 90AR51 o 90AR511 SERVICE PRESSURE BAR (PSI) 8.6 (125) 90AR532 90AR533 BAR (PSI) 10.3 (150) 90AR909 90AR909
212 SSU81OC (Ref. Drawing)
OIL SEAL DETAIL Ref. No. 36 37 38 39 40 45 46 47 48 81 82 *

q
Name of Part SEAL-OIL (VITON), . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HOUSING-SEAL .. .......... .. .................................. O-RING ..................... .................................. SCREW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LOCKWASHER ................................................. SHIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SHIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SHIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SHIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ,, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WEAR SLEEVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SEALOIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECKVALVE ....................... ......................... * included inOil Seal Kit. Seepage4 1. * Notshown.
q
Qty. 1 1 1 6 6 12 12 6 6 1 1 1
Part No. 60DD571 203SSU362 25BC205 655EE060 95B5 204SSY732 205SSY732 207SSY732 208SSY732 80M28 60DD689 90AR923
* *
AIRENDS/GEAR
GROUPS Gears Driven
AirEnd
No.
KW (HP)
BAR(PSI)
Gear Group
Driver
SSUABD02
224(300) 187(250)
10.3 (150) 8.6 (125) 6.9 (100) 8.6 (125) 10.3 (150) 8.6 (125) 6,9 (100) 10,3 (150) 6.9 (100)
SSU76968
201SSU181
201SSU280
SSUABD03
149(250) 224(300)
SSU76969
202SSU181
202SSU280
SSUABD04 SSUABD05 SSUABD06
149(200) 149(200) 149(200) 187(250)
SSU76970 SSU76971 SSU76972
203SSU181 204SSU181 205SSU181
203SSU280 204SSU280 205SSU280
SSUABD07
224(300)
SSU76973
206SSU181
206SSU280
13-10-513X
Page6
Order by Part Number
and Description.
Reference
Numbers
are for your convenience
only.
78 CL
212SSU81 (Ref. Draw
TURN VALVE Ref. No. 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 88 Name of Part BEARINGROLLER ............................................. SPRING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VALVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RETAINER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RING-RETAINING .............................................. GEARAUXILIARY .............................................. KEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SETSCREW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SHAIT-CONTROL .............................................. RACK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SCREW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CONTROL PISTON ASSEMBLY. ................................. PACKING-RING ................................................ HEAD-CONTROLCYLIINDER .................................... SEAL-FASTENER .............................................. NUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SET SCREW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NIPPLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TEEPIPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PLUG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CYLINDER-CON ROB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GASKET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . STIED . . . . . . . . . . . . . NUT . . . . . . . . . . . . ..,..,. ....... ................................
... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Qty. 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 4 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 4 8 8
Part No. 12BA51 78W50 203SSU238 207SSU205 100522 200SSU031 35C114 76G21 N 200SSU081 200SSU360 75P11N SSU80565 60AM46 200RPA083 60DD65 50AW24 76D226 63D1 G 64G3G 64AA5 200SSU082 25BC138N 79AL5 50AW24
13--IO-513X
Page7
and Description.
Reference
Numbers
only.
CY
19 INLET VALVE Ref. No. 1 2 3 4 5 7 8 9 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 * Name of Part HOUSING-INLET . ............................... .............. . CYLINDER-INLET VALVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GASKET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GASKET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CAP-CYLINDER ................................................ SCREW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SCREW . . . . . . ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WASHER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SPRING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . INLET VALVE PISTON ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VALVE-INLET .................................................. GUIDE-VALVE ................................................. CLAMP-DISC .... ...................................... .. ...... DISC-VALVE . .............................. .............. ...... NUTHEXCASTLE ............................................. PIN-COITER .................................................. GASKET RING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SCREW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LOCKWASHER ................................................. PINSPRING ROLL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ,
q
206SSU81O-B (Ref. Drawing)
Qty. 1 1 1 1 1 6 8 14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 8 8 1
Part No. 200SSU041 S11542 203SSU715N 25C2683N S1 15274 655ED040 655ED050 95B3 78A366 S1 1543D 200SSW044 200SSW483 200SSW338 200SSW067 50E9 62E30 25BC160 655EG070 95B8 62R1OI
Notshown.
13-10-513X
Page8
and Description.
Reference
Numbers
only.
o
5 303 EAU81O (Ref. Drawing)
Ref. No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
q
Name of Part FILTERAIR . .... ...................... . .. .. ..... .... ... .. .. ... . ............................................. .............................................. ................................................. ................................................. . .. c..... ................................. .................................................
Qty. 2 8 1 1 8 8 2 4 2 2
Part No. 5L300 75K48 25C131N 203EAU690 655EG080 95B8 2009734 2009499 300EAQ1323 2117151
SCREWFLANGED GASKET RING MANIFOLDINLET LOCKWASHER HOSE CLAMPHOSE REDUCER
SCREW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..... .. .............. .. ......... . .. ..... .. . ........... .. . . . ..... ................. .... ............ .. ....... .. ..
ELEMENT, AIR FILTER * NotShown-FGr
Re~air,
13-10-5I3X
Page9
UJ
(A <
13-10-513X
Page lO
COMPRESSOR
BASE GROUP
Ref. No.
Name of Part
Qty.
Part No.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 *
SCREW WASHER
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .............o...o.o. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ....co..o..0.o
2 2 2 6 12 12 1 8 8 8 2 4 4 4 4 2
655EG240 95A7 95B7 49C48 75LM135 50AW35 209EAU285 50B8 95B8 655EG140 50B7 95A8 95B8 50B8 655EG240 300EAU165
LOCKWASHER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... . .. ....

ISOLATOR-VIBRATION SCREWFLANGED NUT-FLANGED BASE ........ ........ .............. ........... . ........ ........... .............. ........... . s.... .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. oc. . .. o O-. ..O.O
NUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -.... LOCKWASHER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .....,....... SCREW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........

NUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. oc. o. .. C . . .. C.OOO.O.O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .........o.....o0000o.o . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .... WASHER
LOCKWASHER
NUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ................co.0... SCREW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............ccooo.00 SUPPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... ....... FLEXDRIVECOUPLINGS 200 HP

250/300HP
51 L31 51 L32 35L27
SQ. KEY
* Not Shown.
OIL RESERVOIR
GROUP
244 EAU81 O-A (Ref. Drawing)
Ref. No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
Name of Part RESERVOIROIL .......................................... COVER-FILLER, .......................................... O-RING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PLUG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ADAPTOR-GAUGE ........................................ GAUGEFLOAT ........................................... SCREW-FLANGED ........................................ NUT-FLANGED ........................................... NIPPLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ELBOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NIPPLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VALVE-BALL ............................................. PLUG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ELBOWPIPE ST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SCREW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LOCKWASHER ........................................... COVER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GASKET ELIMINATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . REPAIR: GASKET - 54C204 (Float Gauge)
Qty. 1 1 1 1 1 1 4 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 12 12 1 1
Part No. 302EAU037 200SPF156 54C214 64AA5 200EDE058 200EAU303 75LM135 50AW35 63F1 G 64C4G 63F1 OG 90AR360 64LW7 64D9G 655EE090 95B5 202EAU225 25BC222
13-10-5I3X
Page 12
OIL SEPARATOR
GROUP
247 EAU81O (Ref. Drawing)
Ref. No.
Name of Part
Qty.
Part No.
1 2
NIPPLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SEPARATORAIWOIL ...........................................
1 1
63AM24X70G 200EAU035
13--fO-5l3X
Page13
MIXING VALVE AND OIL FILTER (With 150 Element)
1
I
8 FL
-\
101
HI >.-T-
261 EAU81O-B (Ref. Drawing)
Ref. No.
Name of Part
Qty.
Part No.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
10 11
MANIFOLD~lL O-RING O-RING
................................................. ..................................
1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 4 4 1 1 1 1
200EAU116 25BC127 2109365 25BC175 2116640 201EAU1 6 25BC380 200EDM0 64B7 95B3 655ED050 64AA2 64B14 2109366 2 09364 )2
................. ............ ..... .. ......... ...........
ELEMENT (1500-STANDARD).
............ ... ..... ......... ... ............ ............ CARTRIDGE-FILTER ... ..... .. ......... ............ ............. ................................................. O-RING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..O. . BODY-OIL FILTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..OO.. . . . . . . PLUG SCREW PLUG PLUG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ,., . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .OO.OO. .Jo..c. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..OO . . . . . ,<.ca. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .,, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .,{ . . . . . ...,...............,.. .................... ............... . . ,,.. .m.,.o . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ,tocio OPTIONAL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .,,... WASHER MANIFOLD41L
12 13 *
q
ELEMENT(140
60-oPITloNAL)
...................................
13-10-513X
Page14
COMPRESSOR
DISCHARGE
PIPING
Ref. No.
Name of Part
Qty.
Part No.
GASK~ SCREW
ELIMINATOR
...........................................
1 8 8 1 1
25 BC256 655EG1OO 95B8 200EAU286 64EB805
2 3 4 5
........................................................ ...... ..... ... ......... .. .. ...... .. .. .. ... .... ... .
LOCKWASHER MANIFOLD
................... ................................. ......... ................................. -2117
COUPLING-FLEXIBLE
REPAIR:
(2) GASKETS
63
cc
o
m
0:
+U n-
0
v
I 3-10-513X
Pagel
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lu:
J:
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
22
II
m. z: w.
-1.
L+.
i-
3U o# alg
Uz
u)
s
-x
N -3
w o 0
L+
3 <
o
CN
c-d
CQa .04 mu)

Y
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . :2 . . I . . :0 0
. . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . :U u . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
;Z
I :0 .0
.N
:Ec
. . . . . . .
w
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
E::::
. . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . .
WATER COOLED
HEAT EXCHANGER
- WITHOUT
AFTERCOOLER
TO COMPRE s
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..< . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
-1
. . . . . . . .
w; u.
3: (n. (n. w.
-1 cc: m CL. 5? >: w 3. -1 y cl z
:n
.W ::
.-l
z: ~: z
.L .,
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .,. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5s:
Ll!l!? w >m a m J& 3 3 < 0 L) t- >Z

i
.l-mJo.loJTr
. . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . .
. . .
. .
. . .
:. .
. . . . . .Z . .. .mJ_ .
.n .T .
. . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
n w 0 z ~
IL
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . .
iu
I
6i-
(5
3
-1
.mlmxtln(ah
am
I3-10-5I3X
AIR COOLED COOLER GROUP
1 16
3I4EAU81OA (Ref. Drawing)
RESERVOIR
o
m
C9 (0
CY 5 i 0
m 0 6
-rl
ii3>
aa
mCLl<r35ti2 00 u-l o cum al N mm O-1a cudmm
Wwmw
::2 m Ocn al ma)
ny~.m
0 m
wcolN -ml
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .s :2
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E . ... ... ... ... ... ,,. .0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

w: n-:
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. . .
E.
L:
w+
$:
al ma ale.
Nmm
m m
m m
aco
C9cu
1-
. . . . . . . . .,. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
w
-1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
L
. . . . . . . . u . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
II
z
0
cum
.T--
In
mcn
YY
CONTROL
PIPING
CONTROL
PIPING
Ref. No.
Name of Part
Qty.
Part No.
Ref. No.
Name of Part
Qty.
Part No.
1 2 3 4 5 6 8 9 10 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
VALVE-SOLENOID
.........
1 1 1 1 1 1
91 B70 63D1 G 86E28 86E64 86E64 64K1 G 90AR261 64G3G 86E9 86E60 91 B80 86E60 86E119 86E60 91B81 90AR261 90ARI 07 86E4 86E64 86E64 86E60 86N287 75LM51 50AW5 86E4 86H144 86E9 24CA2597
NIPPLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CONNECTORTUBE ........ ELBOW . . . . . . . . . . ELBOW . . . . . . . . . . CROSS . . . . . . . . . . VALVECHECK . . . TEE-PIPE . . . . . . . . CONNECTORTUBE ELBOWTUBE ... VALVE-SOLENOID .. .. .. .. .. ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ ........ .......... .........
31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 52 55 56 57 58
q
CONNECTORTUBE
........
VALVEAIR CONTROL . . . . . . ELBOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LOCKWASHER ............. SCREW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TEE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CONNECTOR-TUBE . TUBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TUBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ORIFICE . . . . . . . . . . . . ..... ..... ..... ..... .. .. .. ..
1 1 1 2 2 1 1 30 35 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 3 1 1 1 1 8 2
86H144 90AR51 86E64 95B2 75P42 86E136 86H144 85K3 85K5 86N289 86E9 64G3G 86E4 63D1G 86E64 86H144 63D1G 88H139 88H195 88H242 165011 31 OEAU863 311 EAU863 24A383 24A77 97H2R 24A476
2 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 3 4 4 1 1 1 1
ELBOW-TUBE ............. TEE-TUBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ELBOWTUBE ............. VALVE-SOLENOID ......... VALVE-CHECK ............. VALVECONTROL .......... CONNECTORTUBE ........ ELBOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ELBOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ELBOWTUBE ............. CONNECTORTUBE ........ SCREWFLANGED ......... NUTFLANGED ............ CONNECTOR-TUBE ........ CONNECTOR-TUBE CONNECTORTUBE ........ ........
CONNECTOR-TUBE ........ TEEPIPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CONNECTOR-TUBE ........ NIPPLE-PIPE .............. ELBOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CONNECTOR-TUBE ........ NIPPLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . REGULATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SWITCH-VACUUM .......... . TRANSDUCERPRESSURE
O-RING ......... ... .. ... .. TUBE WITH Fl17NGS ...... TUBE WITH FITTINGS . . . . . . ORING ................... .......
* * *
LOCKNUT-CONDUIT LUG TERMiNAL
WIRE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............
SEAL PLUG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
q
Not shown.
TURN VALVE ACTUATOR
Ref. No.
Name of Part
Qty.
Part No.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
VALVESOLENOID SCREW WASHERLOCK CONNECTORTUBE CONNECTOR PLUG TUBE
.............................................. ................................................ ............................................ ...................................... . ........ .................... . .. .
1 2 2 2 2 2 20 Ft. 3 1
200EAQ861 75P26 95B1 86E5 86E4 64AA4 85K3 86E60 86E5
........................................................
(TUBWPIPE)
.,..............,.....,.,
. ......................................................... ................................................. ............................................
ELBOWTUBE,
CONNECTOR-TUBE
13-10-5I3X
Page24
ENCLOSURE - COMMON AIFVWATER COOLED - STANDARD
PARTS OR QUIET UNITS
--@
@-
Ref. No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Name of Part POST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . POST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . POST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . POST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FRAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FRAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FRAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FRAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FRAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FRAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FRAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FRAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DOOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DOOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BRACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BRACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BRACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BRACKET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BRACKET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BRACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Qty. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 2 2 1 1
Standard Part No. 203EAU313 204EAU313 205EAU313 206EAU313 211EAU314 212EAU314 213EAU314 214EAU314 215EAU314 216EAU314 217EAU314 218EAU314 204EAU334 205EAU334 200EAU326 201EAU326 202EAU326 201EAU142 202EAU142 203EAU326
Quiet Part No. 21OEAU313 211EAU313 212EAU313 213EAU313 211EAU314 223EAU314 224EAU314 225EAU314 226EAU314 227EAU314 228EAU314 229EAU314 206EAU334 207EAU334 205EAU326 207EAU326 208EAU326 201EAU142 202EAU142 209EAU326
ENCLOSURE AIR COOLED PANELS STANDARD UNITS ONLY
>
u
q
/ 242 EAU81O-A (Ref. Drawing)
Refer to page 25 for Enclosure
Part Numbers,
Ref. No.
Name of Part
Qty.
Standard Part No.
1 2 3
PANEL, PANEL PANEL
..................................................... .. ....... .. .......... ....... .......................... ......................................................
3 3 1
207EAU216 209EAU216 212EAU216
13-IO513X
Page26
ENCLOSURE - WATER COOLED PANELS STANDARD OR QUIET UNITS

q
Refer to page 25 for Enclosure Part Numbers.
Ref. No. 1 2 3 4 5 PANEL PANEL PANEL PANEL PANEL,
Name of Part .... ............... ................ ................................... ................................... ................................... ..................................
Qty. 3 1 1 1 1
Standard Part No. 208 EAU216 209 EAU216 211 EAU216 21 OEAU216 219EAU216
Quiet Part No. 218EAU21 6 217 EAU216 215 EAU216 216EAU216 214EAU216
ENCLOSURE VENT FAN ASSEMBLY (WATER COOLED UNITS ONLY)
262 EAU81O (Ref. Drawing)
Refer to page 27 for Vent Fan Panel Part Numbers.
Ref. No.
Name of Part
Qty.
Part No.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
10 11 12 13
GUARDFAN ........ ....................... .................... SCREWFLANGED .............................................. WASHER, ...................................................... SCREW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RETAINER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WASHER, ,, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .......... ......... ................... ................... ................... .. .. .. .. . . . . .. .. .. .. ....... ....... ... .... ....... ............ ............ ............ ............ . . . , LOCKWASHER . . . . . . NUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BUSHINGSHEAVE . FAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 1 1 1 4 4
200EBB393 75K48 9.5A5 75A35 2014731 95A2 95B2 50B2 22G27 200EBB701 200ECM393 75LM51 50AW5
GUARD-FAN ...................... .. ............ ... ............ SCREWFLANGED ................................. ............ , NUT-FLANGED ...... ................ .. .......... .. .......... .. .
13-10-513X
Page28
ENCLOSURE - HARDWARE ALL UNITS
A
257 EAU81O-C (Ref. Drawing)
Refer to page 25 for Enclosure
Part Numbers.
Ref. No.
Name of Part
Qty.
Part No.
1 2 3 4 5 6
LATCH
........................................................
6 84 Ft. 104 92 6 3
31 D58 32E12 75LM51 50AW5 203ESO077 201EAP077
SEAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SCREWFLANGED NUTFLANGED DECAL DECAL ............................... ............... . .. .. ..... ... ....... .. ..... ...... ............ ....
... .... .. ..... ..... .. ....... ................ .......... .. . .. .. ... ... ........... .. ......... .......... .............. .
!3-10-513X
Page29
ENCLOSURE - HARDWARE QUIET BAFFLE UNITS AIR COOLED
P
1
260 EAU81&A (Ref. Drawing)

q
Refer to page 25 for Enclosure Part Numbers,
Ref. No.
Name of Part
Qty.
Patl No.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
LATCH
......... ....... ................................... ...... ............ ..... .. ....... .. ..... .. ........... ................................................. ................................
2 27 Ft. 30 30 6 4 4
31 D58 32E12 75LM51 50AW5 203ESO077 75LM135 50AW35
SEAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SCREW-FLANGED NUTFLANGED DECAL
..,........,...,,.....,..
SCREW-FLANGED NUTFLANGED
............ ..................... ............. . .. ................... ....... ................ ....
13-10-513X
Page30
ENCLOSURE QUIET BAFFLE - AIR COOLED
/
256 EAU81O-A (Ref. Drawing)
/
q
Refer to page 25 for Enclosure Part Numbers.
Ref. No.
Name of Part
Qty.
Part No.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
PANEL PANEL BASE BRACE POST
......................................................... ..... .............. .. .. .................................. .......................................................... ......................................................... ................... ....................................... ..................... ...........
3 3 1 1 2 1 1 1 2
218 EAU216 214 EAU216 215EAU285 204EAU326 209EAU313 222EAU314 221EAU314 205EAU326 213EAU216
FRAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FRAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ,....,. BRACE PANEL ........................... ...............
.... .. ............ . .. ....... ... ..................... ....
13- ?J-5~?Y
Fage31
ENCLOSURE SKIRT AIR COOLED - QUIET
265 EAU81O (Ref. Drawing) Refer to page 25 for Enclosure Part Numbers,
Ref. No.
Name of Part
Qty.
Part No.
1 2 3 4 5
SKIRT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SKIRT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SKIRT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SKIRT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HANGER .. .. ................... ......................... .......
2 2 1 1 6
200EAU1 367 201EAU1367 205EAU1367 206EAU1367 200EAU380
I3-10-513X
Page32
ENCLOSURE SKIRT WATER COOLED - QUIET
3
b
%
/
264 EAU81 O (Ref. Drawing)
* Refer to page 25 for Enclosure
Part Numbers.
Ref. No.
Name of Part
Qty.
Part No.
1 2 3 4 !5 6
SKIRT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SKIRT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SKIRT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SKIRT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SKIRT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HANGER. ...................... ................................
1 2 1 1 1 6
200 EAU1367 201EAU1367 203EAU1367 202EAU1367 204EAU1367 200EAU380
13-~0-513X
Page33
MOTOR GROUP (MAIN DRIVE MOTORS) WYE DELTA -50 HZ
COLUMN CODE
NAME OF PART
149 KW (200 HP) PART NO.
OPEN DRIP PROOF (ODP) 13A 13B MOTOR, 380V MOTOR, 415V 24CA861 24 CA862 24CA1 034 24CA1 035 24 CA1022 24CA1 037
TOTALLY
ENCLOSED FAN COOLED (TEFC) 24 CA863 24 CA864 24CA1 044 24CA1 045 24CA1 046 24CA1047
13C 13D
MOTOR, 380V MOTOR, 415V
MOTOR GROUP (FAN MOTORS)
AIR COOLED FAN MOTOR (COOLING MODULE) (T. E. F.C., 6 KW (10 HP), 1000 RPM, 50 HZ, 1.0 S. F.) VOLTAGE MOTOR, 380V MOTOR, 415V PIN 24CA1 042 24CA820
WATER COOLED FAN MOTOR (ENCLOSURE VENT FAN) (T. E. F.C., 0.37 KW (1/2 HP), 1500 RPM, 50 HZ, 1.0 S. F.) VOLTAGE MOTOR, 380V MOTOR, 415V PIN 24CA522 24 CA523
13-10513X
Page 34
OVERLOAD RELAY HEATER CONVERSION
LISTING
Refer to Motor Nameplate Amperage and Decal in Control Panel for Selection of Overload Relay Heater Packs.
CUTLERHAMMER PART NUMBER
GARDNER DENVER PART NUMBER
H2002B H2003B H2004B H20056 H2006B H20076 H2008B H2009B H2010B H2011B H2012B H2013B H2014B H2015B H2016B H2017B H2018 H2019 H2020 H2021 H2022 H2023 H2024
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..24 CA4101 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24CA4102 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24CA4103 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . >. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24CA4104 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . 24CA4105 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..24CA4106 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..24CA4107 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24CA4108 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24CA4109 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..24CA411O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24CA4111 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..24CA4112 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24CA4113 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24CA4114 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24CA4115 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24CA4116 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24CA2924 ,....,. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24CA2925
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24CA2926 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24CA2927 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24CA2893 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24CA2894 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24CA2928
t3-f10-Z?3X
l%ge35
CONTROLLER ASSEMBLY 149/1 87/224 KW (200/250/300 HP) WYE DELTA STARTERS
@@J@
1 (3
5 1 ;
INSIDE VIEW OF DOOR
Refer to parts listing on page 37.
.7.7.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . :>
-m :< -n :Z . . . . :0 .W
. .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .<. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . .E :~
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0
:0
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . +
m
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . :> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.H
.W
.1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:C
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . :Q --
:ti
CONTROLLER ASSEMBLY 149/1 87/224 KW (200/250/300 HP) - LESS MAIN MOTOR STARTER
!
5
1,
El
7*
I
%
r
16
INSIDE VIEW OF DOOR
Refer to parts listing on page 39.
149/187/224 Ref. No. Name of Part
CONTROLLER ASSEMBLY KW (200/250/300 HP) LESS MAIN MOTOR STARTER,
380/415V Qty. Part No.
ASSEMBLED ASSEMBLED ASSEMBLED
PANEL-ES+: PANEL-ES+: PANEL-ES:
NEMA 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NEMA 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NEMA12 .. ...................... ...... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. .. .. .. . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . . . . .. .. .. .. . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . . . .
1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 3 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 6 1 1 1 1 1 3 1
296 EAU466 297 EAU466 246 EAU466 247 EAU466 24 CA12677 24 CA4093 311AUX077 24 CA3729 301 AUX077 24 CA4322 24 CA4091 323AUX077 309AUX077 2116865 200EAU11 73 202EAP11 73 200 EAU179 24CA2907 24CA2908 24 CA2633 24 CA4242 24CA4137 2116923 24 CA4086 24CA4164 24 CA3896 24 CA4241
A B c D E 1= F G G 1 2 2 3
4 5 6 7*
ASSEMBLED PANEL ES: NEMA 4 . . . . . . . . FUSE, CONTROLLER ALARM RELAY . . . . . . . . FUSE, CONTROL TRANSFORMER, PRIMARY DECAL, PRIMARY FUSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FUSE, CONTROL TRANSFORMER, SECONDARY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DECAL, SECONDARY FUSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FUSE, FAN MOTOR, AIR COOLED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FUSE, FAN MOTOR, WATERCOOLED .............................. .. ... DECAL, FAN MOTOR FUSE, AIR COOLED ................................ ....... ....... ....... ....... .. .. .. .. .. ....... ....... ....... ....... . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. . . . . .. .. .. .. ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ... ... ... ... ... ... . ... ... DECAL, FAN MOTOR FUSE, WATERCOOLED TRANSFORMER, CONTROL ................ ELECTRONIC CONTROLLER ES+ ......... ELECTRONIC CONTROLLER ES, . . . . . . . . . . ELECTRONIC CONTROL ENCLOSURE OPERATOR, EMERGENCY STOP.... CONTACT BLOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TERMINAL BLOCK SECTION . . . . . . . . CURRENT TRANSFORMER ......... ... ..... ..... ..... .....
...... ...... ...... ...... ......
.... .. ...... ...... ...... .... ..
... ... ... ... . ...
9 10
11 12 13 17
STARTER, FAN MOTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . REPLACEMENT COIL FOR ITEM 9... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OVERLOAD RELAY FOR ITEM 9... .. ................... .............. ... FUSE HOLDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CONTACTOR -MAIN MOTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CURRENT TRANSDUCER .. ........ ... .. ... ........... ...... ...... ..... andre-installed inthe Main Stader Box.
This item isremoved
dufinginstallation
Refer to drawing on page 38.
IDENTIFICATION
AND INSTRUCTION
GROUP Air Cooled Part No, Water Cooled Part No,
Ref. No.
Name of Part
Qty.
1
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
DECAL, OPERATION DECAL, WARNING
& MAINTENANCE
............
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
217 ECM077 227 EAQ077 251 EAQ077 69F64 240 EAQ077 243 EAQ077 203 ESF077 2 12EAQ077 217 EAQ077 69F18 214EAQ077 205 ESO077 206 EAQ077 203 EAQ304 211 EAQ077 208 EAQ077 70E13 208 EAQ496 202 EAP077 221 EAQ077 215EAQ077 213EAQ077 222 EAQ077 218EAQ077 216EAQ077 200 EAQ1304 204 EDE077 204 EAQ304 205 EAQ304
217ECM077 227 EAQ077 251 EAQ077 69F64 240 EAQ077 243 EAQ077 203 ESF077 212 EAQ077 217EAQ077 69F18 214EAQ077 205 ESO077 206 EAQ077 203 EAQ304 211 EAQ077 208 EAQ077 70E13 208 EAQ496 202 EAP077 221 EAQ077 215 EAQ077 213EAQ077 222 EAQ077 218EAQ077 216EAQ077 200EAQ1 304 204 EDE077 204 EAQ304 205 EAQ304 200 ESP077 201 ESP077
....... ... ........... .......... QUESTION ...........
DECAL, QUALITY WITHOUT
DECAL, MADE IN THE U. SEA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DECAL, OIL FILL INSTRUCTIONS DECAL, AEON 9000SP DECAL, CAUTION LUBRICANT ................. ...............
................................ ...
DECAL, DANGER HOT OIL UNDER PRESSURE DECAL, WARNING INSPECT RESERVOIR DECAL, VERTICAL GARDNER DENVER
........
............ PARTS
DECAL, NOTICE - USE GARDNER DECAL, DRAIN MOISTURE DAILY
DENVER
................. ............
DECAL, DANGER DO NOT BREATHE TAG-INSTRUCTION, (COUPLING
JAW GAP) . . . . . . . . ......
DECAL, WARNING ROTATING MACHINERY DECAL, CAUTION DO NOT LIFT...
..............
RIVET, NAME PLATE TO BASE PIATE-NAME
....................
.................................... ........................ ........... MANUAL ...
DECAL, ELECTRA SAVER
DECAL, CAUTION USE FLOOR PLATE DECAL, WARNING - READ OPERATOR DECAL, WARNING ELECTRICAL
SHOCK
......... ......
DECAL, WARNING - ROTATING MACHINERY DECAL, DANGER -DO NOT MODIFY..
............ 0. . . . . . . .
DECAL, WARNING - ELECTRICAL POCKET, INSTRUCTION TAGS
SHOCK
.................... ..........
DECAL, PARTS LIST & SERVICE MANUAL TAG-INSTRUCTION, TAG-INSTRUCTION, DECAL,IN HEAT AUTO-SENTRY AUTOSENTRY EXCHANGER
.............. .............. ................. ...............
DECAL, OUT HEAT EXCHANGER
I 3-10-513X
Page 40
REPAIR KITS ROUTINE MAINTENANCE KIT (Heavy Duty Air Filter) (Incl, next two items) .... 1 4 3
300EAU6013 2117151 201EDM369
ELEMENT, ELEMENT, PERIODIC
AIR FILTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OIL FILTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KIT (Inlet Valve) (Includes next 6 items) , ., , . . . . . . . .................................................
MAINTENANCE
201EAU6003 1 1 1 1 1 1 25BC160 25BC268N 203SSU715N 78A366 200SSW067 S11543D 202EAU6013 1 1 1 300EAU035 200EAU715N 2116755 300SSU6013 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 2 301SSU6013 302SSU6013 12BA52 12W34 12BA79 78W54 12C60 12BA51 301SSU6013 1 1 1 1 2 4 2 4 1 201EAU6003 208SSU715N 77H55 77H50 209SSU715N 60AM46 60DD65 25BC138N 25BC222 302SSU6013 1 1 1 1 1 12 12 6 6 1 80M28 60DD571 60DD689 25BC205 25BC431 204SSY732 205SSY732 207SSY732 208SSY732 90AR923
RING GASKET, GASKET GASKET SPRING,
........................................................ ........................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ,. .................................................... ................................
VALVE DISC
INLET VALVE PISTON ASSEMBLY SEPARATOR KIT (includes
next 3 items) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ................................................ ................................. ......................
OIL SEPARATOR GASKET, LUBRICANT PERIODIC
....... ........... ................................. .... (OIL SEALGREASE) KIT(lncludes
OVERHAUL
next eight items)
GASKET
KIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............. ....... ............. .............................................. ............................... ............... .............................................. .............................................. ..............................................
OIL SEAL KIT....,.,,.......,., ROLLER BEARING ROLLER BEARING ROLLER BEARING WAVE SPRING ROLLER BEARING ROLLER BEARING GASKET KIT (includes PERIODIC GASKET
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ,.
next nine items) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KIT(INLET VALVE) .....................
MAINTENANCE
........................................................ .......... .. ... ......................... .. .... ...................................................... .................................................
SHIM SET (SHAFT) SHIM SET GASKET
........................................................ SEAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .... .......... ..... ....... ........... .. . ... items) ....................................
PACKING RING FASTENER GASKET GASKET
........................................................ ELIMINATOR nextten
OIL SEAL KIT (includes WEAR SLEEVE OIL SEAL OIL SEAL O-RING O-RING
........................ ..... ................ ....
..... ................ ............................ ...... ....................................................... ........................... ......... ..... ........... .... ........................................................
SHIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SHIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SHIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SHIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECK VALVE ..................................................
I3-10-513X
Fage41
REPAIR KITS WEAR SLEEVE INSTALLATION PULLER SCREW SCREW SCREW GUIDE TOOL PERIODIC /REMOVAL KIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 200SSU4017 200SSQ219 200SSQ340 655EE030 655ED120 75D178 200SSU450 200SSQ074 201EAU6013 1 1 2109365 2116855 203EAU6013 2 2 1 1 90AR261 9OAR1O7 90AR51 88H139 206EAP6013 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 91 B70 91 B80 91B81 21 D264 88H242 88H195
EAU77790 2109117
(Includes next seven items) ........................................................ ................................................. ........................................................ .................................. .. .. .................. ........................................................ ......................................................... .......................................................... KIT (Package) (includes next2 items) ............ PLATE PULLER
MAINTENANCE
ELEMENT (MlXlNGVALVE150 KIT (MINIMUM PNEUMATIC PRESSURE
F.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VALVE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . items) . . . . . . . . . . .
CONTROLS
AND GAUGES (includes nextfour
CHECK VALVE SHUITLE
..................................................
VALVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . REGULATOR KIT.... ........................... ............. .........................................
PURGE VALVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PRESSURE ELECTRICAL
CONTROL
SOLENOID SOLENOID SOLENOID
VALVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VALVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VALVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROBE ........................................... ......................... ......................... ............................................ ., 200 HP) (includes next item) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .......................................... 250 &300 HP) (includes next item) ...........
THERMISTOR TRANSDUCER
VACUUM SWITCH, DRIVE COUPLING
KIT(51L31,
CUSH1ONS (lncludes6) DRIVE COUPLING KIT(51L32,
EAU77786 2109118
CUSH1ONS (lncludes6) LUBRICANT(AEON 5GALLON 9000SP)
..........................................
PAIL . . 0. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..............................................
28G29 28G30
55 GALLON DRUM TOUCH-UPPAINT
5 GALLON PAIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l GALLON CAN lQUART CAN ................................................. .................................................. REGULATOR (Optional) NEMAl .......................... (Optional) (Optional) ................. .................
28H76 28H84 28H83 90AR152 EAQ770 EAQ770 3 4
WATER TEMPERATURE MAGNETIC MAGNETIC
WATER SHUTOFFVALVE
WATER SHUTOFF VALVE NEMA4
13-10-513X
Page42
326 Series
VEHICLE LooP DETECTORS
Revision
P/N
5, 8/25/97
070232
f~
Corporate Headquarters
Intersection Development
CORPORA TION
IDC Detector Systems
9300 E. Hall Road Downey, CA 90241-5309 USA Tel: (562) 923-9600, (800) 733-7872 Fax: (562) 923-7555
11650 Seaboard Circle Stanton, CA 90680 USA Tel: (714) 895-6366, (800) 828-7775 Fax: (714) 895-6145
INTRODUCING THE 326 FAMILY
FAMILY TRAITS
. . . .
Compatible with all radio control and remote openers. Features latest state-of-the-art mount technology.
All controls panel. Sensitivity switch, dropout are accessible on
. .
q
Large loop inductance microhenries.
range: 20 to 2500
surface
the front
1l-pin Amphenol rear connector. Failsafe or failsecure models available. An infinite resence mode is available
setting a D f P switch, separate Output Output output relays: Two s ~ by
Boost, selectable by a DIP eliminates possible detector during passage of high bed
A is presence
vehicles - this feature is particularly useful in sliding gate applications.

. .
B is DIP switch selectable presence, pulse on entry, pulse on or fail output.
for
exit
Rotary
switch
for 10 selectable
sensitivity

levels.
Two
Both
outputs
can be delayed
for 2 seconds
color, high intensity indicator for Detect, Power,

indication. Self-tuning tuning. No warm-up Continuous remembers failed and complete
status
and Loop
LED Fault

switch, causing the detector to ignore vehicles passing over the loop faster than about 5 miles per hour.
by setting
a DIP
. . .
environmental
Both outputs can be extended for O seconds, 2 seconds, 5 seconds, or 10 seconds, by setting DIP switches. Detector will not retune if power is lost for approximately 3 seconds and then restored - prevents vehicle detection from being lost during brief power interruptions. ABS plastic case. Extra compact size. In ut volts es available: 24 VAC, 120 VAC 2$OVAC, !2VDC and 24VDC.
required.

Winky-BlinkM and indicates
loop monitor intermittent and
loops - a great troubleshooting
aid.
q
If intermittent or failed loop self-heals, detector resumes normal operation without manual reset.
4 DIP switch selectable
permit
complete
elimination
loop frequencies of crosstalk.
Winky-Blink is a registered trademark of IDC Detector Systems.

IDC Detector Systems Fage 1 1-326, Rev. 5- 8/25/97
VITAL STATISTICS
Use 802A CABLE IN WIRE CO LORSI 1
2
Amph-enol 86CP11 802A Cable 326-3 120 VAC.

Line
Connector Receptacle ~ 326-23

112 VDC 12
or SKTO130 ! 326-7
MODEL NO, 326-24

(+) 24 VDC (+)
124 VAC, )24 VAC, Line Neutrall
Black
White
120 VAC, Neutral

Chassis Output
/Output Loop Loop
VDC (-) 24 VDC (-)
3 4
5 6
7 8 9
Orange
Green YeHow
Blue Gray Brown
Output B Relay (N. O.)

Ground
A Relay A Relay (CO~,lj (N 0,)
Red Violet
Output Output Output
B Relay B Relay
(COM) (N. C,)
10
A Relay (N. C,)
I
2 3 I !5 4
Am phenol Use 802A

q Note:
The 326-38 is similar
86CPI
1 Connector Receptacle
locator key is positioned
Cable
or SKTO130
to the 326-8 except
the connector
down
802A CABLE
PIN
Model No.
/ 326-8
Line 240
WIRE Black White Orange Green Yellow Blue Gray Brown Red Violet
COLORS
326-38* VAC, Line

Line
326-9 120 VAC,

120 VAC,
326-19 Line 240 VAC, Lin~ 240 VAC, Lin~
~240 VAC, ~240 VAC, ,Output i Output Output Output Loop Loop Chassis Output 10utput
Line
240 VAC, (N.O ) (N.0,)
Neutral
B Relay A Relay
Loop Loop Output Output Ou[put Output A Relay A Relay A Relay B Relay B Relay B Relay Ground (N C,) (COM) (N. O.) (COM) (N. O.) (N. C.)
B Relay (COM) A Relay (COM)
6 ; 7 8 9 10 11
Ground A Relay (N. C.) B Relay (N. C.)
Output Output Chassis
White/Green
NOTE: The N.O. and N.C. contacts connected, and no vehicle present
shown above are with power ap Ii >d, IOOP an c1 lilsecure f, and are true for both failsafe RELAY CONDITIONS
FAlLSECURE POWER OK
POWER OUT Closed Open Loop Normal Car Closed Open Mom. Mom. Closed Vacant Loop Failed Car Open Closed
units.
OUTPUT
t FAILSAFE POWER OK
Loop Normal outputs A (Presence) B (Pulse) NO. N C. NO. Car Closed Open Mom. Closed Vacant Open
Loop Failed Car Closed Open Open Vacant Closed Open Open
POWER OUT Open Closed
Vacant Open Closed
Open
Closed
Closed
Open
NC, N 0, B (Presence) -NC.

N.0,
Mom. Open Closed Open

Open
Closed Closed Closed Open Open Open Closed Closed Closed

Open Closed Open Closed Open
Open Closed
Open
Open
Open Open Open Closed Closed Closed

Open Closed Open Closed Open Open Closed Open
Open Closed Open

Closed
Closed Open Open Closed
Closed
Open Closed
B (Fail)
Open
Closed
Closed Closed
Open Closed
,N, C.
Closed
Closed
!-326, Rev. 5- 8/25/97
Page 2
VITAL STATISTICS(Cont.) . SENSITIVITY: Vehicle detection results from

area the ~~ Level 9 0,0130/0 Level 4
O.lslo
a sufficient change in loop inductance (-AL/L) settings, shown below, permd caused by a vehicle passing over the loop. 10 switch selectable selection of the lowest possible level to consistently detect a vehicle with a small underside
or one highest with setting. the highest Use over-the-road screwdriver clearance. with Level O is the lowest setting; level 9 is a pocket a fine tip to make the adjustment.
Level 8 Level 7
0,02%
O.O?J~o
Level 3
Level
Level
0.2/0
(),3/,
6 Level 5
Level .
0.050/0 0.080/0
2 Level 1
O
0.50/0
0.8%
POWER: > 20-28

>
>
90-135
180-270
VAC,50/60 Hz, 6.0 watts max. VAC, 50/60 Hz, 6.0 watts max. VAC, 50/60 Hz, 6.0 watts max.
5x20mm, 5x20mm, l/2A, l/4A,
>
10-16 > 20-32
VDC,
95 ma. max.
ma. max.
VDC, 65
FUSE: > 24 VAC power: > 120 VAC power: > 240 VAC power: OPERATING
SIO-BIO
SIO-BIO
> 12 VDC power: 5x20mm, 1A, Fast-Blo > 24 VDC power: 5x20mm, 1A, Fast-Blo
5x20mm, l/4A, SIO-BIO. -40F to +180F (-40C to +82C).
TEMPERATURE:
SIZE: Width = 1.5 (3.8 cm); Height= 2.7 (5.9 cm); Depth =4.6 (1 1.6 cm), excluding connectors and switches. WEIGHT: 10.4 oz. (295
grams).
24 VAC VERSION:
Use with Class 2 approved transformer.
PLAY ITSAFE!
BEFORE CONNECTING A UNIT, CHECK THAT THE VOLTAGE PROVIDED MATCHES THE IS PROPERLY CONNECTED FOR THE INPUT VOLTAGE AND THAT THE INSTALLATION UNIT TO BE INSTALLED.
POAER/DETECT INDICATOR IS BAD = NO POW:,? Oi? FUSE = PC7iER APPL)ED TO DETECTOR, lNTEF?NAL FUSE IS GOOD, & NC) VEHICLE BEi NG DETECTED RED = VEHICLE 13El N: DETECTED FLASH~NG = L1310F FA.lLIj RE OF: GREEPd
SENSITIVITY SWITCH 9 = HIG O = LO.; i: SUITAEILE 3o12~ FOR tv3ST APPLICATI:::3
POSITION
DIP SWITCH SETTINGS CONTROLS SENSITiVITY BOOST NO SENSITIVITY 30CIST ON I?JCREASES SENSITIVITY 2 LEVELS ABOVE SE NSITIJITT SWITCH SETTING CURli\l C DE TECTICh! uPPER I ItA>T OF BOOST CANNOT . E~C_E~~_ ~EyE~ _: P~SIT~O~ 2 CONTROLS PRESENCE MODE (OFF = NORMAL PRESENCE MODE ON = INFINITE PRESENCE MODE WARNl N G INFINITE PRESENCE MODE )/lAY BE LOST IN THE EVENT OF POWER INTERRUPTION GREATER SEC. TH/4N 3 - . POSITION 3 CONTROLS DELAY TIME OFF = NO CALL DELAY ON = SEC CALL DELAY 2 POSITIONS 4 & 5 CONTROLS EXTEN@ TIME POS 4OFF, POS 5OFF = NO C4LL EXTEND POS 4ON, POS 5OFF = 2 SEC CALL EXTEND POS 4OFF, POS 5ON = 5 SEC CALL EXTEND PC)S 4oFd !. IO SEC_~4~L POS 5ON = ExTE_NQ ___ __ .. POSITIONS 6 & 7 SELECTS OUTPUT B MODE POS 6OFF, POS 7OFF = PULSE ON ENTRY POS 6OFF, POS 7ON = PRESENCE POS 6ON, POS 7OFF = PULSE ON EXIT POS 6ON, POS 7ON = FAIL OUTPUT . POSITIONS 8 & 9 LO(IP FREQUENCY SETTINGS POS 8ON, POS 9ON = LOVJ POS 8OFF, POS 9ON = MEDIUM LOW POS 8ON, POS 9OFF = MEDIUM HIGH POS 8OFF, Pf3S QOFF = HIGH 1 (11~ = =
- - -.
..
12,0\/LC-
5x20Vll/l
240\~AC5x20i:l
Ll
1,/~A l/4A
SLCI-BLC
SLO BLC
24\/i3C5x2CIMM
1A SLO BLO
I------ ------i
LOOP FAIL (A)
0039601
LOOP
FAIL GREEN RED
(B)
u u
.
INDICATOR INDICATOR
OUTPUT INDICATOR: Multi Ie function, If the indicator is off, no power is applied to the unit or the fuse IS bad and must \ e replaced. When power IS applied and no vehicle is on the loop(s), the indicator is green. When a vehicle is detected, the indicator becomes red. [fan one of the Wink -Blin@ indications intermittent or continuous loop fault occurs, it displays is out of the specified range or sud J enly changes more shown above. If the loop inductance will assume the condition as than 25~, the indicator will displa condition (A and the outputs shown m the Output Relay Con J ition Table. I f the loop self-heals, the output will return to normal o eration and the indicator will display condition A), as long as no vehicle is on the loop(s . P a vehicle drives onto the loop, the indication wil\ change to condition (B as long as f clears., the )ault was an the ve.Aicle is on the 100 (s). Reset the detector. If the fault indication
intermittent condition. If the fault reappears must be repaired before the indication can immediately be cleared. after reset, the fault IS still current and
RESET: To reset the detector, momentarily for 30 seconds or more.
change the sensitivity setting or remove power
. PRE:; ENCE .. /l ORMA1.

} I,)ld tlnl{!
Applies to Output B only when Output B is set to Presence M()[IES: ) switch position 2 = OFF). Hold time is nominally 30 to 60 minutes for cars. (1)11
(IIY~~IKjson
IOOP 9eOff@V
and
number
of turns, vehicle size, and position of the
,,(:~)icler(~l,l[lv~! I(Jthe loop.

11/FINITE: (1)11 switch position 2 = ON). Continuous detection is maintained as long as a tt~c loop(s) and power is not interrupted for more than 3 seconds. For If:;t]icle l<; )] ,,rllnterrlll ll~ii.ll;!illite hold during a longer power loss, it will be necessary to use either the ~j26.23 ~, :i,)() ..4 connected to the appropriate standby/backup battery,
.
~U1
pUT B
Moo~S:
AVallablewith
position
the appropriate
settings
of the
DIP
switches shown below,

B follows Output A,
> ~re~ence:
([ )It switch
6 n OFF, position
7 = ON),
Output
DETCCTO?
[-~qj. ...
! LOO? L LOOP
,9!0,
F(II
:;1
UN
ENTRY
6 =
PULSE ON EXIT OFF,

position 7 =
. pULSE ON I; NTRY: (DIP switch position 6250 millis[!(:~~l~d Pulse outPut as vehicle
> PULSE ON EXIT: (DIP switch position
OFF). Output
B generates
-
drives 6 = ON,
onto
the IOOP. 7 =
position
OFF).
Output B generates a
an output warning in the device
2g0 n~illisecolld p~jlse output as vehicie drives off the

> ~AIL: 6VCIII or
B
loop. Output B generates external
(DIP
switcl]
position loQP
6 = ON,
position
7 = ON).
of an existlllg
fault. This output maybe used to control an

Delays the detect (call) outputs after the
otl~er signalil~g device.

vehicle enters the loop.
when set to Presence or Pulse on Entry.
OPTION: ALL DELAY 8 LJlflut U is affected only
> (f)ll switch position 3 = OFF). O seconds. No delay. & (~lf> switch position 3 = ON). 2 second delay to ignore th~l~ 5 miles per hour (8 kph).
cars
passing
over the loops faster
* CALL EXTEND
OPTION: Holds the detect (cali) outputs for a fixed time after the vehicie clears Pulse on Exit will occur at the end tho 1001) Output B is affected only when set to Presence. output. of the Plosenw > (Dlf Qwitch position 4 = OFF, position 5 = OFF). O seconds. No extension. > (Dip Qwitch position 4 = ON, position 5 = OFF), 2 second extension. > (Dl[ ~wi[ch position 4 = OFF, position 5 = ON). 5 second extension. > (Dip r;witch position 4 = ON, position 5 = ON). 10 second extension.
+
F
1
DZTECT - ---(sENs 4 = 4) NO DETECT (SENS 4 =

4}
DSTECTOR
OUTPUT t
1 A b
Ulbkl
SENSITIVITY
BOOST
OFF
0309101
Without
sensitivity boost (DIP switch position 1 = OFF), the sensitivity remains at the level selected by the user and detection may be lost on high bed vehicles (between the tractor and the rear axles), which would allow the gate or door to close prematurely on the vehicle and cause damage,
DETECT- ---(SENS 4 = 7) NO DETECT (SENS 4 = 4)
D: TECTOR
OUTPUT
1 A b
kwl
--.
.-
. With sens!twity boost turned on (DIP switch position 1 = ON), the sensitivity is automatically raised two levels (the maximum increase can never exceed level 9) above rhe level selected by the user. This allows the user to select the minimum sensitivity necessary to initially detect the desired vehicles, while eliminating nuisance detection of small vehicles, such as bicycles, hand trucks, etc. The sensitivity returns to its preset level when the vehicle leaves the loop. iEK Detector
Systems
Page 7
. CROSSTALK: When two or more similar loops connected to different detectors are installed in close proximity, detection by one detector can cause the adjacent loops to operate erratically. . To avoid crosstalk, set the frequency switches shown below. of each detector to a different frequency, using the
> (DIP switch position 8 = ON, Position 9 = ON). Low. > (DIP switch position 8 = OFF, Position 9 = ON), Medium Low. > (DIP switch position 8 = ON, Position 9 = OFF). Medium High. > (DIP switch position 8 = OFF, Position 9 = OFF). High. . To properly obtain the proper frequency, measure the frequent of each detector with the frequency switches set to High, using the IDC DS Part No. 501 2 requency Tester, Then set the frequency switches oneachdetectorto establish at least a 5% frequencvdifference between each other detector.
TROUBLESHOOTING 1
SYMPTOM Indicator is not on.
I
POSSIBLE CAUSE No input voltage.
Indicator flashes in groups of 3 short flashes per second.
1. Faulty or open loop or leadin. 2, Poorly crimped terminals and/or loose connections.
--
CORRECTION 1. Replace defective fuse. 2. Check external fuse or circuit breaker. 3. Check wiring to detector, 1. Check d.c. resistance of I loop (normally <5 ohms). 2 Perform megger test between loop lead and ground (>100 megohms). 3. Check that loop is tightly connected to the proper terminals, if used. 4. Check that splices are tightly soldered and sealed , against moisture.
1-325, llev. 5- &XL97
..-. .
SAW CUT EXIT AT CIJREi OR END OF PAJEL!SP,T
[~-) 1--1 T
$ljx~~:;
SPLICE
AREA
~ _
I I I I I I I I I I I I
L_
T,
t_____________
LGO: (1/2 SEALANT MIN DEPTH) 1 1
.__--L
I I PAVEMENT
_____
I
13ACKER F/00 LOOP WIRES
I ~ L03~ SEALANT I : ,
BACKfR ROD LoOp WIRES
LGOP
(~pIcAL) _______
SAW CJT
,,?
LEAD-IN (TYPICAL)
L______ _______
SAW CUT
__l
,I
______-J
PART 0S1-116
DSI WIRE NO I AWGI OUTER 16 16 20 .218 .245 .120
SLOT OIA WIDTH 1/4 1/4 1/3
TABLE 1 BACKER RoD ROLLER OISC FART NO. [ cm I PART NO B9-250 8R25!I BR-125 .375 .375 .250 RLR250 RL.?250 RL?-125 AS? HALT, ASPHALT CONCRETE
USE
IN PAvEMENT) SLAB)
CONCRETE (U NSTA3LE (MONOLITHIC
0S1116S DSI-120
TABLE 2 t+JMEZR OF TURNS BY PERIMETER PERIMETER fFT) NO OF TURNS 10 14 20 34 6a 13 19 32 66 UP 6 5 4 3 2

?,409401
TYPICAL
SAW CUT LOOP
INSTALLATION
Two types of loop installations may be used. For existing pavements, saw cut loops (illustrated above) are required. Preformed loops encased in PVC pipe orXLPE tubing, of which IDC Detector Systems offers a wide assortment, may be used in new installations, The geometry (size and shape) of the loop defines the detection zone characteristics. Loop size may vary and will depend on lane width, traffic patterns, and types of vehicles to be detected. The loop installation area must be chosen to avoid locating the loop wires directly on reinforcing steel, electrical cables, conduits, or water pipes. Loop wires should be installed a minimum of 2 inches above, NEVER BELOW, reinforcing bars or other metallic objects, Bars and other metallic objects running at right angles to the loop wires have less effect than when running parallel. Electrical cables near the loop can possibly cause false impulses to the magnetic field generated by the loop, causing erratic operation of the detector. For more complete instructions and information, refer to IDC Detector Systems publication Openers.
SAW CUT LOOP INSTALLATIONS

.
The saw slots must be the proper depth (1 k to 3 inches) and clean, wi?h no sharp corner which could damage the wire insulation during installation. The greater depth should be used in softer pavement materials to protect the loop installation for a longer period of time against damage from surface erosion and wear. . The ~Jire must be held tightl in the bottom of the slot by means Of a plas!lc foanl type material called backer rod. When t L is approach is used to completely cover the vjire, it forms a barrier between the wire and the sealant, which allows the wire to shift with any pavement shift, thereby increasing the life expectancy of the loop. However, if the backer rod is not pressed tightly in the slot, the loop wires will be loose in the slot. Loose wires in the slot can cause false calls from vibration or sudden movement. If the wire is completely covered, it is ESSENTIAL that no voids exist which would allow water to collect. The water will expand during freezing conditions. Freeze/thaw cycling will push the wire up and out of the slot, causing a loop failure.
.
The wire used in the loop should have an insulation rated fordirect burial. Since moisture can cause significant changes in the dielectric constant of the insulation, which results in excessive loop (frequency) drift, choose an insulation which is most impervious to moisture. Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) insulation (TFFN, THHN, and THHN-THWN) should be avoided, since it tends to absorb moisture and cracks easily. Cross linked polyethylene (XLPE) or polyester insulated wire is very resistant to moisture absorption and provides good abrasion resistance. Three IDC IDC Detector Systems DSI-116 loop Detector Systems products meet these requirements. wire is 16 AWG stranded wire with 0.080 XLPE insulation for use in 1A wide saw cuts in both concrete and asphalt. DSI-1 16S loop wire, a 16 AWG wire with polyester insulation and an added polyester sleeve to absorb the stresses created by long term pavement shift, is excellent for use in 1,4 wide saw cuts in asphalt. DSI-120 loop wire, a 20 AWG wire with polyester insulation, may be used in I,a wide saw cuts in concrete.
.
Choose a sealant carefully to match the application and the pavement. Hard setting epoxies should not be used with asphalt. Caution should be observed when using hot sealants, as high temperatures can damage or destroy the wire insulation. IDC Detector Systems loop wire types, described above, are designed for use with hot sealants. The end wires of the loop shall be held tightly with backer rod in the bottom of the saw cut slot between the perimeter of the loop and the splice points. Where they leave the saw cut (in the hand hole at the curb or edge of the pavement), they shall be twisted with a minimum of five twists per foot. The feeder cable (to extend the lead-in) shall be a shielded twisted pair with a high density polyethylene insulation. The shield shall be floated (left unconnected and insulated) at the splice point between the loop and the feeder cable and shall be grounded to earth ground at the cabinet end only. Any other grounding arrangement can lead to ground loops and cause erratic system operation. Alls Iices shall be soldered, even when initiall done with crimp type splices. Each splice point shal 1 protected with a moisture proof seal. z ailure to observe these two precautions are two be of the most common causes of problems in this system. CAUTION: when soldering, use only enough localized heat to adequately flow the solder through the connection without burning the surrounding insulation. Another common problem is caused by loose connections at the terminal strip in the cabinet. Crimp type terminals should be soldered in the crimp sleeve and the screws on the terminal Adding Iockwashers is a further deterrent to the screws strip securely tightened down. loosening up \A~ith time and vibration. It is also strongly advisable to perform a loop inductance and leakage test. This can be accomdished usm~ the IDC Detector Systems Digital Loop Testing System (comprised of IDC DS P/N 501 Frequ&cy Tester Module, jDC DS P~N 503 Loop Excitation Module, and IDC DS Loop inductance measurement shall be P/N 507 Loop Insulation Tester (or equivalent). between 20 and 2,500 microhenries. Leakage resistance shall be equal to or greater than 100 megohms. Page 10 IDC Detector Systams
1-326, Rev. 5- 8125/97
NORGREN
For compkle w orher tednid
Installation
re~ir parls
Instructions
General Purpose Compressed

assislan~, f=nlacl
Air Filter/Regulators
your nearest
NPAK4m June IWO
inlo{mallon.
repair ins~~tionso NO RGREN dtswbwor.
SPECIFICATIONS
IAaximum In}el Pre9wre: Transparent
Bowl:
150 psig (103
bar)
Mlal Bowl: 2SI psig (17,2 bar) Temperature Range: q Transparent Melal BwI: Bowl: O lo 125F (-18 to 52aC) O to 175F (.18 tO 79%] 01 the supply air
E@fow 35F (2C), me dewpoinl mu3: ba less Ihan air Wnperalure, INSTALLATION
NOTE Thtsa
Ilquld filter/rwgulator3 wfll W*IW (hose drops. condonsaflmr mmovo from vJpor, fho however, most
qnd
solld air.
particles
ccrnpmssed
W//l ~SS
condenss
q
fhrough
info
t.Ml/fS and could

dowmstmam Insfsll
q
Ilqv)d
form
qir
ttmporafum If watu
n alr havo
q
ADJUSTME~ 1. Before turning on system pressure, nxn filler/re$julalor adjustment counmrdtiw~sa unfit all load is removed from the r~ulating spring. 2. Turn on syslem pressure. adjusment cfotiwise until the 3. Turn fillerhgulamr desired ouI1et pre~ure is reached. aher making a change 4. To avoid minor adjustment in pressure setting, ahvays approach the desired pressure frolm a bwer pressure. When reduang from a higher IO a bwar satting, first reduce 10 some pressure less than that desired, then bring up 10 lhe desird pressure. tQhlen jam 5. On models wi[h a T-Handle adjustment, nu[ to lock pressure setting. 6. On models wi~ an adjusting knob, push Ihe Iockring on Ihe adjusting knob IN tob~ and OUl to unlock the pessure sernng, Some fillerhqulator!i are not equipped with the bckring. On these models, simply push be adjusting knob IN to lock and OUT to unlock thra pressure seining. SERVICING 1. Filter/regulators with manual drain must be drained as frequendy as necessary 10 keep liquid level below batffe. II liquid level rises above baffle, liquid will be carried dcwmsueam. 2. Clean or replace filter elemenl when it becomes p:iJfiglSd 0{ diiif.
dryer
could
d~rlrnontalqfleci on tht
1.Air line
appikallon
pipingshould be same size as fillar/reguIator ports. vertically (drain al bonom) in 2. Install filKrr/regulalor air line. Locale upslream of lubricators and as near as possible 10 the application pcinl. In systems witi a cydk demand, ins[a!l filler/regula!of ups!ream 01 frequen?y cyc!!ng directional control valves. 01 arrow on the filter/ 3. Air flow musl be in directiin regulator. In soma cases, he word IN is stamped next to the inlet pofl. Connect piping 10 proper pcfls using pipe threed sealant cm male threads onfy. 00 not alkmv sealant 10 enter interiof of Kl[erlregula!or. mnnecl an outiel Dressure oauoe 10 4. II desired -. one of the gauge porls. Gauge Pns can also be used as additional oudets. Plug unu%d gauge porls. 5. On filler/regulators with en automatic drain, a drain line may be ccmnecled 10 he drain fining. Avoid restrictions in the drain line. 6, Before applying air pressure, b sure bowl is hand tight.
@ -. .- . . ... .- -.
. ..-. -.. .
NORGREN @19%) NORGREN

--
MINIATURE
FOR INDUSTRIAL
OPERATION
REGULATOR
AIR OR WATER SERVICE
NIP-206 Oclober 1987 SuD~rsedes Mav 1984
COMPRESSED
TYPE
R04 R06 11.111
RETWY:l 1
4,:
!.
if
& ,..w1B!o, ,S .-d ,. . .o.n~,.,ud mr or .vater %vt!wn to ma<nt aon a ..u IY conlf ant o.tlat Dfel. wra datoi:, Chm$. n ,. I?. ,nla c.r. twrs and chm W8 ,n do~nllremm Ilo.m rcqu, ramanll OUII*[ CW*I. s., a 01 cOntroll@d by If!, KIIutung hnob G, ic. aw II 1, Clot.w18a ,otnl, o ,.c,.~ma md cmntarclock W,U ro!al non dacrsuml OUIIO1 P,* II IX* Wh. n th~ wslu%lm ..1 Ill ,S rotat.d fully count ~r.lockw, w, no fa(cs ,S .Ppl,.d !0 fh. rWJIMIfIQ w,,ng (2), *.c! m~ ..1.. 151 an held closti by the VII.* wring (7). 111 como, mwt [h. requl. t,ng wr, ng (2) ~hich apol, as n down. Clock-,w mt~tIOn of Ih. Sdiuslnu.1 and ..1.. cmn .&wrnbly (41. Th# dnwhrqm md vd.a Pm 1114mbl V w..,a IO, C. on too 01 the d,.oht.gm 141 mm doe.wwd, fcrc, na vd.~ (5) off ill u41 wh,ch BIIOW8 IIUKY 10 Ilow thru III* regulntof to lha
(5 I mu.8 .ow*rd. Comor.w,ng Ih. r*g.l.!,. g wr, ng 12) Uo...ard mo. omrnl S!OOI vvhm ma Iofcel Wh,n [h.r# ,1 .0 dowmrf aam tbw b,low ,*, a,,phr,~m bal,nc, [h, lo,ce, ~bo,, IPI. d,.ohragm. demmd, Ih# b41wIc9 0( IO(C*I occun WI II! thg v. I.* [51 clowd WIIm thwa II do~nttr..m Ilow d.mmd. lht bdancw ot lore. s occurt wh~n Iha vd. e oo. n, %11,cmnrly to como+nta!. fof d.m. nd. thus m., nt.,., ng rhc d.mrod OLJ!IOI Pr. tcur.. Flc LlEVl?40 TYPE REGULATORS. W,!h ,.l,.., g c.g.lamr,. o.11.I pre$mrm can b.rbduc8db.8n (bough [h. WSIWI! IS flmd+ndod Wh. n [h. .oI. IIm. nl 11I IS lurn.d co. rife, clockw, m [hm lorc8 on tho r4g.ln!mQ Wrtng [21 a%rcducod. and 010 SSU18,. The tunt, ng chamber (3) mo..~ the d,whragm and Th,, uow.,d mo,,m. n, o~e., ~h. ,,1,, t D,uw (6) ,n !?!, ..1., O,n and ,,lw p,n ti, wnbly [4) ~m,,d thru [h. r.1,.l patm~ 161 and ban.. ! 18) to allows Il.&d to .tc.cx from lh. oul!. t lad. of m.
,eg.l,to,
qtmotc.h. r, A, ,hm O.!l, [ !J,, uu,, d,c,, a, to tha teduc.d dow..vva 8nd cIo181 lh. fsl,et oalmqc Th. d,aonr.gm WIII I$k*_,m ma.# uowwd in r.wonm to dlowmg m, !0 8Ka P* 10 the .1m0Wh9~. rngvl atof w!!!ng,
or,,,.,, an
ql
I!,
nQ. th.
d,aohra.gm C.fnu. r.
mo. bo. e
el Ihe
RATEO OPERATING
I.IBI prms.r#. 400 mig
CONDITIONS
1276
mcr8aJ4
,n 0.!19!
d.kcflb.d am. . How*. *,. lha flow C8DU, W of the r.li*f pa~mp II lIm#!od. *.d d.o. nd,.9 ucm. !h* source of th* W.. ore%, ur#mnditmn. th. o.tt. t D,CWW. m,~t ,x,.. to I Domz hg., f,c.ntly h,ghw mm [h* ~wulalo, w!t,.9 For lh, ! must .01 b r91$8d upon 91 afi o.erorsswre uf#!y dwtc8. SEE r.~ta., [h. ,.1,.1 f.mlw. of B ,ag.lal=r wARNlti Gnot#lmlOw, .autl. ! pr.ssur. cm notb NoNRELIEVING TYPE REGULATORS. W,!h no. rd,. vsng rwwlm. ,s, a Th# .O.,.l$e.. n lvoa tag.la!or ,8 ,d@. tnc#l to the r.l, wi. g tyo. red. cma II th. svllem IS d.zc!+nded ~,th m. ..emiio. of ih. . . . . . p,. -h, ch ,t no! mu!pimd w,th r.li. f D.SUW (6 I Th II W04 ofregu. TYPE REGuLATORS l.[,r wdl not v.. t th. outl. t .&r o,*u.11 IS da)c,,b.d u.der RELIEVING O! . ..!bng tht OUII. ! olmu. rm mul! bs Dfa. mded mnd tom, o.h. r m.an8
h,) ma-. Tcmm,a:,re RI.Y N,!er $W.,CS 35to 150F (210 E6%) Co-xctIti A,r S*rv, c* D.o..,yn TVD* 010 !500F [-10 !0s6%) pt:m TyDe. 35fo 15GF (210 6+5TI
SPECIFICATIONS
(Standard
Modeli
Only)
ViARNING
THESE REGULATORS ARE INTENDED FOR USE IN INDUS TRIAL CDMPRESSEO AIR OR wATER SYSTEfAS ONLY. 00 NOT uSE THESE tTEGULATOFW WHERE PRESSURE OR TEMPERA. TuRE CAN EXCEED RATE OOPERATIP4G CONDITIONS. IN ExCESS OP WE REGULATOR IF OUTLET PRESUFSE PRESSURE SE TTINCI COULO CAUsE DOWNSTREAM EOUIPMENT TO RUPTURE OR MALFUNCTION. INSTALL A PRESSURE RE. LIEF DEVICE 0(x4 NSTti EiMOF Tti E REGULATOR, THE RELIEF PRESSURE ANO FLOW CA PAC!~ OF THE RELIEF OEVICE MuST SATISFY SYSTEM REOUIREMENm. THE ACCURACY OF THE INDICATION OF PRESJRE GAUOES CAN CHANGE, BOTH WRING E+EIPMENT IOESPITE CARE IN PACKAGING) ANO OURINO THE SERVICE LIFE. IF A PRESSURE GAUa E IS TO EE uSEO WITH TNESE PRODUCTS ANO IF INACCURATE INDICATIONS MAY BE HAZARDOUS TO PERSONNEL OR PROPERTY. THE OAUGE S14C4JL0 BE CALI. EiRATE12 EEFORE INITIAL INSTALLATION ANO AT REGULAR lNTEfl-VA~S OURINO uSE. FOR GAUGE ST AN OAROS REFER TO ANSI 6A0.1.1974. BEFORE USING WITH FLUIDS OTNER THAN AS SPECIFIED, FOR P40P41NDuSTJEIAL APPLICATIONS, OR FOR LIFE SUWORT SYSTEMS CONSULT C. A NO RGREN CO,
FLUID R06 WI1h Br.t, t)odv Com!ar*u.d .!< or wa!nr Roe w,,. A$. mm>mEmJY Com!ars, wd a,< R&i COmDIsu#d a,. MAIN PoRTS; 1!8 or 1/4 PTF GAUGE PORTS; Two 1/8., PTF TYPE R06 0,. cIhr Wm, r.l, e., ng or non, mlawong RCA P,,!on. t. I,m\ng or n.a. t.l+. wng OUT LET PRESSURE AO.KISTMENT RANGES. ST Ati OAFIO 3!0 IOODI,9 I 21064 b~rl OPT IC)NAL Z (U ~~pt+l [ : tO 3 4 b,,l OpTIONAL 10 7 bwt 1 !0 loosq(l 0.
adwstm.n! fa. $.YI ara no! mnn, m.m or max!mum o.! !!.! pve%ture Rqul,, o,, c,. b ,d, uttad :0 r,ro DI, g OUII*l PI*S. D,,,, u,, !,rn,,, ,DK,l, ed Th, u of ,.,. ,nd ~.n,r,ll~, ,0 p,, .,., , ,..,,, 01 lhow I*-. ,,gu I,, or, ,0 control or.,,ur~% ou!t(d* 0/ ,h. wec,l,. d tmows II not ,xomm W&d.
l,,
MATERIALs
EO.., f,...
oF CO~STRUCTION [S!md~rd
. . . . . ,.
Mod81\ Only}
R,,,n O, br,,, O, b,,,, B,IN AI LJm,n.m
,,
Ac. !,!
Bodv . . . . . . Vnl., mwmhlv. Val., ,1 El,rlo**,, ,,. P,, KI. ..,....
. .
. . . . . .,, . . . . . .
. :,
:.,:... ., ,,, . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. .
Ac. f.l R.,,. . ., Buru N . .

Ac, t,l R,,,.
@ @
NORGREN G
19s7. K)RGREN
INSTALLATION
----T----J
5 Connect
outlet Pre:surO gaup ,0 one of ma ~flup Penn (l/~. ~wm at ~ 10 Inl Bl PCYt on side of bmy). Gauge portn C6n also k9 uwd ai addi nonal 10* flow ourlets. Plug unused ports, reljatili W and sewice of che regulator. life, in!tall a Ihlter Ia 6A Q
4-;
TO Ob:.wn mnximum F071 up!rream N~rgran
PISTON TYPE , _ 1
2!i%5
5 - *9
O, APHfl AGi# TYPE
~_6 .
ADJUSTMENT
1
Sclc.:
!UT
2 Turn 3. Tu.n 4
ccunterclockw$s8 on systam regulator clockwlm unf,l tha daxtrad ouclat preltura it roached. TO avoid minoc raad; u%tmant after m?,k,g a chan~ i pra Uura %etung, alwnya approach cho desired presgr. from q low.. or pr. ~ura, Whan reducing from a highw 10 a lo-r m?tfing, first raduca to tome PraLELIr. ICM than [hat dajirad, then bring UD co the dmirod point. Pu$h Iockr&ng o adjul[ing knob downwnrd 10 lock Dra$:ura meting. To rel.am, pull Iockring upward,
Iy t,.unt,l all q ir prescuta, adlul:manc

Q
.,, Or.., u,e, tern regulator adjurlm.nc load da removti from rngulacbng spring.
7A o 9
DISASSEMBLY
1. 2. Shut
off
inlnt
prmsura
q d
roac~
praaaurt
in tnlet
mnd outletliaq
Ifiii$ t)- d
Dimensions All a,m,,on, , ,.<)w, [m,ll,rtv, w,l,
PNL
!0
3.
to zero. Turn adjuatmant counlarclcckwnse until -II load it removad from l,3ring [5). Regulator can b+ dit~samb led without rarnoval from air line Unlcr@w tho bonnet (2 or 3), then ,emovc $pringre$t (4 - b~ml bonnet only), ragula:lng tpring [5). dipring and di-phragm [6 & 71 or pi~ton and packing 16A & 7A). Un:crew the VEl W Sa#I and g~tkat #stembly (8) uning a 3/8 socket, then remove vmlve {9) and vElve Ipring (10).
UTN 81(211
CLEANING
1 2 3, Clean Inspect RapIace psru using warm parts. water snd amp Ill Dare:. dam~ed
MA x THK -
PLASTIC
-7+.,,., 00NUET
PNLMTG
MAX.
SRASS aONNk T
REASSEMBLY
1. At reallembly. amly s imall amount of L.ubriplate I1O (or equiw. djusting screw (I)or lent) avenly to full length of Ihrc#ds and tip of q to adjusting $crew threnda ;n#jde bonnet {2}, Apply a Iibard coat of I&w Corning 44 Silicone 6J!a Groa>ulor ~uiv~lent) !o~cking [7A). Tome vslve su,t (8) to 4.to-G to SO IMO inch-pounds, inch. poundi. Torqua bonnet (2 or 3)
U!!!!!L
1.1 B1301 O,A
HCILE
PNL T*K
$,
.2516)
2.
l.la 135)
REPAIR
KITS (Standard Modali

10 I 10)
Only)
. . . 10) . . . . , , . . . . . . . . . . 3407~1 3407.02 2961.01 296142
w. PAMEL MOUNTI!D PLASTIC EONPACT
Disghrsam Type Nonrelioving (icemt6thru Rolte.ing (itamt6\hr P),ton Type Nonreliewing (itemt Relieving litemt6A,
6A, 7A,8,9. 7A,8,9,10)
. .
MOUNTINO BRACKE1 PLASTIC BONNET yaIIOV+) . . . . , Ditphrtg-m type ICOICM coja PiItOn tylJa (Color cd, ~eIIow) . , , . , . . , , . Disohrsom AXamblias [it~m ?I _ Nonr-elieving . 1 ~-. .; , . . Relieving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . n::::::::::::: Vclve A!$embly[ilem9) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vslve Sa#t #nd Gttket ~tembly {i\em 8} , . . . . . 2960.04 396043 341055 341 0.% 2959.52 3402.51
hWUPATING OR ACKET aRAss BorAMc T
GRAPHIC
SYtiBOLS
ACCESSORIES PLASTIC
BONNET Mounting Bracket [Includas PI mtQt) . Panel Mounting Nut , . . . . . . . . Tampe<Res, mtant%al Nre . , ; ; ~ ~ tE.025-003 1S4325-002 2117-01 BRASS EONNET 18-001-020 18.00J437
-+5-+
Rclioving Nonralicving
NORGREN
@
Wa3 SOUTH DELAWARE ST PHONE 3017M.2ijIl TELEx FAX 303098.4856 LI~LETON. 4 554 I CO 60120.16&T INTL. TELEX 4322030 PRINTED IN U.S.A.
NIP-206:1O.87
LF 3000
Time Savings: q Tube fitting time is substantially reduced. Assembly time savings cre, on cm averoge, 75% of convmtionol compression flftings. All check tightening time is dn, notzd The LF 3000 Instant Fit; lng System provides a 100% lock and seal thz first time
q q P.o assembly nzzazd
Instant Fitting !$/steti

n LF 3000
- *-- -
Advantages
6?
Yw
u
(3
T
tools
or SKIIIS arz
q Ft!ngs are Zasy cnd C!sassemblz.
to cssemble
o2 1 G-
10
0! J5109
C_:a~ay of ttiblng snov IIg [-e wmnq s ID m rs15110mhI? 10 IF? ;It[lngs ID fiow capaciry
Reusability: q The LF 3000 dozens of times
can be used
I !-
O Ring seals on :ne Iubng 00 T,his O r,nq ma<es and ins:an: seal Immedlalely tipon receiving the hhng
Slo!led collet, Ihe m?chanlsm Iocklng Ihe Iublng ,P:O me ill:mg
!he housing for [he sloHe5 col:el whose lnslds con flguratio,n is beveled 10 ma!ch !he OU:SIC?co?fguraflon of me slo[:ed collef When pressLre (or vacuum) is introduced [n!o [he system Ihe COWI and lublng move sligh:ly Sleeve, backward, compressed Ihe slolled collel is and CaJS&5 the sharp grlpplng ridg?$, machined !nto it, 10 b{le in:o the tubings OD. The greater ihe pressure the slronger !he grip. The connection is permanent The disconnect mus! be mede deliberately by simul!an. eously pushing in on !tre collet an< .,, . . . . ... . pumng OUI 01 [n? ruolng
2nd
Full Flow: q LEGRIS fittings require no support ferrules or I.D. tube sup~rts (DOT Fittings an exception)
q Compare the orifice in any of our fittings. We have a larger unrestricted passage os we use tne full I.D. of tubing There arq-.no system worries about the C. factors. q 5/32 LF3000 has the same flow as 1/4 conventional fittingsavings on space and tube size.
Ccvered by Palent No 3653689

8) 9) 10)
swivel Feature: q Ail male elbows and tees can be swiveled 360 on an O ring s?al allowing closer assembly, This feature is a great time saver in areas of poor accessibility allows proper orientation fitting. and of the
P:sh :P? plaslc o, SOII rne:al Iublng into the fl:lmg and :?e,~ IS an inslant connw:lo? Cal 35 com~ecled end dlsconnec!ed dozens of hmes (Sse Dmnl 7) Gr ?aITG :oges Tn; ea5?5 bases ,vhch lock It,e components in li16 mfo [he f)rlln; 5x! a.allaa:e
a 100%
SSZI
12 1/2 fi?T (dry seal :fi,$z~s) ard 10
32 In some coa!lgura!lons
Type of fitting LF 3000 Typical Plasllc Tube Fitting Typical compression Fitting Typical Fla:e Fitting
Average
time
I Possible
each connection 3 12 19 49 Sec. Sec. Sec. Sec.
connections per hour
Tubing Requirements: The LF 3000 Instant Fitting accepts many types of plastic tubing including nylon, polyethylene, teflon, etc. Working Temperature: q Sub zero F to + 160 F. Working Pressure: q Vacuum to 250 temperatures. Materials:
q
1200 300 180 73
Easy
Disconnect
Pull
Push in on the collet. ou ( on rhe wb;ng.
PSI at working
To disengage
Fitting Brass
Body -
Free Machining Type Plastic - Acetal Copolymer andtor Nylon 6,6 q Cartridge Parts Free Machining Brass e @-Ring Buns N-Nitrile
[he tubing, push in the collet to disengage it from the locking slope. This allows the tubing to be drawn past the gripping ridge and out of lhe fitting.
Ordering COck?
LF 3000 Ordering Code
The illustration gives a 4 number reference for each model of fitting. The cornpizte reference
number for a given item also
EXAMPLES:
3109
pipe flt:lna tJale elbo,< code
6014 3/8
O
d 1/4 NPT code
DOT*
Air brake
Male
thread
tube code
code 3104 Union tee

code
56
1/4
00 o,d.
Tube
fitting
tO
[uk)e
tube code
includes The tube o d. code Thz thread code (or the 2rId tubz o.d. in the case of a
reducer).
Reducer
tAvailable Tube in some
3166 Reducer
code
5860 5/16 o.d.

tube code
318 o.d.
tube code
sizes and configurations. 1/8 5132 3/16 1/4 5/16 3/8 1/2
o.d.
Contact your distributor of LEGRIS,Inc. for information about availability in:
codes
NPT pipe thread codes ;M~itional
53 1/16 08 DOT air brake
04
55
56
58
60
62
1/8 11
20
1/4
14
318
18
1/2
22
10-32
20
METRIC SIZES
viton
designators
o
ring I
BH bulk head mount
SKX2ceSavings Feature
Orientation action of fitting allows for close mounting of elbows and Comparison of typical and LF 3000 Fitting Typical &&--~
= L /-without a;tc turning body
11
O ring ;etalns / seal and allows~ the swivel action h
LF 3000
\\
E ~
/
Ablllty flttlng to orient In any dlrectlon
after tightened In port. 4
~~
F-H--r
Space Savings Feature

Close placement of LF 3000 hex socket male connector fittings
Comparison of typical and
LF 3000
fittings
@--@LF 3000
\\
I.
,,
\,
\,
\
\\
Space-Saving
Tee / Elbow Spacing
The drawing shows on the how the opposite and easy page quick it is to orient
Characteristics
of the LF 3000
LF 3000
Instant
- Rotation of fitting to desired position - Close placement of fittings for minimum space requirements.
Straight Male Spacing

The above drawing shows the close spacing of male fittings.
Fitting.
I
PiDe
Tube O.D. thread N PT
TEES OR ELBOWS E
LF 3000 spacing
STRAIGHT
MALE FITTINGS
E+X
Typical
fitting spacing
E+X Typical
fitting
spacing LF
E
3000 spacing
118 1/8 5132 3/16 1/4 5116 3/8 112
1116 1/8
1/8
1/8 1/4 1/4 1{4 318
.512 .512 .512 ,512 .670 .670 .900 1.060
1.181
.540 .540 .540 .540 .690 .690 .900 1.040 ; ~ -~ ..
... .. .
... -..
F17 General
In IPWtol!owing pals
mdtded sh~mem
Parts Breakdown NORGREN Illustrated Purpose Filter For Industrial Compressed

hdWItOd
Air Service
CPTIO+4AL SERVICE
I@, asetihes
are ~Sed
wrm an asser?bty
assembly IS ordered. !he =Semby ITEM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 a 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 40A 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48

DESCRIPTION SERVICE . Atipler . . . . . . . Onng
in cepital Ieners Ptis t~! are b9r!+afh K. WWn an duad~ and all park indented beneaih n are included in the
d PART NO. OTY. 1 1 1 1 1 2 1
are printed
LIFE lNDICATOR 6 ADAPTER ASHY . . . .. . .. . .. . . . . ...579640 . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . . . .. . .. . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .514.3 -89 . . . ..2305-16 . .. . .. . .... . .,.422 -01 .5796 .50 ., ..,...5743 -08
Onng . .. . . . .. . . . . . . INDICATOR ASHY . . . . . . . .

q q
. . .. . Supporl on~
. . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . .. . n~
D~hmgm,,,
.. . . . . . .. . . . . . . . .. . .. . . . . . . .. . . . . . .. . . . . .. . .. . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . . .. PM5OB4l . . . . .. . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . .. . . . . . .. . . . . . . . .. . .. . . . . . . .. .. . . .5841 -89 nennalty rep!aced .23 WJ-53
. . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . .. . .. .. . .. . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. . . . . . ...706.01 WfTH SIGHT GMSS & MANUAL DRAIN t . .. . ..~39O-~
80@
. .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . .. . . .. . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . .. . . .. . . .. . . . . . . . . . ..Nol
METAL BOWL
. Onng .
q q
1 1 1 1
1
. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . .. . . . . . . . .. . . . . .. .. . . . . .. .. . . .. . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . .. .
Dmlnpetmti Nfl . INSERT G@el screw Bracket ~nrwg Sghi Sght
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . .. .. . . .. .. . . .. .. . .. . . .. . . . . .. . . . .. . .. . . . ..W4l & GASKET ASSY . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . .. . .. . . .. . .. . .. . . . .. . .. ..27%.W
1
1 1
. . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . .. . . . .. .. . . . .. . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . .. ...279749 . . . .. . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . .. . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . .. .. . . .. . . .. . . . . . . . . .. . ..28ll4l . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . .. . . . .. . . .. . . . . . .. . . . . . .. .. . .. .. . . . .. . . . .. . . . . . . . . . ..u9l45 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . .. . . . .. . . . . .. . . . . .. . .. . . . . . .. . . . . . . . .. . .. . .. . . .. . .. . . . . . .. . .. . ..3~8 .89 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . .. 7c%-ol . . .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . .. . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . .. . .. .. . . . . . . . .. . . . . . .. . . .. . . . . .. . .. . ..%72G3 GuUd WITH Di+JN .. .. . . . . .. . .. . . . . . . .. . . .. . .. . .. . .. . . . . . .. . .. .. . . . .. . . . . . .. .. . .. . ..121 B49 SIGHT GWSS & AUTO ASSY DRAIN t t . . .. . .. ..53W-81
.
q q
1
4 2 2 2
.
q q
Saal.. . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . .. . .. . . . .. . . .. . . .. .. . . .. . . . .. . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . ..M73w .
Gw Glass BOWL
s
q
METAL
Oling
q
....... ..... . .. . . .. .
. ............. . . . . . .
.. 2306.53
1 1 1
1 1 1
4 2
LANUAL
DRAIN
CURRENT METAL BOWLS
AUIOMATIC
DRAIN
s AUTOMATIC
q q
& GASKET
. . . . .. .. . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..3CC43-10
Nti
. . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . .. . . . . . . .. . . .. .. . . .. .. . .. .. . . . . . . .. . . .. . . . . . ...279749 .. . . . . . . . . .. . . . . .. . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . .. . .. . . .. . .. .. . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . .. ..28ll4l .. .. . . . . .. . . . .. . . . . . .
q Gasket
3391-05 . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . Bracket ..... ......... .................... ......... ............................. ...........3~849 6 Grmg ... . .... ... .... ... ... .. ... . ... .. ... .. .... . .... . .. . . ............706431 q S.@ .. ..... .... ........ ...... ...... ... ....... ........ .. .... ... . . ............5873-s3 c Sghl GhS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ., .. ...587243 q SKIM Glass Guwd .................................... ..............................121 849 METAl BOWL& MANUAL DRAIN ASSY...@bsolete - Order ilem 11)
q screw q
2 2
1 1 1 1
1 1
METAL . O-rirg
q
BOWL
& AUTO
DRAIN
ASSY
.. . . .. .. ..(Cbsolele
- C@er
item
23)
. . .. . . . . . . . . .. . . . . .. . . .. . . . . . .. . .. . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . . .. . . .. .. . .. .. .. . ...2m.m
Dram pelco~ ................................. ............................. .............W4l q Nti ............................... ..........................................................279749 q INSERT h @+SKET ASSY ... ................................................27%.5O . . Gaskel .......... .......................................................... ...........2 Bll4l q AUTOMATIC DRAIN & GASKET ASSY . . . . . .. . . . . .. . . . . . .. . . . . . .. . . . . ..3 OCX3.1O
q
q Nul . . .. . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . . . . . .. . . . . . .. .. . . . . .. . .. . . .. . . . . . .. . .. ...279749
1 1 1 ; 1 1 1
1 14,= 13 / 19
. . . . .
GWe! Cup
. . .. . . .. . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . .. . .. . . . . . . . .. . . . . . .. . .. . . . . . .. . .. . . . .. . . .. . . .. . .. . . . . . ..2 Ell4l Shaped . . . . . . .. .. . . . . .. . . . .. . . . . . . .. . . .. .. . . .. .. . .. . .. . . .. . . . . . . .. . .. . .. ..%73&S . . . . .. . ..23C6 -14 . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . .. . .. . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. .. . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . .. . 1779-05 .. . . . .. . . .. . . .. . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . .. . . . . . . . . .. . . . .. . . . . . . . . .. . . . . .. .. .. . .. M74-ll
Seal, Gnrwg Retti~r
@ugegl=s
26.
/ 30
Htik Gaskel
. . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . .. . . . . . .. . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . . . .. . . . . . .. . .. . . . .. . .. .. . .. Wl6.W . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . .. . . . . .. .. . . . . . .. . . . .. . . . . . .. . . .. . . . . .. . . . . .. . .. . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . .. Wl74l
1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1
Sintered Nylon Sintemd Brorue Elemeni Srnlacn ...................................5311.11 ........................53ll.Ol

25-micron 50.mKmn 75.mumn, . . .. . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . .... . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..5311.13 stainless sfeel screen . . . . . . . . . .. . . .. .. . . . . . .. . ...5311-02 . . .. . .. .. . . . .. .. . . .. . . ..53ll.O3 5314431 -69
mmiimiq
OBSOLETE
METAL
BOWLS
~AuTOMATIc
DmIN
.. . . . . . . . .. . . . . .. . . . . .. .. . . .. . . . . .. . . .. . .. .. ..5656-01
49 50 51
Gasket Louver O.riW
" . .. . . . .. . .. . . . . . . .. . . .. . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . .. . .. . . . . . .. . . . . . .. . .. .. . . .. ..
.. . . .. . . .. . . . . . .. .. . . . . . .. . . . . . .. . . . .. . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . . . . .. . . .. . . . . .. . .. . ..5313
90
k. /3
40\m
/3
. .. . .. . .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . .. . . .. . . . . .. . . . . . . . . ..2306-36
REPAIR KITS & ACCESSORIES

Seal & gasket kfl-items (12, 24 or 35), (16, 27,39 or41), (47,49 and 51) .....5 S78-05 Sight glass Id! for current metal bowkHems (12 or 24), (17 or 28), (19 or30). (20 or31), (21 or32), (=or W) ..........................................227&Z Sghl glass !4! for obso%te metal bowls(hems 42,43, 44) ............. ............2273-15 Wall maunlmg bracket 3/4. & 1. Porsed Units . . . . . . . .. .. . .. . . . . . . . .. . .. . . . . . .. . . . . . . . .. . .. . .. . . .. . . . . .. . . . . .. . .. . . .. . . ..62l2.5O
1-1//4. & 1-112. Poried UnHs . . .. . . .. . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. .. . .. . . . ..62l2.5l
.
t
tt
s.men filler OWWfL Order 5311-11 or S311-02 For metal bowl wiihoui sight glass and Mth manual dtaln, ?p@ty 53 S0-65 For melal IMWl wllhout sight glass and wilh auto drain. specify 5390-66,
Nol used tviIh me 76-micron Not available.
37-* -b w *
NORGREN
~~ ~u~h~,aww~,~le,on,co eolzo.l~(j~
For Distributor
Use Only
I
Phone 303-794-261
? Fax 303-795-9487
Printed III U.SA.
--. . .. 1-1.6
For Distributor Use Only
p!~j
IMl
NORGREN illustrated Parts Breakdown Water Pressure Regulator

in the following parts list, assemblies are printed in capital letters. Parts Lhal arc included with an assembly are listed and indented directly beneath it. \Vhen an assembly is ordered, the assembly and all park inc!enkl twnoath it are included in the shipment. ITEM ; 3 4 DESCRIPTION Bonnet, PART NO.
R06
Qw.
5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12 13
brass ...................................... .........................................5W7O Spring rest (used wih brass bonne~ only] .............. ......................593-Ol Bonne!, plasric .......................... ............................. ....................~WM Spring, regulating I to 10 psig (brmn) .................................. .............................2M9O2 2 to 50 psig (qrwn) ............................................ ......................6l3O3 3 to 100 psig (yellw) ..............................................................o4 Slip ring ........ ................................................................................61 SOl Diaphragm Nanrelieving iype for wa:er sem@ . .......................................~l G55 Relieting Iype for compressed air setice . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . .. . . . .. .. . ..3410-56 VALVE SEAT ASSY ............................................... ....................~O2.5l q Seal .............................................................................. ..........l9*OS Va!ve .. . ... .......................................................... ....................X5%W Spflng, va <e ................... .................... .......................................279Ol Btiy .................................... .................................NoI normalty repfac=xf Plug, pipe ......................... ..........................................................~.M Gage, pre=ure O to 30 psig (O 102 ba:) ......................... ................... .........l8.Ol}2l4 010 5J3psig (O to 4 bar) ........................................... ..........l&Ol3.2ll
0 to 160 psig (O to 11 bar) .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..l&O!&2l2
1
1 1
1
1 1 1
1
1 1 1 1 1 1 2
c5+-r
1
1 1
REPAIR
KITS
& ACCESSORIES
Repar ki[s (i!ems 5,6,7,8,9, 10) Nonrefieving regulators for waler semice .............................................~O7.Ol Relieting regwla:ors for compressed air service ...................................3407-02 Kit. pipeplug (item 12- contains 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. .. . . . . . . ...37~.Ol
Tzrnper resiswf seal FOR tire . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...2ll7.Ol BONNET
ACCESSORIES VW
PIASTIC
mounting bracket ................... ...................................... .......... ...............l8~l.OW V4all mouniing bracket & plastic panel nu! ................. ......... .......... .......... .....l8~2SM3 Plas~c panel nut ..................... .......... ............................. .......... ..........................~62.89 Metal panel nut .... ..............................................................................................~62.M ACCESSORIES FOR BRASS BONNET Wall mounting brackel ......... ............................. ............................................l8~l.~5 Wall mounting bracke[ & brass panel nul .....................................................l8ml.On Brass panel nuI .................................................................................. ..................6l&Ol
12
69
4/82
RMJRGREN
54(M South Oefaware, Linle!on, For Distributor
CO 80120:663
Phone 303-794-2611
Fax 353-795-9487
Prinwd in USA.
.-
[Jse Only
IMI -
2-6.1
l% tislribu!cr
Use Cnly
A08
708 Gener~] purPo~e
NORGREN
Illustrated
For
Parts Breakdown
industrial
808Knob Ad;usnent
Fil@r/Regulatc)t
compressed
] I A
Air Service
I A08.T-HandleAd,ustMen[
EPAIR KITS & ACCESSORIES eal k,!, M!er sec!ion hems (12,18,
Element Rew!a!or & seal (47), k:t, 5.micron, sin[ered
230r34),(16, bronze (I:ems
21, 27 or 37), (47) . . .. . . . ..3163-05 44. 44A. 44B) . . . . . . . . . .. . . ...3163-03
repair k!! Items (7), (12. 18,23 or 34), (16. 21, 27 or 37),
(413), (49)
Releving regulators ........................ ............................. .........................53O4.W Nonbelieving regulators ............................. ............................. ...............5304.05 Me[al bow sight glass kit Ilerns [23 or 34), (28 or 38), (30 or 40), (3 I or41), (320r 42) ... ................... .......... ............................................2273.2O Ki!. pi~ plug (ilem9 - mnlains 2) ................................... ..................................3724.O5 Wall mounmg bracke! & metal Panel mount]n~ nu[ ........................... .......5203-~ Me!al panel nul ...... ................................ .................................... ................ .......5191-88 Plas:!c panel nuf .......................................... .......... ............................................5191 .89 Ta-noer resis:an! seal wire ................ .......... ..................................,,.., . . . . . .. . . . . . . . ..2117-02
. P
r.-.
@_44Q . r
.-~43
-
-Fl---
0----23
Gw
IVC3K?G4F?EN
54(Y3 SC,utiI Delaware,
Litiietor?,
CO
80120-1663
be303.794.2611
Fax
303.795.
Prin[ed in U.S.A.
IMI
General
NORGREN Illustrated Parts Breakdown Purpose Filter/Regulator For Industrial Compressed

!308
A08
Air Service
-1
~0,
1
In !he Iol!ow!ng paf!s IIsI. assemblies are prlnled !n capi!al leners Parts !ha! are Included wti+ an assembly are Ihsled and Inden:ec! directly, benea:h II, When an assembly IS ordered, the assembly and all pans inden!ed kmnea:h Ii are included in rtre shlpmenl. ITEM 1 2 3 4 5 5A 5B SC 50 5E 5F 6 PART NO. DESCRIPTION Knob, ad~usung. ..,51 !X-88 Screw ................................. 6103~6 Bannel . . . . . .. ..377989 \Vasher..,..., ................. 518301 Soew, adjusting ....................... ............................. ....... .5675 .51 BONNET AS SE MBLY, T-HANDLE ADJUSTMENT ..................3779.51 OTY. 1 4 1 1 1 1
Knob Adius~enl
1 ,
2 ? 3 & 4 @ 5 G
_-, l!:, : ..+x.. ..-. &
Y
Itl -. ~, $
1..
Spring, regulatlncj 51060 ps,g ........................................... . .............. ....... .5302 .01 5 [0 lW psig .,.. . . . . ... .. ... . . .. . . . . . . . . .. . . ..5354J31
15 [0 250 psg (~se onlywih a me[a! bow!) .. . . .. . . . . . . .. . . .. . . . . . . ...5195-11 D,aohragm Rellevlng Nonbelieving . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . .. . . .. . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . . . .. . . . .. . . . . . . . . .. . .. . .. ..5083-40 . .. . . .. .. . .. . .. . . . .. . . . . . . . . .. . .. . . . .. .. . .. . . .. . .. .. . . . . . . .. . . . . .. . . . . . . ..5083-41
1
1 1 1 1
8 9
10
11
12 13 14 15 16 17 19 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 d?,
Bdy .....................................................................NoI normally replaced Plug, pipe ...................................................................................2S91 .97 Gage, pressure O to 60 psig (O to 4 bar) . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . .. . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..l8.Ol3.2O8 010 lM psig (O 1011 bar) .................................................l8Ol3.2O9 psig (O 1020 be . ................... .................. ... I8-O13-21O 010300 1/3 PT. PIASTIC BOWI & MANUAL DPAIN ASSY ..................3776.5O 3 OZ. PLASTIC BOWL & MANUAL DRAIN ASSY ........... ........3825.50 . Oaring.., . . . . .. . .. . . . . .. . .. . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. .. ..~16 -32 ...........................................................................684.Ol . Drain pelm~ q NuI ........................................ ..................................................2797.89 q INSERT & ~SKET ASSY ....................................................27%.5O . . Gaskel ................................................................................28ll 41 1/3 PINT PLASTIC BOWL & AUTO DRAIN ASSY ....................3776-51 q O-ring ...... ...............................................................................=16 .32 s AUTOMATIC DRAIN & GASKET ASSY .............................3 CCO-lO q q Ntil ......................................................................................2797.89 . . Gaskel ................................................................................2811 Ol 1/3 PINT METAL BOWL & M4NUAL DRAIN ASSY ..................3777-50 . Ormg ......................... .......... ..................................................2316.32 . Orain peK0c4 ..........................................................................~4~l q Nu[ ..........................................................................................2797.89 q INSERT 6 GASKET ASSY .. ..................................................27%.5O . . Gaske! ......................................................... .......................2811 Ol . Screw ......................... ....................................... .....................339l45 . Bracket ....................... ....................................... .....................3~8 -89 . Gauge glass ......................... ...................................................58724l . Seal ......... ................... ................... .........................................B73.83 . Oring . . .. . . . .. .. . .. . . .. . . . . .. . . .. . . . .. . . . . . . .. . . . .. .. . .. . . . . . .. .. . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . .. .. . . ..7M4l 113 PINT M5AL BOVL &AUTO DWIN ASSY .......................37n-5l . Oring ............... .......... ............................. ..............................~16 .32 s AUTOMATIC DRAIN h GASKET ASSY ........ .....................3030-10 q q NuI .......................... .......................... . .. .. .. ... . . 2797-89 . q Gaske! ............................ ............................. .......................28ll -01 . Screw ................................... ......... ....................................... ..339l45 s Bracket .............................................................. .....................3n8 .89 . Gauge glass ................ ............................................................5872.Ol . Seal ...................................... ............................. .....................W73.B3 q ~ring ...... ............................. ....................................................7~.Ol BaMle ........................................ ..................................................3l4O.8B Polypropylene Sin!ered Bronze Element 5-micron ..................................3161.16 ................ .......3161 04 25.micmn ...... ................... .......3161.1 7 ............................50.micmn ................................3161.1 8 .......................3l6l.2O
Gasket, upper .. . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . .. . .. .. .. . .. .. . ..31 B5.Ol
1 2
1 1
1 1 1
1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 4 2 1 2
2
-Pl---12
1 1 1 1 1 4 2 1 2 2 1 1 1
1 1
14 ~ 13 &
Lv
&----- Q
27
23
44A 44B
45 46 47 48 49
Gasket, lower "......................... ..................................................3l8543 Cemer post ............................. .................... ...............................5201 .89 Deflector ......................... ............................................................5 S72.Ol Gaske! ....... ............................. ............................ ..... ...................2811-21 Spring, valve .................. ................... .........................................52O24l Valve ........... ............................. ..................................................51 W.6O bronze
1 1 1 1 1 1
Gaskels, items 44A and 44B, are used only witi !he 5.micfon smlered element. For optional low flow automabc drain assembly, sp+city 3000.11.
SEE PAGE 3-1.4 FOR REPAIR K~S
* 6$)
4LX
NORQREN
5-!00 South Delaware, Linle!on, CO 80120-1663
e 303-794-2611
Fax
303-795
Printed in U.S.A.
~?,..
For Distributor Use Only
3-1.3
For Distributor
Use CXi~
omRon
Solid-State Y
1/16 DIN, Digital-Set Timer with
Timer
H3CA .. ~
0.1 Second to 9,990 Flours Range

operation modes u Universal AC/DC supply voltage timers available H Operations include ON-delay, Repeat cycle, Signal Interval/OFF-delay, Signal-OFF delay (1 and 11),Interval, Cycle and Signal ON-delay/OFF-delay u Selectable no-voltage start, reset, gate and check inputs expand capabilities
H Time output remaining LCD bar graph and LCD 8 field-selectable
status indicator u Panel mounting adapters, sockets, and accessories may be ordered separately
....,
id I
,,
Ordering
= TIMERS
Add the supply vollag? H3CA-8H. AC1OO
Information
10 [h.? parl number w~mn you order Ot+delay or?l] tlm?rs 110120
H3CA. EI and H3CA-8ti
F:.
;, ?mpe,
Timing Iurc[lon
;,.:.:
~---,.:: ~ ll~,ii T1...:

11,:arltarleous j
8 held-selectable
sPQ~
Iunct,ons
I sDD~
1
~--
O;i
C!:[il/
G.IJ -.
1-
C2DT -4
S?i)T Front moun[ed screw terminals H3CA.FA H3CA-8H Specify Specify 24 L. 100110120 12 V,2JV,48Vor ti3CA.8 ~. 0250223240 It: .
Terrmnal form
Part number AC DC
11pin round socket

H3CA-A 2410240 121rJ2.lov V, 50/60 Hz or
SuPply vo[[a~~s
V. 5050
Hz
ACCESSORIES
)escripbon
Part number H3CA-A timer Bottom surface or track mounting, top screw terminals Back moun:ing.
H3CA.8, for use wi!;n Y92F-30
jockeis
P2CF-11 P3GA-11 =i
mount!ng adapter, bo!!om scre,v !errnn~.s
Bottom surface or track mounting, top screw terminals

timers
F Panel adapters
H3CA-8H mounbng
Back moun[ing. for use with Y92F-30 mounting adapter. botiom screw Fits behind panel, ideal
{or
termi~aj
==----l
Y92F.30 Y92F-70
side by side installation. Use P3G3.2 sockets. Installs through panel front: timer face fits beze;, rear O hrner clips ICIadap!e-. Use P3G22 sockets. F{!j 65-66 mm (2 56-2.59 in) x 52.53 mm (2.04 -2 C? IrI panel culout.
Ins!alls through
Charcoal
panel
gray
face plate measures

Ijmer lace fits bezel.
89
H x
59 \V mm (3.45 x 225 in). Charcc? gray
fron!;
rear of timer clIps to ad?.p~~
7
PFF !I
Use P3G3-2 sockets. Fi!s 55 x 45 mm (2.17 x 1.77 in) panel cutout. face pla!e measures 58 H x 50 W mm (2.28 x 1.97 in), Protective cover Mounbng track Hard plastic cover; not
for use
with Y92F-70 or Y92F-71 panel adapferj
Soft plastic cover; not for use with Y92F-70 or Y92F-71 panel adapters. DIN rail, 50 cm (1 .64 ft) length DIN rail, End pla!e .,
1 m
(3,28 fl) Iena!h
3
i92A-L18B Y92A-48D PFP-50N pFp ~iJ@j-
Y92F-71
H3CA
n RANGE AND OPERATION
omr70n
~IODE SELECTION
H3CA
F
01s s
T!ms umt
Tlmlng
range
Olr?
c1
O 1 to 99.9 seconc!: 1 to 999 seconds 0.1 to 95.9 minutes 1 10999 mmules 0.1 to 99.9 hours 1 :0999 hours 10 to 93S0 hours
0.1 h h 10h
Specifications
art number supply ~ol[age w )perating 301,., ~r Imlng unctions voltage AC DC 3 Ileld-selectable modes: ON.delay, Repea[ ;ycle, Signal ln[er~al;OFF-delay, Signai C3N.! OFF-delay, Signal OFF-delay (1 and II). Interval and Cycle No wl:aae . SPDT 3 A, 250 VAC (p. f. = 1) 10 mA, 5 VDC 35peal accuracv Sel:ing error
Fieseiiing Resetting
+3CA-A ?4 10240 V, 5060 12102.IOV

Hz
I H3CA-FA
/ H3CA-eH
I24V,100110
] H3CA.8 120 V, 200220240 V; 5060 Hz
12 V. 24 V, 49 V, 110 V, (permissible ripple factor: 20% max. using single. phase, full. wa,ve rec!!fwd power sources) I1OVA
3010 1100/. of rated vollaae . 3 VA
consumption
_..
ON.delay only
I No voltaae -J. 1 I SPOT I SPOT
1~ DPDT 1I
tO.3%, i0,05
sec (includes varialion due la k,ol:age and temperature changes) I Pov/er-OFF iI 0.1 sec max. (LCD bar graph). OutpU: S:?!us (LCD message)
*0.5%, ~0.05 ssc Po,,ver-OFF, external and self. reset 0.5 sec max. Time Remaining Plastic case Panel, track, surface 11 -pin round socket 110 g (3.9 02) Recognized, Terminal screws I 190 g (6.7
02)
syslem
time
Indicators Materials hlounlina
Connections Weight
8-pin round socket lllog(390z)
File No. E41515
Certified, File No. LR2231O
=
Operating ambient temperature
Humidity Vibration ,. lMechanical durability
SEV, File No. 1021 -10 1055C 35 durability durability durability See Repeat Accuracy See Repeat Accuracv ,100 MSl min. at 500 VDC 2,000 VAC, 50;60 Hz for 1 minute betweerl current. carrying and non-current-carrying and between cantact and control circuit 1,000 VAC, 50;60 Hz for 1 minute between r.on.continuous contacts Mechanical Electrical 10 million operations minimum (under no load. at 1,800 operations/hour) 100,000 operations minimum at maximum ra!ings pads change
tO
(14 to 131oF)
85% RH
10 to 55 Hz; 0.75 mm (0.03 in) double ampli:ude 10 to 55 Hz: 0,5 mm (0,02 in) double amolitude
Malfunction Shock Ifvlechanibal

1
Malfunction
Variation due to voltage change Variation due to temperature Insulation resistance Dielectric strength
Service life
92
H3CA
omRon
H3CA
Engineering
u
ELECTRICAL SERVICE
Data
LIFE
1 cc;
:~, ,. ______ ..
o 1
._
2 3
F .. .
J
Load current
Timing Charts
In the schemabc diagrams, each thick line indicates the external wiring necessa.y
for the selected Operaiion
191( 3cIzj H
Mode
H3cA-FA
A ON-Delay
Starl:Power.OFF Reset
Y
Power-ON
Tne slan Ierminals are connected. Timing starts when power is applied Tne outpul is energized when the accumulated ~jme equals Ihe set !Ime The oulpu! remains energized until power is disconnected or a resel irpu[ is applied.
t.
Signal Slart
sef f,ms
R: . rssel
tame
t.a.
less than SeI lime
Power is applied continuously. Timing starts at the leading edge of the slart input. The output. is energized when lhe accumu Ia[ed lime equals the set hme. Subsequent start signals during or after liming will nol be accepted. The output relay will remain energized until a reset inputis applied or power is interrupted.
Remainmg bmd indi; a!:.
.-+, A I _ ~k . I ~.,.k ,. : ---r ICI:4* ,/~z%
H3CA
In the schermallc diagrams.
omRon
emh thick line irdlca!es fhe e~lemal vilr~ng necessary for the se~ec:e~
LL+ZCO
H3CA
klode
Repeat
Cycle
Signal Power
Start
The OF F:ON cycle is in!ha[ed at [h? l~~dlrlg edge O; [:: s:zr[ Input, The output relay will b~ OFF TFIS cycle VI:II be for the set Ime and lhen 0~1 Ior [he set IIM? repeated U.I!II a resel Inpul IS 2.ppli~c! or po,w~r is dlsconnec!ed
IS con: IcuoIJs!I 7.PPI:?c!
-----PC.,?(
2.1!3 (A .A , ,,
-, --
--
S..l[!
3.6 [xc!)
l ,,
_L-_..-:--:
-r!
Con[rol 9.11 [ OOI?U! NO (15-id J , -r
Power-ON
Start Power-OFF
Reset
The smr! terminals a:e connected. Timing starts when powef is a,oplisd. The ou!put relay will be OFF for the set time and !hen ON for Ihe set IIme Th!s cycle will be repealed until a resel input is
applied or po,vef is dfscannected,
-.,,
PG .,s( 2.10 [A A:) 36 (.YC1) 3.7 (XBI] , ~ ,,, ; c, ., ... ~ LC=~ I I
. ,=.
, .,-
~-l-. . ..
Ill
I I i
~1
I
SI.lC
R.?5e[
I I
Ii
Q%, @
o
[A:
Cor[rol 9.11 O.~FL! NO (15 la) [ :,.
TI
q i
,,. /
r ,..,
Tree. oul ,rd,ca:or IL ,,, ,
Ii
1 { ,, .
rx)
Pcwer
Mode C
Signal Interval/OFF-Delay
Power is continuously applied. Timing begins on both the leading and Irailing edges of the start input. The output relay is energized during timing. Once the timer has timed out from the trailing edge, it resets and is ready for subsequent start inputs.
S:an signal
oc)
L--p..,el-l
I . sst time
f.a . 1?ss than sel Lme
.-
H3CA
omRon
H3CA
hlode
Signal OFF-Delay (1)
The OUlpUl relay is energzsd al Pow2r is conllnuouj~y a;ollsd the Ieadlng edge of l~z s:art Input Tlrning s;ar!s a: the !rallng edge of Ihe star! inplu! The output relay is de-energized when ths accumulated time eq~ak the set time
Ik.
...
.,,,.[,,.,5
,,,
,-:
~_-._
Mode
Signal
E
Start
Interval
Timing sfarts a! the Ieac!ir?g X@ of Power is applied coc[,nuols!v the s:ari input. The Gu[pul relay is only energized during liming. The t!mer is reset when Power is disconnected or a reset inpuf is applled S:m
5 G.J
., .Fc,..:( 2.1 J 1A .A:) - I ,-,,: j I 1
.-
*J
::L,,..,,,T
Power-Ot/ StartPov/er-OFF reset
1
The s[afl terminals a.rs connected. Timing starts when power is applied. The output rslay is only energized during timing. The timer is resel when po.veris disconnected or a reset input is applied.
Power
2.10 (A>. A:,
Q-i [ :. , I t
1
~. .... .
l. ., .,.. ,,.
1-,
.
I
I
t
l
I
I
S11,:
R?se(
, 3.6 [~ (x-C1)L GO.:,, 3.7 (X.81) 9.11 P40(1S.l c [ (!F; W Sj [ ::.
: .:.
1 I 1
--1
Confd oulpul
1,
Mode F
Power. ohl
Cycle Ono-Slloi
Shor!, Power-OFF RONo~
__ -. -! ~
--
-1 ..
Signal
Start
Slat
.3.6 (X.cl)
r! r. [ c,= 1--1 n
I I
d-..g~..g~
Mode G Signal ON-debyOF~delaY
apph+.~. ~ t\i~ ~~-,m on both the leading Iry.\~. =;> ~<~ut relay is energized
Power
Power is continuously
and trailing edges
accumulated when time. the
_.
2.10 (A.AZ) ~,
Of the s!:]~
. 1:.,
-~
Iin:e I:L1.~
inptlt,
.
i, ;
,11
~,.
~,
i-
1[ is also energized
edge Of the start
I+w~ Ic.r t~~ -~~ *.YWL
edge from the of time equals the Set

Star!
!
[
~:;
- ._
trailing
3-6 (X.cl)
c?,
H3CA
In !h~ sctiema!ic diagrams, each thick line ind,cates
omRon
the
H3CA
for the selected c;:,~.,on
external
vIIrIng
necessary
.
85a5 75 .. . . . ..
~-. _ jj. .
hlounting
holes
i_..4zzml
-
.!
(1 7,
_ 5L
.
{~(
1
----
,: :.
35
0-
T-c-;j-;
I
-!--
- , (~3?,
--
~,olc
91
.-.
96 w(3 98]
H3CA-8,
H3CA-8H . -,
jR\-
,- _ (! 33,
~=?l% _
75 J__! (2 37)
;~i~t}
+ I tla!e R.2c!Jmm.mdsd par-d Ih,cknes: IS I 1032 mm Panel cufouf DIN 43700. COCIWTS 10
SOCKETS for H3CA-A

surface or track mounting socket
11 -Pin Sockets
P2CF-11 Bottom
Eleven L!3 5 x 7.5
Mounting
holes
Tao 45 dia. socke! mounmg holes
*; max
~j:~ max.
e.nal,rr,ngement (Top view)
P3GA.11
Back Mounting
Socket
Terminal
arrangement
L-45(
I 77+1
45!5362
ID
T 256
0
-
(Bo:w.. ..../)
ti3CA
ornRon
H3CA
hlode
Pow9r
Signal
OFF-Delay (11)
---i g ..-_ ..
__-. I
is con:mtiously applied. Timing s:arts a! the traillng edge of the star[ lnpu!. Tne output relay is energized during timing
--7, L-.
-.
I
h .-.._
I .
m
.!-_-i
,
I
[ . 5L?!I,F.2
&-f
)., -,
[a
. !.<s ;..3.
5?[ !,m+
s H3CA-8
Power Tme-lIm,I cmfac! hC T,me.lim,! Cmllac: No T m+!,T,,I czn(ac: Ccnlacl NC NO
(7. 2) (1 J!
*ti--:
I
[ ~
u H3CA-8H [
Corllact -- -
(1 -3,
(3. 5, (9 .61
T,ms.hm,! F&mam,rg l,ms Ird, cmO:
;Sk:::
~, .;
~:~: canlacf NO
) (1-31
[:; 0[ 06= K++ ON [ c,.
,~ .. . .,, , ,., ,,. . .....
Rema, mcg C T,ms.out ind, cafor ~ f I = se!
time
R: . r+j?:
!,ma
Dimensions
Unit: mm (inch)
s TIMERS
H3CA-A
., . ... . . .
Panel culout
45 [,,77) (1 97) 501 m
(, ~-,
r[; ~ ::
45 *
!-.
1--J
( :,:9) I----7,, (2,97) -.
}.31s. Rscommend$d panel m(ckness IS 1 1032 mm Panel cutout conforms L!lrl 43700
+5
-t .
to
l-!-[
ISolid-State \
1/16
Repeat Cycle Timer
. .-
1 1 I
H3BF
DIN, Analog-Set Timer with 16 Field-Selectable Time Ranges

Time ranges from 0,05 sec to 100 hours
Dual knob selects OFF time settings Easy-to-read, Separate protective Panel mounting cover may be ordered large scale indicators adapters, separately sockets, ON and OFF output O:d-;~ (v *lcmron h .IJUF
-
independent
ON and
. .--., .... -1 j .-. .. _., -., .-- . ...;. ,-;.:. ~ ,< ,:.+
~ ,_+,
and other accessories
Ordering
u TIMERS
Add the supply vollage
Information
[o the pzr[ number when you order. For example,
on:ofi
H3BF.8.AC1OO
110120 1
Tlminq func;jons Contact type Termina Time Ilml[ Inslan:ansous form
Reoea[ cycle with indeoendenl ,, DPDT 8-pin round socket H3BF-8 2-$ V, 100/1 10:120
I~V,24V,L9VOr110V
!Imes
Part number supply

vollag~s
Ac
DC
V, or 200220240
V; 5060
Hz
R ACCESSORIES
Descripilon Socksts Protective cove:
I Bo!:om Part number
surface or track mounting, not for
top screv, [a~rmnals rnoun[mg adaptec,

or Y92F.il
b~tio~
P2CF-08 S;-e.v termmals.

a;ec;sr;
i Back moun:ing,
Panel mGunting adapters
for use with Y92F-30

LIS.e
P3G-C18
Y92A-488
I Hard plastic cojer;
with Y92F-70
par,ei
FIIS behind panel, ideal for side by side ins!allafion, Use P3G-~3 panel cutout. USe P3G-XI sockets. Charcoal sockets.
Use P3G.23
Sockets. in)
Y92F-30 Y92F-70
Installs through panel front; timer face fits bezel, rear of timer clips 1~ adap[er, Fits 65-66 mm (2.56 -2.59 in) x 52.53 mm (2,04 -2.09 gray face plate measures 83 H x 53 W rm Fits 55 x 45 mm (2,17 x 1.77 in) panel (3.46 x 2.28 in).
Ins[alls through panel front; timer face fits bezel, rear of timer cll?j :a adapler.
CU!CJI.
Y92F-71
Charcoal gray PFP-50N PFP-1OON PFP-M PFP-S
face plate measures 58 H x 50 W mm (2.28 x 1.97 in). Mounting

~rack DIN
rail, 50 cm (1.64 It) length
DIN rail, 1 m (3.28 ft) fength End plate ,. L Spacer
t-i3BF
s
omr20n
H3BF
RANGE
SELECTION
olt31 05105 1 1210
; I [2 10h:s ! 51>50 h-j
10
i 1010 lGI; hrs
Specifications
P2rl rumbz sti@y
,wl; age
!
H3BF.9
~::
2JV, 1001 10i120 V. 2002201240

12 V, 24 V, 49 V. 110 V (permissible
VAC, 50!60
rioole
Hz 20% ma~ )
factor:
Operallng Vol[agd
Power consumption T!minq fui~c!l~nj control ~~;:;I irlpti!s ~Typfi
I 1 Ma<
8510 100?. of ralsd voltags AC: 10 LA: DC: 1 t1 Repea[ cycle wlh separafe ON (red pointer) and OFF (yellc, v poinler) duration Selhngs BPBT
~Tne
load
hmi
! Ins[. )ltaneobs
)
Rss~i;,ng lsseiilng
5 A 250 VAC (p. f. = 1) 10 mA, 5 VDC fO.3A; add f10 ms for 0.05 10 0.5 sec and 0.1 to 1 sec rancjes t5%: add :10 rns for 0.05 to 0.5 sec and 0.1 [o 1 sec ranges resetting Pc,v+r. OFF 0.1 sec max. ON indca!or
Panel,
ih
Ioad
R+oear a:curzcy Semng error s~st+fi] llms
ndlca[ors
,la[trials
Aounllng
(red LED).
OFF
indicator
[red LED) 1
I P!as[ic case. knob Irack or surface
:cnnectlons J/sight !pprovais UL CSA Others 4mbient Temperature +umidily Vibration 1lAechanicaf durability Malkmcflon Shock Maliunc!jon durability durability
9 pin round socke: 100 g (3.5 oz.) Recognized, Certified, File No. E41515 File No. LR22310
SEV, File No. 102 I -10 lo55C(14to131F) 35 to 85% Rt-f 10 to 55 Hz; 0.75 mm (0.03 in) double amplitude 10 to 55 Hz: O 5 mm (0.02 in) doubfe 100G 10G f0.5A; add f10 ms for 0.05 to 0.5 sec and 0.1 to 1 sec ranges f2/0 max.; add *1O sec for 0,05 to 0,5 sec and 0,1 to 1 sec
100 rar,ges
amplitude
Mechanical durability
Varia!!on due 10voltage change Variation due to Iempera[ure

Insulation res:siance
change
MQ min. at 500 VDC and non-current coc:acts carrying
Dielectric
strengl!l
2000 VAC, 50~60 Hz for 1 minute between current-carrying parts and between contac[ and control circuit. 1000 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 minute between non-continuous ] I,lschanical 20 million operations 100,000 operations minimum minimum
Se(w}ce hfe
(under no load. at 1800 ooera;lonsihour) al maximum ratings
I Electrical
H3BF
omRon
H3BF
Engineering
Data
ELECTRICAL SERVICE LIFE
01
[
!
Load current
(A)
Timing Charts
in the scheme!lc diagram, each Ihick line indicates the external wiring
-~
m
~~..nm
q
conmcl
Timing starts when power is appl~ed. The output relay WIII be OFF for a set time and Ihen ON Ix a set time. The OFF and ON times may be different but both Krnes musl be wifhin the selected time range. The OFF~ON cycle will repeat until power is discon. netted. OFFl,~
PO.+ 2.7
O,M,~ OFF(,~
ON,--
IXF[,-I
1
POW(
ON
icdca!cr
Dimensions
9J 7 (3 73) -
, ...
(1
)37
$14
-w--i+-
---=iI=b-d
. . - 63
H~BF
0mr20n
H3BF
SOCKETS
surface orlrack mounting
P2CF. Oa Bottom
.78
3T._J: J:. i Terminal

arrangement ~,lounting holes
, c ,-
<. I
.J. :?. .f
1---2,3 m,,. [,1 72!
P3G.08 Back mounting
socket
41P EEi.g
.. s PANEL
MOUNTING Adapter 1[ is ideal for side by side installation. ADAPTERS Y9?F-30 !.lounling
m=m~
.
(80u0m .,s,,)
Ads?ler
Installs behind the panel.
Use P3G 11 or P3G.08 sockets
Y92F-70
P,lounting
Adapter
b Timer face f;ts bezel, rear of timer

Clips 10 adapter. IJse
Ch~.rcoa! gray panel adapter installs through panel front. P3G08 sockeis.
P3G-11 or
TWO d 5 da
holes
mounting
adapl?r
for panel
05ama(
~52-53
r E3-E5
7 ?6:>?
El
ti31e, Rscommen,jed
Ih,ckness
panel
is i to 3 z m.
United
Electric
Controls
Company
Installation Instructions 10 Series Pressure Switches

SPECTRA-10
IMIO-I
Operation
are activated when a diaphragm or piston sensor responds to a pressure change, This response, at a predetermined setpoint, actuates a SPDT snap-acting switch, converting a pressure signal into an electrical signal. Control setpoint may h varied by turning the internal slotted adjustment screw bushing according to procedures outlined in this document.
Controls
Tvoe A .supplied with male and AWG stripped leadwire using hand tool. Refer designations for proper
Dush-on
term.mJ& : Unit is
female terminals. Insert 18-22 into female terminal and crimp to malded-in N.O., N. C., and COM wiring.
Part I - Installation
Mounting
Controls may be mounted in any position.
Je rmination Tv~e B -. 25 oush-on terminals: N. O., N.C,, and COM terminals require 1/4- female push-on terminals. Insulated female terminals are recommended for safety. Use protective grease for corrosion resistance in outdoor use. Je rmination TvDe C & D 18 - leads18 AWG L Color coding: &GQIQI N.O. Blue N.C. Black Cam Vialet Caution: To attach Type C to conduit connection, hofd electrical connection steady with wrench on hex, then thread on conduit. Te rmination TvDe E - 1/2 NPTF with 5 cord: Cut cord to desired length. Strip back insulation. Color coding: ~ Color N.0, Red N.C. Black Corn White Cautlon:To attach Type E to conduit connection, hold electrical connection steady with wrench on hex, then thread in conduit.
Important:
ambient mount tion).
Always locate units where

fluctuations temperature pressure surges areas
shock, exceeding
vibration Do not 160 F
and
temperature in ambient If severe
are minimal.
(with Buna
N construction)
or 180F
(with Viton construc-
are expected,
use snubber
Rock Hill,
such as BPS-2
made by Universal
Components,
Sc.
Caution: Mo unt usina tm.ssu re c onne ction: Always use a wrench on pressure connection wrench flats. If unit is to be set after mounting, raise adjustment cover, then thread in pressure connection until snug and adjustment opening is accessible. Mount us in a o gtional surface mou tins bracket [oti )vf4491: First, surface mountthe b;acket using #12 or Iklscrews onto 1 3/8- -1 7/8- centers. With adjustment cover open, insert pressure switch into bracket with the bracket looped around the pressure connection wrench flats, making sure the adjustment opening is accessible. Tighten the bracket screw.
+ V
Mount usina Ii? .
)+5
,
-l-
+
CLEAR. + SCREW. FOR
DIAGRAM
NPTM Flectric-ect ion he~inatia~ M12!lQ: Mount through 7/8 clearance hole in panel. Hold in place with serrated 1/2- cxmduit nut.
with @ystment comt)artment cov er: Connect control to pressure source. With power disconnected, raise cover while twisting it to overcome friction. 3. Connect power to terminals or leads. 4, Insert screwdriver into adjustment slot and turn left to increase setting or right to decrease setting. For setting on rise, apply desired pressure and turn adjustment left until switch clicks (light across N,O. and COM terminals comes on). For setting on fall, apply pressure equal to normal system operating pressure. Reduce source pressure to setpoint value. Turn adjustment right until switch clicks (light across N.C. and COM comes on). 1. 2,
(ODt i 0~ stment c rrroartment cow Models withoptio~M212 are factory set and are not considered to be units ihat should be set in th~ fidrf,
Wiring
Wire in acmrdcnca ~:.ih local and Natio:~ al electrical codos i
Dimensions
F.. -: i----
.A<!
.!
)., .,, .,,.. .>., .,, ,. :-.
J/I
k..
.
--1 .. .;. -_J i! ~, 1
I
1,
.,, , r- ~ -
RECOMMENDED PRACTICES United Electric Controls Company recommends careful consideration of the following factors when specifying and
installing UE pressure and temperature units. Before installing a unit, the Installation and Maintenance instructions provided with unit must be read and understood. To avoid damaging unit, proof pressure and maximum temperature limits stated in literature and on nameplates must never be exceeded, even by surges in the system. Operation of the unit up to proof pressure or maximum temperature is acceptable on a limited basis (i.e. start-up, testing) but @ntinuous operation must be restricted to the designated adjustable range. Excessive cycling at proof pressure or maximum temperature limits could reduce sensor life. A back-up unit is nec=ssa~ for applications where damage to a primary unit could endanger life, fimb or property. A high or low limit switch is necessary for applications where dangerous runaway condition could result. The adjustable range must be selected so, that incorrect, inadvertent or malicious setting at any range point an not result in
an unsafe system cmndition. Install unit where shock, vibration and
ambient temperature fluctuations will not damage unit or affect operation. Orient unit so that moisture does not enter the enclosure via the electrical connection. Unit must not be altered or modified after shipment. Consulf UE if modification is necessary. Monitor operation to observe warning signs of possible damage to unit, such as drift in set point. Check unit immediately. Preventative maintenance and periodic testing is necessary for critical applications where damage to unit could endanger property or personnel. For all applications, a factory se! unit should be tested before use, Electrical ratings stated in literature and on nameplate must not be excexied. Overload on a switch can cause damage, possible on the first cycte. Wire unit according to local and national electrid codes, using wire size rewmmended in installation sheet. Use only factory authorized replacement parts and pro~dures. Do not mount unit in ambient temperature exceeding pubhshed limits. For remote mounted temperature units, capillary lengths beyond 10 feet can increase chance of error, and may require re-calibration of set point and indication.
LIMIT WARRANTY
UE warrants that [he product thereby purchased is . upon delivery, free from defects in material and workmanship and that any such product which is found to be defective in such workmanship or material will be repaired or replaced by UE (F.O, B. UE); provided, however, that this warranty
applies only to equipment found to be so
defective within a period of 12 months after installation by buyer but not to exceed 18 months after delivery by the seller. Except for L?e limited warran~ of repair and replacement stated above, UE disclaims all warranties whatsoever with respect to the product, including all implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for any particular purpose.
LIABILITY
LIMITATION
United
~
LJE
Electric
Controls
Co.
USA
The sole and exclusive remedy of buyer for any Iiabifity or seller for any claim, including incurred in connection with (1) breach of any warranty whatsoever expressed or implied, (11)a breach of contract, (Ill) a negligent act or acts (or negligent failure to act) committed by seller, or (IV) an act for which strict fiability will be imputed to seller, is limited to the limited warranty or repair and replacement stated herein. In no event shall the seller be liable for any special, indirect, mnsequential or other damages or like general nature, including, without limitation, loss of profits or production, or loss or expenses
PO Box 9143, Watertown, MA 02272-9143 Tef: 6i7/926-l 000 Fax: 617/926-2568
of any nature, incurred by the buyer or any third party.
Aire acondicionado
4.6
Aire acondicionado
4.6 Descripcin, instalacin y mantenimiento
4.6.1 4.6.2 4.6.3 4.6.4 4.6.5 4.6.6 4.6.7 4.6.8 4.6.9 4.6.10 4.6.11 4.6.12
Unidad de manipulacin de aire THERMO AIR Ventilador eliminador de arena SCHRTER Acondicionador de aire KUTHE Acondicionador de aire ROCA Vlvula multihoja TROX Vlvula cortafuego TROX Rejilla resistente a la intemperie con vlvula de seguridad TROX Rejas TROX Manmetro de contacto AIRFLOW Interruptor de presin diferencial para aire DUNGS Calefactor DEVITEMP / sala de control Lista de cables y esquema de conexiones elctricas para la caja de mecanismos del interruptor del acondicionador de aire Kuthe Lista de piezas para el esquema no. 2504 925
4.6.13
23.01.98
COLLAHUASI
Aire acondicionado
Hoja en blanco
COLLAHUASI
23.01.98
Aire acondicionado
4.6.1
Unidad de manipulacin del aire THERMO AIR
23.01.98
COLLAHUASI
Aire acondicionado
Hoja en blanco
COLLAHUASI
23.01.98
THERMO-AIR VK 18
ESPECIFICATION (OWNERS
DE USO
MANUAL)
Especificaciones Thermo-Air LBK
con Werencia
a todos
Ios aparatos
de aimacitm
y ventiladoms
Todos Ios productos Thermo-Air directrices: Dirwtrices de baja tensih: Norma industrial:
son fabricados
de acuerdo
a Ias siguientes
normas y
73t231EEG EN 602041
93/65/EEG
Pars su propia
segundad
deberia
leer atentamente
Ias especificaciones
generales.
Generalidades Condition para la cofrecta instalacion dei aparato ciimatizador (L8K) es un fundamento nivelado y horizontal. Si ei aparato climatizador se monta en un techo, se debe observar en el tipo de fijacion, que se evite una transrnision de mido entre el edifiuo y el aparato. Dentro del apamto se ha previsto todo, para evitar una transmission de midos entre Ias piezas en rotation (motor y ventilado) y la carcasa. Entre el ventilator y la abertura de soplado existe una union el~stica. Motor y ventilator estin montados sobre un bastidor estable y el bastidor a su vez esta apoyado sobre amortiguadores de vibraciones elasticos. Todos Ios puntos de union entre el aparato y la red de canales deberian ser previstos con conexiones flexibles. Para eviter la transmission acktica del cuerpo, es convenience colocar placas amortiguadoras de vibraaonea y de ruidos entre el aparato y el fundamento. Los puntos de apoyo en el montaje de techo deberian sw pmvistos con amotiguadorea de vibraciones o tiras amortiguadoras de vibraciones adiaonales. (Para el montaje del aparato en el techo puede pruduame, segtin et tipo del techo det ambiente, un increment de Ios ruidos de marcha por espacios de resonanaa.) Sistema del ventilator (vale tanto para la entrada como para la salida de aim)
El motor solamente puede ser conectado de acuemlo al esquema de conexiones que se suministra. iEn motores con conductors fries se debe instaiar un activador de conductor frio, en motma con contactos t9rmicos un contactor con enclavamiento y en motorea sin conductor frio o termocontactos, un rel~ de sobrecorrientel Dependiendo del tipo de ventilator inccwporado, es posible una mgulaaon de moluaones. En todos Ios ventiladores radiates con accionamiento directo, que trabajan con una red de 230V/50 HZ se instala un regulador electrbnico de ravoluaones o un tmnsformador de etapas. Los ventiladores accionados con correas trapezoidales pueden ser regulados por motores trWicos de wrias revoluaones o mediante un variador de frecuencias. El tipo de la mgulaaon depende de la aplicacion. Su asesor Therm*Air Ie ayudti oon gusto dumnte su ekccitm. La puesta en mamha solamente puede ser raalizada, cuando Ios canalea estAn conectados y Ias parades Iateiales desmontabk (puertas y aberturas de revision) -n cemadas. Verificar el sentido de rotation del rotor del ventilator. Medir al consumo de coniente del motor dei ventilator. La corriente del motor no debe supemr el valor indicado en la placa de caracteristicas del motor.
Atencion:
iAnte trabajos de reparation y mantenimiento se debe desconectar imprescindiblemente 81 intemuptor principal! Se deben tomar medidas, impidan una conetion accidental.
que
Sistema
de filtro
El sistema de filtro es suministrado con diferentes elementos filtrates. El equipamiento depende del tipo y de la aplicacion del aparato de ventilation. Pueden ser considerados tambien deseos especificos del ctiente. El sistema filtmnte es equipado con fiitros pianos o filtros de bolsiilos. Los filtros pianos estandar se suministran en 3 variaciones. La variation seleccionada depende se la potenaa de ventilation y de la clase de filtro. Los fikros de polvo fino de la cIase de filtro EU2/EU3 son fiitros pianos, que se encuentran tensados dentro de un marco de filtro. El cambio de filtro se realize por reemplazo del filtro piano. Filtros de polvo fino de la clase de filtro EU3 hasta EU7 y EU 10 son bolsillos con marco. Los filtros con bolsiilos se reemplazan completos con el marco. Los intetvalos de mantenimiento para un cambio de filtru dependen en gran madda del entomo y de la aplicacion. En general vale pam el tiempo de estadia del fiitro, Ias diferencias de presion finales indicadas pore{ fabricate del filtro o Ios Iimites para un servicio rentable de la instalacion de ventilation. Atencion: iAnte trabajos de reparation y mantenimiento imprescindiblemente el intenuptor principal! impidan una conexion accidental. de compuertas de mezcla de sire de mezcla de airs pueden ser suministradas en difemntes La ubicacion de Ias compuertes de ceiosia depende tanto de la como de Ias condiciones de la construction. o salida de aire, o ante riesgo de general con 2043 Ias cantidades de aire. se debe desconectar Se deben tomar medidas,
que
SMema
El sistema de compuertas veriaciones y ejecuaones. instalacion de ventilation,
La instalaaon de una compuerta de celosia en un aparato de entrada debe impedir la entrada de aire exterior durante la parada del aparato congelation pmteger el registro. El sistema de compuertas de mezcla de aire esta equipadas por regla mmpuertas de celosias. Las compuettas de mezcla de aire controlan individuals de arte, como aire exterior, aire expulsado y recirculation
Las compuertas de mezcla de aire estan, siempre que sea posible, combinadas con un vanllaje. Si durante la puesta en matia se instala el varillaje, se debe obsewar que el juego mnjunto delas compuertas de celosia sea correctamente transmitido con la regulaaon. El control de Ias compuertas se realiza manualmente o con ayuda de un motor de regulaaon de compuertas. La compuerta de celosia puede ser suministrada con un motor de ajuste. Durante la puesta en marcha, y para garantizar una mnecta funcion de la celosia, se debe obsewar la corrects direccion de activation del motor de ajuste. El LBK no funciona Para posibilitar una fipida y economics elimination en caso de averias, se han Iistado aqui algunas causas de averias que se presentan. Por favor entre en contacto con su instalador.
1) El ventilator
no funciona: - LFusible defectuoso? - Controle la tension de la red con un instrument de mediaon. - LContactor del motor? - El contactor del motor se ha disparado. Controlar fusibles previos y ajustes. - LMotor defectuoso? - Medir el motor.
2) Mala caiidad del aire: - Controle Ios ajustes de Ias compuertas de celosia CompueRa de celosia de movimiento pesado. - Motor de ajuste defectuoso o suelto. - Regulation defectuosa - Filtro sucio. 3) Insuficiente potenaa de calefaccion: - i Dependiente del sistema!. Problems en bombas de circulation de agua caliente. - Bombs de circulation defectuosa - Caldera de calefacci6n no funciona (Medir temperature de entrada y de retomo). - Verificar la regulation. - En inte~mbiadores de calor de combustion directs, p.ej. Averias de combustion. - Registro electrico de calefaccion, p.ej. Limitador de temperature de seguridad ha acWado.
4) Insufiaente
potencia de refrigeration: - i Dependiente del sistema! Problemas en bombas de circulation de agua fria o con evaporator directo. - Bombs de cimulacion defectuosa. - Controlar la temperature de entrada y de retomo. - Veriticar la regulation. intensos: - Desequilibrado del rotor. - Dafios en cojinetes. - Tension de mrea trapezoidal insuficiente. - Cons trapezoidal defectuosa. - Asiento del polea de conea trapezoidal en el arbol. Thermo4W en todo memento con
5) Ruidos de aim demasiado
Ampliackh
de apamtos
de ventiiacion
Los apamtos de ventilation de Thermo-Air pueden ser ampliados grupos adicionales por su principio de construcdon modular. p.ej.: Etapa Etapa Etapa Etapa etc. Tambien de de de de filtm (Fiitros pianos o de bolsilios) mfrigeraaon compuertas de mezda de aire recuperation de caior
en el tipo y la ejecucion
pueden ser suministrados
IOSaparatos
difemnciados:
p.ej.
Paredes Iaterales de dobie batiente 13astidor especial Todos 10S COiO~S RAL Instalacion exterior etc.
THERMO-AIR
Instrucciones de montaie
SERIE-LBK
La Serie - LBK econstituida de una serie de aparatos de climaticion modulares, adecuados tanto para el montaje en techos corno tambien en parades. El apamto tambi~n puede ser colocado sobm el suelo. El Iugar de instalacion debe ser entonces una superficie nivelada horizontal. La puesta en marcha de Ios aparatos de climatizacion directs Thetmo-Air solamente puede ser realizada despues de un cuidadoso estudio de Ias instrucciones de servicio. Instrucciones de montaje: - El montaje del malefactor de sire es tipida y sencilla. En el . montaje de pared, el apamto puede ser colocado con estribos de fijacion de pared. Al utilizar barras roscadas con rieles perforados o barras roscadas con soporte de aparato, este ultimo puede ser fijado debajo del techo del ambiente. - Independientemente del tipo de montaje se deberian reducir Ias transmisiones de ruidos del cuerpo mediante una amortiguacion atistica adecuada. - El aparato LBK puede, segun la eleccion del aparato, ser utilizado con o sin red de canales. - Si 81 aparato se utilize sin red de canales, Ias aberturas de Ios aparatos deben ser provistas de rejas de protection adecuadas. - Silas aberturas de succion o soplado etin abiertas o de acceso facil, instalaciones de protection deben evitar la intmduccion Iibre de Ias manes. - Al conectar un circuito de PWW obsewar siempre que et registro de calefaccion sea atravesado dentro del principio del caudal inverse. - Como bateria de enfriamiento puede ser utiiizado un registro para agentes refrigerants de evaporation directs o un intercambiador PKW. - Las conexiones roscadas de Ios registms deben ser protegidas contra torsional ccmectar la entrada y el retomo mediante una contmsujecion. - Al instalar un registro de calefaccion elecbico se deben obsenfar Ias nonnas de seguridad correspondientes. - El cableado ektrico solamente puede ser realizado de acuerdo al esquema de conexiones que se suministra. - Antes que quiera conectar el aparato, verifique si la Iinea de conexion e~ sepamda de la red. Ademas deberia prever medidas, que impidan una conexion accidental de la tension de alimentacion. - Controle antes de la primers puesta en marcha, todas Ias conexiones ekktricas.
Instrucciones
de seMao:
- La puesta en marcha solamente puede ser realizada, cuando todos Ios canales necesarios estan conectados y todas Ias paredes laterales estan cerradas. - Todas Ias aberturas del apamto de Iibre acceso, deben estar aseguradas con una reja apropiada contra introduction directs de Ias manes. - Verificar et sentido de mtacion del rotor del ventilator. - Medir el consumo de corriente del motor del ventilator. El caudal del motor no puede superar et valor indicado en la placa de caracteristicas del motor. Generalidades: - La conexion elktrica se debe ejecutar de acuerdo a Ias Reglamentaciones-VDE y Ias condiciones t6cni-s de conexion de la empress suministradora de energia local. - Si el aparato LBK esta equipado con un registro de refrigeration, se debe conectar [a salida de condensation tratis de un sifon.
Obsetvaciones:
- Todas Ias conetiones elktricas deben sw ejecutadas de acuerdo a Ias disposiciones Iegales vigentes. - Previo a trabajos de reparation y mantenimiento se debe ser mnectar impresandiblemente el interruptor principal y prever medidas que impidan la conexion accidental.
Las correas trapezoidales que han sido tensadas en fabrica, deben ser tensadas nuevamente despues de aprox 50 horas de semcio y en intewalos regulares de 6 meses ser vetificada su tension. La corrects tension de Ias correas trapezoidales garantiza una marcha optima y aumenta la viola util del accionamiento de correas y cojinetes. Al reemplazar, renovar siempre todas Ias correas trapezoidales del accionamiento.
Se recomienda, controlar regularmente Ios cojinetes de{ ventilator y en caso necesario proceder a Iubticarlos. Los cojinetes Iibres de mantenimiento estan Iubricados con una grasa estindar a base de Iitio saponificado y garantizan una segum protection contm humedad y corrosion. El motor de accionamiento no requiem por regla general ningun mantenimiento.
Verificar
la correa trapezoidal
a tension y desgaste
Verification de Ias poleas de correas a su corrects fijacion al arbol. Controlar la alineacion de la poleas de correas.
Si el aparato de =ja de ventilation se utiliza sin filtro del Iado de succion, se debe controlar la suciedad del ventilator en intetvalos regulares y proceder a su Iimpieza. Los intervals de Iimpieza dependen de Ias condiciones locales. Sistema del interoambiador de calor
Puede ser utilizado como intercambiador de calor un registm de agua caliente, vapor o calefacdon ektrka. Intercambiadores de calor de combustion de gasdeo solamente a pedido. Se instalan, dependiendo de {a potencia calefactora necesaria, registros de calefaccion de una o varias filas de tubes. Las conexiones roscadas del registm deben ser protegidas contra torsiones al conectar la entrada y el retomo mediante una contrasujecion. Las tuberias de contion deben sertendidas de tal manera, que no se impida el acceso a otras partes del apamto. El registm debe ser mntrolado a la suciedad en intervals periodicos. El intercambiador de calor debe ser conectado siempm bajo el prinapio del caudai inverse. Para protection del mgistro de caiefaccion se recomienda un tennostato de protection contra la congekion. SI se instaia un ragistro eltico de calefaccion, se deben observar Ias normas de seguridad correspondientes. Como cdefactor puede ser utiiizado como intemambiador de calor, un generador de aire caliente de combustion dimcta con un quemador adecuado de gas o gasoleo. La c%mara de combustion de acem al cromo tiene una viola titil de 10 atios.
La puesta en marcha del quemador deberia ser realizada por un instalador acreditado. La caja de recoleccion de gases de humos esti pmvista con tapas de Iimpieza. Intemalos regulares de mantenimiento a traves de un professional, garantizan un elevado rendimiento y un seticio seguro del quemador. Observe ante todos Ios trabajos en ei intercambiador de calor, que Ias elevadas temperatures del registro de calefaccion pueden ocasionar quemaduras. Atencion: iAnte trabajos de reparation y mantenimiento imprescindiblernente el intemuptor principal! impidan una conextin accidental. de Wrigeracion se debe desconectar Se deben tomar medidas,
que
Sistema
Como intercambiador ftigonfico puede ser utilizado un registm refrigerator de agua fria o de evaporation directs. Se instalan, dependiendo de la potencia frigorifica necesaria, registms de calefaccion de 40 mas fiias de tubes. Las conexiones roscadas del registro deben ser protegidas contra torsiones al conectar la entrada y el retomo mediante una mntrasujecion. Las tuberias de conexion deben ser tendidas de tal manera, quenose impida ei acceso a otras partes del aparato. La conexion de salida de condensation de la etapa de refrigeration debe ser conectada a trwk de un sifon. iPrevio a la puesta en marcha y despues de una parada prolongada del aparato, se debe Ilenar el sifdn de agual El registro debe ser mntrolado a la suciedad en inteivaios peri6dicos. Atencion: iAnte trabajos de mparacion y mantenimiento impmscindiblemente el intemuptor principal! impidan una conexitin accidental. de mcuperecidn de calor se debe desconectar Se deben tomar rnedidas,
que
Sistema
La ejecucion estindar de ia recuperation de calor es un intercambiador de caior de placas. k temperature del entomo es de max 150%. Dependiendo dei tipo de aplicaoion se trata ei intemmbiador de calor de caudai cmado con un recubrimiento especiai. La conexion de salida de cxmdensaci6n debe ser conectada a traw% de un sifon. iP~vio a la puesta en mamha y despues de una parada prolongada del apamto, se debe Ilenar al sif6n de aguai El intercambiador de calor de plase debe contmlar a la suciedad en intervdos periodicos. Atencion: iAnte trabajos de mparaci6n y mantenimiento imprescindlblemente al interrupter principal impidan una conexi6n accidental. se dabs dasconectar Se deben tomar rnddas,
que
Todos Ios components rnodulares de Ios aparatos de climatizacion pueden ser suministrados individualmente y por regla general desde exktenaas de almac%m. Por esta radm Thermo-Air esta en amdiciones de suministmle a breve plazo, piezas de recambio, components individuals y aparatos completos. Serie de aparatos Thenno-Ak (Las series LBK y de vetiiladoms) y de ventilation peftenecen Ios
A Ios apamtos de climatizacion siguientes pmductos
de aire Thermo-Air
Serie - LBK 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) 9) 10) Serie Serie Serie Sene Serie Serie Serie Serie Serie Serie UH LG FA LBU WIW FC FA UHR PC MLBK de la serie de components
Serie de ventiiaci6n 1) 2) 3) 4) Serie Serie Setie Setie TVC VK TAX ES
Otros
productos
indkiduales
de rne~o-Ak
Ventiiadores Motoms Bastidores Compuertas de celosia Recuperadores de calor Registms de calefaccion Elementos ektricos Reguladoms
y refrigeraaon
Filtro de arena para el sistema de sobrepresion MANTENIMIENTO DE IAS SERIES 40B DYNA VANE
El Iimpiador de aire Dyna Vane se Iimpia autorn&icamertte y no requiere el setiao rutinario tipico de Ios fittros de aire que coktan y retienen el polvo exiraido de la cornente de aim. No obstante, hay unas pocas operaciones de mantenimiento que tendtin que obsewarse. Al estar la Dyna Vane disefiada para extraer ei polvo del aire, no su funcion no consiste en extraer residues grandes tales como trapos, hojas o tmzos de papei. Debido a que la entrada de tales msiduos podria obstruir Ios canaies de purga de Ias cddas de la Dyna Vane. La admision de aim de la Dyna Vane es~ nonnalmente provista de una pantalla de admision. Hay que redizar una inspeccidn visual periodica pa= cemiomrse de que esta pantalla de admision esti Iibre de residues grandes que podrian impedir la Iibm circulation de aire. Debe malizarse una inspection mas detdlada a intewalos que dependen de Ias circunstancias de cada instalacion en particular. En la mayoria de cases bastani con una vez al afio. Durante esta inspection debe controlame ei canal de pu~a de cada ceida para cerciomrse de que no se ha taponado con residues grandes. Al mismo tiempo hay que examinar que no se hayan fonwdo depositos en Ios alabes dei equipo Dyna Vane. Una Iigera capa de polvo es normai y no seti impediment para e! funcionamiento o eficacia de Ios equipos. No obstante, en aigunas instalaciones, Ios alabes de 10s equipos podr%n acumuiar un deposito m= denso de suciedad superficial debido a la viscosidad inusual de aigun polvo o debido a la presencia de vaho de aceite o vapores simiiares en al aim. En estos cases debetin iimpiarse Ios aiabes del equipo. En funtin dei tipo y la tenaadad del deposito de polvo y Ias arcunstancias de la instalaaon y ias preferenaa dei usuario, hay dos formas de Iimpiar Ios alabes de ia Dyna Vane: Un metodo es la Iimpieza in situ cepillando la superiicie de 10 aiabes y/o sopiando con aire comprimido. El Segundo mdtodo consiste en retirar compietamente Ios paquetes de ~abes para Iimpiarlos con una SoJuach de detergence u otro disolvente adecuado. Iado ascendente de la Dyna Vane despues de Los paquetes de alabes son retirados dei haber retirado previamente la pantaila de admisi6n. Los paquetes de alabes son mantenidos en position por flejes redondeados queestiin afianzadas con barras de fijackm. Despu6s de soltar Ias tuercas que mantienen en position Ias barras de fijaadn, girar Ias barras de fijaaon en 90 y retirar 10s flejes redondeados. Coger cada uno de Ios paquetes de alabes y empujarlo haaa deiante saci%dolo de su uniciad. Al vcdver a instalar !0s paquetes de alabes hay que cerciorarse de recubrir con una grasa adecuada Ias superkies extemas de Ios canales a Ios que Ios ~labes est4n soidados y Ias superfiaes internas de [OScanales dentin de Ios cuaies cada paquete de aletas se desiiza. Esta grasa no soio Iubrica para hater mas mmo juntaara p tiai la inserciti y extraccidn sino que tambiAn evita la comosion y sirve evitar ei paso de aim y suaedad. Se recomienda grasa As-Motive RPM o similares de fabricates de aceite usuaies. Obviamente, si ia operadh de iimpieza es tan severa que tambien elimina la pintura de Ios alabes, hay queproceder a un abundante adarado, secado y mpintado antes de proceder a la reinstalaaon arriba descrita. Durante esta inspection el sistema de purga debeti ser tambien controlado para cerciorarse quenada ha obstacuiizado ei flujo de aim de purga. Si se ha usado un sopiante de purga es necesai o comprobar la posible formaaon de depckitos densos en el impulsor, y si fuese necesario Iimpiarlo tambiti. Compmbar tambien ei apriete de Ias tuemas y tomillos en ios sopiantes.
Aire acondicionado
4.6.2
Ventilador eliminador de arena SCHRTER
23.01.98
COLLAHUASI
Aire acondicionado
Hoja en blanco
COLLAHUASI
23.01.98
BWbb8Mbltung
Inatrucciones pan S1 mantaje y a=vici-ode VllNTIIADORES RADIfiBS

SCERUTllR dk accionamiento di~cto . ..
VB 030
spanisch Hoja 1
10
Dafioa
de
transport
montaje
Antes de pnceder al montaj= se comprobaxd Hi el ventilator ha llegado an petiecto. ostado a su de.stinoo Hi, por el contrario, EIanota exteriomente que ha sufrido dafioe duhnte transport. La rueda de fiabes no debe ofrwor resistenal oia ql hiioerlagirar oon la mano ni parame. por gravedad en ninguna posioidn, d~b~endo @rar durante largo al impulsarla con fuerza. En d c.aaode daficsde transport visibles oolamenta podrh ofoctuazwe rspara:;ionesn la carcasa del e ventilator. Ho estd permitido cudquiar tipo de reajusts do la ruada de dfabes.,ya qua perjudicarfa e] uquilibrio da la miama. tuberfas empalmadas S1 vemtila(iordet)erdntener sujecionea proplas. MO est~ p.ermitidoquelaa mismas se apoyen sobru la boos de asptiaci6n o de impulsi6n, respectivament~dal ventilator, ya quo podrfa Her causa de que as produzcan toraiones de la caroasa y que 10S &labes de la rueda rocen oontra la misma.
Las 2.
Los ventiladores SCHRUT~ son sometidos H funcionamiento de prueba durante largo tietmpoantes de au suministro, com.prob&ndo~e el equilibrado, la marcha suave y la producci6n de ruldos y midi~ndos~ el consumo de corriente. Los wentiladores son aptos para fuk)cionamientocontinuo, no debiendo ser el con~umo de corriente del motor mayor que y la corriente.nominal, a condicidn de que la temparatura la humedad del ambiente seau normales. Conexi6n dd motor Los ventiladomes SCHRUTER son de LU)Gconstrucci6n tan eatable, que no existe inconvenience alguno para una conexi6u directs. W arranque mediante interrupter de estrella-tri6ngulo solamente sffr~ necesario si l.a red de suminiatro de corriente no eetd en condiciones de resistir la alta corriente de arranque (de 5 a 6 veces la corriante nominal) que se registra en el caso de conexit$ndirects, por 10 que la cent-l el~ctrlca prescribe el uso del citado interruptor de etatrella-trikgulo para efectuar el fwranque.
motor de ventilator deberd equiparse., adexufs de 10S fu-sibles, con u guardamotor o interrupter de protecci6n contra aobreintensidad quo opere en las tres fwes y que est~ exactamente re.guladoconforme a la corriente nominal del motor. Cada
3.
4.
50 % ~ o
Schroter
La puesta en march.ano podrd efec-tuarsehasta que no estdn empalmadas tod8s las tuberfas en e] l.adode aspiracidn y de impulsi6n, respectivamente, confome al piano respectiVe. Deberdn tener lae mismas medidas qu,ese tomaron por baGmbl+ Co KG 8
q
D. 73631 Ruder sberg
Pmtfach
120
TeLefm
(07183)
923-o
Telefax
(07183)
923-~~
& 5CHR~
DLUFT7E E!!!!L
thwtuW
lnstruccione~
ViCiC
pm-a !31 montaje
9e~-
de YEN!X!IL4DOIU3S .RADIAMS SCHRUTER de accionamiento directg
VB 030
E se al efectuar la planificaoidnde la ~~~~tdfi::~dri, Si la resistencia de la tuberfa es demasiado pequeila,aumenta la cantidnd de sire y la potencia neoesaria (consu.mGde corriente)~ pudiendo ser causa de qua se sobre.cargueel motor. Por este motivo deberd comprobars~ el ~gimen de ma.rchaal poner en funcionamiento la instalacit$npor pfimera vez, verific~do para ello la corriente en uno de 10S ires :~tileg de alimantacidn de corrientei La corrients de funciona.mientonn debeti stirsuperior, por razones de seguridad, del 90 al 95 por ciento da la o@rfionte nominal del motor, en funcionamiento conti:nuo,a fin de que no pueda producirsa en nin~ caao una aobrucarga del motor al variar las condioiones del funcionamie;ito (oscilaciones de la tempe.ratura). 6. Entretentiiento da 10S cojinetee. Los ventiladores no tienen cojinetes propir:n,Sol.amente10S cojinetes a bolas del motor necesitan emtreteriimiento, para el que se obaervw?fi las instrucciones de: fahricante del mismo. Bntruterd.mientodcl vent.iladcm El entretmi.mlento y cuidado del wentilador puede Itiitaroe a limpia.rlopor dentxw de doe a tns veces al.aih, comprobando al eatado de la rueda de tflabes. Las acumulaciomes de polve y oxidaci6n en la :ruedade ~lahe~ puedan perjudicar al equilibnio da:la misma, dubiendo suftir por 10 tanto 10S cojinetes dal motor una carga o esfuerm bastante superior a que Ei la rueda est.~bienequilibrada. Desmontiajeda la ruada da dlabes Si la carcasu no es @ratorla (normalmente modslos grandea), se quitard la tapa de la parta fxontal de. la ::arcasa, inclusive el tubo &@ asphacidn. Sqjuidamente puede desmon~sa la rueda de t!labesext~~ndola de su eje. Bsto fiicamente dubs+ r~ hace~oon ayuda d- 10S doa taladrw roscad~s practicados en el cubo de la rueda. En 10H modeloE de carcasa gtratoria (w$1o modelos psquefios) sc destornilla.rdn de-1todo log tomilloo de la bfida giratorla en la parte trasera de la.carcasa. Se.guidamentese quit~ con cuidado toda la oarcaaa haoim adelanje (en direccidn al lado de aeplraci.6n),por encima du la ruada de ~labes. Al wolver a montarla, 8* COIOCEidn, COXl holgura, las dos btidaa iratoriae con qpda ds doe t~mnillos parwialmente atormilfados (Utillnr dos agujeros supetiores; ranura de la brida del anlllo interior inclinada hacia arriba), de forma que puoda i.ntroducirse.8 aamcasa entre. las bfidau. 1 h-mihdola girar.
Schroter GmbH & CO. KG o D.73631 Wdersberg
q
7.
8.
Postfach
120
@ Te(ef~
(07183)
923-o
Te(efax
(07183)
%?3-499
5CHROTM
Betriebsanleitung
~iCiO
de
SCHROTER
VENT I~ORBS die accionamlento
-- - -J-..
L
RADIA1,ES di:iwc:
.O
VB 030
spanisch Hoja 3
IMPORTANT : Esta forma da efectuar el moutaje es impresoindible, a fin de qua no eufran dafloeIoe ~labes. Ahora, y no antes, se colocan 10s restantes tornillos, aprethdolog todos juntos. !lkunbih al montar la rueda de &labes en el eje solamente deberh utilizarse 10S agujeros roscados del cubo y del eje.
Golpes pueden daflarIos cojinetes. ATE.NCION:lodos10S trabajos en la rueda de dlabes se har~n con el m&lmo culdado. No estk permitido torcer 10S ~labes, ya que cualquier modificacidn de su forma requiere un nuevo equilibrado dindmico.
$chroter
GmbH .% CO KG
D.73631
Wdersbcrg
Postfach
120
Tel. efon
(07183)
923-O
T~{efaX
(07183)
923-499
>ltMtN>
Drehstrommotoren
Three-Phase Motors Moteurs triphas~s Motores trif~sicos Motori trifasi Trefasmotorer Betriebsanleitu rig/instructions 56. ..9OL
ILA5 1~~~
LC5 1 LA9 lMFfj
LP5 1 LP9
PP5 1 PP9
EWN-Bestell-Nr. /Order No.: 610.42057/21f
Baugrof3en (BG) Frame sizes (BG) D6s. carcasse (BG) Tamatios constructivos (BG) Grandezze (BG) Utforingsstorlekar (BG)
1LA5
IMB3
Bauformen Types of construction
Formes Formas
constructivas
Forme costruttive Utforingsformer
,;
r & 6 G
IMB6 IMB7
IMB8
53
IM s14
oaer or our 0 oppure eller
IM V 19
IM B 35 IM B 34
DEUTSCH Die Angaben und Anweisungen in allen gelieferten Betriebsund sonstigen Anleitungen mussen zur Vermeiund Schaden stets beachtet werden.
ENGLISH ! The data and recommendations specified in all the instructions supplied, and in all other related instructions, always be observed in order to avoid hazardous situaand the risk of possible injury or damage. WARNING
u
dung
WARNUNG von Gefahren
must tions
Dieser Betriebsanleitung ist eine zusatzliche Sicherheitsinformation (gelb) beigegeben, die erganzende Angaben zur Sicherheit fur elektrische Maschinen und Gerate enthalt. Lefztere ist daher such eine Erganzung fur alle weiteren noch gelieferten Betriebsund sonstigen Anleitungen (z. B. fur Bremsen, USW.). Fur die Ausfiihrung von SO fldeNarlanten der Maschinen Gerate gelten zusatzlich die Angaben in den Katalogen Angeboten. und und
These instructions are augmented by supplementary instructions (yellow), which contain additional information on the safety measures for electrical machines and devices. The latter instructions thus augment all previously submitted instructions and all other related instructions (e. g. for brakes, etc.). For data solely to the relevant applicable catalogs to custom-built and quotations. motors, please refer
Beschreibung
Anwendungsbereich Dle Motoren konnen in staublger oderfeuchter Umgebung aufgestellt werden. Die Isolierung ist tropenfest. Bei sachgema13er Lagerung oder Aufstellung im Freien sind normalerweise gegen Wltterungseinfl usse keine besonderen SchutzmaBnahmen an den Motoren notwendlg. Aufbau 1LA5 und Arbeitsweise
Description
Application The motors are suitable for operation in dusty and damp environments. The motors have tropicallzed insulation. If the motors are properly stored or installed outdoors, special weatherproofing measures are not usually required.
Construction
and
mode
of operation
und lLA9-Motoren (auf3er Baugro13e 56), lLC5-und -Motoren sind eigengekuhlt (mit Luftern). 1PP5 und lPP9Motoren sind eigengekuhlt entweder - z. B. beim Einsatz als Luftermotoren - durch auf den Laufern anzuordnende SonderIufter, oder durch Fremdlufter. 1LA5- und lLA9-Motoren der -Motoren sind selbstgeBaugro13e 56, 1LP5-, 1LP9- und kuhlt (ohne Lufter) Bei Fui3motoren Eel lLC5-Motoren mit zu beachten sind die Fu(3e am Gehause ist zusatzllch angegossen.
1LA5 and 1LA9 motors (except frame size 56), 1LC5 and motors are self-ventilated (with fans). 1PP5 and 1PP9 motors are self-ventilated either by separate fans arranged on the rotors, e.g. to serve as fan motors, or by external fans. 1LA5 and 1LA9 motors are nonmotors of frame size 56, 1LP5, 1LP9 and .! ventilated (without fans). The feet of foot-mounted frame. motors are cast please Integrally with the the 1
dle Bremsenbetriebsanleitung
Where 1LC5 motors are concerned, brake operating instructions.
also observe
C Siemens AG 1985 Ausgabe/Edition 05.91
Betrieb
Operation
Alle Arbeiten am Motor nur durchfuhren, wenn elektrische Spannungslosigkeit sichergestellt ist.
A
I .
WARNUNG
A
I .
WARNING
Before starting any work on the machine, be sure to isolate it from the power suppfy.
Aufstellung Betragt die Zeitvon der Lieferung biszurlnbetriebnahme der Motoren bet gunstigen Bedingungen (Auf bewahrung introckenen, staubUnd erschutterungsf reien Raumen) mehr als 4 Jahre oder bei ungunstigen Bedingungen mehr als 2 Jahre, so sollten die Lager erneuert werden. Fur die Baugrof3en 90 S und 90 L gilt: Motoren mlt oben angeordnetem Klemmenkasten haben zur Elnhaltung der genormten Fuf3abmessungen bet der Bauform IM B 3 an den hinteren Fuf3en Doppellocher. Bei Motoren mit seitllch angeordnetem Klemmenkasten (Sonderausftihru ngen) haben bet Bauform IM B 3 allevier Ftif3e Doppellocher. Dadurch konnen such bel links angeordnetem Klemmenkasten die genormten Lochabstande eingehalten werden (siehe Fig.6). Bei Maschtnen mlt Wellenende nach oben und unten, mu13 gewahrlelstet sein, daB keln Wasser in das obere Lager eindringen kann Das Klemmenkastenoberteil kann bel ILA5-, 1LA9-, 1LP5-, 1LP9-, 1PP5- und lPP9-Motoren urn 180 Grad, ,,.+ 1LC5-,
Installation If the motors have been stored for more than 4 years under favorable conditions (storage in a dry place free from dust and vibration) or for more than 2 years under adverse conditions prior to commissioning, the motor bearings must be replaced. The following applies to frame sizes 90 S and 90 L: The rear feet of motors of type of construction IM B 3 with topmounted terminal box have double holes in order to ensure that these machines adhere to the standard foot dimensions. On the other hand, all four feet of motors of type of construction IM B 3 with side-mounted terminal box (special designs) have double holes. This enables the standard hole clearances to be maintained even when the terminal box is arranged on the left-hand side (see Fig. 6). Whenever machines are installed with the shaft extension pointing upwards or downwards, provision must be made to prevent water from entering the upper bearing. In the case of 1LA5, ILA9, 1LC5, 1LP5, 1LP9, 1PP5 and 1PP9 motors, the top part of the terminal box can be turned through ., . 180 degrees. . -, ,, ,,,
L&
.
Wegen des elektrisch nichtleitenden Kunststoffgehauses des Klemmenkastens durfen fiir die Leitungseinfuhrungsbohrungen bei 1LA5-, 1LA9-, 1LP5-, 1LP9-, 1PP5-, und lPP9-Motoren nur Verschraubungen und Verschluf3schrauben aus elektrisch nichtleitendem Material verwendet werden.
VORSICHT
A
!
The terminal box housing is made of electrically non-conductive plastic materiaf. Therefore, aff gfands and pfugs for the cable entries on 1LA5, 1LA9,1LP5, 1LP9,1PP5 and 1PP9 motors must likewise be made of efectricaffy nonconductive material.
CAUTION
Auswuchten elementen
von
Laufer
und
damit
verbundenen
Antriebs-
Bafancing
of rotors
and connected
transmission
elements
Die Laufer slnd mlt elner In das Wellenende elngesetztenvollen oder halben PaBfeder dynamisch ausgewuchtet und zwar ist: bei Maschlnen ab Fertigung 1991 die Art der Auswuchtung am AS-We llenende (Well enstirnseite) oder auf dem Lei stung sschlld markiert. (Markierung (, bzw .H) auf dem Lei stungsschild bei Motoren b[s einschlief31ich BaugroBe 80 mm). (F = Auswuchtung mit voller Paf3feder) (H = Auswuchtung mit halber Paf3feder) bel Maschlnen mit Fertigung bis Ende1990 der LaufermltvolIer Pa flfeder ausgewuchtet (keine Marklerung). Auf rlchtlge Auswuchtart des Abtrlebelementes entsprechend der Auswuchtart des Laufers (F-oder H-Auswuchtung) achten! Bei Auswuchtung mit halber Paf3feder
The rotors are dynamically balanced with either a full or half featherkey fitted in the shaft end, namely For machines manufactured from 1991 onwards, the type of balancing is indicated at the drive end of the shaft (on shaft end face) or on the rating plate. (Markings f~ or @j on the rating plate of motors up to frame size 80 mm.) (F = balanced (H = balanced with full featherkey) with half featherkey)
For machines manufactured up to the end of 1990, the rotors are all balanced with full featherkeys (No markings). Make sure the transmwsion elements are balanced according to the type of balancing of the rotor (F or H balancing)! Balanced with half featherkey Unbalance may occur in the case of transmission elements (e.g. couplings, belt pulleys, .) with a hub-to-shaft end length ratio <0.8 and at speeds >1500 rev/rein. In such instances, it may be necessary y to rebalance the machine, e.g. to machine off that part of the featherkey protruding from the transmission element and beyond the shaft contour. Use only suitable pusher remove the transmission gears, .). Electrical connection and puller tools (Fig. 7) to fit and elements (couplings, belt pulleys,
Bei Abtnebselementen (z. B. Kupplungen, Riemenscheiben, ...) mlt elnem Lange nverhaltnis von Nabenlange zur Lange des Wellenendes 0.8 und Drehzahl>1500/min konnen Laufruhestorungen au ftreten In diesen Fallen ist gegebenenfalls eine Nachwuchtung vorzunehmen, z. B. Istderausdem Antrlebselement und uber der Wellenkontur herausragende Teil der Paf3feder abzuarbelten Das Auf- und Abzlehen von Antriebselementen (Kupplungen. Rlemenschelben, Zahnrad, .) wt grundsatzlich mit einer geelgneten Vorrlchtung auszufuhren (Fig. 7j. Elektrischer Anschluf3
Netzspannung und Netzfrequenz mussen mlt den Daten auf dem Leistungsschild ubereinstimmen. + 5/0 Spannungsoder Frequenzabweichung ~~, I .:! . : ~~ ,.: f . ?:., sind ohne Leistungsherabsetzung zulassig. Anschlu13 und Anordnung der Schaltbugel nach dem Im Klemmenkasten beflndllchen Schaltblld vornehmen. Schutzleiter an diese Klemme 4 anschlle13en. Bei Anschluf3klemmen mit Klemmbugeln (z. B. nach DIN 46282) sind die Leiter so zu verteifen, dafi auf beiden Stegseiten etwa gleiche Kfemmhohen entstehen. Diese Anschfuf3arf erfordert daher, daf3 ein einzelner Leiter U-formig gebogen werden muf3. Dies gift such fur den Schutzfeiteranschf uf3, grtingefb (siehe Fig. 3). Samtliche Leiter unter auf3eren Erdungswinkefn sind grundsatzfich U-formig zu biegen (siehe Fig. 4).
Check to see that system voltage and frequency agree with the ratinq-~late data. Voltage or frequency deviations of + 5 o/o h!i:~ u:-:, from the rated -re\]lJ.. r. } (I+JL .!! LI-1} ! ! values are permitted without the necessity of derating the output. Connection and arrangement of the terminal links must agree with the diagram provided in the terminal box. Connect the earthing conductor to the terminal with the + marking. Wherever terminal clips are used (for example, to DIN 46282), arrange the conductors so the clips are virtuafly fevef, j.e. not tilted when tightened. This method of connection means that the ends of single conductors must be bent in the shape of a U. This afso appfies to the yelfow-green PE conductor (see Fig. 3). Alf conductors connected under earthing angfes must always be U-shaped (see Fig. 4).
Anziehdrehmomente fur Schrauben schluf3klemmen (auf3er Klemmenleislen)
und
Muttern
der
An-
Tightening nal strips)
torques
for terminal
bolts and nuts (except
fortermi
mM @ 1
Instandhaltung
Maintenance
Alle Arbeiten nungslosen durchfiihren. nur im elektrisch Zustand der spanAnlage
A
! .
WARNUNG
ARNNG
Before starting any work on machine be sure to isolate it from power s&ply.
the the
Schmierung Dle Motoren haben Rillenkugellager mit zwei Deckscheiben (2ZC3 Ausfuhrung) und Dauerschmierung. Derfreie Raum zwischen den Deckscheiben ist zu 31)0/o bis 400/o mit Schmierfett gefullt. Schmierfettsorten siehe Fig. 2. Das Auf- und Abziehen von Walzlagern ist mit einer geeigneten Vorrichtung auszufuhren (Fig. 7).
Lubrication The motors feature deep-groove ball bearings which are provided with two cover plates (2ZC3) and permanent lubrication. Between 30 o/o and 40 o/o of the space between the cover plates is filled with grease. See Fig. 2 for the recommended types of grease. Use onlv suitable Dusher and Duller tools (Ficr. 7) to flt and remove ~he rolling -contact bearings. Motor in insulation class to VDE 0530 B or F or H H
B nach DIN C bestanden
Motor in lsollerstoff klasse nach VDE 0530 B oder F oder H H
Motorkbhlmittel temperature c
Fettsorte fur Lagerschmierung
Motor coolant temperature in C
Recommended bearing grease
zum Beispiel 20 .. +60 Schmierfett DIN 51825K3N Schmierfett DIN 51502KH3R siehe Leistungsschild und/oder Schmierschildangaben UNIREXN3 (Fa. Esso)
I examr)le
20to +60 Lubricant to DIN 51825K3N Lubricant to DIN 51502K}< 3 R I Esso UNIREX N3
For
tiefer hoher
als
20
below above .
20 + 60
als + 60 .
see data on rating arid/or lubricant ~late

Spec$flcahon successfully
plate
Fig. 2 Schmierfett
Laut Herstellerana abe Lauf Druluna 51806 be der Prufiem?eratur + 160;
Fig. 2 Lubricant
Manufacturers 51606 passed +160IC
Runmng tesl B to DIN at a test Temperature ot
Die Fettfullung der Lager reicht unter normalen Betriebsbedin gungen mehrere Jahre. Wenn es die Betriebsverhaltn isse ermoglichen, sollten bei Motoren mit Drehzahlen bis 3600/min nach 20000 Betriebsstunden oder spatestens nach 3 Jahren die Lagerstellen gerelnigt und die Lager erneuert werden. Eine Neufettung ist nicht moglich. Das Fettder neuen Lager muf3den in Fig 2 genannten Qualitaten nach DIN 51825 und DIN 51502 genugen und sonstige in Fig, 2 angegebene Eigenschaften besitzen. Sonderfette fur besondere Betnebsbedingungen sind auf oder neben dem Leistungsschild angegeben bzw anzugeben, Sofern benachbarte Fettvorratsraume eine Fettfullung erhalten (z B. im Lagerschild zwecks Abdichtung der Wellenbohrung im allgemeinen 2/3 gefullt), istdafur diegleiche Fettsortewieim Lager vorzusehen. Das Mischen verschiedener Fetfsorten ist zu vermeiden. Es wird empfohlen, beim Austauschen der Lager eventuell vorhandene und dem Verschlei B unterworfene Dichtelemente (z. B. Radial-Wellendichtring) ebenfalls zu erneuern. Sind Radial -Wellendichtringe ohne Feder eingebaut, so muf3 such das Ersatzteil ohne Feder eingesetzt werden. Beschadigte Teile sind durch neue zu ersetzen.
Under normal operating conditions grease packings for bearings should last several years. When condition sallow, the journals in motors rated for speeds up to 3600 rev/rein should be cleaned and the bearings replaced after 20000 service hours or 3 years at the latest. The bearings cannot be regressed. Grease used in the replacement bearings must conform to the qualities specified in DIN 51825 and DIN 51502 as per Fig. 2and have all other properties stipulated in Fig. 2. Special greases used for particular operating conditions must be indicated on or next to the rating plate. If adjacent grease chambers need a fresh packing of grease, e. g. in the end plate to seal the shaft bore (usuafly 2/3 full), be sure the grease is the same as that used In the bearing. Avoid mixing different types of grease. When replacing bearings, it is recommendable to also replace any seallng elements subject to wear, e. g. radial shaft sealing rings. If springless radial shaft sealing rings are used, the replacement sealing rings must also be of the springless type. All damaged parts found must be replaced,
-V:i.l:?, W.Ati IMk-i ,,,-; ., . , ,n, T., :, u: ...,-.-,, Y.(:i - t$?

... :,,, ,,p:~. .~ ,d:,. p
-, .?!.
y, .,. + ,$ ,,,.:p $q, .
-*L
..*;-7
;,
&,
:j;,.,;?.t!
fer
,p~
.,,
. ., .,.. ..!.,, -,f~
l.;
.&.
,,
,-
,::.
1,
gas that IS l)kei~ to occur Eaclk motor MUSI ~e provide[l if:,t~ ~ clrc[l;!-breaker which S set to [he rated c(i,rent 0[ thdr irlo!(jr and which. under Iocked-lolor conditions !rips withlr! tile ilrne s!aied on the motor- rating plate (corn pa?e vwth !h,~ trlpolrlg F(.,lt: wIt F the c,rcu[t-!]reaker} ch,ar.dcterlshc supphed changing motors require a separate circuit-breaker fcr {m, II spesd If, however, oucrload prolectmn IL 10 be provided only In tlc form of direct temperature monitoring based on tenlperalur(: sensors (see DIN El\J 50019 /V DE O170/0171 Part6, Appen[jxA Al b) thIc motor des:gn must be specially t!:s;eci ant! cert!f,e[; fOF this See DIN 57165/VDE 0165. Rcpalrs must be carried OUI ,n Slernens spc~c[c~d by an offic.ally l ;ipproved Speclalisi .vo~ksho(js
Continued
(I: IrI
on page 8
FRANCAIS afin dassurer la protection des personnes et d&riter tout endommagement de la machine, il est imp~ratif-de respecter Ies indications contenues clans Ies prt%entes instructions de service et clans Iensemble de la documentation du produit. A Z.J-.J AITENTION Les instructions de service <,R&gles de sbcuritb - applicable aux machines et appareils @lectriques,, (jaune) valent 6galement en complement de toutes instructions de service ou autres 614ments de documentation transm is avec Ie produit (par ex. pour Ies freins, etc.). En ce qui concerne Ies moteurs de realisation sent valables Ies indications des catalogues spr2ciale, seules et des offres.
ESPANOL
!
ATENCl~N
instrucciones
Para evitar peligros y datios, es preciso cibservar siempre Ios dates y Ias indicaciones que figuran en todas Ias de servicio y en Ias dem~s suministradas.
Estes instrucciones de servicio Ilevan adjuntas otras, que contienen dates suplementerios sobre la seguridad (amarillo) de Ias m~quinas y aparatos ek$ctricos. Las ultimas mencionadas son por tanto un complement de Ias dem~s instrucciones generales y de servicio suministradas (p. ej., para frenos, etc.). Para la ejecuci6n de variantes aparatos rige adicionalmente en Ias ofertas. especiales 10 indicado de Ias m~quinas en Ios catdlogos y y
Description
Domaine dapplication Les moteurs peuvent ~tre install~s en atmosphere poussi~reuse et humide. Lisolation est tropicalis~e. Normal ement, aucune mesure de protection particuli~re contre Ies intemP& ries nest m?cessaire si Ion entrepose correctement Ies moteursou si on Ies monte~ lext~rieurselon Ies r~glesde Iart. Constitution et mode de fonctionnement
Descripci6n
Campo de aplicaci6n Los motores pueden instalarse en ambientes humedos o polvorientos. El aislamiento es resistente al clima tropical. Normalmente no es preciso adoptar medidas de protecci6n especiaIes contra Ios efectos climato16gicos, si Ios motores se almacenan o se depositan a la intemperie convenientemente. Funcionamiento y constituci6n
Les moteurs ILA5 et 1LA9 (sauf hauteur daxe 56), ILC5 et WI. sent autorefroidis (ventilateur). Les moteurs 1PP5 et 1PP9 sent autorefroldis par ventilateur mont~ sur Iarbre ou ventiles par un motoventllateur rapport~. Les moteurs 1LA5 et 1LA9 de hauteur daxe 56 et Ies moteurs 1LP5, ILP9 et lMt 5 sent a refroldlssement naturel (pas de ventilateur].
Los motores 1LA5 y 1LA9 (salvo el tamano 56), 1LC5 y lMA5tienen autorrefrigeraci6n (con ventiladores). Los motores 1PP5 y 1PP9 tienen refrigeraci6n propia bien sea por disponer de ventiladores especiales montados en sus rotores, p. ej., cuando se emplean para impulsar ventiladores, o por tener ventiladores independientes. Los motores 1LA5 y 1LA9 del tamafio constructive 56 y Ios motores 1LP5, ILP9 y 1MF5 tienen autorrefri geracidn (sin ventiladores). Los motores con patas Ias tienen fundidas con la carcasa. adicionalmente Ias En {OS motores 1LC5 hay que observar instrucciones de servicio del freno. 0peraci6n
Les pattes
de moteurs
a pattes
wennent
de coul~e en plus Ies
Pour Ies moteurs 1LC5, il convient instructions de service du freln. Fonctionnement
dobserver
A
!
AITENTION
avant toute intervention sur la machine, vtwifier quelle est blen hors tension.
! A
ATENCION
En Ios motores solo se trabajar~ cuando se tenga la seguridad de que no estdn bajo tensi6n.
Installation Lorsque Ies moteurs ont &@ entreposes plus de 4 ans clans de bonnes conditions (local see, exempt de poussi~re et devibrahons) ou encore plus de 2 ans clans des conditions defavorables, remplacer Ies roulements avant mise en service. Important: observer ce qui suit pour Ies d~slgnations de carcasse 90 S et 90 L Les pattes de fixation arri~res des moteurs de forme IM B 3 dent la boite a bornes est dispos~e sur Ie dessus sent pourvues de trous doubles, ceci afin de respecter Ies dimensions normali sees des pattes Sur Ies moteurs de forme IM B 3 $1boite a bornes sur Ie cOte (versions sp~ciales), Ies 4 pattes de fixation comportment des trous doubles. Cela permet de respecter Ientraxe normalls~ des trous, ~galement Iorsque la boite a bornes est disposee sur Ie cOte gauche (voir Flg.6). Sur Ies moteurs garantlr Ie palier ~ bout darbre vers Ie haut ou vers Ie has. sup6rieur contre la penetration deau.
Emplazamiento Si desde la fecha de suministro hasta la puesta en servicio de Ios motores han transcurrido mas de 4 aftos bajo condiciones favorable (conservaci6n en locales secos y exentos de POIVO y de trepidaciones) o m~s de 2 afios bajo condiciones desfavorables, deber~n recambiarse Ios rodamientos. Para IOS tamar?os 90 S y 90 L rige 10 siguiente:
Los motores de la forma constructive IM B 3 con caja de bornes dispuesta en la parte superior, tienen taladros dobles en Ias patas de atras, con el fin de mantener Ias dimensioned normalizadas de Ias patas. En Ios motores de la forma constructive IM B 3, con caja de bornes dispuesta Iateralmente (ejecuciones especiales), Ias cuatro patas tienen taladros do bles. Asi se observan Ias distancias normal izadas entre taladros, incluso cuando la caja de bornes se encuentra en el Iado izquierdo (vease la fig. 6). En Ias maquinas de eje vertical hay que garantizar pueda entrar agua en el rodamiento superior. que no
>ltMtN>
Sicherheitsinformationen
fur elektrische Betriebsmittel zum Einsatz
in Starkstromanlagen
Safety information for electrical equipment for use in heavy current installations lnfOrmatiOnS relatiVeS ~ la Sf$CUrit6 de materiels dectriques destinW a Wre utils6s clans des installations
a courant fort
Informaciones de seguridad para IOS equipos ei~ctricos que se utilicen en instalaciones de energia !nfOrmaZiOni per la SiCUreZZa nell impiego di dispositivi elettrici in impianti ad alta tensione Sakerhetsinformation for elektrisk utrustning som anvands i starkstromsanllaggningar
Betriebsanleitung
DEUTSCH
/ Instructions
ENGLISH
EWN-Bestell-Nr. /Order No.: 610.42356/21
Dieses Informationsblatt mit den Warnhinweisen gilt als Zusatz zur produktspezifischen Betriebsanleitung und mu13 aus Sicherheitsgrunden besonders beachtet werden.
This information sheet with its warning is in addition to the operating instructions for the individual DrOdUCtS and for safetv reasons its contents must be adhered to. -
A
I t
GEFAHR
Diese elektrischen Maschinen bzw. Ger.?ite sind Betriebsmittel zum Einsatz in industriellen Starkstromanlagen. Wahrend des Betriebes haben diese Betriebsmitq tel gefahrliche, spannungsfiihrende blanke Teile, ggf. such bewegte bzw. rotierende Teile. Sie konnten deshalb, z. B. bei unzuIassigem Entfernen der erforderlichen Abdackungen, bei unsachgemaBem Einsatz, falscher Bedienung oder unzureichender Wartung, schwerste gesundheitliche oder materielle Schaden verursachen. Die fiir die Sicherheit der Anlage Verantwortlichen miissen deshalb gewahrleisten, dat3 - nur qualifizierte Personen mit Arbeiten an den Maschinen bzw. Geraten beau ftragt werden, - diese Personen u. a. die mitgelieferten Betriebsanleitungen und iibrigen Lfnterlagen der Produktdokumentation bei allen entsprechenden Arbeiten stets vetiiigbar haben und verpflichtet werden, diese Lfnterlagen consequent zu beachten, - Arbeiten an den Maschinen bzw. Geraten oder in deren Nahe fiir nichtqualifizierte Personen untersagt werden.
A
I
e f
DANGER
The electric machines and equipment are for use in industrial heavy current installations. During operating this equipment has bare parts which are live and dangerous and may also have moving or rotating parts. For this reason, unauthorized removal of the necessary covers, improper use, incorrect operation or insufficient maintenance could lead to severe personal injury or property damage.
Those responsible for the safety of the installation must therefore ensure that - only qualified personnel are entrusted to work on the machines or equipment, - these persons always have at their disposal the operating instructions and other product documentation supplied when they do such work and that they undertake to follow consistently any such ins tructions, - non-qualified personnel are not permitted to work on or near the machines or equipment.
CWa/ifiziertes Personal sind Personen, die, auf Grund ihrer Ausbildung, Erfahrung und Unterweisung sowie ihrer Kenntmsse uber elnschlaglge Normen, Beshmmungen, Unfallverhu tungsvorschriften und Betriebsverhaltmsse, von dem fur dle SI cherheit der Anlage Verantwortlichen berechhgt worden slnd, die ]ewells erforderllchen Tatigkeiten auszufuhren und dabel mogllche Gefahren erkennen und vermelden konnen (Deflnl tlonen fur Fachkrafte siehe such DIN VDE 0105 oder IEC 364) Unter anderem slnd such Kenntmsse uber Erste-Hilfe-Ma Bnahmen und dle ortlichen Rettungsei nrlchtungen erforderllch. Fur Arbeiten an Starkstromanlagen Ist das Verbot des Einsatzes nlchtquallflzlerter Personen z B In DIN VDE 0105 oder IEC 364 geregelt Es wird vorausgesetzt, dalJ die grundsatzlichen Planungsarbeiten der An/age sowie alle Arbeiten zu Transpoti, Montage, Installation, Inbetriebsetzung, Wartung und Reparaturen von qualifiziertem Personal ausgefiihrt bzw. durch verantwortliche Fachkrafte kontrollieti werden. Hierbei sind insbesondere zu beachten: - die technischen Daten und Angaben iiber die zu/assige Verwendung (Montage-, AnschluB-, UmgebungsWARNUNG Slemens AG 1990
Qualified personnel are persons who, on account of their training, experience and Instruction and their knowledge of relevant standards, specifications, accident prevention regula hons and operating conditions, have been authorized by those responsible for the safety of the plant to carry out the necessary work and who can recogrwze and avoid possible dangers (see also IEC 364 for definlhons of specialist personnel)
A knowledge of first ald IS also required as is information about local rescue facilities. The Sllpulation that only qualifled personnel mayworkon heavy current Installations IS Included for exam~le In IEC 364
! /!!3
! A
It is assumed that basic planning work for the installation and all work concerning transpoti, assembly, commissioning, maintenance and repair is done by qualified personnel or checked by responsible skilled personnel. WARNING
Particular note must be taken of the foilwing: - The technical data and information on permissible use (assembly conditions, connection conditions,
und Betriebsbedingungen), die u.a. im Katalog, den der Betriebsanleitung, den Au ftragsunterlagen, Schildangaben und der iibrigen Erzeugnisdokumentation enthalten sind, die allgemeinen Errichtungsund Sicherheitsvorschriften, die ortlichen, anlagespezifischen Bestimmungen und Erfordernisse, der fachgerechte Einsatz von Werkzeugen, Hebe- und Transporteinrichtungen, die Benutzung personlicher Schutzausstattungen, Montagebedingungen fiir Gerate, die ggf. entsprechend IPOO (ohne Abdeckungen) ausgeliefert werden: Im Betrieb mutl der erforcferliche Beri.ihrungsschutz vorhanden bzw. eine gefahrliche Annaherung verhindert sein.
ambient and ned in the instructions, tation, - The general
operating conditions), which are contaicatalog, order documents, operating rating plate and other product documenerection and safety regulations,
- The local, plant-specific specifications and requirements, - The proper use of tools, Iifiing gear and transpott devices, - The use of personal protective gear. - Installation instructions for equipment which may be supplied to IPOO (without covers). In operation, this equipment must have the necessary shock protection fitted or access must be prevented which could result in danger. These instructions cannot claim to cover all details of possible equipment variations, nor in particular can they provide for every possible example of installation, operation or maintenance. This means that the instructions for machines or equipment for industrial applications normally include only the directions to be folio wed by qualified personai (see above) where the equipment is used for its defined purpose.
Die Betriebsanleitungen konnen aus Griinden der Ubersichtlichkeit nicht alle Detailinformationen zu moglichen Bauvarianten enthalten und konnen insbesondere nicht jeden denkbaren Fall der Au fstellung, des Betriebes oderder Wartung beriicksichtigen. Demgemat3 sind in den Betriebsanleitungen im wesentiichen nur solche Hinweise enthalten, die bei bestimmungsgemai3er Verwendung der Maschinen oder Gerate in industriellen Einsatzbereichen fiir qualifiziertes Personal (siehe obenj erforderiich sind. Falls im Sonderfali bei beabsichtigtem Einsatz der Maschinen oder Gerate in nicht industriellen Bereichen eventuell erhohte A nforderungen gestellt werden {z. B. Beriihrungsschutz gegen Kindetiinger o. a.), miissen diese Bedingungen bei der Montage durch zusatzliche Schutzmai3nahmen anlagenseitig gewahrieistet werden.
if in speciai cases it is intended to use the machines or equipment in non-industrial areas and therefore requirements may be more stringent, e.g. protection against contact by chiidren fingers, ect., compliance with such requirements must be assured during installation by providing additional protective measures on site.
Bei diesbeziiglichen Unklarheiten, insbesondere bei fehlenden produktspezifischen Detail-lnformationen, mussen die erforderiichen Klarungen iiber die zustandige SIEMENS-Vertriebsstelle herbeigefiihrt werden. Bifte hierzu grundsatzlich Maschinenbzw. GerateTypbezeichnung und Fertigungsnummer angeben. ES WIRD EMP[ OHLEN, FUR PLANUNGS-, MONTAGElNBE TRIEBSET7UNGSUND SERVICE-AUFGABEN DIE UNTERSTUT.?UNG UND DIENSTLEISTUNGEN DER ZUSTANDIGEN SIEMENS-SERVICEZENTREN IN ANSPRUCH ZU NEHMEN. HINWEIS: Furallgemelne Arbelten, z B zum Prufen elngehen [Icr l-l[,ferunger~ f, ransportschaden), T zum Iangfrlstigen Elnla geln Und Konservleren von Maschlnen, zur Fundamentpru fung zurr Au fzlehen von Kupplungen, Aufstelfen und Ausrich [cn vcr17 Maschfnen. Install atlonsma Bnahmen U.V a slnd wel tcre Dclall-lnformatlo nen In den SIEMENS-Montagesc hriften odcr Arbclfsrlchllmen enthalten, dle erforderlrc henfalls uber dle Vertnebsstcllen bezogen werden konnen
if there are any uncertainties in this respect, particularly in the event of missing product-reiated information, clarification must be obtained via the appropriate SIEMENS saies office. Piease always indicate the machine or equipment type and seriai number.
WE WOULD RECOMMEND AND SERVICES OF THE CENTRES FOR PLANNING, AND SERVICING TASKS
ASKING FOR THE ASSISTANCE COMPETENT SIEMENS SERVICE INSTALLATION, COMMISSIONING
NOTE: For general work such as checking of incommlng deliveries (damage In transit), storing and preserving for prolonged periods of time, foundation testing, fitting of couplings, installation and allgnment of machines, etc , further detailed information is gwen In the SIEMENS Installation instructions which can be obtained from the sales offices.
,i:,
Urn Storungen vorzubeugen, ist es erforderlich, die vorgeschriebenen Wartungs-, Inspectionsund Revisionsmai3nahmen regelmaBig von routinietiem Service-Peronal durchftihren zu Iassen (siehe oben). Veranderungen gegeniiber dem Normaibetrieb (hohere Leistungsaufnahme, Temperature oder Schwingungen, ungewohnliche Gerausche oder Geriiche, Ansprechen der Liberwachungseinrichtungen USWJ Iassen erkennen, dafl die Funktion beeintrachtigt ist. Zur Vermeidung von Storungen, die ihrerseits mittelbar oder unmittelbar schwere Personen- oder Sachschaden bewirken konnten, mu13 das zustandige Wartungspersonal dann umgehend verstandigt werdem WARNUNG , IM ZWEIFELSFALL DIE ENTSPRECHENDEN TRIEBSMITTEL SOFORT ABSCHALTEN! BE.
! A
The specified maintenance, inspection and overhaui measures must be carried out reguiariy by trained service personnei in order to avoid any interruptions or breakdowns (see above). Deviations from the normai performance (higher power input, higher temperatures or vibrations, unusuai noises or odours, reactions by monitoring equipment, ect.) indicate that proper function of the unit is impaired. In order to avoid fauits, which might directiy or indirectly cause serious damage to property or injury to persons, the responsible maintenance personnei must be notified immediately
WARNING
- !\
! A
iF iN DOUBT, S WiTCH OFF THE EQUiPMENTIMMEDiATEL Y.
HINWEIS: Es wlrd darauf hlngewlesen, daf3 der Inhal! der Be[rlebsanleltungen und Produktdokumentatio nen nlcht Teil el r~cr fruheren oder bestehenden Verelnbaru ng, Zusageoderel rles Rechtsverh: dfnlsses ISI oder dieses abandern SOII Samtll che Verpfllchtu ngenvon Slemens ergeben slchausdem jewelhger Kautvertrag, der such dle vollstandlge und allein gulhge Gew,?hrlelstu ngsregelung enfhalf Dlese vertragllchen Getv?,hrlclslullg sl]estlm[nungen werden durch dle Ausfuhrungen deser Anlelfungen und Dokumentatlonen weder erwelfert [noch beschrankt
NOTE: The contents of the operating instructions and product documentation shall not become part of or modify any prior or exlshng agreement, commitment or relationship The Sales Contract contains the entire obhgatlons of Siemens. The warranty contained in the contract between the parties is the sole warranty of Slemens Any statements contained herein do not create new warranties or modify the existing warranty
ITALIANO
II
SVENSKA
presente foglio allarme vale come istuzioni specifiche tura e, per motivi di mente rispettato.
informative con gli awisi di supplement aggiuntivo alle per Iuso di ogni apparecchiasicurezza, deve venire attenta-
Detta informationsblad med varningsanvisningar galler som tillagg till den produktspecifika driftsinstruktionen och maste ges speciell uppmark-
samhet
av sakerhetsskal.
PERICOLO I macchinari e fe apparecchiature

elettriche sono strumenti impiegati in impianti industriali sottoposti ad alta tensione. Durante il tali dispositivi funzionamento possiedono parti pericolose, sia perche poste sotto tensione e non isolate, sia perche in moto, Iineare o rotatorio. Esse quindi sono in grado di causare gravissimi danni a persone o cose, se, ad esempio, /e protezioni necessaries vengono rimosse, in caso di utilizzo non adeguato, di servizio non corretto o di non sufficient manutenzione. Per questo motivo i iesponsabili per la sicurezza dellimpianto devono garantire the: - ai macchinari od alle apparechiature efettriche vengano assegnate solo persone qualificate - tali persone possano non solo sempre disporre presso tutte Ie relative postazioni di Iavoro delle istruzioni per Iuso originali e di ulteriore documentazione SUI proddlto, ma anche che ne osservino consequentemente i contenuti - Ie lavorazioni ai macchinari e/o apparecchi o nelle vicinanze di essi vengano interdetti a personale non qualificato.
A
I
FARA
De elektriska maskinerna och apparaterna ar utrustning for anvandning i industriella starkstromsanlaggnin gar. Under driften har dessa utrustningenheter farliga, spanningsforande blanka detaijer, i vissa fall Sven roriiga eller roterade delar. De kan ddrfor fororsaka ailvarliga personeller materialskador, t.ex. om erforderIiga beroringsskydd avlZigsnas i strid mot gallande bestamme/ser, vid osakkunnig anvandning, felaktig manovrering elfer otilf rackligt underhdll.
De som ansvarar for anlaggningen mdste darfor s~kemt~lla att: - enbart kvalificerad personal tilldts arbeta med maskinerna och utrustningsenheterna. - dessa personer standigt har tillg~ng till medfofjande driftinstruktioner, och ovrig produktdokumentation vid alit arbete PA utrustningen och Alaggs att i varje detalj fofja anvisningarna i denna documentation. - okvalificeradpersonal ej tilkits arbeta med maskinerna och apparaterna, eller i deras narhet.
Perpersona/e qualificato SI intendono quelle persone the, per ja Ioro tormazlone, esperienza e ;struzlone, nonch~ Ie conoscenze delle relahve norme, prescnzlonl, provvedlmenti per la prevenzlone degll lncldentl e sulle condizloni di servlzio, sono stall autonzzah dal responsabile dells slcurezza dell im planto ad esegulre quals[asl necessarla attivit~ ed in questa essere In grado di riconoscere ed evltare ognl possvblle perl CIIIC (Deflnlzloneperll persona letecnico, vedianche VDE 0105 0 ]Ec 364) Fra Ialtro SI nch[edono anche nozlonl di pronto soccorso e solle mlsure d! salvatagglo In loco Per Iavorazlonl in !mplanti ad alta tenslone, II dlvieto di Implego d! persormle non qualiflcato eregolamentato, ad esemplo, nelle norme DIN VDE 0105 0 IEC 364 richiesto the, i fondamentali Iavori di disposizione dellimpianto, come pure trasporto, montaggio, instalIazione, messa in servizio, manutenzione e riparazioni vengano eseguiti da personale qualificato e controllati dal personale tecnico responsabile. A questo riguardo occorre in particular modo osservare: - ciati tecnici e specifiche sullutilizzo consentito \condizioni di montaggio, collegamento, ambientali e di servizioj, che sono fra Ialtro contenute nel catafogo, nei dati di progetto, nel manuale di servizio, nei dati di targa ed in ulteriori documentazioni sul prodotto - generali prescrizioni di costruzione e sicurezza - prowedimenti e richieste Iocali, specifiche dellimpianto - idonee modalita di impiego di utensili, sollevatori e trasportatori - Iimpiego delle personali dotazioni protective - modalita di montaggio di apparecchiature, che vengono consegnate in conformity con IPOO (senza coperture): durante ii servizio deve essere disponibiie la necessaria protezione da contatto e deve essere interdetto un accostamento pericoJoso,
Kvalificerad personal ar personer som pa grundval av utbildnlng, erfarenhet ellerlnstru ktlonersamtkunskap rOrande tillampliga normer, bestammelser, olycksfallsforeskrif ter och driftsforhallanden har bemyndlgats av sakerhetsansvarlg chef att utfora erforderllga arbetsuppgifter och darvid kan uppfatta och undvika mo]liga risker (deflnltlon av fackpersonal se aven DIN VDE 0105 elleer IEC 364).
Bland annat erfordras aven kannedom rorande fcrsta hjalpen och om Iokala raddningsanordn lngar. For arbetet pa starkstromsanlagg ningar regleras forbudet rorande anvandning av okvalificerad personal t.ex I DIN VDE 0105 eller IEC 364
J> ~~~~*,~~~ Viene .
! A
Det foruts~tts att principiellt planeringsrbete rorande systemet saint alla arbeten med transport, installation, idrifttagning, underhdll och reparation utfors av kva~ificerad personal eller kontrolleras av ansvarig fackpersonal.
VARNING
D5rvid
maste man framfor
ant ge akt PA:
- tekniska data och uppgifter rorande till?iten anvandning (monterings-, anslutnings-, miljo- och drifts villkor), som bl.a. firms i katalogen, orderhandlingarna, driftsinstruktionen, p& skyltar och ovrig produktdokumentation; - de allmanna installationsoch sakerhetsforeskrifterna; - Iokala, anla ggningsspecifika bestammelser och krav; - fackmannamassig anvandning av verktyg, Iyft- och transportdon; - anvandning av personlig skyddsutrustning; - monteringvillkor for apparater som i vissa fall levereras enl. IPOO (i oppet tillst~nd): vid dritten m~ste det finnas erforderliga beroringsskydd eller anordningar som forhindrarpersoner fr~n att komma i narheten av utrustningen.
- conditions demontage pourdes appareilsquiseront eventuellement mis a /expedition en degre de protection IPOO (saris recouvrements): en service, la protection requise contre /es contacts directs doit ~tre assuree et une approche dangereuse doit &tre evitee. Pour des raisons de clarte, la documentation ne contient pas toutes /es information de detail relatives aux variantes de configuration possibles ; elle ne peut pas non plus aborder toutes Ies situations susceptible de se presenter Iors de Iinstallation, de Iexploitation et de la maintenance. Dune fa~on generale, la documentation ne contient done que des information necessaires au personnel qualifie (voir ci-dessus), Iorsque /es machines et appareils sent utilises clans des applications industrielles, con formement a Iusage auaue/ i\ ont destines.
- Condiciones de montaje para ios aparatos que pudieran haberse suministrado con el grado de proteccibn IPOO (sin envolventes): Durante el servicio tiene que existir la protection necesaria contra contactos casuaies o impedirse la aproximacion peligrosa. Para mayor claridad, /as instrucciones de servicio no incluyen todas /as in formaciones detalledas de Ias variantes constructivas posibles y, especialmente, no pueden considerar todos Ios cases imaginable de colocacion, de servicio o de mantenimiento. Por este motivo, Ias instrucciones de servicio incluyen en esencia solo aquellas indicaciones que el personal calificado (vease m~s arriba) necesita si /as m~quinas o aparatos se utilizan Dara el fin industrial a true est~n destinados.
Si, clans un cas special, il serait envisage dutiliser Ies machines ou appareils clans des application non industrielles ou ils feraient eventuellement /objet dexigences plus severes (par exemple, protection contre Ies contacts des doigts denfant a vec Ies pieces sous tension ou Ies pieces en mouvement interieures a Ienveloppe ou autres), ces conditions doivent etre garanties sur Iinstallation, lore du montage, par des dispositions de securite additionnelIes.
Si, en cases especiales se pretende utilizar /as mdquinas o aparatos fuera del ~mbito industrial y hubiera que cumplir condiciones m~s severas (per ejemplo, protection contra contactos con Ios dedos de Ios nifios o similares) estas condiciones tendrAn que quedar garantizadas por parte del cliente, adicionando medidas de protection durante el montaje.
Au cas ou ces points ne seraient pas suffisamment clairs, notamment en cas dabsence d~informations detainees specifiques au produit, il est indispensable de contacter Iagence SIEMENS la plus proche pour obtenir /es renseignements correspondents. Dune maniere generale, il est necessaire de preciser a cet effet la designation du type de la machine ou de 19appareil et Ie numero de fabrication. EN CE(JUICONCERNE LESTRAVAUX DINGENIERIE, DEMONTAGE DE MISE EN SERVICE ET DE MAINTENANCE, NOUS RECOMMANDONS DE RECOURIR A LASSISTANCE ET AUX PRESTATIONS DE SERVICE DES CENTRES SAV SIEMENS CC) MPETENTS NOTA: En ce qul concerne Ies travaux generaux, par exemple Ie cor]trOle des Ilvralsons (constalahon des dommages occa slonnes en tours de transport), Ie stockage et la conservation ~ Ionq tcrme de machines Ie contrble ctes fondahons, Ie montage dacf:ouplements, la mlse en place et Iallgnement de machi IICS, Ics travaux dlnstallahon, elc Ieslnstructlons de montage SIFMENS, qui sent dlsporwbles clans Ies agences SIEMENS, fo~lrmrorls de ulos amples renselgnements
Si hubiese dudas al respecto, especialmente si faltasen detalles in formativos especificos del producto, habria que establecer Ias aclaraciones necesarias a traves de la oficina de SIEMENS competence. Se ruega fundamentalmente que, se indiquen la denomination del tipo de /as m~quinas o aparatos, asi como su numero de fabrication.
AL EFECTUAR LABORES DE PLANIFICACION, MONTAJE, PUESTA EN MARCHA Y SERVICIO SE RECOMIENDA HACER USO DE LA ASISTENCIA Y COLABORACION DE LOS CENTROS DE SERVICIO COMPETENTES DE SIEMENS.
INDICATION: Los impresos SIEMENS de monta]e, que en caso necesario pueden adqulrirse en Ias delegaciones correspondientes, contienen otras informaciones detalladas para Ios trabajos generales, por ejemplo, comprobaci6n de Ios sumin]stros recibidos (danos detransporte), almacenamiento prolon gado yconservacir3n de m~quinas, comprobacidn de cimentaclones, calado de acoplamientos, emplazamiento y alineac16n de m~qulnas, operaciones de instalaci6n y otras tareas diversas.
Afin de prevenir des incidents, il est necessaire de confier a du personnel dentretien experiment Ie soin dexecuter regulierement /es travaux de maintenance, dYinspection et de revision prescrits (voir plus haut). Les anomalies par rapport au fonctionnement normal (puissances absorbees, temperatures ou vibrations plus elevees, bruits ou odeurs inhabituels, entree en action des equipments de surveillance, etc.) Iaissent supposer que Ie fonctionnement est compromis. Afin deviter des incidents susceptibies doccasionner directement ou indirectement des lesions corporelles ou des dommages materiels, /e personnel competent pourla maintenance doit etre averti immediatement. , !\ AITENTION 1 EN CAS DE DOUTE, PROCEDER IMMEDIATEMENT A LA MISE A L ARRET DES MATERIELS CORRESPONDANTS!
! A
PRIXAUCION Para Prevenir Perfurbaciones es necesario que el personal de servicio experimentado (vease m4s arriba) efechie regu/armente /as operaciones prescritas de manteniy revision. Las alteraciones mien to, inspection respecto al servicio normal (mayor consumo, increment de temperatures o de vibraciones, ruidos u o1ores no habituates, actuacion de Ios equipos de vigilancia, etc.), dan a conocer que el funcionamiento est~ dificultado. Para evitar perturbaciones que, a su vez, pueden motivar directs o indirectamente graves daiios personages o materials, hay que avisar inmediatamente al personal de mantenimiento competence.
A
!
EN CASOS DE DUDAJ DESCONECTAR lNMEDlATAMENTE LOS cOWpONENTES AFECTADOS.
AITENTION: Nous attlrons I atientlon sur Ie fait que Ie contenu de de la documentation du produlf ne fait pas partie dun ,~ccord dunepromesse oudun rapport lurldlque inter leursou ~>rlwqucur, elfe n a ~as non plus pour objet dyporteramende ,ment Toutes Ies obligations de SIEMENS d~coulent du marchr2 conclu quI stlpule aussl Ies clauses de garantle completes et v,]lal~les a htre exclustf Les pr~sentes Instruct Ions et docu nl reslrelndre Ies clauses de [merit, )tlons Ine sauroni nl ~lendre g<~r.llltlt> Contra ctuelles
lNDICACtON: Se hate notar queel contenido de Ias lnstrucclones de serwcio y de Ias documentaciones de Ios productos no son parte component de convenios, conceslones o relaclones Iegales pasadas o existences, ni pretenden modif!carlas. Todos Ios compromises adquiridos por Siemens resultan del correspond iente contrato de compraventa el cual contiene la regulac!dn completa y unica vzllida del compromlso de garantla. Las determlnaclones contractuales sobre la garant!a no quedan ampliadas nl Iimitadas por el contenldo de estas Instrucclones y documentaclones.
FRANQAIS
ESPANOL
La prtxsente fiche dinformation, qui comporte Ies marques davertissement, sinscrit en compl& ment ~ la documentation du produit et doit &re resr.mctde clans tous ses points Dour des raisons
e &curite.
Esta hoja informative con indicaciones de peligro, es complementaria a Ias instrucciones de setvicio especificas del producto y su contenido debe observarse especialmente por razones de seguriad. PELIGRO
Las m~quinas y aparatos electricos forman parte de instalaciones industrials de energia electrica. Durante su servicio tienen descubiertas algunas partes sometidas a tensiones peligrosas, pudiendo haber otras sujetas a movimiento o rotation. Por este motivo, dar origen pueden siempre a graves danos personages o materials si, por ejemplo, se eliminan indebidamente /as cubierias necesarias, se hate uso indebido de /as mismas, se manejan erroneamente o no se practican en ellas /as suficientes operaciones de mantenimiento.
DANGER l.es machines et appareils electriques sent des materiels destines a 6tre utilises clans des installations industrielles a courant fort. Ces materiels comportment des pariies actives nues et eventuelIement des pieces en mouvement ou en rotation susceptible de constituer un danger en tours de fonctionnement. 11s pourraient par consequent occasionner des lesions corporelles tres graves ou des dommages materiels important, par exemple en cas denlevement intempestif des recouvrements necessaires, en cas dutifisation non appropriee, en cas de manoeuvre incorrect ou en cas de carence au niveau de lentretien. II incombe par consequent aux responsables de la securite de Iinstallation de faire en sorte - que seules des personnes qualifiers soient chargees de Iexecution de travaux sur Ies machines ou sur /es appareils, - que pour Iexecution de tous /es travaux correspondents, ces personnes disposent en permanence de la notice demise en oeuvre /ivree avec Ie produit et des autres elements de la documentation du produit et quelles soient tenues de se conformer strictement a cette documentation, et - quil soit interdit aux personnes non qualifiers dexecuter des travaux sur les machines ou appareils ou a Ieur voisinage.
Los responsables de la seguridad de la instalacion tienen que garantizar que: - solo se encarguen Ios trabajos a realizar en Ias maquinas y aparatos a personas calificadas - que dichas personas al realizar Ios correspondientes trabajos tengan siempre a su disposition y se comprometan a observar consecuentemente Ias instrucciones de servicio suministradas y la dem~s documentation especifica de IOS productos. - Se prohiba trabajar en /as maquinas y aparatos o en sus proximidades a personas no calificadas.
Par PERSONNEL OUAL/F/E II faut entendre Ies Dersonne au vu de Ieurformation, de Ieurexp@rience et de Ieur information alnsi que de Ieurs connaissances des normes et r~glements applicable, des prescriptions de prevention dacci dents et des conditions dexploitation, ont W ha billt~es par Ie responsible de la s~curlt~ de Iinstallation ~ executer Ies Mches n~cessalres, etqui solenten mesurede reconnaitredes dangers Wentuels et de Ies Wlter (pour Ies d6flnltions relatives ~ la competence des personnes, voir aussi DIN VDE 0105 ou CEI 364) Elles dolvent aussl avolr des connalssances de secourisme alnsl que de connalssances des @qulpements de sauvetage se trouvant sur place Llnterdlcbon deconfler destravaux surdeslnstallations acou rant fort ~ des personnes non quallfi@.es est r~glement~e, par exemple clans DIN VDE 0105 ou CEI 364
Q(II,
PERSONAL CALIFICADO son aauellas ~ersonas aue Dor SI formacibn, experiencia e lnstrucc16n asi como porstis conocl mlentos sobre Ias normas, determlnaciones, prescrlpciones sobre prevention de accidents y sobre Ias condiciones del servicio correspond ientes, est~n autorizadas por el responsible de la segurldad de la instalac16n a ejecutar Ias activlda des necesarias, reconociendo y evitando Ios posibles peltgros (sobre Ias definiciones de personal especializado consultese DIN VDE 01050 CEI 364) Entre otros, hay que tener conocimlento sobre Ios ~rlmeros auxllios a prestar y sobre Ios equipos de salvamento locales. En Ias normas DIN VDE 01050 en CEI 364 se regula la prohlbl cibn de emplear personas no califlcadas para trabajos en Instalaclones de energia el~ctrica da Por suPuesto que Ios trabajos fundamentals de planificacion de la instaiacion asi como todas ias operaciones de transport, montaje, instalacion, puesta en servicio, mantenimiento y reparation corren a cargo de personal calificado y se realizan bajo el control del personal especializado responsible. Hay que observar especialmente: - Los dates tecnicos e indicaciones sobre el empleo admisible (condiciones de montaje, de conexion, del ambiente y dei servicio), contenidas, entre otros, en el cat~logo, en la documentation del pedido, en las instrucciones de servicio, en rbtulos y en la dem~s documentation del producto. - Las prescripciones generales de instalacion y seguridad. - Las determinaciones y condiciones exigidas especificas de la instalacion y locales. - El empleo convenience de herramientas y equipos de elevation y transport. - El uso de Ios equipos de protection personal.
! A
Les travaux detudes et dingenierie de iinstallation ainsi que tous Ies travaux de transpoti, de manutention, de montage, dinstallation, de mise en sewice, de maintenance et de reparation sent supposes etre executes par des personnes qualifiers ou sous /e contrdle de personnes competentes responsabies. Dans ce contexte, il a lieu de: - tenir compte des caracteristiques techniques et des conditions dutilisation (conditions de montage, de raccordement, denvironnement et de service) qui figurent entre autres au catalogue, clans la notice de mise en oeuvre, sur Ies plaquettes signaletiques et clans Ies autres elements de la documentation duproduit - se conformer aux regles generales detablissements et de securite, - respecter /es prescriptions et contraintes locales specifiques a Pins talla tion, - veiller a Iutilisation adequate des outils ainsi que des equipments de Ievage et de manutention, - veilier a Iutilisation des equipments de protection des personnes, A~ENTloN
! L!!J
PRECAUC]ON
se
Le istruzioni SIJI funzionamento cfelle apparecchiature non possono, pena una mancata globalitai, contenere nel dettaglio tutte Ie in formazioni sulle possibili varianti costruttive, ne tanto meno ogni pensabile caso nel montaggio, nel servizio o nella manutenzione. Nei manuate solamente Ie istruzioni necessaries al personale qualificato per un adeguato utilizzo di macchinari o di apparecchiature in aree di Iavoro industrial.
For overskddlighetens skull &an driftsinstruktionerna inte alltid innehWa all detaljinformation rorande mojIiga konstruktionsvarianter, och kan framfor alit inte ta hansyn till alla tankbara slag av installation, drift och underhdl. Si#lunda innehdller driftsinstruktionerna i allmanhet bara sihiena anvisningar som kravs for kvalificerad personal (se ovan) i samband med korrekt anvandning a v rmaskiner eller apparater i industriella sammanhang.
Se in casi speciali di instailazioni di macchinari od apparecchia-ture non in aree industria!i, vengano eventualmente poste ulteriori condizioni (es.: protezione da contatto per Ie dita di bambini, etc), tali condizioni devono venire garantite dally impianto in fase di montaggio attraverso misure di protezione aggiuntive.
Om av maskiner elier apparater enstaka fall anvands utanfor industriomrhden och detta medfor skarpta krav (t.ex. beroringsskydd for barn), s& m~ste dessa villkor sakerstallas genom montering av extra skyddsanordningar.
in mancanza di chiarezza, specialmente con mancanti in formazioni dettagliate SUI particolare prodotto, occorre prowedere al chiarimento necessario attraverso Ie strutture commercial SIEMENS competent. Si prega di indicare chiaramente il codice del macchinario o dells apparecchiatura ed if relativo numero di produzione. PER IL PROGETTO, IL MONTAGGIO, LA MESSAIN SERVIZIO ED IL SERVICE, S1 CON SIGLIA DI RICH IEDERE IL SUPPORTO E LASSISTENZA DEI CENTRI SIEMENS COMPETENTI.
Ta kontakt med narmaste SIEMENS-kontor vid okfarheter i detta avseende, framfor ant avsaknad av produktspacifik detaijinformation. Ange darvid typbeteckning och tillverkningsnummer for berorda maskiner eller apparater.
VID PLANERING, MONTERING, IDRIFTTAGNING OCH SERVlCEARBETE AR DET LAMPLIGTATT UTNYTTJA DEN HJALP OCH DE TJANSTER SOM UTNYTTJA DEN HJALP OCH DE TJANSTER SOM KAN ERH~LLAS FRAN SIEMENS SERVICECENTRA. OBS: For allmanna arbeten, t.ex. kontroll av mottagna leveranser (transportskador), l~ngtldslagring och konservering av maskiner, kontroll av fundament, padragning av kopplingar, uppstallning och nktning av Inaskiner, lnstallahons~tgarder etc galler ytterligare detaljlnformation, som flnns i SIEMENS monteringsanvisningar, som kan erhallas fran forsaljningskon toret
NOTA: Per attlvlf~ generall, come, ad esemplo, Iaccurato test del matenale consegnato (dannl da trasporto), limmagazzi nagglo a Iungo termlne e la conservazione d) macchinari, Ie prove dl base, la stesura del collegamenti, la messa in opera e la messa a punto dei macchlnarl, Ie norme dl installazione e moltl altn, sono disponlbtll ultenori in formazioni, contenute nelle pub blicazlonl SIEMENS per II montagglo e reperlbill su rlchlesta presso Ie rispettwe agenzle
! A
Al fine di evitare guasti, a necessario fare eseguire regolarmente dal personale di servizio addestrato Ie prescritte operazioni di manutenzione, ispezione e revisione (vedi sopra). Variazioni rispetto al normale funzionamento (assorbimento di potenza maggiorato, temperature, vibrazioni, rumori, etc. o segnalazioni da parte dellimpianto di sicurezza) fanno prevedere che il funzionamento sia non corretto. Per impedire guasti, che possono recare direttamente od indirettamente gravi danni a persone o cose, il personale addetto alla manutenzione deve venire tempestivamente informato.
A~ENZlONE
LL
For aft forebygga storningar m~ste f6reskmvna underhdlls-, inspections- och revisionsAtgarder regelbundet utforas av erfaren servicepersonal. Vid iakttagelser som ej stammer overens med normal drift (t.ex. hogre effektforbrukning, forhojd temperature, vibrationer, ovaniiga ljud etc., eller nar skyddsfunktioner loser ut) firms det aniedning aft misstanka aft dven funktionen pdverkats. For att undvika storningar, som i sin tur man medfora allvartigaperson-eller materialskador, m~ste dd ansvarig servicepersonal kallas in utan drojsmdl.
VARN[NG
! A
,, I \
IN CASO D! DLIBBIO D\SATllVARE MENTE GLI UTENSILI SOSPETTI
lMMEDlATA-
! A
KOPPLA OMEDELBART WD VARJE MISSTANKE.
lFR~N
UTRUSTN~NGEN
NOTA: SI fa Inoltre presente, che II contenuto del manuale e delle documentazlonl relative al prodotto non fa parte dl accordl, Impegnl o rapportl gtundlcl, n~ precedent n~ attuali e che tale sltuazlone non PUO cam blare. Tall impegn[ da parte dl SIEMENS risultano nel contratto dl vendlta corrwpondente, contenente anche certiflcatl d! garanzla completl ed autono mamente val}dl Tall certificate] dl garanzla regolatl da contratto non vengono n@ ampllatl ne Iimltatl dalla stesura del presente fmanu ale
OBS: Innehallet i dr!ftsinstruktioner och annan produktdokumentation skall Inteanses Inga som en del av tidlgare eller galIande overenskommelse, utfastelse eller rattsforhallande och e] hellerandrar detta. Alla forpliktelserfran Siemens sida grundas pa det berorda kopeavtalet, som ocksa innehaller fullstan dtga och olnskrankta uppglfter rorande garantiataganden Dessa avtalsenllga bestammelser rorande garantiataganden varken kompletteras eller inskranks av framstallnlngarna I driftslnstru ktioner och annan documentation,
Herausgegeben Berelch Antriebs-, Elektromotorenwerk Anderungen
vom
/ Issued und Bad
by Installationstech a. d. Saale nik / Drives (EWN) Subject to change without Sujeto a modiflcaclones Forbehall andringar prior notice and Standard Products Group
Schalt-
Neustadt
vorbehalten
Sous reserve de modtflcatlons Con rlserva df eventuall rnodhche siemens Aktiengesellschaft
EWN-Bestell-Nr. /Order Eies\ell. Ort EWN Prlnled In the Federal AG 07902000 MA 6
No.
610.42356/21 of Germany
R.?publc
De-En -Fr-SD-lt Sv
ITALIANO !
PERICOLO osservate Le indicazioni e Ie awertenze conte. nute. Nel manuale operativo e nelle ulteriori istruzioni fornite, devono sempre onde evitare pericoli e danni.
SVENSKA !
VARNING tillhorande For undvikande av risker och skador maste de uppgifter och anvisningar som ges i denna driftsinstruktion saint driftsinstruktioner standigt beaktas.
venir
ovriga
A queste istruzioni operative sono allegate informazioni supplementari per la sicurezza (in giallo) che contengono indicazioni integrative relative alla sicurezza per macchine ed apparecchi elettrici. Queste costituiscono pertanto anche unintegrazione di tutte Ie altre istruzioni operative fornite e di tutte Ie altre a riguardo (ad es quelle concernenti i freni, ecc. . .). Per lesecuzione di varianti speciali di macchine recchi sono inoltre valide Ie indicazioni contenute Ioghi e nelle offerte. ed appanei cata-
Med denna driftsinstruktion medfoljer aven en annan, som inneh~ller kompletterande sakerhetsuppgifter (gul) for elektriska maskiner och apparater. Denna galler allts~ som komplettering av alla ovriga levererade driftsoch andra instruktioner (t.ex. for bromsar, etc.).
For spacialvarianter av maskinerna terna i kataloger och offerter.
galler
uteslutande
uppgif-
Descrizione
Campo dimpiego
I motori possono essere installati in am bienti polverosi o umidi. Lisolamento ~ in versione tropicale. Se il deposito o linstallazione allaperto sono eseguiti regolarmente, in Iinea di massima non ~ necessario alcun particolare accorgimento per proteggere i motori dalle intemperie. Costruzione e modo di funzionamento
Beskrivning
Anvandningsomr3de
Motorerna kan installers i dammig eller fuktig omgivning. lsoIeringen i tropikutforande. Vid andam~lsenlig Iagring eller uppstallning utomhus ar normalt inga speciella skydds~tgarder mot vaderpaverkan pa motorerna nodvandiga.
Funktionssatt
och konstruktion
I motori 1LA5 e 1LA9 (ad eccezione dei tipi di grandezza 56), 1LC5 e 1MA5 sono ventilati per mezzo di una ventola. I motori 1PP5 e 1PP9 vengono raffreddati da ventola montata SUI rotore (se fungono da motori perventilatori) opp. per mezzo di ventilator separate. I motori 1LA5 e 1LA9 del tipo di grandezza 56 e i motori 1LP5, ILP9 e 1MF5 sono a ventilazione naturale (Senza ventilator). Nei motori a piedini, questi fan no corpo con la carcassa perfusion. Per i motori ILC5 bisogna rispettareanche Ie istruzioni di servizio del freno.
Motorerna 1LA5, 1LA9 (utom utforingsstorlek 56), 1LC5 och 1MA5 har egen flaktkylning. Motorerna IPP5 och 1PP9 kyls antingen - t.ex. nlir de anvands som flaktmotorer av specialflaktar monterade pa rotorerna eller av externa flaktar. Motorernal LA5, ILA9 i utforingsstorle k56, 1LP5, lLP90ch IM.~5 har egen kylning utan flakt. Motorer med ft)tter har dessa galler pagjutna dessutom pa motorhuset. driftsinstruktionen for For motorerna bromsen. 1LC5
Uso
[ . PERICOLO Si faccia attenzione che qualunque operazione sulla macchina venga effettuata solamente in assenza di tensione.
Drift A ! VARNING
Alla arbeten pa maskinen f& endast utforas i spanningslost tillstand,
Installazione Se fra la fornitura e la messa in servizio dei motori ~ trascorso un periodo superiore a 4 anni in condizioni favorevoli (magazzi naggio in ambienti asciutti, privi di polvere e vi brazioni) oppure a 2 anni, in condizioni poco favorevoli e consigliabile sostituire I cuscinetti. Per Ie grandezze 90 S e 90 L si tenga pfesente quanto segue: tra i motori con cassetta morsetti SUI dorso, in quelli di forma costruttiva IM B 3, i piedini posteriori hanno fori doppi per peter rispettare Ie distanze normal izzate tra i piedini. Tra i motori che hanno la cassetta morsetti disposta Iateralmente (esecuzioni speciali), in quelli di forma IM B 3, tutti e quattro i piedini presentano fori doppi. Pertanto anche se la morsettiera ~ disposta a sinistra ~ possibile rispettare Ie distanze tra i fori, stabilite dalle norme (v. Fig, 6). Nelle macchine con estremit~ dalbero verso Ialto e verso il basso si deve fare attenzione che in nessun caso possa penetrare acqua nel cuscinetto superiore. La parte superiore dells carcassa morsetti pub essere ruotata di 180 aeon i motori 1LA5, 1LA9, 1LC5, 1LP5, 1LP9 e 1PP5 elPP9, ~;nt;( ow ,notorl IMA5 e IMF5 con morsettl era a 6 morsetti e o! 4 x90 . .~a!h:l~ .. ,1 rotazione Poich4 sui motori 1LA5, 1LA9, 1LP5, ILP9, IPPS e 1PP9 la cassetta dei morsetti @ di plastica, ciob di materiale non conduttore, per questi tipi si dovranno usare bocchettoni pressacavo e tappi filettati di materiale non conduttore. ! AVVERTENZA Equilibratura dei rotori e degli elementi condotti pieno o Si noti
8, 11
Installation
Om motorn efter Ieveransen maste forvaras under gynnsamma forhallanden (i torrt, damm- och vibrationsfritt utrymme) i mera an 4 ~r innan den tas i drift, eller i ogynnsamma forhallanden i mera an 2 ar, sa m~ste Iagren bytas ut. Observera! For typerna 90 S och 90 L galler: For att motsvara de normerade fotmatten har motorer i utforingsform IM B 3 med ovanp~ monterad anslutningsl~da dubbla borrhal i de bakre fotterna. Pa motorer med pa sidan monterad anslutningslada (specialutforande) och i utforingsform IM B 3 ar alla fetter forsedda med dubbla borrhal. Darigenom kan de normerade halavstanden tillampas aven nar anslutningsladan ar monterad PA vanster sida (se Fig. 6). Pa maskiner med uppat- och nedatriktad axelande se till att vatten ej kan tr~nga in i det ovre Iagrer. maste man
Overdelen av kontaktladan kan vridas 1800 pa motorerna 1LA5, 1LA9,1LC5, lLP5,1LP9,1PP50 chl PP9. ?:: nn+]~f,rw: ;k~~:. ~ lbf F5 med k.ontaktpl:nt med 6 klarmmr,r k~o ,Ju(,r j.,,, ; 4x90f DA anslutningsk%dans kapa bestar av ej Iedande plastmaterial, far for borrningarna for Iedningsinforning pa 1LA5-, 1LA9-, 1LP5-, 1LP9-, 1PP5- och lPP9-motorer endast forskruvningar och tatningsskruvar i elektriskt ej Iedande material insattas. ! OBSERVERA Balansering av rotorer och anslutna balanserade drivelement. med hel ellerhalv k[l, som
I rotori sono equilibrate dinamicamente con chiavetta con mezza chlavetta, inserita nellestremit~ dellalbero. the:
Conhnuato
Rotorerna ardynamiskt sitter i axelanden.
a pag!na
Forlsattnlng
se wdan
8, 11
Classe disolatior du moteur selon VDE 0530 B Ou F Ou H H t%. 2 Graisse
Temp&ature du fluide rr$frig6rant du moteur c
Graissaqe paliers -
Dour
exemple
Clase de material aislante del motor segun VDE 0530 B 6 F 6 H H
Temperature del medio refrigerant del motor
Tipo de grasa para Ios rodamientos
c
20, ,. +60 Grasa DIN 51825K3N Grasa DIN 51502KH3R
Por ejemplo UNIREX N3* (Fa. Esso)
20a
+60
Graisse DIN 51825K3N Graisse DIN 51502KH3R
UNIREX N3* (Esso)
< >
20 +60
Indlcatlons du fabrlcant : satisf ait a Iessai en marche B selon DIN 51806 a la temperature dessa! de + 160 C
menor mayor
aue 20 que + 60 Segun
Dates en placa de caracteristicas YIO en la de engrase
de Iubrification
Fig. 2 Grasa
indicaclfM del fabricate; se ha superado la prueba de marcha B segun DfN 51806 a la temperaIura de prueba de + 160 C
Dans des conditions de service normale, Ie remplissage en graisse des rouiements suffit pour plusieurs ann~es, Sur Ies moteurs de vitesses de rotation jusqua 3600 tr/min, Ies paliers devraient etre nettoy~s et Ies roulements remplac~s apr~s 20000 heures de service, OU, au plus tard, apr~s 3 ans, Iorsque Ies conditions de service Ie permettent. II nest pas possible de proc~der a un regraissage. La graisse des nouveaux roulements doit r~pondre aux qualit~s DIN 51825 et DIN 51502 mentionn~es a la Fig. 2. Elle doit ~galement poss~dertoutes Ies autres caracteristiques indiqu~es a la Fig. 2. Les graisses spl$ciales pour conditions de service particuli&es figurent sur la plaque signal&ique ou a cOt~ de celle-ci (si elles ny figurent pas encore, pri&e de Ies y marquer). Dans la mesure ou il ya des chambres a graissea proximit~ des roulements (par exemple au niveau du flasque palier, pour l& tanchement du filetage de bout darbre normalement rempli au 2/3), elles recevront Ie meme type de graisse que Ie roulement, Eviter de m~langer diff~rentes sortes de graisses, Lors du replacement des roulements, il est conseill~ de remplacer ~galement tous Ies ~l~ments d~tanch~it~ (si presents) soumis a usure (par exemple bague d~tancht?it~ a frottement radial). Les bagues d~tanch~it~ a frottement radial saris ressort seront remplac~es par des bagues de m~me type (saris ressort). Tout W?ment endommagr2 sera remplac~.
Bajo condiciones normales de servicio la carga de grasa de Ios rodamientos duravarios aflos, Si Ias condiciones de servicio 10 permiten deben Iimpiarse Ios puntos de apoyo y renovarse Ios rodamientos de Ios motores con velocidades maximas de 3600/min, transcurridas 20.000 horas de servicio o a mas tardar despues de 3 ahos. La renovaci6n de la grasa no es admisible. La grasa de Ios nuevos rodamientos debe satisfacer la calidad segtin DIN 51825 y DIN 51502 Y ofrecer Ias demas propiedades relacionadas en la figura 2. Las grasas especiales para condiciones particulars de servicio figurar~n en la placa de caracteristicas o junto a ells.
Si hubiera que introducer grasa en recintos adyacentes (p. ej. en el escudo portacojinetes para cerrar el paso del eje, que en general se Ilena en sus 2/3 partes), habr~ que utilizar el mismo tipo de grasa que hay en el rodamiento. Evitar la mezcla degrasas. Se recomienda que, al cambiar Ios rodamientos, se renueven Ios posibles elementos de juntas expuestos al desgaste (p. ej. Ios anillos de cierre radial del eje). Si Ios anillos de cierre radial del eje no tuvieran muelles, tampoco se pondran muelles en Ios nuevos. Las piezas deterioradas se sustituir~n por otr~s nuevas.
Moteurs
EEx e 1MA5, 1MF5 selon

0170/0171 0170/0171 fascicule fascicule 1 et 6
Motores
EEx e 1MA5, 1MF5 segun

0170/0171 0170/0171 parte 1 Y patie 6
DIN EN 50014/VDE DIN EN 50019/VDE
DIN EN 50 014/VDE DIN EN 50 019/VDE
En ce qui concerne Ies moteurs EEx e 1MA5, 1MF5, Ies parties de texte en rouge constituent un compl~ment au texte imprim~ en noir. Les moteurs 1MA5 dent Ie bout darbre est orient~ vers Ie haut (par ex. formes IM V 3, IM V 6, IMV19) doivent ~tre~quip~sdun recouvrement empechant Ies corps ~trangers de tomber clans Ie capot du ventilateur (cf. DIN EN 50014/VDE 01 70/0171, fascicule 1, $ Ill, 16.1). Ce recouvrement ne doit pas empecher Ie refroidissement du moteur par son ventilateur, La classe de temperature figurant sur la plaque signal~tique du moteur doit coincider avec celle du gaz combustible susceptible de se prfxenter. Chaque moteur doit comporter .un disjoncteur serie moteurs branch~ en amont, que Ion r~glera sur Ie courant nominal du moteur et qui d~clenchera, si Ie rotor est tale, en lespace detempst~figurant surla plaque signal~tique du moteur (essai sur Ie vu de la caract&istique de d~clenchement jointe au disjoncteur s&ie moteurs). Les moteurs a polarites multiples comporteront un disjoncteur pour chaque nombre de pOles. Mais si Ion veut assurer la protection contre Ies surcharges exclusivement par un I$quipement de surveillance directe de la temperature a Iaide de sondes thermom~triques (voir DIN EN 50019/VDE 0170/0171 fascicule 6, annexe A-Al, b), ilfaut quela version du moteur soit sp~cialement contrblee et agree a cet effet. Se reporter @galement h la norme DIN 57165/VDE Siemens 0165. ou attesLes reparations seront confi~es tees par un expert agrtx?. a un atelier
Adem~s de Ias informaciones impresas en negro en estas Instrucciones de servicio, para estos motores rigen Ias que figuran en rojo, de forma complementaria o especial. En caso de motores 1MA5 en Ios que el extremo del eje queda hacia arriba, por ejemplo, en Iasformas constructivas IM V 3, IM V 6, IM V 19, habra que disponer una cubierta para evitar que puedan penetrar cuerpos extrar70s por la tapa del ventilator (Wase DIN EN 50014/VDE 0170/0171, parte 1, apartado Ill, 16.1). Esta cubierta no debe impedir la refrigeracidn del motor porel ventilator. La clase detemperatura indicada en la placa decaracteristicas del motor ha de coincidir con lade Ios gases combustibles que pudieran desprenderse. Cada motor ha de tener un guardamotor ajustado a la intensidad nominal de la maquina, que dispare en el tiempo t~ indicado en la placa del motor, cuando este bloqueado el rotor (prueba a la vista de la caracteristica de disparo que acomparla al guardamotor). Los motores de POIOS conmutables necesitan un guardamotor propio para cada numero de pares de polos. Si la proteccidn contra sobrecargas mente mediante un dispositivo de con sensores tt?rmicos (vease DIN parte 6, anexo A-Al b), habra que cialmente para este fin y extender Hacemos referencia se estableciese exclusivavigilancia de temperature EN 50019/VDE 0170/0171, comprobar el motor espeel oportuno certificado. 0165.
a DIN 57165/VDE
Las reparaciones han de efectuarse en Ios talleres de Siemens o someterlas a la comprobaci6n de un perito oficialmente reconocido.
Continua en la pagina 8
Su,te
a la Page E
La parte superior de la caja de bornes de Ios motores 1LA5, 1LA9, 1LC5, 1LP5, 1LP9, 1PP5 Y1PP9 se puede giraren 180gradosyenlosmotores !~i;.~ . fi! ,. ~ . ,J,.. .. ..)i)i be:-,..,.:, ,--:; ]( ;,! .:, .!:
&ant donn~ que la boite h bornes est en matikwe plastique L_2.J non conductrice du courant, utiliser exclusivement des presses ~toupes@desboucflorrsfile. t& en mat~riaux non-conducteurs du courant pour Ies trous des entrees de cables des moteurs 1LA5, 1LA9, 1LP5, 1LP9, 1PP5 et 1PP9.
AVERTISSEMENT
A
I .
Dado que la caja material pl~stico conductor, en Ios paso de lineas de Ios motores 1LA5, 1LA9, 1PP9 solo se utilizar~n atornilladuras y material no conductor. ATENCldN Equilibrado namiento din~mico de rotores
de bornes es de el~ctricamente no agujeros para el 1LP5, 1LP9, 1PP5 y tornillos tapbn de
Equilibrate sur Iarbre
du rotor
et des organes
de transmission
mont~s en-
y de sus elementos
de acciocolo -
Les rotors sent ~quilibr~s dynamiquement avec clavette ti~re ou demi-clavette en place clans Ie bout darbre:
Los rotores est~n din~micamente equilibrados cada en el extremo del eje la chaveta entera
teniendo o media.
pour Ies machines fabriqu~es~ partirde 1991, letyped~quiIibrage est marqu~ sur lextr~mit~ de Iarbre cot~ D (bout darbre) ou surla plaque signal~tique (C30U L surlar plaque signal~tique des moteurs de designations de carcasse 80 mm et inf&ieures) (-F, = @quilibrage avec clavette enti&e) (H,, = @quilibrage avec demi-clavette). - pour Ies machines fabriquees jusqua fin 1990, Ie rotor a ete ~quilibr~ avec clavette enti~re (pas de marquage). Velller $i ce que l~quilibrage desorganes responde ~ celui du rotor (F ou H). retransmission cor-
Las m~quinas fabricadas a partir de 1991 Ilevan una marca del tipodeequilibradoen elextremo LAdel eje (frentedel eje) o en la placa de caracteristicas. (Marcas (,:1o (:I en la placa de caracteristicas en motores de hasta el tamanno de 80 mm). (F = Equilibrado con la chaveta entera) (H = Equilibrado con media chaveta).
Las m~quinas
brados
fabricadas hasta finales de 1990 estan euqllicon la chaveta entera (no Ilevan marca).
Observar el tipo correcto del equilibrado din~mico del 6rgano de accionamiento en concordancia con el tipo de equilibrado del rotor (F o H). Equilibrado con media chaveta
Equilibrate avec demi-clavette Lorsque Ie rapport entre la Iongueurdes organes de transmission (accouplements, poulies ~ courroies .) et la Iongueurdu bout darbre est <0,8 et que la vitesse est >1500 tr/min, des vibrations risquent dappariitre. Dans ce cas, il peut sav~rer n~cessairede proc~der~ un nouvel~qui librage supprimer, par exemple, la partie de la clavette qui d~passe de Iorgane de transmission et ~merge de Iarbre. Lemmanchement et Iextraction des organes de transmission (accouplements, poulies~ courroies rouesdent~es,... ) nedoivent se faire quavec un dispositif appropri~ (Fig. 7). Raccordement Comparer la tension et la fr~quence du r~seau aux indications de la plaque signal~tique. Une variation de + 5/0 de la tension ou delafr~quence ;{)c( !,~j~c~~?~:~;ot: T ? w ,;[fIefILie:.,{c; est admissible saris abaissement de la puissance. Realiser Ie branchement et disposer Ies barrettes de couplage conform~mentau sch~masitu~dans la boite~ bornes. Raccorderle conducteur de protection a la borne + Les conducteurs raccordt% ~ des bornes A &rier doivent @tre dispos6s de telle sorte que l&rier repose ~ la m@me hauteur de part et dautre de la vis. Lorsquun seul conducteur est raccord6, il doit @tre plit$en U autourde la vis. II en est dem~medu conducteur de protection vertjaune (voir Fig. 3). Tous Ies conducteurs raccord6s ~ des ~querres de mise ~ la terre ext4rieures doivent 6tre plit% en U (voir Fig. 4). Couples de serrage pas Ies borniers) desvis et ~crous des bornes (neconcerne
Los Organos de accionamiento (p. ej., acoplamientos, poleas, etc. ) en Ios que la relaciOn de longitudes del cubo respecto al extremo del eje sea inferior a 0,8 y velocidades superiors a 1.500 /rein, pueden perturbar la regularidad de la marcha. En estos cases hay que equilibrar, p.ej. reparar la parte de Ias chavetas que so bresale del elemento de acoplamiento o del eje. Los Organos de accionamiento (acoplamientos, poleas, ruedas dentadas, etc.) se extraer~n y calar~n utilizando el dispositivo adecuado (Fig. 7). Conexif5n La tensidn y frecuencla de la red tienen que ser Ias indicadas en la placa de caracteristicas. Son admisibles desviaciones de tensi6n o de frecuencia de f So/o como m~ximo , A tM~5, Cesvlat,l[jnc ; rr~x,l,n:, d f;,f;,jt.,, ,,, j, ; , sin que por ello disminuya la potencia. Llevar a cabo el empalme y la colocaci~n de Ios estribos de maniobra segun el esquema que se encuentra en la caja de bornes. Empalmar el conductor de protection al borne marcado con + En Ios bornes con estribo de conexidn (p. ej. segun DIN 46282) Ios conductors se distribuir~n de tal manera que resulte la misma altura de conexi6n en ambos Iados. Este tipo de conexi6n requiere doblar en U uno de Ios conductors, 10 que rige igualmente para la conexi6n del conductor de protecci6n, de color amarillo y verde (v&ase la fig. 3). Fundamentalmente, todos Ios conductors situados por debajo del angular de puesta a tierra se curvar~n en U (v@ase la fig. 4). Pares de apriete de Ios tornillos y tuercas (excepto en Ias regletas de bornes)
1 ,
en Ios
bornes
N.m-
Maintenance I A .
Graissage Les moteurs sent ~quip~s de roulements ~ billes ~ 2 d~flecteurs (version 2ZC3) graiss~s ~ vie. Linterstice entre Ies d~flecteurs est rempli ~ 30 O/O- 40 O/O de graisse. Types de gralsse, voir Fig. 2. Lemmanchement et Iextraction des roulements faire quavec un dispositif approprie (Fig. 7), ne doivent se AITENTION pour lex6cution de quen soit la nature, sable quelinstallation tension. travaux, quelle il est indispensoit~ l&at hors
Mantenimiento
A
I
q
ATENCldN
Todos cuando tensi6n.
Ios trabajos la instalaci6n
se efectuar~n se encuentre sin
Lubrificaci6n Los motores henen rodamientos de bolas con dos discos de cierre (ejecuci6n 2ZC3) y Iubrificacidn permanente. El espacio Iibre entre Ios discos decierre se llenar~ de grasa en un 30 0/o a 40 0/o. Sobre Ios tipos de grasa v6ase la figura 2. Para extraer ycalarlos rodamientoshayque tivo adecuado (Fig. 7). utilizarun disposl -
Ersatzteile,
ls)ehe Se!!e ql
vom
Werk heterbar
Spare
(see
patiS,
9)
auallable
from
the works
pieces
(volr page
de rechange,
9)
Iwrables
par Ius!ne
page
1.00
40 56 58 60 61 3.00 89 4.00 18 19
Lagerung AS Laqer~ch!ld II 61 n?[fbestellen so<ern .orhavden) Ausglelchssche<be Federsche\be Walzlager Federthind Iur Lagersch,ldnabe lmchl ,mmer vorhanden] Laufer, kompletl STAR -Toleranzrny Iur Lul!er Stander, komplett Lelstungssc. h!ld Schraube Abdec, kung Kontaklw!nkel Erdungswlnkel, auljen Ule,nm Ychelhe W)nkt,l Klemmenkasten, komplett D\ch!ung Klemmenh(cN kcmp<ett Zwlscnennlatle D,chtung Klemn)e nk>]sle r!- Gt>ertell Le(!unq vollstandlg Verschluflbloph?n Klernmbu gel Klemmbuqel Efdunaswlnkcl Inner D{chlu;g Klemmenkasterl Dec. kel Schlld (Schutzze, che) Sch, <)ube Iur Deck~l Lagerung BS Walzlhger Federbad Iur L,, gerschlldndbe (nt<, hl )mrn?r .Orhande) Lage!~chlld 16 11 mfbestell en, balern vorhanderl) Beluttung, komplett .. Luller -. Lulte, haubc -.
1.00
40 56 58 60 61 3.00 89 4,00 18 19 20 30 31 40 41 5.00 03 10 33 42 44 45 53 70 71 73
Bearing assembly, drive end Endsh, eld (where provided. order 1 61 as well) Equal \zlng nng aes!hent preloadfng dfsc Roll\ ng-coniact bearing SDrlng band for endsbleld hub (not always prov,ded) Rotor, complete STAR tolerance nng for fan .* SIator, complete Rat, ng plate Screw Cover Contact angle Earthing angle, o~ler Clammna washer Angle Terminal box. complete Gasket Terminal board, complete Intermediate plate Gasket Upper part of iermlnal box Cable, comple!e Plug Terminal CIID Term!nal CIIP Earth\ng angle, \nner Gasket Cover for termfnal box Protection symbol Cover screw Bearing assembly, non-drive end Roll, rig-contact bearing Sprjng band for endshleld hub (not always prowded) Endshield (where provided order 6 11 as welt) Ventilation accessories, complete External Ian .* Fan cowl, comolete .*
1.00
40 56 58 60 61 3.00 89 4.00 18 X 30 31 40 41 5.00 03 10 33 42 .44 45 53 70 71 73
20 30 31 40 41 5.00 03
10
33 42 44 45 53 70 71 73 80 84 86 6.~~
10 II 20 7.00 04 40
80
84 86 89 6.00 10 II 20 7.00 04 40
80
84 86 6.::
10
11 20 ** 7.00 04 40
Logement cbtb entrainment Flasque-pal/er (SI present, commander en meme temps 1 611 Rondelle de compensation Rondelte elastique Roulement Lame ~lasbque pour moyeu du Hasque (pas toujours presente) Rotor, complet Bague de tolerance -STAR. po; r ventdateur q * Stator, complet Plaque s)gnaletlque V(s Recouvrement Equerre de contact Equerre de m!se A la terre, exterleure Rondelle de serrage Equerre Boite ~ bornes, complbte Joint Plaque a bornes, complete Plaaue Intercalalre Jolrit Partle superleure de la boite a bornes Cable complet Bouchon Etner de serrage Etr]er de serrage Equerre de m!se a la terre. lnler\eure Joint Couvercle de la boite a bornes Symbole VIS du couvercle Logement cbtb oppose a Ientrainement Roulement Lame elastlque pour moyeu du ttasque (pas toupurs presente) Flasque-paher (sI present, commander en M@me temps 6.111 Ventilation, complete +* Ventdateur ,* Capot du venhlateur .
Piezas
lr2a5< 1
de recambio;
pay 9)
iurr}n,str.~
)a tat>rlca
patil
lved,
di ricambio,
pag 91
fornlbdi
da tabbrlca
Reserudelar,
(se s!d 9) 1.00 40 56 58 60 61 3.00 89 4.00 18 19 20 30 31 40 5.:: 03 10 33 42 44 45 53 70 71 73 80 84 86 89 6.00 10 11 20 7.00 04 40
tlllgang[lga
frdn
tabrfken
Coj#nete del LA Escudo Porlacollrlpleh (pldase Mmb>en 1 61 SI extslel Arar?deld de comuensac, on 56 Ar IIlde l:, t>laSlll.j .8 Co IIr~I?!I? de rodal menlo ho Clrlld el,>~tlca vara el cubo del escudo 61 [Ao,t:,cojtnetcs [n<] se emplea slempre) Rotor, completo 3.00 !jg 4,,,11 de toler,~,,~,d STAP para uen!,lador 4.00 Fhtr+to(, (omr]l~tc, PIAC.1 de <.!r, ]cter,s!(cas 18 1!3 T<]: ,,)11[] 2n 30 31 40 ,c!ngd la, 41 Cala de bornes. completa 500 03 .1,,,1(3 10 PI, c <1d, I,url l<> .onl[llcta P1.,ca ,Il!elmecll<l 33 4? 44 45 !>3 l<,,lO!l [.li!bo de h[rll 10II 70 71 73 80 e4 8b 8Y 6.00 10 II 40 20 700 04 4 c!
00
1.00
40 56 58 60 61 3.00 89 4.00 18 19 20 30 31 40 41 5.00 03 10 33 42 44 45 53 70 71 73
,,
80
a4 86 6.::
10
11
20 7.00 04 40
Supporto Iato comando Scudo d, supporto (ord!nare anche 1 61 se tnserlfo) Rondella dl compensazlone Bundella elastlca Cusclnelto a rotolamento Nastro elashco oer II mezzo dello scudo d! supporto (non sempre Inserdo) Rotore, completo Anello dl tnlleranza .-STAR, per venhl atore + Statore, completo Targhetla Vlte Coperchro Angolare d, conlatto Angolare d, messa a terra eSterf10 Rondella dl ammorsam enlo Angolare Scatola morsetti. completa Guam, zlone Morsett, era comol eta P,as(ra ln[ermed; a Guarmz!one Parle suDeraore delta scaiola morsetb Cavetto completo Tappo Morselto d! serragglo Morsetto d\ serragglo Angolare dl messa a terra, Interno Guarnlzlone Coperchm dells scatola morsettl Targhet!a ls!mbolo dl prolezlone) Vlte per coperchlo Supporto opposto al Iato comando Cusc\nettO a rotolamento Naslro elashco per II mezzo dello scudo d, sup DOrt O (non sempre bnserlto) Scudo d, SUPPOrtO !ordln are anche 6 11 se lnserlfo) Ventdaz ione completa . Venlola .. C~)lf!a dells ventola .*
Lageronordning axeltappsidan, komplett Lagerskold (1 61 bestalls samtldlgt, vld behor) Ul)ammngsbrlcka Fjaderbrlcka Rulfager Fjaderband Ior Iagerskoldsnav (lInns e) alltldl Rotor, komplett STAR- Tolaransr!ng ior flakl q * Stator, komplett Mark Dl~t Skr[jven Lock Kontaktwnkel Jordn]ngsbeslag, yttre Klembncka Vfnkel AnslutningslAda, komplett Tatnlng Koppl, ngspl!nt, komplett Meltanplatla Tatn)no Anslut; lngsl$da overdel Ledn\ng, komplett Avslutn!ngspropp Klambygel Klambygel Jordmngsbeslag, \nre Tatn#na Lock Ifil anslutnlngsl~da Skyddsmarke Skruv for locket Lageranordning flaktsidan Rulla n-r for Iagerskotdsnav Flatlderband (lInns e[ alltfdl Lagerskjbld (6 11 bestalls samtldlgt wd behorl q * Flaktkylning, komplett Flakt ** Flaklkapa ..
,-=..
r - Bestellbeisptel: . Order example . Exemple de commande. Ejemplo de oedfdo:

Esemplo
..
..
Te!le enttallen bel 1LA5-BG 56. 1LP5 zugehorlge Bremsen-Betr\ ebsanle\tung ILA5-BG For ILC5
1PP5, 1LA9-BG
56. 1LP9
1PP9,
Bet ILC5 do not have these
slehe Parts
motors 56. 1LP5 IPP5, 1LA9-BG 56, 1LP9 IPP9 and motors reter tc the relevant brake operating ,nstruct)ons
1LA5 073-4AB20 Nr. E4A6 4567890002 LagersChild 1.40
.. .. .. ~.
Certa\nes pieces 1LP9. 1PP9 Ptezas veanse
sent suppr!mees pour Ies Iypes 1LA5-BG 56, ILP5 1PP5 Pour Ie type ILC5 votr InstructIons de service des fre!ns 1PP9,
1LA9-BG 56, correspondantes Para 1LC5
dordtne . Bestallexempel
L
supr]mldas en 1LA5-BG 56, 1LP5, 1PP5, 1LA9-BG 56, ILP9 Ias \nstruccmnes de servnc\o correspond\ entes al freno
Quest, Dezzl non sono present ne{ 1LA5-BG 56 1LP5, 1PP5, ILA9-BG 56 1LP9. 1PP9, Per I lIPI 1Lc5 SI vedano Ie l)spettlve ,struz!onl perlunzlonamento In trenatula Forekommer se Ullhor?. el I 1LA5-BG 56. 1LP5 iPP5, nde drlftsrnstruktmn for bromsen 1LA9-BG 56. 1Lp9 lpp9, V!d 1LC5,
nelle macchlne
a partire dallanno di costruzione 1991 il tipo dl equilibratura ~ contrassegnato SUI Iato azionamento dell estremit~ dalbero (parte frontale) oppure sulla targhetta. (Contrassegno @ oppure .H~ solla targhetta dei motori di grandezza fino a 80 mm compresi). (F = In caso di equllibratura con chiavetta piena) (-H,, = In caso di equilibratura con mezza chiavetta) ~ equilibrate
- PA maskiner f.o.m. tillverkningsAr 1991 anges balanseringstypen av en markering vid frontytan av axelanden PA drivsidan (A-sidan). (Markering @ resp. (!? PA markskylten for motorer t.o. m. monteringsstorlek 80 mm). (F = balansering (H = balansering med hel kil) med halv kil) rotorn overens
nelle macchine costruite fino al 1990 it rotore con chiavetta piena (nessun contrassegno).
- Pa maskiner tillverkadefram slutet av 1990 balanseras med hel kil (ingen markering) Ge akt pa att drivorganets balanseringstyp rotorns (F- eller H-balansering). Balansering med halv kil Pa drivelement (kopplingar, remskivor, etc.) 0,8 forhallande till axelandens Iangd och vid kan rotationsstorningar forekomma. I dessa balansering utfdras, t.ex. genom bortslipning som skjuter ut ur drivelementet och in over stammer
Fare attenzione che il tipo di equilibratura degli elementi condotti sia Iostesso diquellodel rotore (equilibratura Foppure H). [n caso di equilibratura con mezza chiavetta Con elementi condotti (ad es giunti, pulegge, .) con un rapporto di Iunghezza mozzo/lunghezza dellestremit~ dellalbero <0,8 e un numero di giri>1500/min pub risultare pregiudicata la silenzioslt~ di funzionamento. In questi casi pub rendersi necessario effettuare una riequilibratura, per es. riducendo la parte dells chiavietta sporgente dallelemento condotto e dal profilo dellalbero. II calettamento e Iestrazione di elementi (come ad es. giunti pulegge, ruota dentata, .) vanno effettuati sempre con un dispositivo idoneo (fig. 7). Allacciamento La tensione e la frequenza di rete devono coincidere con i dati riportati sulla targhetta. Sono ammessi scostamenti del t 5 YO . dells tensione o dells frequenza in quanto essi non causano una riduzione dells potenza. II collegamento e la disposizione dei ponticelli dovranno corns pondere a quelli indicati dallo schema applicato allinterno dells cassetta morsetti. Si colleghi il conduttore di protezione al morsetto contrassegnato da ~ C2uando si effettuano i collegamenti con morseti! di serraggio (per es. secondo DIN 46282), si faccia attenzione che i conduttori abbiano 10 stesso spessore su entrambi i Iati del morsetto. Questo tipo di collegamento richiede quindi che i singoli conduttori vengano ripiegati ad U Cir3 vale anche per il conduttore di protezione giallo-verde (vedi fig. 3). Anche i terminali di ogni conduttore da infilare sotto angolari esterni di messa a terra devono essere ripiegati ad U (vedi fig. 4) Coppie di serraggio ammesse per viti e dadi eccezione di quelli della morsettiera). dei morsetti (ad
vars navlangd ar < varvtal > 1500/min fall skall ev. efterav den del av kilen axelkonturen,
Drivelement (kopplingar, remskivor, installers och tas av med Iamplig
kugghjul, etc.) m&ste alltid ustrustning (Fig. 7).
Anslutning Natspanning och natfrekvens maste stamma overens med pa markplaten angivna data. En spannings-eller frekvensavar vikelsep5&5% tilklten utan att effekten behover reduceras. Anslutning och kopplingen av kopplingsblecken jamfors med kopplingsschemat pa insidan av locket till anslutningsl~dan. Skyddsledare anslutes till denna plint +. Vid kontaktklammor med klambyglar (t.ex. enl. DIN 46282) m~ste Iedarna fordelas sa att det blir ungefar samma klamhojd pa vardera sidan av balken. Detta slags anslutning kraver darfor atf en enataka ledare bojs i U-form. Detta galler aven skyddsledaranslutningen-grongul(se Fig. 3). Alla ledare skall i princip bojas i U-form (se Fig. 4).
~tdragningsmoment
for skruvar
och muttrar
(ej kontaktplintar):
Manutenzione
PERICOLO ! Si faccia attenzione che qualunque operazione sulla macchina venga effettuata solamente in assenza di tensione.
Underhall A ! OBS!
Ant arbete sorjningen skall utforas frankopplad. med stromfor-
Lubrificazione I motori sono provvisti di cuscinetti a sfere a gola profonda con due dischi di tenuta (esecuzione 2ZC3) e con ]ubrificazione permanence. Linterspazio fra i due dischi di tenuta ~ riempito di grasso peril 30... zK)O/0. Per la qualit~ del grasso vedere la fig. 2. II calettamento e Iestrazione di cuscinetti a rotolamento effettuato sempre con un dispositivo idoneo (fig. 7). Classe del materiale isolante sec. VDE 0530 B oppure F oppure H H Fig. 2 Grasso Iubrif icazione inferiore Weriore di Temperature del refrigerant del motore Qualita del grasso per la Iubrificazione dei cuscinetti
I
Smorjning
Motorerna har sparkullager med tv~ tackbrickor (2ZC3 utforande) och permanentsmdrjning. Det fria utrymmet mellan tackbrickorna skall fyllas med smorjfett till 30 40 0/o.Fettyper enl. Fig. 2. Rullninqslaqer skall installers och tas av med Iamr.)lia utrust.-
va
ad es. .. +60 Grasso sec. DIN 51825K3N Grasso sec. DIN 51502KH3R UNIREX N3della Esso
Motor i isolermaterialklass enl. VDE 0530 B eller F
Motorkylmedlets temp.
===__l
T. ex. Smorifett DIN 5~825 K3N Smorjfett DIN 51502KH3R UNIREX N3 (Esso)
20.
20.
.. +60
+
I
eller I H H Iagreiin
hogre
20
+ 60
Secondo caz!one superata
vedi tarqhetta elo targa di Iubrificazione
20
an 60
in formazloni avute dal fornltore, la lubrlfl prova di marcta B sec DIN 51806 e slata ad una temperature dti + 160 C
Fig. 2 Smorjmedel
Tlllverkarens v~d provn#ng
uppglft Kbrtest B enl stemperatur + 160 C
DIN 51806
klarat
11
..
-.
.-
-.
..
.-.
...
Normteiie
Im freien
sind nach Abmessung, Handel zu beziehen.
Werkstoff
und Oberflache
Standard commercially available parts are to repurchased in accordance with the specified dimensions, materials and surface finish, Las piezas homologadas indicando dimensioned, Standarddetaljer yta kan erh~llas med i Lippna pueden adquirirse material y superficie, dnskade handeln. dimensioned, en el mercado
Les PibCt?S normaiisbes peuvent ~tre obtenues clans Ie commerce dapr~s leurs dimensions, Ie mat&iau et Ietat de surface. Le parti di ricambio riali e superficie sono
438 448 518 536 548 \ 147 579 578 588 DIN 128 Q 587 DIN 7981
normalizzate
reperibili
circa dimension, in commercio.
mate-
material
och
\
56600 $ * -11 0 OIN 48320 f31. 4 \
I 49 4 39 629 7 49 +. DIN 933 . @ / t
1 60 610
DIN 625
i:
50D1N7g85
576 N46288 a
Lagertyp. Type of bear!ng TvDe de roulemenl T;po de coltnete TIPO dl cuscinelto Lagertyp
m Q
,.. @@i
i. d.
1 48 DIN 6912 0 ,1 I
554 56700
DIN 46320
552
42
409 N 7343 &
,.
** -*
~le~~
s~,t~ 8
8 8
slehe
Seite 9
,, ~~e On page . . ~i~ p~ge 8
00 see on page 9
w= en la m9jna veal, a Pag Ifla B se pa ~,d 8
00 00 00
~
vo, r page
vease en la pagina vedi a pagina 9 se pa sid. 9
Fuflloch erm Ogllcht menkastenanordnung Hole In foot with Iermlnal
90 S-Anbaumaf3e links
be, Klein -
permlt$ 90S mounbng d!menstons box arranged on the left.
Le trou dembase permet Ies totes de f!xatlon 90 S quand la boite a bornes est d,spos~e a gauche El taladro en la pata poslblltta el moniaje $egun Ias medidas 90 S cuando la ca)a de bornes se encuentra en el Iado izquierdo Nei motori d~ grandezza 90S con cassetta morsetti disposta a sintstra, I fort net pledlni permettono II r!spetto delle distanze normallzzate Genom h~let I foten erhMles anslutningsl~dan ar monlerad 90 S-mAtt nhr PA vanster sada.
10
Anschlufi e(nes etnzelnen Le!ters mu! Klemmbugel Connec[lng a slngleconductor with a terminal CIIP Raccordement Conducteur etrler seul dun une borne a
I Bel Anschlufi mll DIN- Kabel I schuh ISI aeser nach ume abzuwlnkeln!
Anschlu13 von glelch alcken Klemmbugel
zweb Leltern
etwa mlt
IMA5,
1MF5
In EEx e-llusfuhrung
Kiemrnenkasten
I
I
If connections are made DIN cable lugs, bend cable lugs downwards Lorsque Ie raccoraement
w!th the est
Connecllng two conductors of alm OSt equal Ihlckness wtth a terminal clip Raccordement de deux conducteurs de d,ametres equivalents a une borne a etrler Conexldn de dos conductors cle d\ametro aprOxl mada men!e Igual, con un eslrlbo Allaccl amentodldueconduf tort dl stesso o pressocch~ lndentlco spessore con mor setto dl serragg lo. Anslutning av tv~ ungefar hka t)ocka Iedare med klambygel
I {::!::::e:::::;:::5:::s I Ie b,, SI la c0nex16n se efectua con terminates para cables DIN, I ha bra que do blarlos hacla abalo
Conexlon deunsoloconduc [or con un estribo
Termlnal box In EEx e design Boite A bornes in ex~ctitlon EEx e Caja de bornes de ia ejecucibn EEx e Cassetta mordata ~n esecz~one EEx e Anslutnlngslada ! explcsionsskvdaat utfora:ioe 5.89 F
i:% :
Allacclamento 10 condullore serragglo
dl ognl slngOcon morsetto al
Anslutnlng av en enkelleaare med klambygel.
Nel collegamento con caPo: cords con forme alle norme DIN, questo va pjegato verso II basso Vld anslutning enl DIN skall I nedat med kabelsko Oenna bockas
-...
5.18 5.79 5,78 . 5.!0 5.49 5.48 .. 5.71 5.45 5.70 .
. . 4
Fig. 3
Anschlufl Connecting mnes elnzelnen dun seul Lelters conducleur unter under au13erem the outer Erduwgswlnkel earthing angle de a
, /,
h @@
,1
5.53 5.54 5.52
a single
conductor
5.44
Raccordement mlse a la terre Conex\On t,erra.
a une ~querre
exter!eure puesta
1
bajo elangular conduttore under extern sotto exterlorde angolare d\ ognl slngolo d, messa
de un solo conductor
Allacc, amento a terra esterno Anslutnlng
av en enkelledare
,ordn\ngsvinkel
Fig. 4 00 Nur TeIle

aus elektrsch mcht Ieltendem Maler, al anordnen 00 Use only parls of electrically non conductive material ~ Ne poser que des pieces en ma[erlau non conducteur du couranl ~ Usar solo plezas de material no conduclor W) Imp!egare solo pezzl d, materale non conduttore 90 Endasl delar I elektl!skt el Iedande malerml BG 8G BG BG 13G BG = = = = = = Baugrofie Frame sze Des carcasse Tamafio construcllvo Grandezza Utformgssforlek
1LA5, 1LP5, 1PP5 1LA9, 1LP9, 1PP9

Klemmenkasten In Normal ausfuhrung Terrnmal box ,. standard ales, gn Boite a bornes en execut!on normale de la ejecuc!bn normal Caja de bornes Casselta montata In esecuz, one normale An9ulnlngs15da In normall utforande
1.49 1.48 1.47
(BG
56)
~,.., . ,.-4 . . ...$~,;s:: . _ .-3 .* ~~ 5,10 k.%-
5,::7 ~ ,, u > -: :Y y7,49** ,. ~lehe Sel(e 8
(BG 71/80/90) (BG 63) .+ s 8 1 % \ ..,~,
,. q
1.49
W(l
I/5%. M@) ,
aii
4.090 .,&+ 749** ,*+ ~ ~
* vi3ase en la pagina ** vedl a pagina 8 ** se pa ~,d 8
-Y /
7.40** I
G Be, Baugrot3en 90 S/90 L gegenuberllegend C lnthecase ofirame slzes90S190Lon opposite side C Dlam6tralement opposes clans Ie cas des designations de carcasse 90 S et 90 L O En IOS tamaiios 90 S/90 L enlrenle Inotorldeltegradezze 90 S/90 L SI tmva dalta oarle ODn Osta S/901
cW
A%z?Y
O ~ld .tformgs~torlekar90 pa vardera slda
IMB5 w
1.40A . \y#&>
,9
>
..
v
g~> J J !l._ ~:.
A LagersChild A EndShield, L Flasgue,
tellwelse w)th spring au besoln
ml! e!ngelegtem band lame II 61/6.111 elastique elastlca avec
Federband where [1 6116.111 parclalmente elashco (1 61/6
(1 61/6
11)
reqwred colocada fnsento 11)
-.
A Escudo portacollnete?. (1 61/611) e . -.- /<4 + -4.31 38 4.39 I A Scudo dl suoDorto 61/6.11) A Lagerskold delws
con clnta In Darfe con
(1
un nastro
med
lnlagt
fjaderband
In condlzionl normali di funzionamento, il grasso dei cuscinetti dura peralcunl anni. Se Iesercizio Iopermette, dopo200000re dl funztonamento, comunque al piu tardi dope 3 anni, si dovranno pulire dal grasso i vani e sostituire i cusclnetti dei motori aventl una velocit~ max. di 3600 giri/min. II reingrassaggio non 6 attuabile. II grasso dei nuov! cuscinetti deve averedelle caratteristiche qualitative della fig.2 previste dalle norme DIN 51825 eDIN 51502. Grassi speciali perparticolari condizioni difunzionamento sono Indicati o sono da indicare sulla targhetta o accanto ad essa Se anche i vanl adiacenti vanno riempiti dl grasso (per es. nello scudo di supporto per la tenuta SUI foro passante dellalbero, vanl che normal mente vanno riempiti per 2/3), la qualit~ di grasso deve essere quells usata per t cusclnetti. Si dovr~ evi tare dl miscelare grassl dl qualit~ dwerse. In occasione dells sostituzione dei cuscinetti ~ raccomanda bile sostituire anche gll elementi di tenuta soggetti ad usura (per es. Ianello radlale di tenuta sullalbero). Se gli anelli radiali dl tenuta orlglnali sono stati instailati senza molla, anche quelli sostitultl dovranno essere installati privi di molle. Parti danneggiate devono essere sostituite.
Fettfyllningen i Iagren racker flera ar under normala driftsforhallanden. Om driftsforhallandena S5 medger, bor lagerstalIena i motorer med varvtal upp till 3600 v/rein rengoras och Iagren bytas efter 20000 driftstimmar eller senast 3 ar. Ny fettpafyllning gar ej. Fettet i de nya Iagren m~ste st~mma overens med dekrav enl. DIN 51825 och DIN 51502 som anges i Fig. 2. och ha de ovriga egenskaper som anges dar Specialfetter for speciella driftsvillkor anges pa eller intill markpl~ten.
Om angransande fettkammare far fettpafyllning (t.ex. i lagerskolden for att tata axelhalet - vanligen fyllt till 2/3), sa mAste man dar anvanda samma fettsorter som i Iagret. Blanda inte olika fettsorter! Nar Iagren byts utardet Iampligtatt aven byta ev. befintligaoch nedslitna tatningar (t. ex. radialtatningsri rig). Om radialtatningsringar utan fjadrar ar monterade, SA far inte heller reservdelen vara forsedd med fjader. Byt ut skadade detaljer mot nya.
Herausgegeben Bereich Antriebs-, Elektromotorenwerk Anderungen Sous reserve Con nserva
vom
/ Issued und Bad
by Installationstech a. d. Saale nik / Drives (EWN) Subject Sujeto to change without prior notice and Standard Products Group
Schalt-
Nleustadt
vorbehalten de modifications dl eventuali modiflche
a modificaciones for ~ndringar EWN-Bestell-Nr. /Order No. 610.42 057/21 f Bestell-Ort: EWN Printed in the Federal Republic of Germanv
AG 059740 MA12 De-En -Fr-Sg-lt-Sv
ForbehAll
Siernens
Aktiengesellschaft
I
Fikro de arena para el sistema de sobmpresidn MANTENIMIENTO DE LAS SERIES 408 DYNA VANE
El Iimpiador de aire Dyna Vane se Iimpia autom&icamente y no requiere ei SeWiao rutinario tipico de Ios fiitros de aire que colectan y retienen et polvo extmido de la corriente de aire. No obstante, hay unas pocas operaciones de mantenimiento que tendtin que obsewarse. para extmer el polvo dei aim, no su funadn no Consiste en Al estar la Dyna Vane disefiada extmer residues grandes tales como trapos, hojas o trozos de papel. Debido a que la entrada de tales residues podria obstruir Ios canales de purga de Ias celdas de la Dyna Vane. La admision de aire de la Dyna Vane esti normalmente provista de una pantalla de admision. Hay que maiizar una inspecdon visual periodica para cerciorarse de que esta pantalla de admision esti Iibre de residues gmndes que podrian impedir la {ibre cifwlacion de aire.
mas detallada a intervelos que dependen de Ias Debe realizame una inspeccibn En la mayoria de cases bastati con una vez circunstancias de cada instalaaon en particular. al afio. Durante esta inspection debe controlarse el canal de purga de cada cdda pam ceruomrse de que no se ha taponado con residues gmndes. Al mismo tiempo hay que exammar que no se hayan fonnado depositos en Ios alabes del equipo Dyna Vane. Una Iigem capa de polvo es normal y no seti impediment para el funaonamiento o efkacia de Ios equipos. No obstante, en algunas instalaciones, Ios aiabes de 10s equipos podrAn acumular un deposito m~ denso de suciedad superficial debido a la viscosidad inusual de algun polvo o debido a la presenda de vaho de aceite o wpores simiiares en al aire. En estos cases del deposito de debetin Iimpiarse Ios alabes del equipo. En funaon del tipo y la tenaadad polvo y Ias arcunstancias de la instalaach y Ias pmferenaa del usuario, hay dos formas de Iimpiar Ios ~labes de la Dyna Vane: Un metodo es la Iimpieza in situ cepiilando la superkie de 10 alabes y/o sopiando con sire wmprimido. El Segundo m&odo consiste en retimr completatnente Ios paquetes de Aiabes para Iimpiarios con una solucibn de detergence u otm disoivente adecuado.
Los paquetes de alabes son retirados del iado ascendente de la Dyna Vane despues de haber retirado previamente la pantdla de admision. Los paquetes de alatms son mantenidos que estin atianzadas con barras de fijackh. Despu6s en position por flejes redondeados de soitar ias tuercas que mantienen en position ias barras de fijaaon, gimr Ias barras de fijaaon en 90 y m!timr Ios flejes redondeados. Coger cada uno de Ios paquetes de aiabes y empujarlo haaa delante sadndolo de su unidad. Al vcdver a instalar 10s paquetes de alabes ias superficies extemas de ios hay que cetiomrse de recubrir con una gnasa adecuada canales a Ios que ios Aiabes estAn soidados y ias superfiaes intemas de ios canales dentro de ios cuaies cada paquete de aletas se desiiza. Esta grasa no solo Iubrica para hater mas ticii la inserabn y extmccion sino que tambi6n evita la comosion y sirve como junta para RPM o simiiams de evitar el paso de sire y suaedad. Se mcomienda grasa As-Motive fabrientes de aceite usuales. Obviamente, si la opema6n de Iimpieza es tan severa que tambien eiimina ia pintum de Ios alabes, hay que pmceder a un abundante adarado, secado arnba desaita. Dumnte este inspection el y repintado antes de pmceder a la reinstalacion sistema de purga debeti ser tambien controlado pam cerciomrse que nada ha obstaculizado ei flujo de aire de purga. Si se ha usado un soplantB de purga es necesario comprobar la posibie formation de depc%tos densos en el impulsor, y si fuese necesario limpiarlo tambi%. Comprobar tambidn el apriete de Ias tuercas y tomillos en Ios sopiantes.
-9 . .
Large air volume, constant pressure drop, self-cleaning, high efficiency inertial separator DYNAVANE is a compact, virtually self-cleaning, inertial separator. It is designed to handle large volumes of air at high velocities, while operating at a constant airflow resistance. The DynaVane incorpo-
m3/h) per cell with cornparativelY low resistance. Multiple units can be combined to handle even greater air VOIumes with minimal space requirements.
OPERATION The DynaVane operates on the principle of inertial separation. As the mixture of dust and air enters the DynaVane, most of the air changes direction, separating itself from the dust as it passes through the vanes. Because of its greater mass and inertia, the dust continues in a straight
rates inertial separation, providing high dust removal efficiency of airborne particulate matter. SELF-CLEANING lle DynaVane is normally self+ eaning and does not require routine maintenance, It is designed to provide long, troubl+free service under the most difficult conditions. DynaVane blade packs are removable. This unique feature facilitates thorough inspection or service, if necessary,
EXTENSIVE TESTING under laboratory and field conditions has proven the DynaVane to be one of the most effec-
dary, corrections to DynaVane performance for normal ambient temperature variations is not necessaty. DynaVane blade packs may require perialic cleaning depending on concentration levels and consistency of contaminant, In these instances the blade packs are easily removed for cleaning. Caution should be exercised in the application of the DynaVane when dealing with oily or sticky contaminants. Additional application and performance information
line with 10/0 of the incoming air (the bleed air) through the bleed slot and into the dust bin duct. The dust-laden bleed air may then be discharged directly back to the surrounding atmosphere or into a secondary dust collector. PERFORMANCE - The DynaVanes efficiency is dependent on the size and specific gravity of the dust particles, as well as the air approach velocity and bleed air rate. Large variations in inlet temperature also affect collection efficiency. Normal design condition is for a bleed rate of 10/0 of the inlet airflow (or 11 O/. of the clean airflow) at ambient temperature, and a dust specific gravity of 2.54. Operation of the DynaVane on dusts with different specific gravities and/or at different air temperatures may be investigated via the size correction charts on the following pages. Because temperature effects are secon-
tive high volume air cleaners for use in single and multi-stage filtering systems. It has been demonstrated over many years of application that the DynaVane
inertial separator will perform efficiently in a wide variety of operating conditions. MODULAR ASSEMBLIES Standard, pre+ngineered DynaVane assemblies are available in sizes ranging from one single cell to the modular arrangement of112 cells. The DynaVane operates effectively at volumes of 500 CFM (850 rn3/h) to 2000 CFM (3400
CONSTRUCTION Vanes are computer optimized and individually dieformed, thus, providing superior performance characteristics over stamped louvers. Because of this unique construction method DynaVane achieves the absolute minimum in contaminant penetration, DynaVanes performance is unequaled as a precleaned or as a single-stage system. DynaVane cells and enclosures are fabricated of carbon steel, optional stainless steel or aluminum. The standard DynaVane meets requirements for most applications which operate at continuous temperatures of up to 250 F (121C), For higher temperatures or corrosive atmospheres, the stainless steel option should be considered.
Unique
vane design
makes
DynaVane
inertiai
separators
sumwior
Aire acondicionado
4.6.3
Acondicionador de aire KUTHE
23.01.98
COLLAHUASI
Aire acondicionado
Hoja en blanco
COLLAHUASI
23.01.98
KUTHE EURECO 6
ESPECIFICATION [OWNERS
DE USO
MANUAL)
Acondicionador
de aim para sala de control
OBSERVACIONES SOBRE CONTROL Y REPARATION
1]lnstalaci6n Y montaie
El equipo de aire acondicionado
en la gtia. debe estar correctamente fijada en el soporte situado
11)Instrucciones
qenerales de sewicio
~ Examinar la corrects alimentacion eltica, la tension debe ser de 400 voltios, 50 Hz, trifasica. Examinar todas Ias partes rotativas, motores, ventiladores, poleas, compresor, y cerciorarse de que se puedan mover Iibremente.
2. Instrucciones de funcionamiento Partimos de que todas Ias valvulas estin abiertas y que el cuadro electrico esti desconectado. Valvula AP - retirar la tapa, la valvula se puede girar compietamente, Iuego sakar Iigeramente de su asiento posterior admitiendo presion en el tapon calibrator. Valvula BP - identico funaonamiento que la valvula AP.
Cerrar todos Ios interruptores electricos dentro del cuadro electrico. Cenw el intenuptor principal del circuito. Programar el termostato de la sala a +26 C. y encendido.
Cemar el interruptor
de apagado
El equipo est~ en funcionamiento.
3. Dis~ositivos
de sewridad
Varias unidades de control paran ei equipo en caso de anomalias.
Termostatos de gas caliente: parati et motor del compresor cuando la temperature de la lines de descarga supere Ios 130 C Control de baja pmai6n cuando la baja presion baje por debajo del punto de torte Parar6 e! motor del compresor
programado en el interrupter.
Control de atta presi6n

Parati el motor del compresor
en el interruptor.
cuando la alta presion subs por encima
de{ punto
de torte
programado
Punto de torte Gas refrigerant
programado R22 Conexion 4 bar 15 bar Desconexion 0,5 bar 20 bar
Control de baja presion Control de alta presion
4. Ewuema
de mantenimiento
Control mensual a) Controlar la corrects tension de todas Ias correas b) Limpiar

el filtro de sire reciclado Nota para el mantenimiento para filtros pueden Iimpiar.
El filtro de sire est~ compuesto
de aire de fieltro de VILEDON: de fieltro de VI LEDON del tipo p 15. Tienen
la ventaja
que se
Antes de proceder a la Iimpieza es necesario filtro: polvo seco y polvo graso. Polvo Seco
diferermiar
entre dos tipos de obstruction
del
Limpiar de la siguiente manera: con sire comprimido chorro de agua a ambos Iados del filtro empezando
en sentido
contrario
al flujo de sire o con
por el Iado SUUO.
Polvo graso Sumergir el filtro en una solution
de ... . [sin] esbujar y alisar el fieltro.
Importance
Al Iimpiar o sumergir el filtro de aire hay que evitar estrujar y alisar el fieltro. c) Examinar el evaporizador y mndensador, el polvo en Ios refrigeradores de alabes puede Iimpiarse con aire comprimido, o con un dispensador de Iiquido (SEGELEC) pulverizado. d) Controlar la corrects evacuation de la cubeta de purga, Iimpiarla si fuese necesario. de modo que no se vueivan
e) Contndar el correcto apnete de todos Ios pemos; atomillarlos a soltar.
9 Controlar
la carga de refrigerant con ayuda de una mirilla, la carga insuficiente es indicada por la apancion de burbujas en la mirilla de cristal del indicador cuando et compresor esti en marcha. 5. Controles anuales a) Cambiar la correa en caso de estar agrietada b) Cambiar el filtro de manipulation
o desgastada
de aim y el filtro de aire fresco
c) El sistema cargado con refrigerant debeti probarse para detectar posibles fugas con ayuda de una mezcla de agua y jabon o de un detector electrbnico ode una antorcha de halita. d) Comparar Ias indicaciones del manometro con Ios puntos de cotie no
e) Controlar el correcto fluido ektrico en todos Ios circuitos del moto~ la carga completa deberia sobrepasar la indicada en la placa del motor. Despues de haber realizado todos estos controles, aire acondicionado.
puede volverse a arrancar et equipo de
Ill) Cuadro
de analieis
de anomalias seiiaia Ias fuentes mas frecuentes de anornalias, que se pueden
El siguiente apartado subsanar facilmente.
1. El comrxesor no funciona a) El circuito de control electrico intermptor de AP y BP.
esta abierto, ver todos Ios dispositivos
de seguridad,
b) Controlar que el punto de torte del termostato temperature de la cabina. c) Mimr que todos Ias contactos electricos
de la sala este por encima de la
esten correctos
d) Contm{ar al m16 de sobn?cwga.
2. Anomalias en el sistema de refriaeracion La tecla de control de BP se desconecta: de la a) El termostato sala esta programado a 20 C
demasiado
bajo, temperature
de la sala inferior
b) Nose suministra suficiente aire a trw% del evaporator el polvo si es necesario. Hay que Iimpiar el filtro de aire.
inspeccionar
Ios alabes y soplar
c) Controlar que el fiKro de Iiquido refrigerant no este saturado de humedad; reduce la alimentacion de Iiquido al evapomdor. d) La valvula de expansibn esta averiada
en tal caso Ma
e) Fuga de refrigerant
en el circuito. Localizar la fuga y ca~ar
correctamente.
La tecla de control de AP se desconecta Presion de descarga demasiado fuerte, motivo: a) No se suministm suficiente sire a traves del condensadon el polvo si fuese neoesario. b) El motor del ventilator del condensador no funciona.
inspeccionar
Ios alabes y soplar
Aire acondicionado
4.6.4
Acondicionador de aire ROCA
23.01.98
COLLAHUASI
Aire acondicionado
Hoja en blanco
COLLAHUASI
23.01.98
Acondicionador autonomo refrigerado por aire modelos ASA-I 5 y ASAO/ASAi

Ref.:N-264520696
Information
tecnica
1,
.i -,
72!=
Iirlllll
_
_- ----,- ., ,.
a
:
c ., . < .? . > -.
AENOR
C,. rwwo &. ERFORMANc
EURO
VENT
E?
Empress Rewtrada 1 -v .
J ~ .__.ER42W1/9
Idice Pagina eneralidades Descnpclon general Nomenclature 33 3 Llmites de ut[lizaclon Antes de dar por finalizada la instalacion Pagina 18 18
Instrucciones specificaciones tecnicas 3 3 4 5 5 5 5 5-6 7-8 9-1o Mantenimiento -
de manejo
19 19 19 19 19 19 20
Especlficaclones mecanicas Dates fis!cos Prestaclones nomlnales Condiclones de ensayo Factores de correcclon para Ias capacldades frigorificas Caudales nomlnales Capac\dades fngorificas sensibles Prestaclones ventllador Interior Prestac]ones ventllador exterior
Generalldades Advertencias lmportantes Conse]os para su mejor funcionamtento Termostato ambiente Proceso de puesta en marcha Presostatos
20 20 20 20 20 20 20
strucciones
de instalacion
11 11 11 11 11 12 12 12 12 12 12 13 15 16
Seneralldades roteccion del medlo ambiente Simbolos de awso Transport =mplazamlento ;spacios Iibres :onductos de alre ;onexiones de drenaje 3rientacion de la asplracion y descarga del aire /ariantes a efectuar en obra roceso de transformacibn de descarga horizontal ?n vertical nstalaclon compacta de Ias unidades nstalacion con urudades separadas
Descarga de Ias unldades Interiors con conductos : Limpieza de filtros Limpieza de la unldad exterior Llenado del sifon de desagtie : Verification del tensado de Ias coweas . Acceso a Ias untdades para operaciones de mantenlmiento
Dimensioned
generales
21 -25
Accesorios opcionales modelos ASA Y ASAI -
para ICE acondicionadores 26 27 28 29 30 31
jtalacion electrica ;aracteristicas electrical
17 17
Cuadro de accesorios estandar Bateria de calor para agua caliente Resistencia elbctrica interior AsA-l 5 / ASAI-25, 30 y 45 Resistencia electrica interior ASAI-60 Resistencia eldctrica de conducto RC-24
Generalidades
Description general
Los accnd!c:onaaores modelos ASAy ASAO/1. son unldades alre!alre, con vermiadores centrifugoslanto en el evaporator como ~n el condensador. Cuancio se sumlnlstran en forma comoacta se aenomlnan ASA. Cuando se sum[nlstran de forma partida. en dos unldades prlnclpaies, sedenomman ASAO/1. La uniuadexterlor ASAO, lnc{uye compresor. condensador. ventilator centrifuge y controles. La unidad m[enor ASAI. incluye bateria evaporadora. f;tro y ven[llador. Si es necesarlo puede modlficarse facilmen~e en obra Iaforma estandarde sum[mstro obteniendo una urvdaa DartIda o compacta, La unldac! ex:er]or, puede situarse exterior o Interiormente ya que es;a oro[eqlda para soportar Ias condlclones de amblente ex[erior y a la vez Ios ventlladores son del t!po centrlfugo, por Ic que conductos, Se summstra compietamente equipado y probadc en fabrlca. Esta cilsenado paraconsegulr una Iargavida de funclonamlermo. La puesta en marcha y regulaclon automatic de la temperature se realiza mediante el termostato de ambiente a 24 voltlos. especialmente dlsefiado para esta unidad. Perm!le el acoplamlento en su Interior de baterias, para el caientamler?to ~e alre. med]ante agua caliente o eiectricas.
~C~li~n
con carga de acelte es~eclal que evlta la Iormaclon espuma y con resistencia de calentamlento del aceite.
ae
Resistencia del carter del compresor Mantiene el acelte del carter Caliente para facditar 10s arranques y ewtar et arrastre de aceite fuera del compresor. Baterias De gran superbcie. fabricadas con tubo de cobre y aietas de a!umimo, Situadas en el interior del mueble quedando completamente protegldas contra golpes en el transport o durante su instalaclon. Ventilator exterior (ASA-15) De tipo centrifuge y con motor directamente Ventilator interior (ASA-15 y ASAI-25) Se monta un ventilator centrifuge acclonado indepenciiente y transmission por correas.
acoplado.
por un motor
Ventilator interior (ASAI-30, 45, 60) y exterior (ASAO-25, 30, 60) Se montan dos ventiladores centrifuges con el eje comun y la transmlsion por correas, accionados por un solo motor y acoplados a un plenum tinico. Ventilator exterior (ASAO-45) Se montan dos ventiladores centrifuges inclependientes y acoplados a un plenum unico. Accionados cada uno de ellos por un motor independiente y transmission por correas. Circuito frigorifico Construido con tubo de cobre soldado, provisto de conexiones de acceso en Ios Iados de aHa y baja presion. Refrigerant Esto equipos se suministran preparados para su funcionamiento como unidad compacta. La unidad exterior ASA-15 y Ias unidades ASAO-25 y ASAO45 se suministran con v41vulas y con la totalidad de la carga refrigerant R-22 (Pump down). Las unidades exteriors ASAO-30 y ASAO-60 se suministran sin valvulas, la carga de refrigerant R-22 debe hacerse totalmente en obra. Ver en el capitulo de instrucclones de instalacion, el apartado carga de refrigerante. Las unidades ASAO y ASAI, se suministran con las conexiones previstas para soidar. Esquema I de funcionamiento
UNIDAD INTERIOR iEVAPORADOR) BATERIAS OPCIONALES
Nomenclature 1 Acondicionador
, autonomo Unidad compacta
~ Unidad partida O = Unidad exterior Unidad interior

I I =
I Potencia nominal: ~ 15= 14000W 25 = 21 000W ! 3O=281OOW I 45=l+200rJW ;
60=60000W
-1
I
Voltaje: 22 = 220/240.3.50 38 = 380/415.3.50
Modalidad
de fabrication
FILTRO AIRE AL EXTERIOR
BATERIA
15
22
VENTILATOR
Especificaciones
Especificaciones
tecnicas
mecanicas
COMPRESOR
AIRE DEL EXTERIOR
Compresor De tmo hermetico vertical, montado sobre antivibratonos y ,. motor de reducido consumo. Las unidades ASA-15 y ASAO-25, 30, disponen de un solo compresor, Ias unidades ASAO-45 y60. dlsponen dedoscompresores. Se suministra
RIA I
UNIDAD EXTERIOR (CONDENSADOR)
_~
:
3
,.
%volvente :onstrulaa en ChaDa ae acero alumlnlo-z!ncada, esmaltada :n polvo epoxl pollester para permitir que este sltuaaa en ~xterlores.
Accesorios
Esta prevlsto sltuar Ios accesonos estandar
en el mterlor,
Dates fisicos
Modelo Cantldad Comprescr FO]e~C,a rlonllr,al
Allmen[ac]on S[encla elect rlca
entre la bater!a eva~oradora - Reststenclas. - Baterlas de calor por agua ASAOII-25 1 9.1
y el ventllador:
caliente.
ASA-15 1 kw
V.ph. Hz w V Dh. Hz 640 220/240.1 .50 1 loo mm mm w V ph.Hz 320 240 930 220/240. 1.50 800 mm mm 320 240 1 4x21 318 1 5x32 318 Unldad exterior Neto Unidad mtenor Unidad compacta Unidad exterior Bruto Umdad interior Unldad compacta kg kg kg kg kg kg mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm 2057 1044 930 . 345 315
AsAo/1-30 1 10
ASAOII-45 2 2 X 8,4
3801415.3.50 * 2240 = 1 400
a 2 I
2x 10,2
5,1
220)240,3.50
380415.350 1 472 380/415.3.50 1400 320
rmrmflal electrlca
950 2202403500 1 400 320 320 1 450 220!240 3.500 1400 270 270 1 4x21 318 1 5x37 3/8 305 118
1 472 38014153.50 1400
Altmenlaclcn ~enldaaor nter:or -cm mot~r
Dlame!ro turblnas Ancho turbtnas clencla n,om}nal
320 240 2944 380/415.3.50 1 400 320 320 Ancho turblnas Cantldad Bateria ,ntenor Tubes fondo x alto Dlametro tubes Cantldad Batena exterior Tubes fondo x alto Dlametro tubes 320 1 4x25 318 1 5X40 318 370 160 320 1 4x25 3/8 2+ 6x40 3/8 320 2X2200 380/415.3.50 1 400
= 320 4500 380/415.3.50 1 430 ____._J --..JKJ 380 1 d 4x29 318 I ~ ~
-Wrnentaclon electnca Jentiiador sxlenor mm mo[or Diametro Iurbinas
5x42 3/8
526 190
235
Peso aprox.
340 140
420 190
,64 225
+ 325
-=
1
Al[ura D!menslon. con emba!a)e unldad mtenor Anchura Profundldad Altura
760 1444 930 1404 1444 930
833 833 1825 930 1534 134 4 2270 935 1825 930 2125 930 ----j 2125 930 d 4 2390 955
Dimension, con embaIaje unload : exterior
Anchura Profundldad Altura
Dimension i con emba/ Iaje unldad I compacta
Anchura Profundldad
.-
Prestaciones
IJ. Ex:erior U
nominales
Verao n lntenor CaDaCldad !rlaoniica W a/l 000 21 000 28100 42000 57800 Preson olsDontofe ventllaaor InIerlor Pa 50 62 62 75 80
Correcclon de la temperature real de entrada del a!re a la bateria exterior para caudales diferemes a Ios nomina-
Canstimo 7 000 10000 13400 20000 28100
O Caudal Unldac comcacla ~ ASAO-25

I ( :
70
80
90
100
110
120
130
ASA-15 ASAI-25 ASAI-30 ASAI-45 ASAI-60
1 I
ASAO-30 ASAO-45 ASAO-60
i
{
Correcclon en C sobre ~ la temperature real de I entrada de alre a la I batena exterior
1,5
-1
-2
-2.5
Condiciones
de ensayo
Verano
Caudales
nominales
Volta;e
)
Loncytud :ubos )nterconexlon
Las capacldades frigorificas de la tabla anterior son validas para Ios siguientes caudales:
Temp. mlenor C I
Temp. exterior C TS TH 24
I I
j Modelo Ventilator interior m2/h Ventdador exterior mJ/h
TS 27
TH 19 /
JGO
7 5 melros
35
ASA-15 ~
3280
4300
Factores de correction frigorificas
para Ias capacidades

ASAO/1-25 4725 7650 AsAo/1-30 7500 AsAoll-45 10000 = 13600
Factores de correcclon para caudales diferentes a Ios nominales en la batena intenor.

r
~ Caudal l I Capacldad total ~
80 0,960 0945
90 0,980 0,973 0,990
100 1 1 1
110 1,016 1,038 1)009
120 1,032 i 1,075 1.017
130 4 1.046 I 1,118 j 1,025,
~ AsAoll-60 12560 19000
~. I Pot. absorblda comp. 0.980
Para tabla
otros
caudales,
aplicar
Ios factores
de correction
de la
correspondiente.
Capacidades
Capac!dad Tempera!ura seca alre exterior C (TS) Temperafura humeoa entrada alre CC (TH) Capacldad total Temperature
frigori_ficas
sensible (W/h)
sensibles
Potencla absorblda compresor
seca del a!re de entrada a la bateria C (TS)
Modelo
22 VVlh 16440 14796 13700 15207 13700 12604 13700 12330 11234 W/h 4893 7773 10806 4489 7379 9723 4038 6929 9838
24 W/h 7188 10068 13100 6783 9674 12017 6332 9223 11234
27 W/h
29
h 22 25 19.5 17 10630 13509 13700 10225 13115 12604 9774 12330 11234 12927
4 14796 13700 12519 13700 12604 12068 12330 11234 4,05 4,23 4,37 4,60 4,83 5,06 5,29 5,52
I
22 ASA-15 35 19.5 17 22 45 19,5 17

I
2apacidades
frigorificas
TemperaIura seca alre exterior C (TS)
sensibles
CaDacldaa emDeralura humeda entrada alre C (TH) CaOaclaaa lo:al Temperature 22 W/h 22 25200 22680 21000 23310 21000 19320 21000 18900 17220 35640 32076 29700 32967 29700 27324 29700 26730 24354 48000 43200 40000 44400 40000 36800 40000 36000 32800 64800 58320 54000 59940 54000 49680 54000 48600 44280 W/h 7600 11 521 15680 6967 10905 14107 6262 10203 14172 10708 16443 22514 9817 15578 20288 8826 14589 20392 14279 22735 31637 13099 21586 30257 11782 20271 28814 19662 29237 39432 18017 27641 35362 16187 25819 35525 senslole IWih) C (TS) 29 ---._-l W/h 10735 14656 18815 10 102 ~-l 040 17242 9397 13338 17220 15289 21024 27095 14399 20159 24869 13407 19170 24354 21015 29471 38373 19835 28322 36800 18519 27008 32800 .4 22 27333 36909 47104 25689 35313 43034 23859 33491 43197 38841 48417 54000 37197 46820 49680 .3 22 35367 44999 44280 43039 3 48600 44280 20,82 21,72 , 46524 56102 54000 44869 54000 49680 15,20 15,93 16,65 17,20 18.10 19.01 W/h 15438 19358 21000 14805 18743 19320 14099 18040 17220 22160 27896 29700 21270 27030 27324 20279 26042 24354 31 120 39576 40000 29940 38426 36800 28623 36000 32800 h 18577 22499 21 000 ~ 22 17940 21 000 19320 17234 18900 3 17 22 17220 26748 32076 29700 25851 29700 27324 24860 26730 24354 37864 43200 40000 36676 40000 36800 35359 36000 32800 * 17,93 18,75 19,56 3 3 % 12,36 13,69 14,34 15,00 15.49 * 9,06 9,48 9,79 10,30 10,82 + ~ 17 22 8.24 8,64 9.03 ~ +&-6.91 7,22 ~ I Potencla absorblda compresor ~ ~
seca ael alre de emrada a la balena 24 27
Moaeio
25
19,5 17
ASA/1-25
35
19,5
45
19,5
25
19,5 17 22
35
19,5 17 22
45
19,5 17 22
25
19,5 17 22
ASA/-45
35
19,5 17 22
45
19,5 17
25
19,5 17 22
ASNI-60
35
19,5 17
45
19,5 17
Prestaciones
~ Moae!o
ventilator
interior
Preslon eslallcad)snonmle Pa 0 19,6 39.2 49 58,8 78,4 98 117,6 137,2 155,8 176.4 0 19,6 39.2 49 58,8 78,4 98 1176 137,2 167.6 161,7 149,0 133,3 112,7 98,0 65,7 35,3 9,8 0.0 m~lh Cauaal de are M3,1S Potenc!a absorbida
-1
mm c.d. a. 0 2 4 I 5 6 8 10 I 12 14 16 18 o 2 4 5 ASAI-25 6
w I ,
690 I 655 620 613 595 560 525
3650 3498 3337 3282 3198 3021 2834 2634
1,01 0,97 0,92 0,91 0,88 0,83 0.78
I
I
ASAI-15
073 2379 06 2093 1 813 5281 5058 4860 4723 4653 4399 4130 3885 3577 5250 5500 53 15,2 13.6 \ I 11,5 ASAI-30 10,0 I 6.7 3.6 1,0 I _ 0.0 7500 8000 8500 9000 9200 2,08 2,22 2,36 2,50 2,55 6000 6500 7000 1,66 1,80 :: 1,07 0,99 1,46 0,58 0.50 1,46 1,4 1,35 1,31 1,29
d ~ 415
I
375 1 070
1 005 I 955 920 900
I
I
8
10 12 14
I
+ 740 680
17,1 16.5 I
~ ~ 770 850 ~1 1,94 950 1 050 1 100 1210 1320 1375
! I
I I
~ Nota: (l! Prestaclonescalculadascon baierla humedalncluYendofiltros.
[ I 7
Prestaciones
~ Modelo
ventilator
interior
Preslon estatica dlsDonible [) Pa
m3/h
Caudal de alre
mJ,/~
Potencla absorblda
w
I 1
mm c.d.a. 17,9 17,1 I 16,0

I
175,4 167,6 156.8 137,2 130,3 118.6 98.0 83,3 63,7 42,1 19,6 0,0 155,8 139,1 123,4 107,8 84,2 63,7 38,2 12,7 0,0 fiitros.
7000 7500 8000 8500 9000 9500 10000 10500 11000 11 500 12000 12500 11 500 12000 12500 13000 13500 14000 14500 15000 15200
1,94 2,08 2,22 2,36 2,50 2,64 2,78 2,92 3,05 3,19 3.33 3,47 3,19 3.33 3,47 3,61 3,75 3.89 4.02 4,16 4,22
996 970 1 045 1 100 1 175 1275 1 375 1450
+ -------
14,8 13,3 12,1 ASAI-45 10,0 8,5 6,5 4,3 2,0 0,0 15,9 14,2 12,6 11,0 ASAI-60 8,6 6,5 3,9 1,3 0,0 Nota: (1) Prestaclones calculadas
~ 1700 1802 1970 2004 2139 2240 2408 2535 2732 2843 3000 3150
I
con bateria humeda incluyendo
.
8
Prestacicmes
I.lodec
ventilator
exterior
?reslon eslahca 51sDonlcle Caudal de alre m-lb 3500 3750 4000 4250 4500 4750 5000 5200 5 ~()() 6 coo m~:s 0,97 Potencla amorblda
I
I
1
mm c.d. a. 23.6 21,2 18,5 15.3 ASA.15 12,4 87 5,0

I
Pa 231.3 207.8 181,3 1499 121.5 85.3 49.0 0,0 238.1 219,5 196,0 166,6 137.2 108.8 68,6 35.3 0.0 220,5 217.6 201.9 189,1 177.4 159,7 140,1 122.5 104,8 81,3 60.8 33,3 14,7 0,0
w 1 000
~~ 1,18 1,25 1,32 1,39
+-j 1 200 1270 1 350 1 425 ~ 1550 875 __.1 960
I
1
00 24,3
1.44 1,53 1.66 1,80
I
I
22.4 20,0 17.0
6500 7 000 7500 8000 8500 9000 9500 9280 9500 10000 10500 11000 11 500 12000 12500 13000 13500 14000
050-J 1.94 2,08 2.22 2,36 2,50 2,64 2,58 2.64 2,78 2,92 3,05 94L 16,3 14,3 ASAO-30 12,5 10.7 8,3 6,2 3,47 3,61 3,75 3.19 3,33 2050 1 150 1280 1400 1 530 1 690 1 840 1480 1 500
I ASAO-25 14,0 11,1 7,0 3.6 0,0 L 22.5
I
i \ I
I
I
22,2 20,6 19,3
1 68!___J
1800
18,1
, 2200 + 2250 2490 I
I
1
389 3,4 1,5 0.0 14500 15000 15200 4,03 4,16 4,22
23150
~
3240 I 9
Prestaciones
Moaelo
ventilator
exterior
Preslon esIatlca dlsDonlDle Caudal ae alre m;, h 10000 10500 11 000 11 500 12000 i2 500 13000 13500 14000 14500 15000 15300 17000 17500 18000 18500 19000 19500 20000 20500 21000 583 6.2 4,4 2,4 0,0 60,7 43,1 23,5 0,0 21500 22000 22500 23000 5,97 6,11 6,25 6,39 A 4821 5035 5250 5464 n+!s 2.78 2,92 ~ 198 777 15.7 14,0 194,0 173,5 7153.9 137,2 117,6 93.1 71,5 45,1 12.7 0,0 202.8 191,1 175,4 161,7 146,0 130,3 118,6 99,0 82,3 3.05 3.19 . 33 3.27 3,61 3,75 388 4,03 4,16 ~ 0,0 20,7 19,5 17,9 16,5 14,9 13,3 4,25 4,72 4>86 5,00 5,14 ~ 5,28 5,42 5,55 + 10,1 8,4 5,69 4050
I
PotenclaaDsorbloa w 1 800 1 930 2050 2150 2 320 2480 2660 2830 3000 I 3150 3320 3410 3428 3607 + 3785 3892 ~ I
rnm c.a. a. 22.5 21.4
Pa 220,5 209,7
I I I
ASAO-45
12,0 9,5 7,3 4,6 1,3
4125 4312 I
ASAO-60
12,1
I i
10
... Instrucciones
Generaiidades
forma
de instalacion
Los accndic]onauores mcdelo ASAO/1,se sumlnls:ran ae es[anaar. sormo unldades separadas. Cuando se sumlnlslran como umdades compactas se aenomlnan ASA. STAR conceolcios oara ser instalados con conductos, en [errazas. Ie]ados. mhardillas o sotanos. CuanoG sea recesarlo y en el memento de su instalaclon. estas dcs lJnlaadeS pueden umrse facilmente. con 10 cual queaaran ~ransformadas en un equlpo compacto. Los rmcae!cs ASA- i 5 se sumlnlstrancomo umdad compacta. El ccfi:r~i de la cuesta en marcha. paro y regulaclon de la temoeratura se eiectua ccn el termostato especial a24 V que se s~rmnislra con cada ASAO. unldad exterior, ,-, ,_ Embalaje El em~ala]e es;a compuesto de material recyclable. Su ellmlnaclcn ~ebe efectuarse de acuerdo con Ias normas de recoglda selectwa de res!duos que el munlclpio tenga estableclaas. Elimination del aparato AI ~rcceder a desmonta!e despues de una Iarga viola de nc]onam]ento. debe efecwarse la recuperation ecologica de sus components. El clrculto frigorlfico esta Ileno de refr~gerame t-iCFC-22. que debe recuperarse y final mente entregar al fabrlcante dei gas. para proceder a su reclclaje. En el compresor nermetico quedara acelte, porello, aquel se entregara con el clrcuito sellado. El acond]clonaaor se deposltara en el Iugar donde tengan establecldo Ias autoridades munlcipales, para proceder a su recuperation selechva.
/ .A
I@ /
Atenclon: La umdad tlene control remoto y pueae ponerse en marcha. Dos minutes antes de acceaer al mterlor debe desconectarse la tension de allmentaclon, para evltarcualquier contacto conlaturbinadel ventdador en movlmlento.
Protecci5n
del medio ambiente
:-~~~
\\\ A
Atencion: tes, No tocar Ias superflcles
callen-
Simbolos
de aviso
de que existen condicio10s ususarios o personal proplo aparato tenga en uno de ellos indica.
Los slmbolos slguientes Ie avisan nes poreclalmente pellgrosas para de ser~lclo. Siempre aue !0s ~ncuentre en el cuenta ;as aaverrenclas que cada
(
I
r\ /? .4!!!!!$
Este simbolo Indlca un rlesgo o pellgro de hpo e!ec:r}co.
A ---% A
0
Atencion: Transmlslon por polea y correa. %Atenclon: Poslble escape de gases por una manipuiaclon inadecuada.
Atenclon: Esobllgatorlo leerlasmtrucclones ames de cualquler mampulaclon.
Transport
Las unidades exteriors deben trasladarse siempre en position vertical, con objeto de que el aceite no salga del compresor. Si por alguna razon precisa cambiarse esporadicamente esta poslcion, permanecera en ells solo el tiempo estrictamente necesario. 11
Emplazamiento
El em~lazamlentc. de~e elegirse preveyendo un acceso permaneme ~ara el serwclo ae mantenimlento. blen sea a traves ce IOS paneies Iaterales o panel posterior. La urwcaa exter!or. puede instalarse directamente en exlerlores, SI se Ins:ala en lnteriores. sotanos, buhardillas. etc., deben conectarse IOS conductos de toma de sire del exterior y extracclon.
del slfon (ver figural. Esto es con ob!eto de evitar que la de~reslon proauclda por el ventilator pueda dlficultar el vaclaao de la bandeja. Debe preverse un acceso para que al inlcio ae cada temparada, pueda Ilenarse el sifon con agua. La Iinea de drenaje debe tener una Inclinaclon minima c 2 cm Dor cada metro de Iongitud, Las conexiones del a~arato son de tubo de acero con rosca Interior 3;4 G.
Espacios
Iibres
Debe aejarse en la Instalacion de cada aparato espacio Ilbre para: a) Admlsi6n v descarga de sire de la unldad exterior. b) Conexlon oe ICS tubes de desague y electrlcos,
c) d) e) f) CGr7cuctcs Serwc:o Ac~~e[ida Limpleza ae alre, de rnanientrniento electrica. de ios filtros de ~ire.
l=?
~lSTO F9R PARTE SUPERIOR
orientation aire
de la aspiration
y descarga
del
Las orientaclones estandarde Ias aspiraciones del aire son Ias que se indican en la figura.
y descargas
f A ) LJ
L)ESCARGA (OPCIONALI
ASPIRATION
Conductos
de aire
1 - Conectar Ios conductos, aislandolos del aparato mediante una manga flexible, preferentemente de material no combustible, con objeto de evitarque se puedatransmitir la wbracion propia del aparato. Si Ios conductos estan construidos con materials flexibles, ya no transmiten la vi braclon. 2- Es aconsejable situar un registro en cada derivation del conducto de descarga para poder efectuar un correcto balance del sistema. 3- Prever un facil accesopara la Iimpieza ysustitucion de Ios filtros de aire. 4- En Ias unidades ASAO-45 deben instalarse, dos conductos independientes, uno para cada ventilator hasta la descarga, para evitar la reclrculacion de aire.
ID0 c
II 1,
m
m
DESCARGA
7
II ,1 ,1 ,1 ,1 1
DESCARGA
ASPIRATION
Conexiones
de drenaje
Instalar Ias tuberias de drenaje de cada bandeja a traves de un sifon. Dejar una diferencia minima de niveles de 75 mm entre la altura de la conexibn del aparato y la Iinea despues
12 .- =. ..___
Variantes a efectuar en obra Si Ias condiciones de la instalacion 10requieren, la descar~ti

del ventilator interior (unidad superior) puede variarse facil J mente en obra, para descarga en sentido vertical.
Proceso de transformation zontal en vertical

ics
de descarga
hori-
(Unidades ASAI-25. 30,45 y unidad superior del ASA-15) 1 - Guitar tornlllos ae fi]aclon de Ias tapas Iaterales 1 y 2 de !a unldad superior. 2- Sacar Ias tapas Iaterales 1 y 2. 3- Aflo/ar ios tomillos que tijan el motor de acclonamlento del ventllador a su base. y quitar la correa de transmlslon. 4- A traves de ios accesos Iaterales desatornlllar Ios paneOrientation estandar
Ies 3 y 4, segun se indica en la figura de orientation estandar, Desatornlllar la fijacibn del Ventliador al soporte 5. ~ ~ Colocar el panel 3 en la antigua Doslclon del panel 4, y colocar el panel 4 en la antigua poslclon ael panel 3. 7- PJornlllar nuevamente Ios paneles y el ventilator al soporte 5. 8- Colocar nuevamente la correa de transmission y fijar el motor a su base. 9- Atornillar Ias tapas Iaterales 1 y 2.
Orientation variante en obra
TORNILLOS FIJACION ,)
DE
=7-*
-IN
0-
I )
4
.,,
\ !
1
13
Unidad
ASAI-60
~reclsa un kit de transformation que Incluve:
El As,41-f30
oanel Doslerlor y supermr, correas. poleas motor y ventila~or, 1 - Desmontar Ios paneles superior, posterior y Iaterales es~anaar asl como Ios vermladores y onentarlos tal como indica e! dibu]o. fljandolos al panel superlorad]unto con el kit de transformaclon.
2- Una vez mantaaos Ios ventlladores fijar el panel superior ref. 1 a la unlaad. 3- Fijarlos angulos Iados Izauierdoylado derechoventilador ref. 3 a la unldad. 4- Sustttu[r Doleas motor, ventilator y correas ref. 2 por Ias adjuntas en el kit. 5- Montar el panel posterior ref. 4, 6- Por tiltimo, montar Ios paneles Iaterales estandar.
\ \ \
14
Instalacion
compacta
de Ias unidades
Las unldades se summistran preparadas para ser conectadas ir]gorlfica y electncamente. Para lnstalar Ias unidades, como un sistema compacto, deberan unlrse Ias unldades exterior ASAO e lnterlor ASAl, a traves de Ios agu]eros previstos en ambas unldades, Jtilizando para ello 10s torntllos que se suminlstran en una bolsa sltuada en el interior. del cuadro elecirlco en el ASAO60 y en la unidad interior en Ios ASAI-25, 30 y 45.
Vaivulas y carga de refrigerant La unidad interior y exterior se sumlnistran con Ias conexioInes de Ios clrcu]tos frlgorlficos prewslas para soldar y ser urudas entre si por el exterior del mueble. Las unidades ASA-15 y ASAO/1-25 ctisponen de un solo clrcuito y se suministran con dos valvulas. La unidad ASAO/1-45 dispone de dos circuitos y se suministra con cuatro valvulas. De fabrica estas valvulas se sumimstran cerradas y con la totalidad del refrigerant en la unidad exterior (Pump down). Antes de la puesta en marcha asegurarse que Ias vaivulas esten completamente abiertas. La unidad ASAO/1-30 dispone de un circulto, la unidad ASAO/1-60 dispone de dos cicuitos. Estas unidades se summistran sinvalvulas, Iacargade refrigerant debe hacerse totaimente en obra. Vaciado y deshidratado El aire no acttiacomo refrigerant debido a que no puede ser licuado por el compresor. El aire y la humedad que permanezcan en el slstema de refrigeration tienen efectos indeseables, tal como se indica en la Iista inferior. Consecuentamente, deben ser eliminados completamente. Aumenta la presion de alta. Aumenta la corriente consumida. Desclende el rendimiento del equipo. El agua contenida en el aire puede congelarse y bloquear 10s capilares. El agua puede provocar la corrosion de algunas partes del circuito y el deterioro del compresor. k! vaciado y deshidratado debe hacerse mediante una bombs de vacio. El vacio necesano es de 200 micrones (0,2 mm Hg). La conexion de la bombs de vacio al circuito frigorifico, debe
T2RNILLQ DE = .ACICN PANEL ,< +~%q ,,, .~
-,--
TORN ILLOS FiJACION UNIDADES SUPERIOR E INFERIOR (DOS A CADA LADO)
UNIDAD SUPERIOR (INTERIOR)
E~ ...,jjm> i!
~ ExTERIOR) i
Ii
UNIDAD INFERIOR
I Detalle valvulas
ASA-15
CONEXION PARA LA BOMBA DE VACIO VALVULA ROTALOCK UNIDAD INTERIOR
CONEXIONES PREVISTAS PARA LA BOMBA DE VACIO I
CONEXION PARA LA BOMBA DE VACIO
VA LVULA ROTALOCK UNIOAD EXTERIOR
VASTAGO HACIA ABAJO POSICION ABIE17TA
!!!!
ENLACE SUPERIOR ROSCADO LINEA DE GAS UNIDAD EXTERIOR
Notas: (I)
Las flecnas mdman la poslclon de abierlo. La poslclon de apertura maxima es con el vastago mas bajo.
15
..
.._. ..
hacerse en Ias conexlones de 1/4 SAE previstas a tal efecto. y con Ias valvulas cerraaas. Ello permltlra el vaclado y deshidratado de Ios tubes de Interconexion y de la unldad evaporadora. La unldad ASA-15 y Ias umdades exteriors ASAO-25 y ASAO-45, se sumlmstran cargadas con el refrigerant (R-22) y no necesitan vaclado, Deteccion de fugas La deteccion de fugas en el circuito unidades se hara utllizando refrigerate ~n detector. Instalacion con unidades
tenor que podrian provocar contamlnaclon y obstrucclones. 7- Paralasunlones cobre-cobre nodebeuuilzarse cecapante, Diametro de Ias tuberias de interconexion
Glametro Ihnea de gas (tubena anct?a) L
I I
D,ametro l,nea Ilquldo (Iubena eslrecha) 3/6 (9,52 mm) !
de union de Ias dos R-22 ycon auxilio de
~ASA-15
7/8 (22,2 mm)
~ ASAOII-25
y 45 1j (28.5 mm)
1.2 (12,7 m,m)

1
separadas
AsAO/1-30
y 60
58(1587
mm)
Separation entre unidades La Iong!tud de Ios tubes de mterconexlon debe ser la minima ooslble. Las distanclas maxlmas admisibles con el circuito y diame:ros de tubes estandar son: Long.total de Ias [uberlas m 20 Desnlvelmaxlmo entre unidades m 10
Carga de refrigerant La carga nominal indicada en la slgulente tabla esta prevlsta para funclonar como una urudad compacta. Cuando se instale como sistema partido, debera incrementarse, en cada clrculto, la carga de refrigerant en funclon de la longltud de] tubo de Iiquido.
Carga nominal R-22 kg 4,45 Numero de clrcutos 1 Dlametro linea Iiqu}do 38(9,52mm) Carga , ad]clonal [Dor metro) ~ I 56 grs.
Modelo
Para longitudes supenores debe hacerse la instalacibn con un proyecto prevlo que debe ser aprobado por nuestro serviclo tecnico. Este proyecto puede precisar alguna de Ias siguientes modiflcaciones: - Dimenslones de Ias tuberias. - Carga de refrlgerante. - Sifones de succion, - Acumulador de succion. - Valvula solenolde de Iiquido. En estos cases Ias longitudes maximas que pueden recomendarse son:
ASA-15
2(27mm 5/8 (l5,87mm)
= 170 grs.
w c AsAo/1-60 6X2 7x2 2 2 2(27mm) 5/8(l5,87mm) q 04gr 170 grs.
Vaciado y deshidratado El aire no actuacomo refrigerant debido a que no puede ser TIpo de mstalaclon j Iicuado por el compresor. El aire y la humedad que permanezcan en el sistema de refrigeraclon tienen efectos indem 50 Umdades al mlsmo nlvet Iongltud maxima ~ seables, tal como se tndica en la Iista inferior, Consecuenramente, deben ser eliminados completamente. Urudad exterior. mstalada a un nivel mas alto que m 50 \ - Aumenta la presion de alta. ~ la unload interior. Longltud y desmvel maxtmo - Aumenta la corriente consumida. Umdad exterior, Instalada a mas bajo revel que - Desciende el rendimiento del equipo. m 15 la unldad Intenor. LongNud y desnlvel maximo + - El agua contenida en el aire puede congelarse y bloquear 10s capilares. Interconexiones frigorificas - El agua puede provocar la corrosion de algunas partes del Para la realizaclon de Ias tuberias que unen Ias dos unidacircuito y el deterioro del compresor. des, debe tenerse especial cuidado en que Ios tubes a utilizar El vaciado y deshidratado debe hacerse mediante una bomse mantengan Iimpios y secos ya antes de su instalacion. Las bs de vacio. recomendaciones siguientes dan unas orientaciones que El vacio necesario es de 200 micrones (0,2 mm Hg). aconse]amos tener en cuenta: La conexion de la bombs de vacio al circuito frigorifico, debe 1 - Utilizar solo tubo de cobre de calidad frigorifica. hacerse en Ias conexiones de 1/4 SAE previstas y con Ias 2- No efectuar trabajos en el exterior si esta Iloviendo. valvulas cerradas. 3- Los extremes de Ios tubes deben permanecer cerrados Ello permitira el vaciado y deshidratado de Ios tubes de mientras dure la instalacion. interconexion y de la unidad evaporadora. 4- No dejar abiertos al ambiente Ios filtros secadores ni el La unidad condensadora, se suministra cargada con el compresor mas de uno o dos minutes. refrigerant y no neceslta vaclado. 5- Para soldar, utilizar varillas de bajo punto de fusion que Deteccion de fugas contengan un minimo de 5/0 de plata. La deteccion de fugas en el circuito de union de Ias dos 6- Durante la soldadura, y mientras que el tubo permanezca unidades se hara utilizando refrigerant R-22 y con auxilio de caliente, debe mantenerse una corriente de nitrogeno sed un detector. co para evitar la formation de oxidos y cascarilla en el in16
.. ...
.. . .
-..
Unidades (proceso .1234567.
sin vaivulas, con conexiones para soldar de carga para ASAO/1-30 y ASAO&60) ~@3resurlzar ias uniaades.
ei e!ricjerante.
Instalacion
a la que
electrica
+aciar
racer un oarrldo con n:trogeno seco. soldar Ias tuberias con ambiente ae nltrogeno seco en ei Imerlor de Ios tubes. Para solazr, utlitzarvarlllas de bajo punto ae fusion que con[er?gan un mlnlmo del 5: de plata. Llenarcon 2 kg de refrigerant R-22 para detectarfugas. Vac:ar e! refrigerant.
Cada aconulc!onador se sumlnistra con una caja de control, se Ie conectara la Ienslon a traves de un interruptor generai con fuslbies o Interrupter autom~tico. La reslstencla electrlca. SI la hubiera, debe Instalarse con Ifnea de rea e InterruptOres inaepenciientes de Ios de alimentaclon del acondiclonador. Deben segulrse en tcdo caso Ias reglamentaciones Nacionales establecidas.
un barndo con nl!rogeno seco. 8- Hater 9- Hater el vacio. t?asla 200 mlcrones. 10- Carqar el retngerante. utllizando bascula o cllindro call~rado. La r)reclslon ae la carga Uebe serde 30 gramos. La Lmda~ exterior tene prevls[as. en Ias salidas de Ias conexlones. :omasae r3reslon ytemperatura para iaverltlcac:on de soDrecaientamiento [Superheat) sub-e nfrlamlento (Sub-coollng) Comprobar que estos valores scan del orden de 5 C.
Aislamiento tubes y valvulas Las tu~erlas de la Interconexlon de refrigerant deben alsIarse. El alslante aebe poseer unas caracteristicas determlnadas: serfacll de lnstalar. reslstente al envejecimlento, hidrofugoe Ignifugo y tener un esoesor minlmo de 12 mm. Para evdarque el sol detenore el alslante. conwene pintarlo con esmalte ai agua. Para el alsiamiento de Ias valvulas en la unldad ASA-15, se suministra una clnta de espuma autoadheswa que debe apllcarse en otra una vez terminada la instalacion. )
Los cables sue!tos pueclen produclr un sobrecalentamlento de Ios terminates o un funclonamlento Incorreclo de la unldad. Tambien puede exls!lr et Dellgro ae :ncenalo, Por 10 tanto asegurese de que Ioaos Ios caoles eslen fuertemente coneclados
I
1
,/ ,$!!!!!$
~i
!
q
Desoues ae haber aislado c1 tube. no Iratar nunca de doblarlo exceslvamen~e oorque este podrla agne!arse o romperse.
No summlstre a]lmen[aclon a la unldad nl la haga funclonar hasta que se hayan [erm\nado de conectar Ios rubos y Ias conexlanes electncas. Aseaurese aue conecta correctamente la alimen!aclon electnca en Ias unldades [al como puede verse en Ios diagramas electncos.
Caractensticas
Alimentac)on Modelo Compresor Ext
I
electrical
1
V.ph. Hz. Ventllador Int Arran. 110 52 183 !30 170 100 2x91 2x 100 Compresor Nommal 13,3 7,7 22.8 13,2 28.5 165 2x 12.5 2 x16.5
Consumo
A Ventllador ]ntenor Ventllador exterior Arran. 14 14 23 10 31 25 2x13 80 Nommal 5,2 5,2 5,2 3 6,6 3.8 2x3 13 Secclon Interrupter cables de automaailment. !Ico mm 6 A 4 10 6 3 16 10 16 25 --J --A 40 32 50 32 80
Maximo 17,5 10,1 34.5 20 33 19 2x 14.5 2x19
Arran. 9 5
14
Nommal 2.6 15 5.2 2 4,7 27 3.5 7,1
220/240.3 ASA-15
50
220/240.3.50 380i41 5.3.50 220/240.3 50 380/415.3.50 220/240.3.50 380/4 153.50 380~415.3.50 380/415.3.50
380/41 5.350 220!240.3.50 ASAOII-25 380/4 15.350 2201240.3.50 ~ ASAOII-30 380/41 53.50 AsAo/i-45 ASAOII-60 380/41 53.50 380/415.3.50
7 23 10 10 25
--j
63 100 ; 17
~mites de utilization
nvres ae ~Joltale
Temperature entmda evaporator C alre TemDeraIura entraaa conaensaaor C alre
I_
Nom.
22 C243
Nam.
380!415
Temperature
Tti
Tempera!
lura 7S
Temperature
TS
I
,l]nmc
J3x)mo
t.~tnlmo
tdax]mc
~~jnlmo
Maxima
fdlnlmo
Maximo
Jlnlmo
Maxlmo
1Q8
~j.j
3<2
436
-4
2s
19
32
19
46
Notas:
Td
7:rmc~e[ro
rumeao
TS
Terrnome!ro
seco
rites de dar por finaiizada
la instalacion
A
4 / 00 t
Verificar: - El voltaie esta siemtxe entre 198- 254 V0342-436V. - La seccion de Ios cables de alimentacion es. como minimo, la aconsejada en Ios esquemaselectricos correspondientes.
/ ,/ (A
- El desague de condensados se realiza perfectamente y no hay fugas en el circuito de agua.
o
8
.: ,.. . A % A
.-: ,,: ~., . . .
Se ha informado de la necesidad de la Iimpieza periodlca del filtro de alre.
Se ha cumplimentado tarjeta de garantia. Se han dado instruccionesde mantenimiento o efectuado contrato de revision periodica.
- Se han dado instrucciones usuario para su manejo.
al
.-
Instrucciones
Generaiidades
La pues[a
ramra Sltuar sue!o en marcha
de manejo
v regulaclon au[ome.tlca de la !emDe-
Termostato
para ASA-15,
ASAO/1-25 y 30
se realiza e! ?ermostalo donde
mediante
el termcslato
ambiente. del nwel del

r %.
a 1.5 m aproxlmaclamente obstaculo
nlngun
Ie prive de acusar la tempe-
rature real ae la habltacion.
Advertencias
importances
El termostato debe situarse en una pared que no este ex~uesta a Ios rayos directos del sol. en este case. Ias
temDeraturas cuado. no serlan reales. y et funclonamlento inadePALANCA A
Antes de la puesta en marcha, conectar el lnterruptor general con Objeto de que quede conectada la reslstencia e!ec{rlca dei carter ael compresor. Nodebeponerse enmarchael compresorhasta pasadas
un mlnimo
Esio hublese es para
AN. W 10
./.
:5
20
q 25
30 Or ::
.u~o~
de echo
que el con
horas.
refrlgeran[e el aceite en del forma compresor de Iiquido que se evapore.
mezclado
I
PALANCA <B,) I\
.A
/ /
Termostato
para ASAO/1-45
y 60
PRECAUTION ]
?
q
//
10 1520 25 Il. !,,lO,,,l. !,,,01111 //
, I
ALILIENTAC:ON ELECTRICA
Conexlon: Para calentar el sistema, la allmentaclon electnca debe conectarse como mlmmo 8 horas, antes de poner en funclonamlentoel acondlclonador. Deje la allmentaclon conectada, a menos que no utlllce el acondlclonador duran[e Iargos penodos de t!empo.
a
v, ON
-.. .<. ... --., ,

PALANCA A PALANCA W
. 1
f b
Proceso
de puesta
en marcha
Consejos para su mejor funcionamiento - Ponga en marcha el aparato antes de que la estancia a
El calor que se acumula en el etc., hate que el equipo tarde mas en conseguir la temperature deseada. - Es aconsejable inspecclonar y poner a punto su equipo cuando no 10 precise. de esta forma evitara averias y asegurara una Iarga duration a su acondicionador.
este caliente. mobtliarlo. paredes.
acondlcionar
Termostato ambiente Caracteristicas:

a)
Tension de maniobra 24V. Intenslaad admlslble 2 A. c) Con un Imerruptor para el funclonamiento de COOLOFF-HEAT (Frio, Pare, Calor) y otro para el venhlador, con Ias poslciones de AUTO-ON (Automatico-Continuo). a) Con ant!clpador de frio y anticipator de calor ajustable entre 0,1 y 1.2 A. e) Con termometro bimetal.
b)
Conectar [as Iineas principal y tierra en Ias regletas previstas en la caja de controles. Conectar la Iinea del termostato ambiente a 24V en la regleta prevista en la caja de controles, Una vez instalado el equipo, habiendo tenido en cuenta Ias instrucciones dadas anteriormente y hechas Ias comprobaciones conveniences, se podra proceder a su puesta en marcha. Para ello se actuara sobre el termostato. a) Para ventilation soiamente: Palanca A en position ON. Palanca B en position OFF, Dial en cualquier position. b) Acondicionamiento estival: Palanca A en position ON o AUTO. Palanca B en position COOL. Dial con el indite en la temperature deseada. invernal: c) Acondicionamiento (Con baterias de calor) Palanca A en position ON o AUTO. Paianca B en position HEAT. Dial con el indite en la temperature deseada. 19
no funclona. Cuando >;a DosIcIcn 0~~. el qrupofnqorifico palanca A esta en ~a position ON. soIo funclona el ntllador, En la poslclon COOL o HEAT y AUTO, el con el compresor o ntllador arranca slmultaneamente ;Islencla eleclnca SI esia Incorporada (de acuerao con el ice ae! [ermcsIato v la temperature de la nabltaclon). El Jpo esla comp!etamente parado cuando ia palanca A esta posiclon AUTO y la palance. B en poslcion OFF.
necesaria.
con
q esostafos
acondlc:onaaor esta equlpado con un ~resosiato en el cwto de a[ta. que ac?~a oor exceso de preslon y otro en el ba]a, que acttia oor defecto. Cuanao uno de Ios presostatos alsc)ara. ;ste a~re ei circulto de control y ciehene ei ~,n[es de proceder ai rearme cel presostalo ~oresor.
respor. aien[e. cebe desconectarse la anomalia el compresor median ?I termos!ato y soluclonar
,, / A
cep Il10.
asplrador
o detergence
IEEw!4
I
q
Do- mot, vos ae segundad. asegurese de parar el acondlclamdm de alre, y desconectarlo lamblen ae la red antes de reahzar su hrnp!eza.
que haya producldo

la Iengtieta en Ias del posuones resorte ae
~ ComprueDe oenodlcarnente la umdad ex[enor Dara ver s la sallda o
oreslon anormal. ~ra ccneciar nuevamente, apretar ! presos[z.to v sltuar el termostato

Icjonamle-to.
I
I
:antenimiento
npIe
la en$~olvenle con una aspiradora.

con ae!ergente Iiqulcio suave.
o con pafio hume-
cido
la entracla ae alre estan obstruldas con sucledaa u halas, elc, ~ El serpermn interno y otros components de la unldad exterior cleoerlan Ihmplarse tamb!en penodicamenle. Pongase en contacto con su conceslonano o senma de manten[mlento.
Llenado
del sifon de desague
Para evitar problemas con el agua de condensation, recomendamos que en la puesta en marcha y previamente al inicio de cada temporada. se Ilene el sifon del desagtie con agua, para evitar desde el principio el que pueda aspirarse aire a traves de este tube,
ICI vlerta agua sobre la urvdad Dara hmpiarla. El agua podna danar IOS I Internos y ser la causa de descargas electncas.
omponen!es
Verification del tensado de Ias correas Cada aito debe verificarse el tensado y desgaste
escarga de !as unidades interiors con conUctos I descarga de Ias unldades interiors previstas para con~ctos, se sumlmstran
alicen t~reas de .entuallclad.
de Ias correas de Ios motores, y cambiarlas si es necesario. Antes de hater esta verlficacion desconectar el interruptor general de alimentacion,
sin rejilla de protection.

tener en
Cuando se
cuenta esta
mantenlmlento,
Por motlvos de segundad asegtirese de parar el acondlcionador de atre, y desconectarlo tamblen de la red antes de realizarla verification de Ias correas del motor-ventdador.
En el caso ae Instalar
cara conductos debe
con descarga prote]erse
IIbre una umdad
mtenor
prewsta
Acceso a Ias unidades mantenimiento
para operaciones
de
la boca de salida con una rejllla. No colocar es[a protecclon po~rla provocar darios ocaslonadospor la !urbmadel venttlador.
impieza
de filtros
a.ntener Ios filtros de Ias baterias en buen estado. revisarlos ]mo minlmo cada roes. Si Iosfiltros estan sucios reducen el ~jo del aire y el rendimiento del equipo.
impieza de la unidad exterior o debe permttirse que se acumule suciedad en la bateria

derior. Esta debe Iimpiarse con la frecuencia que sea
Atencion: La umdad tiene control remoto y puede ponerse en marcha. Dos mlnutos antes de acceder al interior debe desconectarse la tension de alimentaclon, para evitar cualquier contacto con la turbma del ventilator en movimlento.
Dimensioned
ASA-15
generales
mm
/a<t
ml
_l
54
. .
r.
-.
9
038/ /, 1
2:
-1 ..i.,:... , ..
-..
RICAS
PULSADORES PRESOSTATOS i
)imensiones
ASAI-25
generales
mm
CONEXION
GAS 1 118
PULSADORES
PRESOSTATOS
-T
02 c-d
54
>
I
CONEXIONES ELECTRICAS / I ,%
\._.
_---
DETALLE A
Dimensioned
ASAI-30
generales
mm
I
,,38/
CONEXIONES ELECTRICAS
CONEXION GAS 1 /s
ASAO-30
@-r
PuLSADORES PRESOSTATOS
\._-/-
DETALLE ~
23
)imensiones ASAI-45
generales
mm
@#-
A CONEXIONES
ELECTRICAS
,*
--=Y-
ASAO-45
M/---F
1---
PULSADORES
PRESOSTATOS
.4
Dimensioned
ASAI-60
generales
mm
CONEXION ELECTRICA Q 38
ASAO-60
20%---
-&-P II
&o
~ CONEXION
ELECTRICA
O 38
+--
+@--
(2)
coNI=xlfJN
5-
1
DESAGUE R, INT. 3/4 G rEN-AM60S LADosl GAS 1 /,~
25
...
tccesorios ionadores
opcionales
modelos
para Ios acondi ASA y ASAI
L-Bateria de calor para agua caliente ASA-15 I ASAI-25, 30 y 45 Resistencia electrica interior ASA-15 I ASAI-25, 30 y 45
Resistencia
electrica ASAI-60
interior
Resistencia electrica de conducto ASA-I 5/ASAl-25, 30 y 45
Cuadro
Accesor:o
accesorios
estandar
Tamano ASA y ASAl
15
25
30 45 a
Balerfa de aqua ~ara moaela
ASA-15
,!
ASAI-25
x 4
ASAI-30
x ---1
ASAI-45 Q-----l
~esstencla elec[rica In[erlor para modelo
ASA-15
-24
10kW
x 4
ASA-15
-24
15kW
Resstenc)a
e!eclnca
,ntt?nor oara moaelo
ASAI-25
-24
10 kVJ
x +
ASAI-25
-24
15kW
,,
,,
ASAI-30
-24
10kW
ASAI-30
-24
20 kW
x <,
ASAI-45 ~ ,,
-24
15kW
ASAI-45
-24
30 kw
x d
ASAI-60
-24
60 kW
~ Resist. electnca ~ ,,
conducto
para modelo
RC -10-24
10kW
RC -15-24
15kW
I 1
RC -20-24
20 kW
x i
RC -30-24
KIt de lransformacion a sallda vertical para modelo
30 kW
x x
ASAI-60
27
---
.-- ..
3ateria de calor para agua caliente ~ tubes ae coDre y aletas Oe aluminio,

onceoma ~ara Ir rnontaaa en el Inlerlorael ;ecilanle smortes ae acero galvanlzado. {qulpaaa :on purgador ae alre de 1/8. )imensiones generales mm acondlclonador.
Capacidad
calorifica
Caudal -omlnal
Caoaclaao Pe,alaa ae
Llaae]o m ~h ASA-15 ASAI-25 ASAI-30 ASAI-45 3800 5 130 7500 10000 2,77 m;s
1.05
calorlrlca ,., 1,
carga clrcullc oe alre mm c.d a. 5.4 . 3,9 44 4,4 Pa :?.8 3E.2 43.0 43.0 i ; :
kW 2E,5 40,7 59.3 79.1
1,42 208
Las cauacldades caiorlflcas expresadas en es;a taDla san vailaas para ~~a lemperatura de enlrada a? agua a 90 C, saltda a 80 C v !a enlraaa CIS! alre a 13 C. Fara concjlc]ones dlferen[es apl!car IOS factores de carrecclon de la tabla corresoonalente
Factores de correction para Ias capacidades calorfficas de la baterua de calor por agua caliente Estos fac[ores de correction son para temperatures de
entrada ;Jodelc ASA-15 ASAI-25 ASAI-30 ASAI-45 A 691
1 069
y salida
de agua.
y enlrada
de sire.
diferentes
a Ias
nomlnales.
458
4. :
340 340 416 416 t I I -lo -5 o 1.03 0,97 0.91 0,85 1 23 1,16 1,09 1,02 1.33 1,28 1,19
1,12
1 312 1 750
534 534
Temoeralura alre
Temperalura 75165 85/75
entradalsallda 85;70 1,13 1.07 1,00

0,94
agua
C 90/70 1,14 1,08 , 1,01 ~

0,95
\ I
I
90,80
90/75 1.24 1.17 1,10

1.03
3atos fisicos
Modelo Tubes fonco Tubes alto Aletas:pulgada Area fronlal ~lametro ILGOS .7 ASA-15 2 16 12 0.32 ~ ,8, ASAI-25 2 16 12 0,49 3/8 ASAI-30 2 19 12 0,70 338, ASAI-45 2~
\ ~
)
5 19 12 0.93 3/8 1 COnexlones enlrada Sajlca rosca GAS macho

1
&- :: ::: ;:: :::: 06 XL,

fj,z
08,j
I i
~
15 20 25
0.73 0,68 0,60
088 0.82 0,74
0.97 0,90 9.83
@82 076 068
090 0,93 ~ 0.75
0,83 0.77 0,69
1 4
l~14
Ifl
.l
1 /4 i
Perdida de carga de! circuito calor por agua caliente
de agua CJSla bateria
de
Caudal agua callente !?lJih 1/s m c.d. a. ASA-15 kPa m c,d. a, ASAI-25 kPa m c.d.a. ASAI-30 kPa m c.d. a. ASAI-45 kPa 2,44 3.33 4,40 5,58 6,66 8.03 1,27 1.96 0,25 2,64 034 3,52 0,45 4,50 0,57 5.28 0.68 & 6,46 0.82 , .a 11,45 14,68 0,78 0.98 1.66 0,13 2,35 0.20 3,23 0,27 411 0,36 470 0,46 0.54 6.66 . J 039 0,68 0.08 0,78 0,10 0.78 0,17 1.86 0.24 2,60 0,33 0,42 0,48 1,00 0,28 0,04 1,30 0.36 0.06 1,50 0,42 0.08 2,00 0,56 0,13 2,50 0.69 0,19 3,00 083 0,27 I 3,50 0,97 4.00 1,11 4,50 1,25 5,00 1,39 6,00 1,67 ~ 7,00 1,94
28
Resistencia 30 y 45
Construlda soportes con de
eiectrica
hllos al alre,
interior ASA-151ASAl-25,
de cromonlque!. montados en
galvanlzada,
~niuad. Incluye
esteauta y con chasls prevlsta para Ir montada

contactores y regleta
de chapa
en de potencla.
de acero
de la
el Intenor
~e sumlnlstra con un protector termlco. que desconecta el clrculto de control cuando el elemento sensible detects una temperature anormalmente alta. Esta resistencla de~e traba]ar slempre con la corriente de a,re que proporc~cna la unidad interior. y deben preverse Ios enc!avamwntos, o reles, adecuados para Iograr este proposito. La Instalaclon de un control de caudal de alre es necesana (ver esquemas electricos).
Instrucciones tecnicas para cambio de tension de Ias resistencias Las reslstencias eiectricas se sumirwstran de fabnca conectadas para una tension de 380/415V trifaslcas. El dimenslonado de Ios contactores asi como e! de Ios cables de allmentacion se ha realizado para una mtensidad correspondiente a220i240V trifasica. Para unatensionde alimentacion de 220/240V trifasica deberan efectuarse en obra Ias siguientes modificaclones: - Anular Ios cables marcados: A, B, C, D. - Instalar Ios cables marcados del 1 al 6 summistrados junto con la resistencta. segun Ias indicactones de Ios esquemas siguientes.
13imensiones
generales
mm
/-%
RESISTENCIA ELECTRICA CONECTADAA 3E!3/4:5v SLJMINISTRADA GE FABRICA
<
.,
-.
\ / /
I I (
1.= I
3801415350
~
c
I
CABLES N 1AL N 6 SUMINISTRADOS JUNTO CON LA RESISTENCIA
RESISTENCIA ELECTRICA CONECTADA A 220/240V TRANSFORMAR EN OBRA
I i
CONECTAR
SEGUN
ESOUEMA
=!
L
~
1
I Modelo ~ ASA-15 ASAI-25 ~ ASAI-30 ~ ] ASAI-45 -24 -24 -24 -24
A 757 1 103 1 339 1 777
B 691 1 069 1 305 ; 1 743
c 480 480 552 552
I I i I
CABLES DE ALIMENTACION NO VARIAR
Potenc]a nommal Modelo ~ ASA-15 -24 ASAI-25 -24 w 10 15 10 ASAI-30 -24 20 15 ASAI-45 -24 30
Altmentaclon V.ph.Hz. Numero de etapas
Dlmenslones con embala]e
= 220/240.3.50 380/415.3.50
1440x620x125
I
I
-Z===-l
29
Resistencia
electrica
interior
ASAI-60
clrculto @e control
ternpera~ura
Construlaa con nilos al sire. de cromon~quel, montaaos en ~opofles ce esteatlta y con chasls cle cha~a ae acero galvan)zaaa, prewsia para ~r montada en el intenor de la unldad. Incluye contactores y regleta de :!encla. s desconecta el Se sumlnlstra con un protector termicc Dimensioned generales mm
elememo sensible detects una alta. Es?a reslstencla de~e traba]ar slemDre con la corrlente de alre que oroporclona la unlciad Interior, y deben pP2VeKe 10S
cuando el anormalmente
enclavamlentos, o reles, adecuados para Iograr este propo slto. La lnstalacion de un control de cauaa! de alre es necesana (ver esquemas elecmccs).
:1
80
<
/-
k-
Caracterikticas
Potencta nominal kW 60 3801415.3.50 2 Allmentaclon V.ph,Hz. Numero de etapas Dimenslones con embalage mm 51 0X2405 X165 1 1-
i Modelo reslstencia t I ASAI-60 -24
Resistencias
electrical
de conducto
RC-24
Para montar en la boca de salida del venhlador intenor. Su func]on prevls~a es actuar como calefaccion de emergencla. La perdida de carga considerada para estas baterias en Dimensioned generales mm
cualquier condicionde funcionamientoes de 1 mm c.d.a. Atencion: Siempre que se instate una resistsncia electrica debe instalarse un control de caudal, a fin de que no pueda funcionar la resistencia sin que se haya conectado el ventilator.
Nota: Para mas Informac]on ver folleto propio.
LA CAJA DE CONEXIONES PUEDE MONTARSE EN OBRA EN EL LADO IZQUIERDO
I I I F ~ I I
\
CONEXION POTENCIA AGUJEROS Cl 23
1, / \
f
H..-
&
c
D -\.
ENCHUFE LINEAS CONTI+OI -
M.,
Caracterkticas Modelo
resistencla [ [ [ RC-10 -24 RC-15 -24 RC-20 -24 RC-30 -24
electrical
Potencla nommal I(W
10
15 20 30
Tamaiio resistencla
ABCD
582 562 803 330 435 408 517
EFGH
376 482 345 451 542 783 321 351
-=
823
- -I
-Dates y medidas susceptible
de
vanaclonsin previoavlso,
31
Clima Rota York, S.L. Paseo Espronceda, 278 08204 Saoadell (Barcelona] Telefono (93 I 7102700 Telefax (93) 7102229
Aire acondicionado
4.6.5
Vlvula multihoja TROX
23.01.98
COLLAHUASI
Aire acondicionado
Hoja en blanco
COLLAHUASI
23.01.98
<
u m
* x
u-) L N .
c1) g
u
D
r,
2.
3
u
(D u)
00 my
&o
U-I
-WM4E3
Contents
Description
2 3 6 8 9 15 19
Description Construction .Construction Installation Details Standard Sizes Flange Drilling Details Product Range Technical Data Order Details
__-
JZ-A
JZ-B
,, @
Multi-leaf dampers are primarily used in ventilation systems for volume flow and pressure control. In addition, the type JZ-L satisfies the closed blade leakage requirements specified in DIN 1946 (leakage <10 m3/h. mz of damper cross-section with a 100 Pa pressure differential). The aerofoil section blades are coupled by external linkage, which can provide either parallel or opposed blade operation, or in the case of type JZ-G, opposed blade action only, via gears. The dampers can be fitted with hand locking quadrant or can be power operated by pneumatic or electric actuator. The type JNE damper is entirely constructed from stainless steel and is suitable for applications where a high level of corrosion resistance is required.
JZ-G
Construction
Types LIZ-A JZ-A JZD-A - JNE-A
!
I
I I
Casing and blades made from galvanised, rolled sheet steel Blade spindles and external linkage made from galvanised steel Plain bearings made from special plastic (Pecan), temperature resistant to 100C, capped bearings on the non-drive side Parallel blade operation Drive arm maybe located on any blade
JNE-A Casing, blades, blade spindles and external linkage made from stainless steel, DIN ref. 1.4301, dull surface finish (n according to DIN 17441, pickled after finishing) Plain bearings made from special plastic (Delrin), temperature resistant to 100 C Parallel blade operation Drive arm maybe located on any blade
JZD-A Same as type JZ-A, except: With blade tip seals made from special microbe reslstanl P+, plastic which has undergone antibacterial treatment 1 (ABS -1-PUR), temperature resistant 10 90C .
0 Casing @ Blade @ Drive arm (x dimension, see page 8) @ External linkage @ TIP seal @ Landing angle (full widlh on the B dimension)
Types JZ-A. JZf2-A JNE-A standard !3zes
JZ-A cJNE-A
JZD-A
m m
I 1
I 1,
=#&-
--4
Types JZ-A oJZD-A R 20 Sizes
JZ-A .- .-> / , /
JZD-A
1==1
/ +++ =!Fl / ,
I
L
B .
I
._!
of the arrow
Right hand drive R shown when viewed in direction
Construction I
Types JZ-B JZD-B JNE-B S-JZ-B
JNE-B Casing, blades, blade spindles and external linkage made from stainless steel, DIN ref. 1.4301, dull surface finish (n according to DIN 17441, pickled afler finishing) Plain bearings made from special plastic (Delrin), temperature resistant to 100C Opposed blade action Drive arm may be located on any blade
6!!$
JZ-B Casing and blades made from galvanised, rolled sheet steel Blade spindles and external linkage made from galvanised steel Plain bearings made from special plastic (Pecan), temperature resistant to 100 C, capped bearings on the non-drive side Opposed blade action Drive arm maybe located on any blade
S-JZ-B
JZD-B
Same as type JZ-B, except: Also with blade tip seals made from special microbe sistant plastic which has undergone antibacterial .salment (ABS + PUR), temperature resistant to 90 C
Same as type JZ-B, but shock tested: Galvanised components with increased corrosion resistance Shock resistance data:
Application certificate No. 094/90 Standard test category RK 2 5/25, safety grade B Max permitted d!menslons B = 1000 mm, H = 1005 mm /i (!
Types JZ-B JZD-B. !%ndard Sizes
JNE-B
o S-JZ-B JZ-B . JNE-B . S-JZ-B II

JZD-B
tL4T
20
ll&
II
--@
+ A
6
Types JZ-B JZD-B R 20 Sizes
JZ-B
JZD-B
1
L
---when viewed in dlrectlon of the arrow
Rlghl hand drive R shown
Construction
Types JZ-L S-JZ-L (air tight to DIN 1946)
S-JZ-L
JZ-L Casing and blades made from galvanised, rolled sheet steel Blade spindles and external linkage made from galvanised steel Plain bearings made from special plastic (Pecan), temperature resistant to 100 C, capped bearings on the non-drive side Blade tip seals made from special microbe resistant plastic which has undergone antibacterial treatment (ABS + PUR), temperature resistant to 90C; side seals
Same as type JZ-L, but shock tested: Galvanised components with increased corrosion resistance Shock resistance data: Application certificate No. 094/90 Standard test category RK 2.5/25, safety grade B Max. permitted dimensions B = 1000 mm, H = 1005 mm
made from felt sliding on PTFE discs Opposed blade action Drive arm maybe located on any 2nd blade
0 Casing @ Blade @ Drive arm (x dimension, see page 8) @ External linkage @ Tip seals
@ Landing angle (full width of the B dimension)

@ Side seal/PTFE disc
Types JZ-L o S-JZ-L Standard Sizes
. _ IIEll
1 , J
/ .
2?r
5
R
+ 4? +
L.--b----d
Type JZ-L R 20 Sizes
1 I I
%
7 6
_ . let
1
+!33
[t
E==i
1B
II
-1
...J
of Ihe arrow
Righ[ hand drive R shown when viewed in direction
Construction
Type JZ-G
Installation Details
Galvanised sheet steel casing Blades made from aluminium extruded sections Gears made from special anti-static plastic (ABS), temperature resistant to 70 C Galvanised steel drive arm Blades interconnected by gears located
at each end of
the blade Bearing seal achieved using a plastic elastomer on rear of gears between case and gear. Material: Perbunan
0 Casing @ Blade c ve
arm (x dlmenslon, see page
8)
(t, ~~~,
Type JZ-G
Drive
arm detail
LB----I
Installation Details 1
1 1
z
~ L
r
T+!iil
80
t-l
@) Drive
arm can be adjusled by 90 on the square shaft
,.
Right hand drive R shown when viewed in direction of the arrow
By using special studs, after the dampers have been fixed to a wall, they can easily be demounted and subsequently re-installed.
Scope of supply for masonry subframes: Masonry subframe made from 35/35/3 galvanised steel angle; bolt fix builders cleats, special studs, bolts, nuts and washers made from galvanised steel (assembled by others on site)
I
+
m & r + I
Scope of supply for matching flange: Matching flange made from 35/35/3 galvanised steel, angle; bolts, nuts and washers made from galvanised steel (assembled by others on site)
1* Matching flange (for all types)

Matching \ flange ~
2* Masonry subframe (for all types)

Special ~n / sluds
Ins!alla!ol opening w(lhoul subl( ame B/H
Y; 1; Masonry subirame
hstallation Details
Types JZ-A - JZD-A JZ-B JZD-B JZ-L
(
If lhe B dimension is greater than 2000 mm or the H dimension greater than 1995 mm, 2 dampers can be provided for installation side by side or one above the other. They may be installed either with or without a masonry subframe.
Configuration 1 The actuator is fitted by others on site, mounting on the damper face using the flanges. Mounting can be above or below
Configuration the drive arm. with standard accessories 2 For executions (e g. when using spring return actuators)
Types
JZ-A.
JZD-A
oJZ-B
JZD-B
. JZ-L
Subdivided on H dimension (H, -2 H + 76)
SuMividect
on B dimension
(B, = 2 B + 150)
+-LO+
B, U 75135/2 < 35135f3
1 1
x
Confiwration
uplin talle
lf by
rod, to be others on site
Configuration
Type JZ-B shown with right hand drive R when

viewed in direction of the arrow
~
Special masonry subframe
(subdivided on Special masonry subframe (subdivided on H dimension)
+ 20 -H, + 20EI H,/B + 20
B dimension)
El, + 20/H B,/H
I 1, Installation Opening without n masonry -4 sub frame
I II , sublrame !ns(allal,on opening wlthoul masonry
jk IL H,/B
i3,1H
Standard Sizes
Flange Drilling Details
Flange Drilling Details
Types
(S-t&dard
JZ-A
Sizes)
. JZD-A
JNE-A
o JZ-B
JZD-B
JNE-B
umb, of
s JZ-L
210sper
B
In mm
H In mm
345 510 675 840 1005 1170 1335 1500 1665 1830 1995
Numkx of blades 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 90 90 255 420 420 585 585 750 750 915 915
B
in mm
H
In mm
Numberof
blades
B g
&
4
Position of driw arm X In mm
Vumb. of holes pat 0 dim. d:,
400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000
5
7
8 10 12 13 15 16
4 5 6 8 9
10
200
300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000
12 13 14 16 17
207 307 407 507 607 707 807 907 1007
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
53,5 53,5 253,5 253,5 253,5 253,5 453,5 453,5 453,5
2 3 4 5 6 6 7 8 9
1 2 3 4 5 5 6 7 8
Types JZ-A.
(R 20 Size
JZD-A.
JZ-B.
JZD-B.
JZ-L
umb. of holes pa
Types JZ-A oJZD-A oJZ-B.

(Subdtvidad on B or H dimension)
JZD-B
JZ-L
in
B
in mm 357 x
H
in mm
Numkr of
blades 2 2 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 7 8 9 10 12
B,
in mm 2550 2950 3350 3750 4150
X in mm 96 118 142 169 118 152 273 316 447 502 480 631 626 794 808 917
B
dim.
3 4 4
4
H
dim.
HI n mm
?086 ?416 ?746 1076 1406 1736 ! 066
B
in mm
400 449 503 565 634

711 797 894 1003
1125 1262 1416 1588 1781 1998
400 449 503 565 634 711 797 894 1003 1125 1262 1416 1588 1781 1998
4 4 4
5
5 5 6 7 7 8 9 10 12 13 15 16
5 6 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 15 17
400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000
Number of blades, position of drive arm and number of holes as per the damper module size
Types S-JZ-Bs S-JZ-L

B
m mm in
H
mm
345 510
Numbsr
of
!) ~~ition
of drivs
arm
Numb. of holes B H
per
blades
2
X in mm
dim.
I 400 600
dim
4
90
90 255 420 420
4
5 7 8 10
800
1 000 1
675 840 1005
3 4 5 6
5 6 8 9
All combmahons
ot B x H or B, x H, can be supplled
l Type JZ-L supplied with the drwe arm on the 2nd blade (Irrespective of size)
,., .,, ... ; , Product Range (

~
,,.-,... ,.. .
e
Type
1-Types
code variants combmed wllh
!-A
JNE-A
JZ-G
or constructmn
JNE-B !D-A .!-8 !D-B . . ,.. !-L

Torque %PWOX.15 Nm 2) .150s Torque approx. 34 Nm 15
S-JZ-B S-JZ-L
- U -24 V =, 50...64 Hz/P - 1.8 W/capacily 4 VA/ IP 4z/contmuoualy ratedlrunmng lime aPQrOx. Ms U -24 V=, 50 ..&3 Hz/P -3 W/capacity 6.5 VAf 1P 42/conlmuously raledlrunning ome approx. 80s.
150s -2 X EPLU1O A (2.5A) 250 V - 11P42 16 17 10 s2S3 S4 s1 S5 S6 :19
Z 12IWO pcehcm (okay alacbic acNalm Imad Mti aumlwy swtch Z 13ho F&tion rotary e!ecti aciwmorI!ttad with auxihay swlch Wllch
z 14M pxmca rotary decbt aduakx liited MIJI awll~
Z 15MO WSIhOI mlary dacbic actualm lIHed w~ amiiaw Swlch
=H
MahJating 24 V+,-7Y#o
rotary electric Iov. *
actuator,
sea Fig. 3.t
-Y,
vzu
I
Torque approx. 15 Nm 2) r
-U-24 V-,50 ... WHz/P - 3W/capacily5VN 1P 42/rnntmuously raledlrunning lime approx. 100.. 200s -U-24 V-, W..,60WP - 4W/capacitY7.5VW 1P42/continuously rsledtrunning time approx. 103. .240s Sneumatii aprlng return actuator, lee Fig. 4.1 ~4.5:trcud diagram 1 or compreaaed air supply p -1.2 bar damper
20
Torque epprox. 30 Nm
Z21
CLOSEO on Iosa 01 signal (power elt to close), Cwcuil diagram 2 for compressed air supply p >1.2 to 14 bar L (+)230 + PE V/50 H2 (24 V-)
e
(+) 230 V/50
Hz
(24 V-]
N(1 Cmwewo au sum
Damper shown In the CLOSEO WSdlOn 0 Pm3umabc actuator (wrkmg pressure 12 bar) Q) 312 way solenoid Vahe 0) Ad,uslabic lhrollhng valve
@ Pressure regulalor wdh manomeler (Operabng pressure IS fac!ory ael al 12 bar) ~ Ek?cIrIcal sw,lch, s.pphed by others
I,bes
Sngle aclmg I 2 bar pneumallc aclua[or, a,r consumPl)onlstroke = O 810 aPprox 32 standard Soleno,a valve 50 H71P - 21 VA (,n fushl112 VAltl W (operal,on)llP 651cmbnuously rated U-230V Adlus! able Ihrolll,ng valve R 1/8 mlernal thread
Z22
Product Range (
Types
or construction
variants
combined
with
Code
JZ-A JZD-A JZ-B JZD-B JZ-L
JNE-A JNE-B
TyPe JZ-G
S-JZ-B S-JZ-L
%gle acting 1.2 bar pneume[k actuator air Consuvtiontslroke solenoid valve U -24 V-/P = 8 W/lP 65/conlinuousty rated Adjustable throttling vahe, R 1/8- internal thread Z 22 pneumatic actuator ati:
-0.610
apwx.
3.2 slandard
filres
1)
Z 23
Limil stwlch mdlcales damper CLOSEfY Limil Swilch indicates dampsr OPEN Limif switch indcates damper CLOSELY and .OPEW
1)
Z 24 Z25 Z 26 Z 27
Pressure ragulator, G 1/8 inlemal Ihraad, aee cticuit dtagram 2 Z 23 pneumatic actuator and: Limd switch indicates damper CLOSEW Limit switch indicates damper OPEN Limd smtch indicates dampar CLOSEO. Pressure regulalor, G 1/V internal Ihreacl, see crcud diagram 2 Z 22 pneumatic acfuator, pressure rsqulalor arwt
q q
1)
Z 28 Z 29
and OPEN
z 30 Z31
Limd switch mdica!es dampsr CLOSEO Limil switch mlicales damper OPEN-
1)
Z 32 Z 33 z 34
Limil ewilch incbcales damper Z 23 pneumatic aCIUalOr, pressura regulator and:
CLOSEOand OPEN
q
Limil swtch Indicates damper CLOSED Limd switch ind,cales dampar OPEN Limd swdch mdicales damper CLOSEKY and OPEN
1)
z 35 Z 36 Z37
Types Of ccmatmstiin variants combined
with
JZ-A-G JZD-A-G JZ-B-G JZD-B-G JZ-L-G

22 23 24 25
JNE-A-G JNE-B-G
JZ-G-G
S-JZ-B-G S-JZ-L-G
I One masontw aublrame

One matchmg flange One masonry subframe and one malchmg flange Two matchmg flanges One masonry sublrame OIIe masonry subhame On c+quesl [subdwided (subdwded on B dimensnon) on H d,menslon) -.
28 29 30 31
32 33 34 35
22 23 24 25
26 27
m smnuc quahiled conslruclmn m explosion prool construchon . constructed to acCep[ Ieleflex drwe by o!hers
Oamptus JZ-A and JZ-B can also w combmed with weathel fesjs~anl Iouvres (see leaflel No 3141ENI )
Impwlanl( 1) Pedotmance data for single acwalor 2) In Ihe case of type JZ-L, only wtable
The number 01 acluatocs dew!ds on the !ypa and size (see page 14) for use up m the sizes rnd,caled In the Iabta on page 14
Product Range
(
Fia. 1.1 1.3 Installation
Construction
e
limit switches
with Fig... for types JNE-A JZ-G
of Electric
Fig. 3.1 3.3 Electric
actuator
details
Installation JZ-A cJZD-A
in accordance JZ-L
JZ-B . JZD-B Without act.

With pneumatic actuator I Important! For construction integral.
I
JNE-B 1.1.
1.2 or 1.3 for size combinations where B 21263 and H -510 675 1.1 1.2 1.1 1.1
Fig. 3.1 One electric actuator Fig. 3.2 Two electric actuators Fig. 3.3 Three electric actuators
1.1
1.2
Fig. 4.1 4.5 Pneumatic

Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5
actuator
details
Fig. 4.1 One pneumatic actuator

1 , ,
Two pneumatic actuators Three pneumatic actuators Four pneumatic actuators Ona pneumatic actuator (type
JZ-G)
using electric
actuators,
the limit switches
are
Fig. 2.1 2.3 Hand locking quadrant details Fig. 2.1 Type JZ-A oJZD-A JNE-A. JZ-B. JZD-B.
S-JZ-B oS-JZ-L Fig, 2.2 Type ~Z-G F: 23 Type JZ-G (detail) ,
JNE-B.
JZ-L.
Right hand drwe R shown when viewed
in dlrec[lon
01 {he arrow
@ ,
Fig. 1.1
Fig. 1.2
Fig. 1.3
@ Electric limit switch with double changes s over contact, Indicates damper CLOSED @ Electric limit switch with double changeover contact, indicates damper OPEN
@Operating arm
1-
Fig. 2.1
Fig. 2.2
Fig. 2.3
,,# .*, /
!2 ,+ . -+$
x , 7 A
+.> I
4.
@
Hand locking quadrant
x dimension,
see page 8
@ Slotted blade spindle, dia. 12 mm, to indicate the blade angle
Product Range
Fig. 3.1
Fig. 3.2
Fig. 3.3 11==1-
I
I
I
@ Spring return actuator
I
Fig. 4.2 Fig. 4.3 Fig. 4.4
Fig. 4.1
@-
Fig. 4.5
11 u
@ pneumatic
actuator
(1.2 bar working @ 312 way solenoid @Adjustable @ Pressure
pressure) valve valve with manometer
throttling regulator
13
Product Range
t
75
Iectric
Actuators
o Pneumatic
Actuators
/ 60 / Nm 45 / / 4 Iv / \ \ \
;quired number of actuators (without taking account of )rodynamic influences) for types: JZ-A. JNE-A. JZ-B. JNE-B. JZ-G one actuator (Irrespective of size) JZD-A. JZD-B one electric actualor (Irrespective of size); one pneumatic actuator up to H s 1335 mm, two pneumatic actuators from H >1335 mm JZ-L as per table Number of Actuator ype of Actuator Actuators Code -..
3 Iv > 30 / \
~lectric spring return actuator torque approx. 11 Nm) e.g. Z 08
I II
1-3 1
2 Iv
Rota electric actuator, reversible open7closed or modulating (torque approx. 15 Nm), e.g. Z 20
15, /
~~ , ~llv -
Rota electric actuator, reversible open7closed or modulating (torque approx. 30 Nm), e.g. Z 21
pneumatic actuator (torraue dependan - e angle o as shown in the on grk, egP22 ___ \lvI
Ill
1
1-4
10
2W
30
40
50
613
7~
80
9V
Open
a -~
Closed
II
..J
Damper Damper
opening closing (by means of return spring)
.;; e.,
1995 to
2000
Type JZ-L Bin mm H In mm

345 to c nfi
11
E
C7A
510 to
675
to
n?a
840
to
I nnd
1005
to
1 it=m
1170 to
1334
1335 to
1499
1500 to
1664
1665 to
1829
1830 to
1994
357
to
400
II 1 Iv
11
1
8 Nn
401
to
II
634
1 Iv 11
Ill 3 Iv 31 + 31V ~ 31 Ill

!2 Iv Ill
635 to 800
II
1 Iv
31V
801
to
1003
11 II 1 Iv
25Nrn 31 31 Ill Ill !3 Iv 3 Iv
1004
to 1262 1263 to 1416 1417 10 1600
11
II
1 Iv
11
II 1 Iv 11 II 1 Iv 11 II 1 Iv blade
1601 to 2000
Mlnlmum
toraue M, required on factory check 10 achieve closed leakage results In accordance with DIN 1946 (API = 100 Pa), wllhoul taking account of aerodynamic influences
..
Technical Data f
Nomenclature
, ~ ----I
Ap,
, a
in Pa: Total pressure Blade angle,
drop (installation
type A)
a = O 0 blades fully open power level based
~m
,
k = h. + K in dB/ocl
Lo
kA = kJ + K
Octave band sound on A (re1012 W) As above,
..J
In dEt/Ocl:
in dWW
but based on A = 1.0
mz
I ii
in mm: in mm:
in mz:
.- -
A-weighted sound power level (in the duct) based on A As above, but based on A = 1.0 m2 NC rating of sound based on A power level
LWAO
in dB(A):
Width Height Cross sectional Leakage a=goo Leakage (1=90

Face
Lvwo
area (B x H) flow with blades closed, flow with blades closed on A K volume volume
As above, but based
on A -1.0
mz
in IIs:
m
Correction factor to octave levels dB(A) or NC ratings for variation in cross sectional area from a reference value of 1.0 mz (see tables 12 and 13)
m
m3/h
f ..<
Hz
Octave Pressure
band centre frequency loss coefficient
in m/s
velocity
based
Sound
1
2000 1500 1000
power
level and Pressure

JZD-A JNE-A a -80
drop for a = 10 800 2

7W 61Y 50 2000 1500 1000
Types ..
JZ-A
Types JZ-B oJZD-B.

a -80 7V I
JNE-B
60 1 Y
S-JZ-B
so 40
A A
v
30
500 300 200 Pa 100 20
50 30 10
10
c -0.5 1 mla 2 345 10 15 20
Av
-0.5
/! 1
r
mla
I 2
xl\u
345
I 10
i 15
I 20
3
2000 1500 1000
Types JZ-L
a = 80
S-JZ-L
70 60 50 40
4
2000 1500 30
Type JZ-G a = 80 1000

500
7V I Y
60
50
4W /
A /
/
30
500 300 200 Pa 100 lIY ! ~ xl so 2rY
300
30 20
10
K o 5
mls
45
10
15
20
05
mls
45
10
15
20
Technical Data
M, M, a n
in
Nm:
Maximum
required
torque
Types
Ml =
JZD-A
JZD-B
in Nm in cm:
Minimum torque Torque coefficient (diagram 10) Number of blades (see Page 8)
aApl
100
M2 = (n 0.9) When air flows through the damper there occurs, due to aerodynamic forces independent of airflow direction a torque acting in the closing direction. When opening the
Types
JZ-L S-JZ-L a. Apl A

100 + (n. 1.2)
damper, this must be overcome by the actuator. The blade angle a at which the greatest torque is required is dependant on the fan or system characteristics.
Ml =
M2 ==8 to 30 Nm (see table on page 14)
Types JZ-A - JNE-A
JZ-B
oJNE-B
. S-JZ-B
JZ-G
* The pressure loss coefficients
according
to diagram 9 and the

, ., @
~1=
aApl-A ---100
total pressure drop dp, shown in diagrams
WI)
(I7
6)
1 to 4 are based on installation type A (with fully ducted entry and discharge) With other types of installation, the < and A p, values should be multiplied by the correction factors F shown in table 9 I
Sound -, Dower -.
level and Leakage
volume
flow for a =900
5
15JXFR
Types JZ-A JZ-B S-JZ-B
LL
1ooo1-
300t- AX 1200L 150
soot
600
~/h 4
400 H
k i\l
1/s
100
I 300)
,oo1tt
80L
>
k\l\h
P
Ll-
! .>
90 90 400 600 e~ LWNCO 65 70 60
oF A\\
LL ~m in dB(A) LWNCO T API in Pa 150 100 El L 40 30 I I 6570 ~ 65 80 70
,
go B~
Types
100
JZ-L
200 I
o S-JZ-L
400 600 8001
8
1000
I 1
7
TvDe JZ-G ..
500 1500
1500
I 1 3001-
Ap, in Pa 100200
rr
80 60 200
II
.-S+
1
1/s40 I
.>
v
#/h
150
100
80
30
2 o
60
40
10-
,1
I
LwNCO
I 11l-m
,. . .
50 io 70
(J
[ ~,..
LWAOm dB(A)
.,-, in
dB(A) LwNCO
5k 60
,--, --r r
70
7~
813
71
200 mm 300
4UU 3UJ e~
55613
80
I Technical Data
k
Calculation Example 1: Required Result. Examples
Type JZ-B,
~p,, LA
Example 3:
B x H = 600 x 1005 mm for installahon type A, {~ = 40 and
Type JZ-B. B x H v = 4 mls,
1000 x 1005 mm type B, n = 40,
Required:
Ap,~and ~~ for installation
v=4
and ~W m/s
Ap, = 108 Pa (from diagram 2) and F = 1.5 (from table 9.1) Result: Ap,B= 108 Pa x 1.5 = 162 Pa
~,= 11
X
dp, = 108 Pa (from diagram 2) ~A = 66 dB(A) 2-64

(hA
1.5=
16.5
dB(A)
fmm diagram 2, K from table 14)

2, K from table 14)
Example 4: Required:
Type JZ-B, B x H -= 1000 x 1005 mm Ml with installation type A and A p, = 130 Pa,
a = ZOO,
bNC
=612-59 (f-WNCfrom diagram
Example 2: Required: Result:
Type JZ-B, ~., ~~c
B x H = 600 x 1005 mm a 90 and Ap, =
a = 16 cm; Apt350 Pa, a-4&, a-3cm; Apt - 700 Pa, a- 60, a- 1.3 cm; Ap, -1000 Pa, a -90, a -0.25 cm;
and ~ where
1000Pa
Result: 20 A p, in Pa(estimated) a in cm (fromdiagram10) M, in Nm (according to formula)

Requwed lorque = 21 Nm
a 40 350 3
106
87 dB(A) 2 ==85 dB(A) (L. from diagram 5, K from table 14) ~NC=852=83
(hNC
~.=
60 700 1.3
92 .
90 1000 0.25
] 25
130 16 21
from diagram 5, K from lable V = 280 1/s = 1000 mu/h (from d!agram 5)
14)
9
40000 10000 5000
Characteristics
1 hsralhfbn w [-~ Q12 Q -1,2 v? r 1 I A 1 I
Diagram
1
9.1
Types of Installation
. ~
L
EEIA \v
EEIC
1000
kglm] / I / f A Y
/1
/ / / / / w I /. 1
500 100 50 I
u
10 :
2 1 0.5 1 0.1 0 Open /
-/ //
.
/ ! I 1 1
EIla I
Type of install. B
O
+, ,+ .
Tyw of operation opposed

Parallel
0110120 6
11
Correctionfactor F where blade angle aI3OI4OI5OI6OI7OI8O 3

3.5
5.5
9.5
2
2
1.5
1.5
1.3
1.3
1.2
1.2
1,1
1,1
1.0
1.0
(.
c
5W 60 70 8W 90
Opposed Parallel
4 7 9 17
3.5 5.5 8 15
2.3 2.2 4.5 5
1.7 1.6 2.7 2.4
1.4 1.5 1.9 1.9
1.3 1.3 1.7 1.7
1.2 1.2 1.5 1.5
1.1 1.1 1.2 1.2
1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0
lrY
20
3rY
40 a~
Opposed Parallel
Closed
10
100
Torque
Coefficient
11
3500
Maximum
allowed
pressure
when a = 900
50 \
\ . \
3000
20
. I 1 I \ \ \ \ , w M& C$erarbm \ ! E v I I I I \ mM Md+ opmbl
2500 Pa 2000 1eoo 1600 \ 14r3r3 Conslruclion wllh brass bearings Reinforced construction wnh brass bearings
10
5 cm
1 I 05----1 +------+ 02, 0Open , .1 --- . 1000 ----- -. . 1200
\ Sfandard construchon wllh Pecan bearings
J21Y
--L-.-L
30 40 a.e
L..l.lll
50 6(J7080 closed 9V
aoo
10
L- .. --l_____ 1 .
800 1000 1200 mm
-J- --1.
1400 1600
..L.J
1800 2000
., .,,
,,,
,.,
. ,.
:-r.
.,, ,.,
.,
,,
-,.
.,.,
,.
)..,.
1 a!!
Technical Data
f
12 Sound
power
level spectra
at various
blade
angles
10
I
I
8 61 59 57 57 56 50 44 37 61 60 58 56 56 53 47 40160 61 59 53 52 54 50 44 63 61 58 56 53 51 45 38 10 67 64 62 59 62 57 51 44 64 65 64 62 61 59 54 46 [67 67 66 61 58 59 58 53 68 66 63 61 58 56 51 44 69 66 64 58 fi~77h5!73171 ]71 ]70!64!59172174 173172170170166 160179179179177 170169172169177 l76l74l7l

20181 182]79177176 177172166176 176179178176 [75\73168184]85 185]84]79]76 [77176180[82 l8O[77[75l72l7Ol65
I
20
FIEmH/----
8 6562
60 606054 48 41 64 64I63 6~61 10 71 68 66 65 66 61 55 48 68 696866 15
6 5856
54 55 51 453932595756
55/54
51 44 38 58 58 55 49 49 51 47 40 61 59 56 54 51 49 43 36
59 55 48 65 66 63 58 57 58 56 50 68 66 64 61 59 56 52 45
65 64 60 53 72 72 71 66 63 63 64 58 73 72 70 67 65 62 58 52
78 78 75 74 73T71 166,59 74 77]77175 73 ] 73 71 67 81 82 82 80 75 73 74 72 80 80 78 76 73 71 68 64 1 , 20184 85]82 80 79\ 80 75 69 7918= 83 82 80 79 78 74 ]89 ]90 90]89]84]81 ]81 182]85]86185183180176175 [71 6 6967-6566686455477273172 8 77747271 70171 ]72169160176176 77176178177169183185 ]73/69]68171 170163 75175 !69!68!70171 166]59]
40
TFFFH++H-11
74726557767978
]83178176]78[79175
180]82]77]73
!75177174]681
60
10.5141b0 142141134126118 l15[55i59!62160 80
163167166!64!54 ]55157159164164 160152!62!66!66
l64!66!66!(
0.8 53 51 50 53 51 43 35 27 62 65 69 70 69 73 76 74 64 67 68 71 72 77 76 73 69 72 76 76 74 76 76 72 1.0 59 56 55 57 56 49 41 33 66 69 73 76 74 77 81 80 69 73 73 75 77 83 82 79 73 76 80 80 78 80 80 76
1.2 63 61 59 60 62 57 49 41 68 72 75 79 78 78 84 84 74 76 76 80 83 86 87 87 74 78 83 84 82 84 84 81
13 Sound
power
level spectra
with blades
closed
(a = 90)
63
,.$
h.
.,
14 Sound
A
in mz
power
0.10
- 10
level correction
0.12 -9 0.25 -6
factors
0.30
-5
0.40
-4
0.50
-3
0.60
-2
0.75
-1
1.00
0
1.25
+1
1,60
+2
2.00
+3
3.00
+5
4.00
+6 ., G ),
All Iechnical
data relates 10 standard
dimensions
Order
Code
I JZ-A-G-RJ
These codes do not need to be completed

I I I
for standard products
/ I 1000
TYpe designation (see page 9)
TT
I
-w
L
A~~essories
zoltoz37 (see pages 9 to 11)
Construction variants (see page 9)
--l
Y:%d:ss
Masonry subframe oMatching flange (see page 11) 0- without masonry subframe matching flange
Drive side Right R Left L

(If this is not .speciiied, then R la supplied)
B1x Hlnmm BxH1lnmm (see page 8)
Specification
Dampers
Text
Order
Make: Type: Qty:
Example
TROX JZ-A-G-R 6 f 1000x lo05/22/ZOl
e + ~
$ 0 ~ % s
for volume flow and pressure control or to isolate sections of ducting in ventilation systems, basically consisting of a channel shaped casing, aerofoil blades, connected by external linkage or Internal gears (type JZ-G).
designed Materials: See pages 3 to 5 for details Masonry subframe, Matching See pages 9 to 11 for details Make: TROX Types and construction See page 9 for details variants: Flange, Accessories:
L,.,
Aire acondicionado
4.6.6
Vlvula cortafuego TROX
23.01.98
COLLAHUASI
Aire acondicionado
Hoja en blanco
COLLAHUASI
23.01.98
Fire Dampers
Types FK - K90 . FKS - K90
q q
FKW - K90
FKN - K90
with
test
FKI -K90
certificates
! PA-X208
I PA-X209
i.-:..-, . ..,. v
V, ~
mixl . ..... ,..

.,..:;,.,::
,,
-..-.
.,-~:.~~..,
..
. .
TRO14YTEcHfWK
Gebruder Trox GmbH Heinrich-Trox- plat2 D-47504 Neukirchen-Vluyn Telefon 02845/2 Telex 8121231 02-0 Telefax 028 45/202265
?$?-> .,.
Contents
Description
2 3
Drilling Details 5
Description Construction Standard Sizes Flange Installation Details Suspension from a Slab Duct Connections
Product Range Functional Description

Wiring Diagrams
- Circuit
Diagrams
6 15 16
Technical Data Order Details
18 28 30 32 34
FK- K90
. FKW-K90
. FKS-K90
. FKN - K90
FKI - K90
, .
Fire dampers provide an automatic means of Iocalising areas of fire in ventilation systems. They have a fire resistance class K90 or K90/90 (super damper) and are suitable for installation in walls and ceiling slabs made from
Materials: Casing and attachments of galvanised sheet steel. Damper blade of special insulation material. Blade seals of polyurethane, bearings of stainless steel or brass. Alternatively: Casing and attachments in stainless steel Casing with polyurethane paint finish Damper blade lined with aluminium foil
concrete or brickwork, in lightweight partition walls and directly on to walls and ceilings. The damper installation is independent of air flow direction. Combustible building materials may come into contact with the outer surfaces of the fire damper casing, provided this does not impair operation.
The fusible the outside other link release mechanisms can be removed from and inspected easily. All dampers also have two
inspection panels. The quality control required by legislation is carried out by FMPA, Baden-Wurttemberg.
Important! It is compulsory for fire dampers to have a test certificate. Therefore, the General and Specific
Requirements during use.
of the test reports must be complied
witl
.. . ..
.$ .,.
(
Types
FK
- K90
-I -l [~{
FKW - K90 FKI - K90
Application Concrete walls and ceiling slabs, minimum thickness 10 cm Aerated concrete walls (types FK-K90 and FKW-K90),
minimum thickness 10 cm Masonry walls, minimum thickness 11.5 cm
0 Casing 0 Blade
@ Manual leV9r @ Release mechanism (side inspection panel)
&I Locking device 0 Inspection access (top or bottom inspection panels) o Fusible link ubframe for push fit damper
Resistance class K90 when connected both sides to non combustibk ventilation ducts, otherwise K30 Release temperature FK - K9072C FKW-K9095C FKI -K9072C Standard sizes Width/height from 200/200 to 1500/800
Type FK - K90
FKW - K90
@---le=l--l
@-@-
90
4-
Type FKI - K90
1110 0
135r
11111 I IEZ
*J
L--
= 260
L-
150 or 280
J
in direction of arrow
._&
80
Right hand controls
R shown when viewed
pes FK
- K90 FKW- K90 FKS - K90 FKN . K90
+ ~
1
i-
. B
.:,.,.,. ......... . :: :.,:. % 4
Type
FKI - K90
II
k-= 2804 +fLk-
Standard _. ... .
Nominal
Sizes .
Width Size B in mm Nominal Height Size H in mm
200 250 315 355 400 450 500 560 630 710 800 900 1000
1120 1250
201 252 318 357 400 449 503 565 634 711 797 894 1003
1125 1262
200 250 315 355 400 450 500 560 630 710 800
201 252 318 357 400 449 503 565 634 711 797
m
Type FK FKW FKS FKN FKI K90 K90 K90 K90 K90 of holes
L in mm
375 + 500 375 + 500 500 375 + 500 150 + 280
1400
1500
Nominal size 10 DIN
1416 1500
B dimensions 201 mm and 252 mm can only have H dimensions of 201 mm 10400 mm
Flange
Drilling
Details
of holes Even number
10
Odd number
10 J_
m 0 7r p~
J_
t -300
0 - t-
I-
_B
I-
r
1
~oo
t -300
-1-
*
J-J?
07 .
35
Bor
Hinmm
201 252 2 2
318 357 2 2
COrner)
Ann
;::. . .
3 3
503 <R6 3 3
634
3 3
711 797
4 4
894 1003
5
1125 1262
5
1416 1500
6
No. of holes per B-dimension No. of holes per H-dimension

Number o! holes mcludmg comer holes
(45 mm hom flan9e
-+-?+
~~-
!,.
. -.
.,
.,
(Installation in Solid Walls and Ceiling Slabs Types FK - K90 FKW- K90 FKS -K90 o FKN - K90 FKI - K90 Installation also with vertical blade in concrete walls and ceiling slabs and aerated concrete walls (except for type FKI - K90) with a minimum thickness of 10 cm and masonry
walls space with a minimum thickness of 11.5 cm. Gap s and
On installation
of the fire damper,
the Walllceiling
subframe
or subframe for push fit damper must not be deformed. The damper blade must easily rotate after installation.
with mortar of Group II or Group Ill to DIN 1053, or with concrete. Gap s may be omitted if the fire damper is installed when the wall or ceiling slab is being constructed. To guarantee adequate filling of gap s, the installation openings must not be larger than the duct size (Bx H) plus 80 mm for hand mortaring or plus 60 mm when an injection process is used. With a >70 mm to a S 100 mm the spacing must be mortar filled using an injection process. With a >100 mm, the spacing maybe filled by hand mortaring or concrete filling. Where mortaring in the wall or ceiling area is not possible due to insufficient clearances, e gap s may be filled with mineral fibre boards as shown m Fig. 1.5 (except for type FKI - K90).
a are to be filled
Wall Installation Fig. 1.1 Installation opening, minimum clearances Fig. 1.2 Wall thickness W - 100 240 mm (types FK - K90 . FKW - K90 FKS - K90 - FKN- K90) Fig. 1.3 Wall thickness W >240 mm (types FK - K90 . FKW-K90 FKS -K90 - FKN - K90) Fig. 1.4 Wall thickness W Z 100 mm (tvoe FKI - K90) tiih partial mortaring only ig 15 (types FK - K90 . FKW - K90 m FKS-K90 - FKN- K90) In this case, ducts may only be connected using flexible
fittings
Fig. 1.1 -lar
Fig.
.4
J,L.,
lE21
(7 _ -:~ d 7
Lintel
(if required]
!?wblrame s L -150
. El$-p ,.
for Z 2 damper
-7;r,/ .,
W2100
L L sizes)
or 280 mm (s!andard
Installation
details Fire damper
1
FK-K90 a ~ 70 mm FKW-K90 FKS - K90 FKN - K90 FKI - K90 a Z 150mm
Hexagonal boll M 8 x 35 wilh washer _ (on 0 dimension only)
Subframe I Seal
for push
fit damper
For square dampers, note required mstallalion orientation
Fig. 1.2
w=
q,w~11
Fig. 1.5
W=l15-240mm ,Vz ,,, ,
100
l15mm
El!i $
, .. .
I 260 ~ -:+ ~L-375J
.,,
II
:;,::
L, -500
N Fig. 1.3
w r w-
} ~:,___ D-.JxL -
.J, L.. -Js L-
.J,
L.
,+ >\. ... s
Mirmral (IMO hoard. Nommal denslly 80-100 kgtm] Non-flammable, melfing Poml IOoOC Material thickness - x + min. 10 mm
)1
-L-
500
-4
L-
500-
by oihers)
m!
. . .-
Mineral
hbre
board
(insert
before
in SlallatlOn)
-,m%w#kAru!A .
,.. .,.*.
+.y.+~
.,.
Aire acondicionado
4.6.7
Rejilla resistente a la intemperie con vlvula de seguridad TROX
23.01.98
COLLAHUASI
Aire acondicionado
Hoja en blanco
COLLAHUASI
23.01.98
3/4/EN/l
.\
Combination of Weather Resistant Louvres and Multileaf Damper Sections
TROX%EcH~,~
Gebrtider D-47504 Trox GmbH Neukirchen-Vluyn Telefon 028 45/2 02-0 Telefax 028 45/2 02-265 Heinrich-Trox-platz
Contents
Description
,, 4?
./
..
Description ___ Construction __ Standard Sizes . Installation Order Details --- ___
2 3 4 5
WG-JZ-B
WG -KU L-1
,. G
1
The combination of weather resistant Iouvres and multileaf or pressure relief dampers perform a dual role in intake and discharge openings in air conditioning systems. Firstly they give good protection against the direct ingress of rain, leaves and birds, and secondly they allow adjustment of flow rate through the opening or provide a means of shut off
when the ventilation system is shut down.
,,.
2 .
Construction
Type WG-JZ-A AWG-JZ-A
a masonary
., .
o WG-JZ-B AWG-JZ-B resistent Iouvre type WG or AWG,

damper type sub-frame, and a multileaf
Comprising
with
a weather
Type WG-KUL-1 . WG-KUL-2. AWG-KUL-1 AWG-KUL-2 Comprising a weather resistant Iouvre type WG or AWG,
with a masonary sub-frame, and a pressure-relief damper
damper are firmly connected Materials: Weather resistant Iouvres type WG and multileaf dampers type JZ-A or JZ-B are of galvanised sheet steel, weather resistant Iouvres type AWG are of extruded aluminium sections. Masonary sub-frames are of galvanised steel,
JZ-A or JZ-B Weather resistant Iouvre and multileaf
type KUL Weather resistant Iouvre and pressure-relief damper are firmly connected Materials: Weather resistant Iouvres type WG and pressure-relief dampers type KUL are of galvanised sheet steel, weather resistant Iouvres type AWG are of extruded aluminium
sections. Masonary sub-frames are of galvanised steel.
For construction of individual components, see leaflets nos.: 3/1/EN/.. Multileaf Dampers 3/2/EN/.. Weather Resistant Louvres 3/3/EN/.. Pressure-Relief Dampers
Tvc)e WG-JZ-A. ..
AWG-JZ-A
WG-JZ-B o AWG-JZ-B
WG-JZ-A AWG-JZ-A
WG-JZ-B AWG-JZ-B
r-
I L
k.
Type WG-KUL-1 AWG-KUL-l
oWG-KUL-2 o oAWG-KUL-2
WG-KUL-1 AWG - KUL- 1
WG-KUL-2 AWG-KUL-2
Shown with drive on right hand side, viewed in direction
of arrow
Standard Sizes
tandard Sizes jpe WG-JZ-A oWG-JZ-B . AWG-JZ-A . AWG-JZ-B B
in mm 400 600 800 1000 1200
Type WG-KUL-1 . WG-KUL-2. AWG-KUL-l AWG-KUL-2 B in mm H in mm
H in mm
345 510 675 840 1005 1170 1335 1500 1665 1830 1995
of dimensions listed above
400 600 800
<
1000
1200 1400 1600
1400 1600
1800 2000
345 510 675 840 1005 1170 1335 1500 1665
Any combination of dimensions listed above can be supplied.
+ny combination an upplled.
Installation
Dimensions Type WG-JZ-A AWG-JZ-A WG-JZ-B AWG-JZ-B Type WG-KUL-1 AWG-KUL-1

q
WG-KUL-2 o AWG-KUL-2
q
T
i
0
m +
u
~ m +
I
I L,,,
I
J
I-NJ
Type WG-KUL-1 shown
Type WG-JZ-A shown, drive on right hand side
Type WG-JZ-A AWG-JZ-A
WG-JZ-B. . AWG-JZ-B
View
with accessories A
r
m + m
&
m
I
0 Accessories:
L
Type WG-JZ-A return actuator,
265
J @ Cover
see leaflet no 3/1 /EN/.. (Multileaf Dampers) e.g. electric spring return actuator, pneumatic actuator
c ,:
shown, with electric spring drive on right hand side
Order Details
.. ,
Order
Code
AWG-JZ-A-R Type WG WG 1 ] / I 600
X
These codes do not need to be completed
for standard
products
510
l/
fiGTl/1+1/
Y
d
J-
1
Drive side
right R left L
(only for JZ-A and JZ-& R supplied if handing not specified)
Q
S1 =
E6-C-31 Iouvre
Colour for Weather-resistant RAL... orE6-C-... (see leaflet no. 3/2/EN/.. ) Finish for weather-resistant
painted to RAL
AWG AWG 1 AWG2 AWG3
Iouvre
[ S2 = anodised to
Euras-Standard E6-C-Oto C-35 (see leaflet no. 3/2/EN/.. ) Accessorv Z.. for multileaf damper (see leafl~ no. 3/1/EN/.. ) 0 = without Sizes available WxHinmm (see page 4) accessories
Type
JZ-A JZ-B KUL-1 KUL-2
not used
Specification
Text
Order
Make: Type: Qty.:
Example
TROX AWG-JZ-A-R 5 /600x 510/O/ZOl lS2/E6-C-31
Combined weather-resistant Iouvre and multileaf or pressure-relief damper for protection against direct ingress of rain, leaves and birds into the intake or discharge openings of air conditioning systems, and for flow rate control or shut off of openings when ventilation system is shut down. Construction see page 3 and materials:
Masonary sub-frame: see leaflet no. 3/2/EN/.. Accessories: see leaflet no. 3/1 /EN/. , Make: TROX Type: see order code
Aire acondicionado
4.6.8
Rejas TROX
23.01.98
COLLAHUASI
Aire acondicionado
Hoja en blanco
COLLAHUASI
23.01.98
l/1/EN/4
Grilles Linear Grilles
TROKTECHNIK
Gebruder Trox GmbH Telefon Telefax 02845/2 02845/2 02-0 02-265 Helnrich-Trox-Platz D-47504 Neuklrchen-Vluyn
Contents
Description
2 3 4 5 6 7 7 8 9 SelectIon tables for Ilnear grille lengths Rear assemblies Installation subframes Assembly Details Fixing Details Nomenclature Acoustic Data Acoustic Data for supply air Acoustic Data for return air --Aerodynamic Data ____ ___ Aerodynamic Data for return air _._._.. Order Details _ . . . 12 14 16 18 19 19 -20 22 -24 31 .. 32
Description Aluminlum grilles Alumlnlum grilles and grille cores Alummlum grilles Steel grilles Stainless steel grilles Flow rate control dampers Plastic grilles Special filter frame .__. . . Grilles and grille cores (dimensions) _ Aluminium and steel linear grilles
10
-11
..
Grilles and linear grilles are suitable for duct, wall and floor installation. They may be fitted straight into the duct section, or alternatively, an installation subframe may be used, e.g.
for installation into builders work.
To optimise air distribution, it is possible to choose from different types of rear assemblies, see pages 14 and 15.
,1
Aluminium Grilles
Construction
Construction
Type KUSupply front wllh or return blades spring and alr gr!lle, with The front fixing. border has a horizontal on request diffuser-type section, clip fixing. individually adjustable Available
oDimensions
Materials
a concealed
Type VAT Supply or return alr grille with indwidually adjustable vertical aerofoil blades. Front border either 27 or 23 mm wide concealed fixing. Available on request with spring clIp flxlng or only for front border 27 mm visible screw flxlng (border counter punched).
Type AT Supply or return air grille with individually adjustable horizontal aerofoil blades. Front border either 27 or 23 mm wide, concealed fixing. Available on request with spring clip fixing or visible screw fixing.
Materials
The grilles are made from extruded a natural anodised finish E6-C-O. aluminium sections, with
Type
ASL
17-
i 7
for ( ) dimensions
A1l
L-
Type VAT
Aluminium Grilles and Grille Cores

Construction Dimensions
Type AH Supply or return air grille with fixed horizontal prof!led blades. Front border either 28 or 20 mm wide, concealed flxlng, blades with either 0 or 15 deflection types AH-Oand AH-15-. respectwely. Available on request with sprlrrg clIp fixing or wslble screw flxlng (border counter punched) Type AF Supply or return air grille for floor or wall mounting with fixed horizontal profiled blades, blades with either 0 or 15 deflection, types AF-O-. . . and AF-15-. ., respectively. The grille core can be removed by releasing the W clips. The grille can be fitted in masonry by means of builders work cleats.
Types EH - EF . EHG EFG or CIII mounhng pitch either Grille cores for supPly or return air for wall with fixed horizontal profiled blades. blade
125 mm types EH-0, EH-15, EF-0, and EF-15. or 16.7 mm [y Des EHG-0, EHG-15, EFG-0, and EFG-15 Blades with either 0 or 15 deflection, types 0 and . ..15. The construction and dimensions are the same as for the cores of types AH and AF.
Type AH
A
for ( ) dimensions
47.
AH-O Type AF
AH-15
-1
5.5 r
AF-O
1--:s-l II I
AF-15 Types EH EF . EHG . EFG
II
.-15-
i4
Aluminium Grilles
Construction Dimensions
Type AWT Grille for Inslallatlon In gymnasia and sports halls has a ball mpact resistance according to DIN 18032 Part 3. <obustly constructed supply or return a!r grille with fixed horizontal profiled blades with wsible screw fixing (border ;ounter punched). Type AGS Non wslon grille for supply or return alr w!lh fixed Inverted vee blades with visible screw fixing (border counter punched) The non vlslon grille IS also available with a Ilght baffle plate type AGS-L with a matching rear frame type AGS-T or with both baffle and rear frame type AGS-TL, see page 22. Types AGS-L and AGS-TL are completely painted black to prevent light reflection.
Type
AWT e e
-17L
1 r
3f --
Steel Grilles
Construction Dimensions. Materials (
Construction
Type SL Supply or return alr grille The front border has a d! ffuser-type section (L side 28 mm wide, H side 20 mm wide) with mdwldually adjustable horizontal front blades and a concealed fixing. Type TR Supply or return air grille with individually adjustable horizontal front blades with visible screw fixing (border counter punched). Available on request with galvanised finish and concealed fixing. Type TRS Supply or return alr grille with Indwldually adjustable vertical front blades with visible screw flxmg (border counter punched). Available on request with concealed fixing. Materials Type SL o TR . TRS The grille face is made from formed sheet steel. The surfaces are pre-treated and powder coated white (RAL 9010),
Materials Type TR galvanised The grille face is made from formed,
galvanised
sheet steel.
Type SL , ~[
3
,.._.
11
H side
A,
.,, {..
.-, .x.
.-e.
,-. , .
..
.,
. ..
.:-x.
Jfl~-
Lside
-r
Type TR
-.
1
.. ...,.=.
ii
A-_ ..,-
. .
Type TRS
-III -
Blade pitch 20 mm
. . ..
Stainless Steel Grilles FIOW Rate control

q
Dampers
Constructiof~ . I )Imensmns
Construction
Mater[als
Type TRE Supply or return Ill Wllles with Individually adjustable with Vlslble screw flxlng (border horizontal tronl l~lIIIlils counter punctlr(lJ Type AGW
HOW rate Corltri A I Ii l(fWr
Materials Type TRE The grille face IS made from formed, stainless sheet steel (DIN ref 1.4301). The material has a dull, pickled surface. A bright surface IS available on requesl Materials Type AGW . DGW The damper IS made from formed sheet steel The surface phosphate treated and stove enamelled black (RAL 9005) using electro-dipcoat process.
for duct installation,
opposed
blade
IS
action adjustabl II Iln the ace, an91e border. Standard sizes as for ty[w VA I (see Pa9e 10) L~.X = 1225 mm. Type DGW
FIOW rate coniri d I tllrnPer for duct installation, opposed blade action adjustatd~ Ilom the face, Plus a set of individually adjustable vertll,l~l Iilr Pattern control blades, angle border. Standard size~ fI~ for Ype AT (see Pa9e 10) L ma x = 122!5 mttl
Type TRE -T!...:*..--
-.
.: -0 ,.
L-15/H-15
i_
L+1OIH+1O
*17-
L-15/H-15
L+10/H+10
-17-
Plastic Grilles f
~struction . Dimensions
Materials c
Construction
Type KS Supply and return alr grilles. The front border has a diffuser-type section with individually adjustable horizontal front blades and with visible screw fixing (border counter punched) Type KS-A. The followlng KS-D constructions are also available::
Materials
Grille face and rear assemblies made from plastic extrusions (hard PVC) with good anti-corrosive properties, temperature resistant up to 50 C. Grille face and rear blades in grey (slmllar to RAL 7037), curved blades for volume control in black
as type KS-A, but with additional individually
adjustable vertical aerofoil blades KS-C as type KS-A, but with additional individually adjustable vertical curved blades for volume
control.
Type KS
m6 48
KS-A
KS-D
KS-C
Special Filter Frame

Construction . Dimensions Materials
Construction
Type.. .-EF For wall Installation, the standard .-A construction in the types AT, VAT. AH, SL, TR and TRS grilles are available with the A-EF special frame with filter pad or, alternatively, with an additional special hlt and miss damper, type .-AS-EF (constructIon on page 15). The grille and special frame with filter pad are connected spring clip fastening. The special frame with filter pad is available with H = 125 mm to H = 525 mm. by
Materials
The special filter frame IS made frorr formed sheet steel The surface IS phosphate treated and stove enamelled black (RAL 9005) using electro-dlpcoat process The filter pad consusts of synthetic chemical fibres, quahty grade EU 4
Spare E-EF filter media is available on request.
Type..
.-EF
. i
L t i-k-+
. & . L-2 7
(i)
~ Filter Dad
@ Support wire, removable for filter pad change, support only required on .-A-EF. ., grilles wire
p==qi/L@
-JL
==15
;:::::ved
@ Rear support wire not removable (The filter pad can only be changed after the
, ,.
Grilles and Linear Grille Cores

Climensions % ~
Standard
LxH in mm
225 x 325 425 525 625 825 1025 1225 1425 1625 1825 ?025 225 325 425 525 625 825 1025 1225 1425 1625 1825 2025 225
X
Sizes
Aluminium
Grille Cores
L, x H, in mm
SL AT
75
125
r
I
\GS
SL
Steel TR
EH
EHG
EF . EFG 245 X 95
345 445 545 645 845 1045 1245
196x 296 396 496 596 796 996 1196

196x 296 396 496 596 796 996
46
96
245 X 145 345 445 545 645 845 1045 1245 345 X 245 445 545 645 845 1045 1245 445 x 345 .545 645 845 1045 1245 645 X 445 845 1045 1245
225
1196 296 X 196 396 496 596 796 996
325 425 525 625 825 1025 1225

1425 1625 1825 2025 325
X
325
1196 396 X 296 496 596 796 996 1196
425 525 625 825 1025 1225 1425 1625 1825 2025 625 X 425 825 1025 1225 1025 X 52: 1225
I I
596 X 396 796
t--+-l+
.. . .. . ---L-
I
---
1-
1:::
10
A umin urn and Steel Linear Grilles

Construction oDimensions. Materials
Construction
Type AH Supply or return air Ilnear grille wllh fixed horizontal profiled blades. Front border either 28 or 20 mm wide, concealed fixing, blades with either O or 15 deflection, types AH-O-.. and AH-15 -.. respectively Available on request with visible screw fixing (border counter punched). Type AF Supply or return air linear grille for floor or wall mounting with fixed horizontal profiled blades, blades either 0 or 15 deflection, types AF-O-.. . and AF-15-... respectively. The grille core can be removed by releasing the W clips, The grille can be fitted in masonry by means of builders work cleats. Additionally, 90 mitre also available. Type SL Supply or return air linear grille The front border has a diffuser-type section (L side 28 mm wide, H side 20 mm e) with Individually adjustable horizontal front blades and ~ .,oncealed flxlng
Standard
Heights
EEEF
1
~
I
Intermediate 1-
Sections
s%JT:dRil
2000
Standard
950 1010 1070
End Sections
1130 1190 1250
End Section 1310 1370 1430
E in mm 1490 1550 1610

the opening
1670 1730 1790

size L
1850 1910 1970
Numberof end and mtermedlalesecllonsbased on
Material
Type AH oAF
sections,
Linear grilles are made from extruded aluminium with a natural anodised finish E6-C-O.
Material
Type SL
The grille face is made from formed sheet steel The surfaces are pre-trealed and powder coated while (RAL 9010)
Type AH
k for ( ) dimensions rs$1
-17L -34
9
AH-O AH-15
5.5 --lr600 ,1 G
18
Type AF
I-HZS?
I II
I
1 I
~H+32K
90 milre
AF-15 Type SL ,. .... .-
d
1.
v
3
-387
-J
,1
side
-16P
..-la:.
--l
7
-11-
I
03 m
i m i
19-
1 L stale
11
Selection Tables for Linear Grille Lengths

ype AF @
E M=2000
o o ]11
0 (1
Uo
.~ -
. 11[ 0
Example
Dala given: Type AF L = 18910mm From the table: Select next size down L = 18899 mm (opening size plastered surface) Number of intermediate and end sections:
L=2E+~lM)-21
L =
n =
msldedlmenslono number of
fopenlng
M sections
8 intermediate sections M = 2000 mm E = 1430mm 1 end section E = 1490mm 1 end section
The opening size L and associated number of end sections E and miermedlale sechons M can be dlreclly delermlncd from lhe
secllon Iable below
I
i
L=
E E 2E 21
L=2E+(nx lxM 2000 3879 3939 3999 4059 4119 4179 4239 4299 4359 4419 4479 4539 4599 4659 4719 4779 4839 4899 4959 5019 5079 5139 5199 5259 5319 5379 5439 5499 5559 5619 5679 5739 5799 5859 5919 2xM 4000 5879 5939 5999 6059 6119 6179 6239 6299 63596419 6479 6539 6599 6659 6719 6779 6839 6899 6959 7019 7079 7139 7199 7259 7319 7379 7439 7499 -7559 7619 7679 7739 7799 7859 7919 3xM 6000 7879 7939 7999 8059 8119 8179 8239 8299 8359 8419 8479 8539 8599 8659 8719 8779 8839 8899 8959 9019 9079 9139 9199 9259 9319 9379 9439 9499 9559 9619 9679 9739 9799 9859 9919
4xfvl 8000 9879 9939 9999 10059 10119 10179 10239 10299 10359 10419 10479 10539 10599 10659 10719 10779 10839 10899 10959 11019 11079 11139 5xM
M)21 6XM 12000 13879 13939 13999 14059 14119 14179 14239 14299 14359 14419 14479 14539 14599 14659 14719 14779 14839 14899 14959 15019 15079 15139 15199 15259 15319 15379 15439 15499 15559 15619 15679 15739 15799 15859 15919 XM 1000
5879 5939 5999 6059 6119 6179 6239 6299 6359 6419 6479 6539 6599 6659 6719 6779 6839 6899 6959 7019 7079 7139 7199 7259 7319 7379 7439 7499 7559 7619 7679 7739 7799 7859 7919
XM 3000
7879 7939 7999 8059 8119 8179 8239 8299 8359 8419 8479 8539 8599 8659 8719 8779 8839 8899 8959 9019 9079 9139 9199 9259 9319 9379 9439 7499 9559 9619 9679 9739 9799 9859 ~
9xM 18000 19879 19939 19999 20059 20119 20179 20239 20299 20359 20419 20479 20539 20599 20659 20719 20779 20839 20899 20959 21019 21079 21139 21199 21259 21319 21379 21439 21499 21559 21619 21679 21739 21799 21859 21919
10x M 20000 21879 21939 21999 22059 22119 22179 22239 22299 22359 22419 22479 22539 22599 22659 22719 22779 22839 22899 22959 23019 23079 23139 23199 23259 23319 23379 23439 23499 23559 23619 23679 23739 23799 23859 23919
l-1
10000 11879 11939 11999 12059 12119 12179 12239 12299 12359 12419 12479 12539 12599 12659 12719 12779 12839 12899 12959 13019 13079 13139 13199 13259 13319 13379 13439 13499 13559 13619 13679 13739 13799 13859 13919
950 950 1010

1070-
950 1010
1010
1010
1070 1070 1130 1130 1190 1190 1250 1250 1310 1310 1370 1370 1430 1430 1490 1490 1550 1550 1610 1610 1670 1670 1730 1730 1790 1790 1850 1850 1910 1910 1970 1970
1879 1939 1999 2059 2119 2179 2239 2299 2359 2419 2479 2539 2599 2659 2719 2779 2839 2899 2959 3019 3079 3139 3199 3259 3319 3379 3439 3499 3559 3619 3679 3739 3799 3859 3919
1070 [ 1130
1130
1190 1250 1250 1 1310 1310 1370 1370 1 1430 1430 1490 1490
t-m
1
1
I
1550 1610
1670
]%
1199 1259 1319 1379 1439 1499 1559

11619 11679 11739 11799 11859 11919
[q~-1910 1970
12
I
Selection Tables for Linear Grille Lengths
Types AH - SL
!f
- =:++
L=2E+(n, M) +28
Example
Data given: Type SL L = 18910 mm From the table: Select next size down L = 18888 mm (opening size plastered surface) Number of intermediate and end sections: 8 intermediate sections M = 2000 mm E = 1430mm 2 end sections
L = !nslde dlmenslon
n = number Installation L=2E+(nx
of opening of M sections subframe
without installation M) +14
The
opening
size
and
associated
and Intermediate sections selectlon table below.
number of end sections E M can be dlreclly determined from [he
L=
L=2E+(nx lxM 2000 3928 3988 4048 4108 4168 4228 4288 4348 4408 4468 4528 4588 4648 4708 4768 4828 4888 4948 5008 5068 5128 5188 5248 5308 5368 5428 5488 5548 5608 5668 5728 5788 5848 5908 5968 2xM
4000 5928 5988 6048 6108 6168 6228 6288 6348 6408 6468 6528 6588 6648 6708 6768 6828 6888 6948 7008 7068 7128 7188 7248 7308 7368 7428 7488 7548 7608 7668 7728 7788 7848 7908 7968
M) +28 IXM
~l)oo 7xM
2E + 28
3xM 6000 7928 7988 8048 8108 8168 8228 8288 8348 8408 8468 8528 8588 8648 8708 8768 8828 8888 8948 9008 9068 9128 9188 9248 9308 9368 9428 9488 9548 9608 9668 9728 9788 9848 9908 9968
4xM
5xM 10000 11928

11988 12048 12108 12168 12228 12288 12348 12408 12468 12528 12588 12648 12708 12768 12828 12888 12948 13008 13068 13128 13188 13248 13308 13368 13428 13488 13548 3608 3668 3728 3788 3848 3908 ~
8XM 16000 17928 17988 18048 18108 18168 18228 18288 18348 18408 18468 18528 18588 18648 18708 18768 18828 18888 18948 19008 19068 19128 19188 19248 19308 19368 19428 19488 19548 19608 19668 19728 19788 19848 19908 19968
9xM 18000 19928 19988 20048 20108 20168 20228 20288 20348 20408 20468 20528 20588 20648 20708 20768 20828 20888 20948 21008 21068 21128 21188 21248 21308 21368 21428 21488 21548 21608 21668 21728 21788 21848 21908 21968
10x
8000 9928 9988 10048 10108 10168 10228 10288 10348 10408 10468 10528 10588 10648 10708 10768
10888
14000 15928 15988 16048 16108 6168 6228 6288 6348 6408 6468 6528 6588 16648 16708 16768 16828 16888 16948 17008 17068 17128 17188 17248 17308 17368 17428 17488 17548 17608 17668 17728 17788 17848 17908 17968
20000 21928 21988 22048 22108 22168 22228 22288 22348 22408 22468 22528 22588 22648 22708 22768 22828 22888 22948 23008 23068 23128 23188 23248 23308 23368 23428 23488 23548 23608 23668 23728 23788 23848 23908 23968
950 950 1010 1010 1070 1070 1130 1130 1190 1190 1250 1250 1310 1310 1370 1370 1430 1430 1490 1490 1550 1550 1610 1610 670 670 730 . 730 790 790 850 850 910 910 970
950 1o1o 1o1o 1070 1070 1130 1130 1190 1190 1250 1250 1310 1310 1370 1370 1430 1430 1490 1490 1550 1550 1610 1610 1670 1670 1730 1730 1790 1790 1850 1850 1910 1910 1970 11
1928 1988 2048 2108 2168 2228 2288 2348 2408 2468 2528 2588 2648 2708 2768 2828 2888 2948 3008 3068 3128 3188 3248 3308 3368 3428 3488 3548 3608 3668 3728 3788 3848 3908 3968
10948 11008 11068 11128 11188 11248

11308 1 1 1 1 368 428 488 548
1 608 1 668 1 728 11788 11848 11908 11968
3928 3988 4048 4108 4168 4228 4288 4348 4408 4468 4528 4588 4648 4708 4768 4828 4888 4948 5008 5068 5128 5188 5248 5308 5368 5428 5488 5548 5608 5668 5728 5788 5848 5908 5968
13
Rear Assemblies t
The rear assemblies are permanently freed at the faclory to the various types of grille face, The possible combinations grille plus rear assemblies are shown In the table on page 15
Rear
Installation ASL. AT. VAT ! SLTRTRS I 108 70 80

14.
depth dimension AH TRE 105 67 771 ~ i

1
T
AF ~
AWT I 123 85 -:-! ~
Iassembes
i,. . - AG l.. -D ~.-.
I I
123 85
I
Materials
The rear assemblies are made from formed sheet steel. The surface is phosphate treated and stove enamelled black (RAL 9005) using electro-dipcoat process.
. ..-As . ,.. -z - DG p - DL
- AL
I
I
70...238 ~miii=im= 108
=
~ 123
L..
, 1
105
123
Materials for Type TRE

The rear assemblies are made from formed stainless steel (DIN ref. 1.4301 ). The material has a dull, pickled surface.
----la-= 40
70...238
-1--
-J--= ---!
. - I
L.
-c 1:------
.165...235
. . . - AG
Opposed blade action volume control damper,
adjustable from the front face.
control damper as.. .-AG plus a set of individually adjustable vertical air pattern control blades, For types VAT and TRS these blades are horizontal (Type TR with stamped pattern blades). Volume
. . . -D
A set of individually adjustable vertical air pattern control blades. For types VAT and TRS, these blades are horizontal (Type TR with stamped pattern blades). Rear deflection perforated
. . . - DL
blades, as . .-D, also with plate baffle, as .-AL.
r--. . . - AS
Volume control of hit and miss construction with stamped vertical blades, adjustable from the front face, (H~w = 325 mm).
0 0 Ni
-----
E:i;
-. ---~ I
..-AL
Perforated pfate baffle with 35 ?40 free cross-section.
ml :1 E I ! 1; F==L8
.-c
Flap type volume control with stamped pattern alr s!ralghlenmg blades, adjustable trom front face
Volume controller of flap construction which can be adjusted from the front face
14
,/
Rear Assemblies
Type
n
w{th angle Irame (type AGW LX; W) SUPDIIed 100Se 3) Not available wlrh concealed Ilxlng 4) Rear assembles mtpqral with Ihe qrllle lace secl,orl
inear n .: Ii a< ., Do
m Y
Grilles
Ill <<d q q *O 00 00 e*00
Standard Construction
q 4
q
Rear Assembhes q &
+H
H
II i II h dtII I nslalla!lor (!,[,1 1>;4(1<, : 7
Component
Adjustment
Rear assemblies
. . .-D, . . .-AG, . . .-DG concealed fixing
v
Rear assemblies .-Z, .-D,
.-DG,
.-C
B,
II
Rear assemblies
.-AS
15
Installation Subframes
The installation subframes components, tied together Brown banding Red banding White banding are supplled as Indwldual with different coloured banding
Installation
Subframe
for Grilles
77;
Types AT, VAT with 23 mm wide front border Type SL All other types on site by
J 1:$ L-
z
J I
and must be assembled into a complete subframe others, u$ing the tongue and spigot connections. If necessary, the preformed builders bent, e.g. for wall installation.
an installation subframe is essential.
work cleats can be fixing,
( ) Dimension for types AT, VAT, AH front border 23 mm or 20 mm

wide and SL/H side
For grilles or linear grilles with concealed
Materials
The installation subframes aalvanised sheet steel. are made from formed,
Tongue and spIqo[ connecl!orl
Opening Size without Installation Subframe
Wall Installation
with Builders
Work Cleats
Inside dimension of opening L2=L14 H2=H14
I
Counterpunched holes for counter holes
and concealed with counterpunched holes (for sheet metal raised
fixing
countersunk
head screws 4.2 x 16/DIN 7973)
Lrnax = 1225 Mounting in a

ceiling is not possible
wllh concealed
fixing
with
spring
clip
flXif19
16
nstallation Subframes
Installation
(for
frame section
Subframes
see page
for Linear
16)
Grilles
-=---+--- H
1
Nsi
a/H = internal dimension
of opening
When a linear grille is required with non-active sections, the rear sections are supplied loose for site assembly to meet the local requirements.
~_..
When fitting the subframes, great care should be taken in order to avoid distortion.
E and M sections
corresponding
to the face grille lengths,
17
I.,, ,
Assembly Details
Jointing Details
Fixing Details
Type AH Single bolt connection of installation subframes
, _
,:1)
Single bolt connection
__
-1L
Type AF Single bolt connection of Ins[allahon subframes

2
Type AGS
Matching
Rear Frame
Bracket
I
AG S
For all constructions: H, = H 23 L,= L28 AGS-L
AGS -TL
The light baffle plate and bracket for types AGS-L and AGS-TL are supplied foose and must be fitted on site. by others.
Type AF -- H#L3
1
Type KS
HI= L,=
H-20 L-20
H~=H L~=L
+32 +32
wllh installation
subframe
without
installation
subframe
Nomenclature
Nomenclature
v
V
il, In 1/s m
Acoustic Data
Total alrslream
I
volume
flow
Inducl!on
ra[lo =
Volume
flow at grdle discharge
lnml/h.
Volume Volume
flow per melre flow per metre flow flow
v .1!
In m/s.
Effective Effective
let veloclty outlel area
v, L B v 9C.
In 1/s In m$lh m m In m. m m/s.
Total volume lolal volume Distance Spacing
A ,,(1 A <,(.(,
m m7
in mz: Geometric in m: Effective
outlet area outlet height (Acl, = h,,, x L,/1000) discharge angle setting
from the grille or linear grille (throw) between two grilles
h .11 (f /J
in 0: Airstream
Alr veloclty related to the geometric free area Air velocity in Ihe duct alr velocity at distance L
in 0: Blade angle in the case of divergent in K: Temperature difference and room air in K: Difference between at distance L between
Atz
k
supply
In m/s: In m/s in m
VL
Time average
AtL
L, H. Ap,
core and room temperature
b 07
Distance from the centre of the alrstream al which the veloc!ty is a maximum of O 2 m/s At! !sIream droo or nse
in m: in m In Pa
Grille core size (length) Grille core size (heqhl] Total pressure dIop
#y
11 111
1
70
Sound power level and air veloclty Type AGS . Door Installation
,1 &J
Geometric
LxH in mm 225 325 425 525 625 825 1025 1225
X 125
outlet
area A~,O in mz
A in :2 0.008
50
~---
--
40-
30
0.012 0.016 0.020 0.024 0.032 0.040 0,048

X
20 10
1
~ ..i f 7
L .~. .
1---1 1 05 15 2
Vqao In mls 2
Pressure drop and air velocity Type AGS . Door installation
I
1 15 ? v,, , 34 In m,s
i 7
--+ [ .i
34
-
325 425 525 625 825 1025 1225
225
0.027 0.036
0.045 0.054 0.072 0.090 0.108

0,056
425 X 325 525 625 825
1025 1225
0.070 0.084 0.112 0.140 0.168 0.114 0.152 0.190 0,228

0,240 0.288
625 825 1025 1225
425
1025 X 525 1225
Correction values .-- --

A9,0 In mz
LWA
for A..O .
-7
__
-.-
0.0075 -6
0.015 -3
0.03
0.06
0.12 +6
~ i
10
+3
,4
19
Nomenclature Acoustic Data for Supply Air ~rllles GrllleS .Linear

q
L WA
m dB(A)
A-weighted sound power level, based on A,,, = 0.1 m> (see [ables for corrections) NC rallng of sound power level
L.( ~ m dB/Ott.
Oclave sound power level of regenerated based on A,,, = 01 m> (see table for correchons) A-weighting NC rating respectively sound pressure level L DA = WA L oNC .~Nc:;:; of room
noise
LD~, L,.c
For grilles where L >1225 mm, selection must be made using the technical data for linear grilles.
Sound power level and Pressure flap damper .-Z 150 103 80
60 40 30 20 15 10 10 6
4 2 1
drop with
Correction
values
for Aeti
0.4 6
A. in mz ]0.005) 0.01 I 0.02 I 0.05 ] 0.1 [ 0.2 1-13 /-10/-7/-3/1+3/+ &*/& Diagram values based on A.fl = 0.1 m (zero blade divergence)
Correction
values
2000
2
for hefl
Linear grille length L, in mm 2500 4000 3000
I 1
1-
k
100% 502 25% Damper sethng
h en
in m
0.030 0,050 0.075
+1 +1
+2
z---~
1+11
+ 3~1
R%&
Diagram values based on h.fl x L, = 0.1 m (zero blade divergence) Octave band sound power levels with flap damper .-Z
Correction
Grille face
values
0
for other
450
blade settings
900 45 450 x 1.1 +1 900 90 X1.5 +6
Patternont. lades c b
0
x 1.0
0
X1.1 +1
0
x 1.2 +3
Af+
LWAI LW~c
Grilfes can have horizontal/vertical divergence Linear grilles can only have vertical divergence
65
1?s
Ocla.c
250 band
XL ccnlrt
1000 f!t?quency
2000 ,. Hz
4000
woo
20
Acoustic Data for Supply Air

Grilles Linear Grilles
On diagram 5: Diagram values for the 25% damper setting are also valid for rear assembles AL and DL. Diagram values for lhe 100% damper sethng are also valld for grilles wlthoui rear assemblies
Sound power level and Pressure drop with opposed blade damper .-AG and .-DG
Octave band sound power levels with opposed blade damper .-AG and .-DG Damper selllng 50%
[ 1 6
15 2 34 v.. in rnls -~ 6810 63 125 1000 2000 4000 250 500 Oclave band centre frequency in HZ ~
8000
Octave band sound power levels with opposed blade damper .-AG and .-DG
Damcw selllna 100 %
Octave band sound power levels wkh opposed blade damper .-AG and .-DG
Damp?r selllnq 25%1
II
6.3
125 Octave
250 band
1000 500 cel?tre frequency
)OIJ(J ,. Hz
4000
(woo
63
125 Oclave
?50 band
1000 500 cenlre frequency
2000 m Hz
40C)0 _
8000
21
Acoustic Data for Return Air

~.rilles
tr
Correction
A,fl in m
values
for A,ti
~ 0.05
I 0.005 \ 0.01 \ 0.02
LWA/LWw_]-13, -lr3 1 -7_ ] T.3 gram-values based on A,.,,= O1 m> ~~ero blade dwerqence)
0.41 0.1 1 0.2 1 3 1 6
On diagram
9: Diagram values for the 100 % damper for grilles without rear assemblies.
setting are also valld 6
:VI
, I
Sound power level and Pressure blade damper .-AG

Damper Wng
drop for opposed

25% I I # I
1/1
11
Octave band sound power levels wilh opposed

blade damper .-AG
Dsnmer sellmq 5010
,
,
P-d
.*
-.. 5LM
-1
-m
-: L
2SLLA2
-&Y
:H71)?iiil
152 3
456
78910
.Oclave band centre frequency in Hz _
10
Octave band sound power levels with opposed blade damper.. .-AG
Damper semng 10010
12
Octave band sound power levels with opposed blade damper .-AG
Ds.mwr sellina 2510
50 NC 45 40 40 35 30 xl
20
25 20
63
,?:, o.lave
250 band
500 centre
1000 frequency
2000 m Hz
4000
8000
63
125 Oc[ave
250 band
500 cenlre
1000
fWJEnCY
2000 In Hz
4000 v
[{000
22
,,
Acoustic Data for Return Air

Grilles
IS
Sound power level and Pressure and miss damDer .-AS
drop with hit
15 .
50
Octave band sound power levels with hll and miss damper .-AS
namoer sewno
,.
5010
NC 45 40 40
.35
25 H
1 14
15
2 Ven m mls
3 -
4567
63
125 Octave
250 band
500 centre
1000 frequency
2000 m Hz --~
4000
8000
Octave band sound power levels with hit and miss damper .-AS
Damoer s?ltlno 100 /o
16
Octave band sound power levels with hit and miss damper .-AS
DamDer sellma 2510
50
K 45 40 40
35 30 20
?~o
25
m b3 12> 250 500 1000 lrcqucncy ?000 lr Hz 4000 _ 8000 63
125
Octave
250
500
1000 Irequency
?orm n H7
4000
_
8000
CICMW I)and cenlIc
band cerllre
23
Aerodynamic Data ~-q~~

Example
Data given:
Type AT-A, with ceiling
@
Table on page 25: A etl A eff v, = 150 1/s VL = 0.5 m/s L=l Om
LxH
= 0.041 mz
=
effect
0.043
mz
Total volume flow Maximum Distance jet velocity from the grille between
625
x1250 r325 x225
Temperature differential supply and room air
dtZ=4K
Diagram Aetf v~(f bo 2 i ,ltl/ltz=o.l3
17: = = = = = 0.041 mz
3.8 mls 1.2m 15 4x0.13 = 0.52K
Correction factors for installation without ceiling effect If the distance to the ceiling is z 0.8 m, the diagram values V~, bo,2,At, / Atz should be multiplied by a factor of 0.71.
::15m
Installation
with ceiling
effect
Installation
without
ceiling
effect
1 +
I l -+ Y
\ --i
a = 20 --
-4
1
a
?
=20 - L
T B? O.15XL
---
24
Aerodynamic Data
Grilles with ceiling effect
Effective
H In mm
AH AF TRS VAT. AF ASL. SL. TR. TRSTRE KS
outlet
area A,ti in mz
L in mm Type
225 0006
0007 0014 0011 0010 I --t
1 I
325 0009
OOII ,.0021 0017 0015
]
; i
425
OOli 0014 0029
525 0014
625
0017 0021 0043
825
0022
;
:
1025
0028 0036
] 1;;5 I
0034 0043
75
VAT AT.
0018 0036
0029
1 -
=+ 175 .-.
Al-1 AWT AT,
11
0022 0020 0057 0044

. r, no.
O 028 0025
.,
1
0034 0031
t+:: 0.040 0.114 0087 -0.078 1
%%::: 0050 0142 0060 0172
t-1 :
-
VAT. AF
ASL.
SLTRTRSTREKS
,-
0043
0034
-n-n;l--l---nn4n---
0072 0055
;.< ..n tn.
0086 --t
t-= 1 n,?, . . .
+ I
~::,,..
225
AH
0066 -
I -:-
0108 0097
1 0 129
O,,(j
t
325
A MIT . . . ., . . . . . . . . . .
I .ln.lna.lnc.na
i
H1.VAl,AbL,~L AH AWl AF
__..-j.
;-:;;;
;.;; - :G0 08i~ 0172 1 s 011-6 0228 0169 ~ i -%- 0152 0285 0214 --:% 0.174 0342 0.256
--i
AF SL TRTRS
t
I I
t :X u .. I
1
1 ;:7 u?
I
4L3
r,r
AT.VATASLSLTRTRS AH
0129
AT.VAT
0?55
025)
0427
25
~:
AF------
0299
M)ll
0.018
C1028 ().043
nn.+ nn57
0.072
0.114 0.172 02560342

CN42 0.2140,285
56
10 ,
15
20
~
A,ff in m ~
0014 (-)021
nrm
Li~15 3456810
25
II
Aerodynamic Data
Determination
of volume
flow
by measuring the air using either a pitot tube or
Volume
Figure 1
Flow Measurement
Figure 2 . /
The volume flow can be determined velocity with zero blade divergence a rotating vane anemometer.
Pitot lube Figure 1): Measurements of air velocity should be made between the blades at a number of positions to determine an arithmetic mean value v,fl ~,... The volume flow is then calculated as follows: v, [1/s] v, [m]/h] = = v,. ~,an [m/s] [m/s] Veti.mean x A. [m] x A. [m] x 1000 x 3600
41 -=m -. -. ~: / hl v
Rotating Vane Anemometer (Figure 2): The measurement instrument should be evenly traversed across the entire grille face to determine a value of V~.,m. The volume flow is then: y, [1/s] VI [m3/h] = = Vmean [m/s] v~e,fl [m/S] x A,fl [m] x A, [m] x 1.33 x 1000 x 1.33 x 3600
(L
Correction
Factors
(where
L = const.)
Without ceiling effect
With ceiling effect
26
Aerodynamic Data
Grilles
Correction for diagrams 18 and 19 (for setting of blade divergence) D la

VL At LIAtz
I I
450
35
: ~I ~ ~
600
--]
I
x 0.7
x 0.7
x 0.5 x 0.5 x 2.0 x 2.0

L X 0.3
i Y With ceiling effect B>

B >
X1.4 - --L;;$--4-.
L
X
Without
ceiling effect
0.25
L x 0.3
18
Without ceiling effect Alrstream drop or rise y due 10 temperature
19
difference
With ceiling effect in Maximum temperature difference Atz cooling mode
/r&Pinm
On diagram 19: To prevent the airstream dropping into the occupied zone reference should be made to the graph above. This shows the maximum cooling differential which may be used related to the effective outlet area and effective outlet velocity.
I
1<
/
, /
Veff
A,lf Atz . ---,=
. /
Heallng
y=atz y/atz x
4 i Coohng L ., -, w
27
1
I
Aerodynamic Data
Grilles c. {
-lr-w
Correction factors for installation without ceiling effect If the distance to the ceiling is >0.8 m, the diagram values VL, b~~, AtL /AtZ should be multiplied by a factor of 0.71.
Installation
with ceiling
effect
Installation
of Linear
Grilles
Installation
without
ceiling
effect
Linear grille L, /H1 >14 or single grilles installed In a conhnuous Ime wall to wall
Multiple spacing
grille installation of B <0.1 x L
having
28
Aerodynamic Data
Linear Grilles with ceiling effect
Effective
outlet
height
in mm
SL
AH. AF 0.030 I
.i . .
75
I
0.037
-
125 I - ----A.
225 325 I I
0.075
0.057
0.115 0.170
0.150
0.225
Diagram 20
2 \5
-1
0.030 0.037 AH, AF SL 0.0 o 0.037
Q057 0.075 0057 0075
0115 f-.)> 0150
0170
0,
4567810 L in m --%
15
20
0225
456781O
15
20
29
Aerodynamic Data
Linear
Grilles o~
Determination of Volume Flow The volume flow can be determined by measuring the air velocity with zero blade divergence using either a pitot tube or a rotating vane anemometer.
Pitot tube (Figure 1): Measurement of air velocity should be made between the blades at a number of positions to determine an arithmetic The volume flow is then calculated as mean value v follows: e mean v [1/s] = efl.rnean[m/s] x h~ff [m] x LI [m] x 1000 V [m3/h] = v.fl,~e, [m/s] x h. [m] x L, [m] x 3600
Volume
Figure 1 ,
Flow Measurement
Rotating Vane Anemometer (Figure 2): The measurement instrument should be evenly traversed across the entire grille face to determine a value of v~,,. The volume flow is then: .= Vmean s] [m/s] x h.,, Im] x L, [ml x 1.33x 1000 h ~m3/h] = v~,,n [m/s] x h,,, Im] x L, [m] x 1.33x 3600
21
Without ceiling effect airstream drop or rise y due to temperature difference

0.50 0.33 020
On diagram 22:
To prevent the airstream dropping into the occupied zone reference should be made to diagram 20. This shows the maximum cooling differential which may be used related to the effective outlet height and effective outlet velocity.
!
E
0.10
0.05 0.03
.s % L
1.00
0.50 0.30 0.20
y =Atz
x y/Atz
0,10
0,05 0,03 0.02 0.01
22
With ceiling effect

Maximum temperature difference Atz in cooling mode
Correction
Factors
(where
L = const.) Without ceiling effect
With ceiling effect
.F g
c .-
Correction for diagrams 21 and 22 (for setting of blade divergence)
AH, AF SL 0 ;75
0.150
-
0.225
30
Aerodynamic Data for Return Air

Grilles
Volume
Flow Measurement
Effective
LxH in mm 225 325 425 525 625 825 1025 1225 225 325 425 525 625 825 1025 1225 325
425 525 625 825 1025 1225
X
outlet
area
4
AH. AF 75 0.004 0.006 0.009 0.011 0.013 0.017 0.021 0.026 0.009 0.013 0.017 0,021 0.026 0.033 0.041 0.049
0,026 0.033 0.041 0.049 0.066 0.082 0.090
AWT 0.003 0.005 0.008 0.010 0.011 0.015 0.018 0.023 0.008 0.011 0.015 0.018 0.023 0.029 0.036 0.043 0.023 0.029 0.036 0.043 0.057 0.071 0.078 0.043 0.052 0.063 0.083 0.104 0.122 0.006 0.009 0.011 0.014 0.016 0.022 0.028 0.033
N3L . SL
125
0.011
0.016 0.022 0.028 0.033 0.044 0.055 0.066 0.033 0.044 0.055 0.066 0.090 0.110 0.134 0.066 0.083 0.100 0.134 0.170 0.200
0.134 0.180 0.220 0.270 0.280 0.340
Rotating Vane Anemometer: The measurement instrument should be evently traversed across the entire grille face to determine a value of v~~an. The volume flow is then:
v [1/s] = Vmea[m/s] V [m3/h] = v~,,n [m/s] x A,fl [m] x A~H [m] x f x 1000 x f x 3600
0.013 0.019 0.026 0.033 0.040 0.053 0.066 0.080 0.040 0.053 0.066 0.080 0.105 0.133 0.160
0.080 0.100 0.120 0.160 0.200 0.240
225
425 X 325 525 625 825 1025 1225 625 X 425 825 1025 1225 1025 X 525 1225
0.049 0.060 0.072 0.095 0.120 0.140 0.095 0.122 0.155 0.185
Correction
factor
0.160 0.220 0.270 0.320

0.330 0.400
..
,..
Order Details
Specification Text Grilles, grille cores and linear grilles suitable for supply or return air for installation in walls, floors or tills. Borders
(except for grille cores) with corner mitres and rear perimeter sealing strip horizontal or vertical profiled front blades individually adjustable or fixed. Knock down installation subframes for assembly on site by others, installation by visible screw fixing (border counter punched) concealed fixing or spring clip fixing. For optimum air distribution, rear assemblies are fitted to grilles which can be adjusted directly at the grille face without remounting the face. Materials: Aluminium: Grille face made from extruded aluminium sections, natural anodised finish E6-C-O. Steel: Grille face made from formed sheet steel. The surfaces are pre-treated and powder coated white (RAL 9010). Galvanised steel: Grille face made from formed galvanised sheet steel. Stainless steel: Grille face and rear assemblies made from formed, stainless sheet steel, DIN ref. 1.4301, dull pickled surface. Plastic: Grille face and rear assemblies made from plastic extrusions (hard PVC), grey colour (similar to RAL 7037), temperature resistant up to 50C. Curved blades for volume control in black (similar to RAL 9005).
Order
Code
r E- SL-AG ~ / I 191OX125
These codes need not be completed for standard products

1 / I N1
End section E ~ Intermediate M 1)

section
Aluminium grilles and grille cores, see pages 3 to 5 Steel grilles, see page 6
T7VTI I
Rear assemblies, see table on page 15
State colour
Stainless steel grilles, see page 7 Plastic grilles, see page 8 Aluminium and steel linear grilles, see pages 11 to 13
1 ) only for finear grilles
O without installation subframe .,. with installation subframe see table on page 33 O for standard construction without fixing variant . . . with fixina variant. see table-on paae 33 .-
O Standard finish E6-C-O PO Powder coated (RAL 9010) S 1 Painted according to RAL... S 2 Anodised according to Euro Standard E4-C-31 to C-35 O Standard finish RAL 9010 S 1 Painted according to RAL... S 7 Galvanised base material (only type TR) O Standard finish dull-pickled S 8 Bright finish Standard PVC finish similar to RAL 7037
LxH, see page 10 ExH MxH
J ta ~~ ,~$ $. 1 OY
v .-
see pages 11 to 13
} L
r?!!r7
Please order separately indicating size
Mitre: please order separately with indication of height!
u
Rear Assemblies E-EF spare filter media AF-90 mitrel) ES-AF-O-A ES-AF-15-A-1 ES-AF-15-A-2 1)
Example: Grille Order Make: TROX Type: AT -AG 1825 x2251A 1
Example: Linear Grille Order Make: TROX x125/El Type: M- SL-AG/2000

E- SL-AG/1910x125/Nl E- SL-AG11850X1251N1 ( ..
,.
Order Details
Rear Assemblies for grilles made from aluminium, steel or galvanised steel: Rear assemblies made from formed sheet steel, phosphate treated, stove enamelled black (RAL 9005) using electro-dipcoat process, resistant to saturated environment
for minimum of 100 hours without deterioration (DIN 50017).
Inetaliatlon Front border
Subframe wldlh In mm
Flxlng Front bordar
varlante width
In mm Spring cllp fixing 27 (28) 23 20
Concealed fixing 27 (28) 23 (20) 28120 27 (28) 23 20
rZunk@nsEd tcfdw 27 (28)
ASL AT
VAT AH-o/AH-15 AF-of EH-O, EH-15, AWT AGS SL TR TRS TR E AF-15 EF-O, EF-15, EHG-O, EFG-O EFG-15
Al Al
Al Al
o B1
B1 01
Bll
Gll Gll Ell All All All Bll Bll Bll Hll Hll Fll
o
o 0
EHG-15,
Al Al Ml Al Al Al Al c1 D1 o Ell o Cll Cll
o o o o All
KS E- AH- OIAH-15 E- AF-o/AF-15 E-SL
N1 OIAH-15 El F1
o o
> i M- AF-OIAF-15 ;M-SL
M- AH-
Ell
All
El
Aire acondicionado
4.6.9
Manmetro de contacto AIRFLOW
23.01.98
COLLAHUASI
Aire acondicionado
Hoja en blanco
COLLAHUASI
23.01.98
Inhaltsverzeichnis
Arbeitsweise Anwendungsbereich Aufbau Montage Fullen Einstellung Anschlu(l Technische Daten Zubehor ErsatzteiHiste Schaltplan Bohrschablone
List of contents
Selte/Page Method of working Range of Application Construction /rNa//ation Filling Setting w Connections Technical Data Accessories Spare patis list Circuit diagram Template 1 1 2 2 3 4 5 7 7 7 8 9
Arbeitsweise
(Drucktiberwachung) Der Druckanstieg kann auf der Skala gegen die Oberkante des Schwimmers jederzelt abgelesen werden. Nach Erreichen des eingestellten Grenzwertes schaltet das EKM aus dem Betriebszuum. Der stand in den Alarmzustand Reedschalter schlie13t den Stromkreis, das Relais aktiviert die internen Melder (Summer und rote Lampe), die Fernanzeige 230 V, 50 Hz, und schliellt den potentialfreien Kontakt. Durch entsprechenden Anschlu13 konnen Druckanstieg oder Druckabfall gernessen und uberwacht werden. An den rechten Stutzen des U-Rohres wird positiver Druck (+), an den Iinken Stutzen negativer Druck (-) angeschlossen. Dies trifft such beim messen und tiberwachen der Druckdifferenz ZU, z. B. beim Uberwachen der ansteigenden Druckdifferenz uber einen Luftfilter wegen seiner zunehmenden Verschmutzung. An dem rechten Stutzen wird der hohere Druckwert (vor dem Filter), auf den linken Stutzen der kleinere Druckwert (hinter dem Filter) angeschlossen. Der M/A Umschalter alm Gerat (8) erlaubt die Wahl zwischen einer automatischen (Schalterstellung A) Ruckschaltung in den Betriebszustand nach Abfall des Druckes unter den Grenzwert oder Anhaltung der Stormeldung bis zur manuellen (Schalterstellung M) Quittierung des Gerates vor Ort nach Wiederherstellung normaler Betriebskonditionen (z. B. Reinigung des Filters).
Method
(Monitoring
of working
of pressure)
Increasing pressure can be read from scale against the top edge of the flo the preset switch point is reached EKM switches over from the opera mode to the alarm mode. The reed s closes the circuit, the relay switches internal devices (buzzer and red lamp completes both, the external power c (output 230 K 50 Hz) and the zero vo circuit.
By using different connections the pre re rise or pressure drop can be monito The positive pressure (+) should connected to the right hand conne and the negative pressure () shoul connected to the left hand connectoc is also the case if differential pressu being monitored e.g. for monitoring pressure difference over air filters d their clogging. The higher pressure (before the filter) will be connected o right connectoc the 10wer value (b the filter) on the left connecto[
The M/A switch (8) allows the c bet ween automatic (a) reswitch to o ting mode after pressure drop below switch point and manual (M) cancell on the instrument after restoring n conditions (e.g. cleaning the filter).
Anwendungsbereich
Das Gerat Ist uberall einsetzbar, wo Gesamt- und Differenzdruck (positiv oder negativ) innerhalb des Bereiches 0-1000, 1500 bzw. 2250 Pa zu messen und zu uberwachen sind. Es ist fur Dauerbetrieb ausgelegt.
Range
of application
This irl.strument maybe used in air-m systeli LSwhere it is imporlant to m and it Klicate changes in positive, ne or differential pressures. Its range o tion covers O-7000, 1500 or2250 Pa is designed for continuous operatio
I_
2 3
7 8 9 10
nischer Verformung der Kunststoffteile 60C nicht tiberschreiten. Extreme Temperature sollte ohnehin vermleden werden wegen des Einflusses auf das spezifische Gewicht der Sperrfltissigkeit. Die Skala ist kalibriert ftir 20C und 1013 mbar. Die Abmessungen des EKM sind auf Seite 9 ersichtlich, diese Skizze client such als Bohrschablone. Das Gehause mittels den mitgelieferten selbstschneidenden Schrauben 3,9x32mm befestigen.
teed 60C because of possible mech cal distortion of fhe plasfic housing. treme temperature should also be avo because of variations of the specific sity of/he manometer fluid. The scale is calibrated for 20C and mbar. Page 9 shows the fixing dimen for the EKM which can also be used template. Secure the housing by mea the two self-tapping screws 3.9x32 supplied and replace the front cover.
4 5
Fullen
(siehe Abbildung
2)
Filling
(see figure 2)
11 12
13 14
Die schwarzen Schutzkappen (zuerst auf der rechten Seite des U-Rohres) vorsichtig abnehmen. In der Regel wird das Gerat gefullt geliefert. Der Fltissigkeitspegel sollte nach der Montage und danach in regelmaBigen Zeitabstanden kontrolliert und gegebenenfalls nachgeftillt werden. Hierbei wird AIRFLOW-Sperrflussigkeit
Remove black caps from the right limb by carefully twisting off. The instrum will normally be supplied already filled level of the fluid should be checked installing the unit and thereafter at re intervals. If necessary top up the fluid using A1RF1OW manometer ,,Technical Data by inserting the sy
6
Abbildung
Figure 1
Aufbau
Das EKM besteht im wesentlichen aus einem U- Rohr-Manometer (7), .einem Reedschalter, integriert in einem verstellbaren Kontakttrager (3), einem Relais (14), zwei Anzeige-Lampen (1O) und einer akustischen Warneinrichtung (1 1). Das Gerat ist such mit einem Haltestromkreis versehen, der mittels Schalter (8) eingestellt werden kann, Das Gehause (1) besteht aus schlagzahem Polystyrol (PS 454 H).
Construction
The EKM comprises a U-tube-manometer (7), a reed switch, integrated into a setable switch carrier (3), a relay (14), two signal lamps (10) and an audible warning device (1 1). With the switch (3) the unit can also be set to provide a hold-on function. The case (1) is made from tough Polystyrol (PS 454 H).
Montage
da anbringen, wo normale Temperature und Luftfeucntigkeit herrschen und es vor Erschuttewngen und starkem Schmutzanfall ges~hutzt ist. Direkte Sonnenanstrahlung sollte iermieden werden. Die Umgebungs- oder Eigentemperatur darf wegen mogliche[ mecha2
Installation
The unit should be fixed to a flat surface, vertical in two planes, under &nbient conditions of temperature and humidity. Direct exposure to sunshine must be avoided. This area has aLso to be free of vibration and precipated dust and dirt. The environmental temperature must not ex-
Das Gerat senkrecht
Abbildung
FiQu
(s. Technische Daten) unter Verwendung der mitgelieferten Einftillspritze Iangsam in den rechten Schenkel des U-Rohres eingefullt. Oberkante Schwimmkorper (4) muf3 in etwa mit der Nullposition der Skala (2) iibereinstimmen. Bei Luftblasenbildung unterhalb des Schwimmkorpers durch vorsichtiges Klopfen auf den Schwimmkorper die Luft entweichen lassen. Sollte Sperrfltissigkeit versehentlich tiberIaufen, ist sie sorgfaltig abzuwischen und besonders darauf zu achten, da13 keine Reste der Fltissigkeit im Innern des Gehauses verbleiben.
supplied into the righl limb of the U-tube and pouring in the manometer fluid slowly. The top of the float (4) has to be roughly \evel with the zero of the scale (2). In the event of an air bubble forming beneath the float, it can be removed by tapping the float down into the fluid. Should fluid spill onto the housing, it must be carefully wiped off taking special care not to leave any traces inside the unit.
Anschlu B (siehe
Abbildung
4)
Connections
(see figure 4)
Einstellung
(siehe Abbildung
3)
Setting
Up
ELEKTRISCH: Samtliche elektrischen Anschltisse erfolgen an der Klemmleiste (12). Zur Zugentlastung (13) wird das Kabel jeweils mit einer Schelle im Gehause befestigt. Die Anschlusse erfolgen gema8 Schaltplan, der sich im Gerat befindet. Der Zugang zur Klemmleiste kann verbessert werden durch vorsichtiges Wegschwenken des U-Rohres, siehe Abb. 4. Nach Herstellung der elektrischen Anschl.usse den Gehausedeckel wieder anschrauben und die unbenutzten Kabeldurchfuhrungen mit den mitgelieferten Blindstopfen erschlietien. DRUCK: Das Gerat unter Verwendung der selbstdichtenden Anschluf3flansche und des PVC-Schlauches an das System anschlief3en.
ELECTRICAL: All electrical connections the instrument are made at the term block (12). The cables should be firmly cured inside the housing with the c clamp (13). The connections are show the wiring diagram, fixed inside the ins ment. The access to the terminal block be improved by swinging one arm o U-tube out of the housing as show figure 4. After the electrical connection made, the instrument front cover sh be screwed on again and the unused c openings should be closed using the b caps supplied.
(see figure 3)
Der Nullpunkt der Skala und die Oberkante des Schwimmkorpers mussen ubereinstimmen. Gegebenenfalls nach Losen der Randelmutter die Skala durch vertikale Verschiebung nachjustieren. Anhand des Randelknopfes (6) wird der Zeiger auf den gewunschten Schaltpunkt eingestellt.
The zero mark of the scale should be level with the top of the float. If necessary, 1oosen the fjxing nut and adjust the scale vertically. Set (he scale pointer to the pressure at which the unit is required to switch, using knob (6).
PRESSURE: The instrument is connec to the pressure system using the self Iing flanges and the PVC-tubing suppli
Abbildung 4
Figure 3
Figure
Technische
(!echn,sche Anderun
atnI
alten
EKM 1000
EKM 1500
EKM 2250
TechnivIDaia
(can be ch.m75
hou! notice
Bitte beachten
Sie
Please
note
Bei einseitigem DruckanschIu13 ist darauf zu achten, dafl der Met3bereich 1000, 1500 bzw. 2250 Pa nicht iiberschritten wird. Sonst kann es zum Herausdriicken der Sperrflussigkeit kommen.
Wird das Gerat zur Druckdifferenzsollte der DruckUberwachung installiert,
If the instrument is used for monitoring pressure relative to atmosphere the measuring range of 1000, 1500 or 2250 Pa respectively not to be exceeced. Otherwise the manometer fluid could be blown out of the U-tube. For differential pressure use, the air system should only be connected whilst it is not under pressure, A static pressure of up to 1,5 bars is allowed. If applied on both sides of the U-tube the pressure difference is limited to the range only. Do not exceed the measuring range on any sidfl of the U-tube in this case.
anschluf3 nur bei abgeschalteter Anlage erfolgen, da der statische Druck im System durchaus hoher als 2250 Pa sein kann. Die zulassige statische Belastung des EKM ist 1,5 bar, Wenn dieser Druck auf beiden Seiten des U-Rohres anliegt, ist rwr die Differenz der Druckwerte an beiden Anschlussen fur den Me13bereich ausschlaggebend. Eine einseitige UberIastung des Me13bereiches ist dann zu vermeiden.
Artikel-Nr, MeB-/Schaltberelch Skalenteilstnch Wiederholgenm_igkel! Ruckschaltdifferenz Sperrflussigkeil s. G. Uberdrucksicherhelt Netzanschlu13 Auf3endurchmesser der Anschlut31eitungen Ausghnge: 1 Umschalter 1 Umschalter Scha!tleistung Feinsicherung (9) Uberspannungsfestigkeitsklasse 2 Abmessung ca. Gewicht ca.
17001
17010
17011
Cafa/ogue No.
0-1000 Pa
20 Pa
1 Pa 30 Pa 0,784
0-1500 Pa 20 Pa 1,5 Pa 45 Pa 1,114 1,5 bar 230 V-,50HZ max. 10 mm 230V -, 50 HZ
0-2250 Pa 50 Pa 2,3 Pa 65 Pa 1,730
Adjustable Range
Ov
5A M 5A
243x
102x 44mm 400 g
7 Resolution Repeatability Hysteresis Manometer f/u/d Max. permissible press Power supp/y Cable diameter for electrical connections outputs: 1 changeover contac 7 changeover contac Switch current max. Cartridge fuse (9) Excess vohage protecti c/ass 2 Dimension approx. Weight approx.
Zubehor
(im Lieferumfang)
Accessories
(supplied with instrume
CE-Zeichen
Das EKM erfullt die Anforderungen der Europaischen Niederspannungsrichtlinie ECC 73/23 und der Richtlinien fiir elektromagnetische Vertraglichkeit EN 50081/1 (Emission) und EN 50082/1 (Imission) und tragt das CE-Zeichen.
CE-Mark
The EKM meets the requirements of the European Low Voltage Regulation ECC for 73J23 as well as the Regulations Electromagnetic Compatibility - Genera tic Immunity Standard EN 50081/1 (Emission) and EN 5008211 (Imission) and is marked with the CE-Mark
1 Meter PVC-Schlauch 2 selbstdichtende PVC-Anschlu13flansche mit Schrauben 1 Flasche Reservesperrfltissigkeit 1 Einftillspritze 2 Befestigungsschrauben 1 Gebrauchsanleitung
1 metre PVC-tubing 2 self-sealing duct connectors with screws 1 bottle spare fluid 1 syringe 2 Fixing screws
7 Operation Instruction
I Ersatzteilliste
Bezeichnung Kontakttrager, komplett mit Reedschalter U-Rohr LeiterDlatte, kom~lett 1 PVC-Schlauch blau PVC-Schlauch rot PVC Anschlut3flansche Sperrflussigkeit 500 ml S. G. 0,784 (EKM 1000) s. G. 1,114 (EKM 1500) S. G. 1,730 (EKM 2250) Schlauchhalter fur Wandmontage Schlauchanschlu13 stutzen Schwimmer fur EKM 1000 Schwimmer fur EKM 1500 Schwimmer fur EKM 2250 Randelknopf Art.-Nr. Cat.-No. 17580 17503 17585 55005 55006 55032 55020 55024 55132 55045 17583 17582 17584 17585 17586
Spare
parts
list
Description
Switch carrier complete with Reed switch U-tube Printed circuit board comple PVC-tubing blue PVC-tubing red PVC-duct-connectors Manometer fluid 500 ml S. g. 0.784 (EKM 1000) s, g. 1.114 (EKM 1500) S. g. 1.730 (EKM 2250) Tubing clambs for wall ins tallation Pressure connectors Float for EKM 1000 F/oat for EKM 1500 Float for EKM 2250 Knurled knob
Scha,.plan Circuit diagram
230 V-, L
f \ L J
I
N;
~.. _.. -.,_
f
P
-------------:-i, z:::~%::~::;~ 1~ c
~7
%-1
.3
I...._.. _.._..
_.._..
-..--...
Maximale Kontaktbelastung / switch current max.: 5 A, 230 V -, 50 Hz. Au13endurchmesser der Anschlu131eitungen max. 10 mm Max. cab/e diameter for e/ecfrica/ connections: 10 mm VDE-RICHTLINIEN beachten! Prufspannung Relais-Kontakte: 750 V - eff. Observe VLE or ec@a/ent regulations when wiring! Test vol(age relay -con(acfs
750 V - elf.
Blockschaltbild Block diagram J

2?50 %
1 A!JI o
R,l],, 6,1)
. . . . . . ... . . . . . ..
E\cIw ! >Ce(,!ng :
?) !,ln,ll C?-PJI . ...,,.... : : .;
Fvj
:. .,
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .......
Bohrschablone
Zwei Lecher 3mm Durchmesser bohren. Das Gerat mittels zwei selbstschneidenden Schrauben 3,9 x 32 mm (werden mitgeliefert) befestigen.
Template
Drill two holes 3 mm diameter. Secure instrument with two self-tapping screws 3,9 x 32 mm supplied.
14 ~D 7
: -
-4
I
_.
L------174
1-
Aire acondicionado
4.6.10
Interruptor de presin diferencial para aire DUNGS
23.01.98
COLLAHUASI
Aire acondicionado
Hoja en blanco
COLLAHUASI
23.01.98
Klima-Set Differenz-Druckwachter
fur Luft Typ Typ Typ Typ Typ

5.13
KS 150 C2 KS 300 C2 KS 600 C2 KS 1000 C2 KS 3000 C2
DIJNGS@
technic
!,
/,,
...
Technik Zwei getrennte Druckkammern mlt druckseitigem Anschlu13 an Schlauchmppeln. Je Druckkammer ein gestufter Anschlu13 von a 6 auf 04 mm. Sollwert (Druckdifferenz) direkt einstellbar. Sollwert von au~en durch die Klarsichthaube erkennbar. Genaue Funktion durch spezielles, reibungsfrei gelagertes Schallsystem. Kontaktumschaltung erfolgt bei Uber- bzw. Unterschreiten des elngestelllen Sollwerles. KompleLles Montagesel beigepackt.
Anwendung Anwendungsgebiet ist die Ltiftungs- und Klimatechnik, DDC. Speziell die Uberwachung von Luftkanalen, Filtern, Antriebsaggregaten und Geblasen.
Funktion des indiviEci Ubcr- bzw. Untcrschrcitun duell eingestr?lltec Schalipunkles wird vom eingebaulen LJmschalter der Slrom?is geoflnet oder geschlossen - je nach ,,ontaklbelegung - und damil das gewtinschte Signal abgegeben. Der Differenzdruckwachter des KlimaSels arbellet ohne Hilfsenergie.
DDC
- Ariwendung cier Klima-Sels sinci
Die Schallkonlakle
aus Feinsilber galvanisch vergoldet, Itir =( DC) 24V; 0,01.A Beim Einsalz des Klima-Sets in der konvenlionellen Technik bei -(AC) 250 V, ohmsche Last 5A, induktive Last 3A, cos q 0,6 brennt der vergoldete Uberzug an den Schallkontakten ab, Dadurch ist eine spatere DDC - Anwendung nicht mehr moglich.
Achtung sicllergestcllt sein, da13kein KonEs lmu13 densal in den Druckwachter gelangen kann. 13eiMinuslemperaluren beslehl die Gefahr der Vereisung, dies kann zu Fehlfunktion oder Ausfall des Gerates ftihrem
Technische
Daten .. 5 kPa Umgebungstemperatur Mediumstemperatur Gehause: Membrane: Schaltkontakte: -15C bis +60C -15C bis +80C Polycarbonat EPDM Basis Feinsilber galvanisch
Max, Betriebsuberdruck Tempera! urbereich
Werkstoffe
vergoldet,
fur =( DC) 24V; O,OIA geeignet
Schaltstrom
bei -(AC) 250 V, ohmsche Last 5A, induktive Last 3A, cos q 0,6 Anschluf3 Uber Kabeleinftihrung PG 11, mit Zugentlastung, fur Kabel a 7 bis @12,5 mm Standard: 1P54 nach DIN 40050, senkrecht, an Schraubenklemmen
Iektrischer
Schutzart Einbaulage Justage
1P65 auf Anfrage
vorzugsweise
bitte beachten
werkseitig bei senkrechter Einbaulage justiert bei fallendem Druck KS 150 C2. Justiert bei steigendem Druck KS 300 C2, KS 600 C2, KS 1000 C2, KS 3000 C2
Lieferumfang
Klima-Set
hler LGW C2
Zubehor/Ersatzteile siehe Tabelle rechts Bestell-Nr.219 806 Bestell-Nr.125 674 Bestell-Nr.090 209 Bestell-Nr.124 016 Bestell-Nr.083 Bestell-Nr.131 Bestell-Nr,212 428 615 220
Ersatz-Druckwachter
Fur Ftir Fur Fur Fur KS KS KS KS KS 150 300 600 1000 3000 C2 C2 C2 C2 C2
fur Klima-Set Bestell-Nr. Bestell-Nr. Bestell-Nr. Bestell-Nr. Bestell-Nr. 217778 217779 217780 217781 217782
1. Differenzdruckwac 2, Haltewinkel 3, Anschlu8schlauch

5.
04x1 ,5x2000
4, 6 Befestigungsschrauben eine Bohrschablone fur Haltebvinkel und Schlauchanschltisse zwei Schlauchanschlusse Verlangerungsrohr Betriebs-und Montageanleilung
, 8,
Dlfferenzdwckwac 17 mit Haltewinkel ter
Befestigungsschrauben
Anschlufischlauch
04xl
,5x2000
.r- . .
Schlauchanschluf3 Verfangerungsrohr Bohrschablone
Mafle
(mm)
,:J
!,,
,-.
-----
in! ---
I
, . ._ -
1--___
--
I--
Druckanschluf3 Jede Druckkammerbesitzt eirren Druckanschluf3 bolzen a 6/0 4 mm fur den Stufen-
1.A,I I
Anschlu13 Anschluf3
P1 (+) P2 (-)
= hoherer = niederer
Druck Druck
06 04
Prinzipschema Anwendungs-
und Anschluf3beispiele
Anschluf3
muB geoff bleiben!
.F
q
IMl
m
PI
Anschluf3
P2
Anschlut3
net
IP
q
* IMl
P1
Anschlui3
P2
Wl
Uberwachung eines Systemunterdruckes Zur Uberwachung des Druckes in Systemen mit Unterdruck. Das Klima-Set wird uber AnschluB P2 (-) mil delm Luftkanal verbunden. Der Anschlu13 PI (+) wird nicht mit dem Luflkanal verbunden. Die Schlauchanschlu8 tulle von Anschlul? PI (+) darf nicht verschlossen werden, es mu13 eine Verblndung zur Atmosphere bestehen. Achtung: Durch den Anschlu13 PI darf kein Schmutz in das Gerat eindringen! Der Anschluf3 des hoheren Uberdruk~erfolgt immeran Anschlu13 PI (+). Der Anschluf3 des hbheren Unterdruk@ erfolgt immer an Anschlu13 P2 (-).
Filteruberwachung Zur Uberwachung der Verschmutzung eines Filters kann das Klima-Set wie oben gezeigt angeschlossen werden. In Flu13richtung des Volumenstromes wird der Anschluf3Pl (+)vorund der Anschlu8 P2 (-) nach dem Filler mit dem Luflkanal verbunden.
Geblasetiberwachung Bei der Geblaseuberwachung wird der Anschlu13 PI (+) druckseitig nach dem Geblase und der Anschlu13 P2 (-)vordem Geblase mit dem Luflkanal verbunden.
Beispiel - Systemi.iberdruck hoherer Uberdruck: z,B. 240 Pa: Anschlull PI (+) niederer Uberdruck: z,B. 180 Pa: AnsclW3 P2 (-)
Beispiel - Systemunterdruck niederer Unterdruck:

-130 Pa: Anschlu13 PI (+) z.B. hbherer Unterdruck: -210 Pa: Anschlufl P2 (-) z.B.
Klima-Set Differenz-Druckwachter
fur Luft
Typ
TyP Typ TyP Typ
KS 150 C2 KS 300 C2 KS 600 C2 KS 1000 C2 KS 3000 C2
DLINGs@
technic
Elektrischer Anschlu13 Der elektrische Anschlu13 erfolgt nach VDE an Schraubklemmen.
Schalttunmlonen bei steigendem Differenzdruck: 1 NC off net 2 NO schliell bei fallendem Differenzdruck: 1 NC schliell 2 NO off net
-..
..
. ..
Schaltdifferenz
Druck am tvlsflwe, k + L ~
Ap
:
2 COM m I 1
NO
E,ns!ell-Toleranz oberm Schallckuck < ~. : _o__ g . ,;,
~====_~/
u
P
NC
FL
~____ ;
___~>
e,
Schalldruck
Die Schaltdifferenz Ap ist die Druckdifferenz zwischen dem oberen und dem unteren Schaltdruck.
Zubehor
Set Doppeladapter
Der Doppeladapter ermoglicht den Anschlul? zusatzlicher Servicegerate, z.B. Schragrohrmanometer. Lieferumfang Set Doppeladapter
+El
:. :j,,, .:,:,:,::: :;
2 Doppeladapler 2 Verschlu13kappen BestelI-Nr. 221 167
Ullr
1
1, ):
,::: .... . . . ::, ~.!.~.~..,: ,..
Technische KurzUbersicht lmbar=100Pa=O,lkPa =lOmmWS Typ MeBbereich einstellbar [Pa] 204070150 300 600
1Pa=O,Ol mbar=O,l mmWS Schalt differenz Ap[pa] <18 <20 530 <40 <80 dienen, vorbehalten. max. Betriebsuberdruck [kPa] 5 5 5 5 5 Bestell-Nr.
KS 150 C2 KS 300 C2 KS 600 C2 KS 1000 C2 KS 3000 C2 Anderungen,die
217773 217774 217775 217776 217777
100-1000 300-3000 dem technischen Forlschrilt
Af?5h _ _ _
H[L NR 16313 01
Verwaltung und Betrieb Karl Dungs GmbH & Co. Siemenstraf3e 6-10 D-73660 Urbach Telefon (07181) 804-0 Telefax (07181) 804-166
Korrespondenzanschrift Karl Dungs GmbH & Co. Postfach 1229 D-73602 Schorndorf
Aire acondicionado
4.6.11
Calefactor DEVITEMP / sala de control
23.01.98
COLLAHUASI
Aire acondicionado
Hoja en blanco
COLLAHUASI
23.01.98
devitemp 103,106, I03T, 106T 303, 303T (A)

These fan heaters are suitable for fixed and use. The heaters are splash proof and portable may be used both in dry and humid rooms.
devitemp however,
fan heaters require no maintenance, it is recommended to clean the fan heater of dust by means of compressed air after long time of use or after use in dusty rooms.
Electrical Installation installation must be carried
devitemp
II0,115,118,110T,115T, I18T,121,121T(B)
These fan heaters are suitable for portable use or may be installed permanently at a height of 1,8 metres however, devitemp 121-121T must only be used as fixed fan heaters and installed at a height of at least 1,8 metres. The heaters are splash proof and may be used both in dry and humid rooms. N.B. When disassembling the housing, see fig. C.
out with a multipoled contact breaker with a contact space measuring at least 3 mm per pole. Permanent installation must always be performed by an authorised electrician in accordance with current regulations. Only the electrician has knowledge of current regulations. The terminals are accessible if the screws and the plate on the right side are removed. N.B. When disassembling the housing, see fig. C
Permanent
installation
(fixed) horizontally or at a
The heater may be installed downward gradient of 15.
Overheating protection The fan heaters have a safety cut-out which disconnects the supply in the event of the fan motor failing or if overheating occurs as a result of the heater being covered. If the fan heater does not start after re-connection you should call an electrician. Warning Parts of the fan housing become hot during use. The fan heater should not be installed beneath electrical switches and sockets. Warning! Do not use the fan heaters near bath tubs, cabinet showers, wash basins, or swimming pools. Concerning use of fixed fan heaters, which may be used in a bathrooms, the fan heater must be installed in such a way, that the power switch and other controls cannot be reached from the bath tub or cabinet shower. The fan heater must not be placed near inflammable objects. The spaces mentioned here are only minimum spaces. The fan heater must not be covered when in use. Timer To set the time delay, rotate the knob clockwise and then turn back anticlockwise to required setting.
1. The fixings are attached to the housing by use of 4 screws. The 2 spacing washers are placed between the housing and the tubular frame (in the bottom hole). 2. Mark the hole positions. Drill out 4 holes to attach the fixing to the wall. Use M8 screws. 3. Now fix the heater in the top screws and attach the bottom screws.
Use of devitemp List of signs:
o +
: c
off
Fan on Half fan and half heat Full fan and half heat
da d
Min. 250 mm A: min. 1500 mm B: min. 2500 mm +
m;
o
000 0
I
1
Min. 250 mm
o
7
Min. 150 mm 4>
Aire acondicionado
4.6.12
Lista de cables y esquema de conexiones elctricas para la caja de mecanismos del interruptor del acondicionador de aire Kuthe
23.01.98
COLLAHUASI
Aire acondicionado
Hoja en blanco
COLLAHUASI
23.01.98
I I
$
,/
r-a
0
4 O-I
Ex >
c-)
<
CE g
mel-3cw
Ooooc
1-
i .EVAPORATEUR POWER COMPRESSOR MOTOR CONTROL FAN MOTOR CON DENS( FAN dOTOR HEATER
QG
TCLEMECANIOUE LS1-CJ2531 A65 10138 16 A cm
f K
4(30 v
V5r3 Hz
-+T J
J T s R o P o N M L K J I H G F E D c B I A h112]31415 16117118119 ] 20121122123124

MARK
IT
LZ J L3
L! 13 W
03
04
TELfMfCANIOUE CV2M14 de 6.310A +C,V2JD01 10 f+so.( I
TELEMECAN1OUE CV2M05 de 0,63 b 1 A +WWJ3011O F+so.o
W 14 15 >
1]
54
1 II
lJ
K3
lfLfUICANIOUE LC1-00910 M7
,,
N
l!,
?.
K4
TfLCMEWIOUf LC1-OL291O M7
h-f
54 ,> i 14
,6
II
06 TCLfMfCANIOUE GUI -N 10,38 1 A
u
Ml
3% TYPE POWER TENSION INTENSITY \617\819110\lll
06
BN
28
$02%S542
.
1
@
8N
BROOK HANSEN WUD 10OLA 2,2 kw 400 v/3 5,4 A
NfXT PAGE 03
II
29
GEBAHRT jyoy 200 400 0,55 v/3 A
FRANCE AIR HCFT 4 400 320 W 400 v/3 0,75 A
!!4
89 V.3
12
W3
M3
3%
L.l
ETIREX 40015 kw v A
34
AR
3X1,5 400 6.85
B
12\ 131141151 ] 251261271281 29130131132133134135 ]36]3
CRANCKASE HEATER
FROM PACE 02 7
L
MOTOR COMPRESSOR HEATER
EvAPORATOR
COMPRESSOR
CONDENSOR
SOLENOID VALVE
HEATER
!8 s]
64
v
u
ROOM THERMOSTAT + ON OFF ON PANEL
T 1, 1, \ 2F ~~ \
T
5
py-+----+
8N

17 EJN(
s
K1 R
Q
M N
35
--l
1+ 30
20
03
BNb 26
23
Q3
lb-d
I
HEATER
L K
eP r I I
1
BN
~- BN
I
!7
rl
I
lCRANCKA5E , HEATER
I MOTOR cOMPRESSOR , HWTER
I I I
(0][
II
_L; ~
BN 20
BN
31
L
25
21
)2
\
02
21
Q1 ? 01
27 ~_
24
.T
I
24
30
PRESSOSTAT I coNoEN~TION I CONTROL HP 22
HP
__ Ll
02
1 ~ h:olo J
2J 34
WT.
BN( )25 28
22 ~ g @ g ~ g
.5
.5
112\
31415161718
9]101111
12 I13I14I15]16
117118119120121122
]23124]25
126127128
]29130]31]
321331
3413513613 ... .
I r--
z
Y
x w v
u T
0
c
L ,
c c c , ; [
( 1 1 1 [ (
i i
1
E
E . T
I
I
,s)
h\{z\314151617181_!_1101
11112113114115 ]16117\ 181 19120121122123 ]241 25]26\
27128129130131132133
134135
]36]37
< mlu
SO 3Wd *N NV_Id : M30M0
I
IOV3690L
2 690,! 0000CQ j
J~UOISfI~ UDl,j.N
yl~~nil NOllVINVldWl 2
a v r. 3 a
31WI ~fjgo~()
=: ,-
,-
0 m
q
P
4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I
. . . . . . . . . . .
,@
L
L
0 0
L1
t.k 0 0 0
JI
1
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
D. D I!? _ _ D
0
al
!
r.
U3
m co r.
In
rc r.
Aire acondicionado
4.6.13
lista de piezas para el esquema no. 2504 925

Lista de piezas sulfuro Lista de piezas xido Esq. no. 2504925 Ventilacin y aire acondicionado Esq. no. 2504925 Aperturas en muros y detalles
23.01.98
COLLAHUASI
Aire acondicionado
Hoja en blanco
COLLAHUASI
23.01.98
LISTA DE PIEZAS PIEZAS SUELTAS
Krupp Fordertechnik
Lista de piezas / Piezas sueltas
Confeccionado: Rev. Nr.:
01.07,1997
Pagina:
1/ 8
Centro costes-KF 84.078484 [ Numero pedido-KF 30063616/01 8 Proveedor: BKL GrnbH, H.-M .-SchleyeStrtr 30, D-47877 Willichhllernania . Lugar de entrega: Willich Emisor: I Sec.pos LEta pieza pieza No suelta
I
Comis. No.: 809727- Suibhidl Fecha de emisi6n: 01.07.1997
Lieta pieza Pos.
Piano ntimero
Referencia Cantid. ME pos.pedido de-a 3 1 1 1 2 1 1 3 1 3 8 2
Denominaci6n SPIE
Cantidad etiquetas
Peso neto kg
Fecha de disponibilidad embalaje
Otros (p.ej. Item Cliente)
Aparato climatizador/air conditioner, ROCA ASA-I 5 Aparato resistencia electrica DewV heater Dewi Aparato HVAC / Air handling unit VK 18 Aparato climatizador/air conditioner, Eureco 6 V)( Supervision de fiftroldifference pessure switch for fitter, EKM 1000 Superv.diferencia presi6n/difference pressure switch for ventilator, KS1 OOOC2 Compuerta antiiicendio/ fire damper, FK-K90, 357x 357mm Compuerta antiincendio/ fire damper, FK-K90, 400x 357mm Compuerta de celoskd mutti-leaf damper, JZ-AG, 357 x 357mm Compuerta de celoski mutti-leaf damper, JZ-AG, 400x 357mm Reja de ventilaci6rd grilles, TR-DG, 625x 225mm Reja de ventilaci6n/ grilles, TR-DG, 425x 125mm Reja protecci6n intempene con compuerta sobrepresi6n/ weather-resistant Iouvres with mufti-leaf damper, WG-KUL 2,600 x 345mm Reja de ventitaci6n/ .
arilles TR-AG 625
Y
225mm
~Krum Fthdertechnik .
ILista de i)iezas / Piezas sueltas .

. _. . _
lConfeccionado: Rev. Nr.:
01.07.1997
P@ina:
218
1 Centro costee-KF 84.0784 84] Ndmero pedido-KF 3006361 6/01 8 Proveedor: BKL GmbH, H.-M. -SchIeyeStrtr 30,47877 WMch Lugar de entrega: Willich Emisor: I
I
I Comis. No.: 809727- Sutbhidl Fecha de emishhr: 01.07.1997
Sec.pos LEta pieza pieza No suetta 15. 16.1 16.2 17.1 17.2 18.1 18.2 18.3 18.4 18.5 18.6
Lsta pieza Poe.
Piano ntimero
Referencia]Cantid. Poe.pedido de-a i 1 3 3 3 3 12m 3 1 3m 1 1
ME
Denominaci6n SPIE
Cantidad etiquetes
Pes; neto kg
Fecha de d~onibilidad embalaie
Otros (P .ej. ttem Cliente)
. 2405925 2405925 2405925 2405925 2405925 2405925 2405925 2405925 2405925 2405925 2405925
Unitm eldstice/ flexible duct, 360 x 300mm Uni6n el~stica/ fletible duct, 340x 675mm Urri6n elMica/ flexibte duct, 750x 620mm Canal/air duct, 334 x 667mm Canal/air duct, 741 x613mm Tubo plegado/air duct hose, D1 OOmm Curva/bowe 90, D1 OOmm Compuerta de eetrangukwh5n/reducing damper, D1 OOmm Tubo plegado/air duct hose, D125mm Curvaibowe 9(Y, D125mm I Protecci6n de manipulaci6n/grab protection, D1 25mm
Krupp Fordertechnik

..
Confeccionado: Rev. Nr.: -
01.07.1997
Pdgina:
318
Centro costes-KF 84.0784 84] 30063616/01 8 Ntimero pedido-KF Proveedor: BKL GmbH, H.-M .-SchleyeStrtr 30, D-47877 Wiltic~Atemania Lugar de entrega: Willich Emisor:
Comis. No.: 809727- Sulbhidl Fecha de emisitm: 01.07.1997
Sec.pos Lista pieza N pieza suetta
Lista pieza Pos.
Piano ntimero
Referencia Carrtid. ME pos.pedido de-a
Denominaci6n SPIE
Cantidad etiquetas
Peso neto kg
18m 1 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Brida de canal con esquinas de uni&n/ air duct flanges with corner connection Canal/air duct, D 125/500x 500 Curva de canaUak duct bowe 90,345 x 315 Canal/air duct, 600/600 7001g Curva de canallair duct bowe 90, 600/600 Canal/air duct, 600/600 9801g Curva de canaUair duct bowe, 600/600 450/600 CanaUair duct, 450/600 11501g CanaUair duct, 450/600 3001g CanaUair duct, 450/600 15001g CanaUair duct, 450/600 1500ig CanaUair duct, 450/6008801g CanaUair duct, 450/600 400/600 CanaUair duct, 450/400 15001g CanaUair duct, 450/400 1000lg CanaUair duct, 450/400 12001g Pieza-T/T-piece, 450/400 330/400 CanaUair duct, 330/400 15001g CanaUair duct, 330/40012001g CanaUair duct, 330/400 11001g Pieza-T~-piece, 330/400 300/400 Canal/air duct, 300/400 300/360
Krup p Ftkdertechnik
Centro costes-KF 84.0784 84] 30&3816/01 8 NLmero pedido-KF Proveedoc BKL GmbH, H.-M.-SchleyeStrtr Lugar de entrega: Wltich Emisor:

.
Confeccionado: Rev. Nr.: .
01,07.1997 -
P~gina:
418
30, D-47877 Willich/Alemania
Comis. No.: 809~27 - Sulbhidl Fecha , emiai6n: 01.07.1997 de .
Sec.pos Lists pieza pieza No auelta
Lista pieza Pos.
Piano numero
Referencia Cantid. ME pos.pedido de-a
Denominaci6n SP/E .
Cantidad etiquetas
Peso neto kg
Fecha de dsponibiiidad embalaje
Otras (p.ej. Item Cliente)
r=
t==
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 . 1 1 1
1
CanaMair duct, 300/360 Canahir duct, 300/360 Canal/air duct, 300/380 Curva de canaU air duct b~e, annncn #vu/u&?v Canal/air duct, { 380/360 atww~o CanaUair duct, :,. CanaUair duct, 360/3[60 ~anc,,_,_ aucr -An,-,-m au~r J....!,, ti,tiw .-.., aUair ---., . --,. ,....Can~. _- d Id JOUI*U . Can#air . . . . .. 360/360 . . . Amt ?
1000ig 1000lg 9401g

.JvU1 .JuU
-cnntm
15001g 15001~ 150W9 4nnr , ilg .1Uq

A-.
I
~i
I 1
1: I i ++% I
+1
1
1 1
I ;
I
11601( CantaUair duct; 360/360 10001! musir -=, -w,.. 1 O(j(jll Carw... A 1A afmlq) Can:--- iwair auct, a-- JIW660 15001! a~air duct, 360/400 11001~ ,--- .aUair duct, 360/400 11001! lCanal/air duct, 360/400 15001! Canal/air duct, 360/400 150011 Canal/air M, 360/40011001{
---- .. . -v., [Canzdkiir A d
Itbnallair -u. .=.
,,
360/400 ,
360/400
1~Oo14
9
I
1
i 1
I I , I , I t
111 I
15001$ CanaUair duct *n)Ann 4+fifilcanaua~ duct, 360/400 150Mg I Canf ,--.Wair duct, 200/300 139019
M.,
Air+
[Krupp Fordertechnik
Lista de piezas t Piezas sueltas

I
.
01.07.1997
PAgina:
5/ 8
F=
Proveedc 1,,Aar Am
1 costes-KF ?entro imm -
84.078484
3006361
1,,marn ~e(jkj04(F
6/01 8
Sec.pos LBta pieza pieza No suelta
Lists pieza Pos.
Piano numero
Refarencia Cantid, ME pos.pedido de-a
Denominaci6n SPIE
Cantidad etiquetas
Peso ueto kg
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 10 10 _15 1 1 1
Canal/air duct, 200/300 250/550 Canal/air duct, 300/200 250/550 Curva de canaVair duct bowe, 300/200 Canal/air duct, 300/200 5701g Curva de canal/air duct bowe, 300/200 Curva de canal/air duct bowel 300/200 CanaUeir duct, 300/200 15001g Canal/air duct, 300/200 1500tg Canal/air duct, 300/200 7001g Curva de canallair duct bowel 300/200 Canal/air duct, 300/200 15001g Canal/air duct, 300/200 130019 Canal/air duct, 345/600 2601g Canal/air duct, 345/600 2601g Collar de protecci6n a la lluvia/ rain protection 10001g Angulo /angle 50/50 1OOOlg Protecchh a la Iluvia - Brida de canal/ rain protection - air duct flange 10001g Curva de canal con aislaci6n/ air duct bowe, with isolation, 200/300 Canal/air duct, with isolation, 200/300 8201g Curva de canal con aiaJaci6n/
lKrupP Fordertechnik . .
flnntrn , ,
t
I
I
ILista de m ~iezas / Piezas sueltas

1
lConfeccionado: ]Rev. Nr.:
01.07.1997
I
I
P6aina:
618
1
rwI.+mc-UE Ww,=a,,,
! QA
T.,
l17QA
I 7 QA I
-r
T
I
Ntimero pedido-KF ]30063616/01 8 Proveedoc BKL GmbH, H.-M.-SchleyeStrtr Luaar de entreaa: WMch , I Fmi-r. -,, ,,-, . I 1
I
30, D-47877 Willich/Alemania

1
Comis. N.: 809727- Sulbhidl

I , 1
+-~-! ] J ..~
! Caeh= II =-1!0
An UG
andaiAn. G1lllUIUII.
n4 U1.
n7 4 IXJ7 ul .Iclal
I ! 1
Sec.pos Lists pieza N _pieza suetta
LRta pieza Pos.
Piano numero
Denominaci6n SPIE
Cantidad etiquetas
Peso Fecha de neto kg d~ponibiiidad embalaje
1 1 1 1 1 r 1 1 1
75n
-.
650 750 50 150 50 100
Canal/air duct, with isolation, 200/300 15001g Canal/air duct, with isolation, 200/300 750ig Canal con aislaci6n/ Canal con aielaci6n/ air duct, with isolation, 200/300 8201g Curva de canal con aislaci6rd air duct bowe, with isolation, 200/300 Canal con aislaci6rd air duct with isolation, 200/300 10OOlg Canal con aisJaci6n/ air duct, with isolation, 200/300 8001g Curva de canal con aietacibrd air duct bowe, with ~nl=fion. 200/300 Tt---:ll- J------- Md X 20 , UI [ IIIIU/SGI (SW, ~f~ Tuerca/nut, M8 Arandela/slice, M8 Casquillo roscadoflong nut, M8 Placa de carroceriahasher great, M8 Placa de absorci6n de vibraciones/ vibration absorber, M8 Grapas de sustentaci6n/ cramps for installation, M8
,,.v, ,_ _____
..
Krupp Fordertechnik
01.07.1997
PAgina:
718
Centro costes-KF 84.0784 84] 30063616/01 8 Numero pedido-KF Proveedor: BKL GmbH, H.-M. -SchleyeStrtr 30, D-47877 Willich/Afemania Lugar de entiega: Willich Emisor:
I
I Comis. No.: 809727- Sulbhidl . Fecha de emishh:

I
01.07,1997
I
Sec.pos LBta ieza N? pieza suetta
Lista pieza Pos.
Piano ntimero
Referencia Cantid, ME pos.pedldo de-a

1 1 I
Denominaci6n SPIE
Cantidad etiquetas
Peso neto kg

I I
I
.~-,.. --,,
~---
17n . --
120 50m 12 500m 600 600 10 500 1200 100 600 20 50 20 20 50m+20m
20
20
Anal IIA Ahld . Z - angle for duct installation, M8 Barra roscadalthread rod, M8 x 1000 Perfil-C para fijaci6n de canall C-profil for duct installation, 27 x 18 h4asa sellante/sealing compound Cinta sellante/sealind band Tomillo para chapalsheet screw, 4,2 x 13 Tomillo para chapalsheet screw, 4,2x 19 Estera de gomai vibration absorber for unit, 400 x 400 TomiUo/screw, Ml O x 20 Arandela/stice, Ml O Tomillo/screw, Ml O x 50 Tuerca/nut, Ml O Tomillo/screw, Ml 2 x 60 ArandelalsJice, Ml 2 Tuerca/nut, Ml 2 Anillo el&iico/spring washer, Ml 2 Perlif de frjaci6n para uni6n de brida/ cramps for flanges, SB20+SB30 Patas para perfil-C/feet for C-profile Tomillo/screw, M20
Krupp Fordertechnik

1
Centro ccrstes-KF 64.078484 [ 30063616/018 Numero pedido-KF Proveedor: BKL GmbH, H.-M. -SchieyeStrtr 30, D-47877 WillictdAtemania Lugar de entrega: Wi!lich Emisor: ~-. Piano ntfimero
1=,--~-
I i I
Confeccionado: D,.., Al.-.
01.07.1997
Pdgina:
818
lComis. No.: 809727- Sulbhidl -
Sec.pos Lista ieza N! pieza suelta
Lists pieza Pos.
lReferencialCan ]tid. ME , -. Pos.pedido de-a I 42m 20m

-nZulll
Denominaci6n SPIE
Cantidad etiquetas
Peso neto kg
=1
Otros (p.ej. item Cliente)
I
Per fii angular/angle profil, 50x 50x 5 Penfil angufar/angle profil, 100 x 50 x 5 n.. rw Wprofil, U100 Termostato/thermostate Agente retiigerantelre frigerating R22 ~--*- --- n- -~r==fir/contactor-compressor IUUI lLdlAUl .UNllp,
-w-
I I
I
I
1 14kg *
;
I 4 ___ I
I Sel
IContactor-Ventilator/ contactor-fan
1=------:+-llA. wmrea uapezomaw dlt
3
I I I
4 I I ; I
; 1
; 4
BSK-Sonda fundible/fire damper-fusible link u Ie control de canal/air duct control sensor lVr#vula de eJ - -q)ansi6n t6rmica/expansive valve In- ->l>.. aecaacwaryer Vdtvulalvalve EVR 6 v~lu, da/ualua . f+ 220V -,. ___ 1 . -..,-.,
I C$Gllwl A---I
Presostato/pressosta te FL. LP/HP
1~----~-~-am,,ri I I ermus~atu ae stwu, ,dad/safety thermostat
LISTA DE PIEZAS HEZAS SUELTAS
Krupp F&dertechnik
Lista de piezas / Piezas sueltas .
01.07.1997
Pdgina:
118
Centro costes-KF 84.078484 I Ntimero pedido-KF 30063616/018 Proveedor: BKL GmbH, H.-M. -SchleyeStrtr 30, D-47877 WillictdAlemania Lugar de entrega: Willich Emisor:
!
Comis. N,: 809727- Oxide Fecha de emisi6n: 01.07.1997
Sec.pos Lista pieza pieza N suelta \
Lista pieza Pos.
Piano ntimero
Referencia Cantid. ME pos.pedido de-a 3 1 1 1 2 1 1 3 1 3 8 2 3
Denominaci6n SP/E
Cantidad etiquetas
Peso neto kg
Aparato climatizador/air conditioner, ROCA ASA-I 5 Aparato resistencia electrica Dewi/ heater Dewi At)arato HVAC / Air handlirm unit VK 18 Aparato climatizador/air conditioner, Eureco 6 VX Supervision de filtro/difference Dessure switch for filter. EKM 1000 Superv.diferencia presi&/difference ~essure switch for ventilator, KS I OOOC2 Comtmerta antiincendio/ 1 fire damper, FK-K90, 357 x 357mm Compuerta antiincendio/ ... fire damper, FK-K90, 400x 357mm Compuerta de celoskd multi-leaf damper, JZ-AG, 357 x 357mm Compuerta de celosla/ mutti-leaf damper, JZ-AG, 400 x 357mm Reja de ventilaci6n/ grilles, TR-DG, 625x 225mm Reia de ventilaci6n/ , gri~es, TR-DG, 425 x 125mm Reja protecci6n intemperie con compuerta sobrepresi6n/ weather-resistant Iouvres with multi-leaf dam~er. WG-KUL 2.600 x 345mm IReja de ventilaci6n/ I arilles. TR-AG. 625 x 225mm
Krupp Fordertechnik
&%tso costes-KF 84.078484 I Ntimero pedido-KF 30063616/018 Proveedor: BKL GmbH, H.-M. -SchleyeStrtr 30, 47877 Wiliich Lugar de entrega: Willich Emisor: .. -. . I t-t--+-i---t-~--t-t---Sec,pos] Lista pieza Lista pieza Piano numero pieza N Pos. I welts I I I
1 I 1 1
Lists de piezas J Piezas sueltas
Con feccionado: Rev. Nr.:
01.07.1997
P@ina:
218
Comis. No,: 809727- Otide Fecha de emisitm: 01.07.1997 -
-------------Denominacitm SPIE I Cantidad etiquetas I I

! 1
Referencia\Cantid.1 ME Pos.pedido I de-a I II

1 1 1 1
Peso nefo kg
Fecha de ] d~onibifidad I embalaie

,
Otros (p.ej. Item Cliente) I

1
115. 16.1
2405925 2405925
1 3
IUni6n el&tica/ 1 -,, . . -----ttexmle auct, wu x wumm Uni6n el&itica/ flewihlp r+ d 3A(I Y ti75mm ------. , -, -,-......
-: L-
-1 A-U--I
I
17.1 17.2 18,1 18,2 18.3 18.4 18.5 18.6 2405925 2405925 2405925 2405925 2405925 2405925 2405925 2405925
I
I 3 3 12m 3 1 3m 1 1
5
Iflexible duct, 750x 620mm

\&nal/air
,,.. .-.,
I
+.--.+ ~~
dlmt
.
..-..
33A Y fW7mm
---
--
..,,...
C61krvcrlruuut, I+ I x WI .X IIIII Tubo plegado/air duct hose, D1 OOmm Curva/bowe 90, DIOOmm .-,- .., -------- . . ... -., ------- ... Compuerta de esbangula~i~nlr~~l lrjn~ ~arnn~r ~1 ~omm -- Tlzsmm T&o plegadolau duct hok, u Curva/bowe 90, D125mm Protecci6n de manipulaci6rdgr ab protection, 0125mm
Fntrerrnscakxmnt=dirm DN1 OC ?mm
---11-:-
A, .-b
-?A4
E49--
,
I I
Krupp Fordertechnik

_. -_.
01.07.1997
Pdgina:
318
;Centro costes-KF 84.078484 I lNtimero pedido-KF 30063616/018 Proveedor: BKL GmbH, H.-M. -SchleyeStrtr 30, D-47877 Willich/Alemania Lugar de entrega: Willich Emisor:
Comis. No.: 809727- Oxide Fecha de emisirh: ----~ 01.07.1997
Sec.pos Lista pieza pieza No suelta
Lista pieza Pos.
Piano numero
Denominaci6n SP/E -----
Cantidad etiquetas
Peso neto kg _,____
Fecha de disponibilidad
ambalaie
Otros (p,ej. Item Cliente)
---~Y _,____,
a ,
I
1 Bm
ltWlda de
1 3 1 1 1 1 1
1
1 1 1 1 1
1
carlal con esquinas de union/ air duct flan{ ~es with caner connection Canal/air duc D 125/500 X 500 et, Curva de Cahaualr aI --:~ct bowe 90, 345 x 315 Canal/air due+ CfWVC 7oolg u,, U,uoo ,,- .,. A- --c#ul vu UC ~~nal/air duct bowe 90, 600/600 Canal/alr duc Curva de car Canal/air duel, ~wm Canal/air dud. 450/6 W?!!l Canal/air duc 15oolcr Canal/air duc 450/600 15001g -. Arnlenm e-n, Canal/air ducx, qm.uowu oouig1 Canal/air duct 4!501600 40016 -., ------ -. --, 300 .4=nnv.b AcfilAnn I iMJIY Canal/air duel, .tiWWU 1 Canal/air duct 450/400 1000lrI
)/400 la
A,
!Jtiwrvwu
Icuulg
:t, 330/400
11Oolg ece, 330/400 300/400 -------------
Krum JPnn4.n
WGIIUU
Fordertechnik
WE lQA 4170A Iu?. uluw nA u-?
I
I 1 I
ILista de l)ieZaS / Piezas sueltas

I
lConfeccionado: lRev. Nr.:
01.07.1997
Pacrina: 418
bualctrnr
.n.+n.
+-
1
I I
.... -
Numero pedido-KF 130063616/01 8 Proveedor: BKL GmbH, H.-M. -SchleyeStrtr 30, D-47877 Willich/Alemania Lugar de entrega: Willich Emisor:
1
Comis. N.: 809727- Oxide Fecha de emisi6n: 01.07.1997
Sec.pos Lista pieza pieza N suelta
Lista pieza Pos.
Piano rirmero

1 J-
Denominacidn SPIE
Cantidad etiquetas
Peso neto kg
Fecha de disponibilidad embaiaje
Otros (p.ej. ttem Cliente)
L
t
-~~-------
,
..-.
--.
10OOi~
t~t---~
I
1
1
lCanal/air duct, 300/360 10OOla

Canal/air duct; 300/360 . -
lCanal/air
duct, 300/360
9401g
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Curva de canal/ air duct bowe, 300/360 Canal/a~r duct, 360/360 Canal/air duct, 360/360 Canal/a~ duct, 360/360 Canal/air duct, 360/360 Canal/air duct, 360/360 Canal/air duct. 360/360 Canal/air du~; 360/360 Canal/air duct, 360/360 Canal/air duct, 360/360 Canal/air duct, 360/400 Canal/air duct, 360/400 Canal/air duct. 360/400 Canal/air duct; 360/400 Canal/air duct, 360/400 Canal/air duct. 360/400 ICanaUair duct: 360/400 Canal/air duct; 360/400 Canal/air duct, 360/400 Canal/air duct, 200/300
----I -----
360/360 15001g 15001g 15001g 10OOlg 10OOlg 11601a , 10001~ 10001g 15001g 11OOlg 1100lg .. . 15001a w 15001g 1100lg 15001a 15001a -----~ 11001~ 15001g 1390ig
Krum
mm
Fordertechnik
ILista de ~iezas / Piezas sueltas

#_
01.07.1997
Pagina:
5/8
I Centro costes-KF 84.078484 I Ntimero pedido-KF 30063616/01 8 Proveedor: BKL GmbH, H.-M.-SchleyeStrtr Luger de entrega: WiMch Emisor:
30, D-47877 Willich/AJemania 1=:
Comis. N.: 809727- Oxide ==-===
Fe*adJemisi6nol071997
Sec.pos Lista pieza J?!!ZZl suetta No
Lists pieza Pos.
Piano ntimero
Denominaci6n SPIE _.
Cantidad etiquetas
Peso neto kg
Fecha de dsponibilidad embalaje
Otros (p.ejd Item Cliente)
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 10 10 15 1 1 1
Canal/air duct, 2001300 250/550 Canal/air duct, 3001200 250/550 Curva de canal/air duct bowe, 300/200 Can;Uair duct, 300/200 57019 Curva de canal/air duct bowe, 300~00 Curva de canaL/air duct bowe, 300/200 Canal/air duct, 300f100 15001g Canal/air duct, 300/200 15001g Canal/air duct, 300/200 7001g Curva~e canaUair duct bowe,~007200 Canal/air duct, 300/200 15001g Canal/air duct, 300/200 13001g CanaVair duct, 345/6002601g Canal/air duct, 345/600 2601g Collar de protecci6n a la Iluvia/ rain protection 1OOOlg Angulo tangle 50/501000lg Protecci6n a la Iluvia - Brida de canal/ rain protection - air duct flange 10OOIg Curva de canal con aislaci6n./ air duct bowe, with isolation, 200/300 Canal/air duct, with isolation, 200/300 8201g Cufia de canal con aisIaci6n/ air duct h~ vAih isolaticm 200/300
Krupp F&dertechnik
01.07.1997
Pagina:
618
Centro costes-KF 84.078484 I Ndmero pedido-KF 3006361 6/01 8 Proveedor: BKL GmbH, H .-M.-Schieyer-Str 30, D-47877 Willich/Alemania Lugar de entrega: Wiilich Emisor: T
Sec.pos
Comis. N.: 809727- Oxide . ..... Fecha de emisi6n: 01.07.1997

1
pieza suetta
I I
Lists pieza N
1
{
Lista pieza Pos.

I
Piano numero
Referencia Cantid. ME pos,pedido de-a

I
I
Denominaci6n SP/E . .. I .. -. 1
Cantidad etiquetas
Peso neto kg
1
Fecha de disponibiiidad embalaje

I
Otros (p.ej. ttem Cliente)
1 1 1 1 ___ I . 1 1 1 1 250 650 750 50 150 50 100
Canal/air duct, with isolation, 200/300 15001g Canal/air duct, with isolation, 200/300 7501g -..-7---. Canal con aislaci6n/ -. . Canal con aislaci6rd air duct, with isolation, 200/300 8201g Curva de canal con aislaci6n/ air duct bowe, with isolation, 200/300 Canal con aislaci6rd air duct with isolation, 200/300 10OOlg Canal con aislaci6n/ air duct, with isolation, 200/300 8001g Curva de canal con aislaci6n/ air duct bowe, with isolation, 200/300 Tomillo/screw, M8 x 20 Tuerca/nut, M8 Arandela/slice, M8 Casquillo roscadoflong nut, M8 Placa de carrocerhdwasher gre~, M8 Placa de absorci6n de vibraciones/ Ivibration absorber, M8 \Grapas de sustentaci6rd ,
Krupp Fordertechnik
Lists de piezas I Piezas sueltas
01.07.1997
Pt@ina:
718
*~ L
suetta ~
Centro costes-KF 84.078484 ] Numero pedido-KF 30063616/01 8 Proveedor: BKL GmbH, H.-M. -SchleyeStrtr 30, D-47877 WillictdAJemania Lugar de entiega: Willich Emisor: / I
Comis. No.: 809727- Oxide Fecha de emisi6n: 01.07.1997
Listsieza P
N
Dsta Pi=a Pos.
Piano ntimero
Referencia Cantid. ME pos.pedido _. de-a
Denominaci6n SPIE
Cantidad etiquetas
Peso neto kg
Otros (p.ej. Item Ctiente)
120
Angulo
doblel
Z - angle for duct installation, M8
120 50m 12 500m 600 600 10 500 1200 100 600 20 50 20 20 50m+20m 20 20
70
I I
Barra roscadahhread rod, M8 x 1000 Perfil-C para fijaci6n de canal/ C-profit for duct installation, 27x 18 Masa sellante/sealing compound Cinta sellante/sealind band Tornillo para chapa/sheet screw, 4,2x 13 Tomillo para chapa/sheet screw, 4,2 x 19 Estera de gomal vibration absorber for unit, 400 x 400 Tomillo/screw, M1O x 20 Arandela/slice, Ml O Tornillo/screw, Ml O x 50 Tuercahwrt, Ml O Tornillo/screw, M12 x 60 Aandela/sIice, Ml 2 Tuerca/nut, Ml 2 Anillo el/mtico/spring washer, Ml 2 Perfil de fiiacidn Dara uni6n de brida/ cramps fo; flanges, SB20+SB30 Patas para pertil-C/feet for C-profile Tornillo/screw, M20
Aranriela/slice M20
lKruDt) Fordertechnik
lLista de DieZaS/ PieZaS SUehaS

. 30, D-47877 Willich/Alemania .
01.07.1997
,Paaina:
818
L costes-KF ~ Centro
84.078484 ] Numero pedido-KF 30063616/018 Proveedor: BKL GmbH, H,-M.-Schleyer-Str Lugar de entrega: Wiliich Emisor: I Lista pieza Pos.
1 Comis. N.: 809727- Oxide T I --- Fecha de emisi6n: 01.07.1997
Sec.pos Lista pieza pieza No suelta
Piano ntimero
ReferencialCantid. Pos.pedido de-a I 42m 20m 20m 1 14kg 2 2 1set 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
ME
Denominaci6n SPIE
Cantidad etiquetas
Peso neto kg
Perfil angular/angle profil, 50x 50x 5 Perfil angular/angle profil, 100 x 50x 5 Perfil/profil, Lfl 00 Termostato/thermostate Agente refrigerante/refrigerating R22 Contactor.Compresor/contactor-compressor Contactor-Ventila dorlcontactor-fan Correa trapezoidal/bett 1 BSK-Sonda fundible/fire damper-fusible link Sensor de control de canal/air duct control sensor Wrlvula de expansi6n t&mica/expansive valve Secador/d~er VWn.da/vatve EVR 6 V4ivuIa/valve coil 220V Presostatolpressostate FL. LPIHP Termostato de seguridacilsafety thermostat
LISTA DE RECAMBIOS
-1-
REP. CANTIDAD 1 1
DENOMINATION
Compresor Malefactor de caja
TiPO/REFERENCIA
fl
1
de compresor Condensador Evaporator Ventilator Ventilator Motor Poles de condensador de evaporator
1
1 1 1 1
de comprasor de compresor
2
1
Correa de motor de compresor Correa de transmission compresor Guia de compresor Termostato de valvula Tobera para valvula Coiector de iiquido Valvula solenoide Serpentin soienoide de vaivuia
de
1
1
ex. ex.
1
1 1 1 1 1
1
TUBOS
Secador Mirilla Presostato BP/AP Valvuia de recuperaaon
2 1 2 4 3
0,8
3
Tubo de succion Tubo de descarga Tubo de iiquido Tubo reguiador Refrigerant Aceite Aislamiento de caja Cubeta de goteo Tubo de drenaje de condensacidn Imprimacion de cubierta Pintura bamiz de cubierta Filtro de evaporator Equipo eiectrim Elemento malefactor Termostato de sala Termostato de seguridad de caiefa~on
0,25 1
1
1 1 1
6 1
1
-2-
Recambios Pos. Pos. Pos. Pos. Pos.

POS.
para aparato de atemperado
Sala electrica:
Pos.
POS.
Pos. Pos. Pos. Pos. Pos.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
fl Compresor 1 Ventilator de evaporator 1 Rotor de ventilator con carcasa 1 Interrupter de altahaja presion 1 Secador 1 Termostato 1 Valvula de expansion termka 1 Ventilador-Motor-Condensador (14 kg) 2 Botellas de agente refrigerant
41. Aceite 2 Esteras para refrigeration filtrates 20 m3/rollo para motor de compresor para motor de ventiiador
10
?1 ?2 13
2 Contactores 2 Contacton?s Evaporator
Recambios Pos. 14 Pos. 15 POS. 16 Pos. 17 POS. 18 Pos. 19
para unidad de ventilation
Central de techo:
1 Ventiiador 1 Juego de rodamientos de bolas 1 Soporte de ventiiador 1 Soporte de motor 1 Juego de correas trapezoidales 1 Motor
Recambios Pos. 20 Pos. 21 Pos. 22 POS. 23 POS. 24 POS. 25

POS. 26 POS. 27 POS. 28
para unidad principai
de controi y eiktrka:
Presostato Unidad de contmi 1 Sensor de canai 1 Presostato diferenciai Fiitro 1 Presostato diferenoia Correas tipezoidaies 8 Juegos de fiitro de piacas a 12 Unidades Etapa de fiitro 8 Juegos de fiitm de boisiiios a 4 Unidades Etapa de filtro 3 3 Juegos de avisos de proteccih contra fuego (mercurio 72 %) 1 Microintenuptor (Finai de camera) = 3 mesas segun ei grado de suciedad
Pos.25 y 26: intervaio de recambio
Ascensor
4.7
Ascensor
23.01.98
COLLAHUASI
Ascensor
Hoja en blanco
COLLAHUASI
23.01.98
I
j
4 ELEVATORS
CHAMPION
Champion levators. E h-u
Modelo - US-2200-R
ASCENSOR DE PASAJEROS DE ACCIONAMIENTO POR PINON Y CREMALLERA
MANUAL DE OPERACION Y MANTENIMIENTO con Iista de piezas

Krupp Fordertechnic Gmbh Planta de trituracion semimovil para Compafiia Minera Doria Ines de Colahuasi Ese de Iquique, Chile
No. de trabajo
97 S160, 97S161 F08G1448
No. de serie F08G1447,
P.O. Box 12869
Houston, Texas 77217
Phone:
i13-64(k8500
Fax: 713-640-8549
Indite
tematico
DESCRIPTION
..... ... .... ............... .................................. ...........................................................................i-i
ESPECIFICACIONES Especificaciones
........................................................................................ ......................................... ii-i de torsion de pernos ytornillos de presion ...............................................................ii.ii
SECCION
1- OPERACION .............................................................................................................................................l.l en la cabina ........................................................................................................................ 1-1 desde el techo ..................................... ...... ......................................................................... 1-1 remota ............................................................................................................. 1-2
Controles Operation Operation Operation Operation
de Ilamada
de emergencia
................................................................................................................... 1-2 electrico ................................................................................................ 1-3
Interrupciones
del suministro
SECCION Reglas
2- MANTENIMIENTO de seguridad ................................................... .........................................................................2.l ..................................................................................................................2.l
Cronograma Cuadro Cuadro
de inspection
de inspection de lubrication
..........................................................................................................................2.3 ..........................................................................................................................2.5 - Inspection y pruebas .............. ..................................................................2.7
Dispositivo
de seguridad
Mantenimientode Resolution Diagrama
Ios frenos .................................... .......... ..................................................................2.9 .................................... .............................. ..............................................2.l3 electrical ...................................................................................................2.l8
de problems., de conexlones
SECCION
3- PIEZAS
SECCION
4- PROCEDIMIENTOS de seguridad
DE SERVICIO
TECNICO ........... .........................................................................4.l
Dispositivo
parasobrevelocidad
GARANTiAS
Dcscripci()n - I(lgil]a i - I
Description
El :Isccnsol- (Ic pcrs[Jn:Il y Ill:ltcIIalcs US-2200 dc E]llsc[)]/Cl;:lr]lJ)io]l c!i un;i tlmd;I(l dc cl-ccci6n au(tin<JIII;l palm cxlcrio]cs quc plopo]~ifma un acccso scgu Io y ~onfiablc a iircas cic llabajo cn pmycctos dc c[mslrucci6n o cIIl[ll;lz:llllleIl[os indus[[ialcs. El sIslcma ~ic mon[acargas LIS dc Champion Const:l de 10s s]guicntes components bk]~os: H Un IICI1O (ICdiscos fijxlo a rcsorle lransmitc la potcncl:l (Ic frcnacio a cada uno cic 10s ejcs de ;lcci(>n:llllicll[(~, La po[cncia monotilsica (ie 3S0 voitios cs suminislracia a 10s trenos poi mcdio cic un rcld cic con[roi en ]a c;l.ja ptincipal de con[rol. Los trenos sc libcran con l:] potcncia enccnciida, sc fijarr con ia po[encia apagada (cn caso cic pdrdicia de polcncia, 10s trenos se tijan autornhlicamcnte). La parada de emergencia es provista por un disposi[ivo CIC seguridad para sobrevclocidad quc se fija Zlu[onlfl[ic:lr]lcntc nl aicanzarsc la vclocitlad predeterminxhr. ,Ircas cic dcscmlxrrco per) Los interruptores tie enclavamierr[o de la compucl[a impiden e] movimicnto dc la cal)ina cuando ias compuertas csth abiertrrs.
It ,1 \ F xl____
TORRE
La torre es la estruc[urrr ver[ical a la CUQIcsth nfianzada Ia cabina. Las secciones de la torre se construycn CIC acel-o es[ructural, dondc 10S micmbros vcr[ica]es propo]cionan una supcrficic plana con cojinctcs sobrc la CU:IIptIcIJc dcsplazarse la cabirra. Toclas Im secciones son intercambiables, con cxtrcrnos maquinados y suias dc alineac ion. Sc incluye una crcrnaliel-a dc cn:ranajcs maquinada cmpcrnacia cn posici6n cn cxla scccion de In [orre. En aca[amicn[o a Ios codi:os. cl sopor[e latcrnl cs provis[o por amarres horizontals de pared a in[ervalos qoc no (icben sobrepasar 10S[rcin[a (30) pies.
!, -
_.
L
t\ i
&- Torrc
+~o +
.._
AREA m
DEsEMEIARcO
DE LA BASE
CABINA
(JAULA)
La cabina es la unidad de [ramspor[c (Jc cwga quc proporciona un rwin[o sc~ur~>para cl pcrwnal y/o }0s materials quc se dcsplazan Jcr[icalmcntc por la torrc. El movirnicnto vertical cs pro~islo por dos molorcs dc acclonamicnto con piironcs in[lcpcnciicnlcs quc sc enganchan cn ]a cremallcm dc la lorrc. La polcncia clectrica Inti]sica cic 3S0 voltios y 50 Hz cs suministrada a ia cabinil pw ]Ilcdi(l LIclcabic rni)vii. Un transformador dc controi dc i [)()()VA suminiswr Ios ci]-cui[os (ICi]un]inacibn y control dc ia cabina, cic I I5 voitios y 60 Hz.
La ~rea dc dcscmbarco dc la base cs un firca con ccrco quc encierra la cabina y la torrc. Las Coillpttcrtas au[otrabarttcs impidcn quc cl pcrsonai entre al Area cuando ]a cabina no se cncucn[ra en c1 irca (ic dcscrnbarco. Los in[crrup[orcs dc la compucr[a impidcn ci n~ovimicnto de ]a cabin;t con ias compucrtas abiertas. LOS rcsor[cs cic amortiguamicnto partc de la tome CIC base. para la cabina tornlan
La altura dcl (wca dc ticscmbarco dc 1:1base cs (1c 4S pu]gadas en c1 asccnsor US-2X)(). Sc ciebc provccr Ll[lil rrampa o pla[atorma dc firca dc ticscmbarccr para pcrmil]] ci acccso a ia altura dci ir-ca dc cicscrn bar-co dc 48 pulgad as.
Iigina
i -2-
I)cscripci6n
fllC(iC lllCdlo rcsol-lcs
b]l]](li~l>~liI C[l[l:ld;l ;II nivcl ({c !;I pclldicntc pc)r

dC und l(JSil C](IC Cll UICllil 1;1b:l<C (IC Iil 101IC 10S \ dt :Irllolligli:llllicil[(), 1-;[s c(IInpucr[LIs cn
c1 l~cInlo
dc 1:1lxtsc csliII; :11nivcl dc I;I pcndicn[c cn I:IS

ins[dlaci(mcs cn Iosa.
AREAS DE DESEM6ARC0
SUPERlORES
L;l.s ~ircas dc dcscn]b:IJco supcriorcs son (Irc;ls segums par;] c;irgar ~ dCS~;llg;ll ilSiljCl[)S ll)illC1iillCS. SC pucde p y p]-oporcion;ll. cunlqoicr n(ln]c!-[)de (Ircas de dcsenlbarco. Li]s cornpucr[;ls sc halxm Ineciinicamcn[c pm quc no puedm Scl- abicr[as dcidc Cl 1:1(10 dCl hrCil (IC dCSCll)lMrCO. Si 10s c6cl Igos Ioc:llcs asi 1(1rcquicrcn, sc proporcionm intfwuptorcs dc cnult\\, dn)icnlo pwa dc(cncr la cabin:] cuanclo 1:]scompucrtx cst(ln (Ics[ri]bi]di]s.
Ilspccilic:lci l)llcs - I{lgi])a
ii - i
Especificaciones
No. dC lldel(l
Capxi(ixl
US-2200 2.200 11
de la cabina, Ibs
Pas:ljcros, mix (per cabina) Dlmcnsioncs de la cabina (in[criores). pies-pulg Longi[ud Ancbo Alto Vclocid;l(l dc la c;lbina, pies/min Mo[o~~s ~lcc[yicos (2)
6-0 4-1 7-2
100
10 HP (per motor) 380 VCA, 60 Hz Trifhsico 29.8 (per motor) 19.6 75 (per frcno) Electromcchnicos, 3.350 900 120x225/16x4 270 10-0 dc discos m(ll[iplcs
Corrien[e a plcna carga Requcrimicn[os clectricos (per cabina), KVA Torsion dc trcnado, pieslb Frcnos (2) Peso dc la cabinii, Ibs Altura de la [orrc, rn(m, pies Scccioncs dc la Iorrc, put: Peso de Ias scccioncs de la [orrc, Ibs Inlcl-vales dc amwwlo, rn(lx, pies
NOTA: Cb:impion ElcvaIoI-\, Inc. ticnc un:~ poli[ico dc invcs[ig;lci(m y mcjora continua dc produclo y sc rcscrva cl dcIccb(J dc cambiol c1 diiciio y las cspccilic:~cioncs sin prcvio :Iviso.
---Pfigina ii - ii - Espccificacioncs
Tabla ii-1 - Especificaciones
de torsion
de pernos
y tornillos
de presion
* Las marcas de] fabricate pueden variar ** para e[ ca50 de pri5ioneros de cabeza hueca de cabeza plana y de boton, utilice e] valor de torsion minimo recomendado para e] Grado 5.
Tamafio (pulgadas) 114 5/16 3/8 7/16 112 9/15 5/8 3/4 7/8 1 1-1/8 1-1/4 1-3/s 1-1/2
Grado 2 Torsion rccomendada lb-pie N-m Max Max Min Min 5 6 6.8 8. I 16.3 13.6 10 12 23 27 31 20 41 47 35 30 52 70 45 61 lo? 88 65 75 ]29 142 105 95 Z(33 251 150 185 27 I 160 200 217 406 250 300 339
q q
Grado 5 Torsion recomendada* ** lb-pie N-m Min Max Max Min 12.2 14.9 II 9 23.1 28.5 21 17 48 42 57 35 73 87 64 54 108 130 96 80 l~j 149 170 110 203 237 175 I50 407 336 270 300 542 610 450 409 912 680 786 580 1085 1193 880 Soo 1519 1681 1240 1120 1980 2217 1635 1460 I94(3 ~lso 2631 2956
Grado 8 Torsion recomendada* * lb-pie N-m Max Min Max Min 12 15 16.3 20.3 29 39.3 24 32.5 45 73 54 61 115 70 85 95 Ilo 125 149 170 175 237 160 217 210 245 298 332 4?5 380 515 576 600 660 814 895 1342 1220 900 990 1953 12s0 1440 1736 qooo z712 ~46g 1820
q
23s0 3160
2720 3560
3227 4285
368s 4827
*** UtiJice la torsion minima recomendada cuando Ias roscas estan cubiertas de Iubricante, como por ejemplo, aceite para motores o sujetadores con recubrimientos de fosfato y aceite. Utilice e] valor maximo recomendado de torsion para el caso de sujetadores secos o sujetadores enchapados de cinc sin ningfin tipo de lubricant. NOTAS: 1. Esta especificacion sirve como pauta general para quincalleria de rosca gruesa fabricada de materials ferrosos (acero, hierro fundido). 2. Los enganches de la rosca para e] caso de materials no ferrosos (alum inio, Iaton, plastico, etc.) pueden no ser adecuados para permitir la torsion especificada anterior. 3. Cuando una aplicacion particular proporciona valores especificos de torsion, utilice estos en Iugar de aquellos dados mas arriba.
-.
0pcraci6n
- Ifigina I - 1
Operation
CONTROLES DE LA CABINA ESTACION DE CONTROL DEL TECHO
Sc propol-cionan dos estacion<s dc conll-[)l cn la cabina (una en la cabina y una cn e] Iecho dc la misnla). Los ptirrafos slguicn[cs dcscribcn cs[as cs[.lcmncs dc ccmlrol.
ESTACION
PRINCIPAL
DE CONTROL
Li] cs[ocibn dc L_OIIII-O1 dcl ICCI1O (\,6asc la Figura I -2) cs[fi ubicada en la parlc superior dc la cabina y consla dc un inicrrup[or LIcparadil/opcrac i6n/prucba dc cnida (STOP/OPERATE/DROP TEST) y dc botones puls:Klorcs arl-iba (UP) y abajo (DOWN),
Estos contrwlcs (vdme la Figura l-l) cstfin ubicaclos en c1 interior de la cabina y consmn dc un ( I ) in[crrup[or CIC Ilavc, un intcrruim)r de iluminncibn (LIGHT). un in[crrup[ol de parada (STOP), un interrup[or de filarma (ALARM) y botoncs pulsadorcs Llelpiso (FLOOR)
OPERACION
EN LA CABINA
La cabirm eslfi lists pm operoci6n cuando se cumplcn Ias si~uientcs condiciones: 1. Estfin ccrradas todas lm cornpucrtas del fires de desembarco. 2. EsLfinccrraclas las compucrtas de la cabina. 3. El suministro electrico es[fi cncendido en la caja cl~c~ricn principal (interrupter de clesconcxibn). 4, El COn LrO] en e] techo STOP/OPERATE/DROP TEST cslh en la position STOP. 5. El interruplor STOP en la estacion principal de control es[ii hacia afuera. 6. El intcrrup~or OPERATE-TEST en cl recinlo clcc[l-ico principal cstfi en la posicibn OPERATE. 7. El inlerruptor dc la fosa csLfIhacia Ifucra. L;! direcci6n de la cabinn sc dctcrmirra por mcdio de I{)s bo[oncs pulsadores del piso. Si sc salislaccn [odos Ios cnclavamicn[os, la cabirra se moveri (al recibir y almaccnar la IIamadz) al area de desernbnrco deseaclo. Los IInmadas colocaclas en la cabina se indican por mcdio dc bokmes pulsadorcs parpaclezm[es. NOTA: Las IIamadas hechm cn un irca dc dcsclnbarco no sc indican den[ro de la cabina. La cabina vicne equipwla con un sis[ema (mico dc conlrol automfi[ico, La cabina s610 rcspondc i una Ilama(la por VCZ.. Cuanclo la cabina Ilega a un ~lreade dcsembarco cn la quc sc ha cfcc[uado una Ilamadd, la Iw. LIclbou5n pulsador sc apaga o deja dc parpadctrr. Si Iils compucr[as dcl irca de dcscmbarco y dc la cabina n{)sc abrcn dcntro LIcIos diez ( 10) scgundos. la cabina podrii ~CCpl:Lr OLM ]Iillllad; l.
Fi~[(/o1-I
ESTAC1ON DE CONTROL EN LA CABINA
~-g. .. ..
e . _ e
Fis/f)(l 1-2 ESTACION DE COXTROL DEL TECHO
La ciLbina pcrmancccr~ cn un (irca dc dcscmbarco hasIa quc sc otra Ilamada. CUilndOSCcicrran las comp~lcrlas ilcl (irca dc dcscmbarco y dc la cabins, y sc hacc y [re:isl[il una Ilamada, la ciibirta rcspondcrfi a la misma cn csc mon]cnto,
hay
0pcr;]ci6n
- Ifigina 1 -2
OPERACION
DESDE
EL
TECHO
OPERACION
DE
LLAMADA
REMOTA
I.A OII; RAC16S DI?SDE El. 117CII0 SIR\ l; 1.AR.A 11/01()S110S DE MANlESINIIIXWT) O P,\R.L\ I.,\ 0PERAC16N EN CASO I)E Ekl13R(;EXCIA. ;S0 DEIIE USARSE PARA LA OPERAC1ON NORXIAL! 1.0s 1As.4,11;1/os/o1ER,.\ l)ol{Es No L)I;IIEX Lj111.IZARLOS COXIWOI,KS EN M, rFII10 CABINA A MENOS QUI? TENGAIN LA CA1ACITAC1ON Y AUIOR1ZAC1ON CO1lRESPON1)IENIES.
Las Ilanutdas pucdcn hwcl-se cn un firc:l (Ic dcscmbarco LICWIC una (Jc I:ISCs[i]cio[]cs dc Ilan]ada rcnm[;l (VC;IWla Figura I -3), El bo[bn STOP LIc10cswibrr princip:ll dc control (v6asc la Figura 1-1) dcbc cslar hacia afucra y sc debcn salisfaccr Ios c[lclal!:llllicll[os. L:]s !Iamadas sc rc:llilan cn un (uta Lk dcscmbarc{~ prcsionando cl bo(tin pulsador CALL (Ilanmda). El bmhn pulsador sc dcbc nmnlcncr Imcin adcn[rw basta que sc cnciendn la Iuz quc rcconoce la Ilnnmdfl. Iuz del bot6n pulsador sc apaga cum(fo la cabina Ilega al piso en cl cunl sc bizo la Ilamxfa, indicando que la misma se ha salisfccbo. La ciibin:l cntra cn pamsa clurantc dicz ( 10) segundos en un iirca LIcdcsembarco. Si no se abren las compuerlm c!entro LIclpcriodo de ticmpo de dicz ( I0) se:undos, la cabina puedc proccdcr a lfi siguienie ]Ianmda. La cabina no se movcrfi siemprc y cuando Ias compucr[as cst&r abiertas.
La
L)l? I.,i
Pilr:{opel-ar la cabina dcsdc c1 [ccI1o,se debcn salislacer todas Ias compuer[m y enclavamicnlos, como cn la OPERACION EN LA CABINA normal. El inlcrrup[or STOP (Figura l-l) cn la estacibn principal de conlrol dcbe cs[ar empujado bnci;l mknuo y cl inlcrruptor OPERATE/STOP/DROP TEST (Figura 1-2) en la es[acihn (1ccimtrol dcl [echo debt cs[ar ~,irada a la position OPERATE. Lo c:lbina rcsponclerfi a 1(>s >bo[oncs pulsadores JOG UP (movimicn~o interrni[enlc hacia arriba) y JOG DOWNT(movimicnto in[crrnitente hacio ~bajo). Los bo[ones se DEBEN MANTENER presionados: de lLI contrario, la cabina se dc;cndrfi al sol[arsc e] bo[on. Al volver a la OPERACION EN LA CA BINA, cl in[erruptor OPERATE/STOP/DROP TEST dcbe vol~er a girarse a 1:] posici6n STOP. Cumxlo la cabina se encuenlra cn 10mod:lliclacldc opcr;wi(m dcsdc cl [cc11o.las pucr~as y compucrtas es~fin[rabadm conlinuamcrrte, NOTA: Al u[iliznr la csli)ci(jn dc con[rol (lcl Iccho para I;I inspcccir5n de segurida(f del dispositivo, consu]le Vcrilicaci6n dcl clispositivo dc squridad sin carga o Prucbu dc ciaida a plcna cargn (p~lginas 2-7 y 2-8).
o
OPERACION
DE
EMERGENCIA
Se actiw una alarrna audible en la base por medio del interrup[or de alnrma (ALARM) (Figura I -1). Al prcsionarse el interrup[or, sonarfr la alarm. El in[crrup[or sc man[ienc; la alarma se cunc-ela lirando cl inlcrruplor IIilci.t afucra.
ILUMINACION DE EMERGENCIA
* I
@@
C.u
Un sis[cma dc iluminacion de emergencia prcrporciona In iluminaci6n de la cabina cn caso de p6rdicla clc suministro e16ctrico. Sc dispone aproximadamcnrc dc un minilmo CIC cfos (2) horas de iluminaci6n dcspu& de una inlel-iupcitin dcl suministro clectrico. NOTA: El circuito de alarma tambi~n exwae potcncia dc la batcria dul-ante la inwrupciim (IcI suminis[ro cldc[rico: por 10 tanto, un uso excesivo de] circuito dc alarma disminuirfi la cantidad dc ticmpo que permancccrfi cnccndida la ilumirmcion (Ic emcrgcncia. Duran[e la opcracion normal, la ba[cria sc manticne cargada y sc suministra potcncia a la Iimparo por mcdio clc un transtormador quc uliliza la polencia normal dc la cabina. La potencia de la bateria se encicndc au[on~iticamcntc si sc picrdc po[cncia. Sc propcrrciona un intcrrup[or Iuminoso ON-OFF (Figura I -1 ), cl cual sicmpre dcbcrfi apagarsc al bajarsc dc la cabina. NOTA: Si se apaga la po[cncia cx[crnamcntc con la limlpara cnccrrdida, cl suminis[ro de la batcria sc cnccnderfi au[omfi[icarncn[e, 10 quc causarfi una dcsg:ls[c de la ba[eria.
k.
risH)(/ -3 / ESTACION DE LLAMADA REMOT,~
INTERRUPCIONES ELECTRICO
DEL SUMINISTRO
c(~mpucl[m bloqucadm c[)lumna siguicnlc).
(vcasc la Nota especial dc ia
Scpmporcionaun frcn(lcclllril[lg(~p:lr:t pcrmili]un dcsccnsocoi][]ola(lo(lc lacabinaencasodc unapcl-dida de po[cncia y de fallmcn c1 circuilo de ron[ml, El Ircno ccnlritugo pcl-nlitc quc dcscicmk ia cabina a un:~ vclocidad cntrc la opcracion nol-mal y la vclocidml dc clispmodc disposilivodc seguridad. [itrabajarl~~c:lbilln, girt la [:]pa SL)blC ]a pa]anca nl:l[]U:l]dc] ircno (u bicada deIl[10 (IC ]~ cabina, adhcrida a la pfircd - vcasc la Figura 1-4) has[:l su position abierta, y gire la palanca en scntido central-io a Ias lllanecill:ls dclrcloj. Lac:~bina descender5 alavcloci(la(l controlada por el trcno. La cabina puede de[cncl-sc cn cualquicr momcnto soltando la palanca del freno. Pam impcdir una acumulacibn cxccsiva de calor en cl frcno. baje la cabina en una scric dc ciclos de encendido-apagado. quince ( 15) se,gundos encendidos y sesenta (60) scyunclos apagado. iSiempre detengasc en c1 primer piso disponible! Observe que la leva puede lirarse, n~antcnicndo Ias puertas y
PRECAUC1ON: Incluso si existc una interrui}citin de la potcncia, NO salga del interior de la cabina n rntmos qi]e w bubicra empujado hacia atlentro c1 illtcrroptor S101 dc la Cstacion principal dc control (Figlira l-l). I)c 10 contr-ario, pueden causarsc ]esiones cn caso dc rwtaurnrse potcncia a la cabinn. INOTA ESPECIAL: La puerta de la cabin:) y Ias compuertas dcl firca de desembarco estin cnclavadas rnecfmica y cl+ctricamente. En caso de una inlcrrupci6n del surninistro electrico, ser(i nccesario ir 11:1s[2 parte la superior cle la cabina y desactivar Ios pestillos tanto cn las compuer[as de la cabina como en la pucrta LIcl(wca dc desembarco (suponiendo que la cabina sc encuentra cn e] area de desembarco - vease la columns anterior). Una vez Iiberado el pestillo de la compucrta CIC cabina, Icvan[c la la compucr[a. La pucrta dcl hrea dc desembarco se libera empujando manual rncnte el pcstillo a la posici6n de apertura.
LIBERAC1ON
Fi<qlf/(i -4 1 DEL FRENO MANUAL
llaintcnimicn[o - Ifigina 2- 1
Mantenimiento
REGLAS DE SEGURIDAD
1. NO PERM1l,1 LA 0113RAC16N DEL ASCENSOR hasta qLIC no I]aya lckio este conjunto rcglas y la scccion OPERA C1ON dc estc n~anual. Debcn comprenciel-se complctamen[e todos Ios procedimicntos de opcraci6n. NO PERMITA LA OPERACIOh CON PASAJEROS si debt real Izarse una inspcccion de] ascensor. Inspeccione cl asccnsor DOS VECES POR SEMANA de acucrdo con el cl-ono:rama dc inspecci6n. NO PERMITA LA OPERACION DEL ASCENSOR con la COMPUERTA DE LA CABINA ABIERTA. Las compuer[as tienen enclavamientos mecimicos y electricos que impiden cl movimiento de la cabina con Ias compuertas abiertas. NO PASE POR ALTO LOS ENCLAVAMIENTOS. NO PERMITA LA OPERACION DEL ASCENSOR si se requierc una PRUEBA DE CA~DA DEL DISPOSITIVO DE SEGURIDAD. Las pruebas de caida cicbcn realizarse periodicamcn[e dc acuerdo con el cronograma de inspection que aparece mits adelante. NO PERMITA LA OPERACION DEL ASCENSOR cuando e] disposi~ivo de seguridacl ya neccsita ser reemplazado. La fccha dc reemplazo aparcce sellada en la placa dc dates dcl t.iisposi[ivo dc scguridad. Cercibrcsc (ic quc dicilo disposi[ivo sca rccmpiazado antes de la tccha programacla de rccambio. NO PERMITA LA OPERAC1ON DEL ASCENSOR si se sospwha ia posibilidad dc cualquier [ipo dc problcmas. Las vibraciones inusualcs, qucjidos, temblorcs, C[C.son sehales de advertencia [cmprana. lntcrrumpa c1 funcionamicn[o c insti[uya una inspccci(m cornplc[a clc rnan[cnimicnto. LAs PUERTAS Y COMPUERTAS DEL AREA DE DESEMBARCO DEBE\ ESTAR CERRADAS YTRABADAS CUANDO LA CABINA ESTA LEJOS DEL /kEA DE DESE,MBARCO. Ccl-ciorese dc quc cl sislcma dc enclavamlcnto sea funcional. 8. EL RECINTO DE LA BASE (O FOSA) DEBE MANTENERSE CERRADO CON LLAVE EN 3ODO MOAIENTO DURAN1E LA OPERAC1ON DEL ASCENSOR. Solamenlc sc pcrmitc ci ingrcso dcl personal cic scrvicio capaci[ado cn el rccin{o dc la base. La pucrta (ic acccso debt cstar cerracia con candodo. DESCONECTE EL SUJMINISTRO ELfiCTRICO Y IILOQUEE EL INTERRUPTOR DE DESCONEX1ON (con un candado) ANTES DE PRESTAR SKRVICIO TECNICO AL SISTEMA ELEVADOR. PERSONA DEBE ESTAR EN EL DE LA BASE N1 EN LA TORRE POR RAZON CUANDO EL ASCENSOR ESTADO OPERATIVO. Desconectc y interrupter dc desconexion inmedialamente recinto de la base.
dc
2.
9.
3.
i o. NINGUNA RECINTO NINGUNA EST,k EN bloquee e] al entrar el
4.
11. LA CABINA DEBE ESTAR DESACTIVADA CUANDO HAY TRA13AJADORES EN O SOIIRE LA TORRE O EL MkSTIL. I 2. LOS TRABAJADORES EN LA TORRE MASTIL DEBEN USAR CINTURONES SEGURIDAD EN TODO MOhlENTO. O EL DE
5.
13. EN OPERACIONES DE MANTENIMIENTO CONJUNTAS DE LA CABINA Y DE LA TORRE O MASTIL, OPERE LA CABINA SOLAMENTE DESDE LA PARTE SUPERIOR DE LA CABINA. Los opcradorcs y ios [rabajadores de ia torre debcn es[w dcntro (IcI campo dc visi6n y dc audici6n en todo rnomento.
6.
CRONOGRAMA
DE INSPECTION
La inspecci6n pel-ibdica cs neccsaria para megurar una operation segura y un scl-vicio confiable durante mucho tiempo. Para cstc propbsi[o, se han diseiiado trcs periodos de Inspccciim: i. Cacla dos semanas - EsIa cs una breve inspecci(m visual y vcriticacihn Iuncionai. 2, hlensual sis[cma. - Es[a cs una inspccci6n complcla dc todo ci
7.
Ifigina 2-2-
Nlailltellilllicllt{)
3.
Trinlcs(r-al
- Esla
cs und inspecc]6n
dcl caja
dcl
;ISCCn SOI- y dcl
frcno (Ic la cabina. adcmis clc uno pIucba CIC caida ccrtili~:l~l:ldcl disposilivo dc sc~uriclad.
Comp[lcrtas de la cabina - Las compucrtas dc la cabina dcbcn luncionar dc mancra unitormc, sin atascarsc [) Iral)arsc. Encla}amicntos cl~ctricos de la compucrta - Vcrifiquc quc Ias pucr(as LICI aja CICI sccnsor estcn trabadas con c a
firlllC7.:1 a] CClI;)rSCla pLlCrt2 (:I lllCnOS (]UC CSti dCS[l:lbada pm
4. Scmianunl -Adcnlfistlc 1:1sillspcccioncs:in [c]it~rcs.sc incluyc la prucbadc (iisp~xilivodc scguridad. INSPECTION CADA DOS SEMANAS
]a Icva cxtcndida). P.cvisc 1X palancas para Llctcrminar su rnovimicnlo libre y ~]{lido. La palanca dcbc scguir e] n]ovimicnlo (ic la lcva sin a[ascarsc.
Cada dos semanas, rcalicc la inspccci6n visual y vcrificaciones funcio]lalcs cll(lllleradas a continuaci6n. Cuulquier problems observado deberii corregirsc de inmctliato. INSPECTION VISUAL
Lcva rctr5ctil - Vcrifique que la Ieva sc cx[icnda cuando la cabina sc cncucntra en la zona de dcscmbarco. La Icva no dcbc estar cxtendida cuando la cabina sc cncucn[ra enlre 10s pisos. Parada automfitica en cada piso - La cabina dcbc dctenersc cn cl irea dc clcsembarco programado dcntm de t ]/2 pul@a. Comprucbe que se detenga cn Cl Iu:ar clue correspond. Iluminacitin de cmcrgencia - Verifique que al apagarsc cl suministro cltctrico a la cabina, comienza a tuncional- cl sis[erna dc iluminacion (Ic crnctgencia. Interruptor del pozo - Al activarse el interrupter dcl pozo, sc apaga cl sun]iniswo cldctrico al asccnsor. Verifiquc quc al prcsionarse cste in[errup[or sc prohiba cl funcionamicnto LIclasccnsor. Lubricaci6n 2-2). INSPECTION - Colmprucbe la lubricaci6n (vtasc la Tabla
Cable mtivil - El cable mtivil dcbe cstirwse de mancra uniformc a 10 largo dc la [orrc, a [raves de 10S rodillos de guia y por encima de la rucdn dc guia. Compruebc que Cl cable este colocado correct amcnte en el rodillo dc guia. VERIFICACIONES FUNCIONALES
Resortcs de amortigualnicnto - Los resor[es dc amor[igumnicn[o para la cabina dcbcn estar en su lugs]- v alineados vcr[icalmcn[c. Escotilla de] tccho - La csco[illa (IcI [echo debe scr operable desdc cl inlcrior dc la cabina y descle el techo. El asccnsor no clcbc opcrarse si la cscotilla es[h abierta. L5nlpara tlc la cabina - Veritiquc que la lfimpara clentro dc la cabina CSU5 iluminada cuando el interrup[or LIGHT CSKI la posicidn ON. cn Lutes inclicadorcs de] intcrruptor dcl bot6n pulsador Prcsione el boton pulsatJor para cl fil-eode descrnbarco de cada piso cn la cabina. Verifiquc que la luz dc cada piso perrwtnczca ilumirwla has[;l alcanzarsc al irea dc dcscrnbarco. Alarma dc cmcrgcncia - Vcrifiquc que al presionarsc bo[on pulsador ALARM sucnc una alarma. c1
MENSUAL
Adcmk dc rcalizar la inspccci6n completa quc dcbc clccmarsc cada (IOSscmanas, haga una inspcccion adiciona], dc acLIcrdo con la Tabla 2-1. La inspccci6n clcbe ser IIcvada a cabo por personal dcbidamcntc capacitaclo para cs[e procedimiento por Champion Elevators, Inc. (o sus reprcscrttantcs autorizmlos quc acttian cn su nombre). INSPECTION TRIMESTRAL
Parada de cmergencia - Vcritiquc quc al prcsionarsc cl intcrrup[or EMERGENCY SIOP sc dcticnc cl asccnsor cuando cslfi cn moiinlicn[o. Estaci6n de control dcl 5rCil de dcscmbarco - Vcrifiquc quc cn cada firca & dcscmbarco 10cabina rcsponda a una IIarnada (la IUZLICI o[bn pulsador sc cncicndc, b reconocicndo la IIamacla), cn ia dil-cccion hacia arriba y/o hacia abajo.
fisla cs una inspcccihn cxtcnsiva y con[icnc cinc[) ~wcas dc inspcccioncs, cada una dc las cualcs dcbcri con)plc[awc indcpcndicntcmcntc dc las dcmfis. 1. Rcalicc una inspcccicm complc[a, 1;]Tabla 2-1. [a] como sc define cn
2. Dcsarrnc y revise IOS discos dc IOStrcrms. VLasc MANTENIMIENTO DE LOS FRENOS.
31ai[]tcl]il]]icl]to
- lfigin:l 2-3
3.
Etccttic UnLIvcriiic:lc](~n LILJa tot sion dc IOS an~LIIcs ] r dc pilled } (k la IOrlclllilslll (pclnos y [Ucrcas).
INSPECTION
SEMIANUAL
4, RCVISC 1:1 ba[cri;l cn cl comrolxlor pro:ran~ablc. RccII~placc la batcria <i c1 v{)lt:ljc es nlcnor a 3 iol[im, o C:lda 2 aiios (Seglin 10(1UC OCUII:I primcro).
Esta inspcccibn incluye 10s cualro pasos cnumcl-ados wllcl-iorn~cn[c en la inspcccibn trinlcstro] :Idclll(ls dc 1:1 prucba dcl clispositivo dc seguridad. Debt llcva]-sc a cabo la prucba dc sc~uridad a plcna c:ilga (v6asc 1:1p(lgina 2-7 y 2-S) una vcz cada scis mcscs. Sin cm bal-:o, una prucba de scguridad sin carga (vtasc 1:1 p(lgina 2-7) puccic susLituir la prucba de scguridad a plcn;l cary una vcz al aiio. CUADRO DE INSPECTION
Estc cuadro de inspection (Tabla 2-1) enumera Ios clcrnentos que deben inspcccionarse, la verificaciim quc dcbe realizarse y 10S mttodos que dcben usarse para llc~)ar a cabo csta inspecci6n, La inspection debe realiznrse por personal certificado, por mdtoclos aprobados y dcntrc dc IOSperiodos de ticmpo recomcndacios.
lfigil):]
2-4-
\l:lilllcllilllitl]to
Tabla
2-1-
Cuadro
de inspection
Nlttoclo
I:lcmcoto
Vcri!imr 1(Isiyuicnlc
L.t~ntKIl, .]lcl:k\,:tlllic.lll~>s c
ICblllpoerlas d~.1~I!~.;ldc cw. t]lba]co
Inlcl Illp[or Ompmtl c
Lnllomlii. kd \ }Ysllllos
.Arliclllacibn
dr f(ltlciol~:lll~iclll{) dc la Conlpt!clll
Inccinica
GIrL, la compucml
dCll\ lr C] ll)lC1l(lplOr
pnra abl II ! c.. Ir:IrlT
El pcs IIllo kbc
ful]ciow
r).
cnn facilidad
(OIYl,lll al)
dc 1:1 (IL. ] IL,clnlo
dc! la COlllpOC11:1 a] CSIJ] cnc:inchmf
Verifiquc Compmtbc
c1 b]azo de] In[crr\)ploI
y 10s lomil]os
de monlaje, ccrrmfn, ]onga la cabioa cn
bosc
Ftlllciol>:llll]cnlo Cnt(onniclncl c(mpucrla
el~c[rico de fuocionanlicnlo (Jc la
qoe la cobin~ iuncionwi \,criliquc Iejos dcl fwc~ k
solan~enle con In compoella La compoel-la
:Ompllcll a(s) (IC 1:1 abina
Abra la crsmpucrla; funcionamicn[o de cdificio Vcrifique
la uniform icfmf dc funciooamicn[o. dcscmba]co.

y 10s
f31~~qucofiu[omtilico
(Jc la cabina miis alcjad,
ckl Iacfo i~.qoicrclo

ion mccfioica
sc deberia cermr :,tll[]n~fi[icall~cl]lc. el bmzo de] in[cm]p[o[ Immi]los de mootaje, CJC lirrli[e de [raycc[oria final se verifica sosleng
de la
ntcrrllplOrcs
dc Iimitc
.Arlicuk)c
c Imyeclolna Funclonamierrto elcctrico El funcionamien[o funcionr.micn(o inkr]op[or enceml]clo ningund Iilni[c nolmlol cfcl in!emoplor de] inlcnuplol dt Iimilc inferior, sc vcrifica El con por nle( (Ic pamdas aulomi[icas CII Ins itc:is de dcscrmbarco superior c ]!~fcrlor.
mancra sigoicnle: la palirnca dcl en
cabioa eo e] fires de desemharco superior (POWER) de k en si] posicibll
nmnualmcnlc
activadfl en IJ direcci6n FINAL
bacia ahnjo. La IUZ & LIMIT OVERRIDE. flsccndcn[e

inferior.
debcria cs[ar apagda solamcmc

poI
y 10cabina no clcbc]-ia KsponclcI
(Jirecciones. responder
Pwsione c1 inlelrup[or
pulsatdo cncima
La
coan
c;ib Ina deberia la cfibina
al comando de nlovim]cn[o
cl inferior clel firca
(L JP).El La hasl~
final supe]-ior se cOnlprucbn

se encuenoa I (IOS pIcs
de 10s (Jos inlcrroploucs (Jc cfcscmb;trco
cabioo no de beria responder prcsionarsc el interrup[or la lubric~ci on, Rocf!llos (Ic ~oin ablna r,~Jlllclcs Verifiquc Lobrlcocitin Vcrifique
o Ios com;~ndos en ninguna de Ias dirccciooes LIMIT OVERRIDE.
FINAL
la exislcnc ia dc jucgo y ho]gora cxccsi\, os.
a una mala alinencion. Reso]-[cs k anlO]tigtl ;\lllietllo .abina Disposllivo dc de Ifi LOS ICsor[es (Je[xm esl~r ct~locados y alincados \ cr[!cdlmentc in>pcccion v]so:l] Verifique Veritique visunlmcn!e \,isualmcnlc. (COOSOIICla piglna 2-7). Vcrifique viswdmcnle.
Ik
COOJ11OIO (JCguia (fCl able
R<~dillos de goia, guia dc Ios clbl,.s dc 10s cojine(cs rudos II\~.1 de accile rlc Ias
CaJa de cngranaJes
Rclirc
el [apon dc \,cr]licaci611 la TAf3LA visualmcl] 2-2. le.
dcl nivc] de acci[c. ,lgrcguc
accl[c segin
sc reqoierl,
Consulle Foswi dc ;tccilc Frcl]o Rccinio priocip?,l Luz dc Ifi c~bina Lubricnc]bn Ilcilfde movll clic[rico Funclonamicnto Veri liquc Verilicloe cJc Rcalicc dc 10s Rcemplacc Vcrifiqilc Ilmyc-c,orin.
qtlc la cabioa sc dcmn!a ona inspeccibn
dc mancra uniformc dcl rtcinw.
cn mcnos dc III] pie.
D.lims por c1 agua, formation

a[t.ui. monlajc
Col)lpuncll Ics
visual CJCIinterior
Limpara Cwlro
qucmda de ltlbl tcacion dcl cnblc par;, dc :Iislon)icolo
la l~nlpnra. quc el sislcmn sc haya lublicacfo cl cabl. visonlmcnw. opcrc Conlpnlcbc CICacwrckr con 1:1T.4BLA c\ccsivo, 2-2.
IT,(I;, l;, Iongitwl Icllcl:irdai,os
Ilnsfscccionc
la cab,nldcsdc
c1 Iccbo ;, 10 Idrgo dc l{da Iodos o :lisla,,~,cn[o
II
si hay un rclolcimitnlo
Figura 2-2
DISPOSITIVO DE SEGURIDAD SOBREVELOCIDAD
PARA
Fi,gi/ra 2-1 LUBR1CAC1ON DE LA CREMALLERA
Tabla 2-2- Cuadro de Iubricacion

Elemento Reductor dc cngrrmajes Motor/Se~uri(lad C1-emallcra Lubricant Mobil SHC 634 Lublicantc para cngranajcs abicrtos Amovis No 80 No. 104 Amoli[h No. 2EP Cronograma Man[cncr a nivel. Cambim anualrnente. Al el-igi]y mensua]mentc o se~un sc requiera por cl uso (viase la Fiyura 2-1). Mcnsualmente o cadn 20 horas 10 que ocurra primero (vdase la Ficura 2-2). Mcnsualmentc o scgtin sc rcquicra. Mensualmcntc o c:ida 20 horas 10 que ocurm primero (vEase la Figura 2-3). Mensualmcntc o cada 20 horas 10 quc ocurra primero (vkc la Figura 2-5). Mcnsualrncnlc o scgtin sc rcquicra (vtasc la Figura 2-4).
Disposi[iv~~ de seguridad parfi sobrevelocidad Roldanas dc en:ran;]jes Rodillos dc la cabina
Lubricant pal-a crrgranajcs mul[ipropbsito AN().140 Amolith No. 2EP
Rodillos dcl marco dcl cable m6vil Puntos dc pivote de la Ieva rclrfictil k- Disponible como rocio cn acrt]sol
Anmli{h No. 2EP
Rocio cn aerosol WD-40
----7s
111
I~
I I .:. E
G
Figure/ 2-3 Figura 2-4
RODILLOS DE LA CABINA
PUN1OS DE PIVOTE DE LA LEVA RETRACTIL
Figura 2-5
RODILLOS
DE LA ROLDANA DEL CABLE MOVIL
&
.0,0 u
j\l;]i:lte[)in)iel]to
- Jiigina 2 - 7
DISPOSITIVO DE SEGURIDAD INSPECTION Y PRUEBAS

INSPECTION VISUAL
I.
La i[lsl>ccci(~ilclcl~lisp~}sl[i\ c)~lcseguricl:\ clcc]]~s[:i{lc la complobaci(~n dc Iosc]clncnlos siguicnlcs: Scllo - Vcrl[lque el alamb]-t dcl SCIIOy cl scllo dc plonm. El alambl-c debe scr continuo y no quebraclo, a [ravds CIC loscabcz:lles dclt~stc>lnill( ~sclc Ia [apa. Pernos de montaje - Vcritiquc la torsion en 10s pc]mos de montajc. Apriete a 190 pies-lb de torsi6n. Piii60 - Revise el piii6n pwa dctectar dientes daiia(los. Revise e] anillo suje[aclor de rclencion para cerciorarsc de que est6 en su ranura, manlcnicncfo al piiibn en position. SCIIO de fecha - Verifique la Fccha de rccambio cn cl dispositivo de se,gul-idad. INOTA: El dispositivo dc seguridad para sobrevclocidxl dcbe reemplazarse cada tres aiios con una unidad ccrtificacla inspeccionada cn tfibrica. Consulte PROCEDIMIENTOS DE SERVICIO - REEMPLAZO DEL DISPOSITIVO DE SEGURIDAD (pAgina 4-1 ) para conocer e] procedimiento de rccambio. INSPECTION FUNCIONAL
Sc rccomicnda la par1icipaui6n dc dos personas para cs[a prucba, un opcrado] dc monlaca]gas y a]guicn cn la partc superior dc la c:lbina para opcrar cl bo[bn dc disparo regulfldol-. PRECAUC1ON: Todos Ios trabajadores en cl tccho dcben pcrmancccr cotnplctamente dcntro de Ios pasamanos cuanclo la cabina csld cl) movimicnto.
2. El opcrador dcl montacargas dcbe u[ilizar la cs[acion de control dcl tccbo (v6asc la p~!ginn I-2) cn la p:lrtc superior dc la cabina para operar c1 asccnsor. PRECAUTION: Mantenga 10Sarticulos, tales como las herramicntas u otras pcrtencncias en e] techo, Iejos de la abertura. 3. Opl-ima c1 boton DOWN en el estacion de control dc techo, y rnan[engalo presionado. 4. Micntras la cabina sc muevc hacia abajo, oprirne firrncmcnte el botbn dc disparo reg,ulador (vcasc la Figura 2-6) para aplicar e] dispositivo de seguridad para sobrevelocidad. La cabina debt de[enerse dcn[ro de 10s cinco (5) pies o menos. NOTA: El boton de disparo debe moverse libl-crnente. Debcril rcvismse cualquier cvidencia de atascamicnto. 5. Eleve la cabina aproximadamente cinco (5) pies al terminal la prucba parea restaurar automa[icamenlc e] disposi[ivo cie sc~uridad para sobrevcloci(fad. Una accibn de rest fiuro corrects se evidcncia por mcdio de una sc]-ic dc sonidos de chasquiclos al subir la cabinn. Los cbasquidos son causados pm la acci6n dc triquc[eo del mccanismo de rcstauro dc scguriclad. Cuando se deticnc el chasquido, se rcstaura el dispositivo de seguridad. PRIZCAUCION: Si no se escuchan Ios chasquidos, el dispositivo cs dcfectuoso y tleber5 scr recrnplazado. Prueba (Jc scguridacl a plena carga
Prueba de seguridatl sin carga Esta prueba cons[a dc disporar manualrncnte el dispositivo dc seguriciacl mientras el montacmgas esth en funcionamicnto. Es[a prueba vcrifica la operation del frcno y del interrupter dc se:uridzd. La prucba de scguriclad sin carga puede reemplazar la prueb:l de sc:uridad a plena carga una vcz al silo, de :icueKIo con la INSPECTION SEMI ANUAL (v6asc la pigina 2-3). Esta prucba sc ]-caliza sin carga en la cabina, de la mancra siguicn[e (no sc debt eliminar el frcno centrifuge para cs[as prucbas):
r BOTOX DE
DISP,\RO REG( 1.\[>OR
Esta prucba consta dc cmgar c1 montacargas hasta su valor nominal y pcrrnitir que caiga libremente. Cuando la cabina alcanza la vclocidad dc disparo prcviamentc establccida, se ponc cn funcionamicrtto cl freno, dc[cnicndo la cabina. Esta prucba verifica la vclocidad dc disparo y la distancia dc dctcncibn. Es[a prucba debt set- rcalizacla o supcrvisada por un rcprcsentan[c ccl-lificack) por la compafiia y dcberfi ser obscrvada por un inspcclor quc represcn[c la autoridad de acatamicn[o legal.
- .
Figl//u 2-6 DISPOSITIVO DE SEGURIDAD SOBREVELOCIDAD
PARA
Sc rcquicrc mon)cn[o
prucba dc Liii(ld a p!cnd C: II:: I cn c1 instalacion initial, cad:] ic.z qNc sc hag:) una nl(xlillcacion impor[an[c, c:kl:t vcz quc sc baya lroto cl SCIIOdcl disposi[ivo de scguritlad, cada vcz quc sc haya rccmplazado el clispositivil dc scguridad y dc acucl-do con la INSPECC1ON SEMI ANUAL (\L:Isc 10pfigina 2-3).
una dc la
Esla prucba sc realiza (Icsdc la [icrm usando la csmcion de control dcl [echo. Consultc la Figura I-2. 1. Rc[ilc el frcno ccntrifugo (vdasc la Figura 2-7) de la mancra siguiente: Girt Ios tomillos LIcpresi6n monwtos latcralmen[c dos \LIcllas complctas en la
dircccion hexagonal npropiada de Y2. para quitarlos, y retire e] perno
Debt qui[a[-sc cl rotor dcl freno del
Cjc. NOTA: La cabina no Ilegwi n la vclocidad de disparo de scguridad del regulador a mcnos que sc quite el freno ccntrifugo. 2. Con la cabina en la base, abra el recinto electrico pl-incipal e inscrte la nave de la prucba de caida (cmi!ida solamentc al reprcscntante certificado por la con]pafiia) en el intenuptor de IIavc OPERATWTEST. Girt cl intcrruptor a la position TEST. NOTA: Con el in[crruptor OPERATE/TEST cn la posicihn TEST, la cabina no rcspondcri a 10S conlarrdos de wiba-abajo desdc su in[erior. 3. Coloque un peso, equivalcnte a la capacidacl nominal LIcla cabina, sim6tricanlcn{e cn cl piso (un cuatro de 1:1 carga nominal clistribuida cn cada cuarta parte). 4. El intcrruptor STOP dc la cstaci6n principal de control dcbc cstar oprimido y cl intcmup[or DROP TEST/STOP/OPERATE cn al cstacion dc con[rol clcl [ucho (Figura 1-2) dcbe cslar girado a ia posici6n OPERATE. 5. Usanclo la cstaci6n de control dcl tccho desrle e] SUCIO. conduzca la cabina hasta una altura CIC vcintc (20) pies. PR12CAUCIOIS: Cerci6rese de quc c1 cable conectado a la cstaci6n clc control de] techo no tenga obstrucciones. 6. Girt cl intcrruptor DROP TEST/STOP/OPERATE a la posici6n DROP TEST. Dicho in[cmup[or dcbcrfi man[cncrsc cn csta posici(m, pucs[o quc la cabina se dctcndrfi al sonar c1 in!crruplor. 7. La cabina cam-i Iibrcmcn[c, acclcrindosc hasta Ilcgar a la vclocidad LIcdisparo (:~proxill~tld:inlcnlc cinco (5) pies).
Fi,gura 2-7 FRENO Centrifuge
d s. El disparo CICI isposi[ivo dc scguridad se evidcncia por mcdio de un sonido de golpeteo de la carga. La cabina dcbcr{l frcnarse hasla de[cncrse en menos de cinco (5) pies adicionalcs. 9. Si cl dispositivo dc seguridad no se dispwa dcspuds dc quc la cabina sc ha dcsplazado diez (10) pies, sueltc c1 iolcrrup[or DROP TEST. La cabina se deterx.hi. PRECAUC1ON Si c1 dispositivo de seguridad no Iogra tlctcner la cabina dcntro de la distancia cspccificada, dicho dispositivo CS(5 tfefectuoso y debcrh ser rccmplazado o rcparado por un represcntantc autorizado dc Champion Elcvntors, Inc. La opcraci6u de la cabina se consi(lcra illsegura. 10. Para restaurar el disposi[ivo dc seguridad, girt cl in[crrup[or DROP TEST/STOP/OPERATE ktsta la position OPERATE y conduzca la cabina hacia arriba :Iproxilnad:ll]]enlc dicz ( IO) pies. Una acci6n dc rcstauro corrccta sc cvidcncia por mcdio dc una scric cic sonidos CIC ch:~squidos al subir la cabina. Los chasquidos son causados por la accit% dc lriquc[co lIc I mccanismo dc rcslauro dc scguridad. Cuando sc dc[icnc c1 chasquido. sc rcs[aum cl disposi[ii, o dc scgurida(l. IllECAUCl ON: Si no sc cscuchan IOSchasquicfos, cl dispositivo cs cfcfectuoso y dcber6 ser rccrnplamdo o rcparado por un rcprcscntante autorizado dc Champion Elevators, Inc. La operaci6n dc la cahina se consitlcra insegura.
lrueba de scguridad
a plena carga (continl]:lcitin)
I 1.L:I pmcba ya sc ha con~plc[ado. fJajc la cabina h;ls[ii Ii] bwc y coloquc la cs[aci(~n (Ic con[ro] dcl [c~bo nucv~mcn[c sobre 10Sriclcs dc pro[eccion con cl inlcrrupwr DROP TESTiS1OP/OPERATE cn la posiclbn STOP.
I ?. Vuclva a arrnar cl trcn(~ccn[[ifu:o en cl ejc. Rccmplace c1 perno dc Y:- n el extrcmo dcl ejc y c apricte 10s Iornillos dc pl-csi6n montados I:l[cl-a]nlcn[c pal-a lijar c1 ro[or. a co]ocar e]
4, RCI!K Iii plwa LIcprcsion (6), 10Sdiscx>s dc !riccibn (7). c1 d]sco cs[acionario (8) y cl cubo (9). \OTA: Los frcnos mon[a~ios vcl-ticalmcn[c disponcn (1c pilwdolcs cspccialcs quc guian 10s rcsorlcs cspaci:ltl[)ws >, cn algun(ls cases, dc arandelas dc rcs(w[c. Observe la sccucncio codificwla con colorcs dc 10s rcsol-lcs y 1:1 ubicacioll dc las al-anclclas, sl SCulilizan. 5. Concctc la placa Iinnl ( 12) a la cara dc Inonlajc de] motor uli]izando [orni]]os dc cabczn hucca (]as cabczm cic Ios mismos no LIcbcn sobresalir po]- cncima dc la cola dc (ricci6n). 6, Coloque cl cubo (9) y la nave cn posici6n sobrc cl cje dc motor, y apric[e con firmeza ambos tornillos cic tornillos de fijacion ( 10, consultc Ios pares torsorcs de asen[amicnto recomendados por cl fabric an[c). El cubo es[a correctamcnte colocado cuando sobresalc m~is fill~ de la cara dcl rlltimo disco C!C fricci6n entre 1/32 cie pulgada y I/16 de pu]@a, No cnsamblc IOSresortes vetticales de rnontaje al tomar Ias rne(iiciones de la position dcl cube. En algunas aplicaciones (particularmcnte en la posici6n \,crtical), se recomicncla perforar un hoyuelo para el tornillo de fijacion cn el eje. 7. Vuelvfi a armar 10S discos de friccion (7), c1 disco cstacionario (8) y la placa dc presion (6) cn la sccucncia > position corrcctas. Si cl freno se monta vcr[icalmcnte, vuelva a armar 10s rcsortes y espaciadores cn la sccuencia . .. y postcion corrcctas. NOTA: Los discos de fricci6n (7) deben tencr la libcrlad (Jc dcslizarsc sobrc cl cubo (9), micn[ras quc IOSdiscos estacionarios (S) y la placa dc presi6n dcbcn Icncr la Iibertad de dcslizarse sobrc la placa final (12). En el caso de frcnos montados vcrlicalmen[c, comprima cl cmpaquc para cerciorarse de quc IOScomponents se desliccn con Iibcrtad sobrc Ios pasadorcs. Si IOSrcsortes NO vuelven a los componcntes, es posible que 10S pasadorcs es[tln doblados y que sc IOSdcba enderczar. 8. Mon[c c1 conjun[o de la placa dc apoyo (5) a la placa final (12) utilizzmdo [ornillos 93) y arandclas de presi6n (4), Inscrlc 10s [ornillos dc mancra uniforme. NOTA: Si cl Lmbolo (Jc1solcnoiclc no cstaba oscgurado en la posicith dc Iibcracion manual (consul[e e] paso 7) y ha permitido cl sobrcajus[c dcl mccanismo, sc 10 deberi I-cstablcccr. En cstc case, In garymta de] brazo dc palanca (~. Figura 2- 10) cstarfi Ccrca o tocando ]OSdicn[cs dc piiibn (2. Figura 2- 10). Atloje cl lornillo dcl rcsortc dc prcsi6n (4, Figura 2- 10) basta quc c1 rcsoltc dc plcsibn (5. Figura 2- 10) cskl Iibrc, mon[c cl conjunlo dc la placa LIc ;Ipoyo :1 la placo final y \ILICIV;La aprc[aI- cl [ornillo dc rc.sor[c (4, Fig,ura 2- 10). NO APRIETE DEMASIADO.
I 3. VUC]va
inlc]mtp[or
cic
IIavc
OPERATE/TEST en cl rccin[o eldc[rico principal en la posici6n OPERATE y rc[ilc la Ilove. La cabina ya CS1{I lists para la operation EN LA CABINA. NOTA: No romps cl SCIIOdcl dispositivo de seguridad. No conliene piezas rcpal-ablcs por cl usua]-io en su intcrio].
MANTENIMIENTO DE LOS FRENOS
El frcno es un freno de disco Iibcmdo electromagneticamen[e, fijado pol resortes, que contienc dos discos de friccion giratonos. conclucidos por un cubo morr[ado al eje de] motor, El tlcno sc ajusta .automiticamente para el dcsgaste de] disco de fricci6n. La scparaci6n de aire clel solcnoide se ajusta en fiibrica y norrnalmente no requiere lrcajustc incluso al cambiar Ios discos de friccion. Un cm brayuc dc rcsor[c bobinado pcrmile corregir autornfiticanlcntc la scparacidn (Ic aire del solenoide para compensal- por cl desgas[c por friccion cic la expansi6n normal. No se dcbc rnodificar e] valor cs[ablccido en fiibrica dcl pa] mrso[ dc ]OSfrenos de ajus[c automhtico, PROCEDIMIENTO DE INSTALACION (Veasc la Figtra 2-8) 1. Dcsconecte la palanca dc Iibcracibn manual. Dcstornillc y quite Ias [ucrcas del alojamicnlo ( 1) y cl alojamicn[o mismo (2). 2. Oprirna el Lmbo!o LIclsolcnoidc (2, Figura 2-9) y itclo al bastidor para bloqucar cl mccanisnm dcl freno cn la posici6n dc Iiberacion manuiil. 3. Dcsconcctc Ios cables dc dcl-ivaci6n dcl bobin~ldo dcl solcnoiclc (1 5) y rc[irc Imlo cl conjurtto Licla placa dc ilpoyo (5) dcslornillando y quilando 10s [wnillos (3) y 1;1s arandclas dc pl-csitin (4).
l%:ina
2- 10- \lailltcl]illlicllltJ
CONJUNTO
Fi$ur(] 2-8 COMPLETO
DEL FRENO
9. Lcvante manualmentc c1 cmbolo dcl solcnoidc a su wiycctoria mixima y su~llclo. Complelc Ias concxioncs el@ctricas. Oprima el Llnbo!o dcl solcnoidc manualmcn[c y pcl-mila queseenganche. Rcpitacslc l]r~>cesolariasvcccs para fijar la separation dc airc cn cl solenoicle. En cl caso de frcnos montados ver[icalmcn[c, suje[e la ar[iculacion del solcnoide (7, Figura 2- 10) para man[cner al embolo cn una posici6n horizontal libl-c y mudjalohaciocl marrodcl solcnoidc (5, Figura2-9) hmtascn[irsc ]aprcsibndcl rcsortc. Sujete la ar[iculaci6n dc] solcnoidc firmcmcnlc cn cs[aposicion ymidala scparaciondc ailccntrccl cmbolo del solcnoide (2, Figura 2-9) y cl marco dc] solenoiclc (5, Figura 2-9). Consulte la sccci6n MANTENIMIENTO DE AJUSTE AUTOMATIC pma dctcrminar la separaci6n corrcctn. Verifique la separacibn sujet:ln(lonllel:lll)cn[c e] cm bolodc acuerdo con las insumccioncs. lo.Vuclv3a ins[alarel ;lloj:illlicnto( 2)al; \plac:lfin:ll (1 2). Vue]va a instalar 12s tucrcas dc alojamicnto (1) y
vuclva
QQ
Figura 2-9
CONJUNTO
DE LA BOBINA
a conectar la libcraci6n manual,
3. Retire cl tornillo dc guia de] nbcleo m6vil (1) y ambas guias dcl cnlbolo (4). Revise Ias guias dcl nticlco n]6vil para dcterminar cl dcsgastc y reempl~celm en caso de scr nccesario. 4. Deslicc la bobina Iatcralmentc de] marco (si fucra ncccsario, golpcc Iigcramcnte con un martillo suave). Si se ha qucmaclo la bobina antigua, ccrci6rcsc dc habcr eliminado todo cl material extraiio CICI onjun[o c del solcnoidc. 5. lnstalc la bobina nucva cn la n~isma posicitin rclativa quc la bobin:l an[igua, siguicndo Ios paws an[criorcs cn orden invcrso. 6. Sig,a c1 pmo 9 dcl PROCEDIMIENTO INSTALACION. DE
CIJIDADO: No haga funcionar c1 nlotor con cl frcno en la posici6n de libcraci6n manual. Sirve solamcnte pnra cl molimiento manual de cnwygencia de la carga conducida, y no como rccmplazo de una libcraci6n cl~ctrica completa. REEMPLAZO DE LA BOBINA (vJasc la Fi:ura 2-9) 1. Desencrgicc y dcsconcclc la bobina (6) dcl cirwi[o.
2. Rc[ire Ios tornillos dc mtmtajc y Ias arandclas dc cicwc (7) y tire de] marco del w)lcnoide (5) y dc la bobina (6) para I-etirarlos dcl nticlco n16vil (2).
jYlailltelli[llicllt(J - Ifigilla 2 - 11 RENOVATION FRICCION DE LOS REVESTIMIENTOS DE 3. En LaSO(Ic dCS;IpWCCCt- wparaci6n dc airc, cs posibk la quc sc haya fiplicado accilc LI o[ro lubric:lntc a la palanca dcl solcnoiclc y al conjon[o dc piilon (2). RCIIIC c1 conjunto dc la placa dc apoyo. Aflojc c1 [ornillo dc rcsoilc CIC prcsibn (4) hasla qoc e] resorlc dc prcsi(~n (5) qucde Iibre. Retire c1 pasador dc cho\>cI:) dc la palanca del solcnoidc y el anillo de re[cncibn LIcl pasador dc pivote. Observe la ubicaci6n dc la arandc]a cspaciadorfi, cn caso LIC habcrsc usado, y ernpujc c1 pasador & pivotc hac Ia afucra para Iiberar cl conjunto afcctado. Rc~ire e] anillo de retenci6n del piii6n y dcsiumelo. Limpie Ias piczas comple[amente en un solvcnte Iimpio que no dcjc unn pclicula. Seque todas las piczas cornplctamente y vue]va a nrmar. cercibrcsc dc quc el resorte dc arrollamien[o cst~ aprctxlo con[ra la cara lateral de la palanca de] solenoidc, y que e] cx[remo de la ultima vuelta toquc (sin prccarga) c1 topc protuberance cuadmdo de la palanca del solcnoide. Vuelva a armar cn ordcn invcrso. No vLIc]va a apretar e] torni]lo dc] rcsortc de presion (4) hasta quc e] conjunto de la placa dc apoyo estd montado cn la placa final. Consu]lc 10s pasos 8 y 9 de] PROCEDIMIENTO DE INSTALACION para complctm c1 m-made. 4. Vcrifiquc la condici6n y posicionamicn[o del piiibn (par~e de] conjunto dc la palanca de] solenoide - 2) y la crcmallera (partc clel conjunlo de] brazo de palanca - 3), Reemplacc las piczas scgtin considere neccsario, con conjuntos complctos.
1. Dcscncrgice la bobina (Icl w)lcnoide y siga Ios pasos DE INSTALACION, a 4 dcl PROCEDIMIENTO ~cl~l(~rhndosc dc dcs~ol]~~l.11 )os bi]L)s de] LX)lldUC[[)l la bobina.
Llc
2. Sign cl paso 7 del PROCEDIMIENTO DE INSIALACION, rccmplazando IOSan[iguos discos dc lricci6n, Para asc:urar la opcraci6n corrects de frcno, ccrci()resc de quc 10s discos dc fl-icci6n se dcsliccn con Iibcr[ad, pel-o no (femasiado Soc]tosl sobrc c] cube. 3. Siga Ios pasos 8 a 10 dcl PROCEDIMIENTO lNSTALACION. MANTENIMIENTO DEL AJUSTE (Vcasc la Figura 2-10) DE
AUTOMATIC
Dado quc e] freno dc ajuste ao[ornfi[ico se ajus[a para tener cn cuenta e] desgaste de] disco LIcfriccion, cl mantcnimien~o requerido cs minimo. El solenoide se ajus[a cn fibrica con una separaci6n LIcairc de 13/16 a 15/16, y no requierc restauro, incluso al carnbiar de discos de friccion.. La separation se dctermina por la position de] topc CICI resorte de arrollamiento ( 10). Dcbido al desgaste initial de las piezas, la separaciim opera[iva normal es de 13/16 a 15/16. En caso de que csto cambie, siga 10S pasos cnumerados en la pi~ina siguiente: 1. Si IOStornillos de tope (1 1) se han aflojado y reaprctado, es posible quc la separacibn LIcairc rcquiera res[auro. La separacibn se mide entre superficies casantes de] nucleo rn(wil (2, Figura 2-9) y e] marco del solenoide (5. Figura 2-9), y se puede aumen[ar levantando Iigeramcnle e] [ope del resorte de m-rollamiento ( 10) o disminuir bajfindolo ligeramcntc. No olvidc volver a aprc[ar e] tomillo de tope (1 1). Manualmente Ievante c1 n(lclco mbvil hasta la n~~xin~:i distancia dc desplazamicn[o y pcrmita que se engancbc. Repita esto varias vcces. y lucgo vuelva a comprobar la scparacion de airc (consultc el paso 9 dcl PROCEDIMIENTO DE lNSTALACION). 2. El extrcmo macizo dcl rcsortc (fc arrollamicn[o (partc del conjunto de la palanca del solcnoidc - 2) debt estar dcbajo del tope del rcso]tc dc arrollamicnto ( 10), dcbicndo conectarse con CSICtil~in~o, cuando sc Ievarrla manoalmcntc la pnlanca dc solcnoidc (2). Si el tope cs[~ doblado hacia afuera. pcrmiticndo quc c1 cxtrcmo n]acizo 10 past pm alto. \Llclva a Lloblarlo hmta la posici6n cncuadrncla, {Irmclo coll-cclamcnte y rcslaLIIc la scparacibn de airc dc wlcnoidc dc acuerdo con las ins[rucciones del p(uralb 1. Considcrc c1 reernplazo LIc las piczas daiiadas.
CONJUNI-O
Fi,q/frd 2-/0 DE LA PLACA DE APOYO
P5gina 2-12-
Nlailltcllilllicllt{)
RESOLUTION
DE PROBLEMAS
q
Los prtlblcnlas mecfinicos ~cncralmcntc vicncn acompai iados dc sonidos (~lll~[-acic)ncsinusualcs. NO IGNORE ESTAS SE~ALES DE ADVERTENCIA TEIMPRANA. En la mayoria de IOSCMOS,Ios problcnlas mccinicos son simplcs y pucdcn rcpararsc ficilnlcntc. Una :Ilcncibn opor[una puccie ciilar L1I1O PtIIWl~ por :lvcri~l y rcducir c] licsgo de Una Siluacibn pc]igrosa Cn c! fL]lulo. Encuen[l-c cl origcn dc cualquicr problcma y haga 1:]s rcparacioncs nccewtrias. Algunos de IOSproblemas mccinicos tipicos quc pucdcn encontrarse sc cnumcran a con[inuaci6n: FRENOS
Si cl ticmpo de parfid:l cs de mis dc dos scyun(ios (rcgla :cnctal), cotnprucbc la carga cn la cabina, la cual no (icbcr~l sobrcpasar la capacidad nominal cic la cabina.
Si cl trcno murmurs, c1 solcnoidc tira hncia adcntro Icntarncntc o la bobina se c]ucma, revise 10 si:uicnte: PRECAUTION: Nunca energice la bobina con el alojarniento abierto, a menos que exista una attntisfera no explosiva en el rnotncnto de la prucba.
q
PRECAUTION: Cerci6rcse dc quc la cabina cst~ tljada de manera segura a la torrc o cst6 descansan(lo sobre 10s resorte de amortiguamiento, antes de tratar de realizar cualquier tipo de rcparaci6n cn e] freno. La cabina se caer% si se suelta el freno. Un freno que se resbala vicne indicado POT csl izamicn~os d inusualmente prolongados al aplicarse el freno. Si el trcno no se cictiene corrcctamen[e o se sobrecalienta, revise 10 siguiente:
q
9
q
~La liberacibn manual CS[Aapagada y el n~o[or cstfi encrgizado? Los discos de fl-icci6n pucdcn estar gastados excesivamen[e, quemmlos o rotos. El cubo puede baberse soltado y dcsplazado cn c1 ejc. ~El cubo estii Iimpio y Ios discos sc dcslizan con libcrtad? {, os discos estacionarios sc cieslizan librcmcntc cn la L placa final o es[fut alabcados? ~,La placa de presi6n es[fi instalacia cn la position corrccta y se clesliza librcrncnte en la placa final? ~Los resortes cst~n colwados cn el cmpaquc dcl disco? El rcsorte de presion pucdc cs[ar mal arm;do o roto. ~Sc ha ajustado correclamcnlc la scparaci(m dc airc dc solenoide (consulte MANTENIMIENTO DEL FRENO - Mm-itenimicnto dcl ajustc automitico)? El eslabon~micn[o dcl solcnoiclc dcbe movcrsc con Iibcr[ad (la prcsibn aprminlad:l cn cl nticlco mbvil has[a cl nticlco mhvit dcl asicnlo dcl marco dcbc scr LIc3 a 12 Iibras). El topc dc la palanca dcl solcnoidc (9, Fi~ul-a 2-9) dcbc cstar en p&ici6n cn la placa dc apoyo. ~,Es corrccto cl suministro dc vol[ajc cn la bobirra? Examine c1 rele del frcn[iprueba de caida (consulte c1 diagrama dc cablcado, pilgina 2- 17) y dc[cl-rninc si CS[Ldefccluoso.
El suministro de voltaje en la bobina comparado con e] valor nominal dc la bobina. ~La scparacion de aire de] solcnoide es exccsiva? (Consuitc MANTENIMIENTO DE FRENO Mantcnimiento de] ajuste automfitico). Es posiblc que est6n rotas las bobinas auxiliarcs. Las :uias de] nticleo movi] pueclen cstar exccsivarncnte gastadas. ~El nticlco movil de] solenoicic se rnueve sobre Ias larninficioncs del rnarco del solcnoi(ic? Es posible que est~n cxcesivamente gastacios cl marco del solenoidc y c1 nticlco m6vil. ~, stfi sucio e] solcnoide? E Es posiblc que sc hayan soltado IOStornillos cic montajc (ic solcnoide, causando quc sc desplacc c] rnarco y que el nticleo m6vil sc asiente de manera incorrccta. El cslabonarniento de solcnoide dcbe moversc con libertmi (la pl-csi6n aproximada cn cl nticlco movi] al nticlco mhvil dcl asiento en c1 macro dcbe ser de. 3 a 12 libras). Es posible quc sc cst6n atascon(lo IOSengrannjcs del sector y ios dicntcs (IcI piii6n dcbido a un dcs:as[c exccsivo de IOSdicntcs. Caida dc vol[aje cxccsiva a] arrancarse c1 motor. Revise c1 tamaiio dcl cable dc 10Shilos conductors hasta la caja dc cortacircuitos dc la base (intcrrup~oldc dcsconcxi6n). ENGANCHADOS (CONGELADOS)
COJINETES
Los cojinctcs cnganchados gcneralmcnic caL]san un ruido considerable y son fficiics dc cncon[rar. En algunos casms. c1 lrodi]lo pucdc tcrminar con un punto piano cicbido al frotamicn[o contra la pa[a dc la torrc. En CSIOS cases, cicber;l rccmplazwsc cl conjunto clcl cojinc[c (icl r{xiil]o.

NIainlenin]ic]lio - liiginil 2- 13
DISPAROS FALSOS SEGURIDAD)
(DISPOSITIVO
DE
El clisposltiv~) dc SC~Urid;d ~uCdC CSla~ son)ctido a dispararsc [lc:lsl(lll:lll]lcnlc (ponicndolo cn fullci[>l];llllicntc>) dcbido a jun[;ls dc!cctuosas dc Iii torrc (plmtubcrarwias cn la l~lrrc) o cn IOScases cn quc cl ICSOI-[C rcgulador CSIC Llcbilitado. Si c1 disposi[lvo dc scguridod sc dispara trccucnten]cntc cn LIn pun[o par[iculw de la [ol-1-e, robab]enmn[c p se debt n una junta dc!cc[uosa de ta lorrc. Deberfi inspcccionwse la junta de la lorrc cn ese punm y rcalizwsc las rcpamciones neccsarias. Si e] clisposi[lvo LIC seguridad sc clispara dc rnanera aleatorin y no cx isle ninguna raz6n apwcnlc (tales como protuberanciils causadas por junlas dcfcciuosas dc la torrc), es posible quc cl rcsorw del rcgulador cste dcbilitado. dcbicndo rccmplazarsc c1 disposi[i\,o de segul-idad. NOTA: S61C [icncn pcrrniso (Ic rcpmar cl dispositivo dc sc,guridad personal certificado por la ffibrica. NO ROMPA EL SELLO. SE TRABA O ATASCA LA COMPUERTA
El pcrcusi(in dc la compucll;l ~cncralmcnlc cslil rclaci{mada al cable y a Ias roldanas. Exarninc l;! SCJ::l(1c olambrc y dc[crminc si rcsul[an cvidcn[cs nxIIcm dc dcs::I\Ic. Talnbitn cxalninc c1 1:1sroltl:mas (IcI u:Iblc cn la
P;l!-[c sl]pcl]()~ dc ];] ~oi])pL]cr[d > dc[c]m]l]c (Ic si L)pcli]fl
Rccmplacc cualqtlicr s~~il dcfcc{uwa o cojincics dc Ias roldon;i~..

Ii bwmcntc.
alambrc
Revise IOStopcs dc caucho y 10Sbloqucs dc guia dc plis[ico para determiner dcsgas[c y flojedatl. Rccn]p]acc si tucra ncccsario. RESOLUTION DE PROBLEMAS ELECTRICOS
Si no sc ob[iene una respuesta a un comando (o si la lespucsta es crritica), generalmcn[c significa problemas c16c[ricos. El ascensor rnontacargas cs comple[amcnte automi[ico pcro pucdc ser opcrado cn una modaliclad manual. En caso de algtln despcrfcc[o clcctrico. consul[e primcro la Tab]a 2-3 (Resolucibn CIC problcrnas de IOS controles en al cabina). Si la cabina corr[intta a funcionar dc manera dcfectuosa despu& LIchabcmc vcrificado y/o cormgido Ias condicioncs delincadas, hay funcionar la cabina cn la modalidad de con[l-ol dcsdc e] WCI1O operc la y cabina dcsde la estacion de control de] [CCI1O (consulte OPERACION DESDE EL TECHO DE LA CA BINA, en la p(tgina 1 -2). El sistema dc control autom~l[ico sc ignorfi cn la modal iclad de control dcsdc c1 techo. Si la cabina con[inija a funcional. de mancra de fcctuosa al u[ilizar la cs~acion dc control dcl [echo, consul[c cl final dc la Tabla 2-3 para proccclimicntos LIcrcsolucitk de problcmas cn la modalidad de control dcsdc c1 tccho. S] la cabina L)pcra de la rnancra normal usando la es[acibn principnl dc control y la cs[acich LIccontrol de] [ccI1o, sirvasc consul tar la scccifm titulada PRO BLEMAS CON EL CONTROL AUTOMATIC (pfigina 2- 15).
Las compucrtas sicmpre debcn funcionar dc manera uniforme, tanto 01abrirsc como al cewwsc. Una inspection visual de la compuerta determinarft rhpidamen[e la causa dc cualquicl- atascamicnto o pcrcusion de la compucrta. La causa mhs comtin del a[ascamiento de compuertas es un marco y/o un rlcl do lades dc la compucrta. En algunos b cases, la compuerta y/o e] ricl sc pucdcn VOl VCI- a plegar a ia posici6n corrects, pcro pal-a obtener un rcndimicn[o bptimo, sc Irccomicnda recmplazar Ias piczm dcicc[uosas.
Tabla 2-3- Cuadro

In(licdci(m l,tllqw.1 w Ilullllml (h. 1,1<:!l) 111.1 1:1 ,,), cr,,,,,,,,,
de resolution
C;IIIW prolull)lc
de problemas
de control
S(lllwii)n
de la cabina
p{hit)lc ON.
I 1(; }11 ,.,1,) C!) l:, po.lrlol!
011
Col(xpIc
,.11111<11 IIIOI :1 l.) W\ IrItiII U
s<. <111,.11)0 c1 loc(l
RccII1pLIcc
c1 l<IcO
1:.1:1 ;Ibwno
c1 ,tm.lclrcuiln.
lIc polcIIc I;I pI Il]cip<ll.
Clcrle
r] Con:lcncllilm.
l,,.ll )1,. qll. vllmhl C;lbl l):, .V (Ic. :1., .\ RRIUA :iii AlIAJO. ln!cl n!plw dc l,nlilc ;Ivvri< do. plw..t w<> !)<> Inlcll uplor cl<.] tlI. po.IIIvo dc .k+urid. id p:,r.1 \ObIc\ ,.l\xid;,ll
lRck I.C \ IccmplJcr Dc. pl:Iw I;I c:,l>i,l:t
lo. lII\Il>lc,. hxizl
.criltl
.c;l rtqucr]llo.
:w! ii,. t Ip.Ir2 r.ml. Iur.11 c1 di. pu.,lwo td
ilrllt<ldo
dc wguri<l<, d p<Il;I wbrewhxid.
rcpme 0 rwmpl.lce qm la c; IbIIl:I W+
c1 inwrl NPIIN SI w rcquwre cn I; I lc\,;I dc Iimil t).
(e\ pcmible
c;lbiml
no w (Ic. IIi
pkizd
E.ti
:IhIenocl
i]llcrnjplor
de h cOInpIIcrt:I
d? 1:, C:IbIIIJ.
14
Clcrre
l. I conlpwn:k.
Ij;,c i:, AR RIBA :i., ARAJO.
coI1lpII.,11~1 dcl ret.11110o LI compucrtu dcw.lllb<l!co
dc] .irc;! dr
E\!.i
dclccttmw
c1 ln!ermplor
de 1>1o! IIpwn:I c
dc 1:1c: IbII! iI, dr
krp;we
0 rcenlpl:lce
el i!llcm,plor.
LI m!npucn<u dcwl!dhi! co.
dcl WC IIIIO o IJ compucn:l
dcl irtw
El inlcll
UPIOI
S-IOP dc Id c<bw (Figur;l

dcl I1OZOc\!CI oprimido. dc CO,,Ire] dc.de
I. I ) c.12 opnnlido.
Tire c1 interrup[w
STOP
IIACIJ :ifwr,l.
EI m!cr! llplor E! ,,],crr,, p,r WP13?AIE.
Q.itclo
h;lcii,
afucr:,
t] techo es!i
1-11k! p<?~ICIOll
G,re e] i!]terrup!or
h:I\I:I
I; I po\lcion
STOP.
L: I C:IbIIII
c.!.i
CII 10. linlilc\
Iinalc,.
De!cnl]iw
I;I C:IUW (como
por cJen~plo. c;lbij),s xobrecarg;, d:] 1:1coodiciou. LIMIT ACIIVC c1 (:mulxi6n ;Ilejindol:i
o ircno dcfectuow) ]nlrrrup[orcle ckl l!nli!e final) ll;Ive
y comi~t FINAL
OVERRIDE Ice 1:1c:lbln:!
(Figure
1. I ) y dc\pl;
de] Art;! de dexemb;wco.
El ],,lcl,up!or
OPEl~ArE-lESl
cslfi cl) 1,! P@!cltill
TEST.
GIIC ?1 ,ntcwuplor
:11:1 po.ic!o,,
OPERAIE.
Sc di.p:!r.,ro])
10. rck>
dr wbrccxg:,.
L)clcm]ine \obrccmg:ld;l), mbrccmg;l,
14 cau\d
(como
por ejcmplo,
uw
cabind et relti de
corrij:l
liI comdicioll
> rm!wre
Colllxlor
prlwlp.!l
dclccll loso.
Rcp,Ire o rwmpl:lce
c1 coll!:lclor.
A,m,wddor
dc II>\wr. IhI> de fccluoho
Rcp.Irc
o reempl; )cc c1 crm!:,clor.
St II,! .IP;I:;KIO condwi!%n
cl mOIII lOI dc] \oll;IIc
[k Iine;l.
dvbido
:! 1!11;1
El nmIIIlor roi:lcioll
de VOII;IJC dc Iilw. ! :!p+w de fwe imww. voll:ijc. itin. dumnte
c1 hl.!cnl.!
VII kl ck fwe y y
:11101 m.Il dc 1;! Iilw;l.
U!I dck>quil)brm 1:1c;tusI
CII<mC10h;Iy kljo corriy I; I condic
Delermioe
dcl :Ip;I@O
.% qll<.111[) 1111 f(l\lblv.
Re. I\c y reempklce
lo\ (u\iblc\
wtiu
W: I rrqucrido.
El !CIIIMIO1 Illlc;ll
110 rc!r;ie
1;1kv:l
Deleml,,le dc[ecI[mxo% dc(ecIuo\o elTOr.
1:1 c;IIIw, (Icwro dcl relt dcl
COIIIO
px
rJc IMp10 li!w:ll o
inlerwplorch UII COIII;ICIO ion de
;Ic!wdor
dc h IWI.
y con ij;! dich;l
condic
o .C I,bcm c1 freno IbIII:I lr;!l:l de nlOvcl\c.
I;I
No c.l;l!l
WICrgi7; ld,!s
l,I\ [K>bi!ul.
dcl II C!IO.
Rc\I\c
10, con[;lc!os
dcl rcl~ dtl
lrcno
untc< dcl mo!or. cnlrc el cont;lcior
Ccmrij:! I; I cwndiciou princip;il y lm bobinm
de circu ilo ;d~icno de! trcno.
]:1 ,.OII,,ICIO ,,t,hil,,!t
r.l?
IIc.ll,cllmul
RecmpLIce
Cl COIII:!CIO.
Iiohi,
!.h dcl It<no
cIc IL.cIuo.:,.,
Rcmmpl.Icc
1:1. bol>in:,..
Crm\IIlm DEL
k, .cccIiio
M AN TENIMIENIO ,1C<lbllli! no rL\pmlc )111.,1)110 (lc.dc Cl,leclm 1:.1i,~!c, IIIpI<>r S.l O1> dc 1:, C,sl,lll;a (Ficb,r4 :Ilklcra! 1. I ) CX15ILICI:I :11 1:1 coIIIIol IIrl ILCIIO 110VNJ eII 1,1Po, wli)n
IR13W. OIVERAT~ (COIIIIOI dcwk
OPIIRAIE.
Girt
el i!ltcwuplor
J l. I lm.iciti]l
c1 [echo).
Oprirm
c1 intcnwplor
STOI.
I.<I c<~lnpuvno c,>cl;lv<lllliv!llu
w.i
:Il>ien;t
o no w WI I.(xc
u!)
CoII.ulIe ARRIBA
cl IcIm! b
cob,!,:,
no .C dmpl;m
ni I,:lci:,
o, h;lCl:l AlIAJO.
El I[l!o n,pl<,r dcl pwo
c,l;,
oprimidO
(Imcm
:{dcn!ro).
Tirelo
Imcia ;I1wm
Jl:iillte]lil)licl]lo
- I%gina 2-
15
PROBLEMAS El
sislc]l121 cOns[il
CON EL CONTROL
llcllll P]!I]CIPLII c(~lll] tk ()l.tcl()lI !;] Labln;!.
AUTOMATIC
corrcspondlcn[c dcbcri csla]- cnccntii[la. l.t~ mlsmo es vfiliclo parn Ias b<)bin;ls y IOScontactorcs,
l)
ll()~lillllilblccncl l;] Con[lo!il(k)]c
]C~l[l~()~16~[]l~()
RENDIMIENTO
DE CONTROL
AUTOMATIC
]:lc;lbl[);l llcncll 11:1 CPUc[~11?ocn[ra(lilsy 12 salid:ls. La b;isc CIIV~:l [0[1:1 ]:1 ]nforn]~lLl(~n (k ]l:llll:ld:lS dCsdC k~s piSOS al ctn(rol ado] dc l;~cabin:l El ~on[lmliltlol dc I; I cabina almaccna la in fomaci(jn (It Ilanl adas dc Im pisos y envia la cabina bac Ia arriba y/c~b:ic]a abajo para rccogcr Ias Uivcrs:ls II:lmadas. Un sislcmaquc f[lnciLJil:lc<)lrcc[anlcntc rcsponde a lodas las Ilalnad:ls dc ]a nlancra dcscrlta cn la scccion dc opcracibn Llccsw manual. Algun:~s rcgl:\s~cncl;\lcs p:~]a(ii:lgllos[ic:lrproblcn]:lscon cl conlrolador programablc w~n Ias siguicn[cs:
q
Si cl sislcnla funciona corrcctamcnlc. cnlonccs no hay nin:un problcn)ii L(]I)cl con[rolador ploglamab]c o con cl programa. Un conjunto arbi[rario cic comanclos desdc la cabina o dcs(lc i;ls cajas dc Ios dis[in[os pisos causarfi al:una acci6n dc la cabina quc se pLIcdc dcfinir como !;, rcspucs[a corrccla. Si ia unicia(i realiza un cr]-oi-cons[an[c, busquc ]a cxistcncia dc prob]emas dc cnwacitisalida en al portion de en~rad~/salida del controla(ior o cn 10Scircuitos cntranlcs/sal icntcs. CAJAS DE LLAMADAS (REMOTAS) DESDE LOS PISOS
Si el sistema sc compol-ta dc mancra crti[icd, no rcspondc dcl mismo In(xlocada vezquc sc cs[ab]ccc unconjun[o previamcn[c cstablecidode condicioncs, el problcmacsla CPU. Si e] sistcma sc comp,ma incorrectamenlc pcro de mancra predecible, cl pmblcn~arcsidc cn la cntracl,tisalida. Es posiblcqueel cableadodecntra(ia cstedefectuosooquc ]oscontac[osde salidaeskn defectuosos. Si elprocesador sehaapagado clcbido adingn6s[icos plogralllados,l acnbinon opodridesplazarsc amenos quesesatisfaga ntodm lascondicioncs plt>gr:~lllad:ls. DE LAS ENTRADAS
Las cajas dc llamadas desde 10Spisos constan dc un interrup[or de tipo bot6n pulsador ilumina[io, Si lm l~mpmas indicadoras no se cncicnden. revise Ios focos. Los in[erruptorcs dc [ip{l boton pulsadol- sc concc[an como contaclos momen[incos de polo tlnico. La funci6n de 10S botones pu]sadolcs sc comprucba fhcilmcnte prcsiortando e] bot6n pulsakr y verificando que la Iimpara de entrada correspond iente es[c cncendida. INTERRUPTORES DEL TIPO DE BOTONES PULSADORES ILUMINADOS EN LA CABINA Las lutes y IOSintcrruptores son iguales quc cn 1(M intcrruptores dc ~ipo boton pulsador iluminados dc ]Iamadas dcscic ios pisos. Una Ifimpara inciicadora qucmada cs la rnodolidad probable de falio, Si IOSfocos cs[.in cn buenas condicioncs, revise la salida dc dcsde cl con[rolador pro:ramablc. RESOLUTION DE PROBLEMAS CON LA ENTRADA/SALIDA DEL PROCESADOR La Tabla 2-4 cnumcra Ias conclicioncs dc en[rad,isaii(ia para una funci6n corrcc[a. La tabla indica CU51CS Iimparas de cntrad:dsalida es[iin cncendidas para una cicr[a condici{)n. Si las I{lnlparas no cstfin cnccndicias cuando debcn cstarlo, corrija cl circui[o dc entrada cxtcrno. Si una I{lmpam cic salida csl(i iluminada y c1 dispositivo cxlcrno no 10 CS[(I,revise Ios cables de] dlsposi{ivo dcsdc la sa]ida cicl con[rolador.
VIGILACION
Consulte la Tab]a 2-4 y cl dla:rama clec[rico (Fisura 21I ). Si una cntracia sc act]\ a por un in[cl-rup[or o contracto, Llcberi ilurninarse la l~mpora indicadora corrcspondiente. Si ia l~mpara indicadora no sc cnclcnde. dcberi lrcvismsc cl vol[ajc cn al entrada pal-a ccrciorarse dc quc cl circui[o cx[cl-no estt suministl-antic una sciial. La ausencia dc la limpara dc cn[l-ada ~cncralmcn[c cs una in[iicaci(m dc que e] circulto es[(~abicrto (un in[crrup[or quc funciona de rnanera dctcctu(~sa o un bilo ro[o). Dcbcr~ rcpnrarsc et circuito abier[(> o cl cor[ocircuito. VIGILACION DE LAS SALIDAS
Consultc la Tabla 2-4 y e] diasrama cl~c[rico (Figur:l 2i I ), Si una Ifimpara dc salida cslfi ilunlinada, cl clisposi[ivo corrcspondicn[c quc acciona dcbcri cslar cncryizado. Por cjcnlplo. si csti ilurninada ta luz dc Ilamada, sc suptlnc quc la l~lmpara indicadora dc salida dcl con[wladol
Ph:ina
2-16-
Malltcninlie]lto
Tabla 2-4- Resolution

0 0
I
de problemas
000 000
789 011 100
de entrada/salida
I I II
del
00001 11111
II II II II
00000 00000
2345(J
o
1
o
4 n
00
56
111100 000111
7R 901-
012
23
tCABINA
EN LA BASE.
COMPUERTAWTUERTASCERRADAS. SIN LLAMADAS. CABINA EN MODALIDAD

NJTOMATICA CABINA EN UN AREA CABINA DE DESEMBARCO INTERMEDIO. CERRADAS. COMPUERTASmUERTAS EN MODALIDAD
,A070tiTlCA CABINA EN EL AREA DE DESEMBARCO CERRADAS, 1 n
SUPERIOR LLAMADA DESDE LA BASL

COMPUERTASIPUERTAS CABINA COMENZANDO A MOVERSE EN LA DIRECC16N DESCENDENT (TODAViA EN LEVA) CABINA CABINA EN LA BASE, LEVA EN MODALIDAD EXTENDIDA, AUTOMATICA
E====J
LLAMADA EN LA CABINA PARA EL PISO 2. CAB[NA CABINA EN MODALIDAD AUTOWiTICA CON CONTROL DESDE EL TECHO.
COMPUERTAWPUERTASCERJL4DAS. CABINA MOWENDOSE HACIA ARR2BA CABINA CON CONTROL DESDE EL TECNO,
cEFu7ADAs, INTEKRUPTOR
1221 1o11 6
I
n K
n n
u u
lCOMPUERTASmUERTAS CONTROL
] ~
u
n
DESDE EL TECHO,
n n
n n
E
n T
CA BlhA EN EL APJL4 DE DE5EMBARC0 . SUPERJOR. LLAMADA DESDE LA BASE, PUERTA DEL CAJA DEL ASCENSOR ABIERTA CABINA EN EL AREA SUPER20R. LLAMADA COMPUERTASIPUERTAS RETIRADA. CABINA HACIA DES PLAZARSE DE DnEMBARCO DESDE LA BASE. CERRADAS. COMENZANDO ABAJO LEVA A ~
E n
T
n ~
I
~
001-010, 101-110 Entradas

IXIRADAS
001 Conlocmr auxiliar 1N1 00z . D~[~I,~Isc cl] la pl{l~lllla k 00s 00500600700S 009010cIcscnlharco
hncin arribo
en c1 proccsacior
I: NrRAD.As
101 - Conmc[o auxiliar
011-016, 111-116 Salidas en cl procesaclor

SAI,l DAS 01 I - ComacIor 012. Lfimpam Lin]pw] Lfimpara Con!;lc[or
Linlilc
(IcI freno 4CR hacia abajo illa hacia orriba
hacia arriha dcl piso - Base del piso 2 (IcI piso 4 hacia abajo
de IN leva - BISC -2
~slacion
102- Nose
utiliza inlcrmiknle in[cm~i[en(c
103- Movimicnlo 105- Movinlico[o Il;icia ahay) 107- In[crrop[or
013014015016I I I
Linli[c
104- Conlpuer[adPucrras/Esco[ 106- Prwcba dc caida
LAmp;lrd del piso 3
004- Lio~Ik? hacin ~bajo

Con[acto Conlaclo liso 4 Piso 3 Piso 2 Piso I nu\!l Inr Ilaci:l arl-ib;! auxilinr
selccmr (JcI Iccho -
LIc rchaccion dcl k (1c piso piso
2CR
I OS - larada de cnwrgcncia Operar/Prucba 109- Nose uliliza I 10- In[crrup[orcs
I 12. Liimparii
113I 14Limpara Lfimpam
piso -3
del piso (cabirm)
I 15- Lfiolpaca (Ic piso .4

I
16- FIcno 4CR
l{rWRAl)A ?01 - Piso 5
.1 l.i
[IN II) AI) 1)1; IX IANS1ON
SAI.l 212-
I)AS 1)1; I.A UN Il)Al) del pisn - 5 L5n1pn Indcl piso -5
1)1; KX1ANSI()N
2 I I - kimpnrfi
Nlnilltellil]lielllo
Ifi~il};l 2- 17
i
MONITORDE VOLIAJE DE LA 10 J,
# t I t 1 , +} \ xl 3L2
2U ,~_
ta
!11 lrf, m 10 HP 4500 RPM
4 m
380 V S HZ MONOFASICO
in
CABLE M&,L 12
ml
In
3e0 VCA TRIFASICO sow
1 w
3.2LIY
1L2 1 !L.1
Iu {: n!
1 I I t
k Iu
1} ! II I A
u!
2Ll
xl X2
3LS :E2
Za
271 m 2U7R
4 10 HP 15m RPM VCA 2$0 TRIFAsIco Ml HZ
390 v a
0
~
WAMP P-IERRA) J-
.2 1% I
2U
Ue
W HZ
MONOFASICO
2r3
+4
!0
IWTERRUPTOR DEL pozo t
ACTUAOORRETRA,CIO(DER , au LEVA RETRA1oA ,~ 2
!2 bPh~
ENC ~ ~
10 SAT +
lLT ~ ==_
10 8 CR
13
CARGADOR DE LA BATERIA
CR
Um
MOTORDE LA LEVA RETR4CTN ACTUADOREXTEPIDIDO (IZQ)
!5
9L5 PARA04 I pRUEBA PARADA OPERAR PRUE*A
:+11=~.
6s
13 ATERIA DE 25 A n DE LA LUZ DE EMERGEPJC14
i:
:0 MTAC70R
PRINCIPAL
L.-,
AREA DE DESEMS3ARC0 INFER1OR
---_ -.
.-,-l--u---
__-,
1
!
w
L LAMAR
~----- ------
______ ~
RECONOCER
ii
1
ELE PARA EL FRENo YLA FWLIEBA DE JZ DE LLAMADA 5SEMBARC0 JZ DE LLAMADA :SEMBARCO JZ DE LLAMADA :SEMBARCO
CARGA
DE LA CABINA .CUARTA DE LA CABIN4 DE LA CABINA.
AREA DE
Ml
TIWBA 13 Ls A 10s !
I J4 i j
I 1
-Tl
l-11
.TERCE~AREAOE SEGUNDA AREADE AREA DE
,Ia
12 u
MOV lNTERhllTENTE
L - ___
SEGUNDA
z> L
1.
1 1 I COMPUERTA CERR40A ~ PESTILLO DG LA ESCOnLLN 36 =.+ 37 lU tD 1 1 27 r
15
lZ DE LLAMADA DE L& CAB(NA :SEMBARCO INFERIoR
AREA DED>~i-M-BfiC~
3FS ---J%
------------[-:~AR
RECONOCER
Ji 28
L11W7E ARRlOA ZJ A r
:TuADOR
DE LA LEVA RETRACTIL
EXTENDIDO
>U COf.lPUERTA TW.9A12A

41s
7B VER NoTA 5
! 2ru 42 t :1 0s 14 u cyg::~ 107: 42 1 CAL EN TADOR
SW 61_5
NTAc TDR A LIMITE A8AJ0 -~, 110, IWER,,WT WC -J_
DEINVERSION
.AB,A.Jo
10 An?
-----o
13s
lh?n CALEMTADOR 1 2HTR
lU
0
4P+)
.&
39
4CR
Id
I
REpuEsTO ,, REPuEsTo
WC
40
49
*
PAR TRENZADO~RO<ECIOO II OE la~a
,,
REPUESTO REPUESTO
REcEPTACULO MONrADO EN EL TEcl10
/-77
w
b----
II
NTACTOR
DE INVERSION
.ARRIBA
=
0GRAMABL6, 7 cu
i._____ -_-jw___j cuARTA DE DESEMBARCO AREA
u
NDTAS 1 2
u
1 PB Y2 PB HAN MAN?ENIDO LOS CONTACTOS SELECTOR DE 3 FDSIC1ONES Y TIENE UN REToRNo & RESORIE 1 S ES UN INTERRUPTOR DESOE LA POSICION lZQU\ERDA (PRUEBA DE CAIDA) HASTA LA PoSICION CENTRAL [P ARADA], SE MANTIENEN LAS PO SIC IONES DE PARADA Y OPEWC1ON, SflL (6 LSI SALTARA SOLAMENTE EN LAS AREAS lMTFRMEDIAS DE LLAvE. OE DESEM8ARC0 3 4 5
L!JZOE LLAMADA DE LA CAB,,4A AREADE DESEMBARCO SUPERIOR
-J
I L_-
1ss --------AREA DE DESEMBARCO SUPERIOR
1 KS Y2 KS SON INTERRUPTORES
Figura 2-11 DIAGRAMA DE CONEXIONES

(Ref. WS8810015-C-2)
ELECTRICAS
7 LS LA pOS1ClON NDRMALMENTE CERRADA (sE MUESTR4) PAM ESTE [NTERRuPToR ES CON LA LLAVE DEL ACTUADOR lNsERTAOA EN EL REcEPTACULODE LA LL4VE EL INTERRUPT SE ABRE AL QUITAR LA LLAVE
Piezas
Figura CONJUNTO 2-1
BASICO
DE MONTACARGAS
-.
Ilk+-----
(j
K-, ------
----nJK
----ill
m
No. clc
I
cliivc
No. dc picla
I)cscripci6n
No. clc piwa lacab]nn(vkc

(ICI lo Fi:l]!a
l)escripci6n
lnsialacitm (IcI cable movil (~,~;(se 10
Conjllnlodc
8
9 10
,..
510221- I
;.?) ]nsl:il,icion
Figuro 3- 19) rccin[o 3-28) I?lorrcdchasc dc la Iolmc II 12

I.?
la Icva (IC Iimilc
de clcscn>b:)rco
Coblc
Conjunlo CIC la
eldc[rico rlc I)asc (vtinsc inlcrruplol I;I Figuro de (lcsconcxich
(vjosc la Figori
3 4
5
S810001-2
lns[:!l,!ciondc
3- 1.3)
lnsl:llocion dc la scccion (Y~~>c ]a Flgtlr;l 3.27) lns[:ll;lcion
8600013-2
Inslalaci6nclc lnlermplor
FI~uIo 3. 18)
laa]armn de
parwld CIC polo (vtost I:i
del am;ulc ck parcel (vtasc Iinal

14 S@.NL (\~;Isc I; I 15
la Fiy(lrn 3-29)
Eslaciim S400599- 1
RCSOIICS Col)julll[l
(\, U:Isc 1:1
(Ic
]];lllda
]cI11oI:I
(\,i:lSL.
l:!
6
7
,..
In>131dc
ion
(lc
Figura 3- 16)
de a!llorli:l]:]l)llcll[(] (IC l:! Col))pwll:l
(lC (Icsrlllb:llco
(\c:I\c
FI:UI.I
h FIguro
dt 3-24)
3.23) I; I Icv:t
l!!.l:!l;!cii)l)
Figtlr;l
.3-26)
Piigina 3-2-
Piczas
Figura 3-2 CONJUNTO DE LA CABINA
o
15
54P=
--J-
No.
dc
clave I 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
No. de piczn ConJunlo Figura 3-9) Conjun[o 519734- I 519735-1 Accesorio Recinlo
f)escripci6n
No. dc clave (vease (vhsc la la 11 12 13 14
No. de pieza 513130-1 5]3131-1 535808-1
Descripci6rr Bra.zo de palanca Brazo de palanca Rodillo,

Conjumo
dc la compuerra de accionwnicmo de iluminacion
2 1/4 de diirnetro del peslillo de la escotilla
Figura 3-3) Globo protec~or eleclrico dc dc principal (vianse Ias Figuras 3-14 y3-15) Dispositivo sobrevelocidad Conjunto (vtanse scguridad para (v@.c la Figura 3-6) lcva/enclavamienlo dcl frcno
(vdase la Figura 3-24)
,.
16 17 18 19 20
Conjunto Conjunto 3-25)
de guia dcl cable (vEase la de] rodillo de control soldada en c1 in!crior) de diiimctro 25 W. 12 V eltctrica, (vc<ase la Figura del Iecho (vease de la escalcra
Figura 3-2])
.
S700035-I 535602-1 519506-1
Es[aci6n Estructura (ubicada Lbmpara
la Figura 3-1 7)
Ias Figuras 3- I I y 3-12)
Conjunlo de libcracibn (vtasc la Figura 3-8) 513034-1 513035-1 Inlcrruplor Inlerrup!or dc limitc dc limi[e
Grascra. 3/16
Iiezas - lfigill:l 3-3
CONJUNTO
Figura 3-3 DE ACCIONAMIENTO
Cf
6
X(). dc pieiia 1 ~ 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
SSO022Xssoo2035051 C0-I Ssooon .535602. ) I
Ikscripcih
Es[ruclum Rodillo,2 Rmlillo,2 Grmera Molor/frcnode I)isposi[lvo Conjunto IOHP para soblcvelocid;d (vtnsc IJ Figure 3-6) (vease la Figura 3-25) dc scgurldad (Ic rodillo solda(la (Ic accionamicnto l/4 dediame[ro l/4 dedlAme[ro(pcsado)
SSO0220- 1 51jgoS. I .575804 - I 575603- I 5(1s013-2
I
1
Angulodcl
En)l)mguc I)iiim Gl:iscra
ganchodesegulidxl
cenlrifu~o
Angu]o dcl goncho (Jc seguridad
10 II
12
I)figil]:l 3--1-
Picxss
Figura 3-4 CONJUNTO DEL FRENO ELECTRICO 505005-75 lb/pies - Serie 87.000
No. dcclo\,c
No, depiw) 505005-1 1
Dcscripci6n TLlcrca delaloja]llie]~ Clavc 2) lo(p;ll!cdc la
No. dc clavc 9
10
No. dc pivzii 505005-19 0030706505005-2 505005-22 505005-23 505005.24 505005-25 505005-26 505005-27 I
I
Dcscrii>ci(m Conjun[o fljacion Tornillo clove 9) Arandcla Placa final

JUC:O dc sello y jun[a CIC monlajc VUIIIC;I1
CJC cubo y !o!mil]o dc de fijticion de bloquco (por[c ck la
505005- I 2 505005-S2 505005- I .; 50500 s- I 6

505005505005I5 i6
Col\Junlo de alojamienlo J1]cgodep~lancasdc

lalcral Tornillo Amndela (no se nlueslrl) (Jc apoyo de la placa de Iibe!:!cltin
II 12
bloqueo
Iaplacaclcdfwyo
13 14
15
Conjunlode
I>lacl Disco Disco
Jucgo dc pl:Ic:I Conjunto wrninal
de pl-esion de friccion es[acionario il]cluye Im
dc bilo conduclor
505005-I 7
505005- I S 505005-S 1
16 17
Juego de resorte (Jc nmnI:Ijc verlical Pasadcrr dcl alojmmnlo
Juego (Jc quincallcrio.

sos. 1,3,4,11,17
Figura 3-5 CONJUNTO DE LA BOBINA 505005-75 lb/pies - Serie 87.000
No. dc chw I ~ 3
1
No. dc picza 50500 S-3 1 .505005 -79 505005-57 505005- 7-I 505005-79 Tornillo
lkscripcitin clc p]-esi6n
,N(Iclco n](]vi] Noclco n16vil y n]fiI-CO, clavcs 2 y 5

TUCIea
Guio dcl nuclco

IM:lrco
movIl
Nilclco
5 Bobina Bobln:i
n)irvil dcl y gui:l.
y marco, solcnoik cl:Ive 4
Clnws
? y
() 7
505005-7S 505005-77
Tomillo
;IIankl:I
Flgura 3-b CONJUNTO DE LA PLACA DE APOYO 505005-75 lb/pies - Serie 87.000

N(). dc, cla\ e I
7
-.
--
,S(j. d{, picfa 505005-3 I

.AIIIllo
I)cscripcio[]
dc ]clca
Li<)n
A I ;ln(lcla
Lspaclxlola
3 4 5 6 7 x 9 10 505005-40
Ilili)ll Esp;lcioclol M:ln:rl Rcsone Pdlanca l;Is:I(lor AIIIIIO CoI)Iunlo y Plfioll I o) de arrolkmlIenln de] solenoldt del piiion
cspiml
CICrelenclbn
de p~lanca (incluye ekl solcnoidc 33
Ios clemcnlos
II l?
AI andela
espficiadora ck pIvoIc de bmzo de
505005-42 505005-43 505005-44 505005-45 505005-46
CoJlnew p:ll;lnca
13 14
]asador Cojine[e
p:ll;lllca
dc pivole de pivo[e
del brazo cle
15
CIMIJOIIIO Ilolhn I>asaclor
dc
brazo
de
palanca
16 17 18 19 20 21 ~~ 2.; 24 25 ?6 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
LIC pleslon (Jc
pIvotc
del
brazo
de
p:llancr! ]asador ICSOI [e de pivole del pemo del
505005.49 505005-50 505005-51 505005-52 505005-2.~
PCI no clel COI)JU[l[O cojincle Aramlcla Rcsorw
wsorle dC plaCa
de presibn de apOyO y
del de
resor(e
de p]csion
prcslon
1ocrca del reset w de presibn Coiliunlo (IcI solcnoicle (wiase de presi6n CICbloqueo dc preslon
del Soltnoidc
ConJun[o de la bobirm) 505005-55 505005-56 505005.57 505008-3 I 505005-59 505005-60 505005-6 I 505005-62 505005-63 505005-8 I To!-nil]o Arandcll Tuc Kca Tomillo
Vincu10
Topc de la palanca del solenoidc TomIllo

(IOPC)
arrollanlienlo
Topc (IcI rcsorIc (Ic

I%S: ICIOI Jucgo 30, 31, dc 32 (Jc cbavc[a quincallcrin,
incluye
Nos
ligina
3-6-
Iiww
CONJUNTO
Figura 3-7 DE SEGURIDAD PARA SOBREVELOCIDAD (Ref. 8800166-1 )
No. de clavc I
2 3 4 5
INO.de pieza 51301 s-1 513019-1 8800023- I 535630- I 535648-1
Descripci6n Interruplor Hoja. rocliIIo Piii6n Gmera, Yi-2SNF (rosca ahusxla) Accesorio clcaliviode l/8 P.T.F.
NOTA: NO RONIPA EL SELLO.
NO CONTIENE
PIEZAS
RI? PARABLES POR EL USUARIO.
CONJUNTO
Figura 3-8 DE LIBERATION D,EL FRENO MANUAL
. II( :,0 0
.;! 03
0
J;
0
-----y)
12
I I ~cl
,. B
f
...
-----@
No. CICcla},c
I ~
No. (Ic picu 860069 I I 86006s9. 8600688.

L3i)ooo!n
l)cscripci(~n
ESIIIICIUI;I soldmh de I; I cubicli;l
N(). de CI; ]VC No. de picza 590537- I

581001-1
Ihtscripcidn
7 s
Calcon]lnio
I t
I
MLIISUI;I Jc I;I p; Ilm;I (

hl:ll):[) 111:,1)1, <11 dC lihCGICi Oll del (I LI)()
IHorquilla Rcsor[c TiIcrc:I dc I I

Collll:lluclc:l, lll;l IilXY,J. A-2S l/i-?~
3
4
9 Io
536021- I 533052. I 0050609. 8604066-
,\l(j,l\{,l:l hlfllsul; Coll)unlo
Clc I11OI1I;I]C l clc Icsollc dcl c31)lf
dc
C:lblc
II ]?
5
6
86006s6.
58 IOOY I
Palallc:I
flcno
dc Illlrlucioll
111. II CICI IIIu:
CONJUNTO
Figura 3-9 DE LA COMPUERTA
DE LA CABINA
No. CICpiwa 88002338800234539026-1 870004 I -1 S700042- I I I

Conjunlo,
Estrucull-n
Dcscri
pc i6n
COnlpUCI-ra sol(l:Ida,
superior
conlpucrm
inferior
Anlorliguadcrr Guia Guia

Conjun[o, (vEase roldmm la Figura cable dcl cdble de la conlpucr(a 3- 10)
8602438-1 532032- I 8604157-1 870034 I - I 59603 I - I
Conjunlo. Grampa ~ll~L110 Vcnlano Glmexlo
k-
s
9 10 II
CIC caucho
CONJUNTO
Figura 3-10 DE LA ROLDANA DE
LA
COMPUERTA
I)escripciorr
I ~
3 4
534112-1
531117-2 531117-1 531220-1
RolLIana Calzo Cnlzo Aoil]o Es[ruclura izquicr(la (k relencion soldJLIa CIC Ifi n)tnsulo.
87003s I I 67003s I -2
Esirucwa dcrecha
solckla
ck
la
rncnsola.
6
I
S700383- I 8700383-2
~spacio(lor, Espacia(lor,
3/8 l/?
CONJUNTO
a
No. rlc clavc N(). dC picza
Figura 3-11 DE ENCLAVAMIENTO DE LA COMPUERTA (Ref. 8700190-X)
~cscripcion Casccl
Maqoinaclo I I E jC
l~slillo
No. CICclavc 9
No. dc picza 511318-3 590685- I 511.318- I 87004288700424-1 513053-1 S700541 -1 I
I)cscripcii)n
8700427-1 8700195-1 8700226. 87005266

7
Tapon dcl orilicio, Calcomanfa,

enclavamicn lo
dc ii plnca dc monlajc
10
hams CICI
Y~
8700 I 97.1 536036. I ++ 51 -3052-1 j~.iox l-l
II 1~
Tapbn cJel orificio. Tapa Pata cIc nlonl;lje h4icroilllel-1-tl plor Illazo
Iodw)lc,
13 14 15
nlodllicwlo
k heta: 13!clcmcnlo clisponibilid:ld).
7 sc uli]iza solamcnlc junlo con cl conjunlo
dc ]cvil rc[iran[c (vdasc la pigina
3-2 palm con~~ccr su
lfigina
3-
10-
Picz:]s
Figura 3-12 CONJUNTO

DE LEVA/ENCLAVAMIENTO
(Ref. 8700425-X)
No. de Cla}c
8700409I
I)escri pci(m
~
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 II 12 13 14 15 16 17 lx 19 20 21
5 I 9s92- 1 8700210.2 870021 2- I S700209- I 8700?1 1- I 533031- I O05041ZI 0055005 S700213-I 535081-1 00504168700214-1 531238-1 S700217-I 531210-1 004010 s-1 00500 !0-1 005520453 I107-I S700215-1 I I
IIrozt) de
eslzbones eslfiboncs S;lllo 1/2 x 2 Esn:t, 3/S-16
lir;I/o
lll;l /() k
Pcmo & Clhezn, Ccmlr;llllelca, Tllbo C@Inclc, Oilite.
.AI;II1(JCI:I, plalm, 3/s I /2
C(mII;I[uerca, \:]] illo, 5/16

.\ IIIllo \dlill;l,
ESIW 1/2- 13
de cng~ncbe 1/2
AIIIIIo lkrno,
de cnganchc,
1/2 5/16- 18 x I 3/4 5/16- I S
cabeza hckagona],
(livldido, 5/16
T(ICICO, cabeza hekagonal.

AI: IIICICIZ. C:llzo Elc
d
5
k
10
11
:2
21
Piezas - Phgina 3- 11
INTERRUPTOR
Figura 3-13 DE DESCONEXION (Ref. 8604703-2N4)
DE LA BASE
o1
+!&z1 I I II II I I
I 11 II 1 I
L--l:-__J
/0
I
@m@
Ihxripcibn
511249- I 511285.1 511335-1 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 II 12 13 511336-1 511337-1 519029-2 5 14039- I 51400.3- I 5 14002- I 51400$ 514018-1 514001.1 590552-1 I Rccin[o,
Mccarrisnlo \)arilla M; In:o,
IWcripcih
14 Is 16 17 50 Amp (EHD) 18 19 ?0 21 22 23 Elaboso 24 25 CA 1 CD2 590579- I 514507-1 514501-1 51 4440- I 510001-12 5 10030- I 000012600552440055240514290- I 514298-4 514382-6 I I I
24x21, hEMA 4
opcm[ivo, concclora kccho
Cnlcomrmia, P]-ecaoci6n.
C0nexi6n hlon[aje, Tcrmina] Cnble,
Tornillo,
Suhp~ncl, 24x20
a Iicm.
..
ammrc dc c~ble de anillo 14 Ga, \,erdc

cabcz~ rcdrmcla
Amarre de] cfible
mctfilico
Corlacircui[os,
MLnsula de mon[ajc Canal dc morrmje Gancho de rc[encitirr llloquc Bloqw mrminal, terminal,
Cable, 6 Gil, negro Amnrlela, Aran(lela, Coneclor lA(I.187-I Contralucrca Anillosellador, (Ic bloqueo, plana, No. 8 tlealivlo .375) dcconduc(o, I A I kin del:llcllsi(jll, I Cllviclida
Barrcra final, N 17 Calcol]]ania, k . .. Prccauciol1.
Figura 3-14 CONJUNTO DEL RECINTO PRINCIPAL (Ref. 8800333-4971 60)
\ ol\ /-/
i f \
r \ .. . c.
,0 .
1
,7 ioP
D [c
1 ,
/0
@z)---+ @----j@xzix3T
\,
0
n
i-
b
26
-1)
D t-
v -.
c
N
s ,A
ESTACION
Figura 3-15 PRINCIPAL DE

,
N(). de clove
No. de piem
l)cscripcibn Plfica dc Ieyencb Plxa de I 2
;No. (JCClilvc
No. CICpiw.;l 513263-2 513254-2 5!3225-1 513254- I 51.3233-1 513271-1 513237-1 5 13267- I
Lkcripci6n ln[erruplor, lnlcmuplo

[]IO(IUC Inlcl-wp(or,
51.3280-1 513280-2 513280.3 5132S0-4 513280-5 513255-1

7
10
II 12 13
plllsador, I.oprinlir-lirar,
COll[fi CIOS
verdc nesro
I
Ieynch -
llm
PIJcir l)liICa final
de Icyench - 3 - 4
5 Anulficion Iin)llc k de leycnd3 IcycIlda
dc
N.)i,. !ojo, I N. A,, I
P1.Ica dc leycmh
uimmir-[ir;lr, dc con[octos
sclcc[or,
N.c.
513379-1 513383- I 513248-1
Ploca
dc
Ieyenda
Luz
apagoda-
14 15 16 }7
Bloqw
Inlcrruplor.
- I N. A., I IV.C. I N.A.

I 2 poslcioncs,
Inlcrruploi, h.A.
lln\,e, 2 poslcioncs,
L>llcCnC)ida Iloco PIKI dc de Ieycnda leycnch Al; IIIna
1310quc dc con[ac!os
-2 N.A.
- Pwxla
Figura 3-16 ESTACION DE LLAMADA REMOTA (Ref. 8700286-1 ) o

(0 =3 + No. dc claw
No. de pieza
Descripci6n Rccin[o, plktico, i ol-ificio Juc:o dc p:]ta dc monuljc ]ntcrw[)tw, P. B., VCII]C
AI-ranquc dc p]m[cccion
1 2 3
4 5
511346-1 511350-1 5 ] 3263-2

513363-1 513274-1
513352-1
Bloquc dc contactos, I N.A. Placa dc Icycnda, LlaIIIada,
NEMA
4X
Figura 3-17 ESTACION DE CONTROL DEL TECHO (Ref. 8403541-4)

56 34 56 78
s
f--
._ ::=_..- -- ___ :, _------.._ $-
m, ;~(
Yw
1
yy,
-1
(/
2
No. de clave 1 2 3
4 No. dc
L ti
No. de clave
picza
I)cwripcitin Rccinio,
Inlermplor,
No. dc picza
513274-1 514202-1 5]43S2-4 5 10207- I 8403529-1
Dcscripci6n Bloque (Jc conmios, Alivio

Anillo Cable. I>lacii
511346-3 590697- I 513502-1

51.3233-1
plfisl)co.
scluclor,
3 orificios
3 jxxiciones
6 7 8 9 10
I N.A. X (1/2- 5/8)

de 16/12
C31con1m1 ia Bloqw N.C.

lnlerruplor.
de [ension.
sellador. coId6n clc nlonlajc X S.0.
de conmclos,
I N. A,, I
513336-1
P. B.. verde
CONJUNTO
Figura 3-18 DEL INTERRUPTOR DE PARADA DE POZO (Ref. 8700282-1 )
N(). de claw
1
No. dc picza
Dcscripci6n
Inlen-dplor, oprin)ir-[iral, rojo
5 I3247-1 513335-1
511346-1 511350-1 513231-1
2 3
4 5
l)laco
dc ]eycnda,
l)arwki
Rccinlo, Juegode
plfis[ico,
1 boIun [;lj~S I h..4.
p:l[nS(]~lllO1l
Bloqlledeconmclos,
Figura 3-19 INSTALACION DEL CABLE MOVIL (Ref. 8710008-1)

.- ---
- ----
----
.\ \
i
I
I
i
I I I,
,1 I
*i
~!
,!
!1
J !1
II , I
--w!
------
--
--
--
--
~\o. CIL clnvc I ~ .l
No. dc picztl
Dcscripcibn Conjun(o, cable nw5vil (VC;ISC l;)
NW de cl;]vc 7 x 9
soldacla, :ui;i dc
No. dc picn 0055203I
I)cscripci6n Arandcl:I, ck bloquco, dividida
Figora 3-20) 510221.1 S7001 20- I 87001 !9- I

0040008.1
S700203- I S700204- I 57205 ?-1 0051014.

S4006
h.f~nsola (lL! (mgolo Pcrno cn U, fondo cufidrmlo IJCI1)Ocl) u. Iondo ]Cll[mdo Tucrc:i. Sujcw.lm cwrrc EsniI
Cnhlc movil Eslruclum

n16vil
c;il~lc
10 II 12 IJ
Ilacn llc Icsp:lldo

Pcn]o,
I 8- I
ConjonlO,
ympl Kcllcnls
5 ()
cabcm lwx~iy;il
51-1511. I
0050008.1
Tocrca. hc>ngonid
CONJUNTO
Figura 3-20 DEL MARCO DEL CABLE MOVIL (Ref. 8700130-1)
No. de clavc 1
~
No. de pie?.a
S700131-I S401575-1
lkscripci6n
Eslluctura Co!ljul)lode S0]d3d J d?l I?l~llCO clcubo
No. (Ic clavc

6 7
No. dc picm
535603-1 S401654-1
lkcripci6n
Gr:twm
lzIIuwln]
Tubo Rodillo
Espaclxlol, /<
3 4
5
8700] 03-1
.535s41.1 535s27. I
H]oquedemonl:lJe
RodIllo,2 !A
8
9
S401653-1
S700107-I
Rodillo,
CONJUNTO
Figura 3-21 DE LA GUiA DEL CABLE MOVIL (Ref. 8700125-1 )

No. de ciave
No. (Ic pieza 8700126-1 Dcscripci6n Es[ructura
SO] CIXkl dC
(m
:)
%++
:u ia
8604336-1 53]210-1 S700123-1
Roclillo Anillo dc rctcnci(m Rodillo
CONJUNTO
Figura 3-22 DEL PESTILLO DE LA ESCOTILLA
Figura 3-23 LEVA DE LiMITE FINAL (Ref. 8710006-1 )
No. (I(! I 2
CI:lVC
No. de piua
Dcscripci6n
S700231-I 8700228- I
Estrucwra
P12ca
soklwla
de 1:1le\I:I dc Iimi[c
Iinol
iiw,:]s-P5gina3-
19
LEVA DE PARADA
Figura 3-24 EN LA .SIGUIENTE AREA DE DESEMBARCO (Ref. 8710011-1)
No.
de cl;I\c
No. dc picza 870025487002578700265. 8700267519595-1 I I I I
Dcscripci(m Cahill Lcva Placa Espdciador Placa, soporle rllerca Llnislrul Unistmt
-! .\.
-1 ., \ .... ,-. ..
3 4 5 6
870026 S- I
CONJUNTO
Figura 3-25 DEL BLOQUE DEL RODILLO
No.
dc clavc
No. dc pic~;l 8so0267- I

86047 [.$-1 I 5.3580S-
l)cscripci6n\ Bloq(lc
Conjun(o clel rodillo, 3 (liin)c[jo k dIiII)clrc
~
I
3
I r1
0
Rodillo. Gmsera Grascro
2 1/4 (Ic
4
5
5.35603- i 535609- !
0 -O
I%gina 3- 20 - Iiczas
CONJUNTO
DE LA COMPUERTA
Figura 3-26 E AREA DE DESEMBARCO

(Ref. 8800250-1)
- OPCION
GIRATORIA
.
r ~==-----------------i
- Y-1
~
I
!A
l____
_i~
.~;l 11~
No. (1CClave
No.
de picm
Dcscri
pci6
8800249- I 880025 I - I 8604377- I 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 II l? 13 )4 15 16 17 lx 860451186043898604521-4 535081- I 0056566-1 8700220-1 SO0452?- I 8604523- I 8604520- I 0057 IO?- I 536036-1 513139- I 5 I 3054-1 5392XI I I
Es[ruc[ura EsIructu
Waca Eswucwra
SOkklCkl
(kl
lW1lCO
Ck? la
COlllpUKlla
I-o SO!d Mkl

prolcclora sokkla
l:! COlllpUCllfl
la
PIICO
Bi.w:ra
dc lorsion
8604390- I
Placa cspaciadom
Ejc Cojinelc Clovij:l hcndida,
ck l:i his:l:r:]
1/8
x I dc Ion:iltd
Co!qunlo 11K120 (IC1

Pesllllo M:nsul:I Illoquc
Espy,
Resorlc LI:IVC de]
l/4dc
clifinlclrO
.x 1/2 dc
10n:ilucl
inlcrwp[or
(Ic
linlilc
lnlcrruplor
Pcslillo
de Iinliw
0
l--
1-
,,,
,,
-t
Q
I
I
I
>
I
I J
1
,+_ L.
E+-
7---
--
I I
.-
1 -,
1,
I
1-10 3/4. [578.2] r 1-4 3/4[425.1]
I ~
Lf7fF,
D4
.\
-L-ADETALLE - B
ESCALA 1/2= 1-
--(z)
DETALLE - C
ESCALA 1/2. I
DETALLE - D
ESCALA 1/2 = 1
T
/4.
3-2 1/2[977 9]
/
L
---
,I_
8]
7 -1
1-9
15/16.
[861.8]
.
r LF
------
8- 1 8/
10 I 98 7 6 5 4 3 2
0055005-I 0055205-1 0050012-1 0040205-1 8700173-1 8403404-3 8700421-1 8700342-1 8800430-122 8800250-1
12 17 17 17 3 4 1 1 1 1 I
~ARANDEQ ..- .
PLAN,(
3/~
ARAND[ ELA, DIVIDIDA, 3/8 .,, -.,--. . ..- TUERCA,FltAAtiUNAL, 3/8-16 PERNO,CABEZA HEXAGONAL,3/8-16)( 1 ANGULC), 3/4 X 13/4 x I 1P 1 ANGULO,5 11/16 X 2 X2X0.179 ANGULO,1 3/4 X 1 3/4X973/4 ANGULC 1/2 X 1 3/4 X !-)7 3,7 i . 3/4 . ESTRUCTURA SOL6ADA, PANEL,30.5X 97 3/4 CONJUNTO, OMPUERTA.62 X 97 3/4 C DESCRIPTION - I
0 REPLJ=JA i CANT.
INSTALACION
Figura 3-28 DEL AMARRE
DE PARED
(Ref. 8810003-1)
I
I I I I
!,!
@ii
c
4 ~
a a c >
u
a u :
o
n
T
u u
U
t-l
r
I I
<
[
I
I
I
,
Proccdilnicntos
dc scrvicio
licnico
- Ifi:ina
4-
Procedimientos
DISPOSITIVO DE SOB REVELOCIDAD
El disposilivo cic sc:ur Id2Li
de servicio
PARA
PROCEDIMIENTO 1. Utilimndo Irene
coloquc
tecnico
SEGURIDAD
I;I cs[nu16n dc con[rol
dcl [echo k la scccibn cn cl luyr dc
la Iibcmcion dc indicoclo. dcsconcxibn
dcl
p:lra
sobrevclocictad uml uniclxl

]11 s~cc]()~
dcbc
DE
dc
cmcrgencia
(conwllc
0peraci6n).
rccrnplwar
inspcccionado
Cackl
en
Ircs
]:1
;Ii]os
(LibriL.].
por
ccrlilicadil DEL y 3. 2.
1:1Ciibina dcl nlrm[acar:as
COIW.I!IC
fYIANTEhlMIENTO DISPOSITIVO para ob[encr manlcnirniento. NOTA: NO romps DE SEGURIDAD rruis
MANTENIMIENTO PARA SOBREVELOCJDAD inspecciono inlbrmncibn sobrc
Apoyc suminislm Alloje de
bloqucc clcctrico
c1
intcrrup[or
CICI
principal. (Ic conducio Relire como cn la pane el conduc~o. de scguridad. sca posible pos[crior
dcjonclo
y rciil-c e] acccsorio dc Ios cables
dispos][ivo Ian cerca 4-l).
scguridod. al acccsorio
c1 SCIIO del disposi[ivo repambles
de segurickl,
pumto
expucs[os cables Figura
al Inlcrruptor
Cor[e (veasc
Ios la
quc no contiene REEMPLAZO Al reemplazar
piezas DEL un
por c1 usuario. DE SEGURIDAD 4. scguridnd, la cabina (JcI se
DISPOSITIVO dispositivo dc
Retire Ios cua[ro seguridad. AD\ERTENCIA: ES NIUY RECOMIIZNDAJN lRABA,JADORES DIS1OSIHVO
pemos iEL
de montaje
y retire et dispositivo DE SEGURIL)AD
de
montacargas el primer
cfebe estar colocoda
y:i sea en la bue
clc la torre o en
DIS1OSITI\O
irea de dcsembm-co
acccsible,
depend icndo cIc dbndc
PESAL)O
(aproxinl:]da[llc]
QUE POR 1.0 O RETIRIHN
]tc
200
MI;NOS
11)s)! SE
DOS EL
mon[a dicho disposi[ivo. Si c1 dispositivo de] montacargas, colocar Es[acionar dcsembarco disposilivo la cabina la cabina de seguridad dcbajo en cl primer e] se mon[a en la parlc de la cabina cs mejor ticccsiblc. Si e] 6. 5.
lNSTALLN
DE SIX
URIDAD.
CIC sc:uridad Apric(e Ios y pcmos rcernpl:lcc dc Ios
de] conjun[o
de accionamicrl[o.
firca dc descmbarco ) 10 instalacibn.
lnsmlc
cualro
e] nucvo
pcrrros de
disposl(ivo montajc.
con cl (echo cn o cerca dcl nivel CICIilrca dc cfcsmon[aje sc mon[a cn la partc inferior del piso. cs mejor colocar la cabina aproxirnadamcn!c CICla cabina cn la
n~onlajc
facilit~rfi de seguridad debajo
has[n Vuclva Fi:ura 7. 8. Vuclva
190 pies-lbs. a conec[ar 4-2). a instalar el c(mduclo y a reaprctor

dcl dispositivo
dcl morrlacargas. b.Isc de la lorrc, por encima
la cabina
lws cables
dcl inlcrrup[or emp~lmcs
dc scyuridad a [opt (vtasc
a la
Es[acionc
a scis pies cspacio
Ios cab]cs
(IcI conduc[o.
usando
de] nivel de la base, 13slo permi[irfi e inslalacion scncillos.
sulicicntc
para un desmontajc
cl acccsorio.
CIC scguridnd
Vcrifique
1:1 lubrtcacitin
(consultc 9. Efecttie
scguridad
la Tabla una
(sin
2-2 y la Figure dc
c:iida
2-2).
cornplclo carga) CICI disposi[ivo scgtir Ias indicacioncs
prucba
corg~
dc
y a plcna
de la sccci6n
de MANTENIMIENTO
dcl manual.
CORTE CABLES
LOS AC)UI
EMPALMES DE TOPE
I ),f/fr[) 4-/ LmscoNExl(l.N IIEI. 1)1.71 ().s11 Ivo Ill: ,YI:GUI{II)A 1)
}-i:<JtJ(/ 4.2 I<EC C)AILXION I)ITI. DI.SIOWIVO 1)1: S[:(;URII)AI)
POLITICA
DE GARANTIA
(Limitada,
DEL ASCENSOR
vea mis abajo)
CHAMPION
CHAMPION
ELEVATORS,
INC.
Suje[o a todos Ios krminos enunciados en el presen[e, Champion Elevators, Inc. ~Compaftia) garanliza al comprador original mayorista o fabrican[e de equipo original (0. E. M.) y/o al comprador minorista original solamenle, que aquellos componen!es dc cada ascensor Champion nuevo ~Ascensor) (y cualquier componeme o pieza de reemplazo de] Ascensor) fabricados por ells, bajo uso y servicio normales, cstaran libres de defectos en mawriales y mano de obra durante e! periodo de vigencia de la garantia. Esta garanlia caduca al ocurrir e] primero dc IOS siguientes hechos: (1) el Ascensor ha estado en operacitm mits de 12 meses desprk de la fecha de entrega en el caso de ascensores en instalaciones perrnanentes 090 alias desptk de la fecha de entrega en e] caso de ascensores en inslalaciones temporales, al usurrrio-comprador original (dicha fecha se de!emrinara de acuerdo e] registro de entrega si se 10 presen16 ante la Compaitia en Houston, Texas; de 10 contrario, dicha fecha ser~ la fecha de entrega al distribuidor o vendedor original); (2) el Ascensor se utiliza para cualquier propkito diferente de aquellos para IOScuales fue diserlado; (3) el Ascensor se instala y/o repara por un tercero que no sea un Distribuidor de la Compahla o se rdtera fucra de la fabrica de la Comparlia de manera tal que en opini6n de la Compafiia esto ha afectado de manera adversa su seguridad o confiabilidad; (4) e] Ascensor ha estado somelido a uso indebido, negligencia o accidenle; (5) el Ascensor se rrliliza para olros USOS,diferentes de Ios industrials o comerciales; (6) el Ascensor ha sido almacenado, instalado, operado y/o mantenido de manera incorrect. Es posible que se requiera evidencia de que ha sido realizado el mantenimiento de acuerdo con el cronograma de manlenimiento que aparece en Ios manuales de instalaci6n y opcraci(m, en caso de presemarse un reclamo de garanlia ame Champion Elevators, Inc., asi como documentation de inspecciones.
Cualquier component del Ascensor u otro Producto suministrado por la Compahia pero fabricado por terceros est~ garantizado solamente hasta el alcance de la garanlia del fabricate original a la Compafiia, con e] mismo periodo de garamia que el mencionado en el apartado (1) anterior. Excepci6n: Los rodillos de la cabina y de contrapeso son elementos fungibles que eslan garamizados durante un periodo de 90 alias solamen[e. Con respecto a cualquier repuesto de Champion Elevators diferente de Ios components originales de] Ascensor o repuestos, se aplicardn estw Condiciones de Vents y Garantla Limitada a menos que se especifique de otro modo por escrito.
Esta gararrtia no se aplicard a Ios servicios normales de mantenimiento (tales como e! servicio t~cnico previo a la entreg% el aprie[e de Ios sujetador, ajustes) o al reemplrrzo normal de elementos que requieren servicio. Se excluye el servicio normal y Ias reparaciones menores. TambiEn se exchsye la compensaci6n por IIamadas de servicio de seguimiento references a la instalacitm, posteriors al memento en que se hubiera entregado o aceptado e] montacargas, En el caso que IOSbienes. equipo o mercaderias descritos en cl presente demuestren ser defectuosos dentro del periodo de garardia anterior, la Compahla, a su opcibn, reparara o reemplazar~ Ios mismos si estos son devuehos por et Comprador, con fle[e previamenle pagado, a un Distribuidor autorizado de la Compailia para dicho producto, siempre y cuando la Compailla reciba una notificacirh escrita de un tal defecto reclamado de manera oportuna y dentro del periodo de garantia aqui especificado. La Compaitia se reserva el derecho de requerir el envio de Ias piezas presuntarnente defectuosas a la planta de la Compafiia, con flete previamente pagado, para su examen antes de tomar decisions con respecto a la garantia, ESIC producto, si la Compar7ia deterrnina que esti defectuoso con respecto a maieriales y mano de obra, serd reparado o reemplazado en la instalaci6n comercial del Distribuidor al cual ha sido devuelto. La reparaci6n y/o reemplazo es a opci6n de la Comparl[a y seri el imico y exclusivo recurso del comprador por incumplimiento de la anterior garantia express u otro. SALVO A LO QUE SE ENUNCIA EXPLiCITAMENTE EN EL PRESENTE, LA COMPA~iA NO HACE NINGtJN TIPO DE GARANTiA, EXPRESA O IMPLiCITA, QUE LOS BIENES, EQUIPO O MERCADERiA SEAN COMERCIABLES N] ID6NEOS PARA UN PROP&ITO O USO PARTICULARS, NI HACE NING~ OTRO TWO DE GARANTiA, EXPRESA, IMPLiCITA O REGLAMENTARfA. NO SE HACE NINGh-J TIPO DE GARANTIA CONTRA VIOLACIONES DE OTROS DERECHOS. La Compafiia no semi responsible de dahos incidentals, emergences, especiales, generales o de otro tipo que surjan de] uso de este producto, incluidos pero sin Iimitarse a la incapacidad de Ios bienes, equipo o mercaderia de realizar ninguna funci6n o prop6sito general o particular, ya sea que estos dahos o fallos surjan a un error o deiiciencia en cualquier f6rmtsla de disefto, piano, especiftcaciones, materiat publicitario, instrucciones impresas, materials defectuosos, mano de obra defectuosa o inadecuada, armado defectuoso o inadecuad~ u otros. La exclusiva responsabilidad de la Compaftla es la de reparar o reemplazar, a su opci6n, defectos en Ios materials o mano de obra tales como se enuncian en el ptiafo precedence. La Compaiiia especlticarnente no garanliza que e] Ascensor satisfarh ni cumplir~ con Ios requisites de cualquier c6digo o reglarnento de seguridad, estatal o municipal; esto incluye las jurisdicciones fuera de IOSEstados Unidos. ESTA GARANTiA ENTRd EN WGENCIA EL 1 DE ENERO DE 1995 CUALQUIER PRODUCTO ENVIADO POR LA COMPAfiiA ANTES DE ESTA FECHA FUE CUBIERTO POR LA GARANTiA VIGENTE EN LA FECIIA DE ENViO DESDE LA COMPA~iA. SiRVASE LEER LOS TERMINOS Y CONDICIONES ADICIONALES AL DORSO, QUE CONTIENEN LA LIMITAC16N DE LA GARANTiA, RESPONSABILIDAD Y RECURSOS APLICABLES A ESTE PRODU~O. (Vea el dorso)
POLITICA
CHAMPION
DE GARANTIA
ELEVATORS, INC.
CONDICIONES DE VENTA Y GARANTiA LIMITADA AVISO AL CLIENTE: SIRVASE LEER CON SUMO CUIDADO; ESTOS TERMINOS CONDICIONES CONTIENEN RENUNCIAS DE GARANTIAS Y LIMITACIONES
ESTRICTAS DE RESPONSABILIDAD
LAS SECCIONES
Y RECURSOS.
UTILIZADAS EN EL PRESENTE SIRVEN COMO REFERENCIA PR/iCTICA Y NO AFECTAILiN EL SIGNIFICADO.

instalaci6n,
DA~OS AL PRODUCTO. La Compaitia no tendrh rcsponsabilidad alguna por daitos a Ios Produc!os durante el envio, armado, ereccibn ni por dafios que surjan de accidents, abuso u operaci6n incorrect de Ios bienes, equipo o mercaderia.
SOBRESEIMIENTO. Es[os thninos y condiciones sobresee y, en caso de conflicto, controlarin cualquier otro elememo o disposici6n en cualquier orden de compra oral o escrita u otro documento con relaci6n a Ios bienes, equipo y mercaderia descritos en el presente, incluyendo cualquier negociaci6n entre k partes o contenido en cualquier cat~logo del producto o publicaci6n descriptive referente a IOS bienes, equipo o mcrcaderia mencionadm en el presente. OTRO GARANTES. Ningtin distribuidor, vendedor. titular de franquicia, representante independicnte de verrtas ni otra personas, empress o corporaci6n tienen autorizaci6n de hater o asumir ningtin otro tipo de obligaci6n, garantla o responsabilidad en nombre de la Compaitla, ni de renunciar, modificar o cambiar estos t&r-nines y condiciones. INFORMATION DE INGENIE~A, SEGURIDAD DEL PRODUCTO, INSPECC1ON Y MANTENIMIENTO. Se requiere que el Distribuidor autorizado de Ios producms de la Compaftia entregue a cada comprador minorista original, el Manual del Operador con e] Manual de Piezas y csta Garantia. Se alienta a Iodos Ios usuarios que eshsdicn esta inforrnaci6n completa y de[alladamen[e en el momcnto de la compra y antes de comenzar o in!entar la operaci6n de cualquier ascensor u otro Producto de la Compahia. Notifique a la Comprulia si 10S documents anteriores no se reciben en buenzs condiciones. PARADAS. En el caso de paradas totales o parciales de nuestr= plantas o envies de IOS arliculos pedidos por nuestro cliente, debido a causas que van m&s alli de nuestro control, tales como (pero no Iimitadas a) huelgas, difercncias con 10S tiabajadores, incendios, inundaciones, aecidentes, escasez de mano de obra, materials, energiiz combustible, dificultades de transport, guerra (sea en este pais o en el exterior), reglamentos gubemasrren:ales, 6rdenes o proclamaciones, Ieyes, actos de enemigos ptiblicos, multitudes o tumultos, o causas de fuerza mayor, es posible que se suspcndan total o parcirdmente k entregas bajo el presente, micntras continfie dicha interrupci6n. LEYES APLICABLES. Las disposiciones de este instrument ser~rt interpre[adas de acuerdo con, y con Ios derechos y responsabilidades tamo del fabricate como de] cornprador, y controladm bajo km Ieyes del Estado de Texas, EE.UU., en vigencia a partir de la fecha de envio por el fabricate. TERMINOS VARIOS. Los precios y descuentos estti sujetos a cambiar sin previo aviso. Los pedidos se aceptan con el entendimiento aplicaran Ios precios y descuentos vigentes en el memento del envlo. que se
El material no podri scr devuelto ala ComparMa sin el permiso previo por escrito. Es posible que se cobre una tarifa por reaprovisionarniento y rccnv[o, a opci6n de la Compmlia, en Ios artlculos devueltos a la misma. Los articulos devuellos deberti tener flete previamente pagado, y todos IOSgastos de transpofle previamente pagados por la Compafiia serh cobrados al cliente.
SERVICIO
TfiCNICO
BAJO LA GARANTiA
El servicio tdcnico bajo la garantia seri realizado por Distribuidores Autorizados de Champion Elevators al serle entregado a dichos distribuidores la mhquina o Ias piezas defectuosas. El Comprador pagari el costo de cualquier prima por mano de obra adicional solicitado por dl y cualquier cargo por hater Ilamadas de scrvicio y por transpoflar la maquina ylo piczas de la misma hacia y desde e] Iugar en que se rcaliza e] trabajo bajo la garantia.
(Vea el anversoj
INTERPRETA
CION DE LA GARANTiA PARA EL DISTRIBUIDOR ASCENSORES CHAMPION
DE
Las garantias en 10S ascensores Champion y accesorios es[an cubiertos por la poli[ica de garantia de Champion Elevators, Inc. Lo que sigue es una explicucibn de la poli[ica de la compaiiia, pero no anula la politics de g[wantia de Champion Elevators. El servicio tkcnico bajo la garantia solamente sera realizado por un distribuidor autorizado por Champion Eleva[ors, en el memento de la entrega de la mkquina o durante la devolucibn de las piezas defectuosas por parte del comprador. El comprador pagard el costo de cualquier prima por mano de obra adicional solicitada por el comprador. Cualquier gasto de hater llamadas de servicio y/o transport del montacargas o piezas hacia y desde el lugar en el que se realizara el trabajo cubierto por la garantia deberb ser pagado por el comprador. Champion Elevators, Inc. no pagara ningtin tipo de prima por feriados u horas ex[ra. Ni tampoco Champion Elevators satisfard ningtin reclamo que no sea recibido por escrito por el Departamento de Repuestos y Servicio Tkcnico dentro de 10S 30 alias del fallo y dentro del periodo de garantia permitido por Champion Elevators, Inc. Al pedir un reclamo, deberd llenarse completamente el informe de reclamos bajo la garantia de Champion Elevators. Es muy importance incluir la informacibn siguiente: ntimero de serie de la unidad, fecha en que la unidad se CO1OC6 servicio. Sirvase incluir la razbn por e] fallo y 10S en ntimeros de repues[o de las piezas que han fallado en el formulario de reclamos. Cuando se reclama servicio bajo la garantia, la pieza defectuosa deberd guardarse para ser inspeccionada por un representante autorizado por Champion Elevators o deberh pedirse una Autorizacikn de Productos Devueltos de] Departamento de Repuestos y Servicio Tkcnico de Champion Elevators. La pieza no se deberd descartar sin una autorizacibn del Departamento de Repuestos y Servicio Ticnico de Champion Elevaiors. NO SE ACEPTARA NINGUNA PIEZA DE VUELTA SIN UNA AUTORLZACION DE PROD UCTOS DE VUELTOS . Todos 10S distribuidores suministrarbn a Champion Elevators, Inc. su costo actual por hors para 10S empleados que realizan las reparaciones bajo la garantia: herrero, mecbnico de ascensores, Iaborante, etc. Esto se debe hater anualmente y preferentemen(e durante c1 mes de enero de cada aiio, o cada vez que Champion Elevators se 10 pida. Si estos honoraries y el tiempo u(ilizado para las reparaciones se consideran justos y razonables, 10S distribuidores serkn reembokados al 10OOAde sus honoraries actuales por e] Departamento de Repues[os y Servicio Tkcnico de Champion Elevators. Se excluye la compensacibn por las llamadas de seguimiento de la ereccibn despu~s de la entrega y recepcibn y servicio normal, incluyendo 10Sajustes y reparaciones menores. (vea el dorso)
No se proporcionu ninguna garan(ia si el equipo no ha sido correctamcn~c almacenado, Champion Eleva[ors puedc requerir evidencia de] operadot- y man(cnido. ins[alado, mantenirniento rccomendodo, realizado de la mancra explicada y programada en 10S manuales de instalacibn y de operacibn. La documentacibn de las inspecciones y mantcnimiento deberh suminislrarse en el memento de presentar un reclamo bajo la garantia a Champion Elevators, Inc. En el caso de un problems garantizable inesperado o un fallo de un component importance que requiere vihticos y/o mano de obra extensos para hater 10S reemplazos o Ias reparacio}les necesarios, e] distribuidor deberb ponerse en contacto con Champion Elevators para recibir un ntimero de aprobacibn de reparaciones bajo la garanlia ~. R.A.). De este modo, podra acordarse un honorario razonabIe para Ios vikticos y la mano de obra para asistir al distribuidor con parte del costo de realizar el trabajo requerido. Lo anterior sirve como explicacibn de la politics de garantia de Champion Elevators y deberd usarse exclusivamente como informaci6n para el distribuidor y para explicar Ias intenciones de la compaiiia. Esta politics puede ser cambiada por la compaiiia sin previo aviso. Champion E~evators, Inc. 1 de enero de 1995
Plataforma de trabajo de gra
4.8
23.01.98
COLLAHUASI
Hoja en blanco
COLLAHUASI
23.01.98
Iifipoint -- --
SE ILUND HE BETECHNIK de uso Instrucciones La operation independiente de la plataforma de trabajo solo debe encargarse a personas, que - hayan sido instruidas en la operation de la plataforma de trabajo - tengan una autorizacion por escrito del explotador para la operation. En el caso de trabajar varias personas juntas en la plataforma de trabajo, tiene que determiner el explotador un supervisor responsible. Prescripciones 1. 2. 3. para la operation:
4. 5. 6.
7. 8.
9.
No debe sobrepasarse la capacidad de carga maxima permissible de la plataforma de trabajo (vea dates tecnicos). A la plataforma de trabajo solo debe entrarse y abandonarse a traves del acceso previsto para ello. La persona encargada con la operation de la plataforma de trabajo tiene que tener en cuenta, en no ponerse a si misma y a otras personas en peligro. En el area de carga de la plataforma de trabajo no debe encontrarse ningun obstaculo. Esta prohibida la ejecucion de trabajos, aue tengan menos de 3 m de Ias lineas aereas electrical. Antes de comenzar con Ios trabajos por debajo de Ias partes Ievantadas de la plataforma de trabajo debe comprobarse, que el tope se haya situado adecuadamente (carga util minima del equipo de elevation, vea dates tecnicos). Esta prohibido subir a Ias barandillas asi como colocar escaleras y andamios sobre la plataforma de trabajo. No esta permitido colocar cargas sobresalientes asi como realizar cualquier tipo de ampliacion de la plataforma de trabajo. Se ha de cuidar, que se almacenen Ias cargas sobre el piso y dentro del cesto. adicionales con el empleo de carretilla de horquilla
Tipo:
MB-K
~ Afro de construction:
INo F:
\ Peso propio: Carga titil: 200 kg 300 kg max. 2 personas
Prescripciones elevadora:
II
Peso permissible: 500 kg
10.
11. 12.
13.
Fije Ias horquillas de carga con tornillos con tuerca para evitar un posible resbalamiento. Los tornillos con tuerca tienen que situarse por detras de la horquilla de la carretilla elevadora a traves de la planchuela y asegurarse adicionalmente con pasadores elasticos. No deben transportarse personas en la plataforma de trabajo. Cuando la plataforma de trabajo se encuentre elevada no debe abandonar el conductor de la carretilla de horquilla elevadora el asiento del conductor. No esta permitido el servicio a estantes con la carretilla de horquilla elevadora.
Mantenimiento: A la plataforma de trabajo ha de somertersele antes de la puesta en marcha a una prueba visual para controlar su buen estado tecnico. Como piezas de recambio solo deben emplearse piezas originales del fabricate.
~
conforme
Declaration
de conformidad
CE
al enexo II A de Ias recomendaciones sobre maquinas CE 89/392/CEE con la ultima modification 93/68/CEE
El tipo de construction
Producto: Tipo:
de la maquina Plataforma de trabajo MB-K-IV

4462.4463 1997
N de fabrication:
Afro de construction: Ejecutante:
Liftpoint Gesellschaft D-1 9061 Schwerin
fur Seil- und Hebetechnik,
hubo de ser desarrollada, construida y fabricada recomendaciones de Ias CE 89/392/CEE. Se hubieron de usar las siguientes recomendaciones y especificaciones:
q
en correspondencia
con
[as
normas
armonizadas,
normas
nacionales,
Norma DIN EN 292, Seauridad de maauinas~ Realas de seauridad edition Normativa VBG 36 para medios de suspension para personas 10-1989 (ZH 1/461,
Existe la documentation tecnica completa. Estan a disposition Ias instrucciones de uso correspondientes. El 1 en la version original. en el idioms national del usuario.
Liftpoint GmbH
D-19061 Schwerin

ARTEC #31215 v1 84 - 078481

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

ARTEC #31215 v1 84 - 078481

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Manual de funcionamiento

Instalaciones de trituracin semi-mviles

Gua del usuario ........................ Banda I Descripcin de la instalacin de trituracin semimvil

Operacin de la instalacin de trituracin semimvil .................................. Banda I

Mantenimiento .......................... Banda I

Documentos de entrega ............ Banda II

4.1.4 4.1.5 4.1.6 4.1.7

Gra hidrulica de mantenimiento ......... Banda II

Transportadores de descarga................ Banda III

Equipo complementario y auxiliar ......... Banda III

Sistema Aglomerador para Control de Polvos

4.5.2 4.5.3 4.5.4 4.5.5

Aire acondicionado............................... Banda IV

Ascensor............................................... Banda IV Plataforma de trabajo de gra .............. Banda IV

Sistema Aglomerador para Control de Polvos

Sistema Aglomerador para Control de Polvos

Sistema Aglomerador para Control de Polvos

Sistema Aglomerador para Control de POIVOS

The Raring Corporation

Sistema Aglomerador para Control de POIVOS

!VIANTENCiON TRC No.: 296

The Raring Corporation

Fax (360) 892-1 624

Su Sistema ADS ha sido fabricado de Control de Polvos.

Sistema Aglomerador para Control de Polvos

Introduccin al sistema aglomerador para supresin de polvos

Sistema Aglomerador para Control de Polvos

$istema Aglomerador para Control de POIVOS

Al SisTEMA Aq[oMERAdoR PARA SupREsioN DE Polvos

de POIVOS,de Ios factores y condiciones

de gotas de agua de tamario similar al tamafio de Ias particular

LARGE DROPLET (GotaGrande)

Sistema Aglomerador para Control de Polvos

MANUA1 DE OpERAcioN Y MANTENCiON

deben ser diseriadas

Ias toberas seleccionadas.

Sistema Aglomerador para Control de POIVOS

MANUA1 DE OpERAcioN Y MANTENcioN

relaciones de presiones sire/agua, con el fin de evitar barros, formation de coleccion.

-. la,:oduccion Wgina 5 294csMAN

Sistema Aglomerador para Control de POIVOS

MANUA1 DE OpERAci6N Y MANTENcioN

Sistema Aglomerador para Control de Polvos

MANUA1 DE OpERACi6N Y MANTENCiON

$istema Aglomerador para Control de POIVOS MANUA1

Sistema Aglomerador para Control de Polvos MANUA1

$istema Aglomerador para Control de Polvos MANUA1

El Gabinete de reguladoras de Nema 3R o !2. calefaccionado

de la funcion del equipo y su modo normal de operation:

11. Caja de Distribuci6n Electrica: de potencia y Ios components

entre la fuente externa

.... f k!:: he Compor?entes

Sistema Aglomerador para Control de POIVOS MANUA1

WATER MANIFOLD lSTSET

ENT17ADA DE A!RE fL?-EXT DE .4GLfA 318. EXT

Sistema Aglomerador para Control de Polvos MANUA1

Cabezales de Aire & Agua: desconexion. Conectores respective. (3/4):

Item #9. Son utilizados para conectar el cable de la to bera a la montura

Valvula check en-lines,

para prevenir flujo reverso del

/ : ;Is De Con]ponentes Pdgina 73

Sistema Aglomerador para Control de Polvos MANUA1

Sistema Aglomerador para Control de Polvos MANUA1